View / The Volume D2uservol1
User Manual: View / the Volume DL205 User Manual
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 598
| Download | |
| Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
DL205 PLC User Manual
Volume 1 of 2
Manual Number: D2-USER-M
Notes
~ WARNING ~
Thank you for purchasing automation equipment from Automationdirect.com®, doing business as,
AutomationDirect. We want your new automation equipment to operate safely. Anyone who installs or
uses this equipment should read this publication (and any other relevant publications) before installing or
operating the equipment.
To minimize the risk of potential safety problems, you should follow all applicable local and national codes
that regulate the installation and operation of your equipment. These codes vary from area to area and
usually change with time. It is your responsibility to determine which codes should be followed, and to
verify that the equipment, installation, and operation is in compliance with the latest revision of these
codes.
At a minimum, you should follow all applicable sections of the National Fire Code, National Electrical
Code, and the codes of the National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA). There may be local
regulatory or government offices that can also help determine which codes and standards are necessary for
safe installation and operation.
Equipment damage or serious injury to personnel can result from the failure to follow all applicable codes
and standards. We do not guarantee the products described in this publication are suitable for your particular
application, nor do we assume any responsibility for your product design, installation, or operation.
Our products are not fault-tolerant and are not designed, manufactured or intended for use or resale as
on-line control equipment in hazardous environments requiring fail-safe performance, such as in the
operation of nuclear facilities, aircraft navigation or communication systems, air traffic control, direct life
support machines, or weapons systems, in which the failure of the product could lead directly to death,
personal injury, or severe physical or environmental damage (“High Risk Activities”). AutomationDirect
specifically disclaims any expressed or implied warranty of fitness for High Risk Activities.
For additional warranty and safety information, see the Terms and Conditions section of our catalog. If
you have any questions concerning the installation or operation of this equipment, or if you need
additional information, please call us at 1-770-844-4200.
This publication is based on information that was available at the time it was printed. At
AutomationDirect we constantly strive to improve our products and services, so we reserve the right to
make changes to the products and/or publications at any time without notice and without any obligation.
This publication may also discuss features that may not be available in certain revisions of the product.
Trademarks
This publication may contain references to products produced and/or offered by other companies. The
product and company names may be trademarked and are the sole property of their respective owners.
AutomationDirect disclaims any proprietary interest in the marks and names of others.
Copyright 2017, Automationdirect.com® Incorporated
All Rights Reserved
No part of this manual shall be copied, reproduced, or transmitted in any way without the prior, written
consent of Automationdirect.com® Incorporated. AutomationDirect retains the exclusive rights to all
information included in this document.
~ ADVERTENCIA ~
Gracias por comprar equipo de automatización de Automationdirect.com®. Deseamos que su nuevo equipo
de automatización opere de manera segura. Cualquier persona que instale o use este equipo debe leer esta
publicación (y cualquier otra publicación pertinente) antes de instalar u operar el equipo.
Para reducir al mínimo el riesgo debido a problemas de seguridad, debe seguir todos los códigos de seguridad
locales o nacionales aplicables que regulan la instalación y operación de su equipo. Estos códigos varian de
área en área y usualmente cambian con el tiempo. Es su responsabilidad determinar cuales códigos deben ser
seguidos y verificar que el equipo, instalación y operación estén en cumplimiento con la revisión mas reciente
de estos códigos.
Como mínimo, debe seguir las secciones aplicables del Código Nacional de Incendio, Código Nacional Eléctrico,
y los códigos de (NEMA) la Asociación Nacional de Fabricantes Eléctricos de USA. Puede haber oficinas de
normas locales o del gobierno que pueden ayudar a determinar cuales códigos y normas son necesarios para una
instalación y operación segura.
Si no se siguen todos los códigos y normas aplicables, puede resultar en daños al equipo o lesiones
serias a personas. No garantizamos los productos descritos en esta publicación para ser adecuados
para su aplicación en particular, ni asumimos ninguna responsabilidad por el diseño de su producto, la
instalación u operación.
Nuestros productos no son tolerantes a fallas y no han sido diseñados, fabricados o intencionados para uso
o reventa como equipo de control en línea en ambientes peligrosos que requieren una ejecución sin fallas,
tales como operación en instalaciones nucleares, sistemas de navegación aérea, o de comunicación, control de
tráfico aéreo, máquinas de soporte de vida o sistemas de armamentos en las cuales la falla del producto puede
resultar directamente en muerte, heridas personales, o daños físicos o ambientales severos (“Actividades de Alto
Riesgo”). Automationdirect.com específicamente rechaza cualquier garantía ya sea expresada o implicada
para actividades de alto riesgo.
Para información adicional acerca de garantía e información de seguridad, vea la sección de Términos y
Condiciones de nuestro catálogo. Si tiene alguna pregunta sobre instalación u operación de este equipo, o si
necesita información adicional, por favor llámenos al número 1-770-844-4200 en Estados Unidos.
Esta publicación está basada en la información disponible al momento de impresión. En Automationdirect.
com nos esforzamos constantemente para mejorar nuestros productos y servicios, así que nos reservamos el
derecho de hacer cambios al producto y/o a las publicaciones en cualquier momento sin notificación y sin
ninguna obligación. Esta publicación también puede discutir características que no estén disponibles en ciertas
revisiones del producto.
Marcas Registradas
Esta publicación puede contener referencias a productos producidos y/u ofrecidos por otras compañías. Los nombres de las compañías
y productos pueden tener marcas registradas y son propiedad única de sus respectivos dueños. Automationdirect.com, renuncia
cualquier interés propietario en las marcas y nombres de otros.
PROPIEDAD LITERARIA 2017, AUTOMATIONDIRECT.COM® INCORPORATED
Todos los derechos reservados
No se permite copiar, reproducir, o transmitir de ninguna forma ninguna parte de este manual sin previo consentimiento por escrito
de Automationdirect.com® Incorprated. Automationdirect.com retiene los derechos exclusivos a toda la información incluida en
este documento. Los usuarios de este equipo pueden copiar este documento solamente para instalar, configurar y mantener el equipo
correspondiente. También las instituciones de enseñanza pueden usar este manual para propósitos educativos.
~ AVERTISSEMENT ~
Nous vous remercions d’avoir acheté l’équipement d’automatisation de Automationdirect.com®, en faisant des
affaires comme, AutomationDirect. Nous tenons à ce que votre nouvel équipement d’automatisation fonctionne en
toute sécurité. Toute personne qui installe ou utilise cet équipement doit lire la présente publication (et toutes les
autres publications pertinentes) avant de l’installer ou de l’utiliser.
Afin de réduire au minimum le risque d’éventuels problèmes de sécurité, vous devez respecter tous les codes locaux
et nationaux applicables régissant l’installation et le fonctionnement de votre équipement. Ces codes diffèrent d’une
région à l’autre et, habituellement, évoluent au fil du temps. Il vous incombe de déterminer les codes à respecter et de
vous assurer que l’équipement, l’installation et le fonctionnement sont conformes aux exigences de la version la plus
récente de ces codes.
Vous devez, à tout le moins, respecter toutes les sections applicables du Code national de prévention des incendies,
du Code national de l’électricité et des codes de la National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA). Des
organismes de réglementation ou des services gouvernementaux locaux peuvent également vous aider à déterminer les
codes ainsi que les normes à respecter pour assurer une installation et un fonctionnement sûrs.
L’omission de respecter la totalité des codes et des normes applicables peut entraîner des dommages à l’équipement
ou causer de graves blessures au personnel. Nous ne garantissons pas que les produits décrits dans cette publication
conviennent à votre application particulière et nous n’assumons aucune responsabilité à l’égard de la conception, de
l’installation ou du fonctionnement de votre produit.
Nos produits ne sont pas insensibles aux défaillances et ne sont ni conçus ni fabriqués pour l’utilisation ou la revente en
tant qu’équipement de commande en ligne dans des environnements dangereux nécessitant une sécurité absolue, par
exemple, l’exploitation d’installations nucléaires, les systèmes de navigation aérienne ou de communication, le contrôle
de la circulation aérienne, les équipements de survie ou les systèmes d’armes, pour lesquels la défaillance du produit
peut provoquer la mort, des blessures corporelles ou de graves dommages matériels ou environnementaux («activités à
risque élevé»). La société AutomationDirect nie toute garantie expresse ou implicite d’aptitude à l’emploi en ce qui a
trait aux activités à risque élevé.
Pour des renseignements additionnels touchant la garantie et la sécurité, veuillez consulter la section Modalités et
conditions de notre documentation. Si vous avez des questions au sujet de l’installation ou du fonctionnement de
cet équipement, ou encore si vous avez besoin de renseignements supplémentaires, n’hésitez pas à nous téléphoner au
1-770-844-4200.
Cette publication s’appuie sur l’information qui était disponible au moment de l’impression. À la société
AutomationDirect, nous nous efforçons constamment d’améliorer nos produits et services. C’est pourquoi nous nous
réservons le droit d’apporter des modifications aux produits ou aux publications en tout temps, sans préavis ni quelque
obligation que ce soit. La présente publication peut aussi porter sur des caractéristiques susceptibles de ne pas être
offertes dans certaines versions révisées du produit.
Marques de commerce
La présente publication peut contenir des références à des produits fabriqués ou offerts par d’autres entreprises. Les
désignations des produits et des entreprises peuvent être des marques de commerce et appartiennent exclusivement à
leurs propriétaires respectifs. AutomationDirect nie tout intérêt dans les autres marques et désignations.
Copyright 2017, Automationdirect.com® Incorporated
Tous droits réservés
Nulle partie de ce manuel ne doit être copiée, reproduite ou transmise de quelque façon que ce soit sans le consentement
préalable écrit de la société Automationdirect.com® Incorporated. AutomationDirect conserve les droits exclusifs à
l’égard de tous les renseignements contenus dans le présent document.
Notes:
DL205 PLC USER MANUAL
Please include the Manual Number and the Manual Issue, both shown below,
when communicating with Technical Support regarding this publication.
Manual Number:
D2-USER-M
Issue:
4th Edition, Rev. D
Issue Date:
10/17
Publication History
Issue
Date
1st Edition
1/94
Original edition
Description of Changes
Rev. A
9/95
Minor corrections
2nd Edition
6/97
Added DL250, downsized manual
Rev. A
5/98
Minor corrections
Rev. B
7/99
Added torque specs for base and I/O
Rev. C
11/99
Minor corrections
Rev. D
3/00
Added new PID features, minor corrections
Rev. E
11/00
Added CE information, minor corrections
Rev. F
11/01
3rd Edition
6/02
Rev. A
8/03
4th Edition
11/08
Rev. A
4/10
Rev. B
2/13
Rev. C
4/17
Rev. D
10/17
Added surge protection info, corrected RLL and DRUM instructions, minor
corrections
Added DL250–1 and DL260 CPUs, local expansion I/O, ASCII and
MODBUS instructions, split manual into two volumes
Extensive corrections and additions
Changed publishing software resulting in change of appearance, addition of IBox
instructions, changes to PID chapter, added info for ERM and EBC modules, other
changes as necessary
Extensive corrections and additions
Corrected number of memory registers needed in the print message instruction.
Added new transient suppression for inductive loads to Chapter 2.
Added H2-CTRIO2 and H2-ERM100 references.
Minor corrections with general updates.
ECEMAIL Decimal Status Codes added, Chapter 5
Minor corrections with general updates
Notes
Volume One:
Table of Contents
Volume One: Table of Contents
i
Volume Two: Table of Contents
xi
Chapter 1: Getting Started
1–1
Introduction
The Purpose of this Manual
Where to Begin
Supplemental Manuals
Technical Support
1–2
1–2
1–2
1–2
1–2
Conventions Used
Key Topics for Each Chapter
1–3
1–3
DL205 System Components
CPUs
Bases
I/O Configuration
I/O Modules
DL205 System Diagrams
1–4
1–4
1–4
1–4
1–4
1–5
Programming Methods
DirectSOFT Programming for Windows.
Handheld Programmer
1–7
1–7
1–7
DirectLOGIC™ Part Numbering System
1–8
Quick Start for PLC Validation and Programming
1–10
Steps to Designing a Successful System
1–13
Table of Contents
Chapter 2: Installation, Wiring and Specifications
ii
2–1
Safety Guidelines
Plan for Safety
Three Levels of Protection
Emergency Stops
Emergency Power Disconnect
Orderly System Shutdown
Class 1, Division 2, Approval
2–2
2–2
2–3
2–3
2–4
2–4
2–4
Mounting Guidelines
Base Dimensions
Panel Mounting and Layout
Enclosures
Environmental Specifications
Power
Marine Use
Agency Approvals
24 VDC Power Bases
2–5
2–5
2–6
2–7
2–8
2–8
2–9
2–9
2–9
Installing DL205 Bases
Choosing the Base Type
Mounting the Base
Using Mounting Rails
2–10
2–10
2–10
2–11
Installing Components in the Base
2–12
Base Wiring Guidelines
Base Wiring
2–13
2–13
I/O Wiring Strategies
PLC Isolation Boundaries
Powering I/O Circuits with the Auxiliary Supply
Powering I/O Circuits Using Separate Supplies
Sinking / Sourcing Concepts
I/O “Common” Terminal Concepts
Connecting DC I/O to “Solid State” Field Devices
Solid State Input Sensors
Solid State Output Loads
Relay Output Guidelines
Relay Outputs – Transient Suppression for Inductive Loads in a Control System
2–14
2–14
2–15
2–16
2–17
2–18
2–19
2–19
2–19
2–21
2–21
I/O Modules Position, Wiring, and Specification
2–26
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Table of Contents
Slot Numbering
Module Placement Restrictions
Special Placement Considerations for Analog Modules
Discrete Input Module Status Indicators
Color Coding of I/O Modules
Wiring the Different Module Connectors
I/O Wiring Checklist
2–26
2–26
2–27
2–27
2–27
2–28
2–29
D2-08ND3, DC Input
2–30
D2-16ND3-2, DC Input
2–30
D2–32ND3, DC Input
2–31
D2–32ND3–2, DC Input
2–32
D2-08NA-1, AC Input
2–33
D2-08NA-2, AC Input
2–34
D2-16NA, AC Input
2–35
F2-08SIM, Input Simulator
2–35
D2-04TD1, DC Output
2–36
D2–08TD1, DC Output
2–37
D2–08TD2, DC Output
2–37
D2–16TD1–2, DC Output
2–38
D2–16TD2–2, DC Output
2–38
F2–16TD1(2)P, DC Output With Fault Protection
2–39
F2–16TD1P, DC Output With Fault Protection
2–40
F2–16TD2P, DC Output with Fault Protection
2–41
D2–32TD1, DC Output
2–42
D2–32TD2, DC Output
2–42
F2–08TA, AC Output
2–43
D2–08TA, AC Output
2–43
D2–12TA, AC Output
2–44
D2–04TRS, Relay Output
2–45
D2–08TR, Relay Output
2–46
F2–08TR, Relay Output
2–47
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
iii
Table of Contents
F2–08TRS, Relay Output
2–48
D2–12TR, Relay Output
2–49
D2–08CDR 4 pt., DC Input / 4pt., Relay Output
2–50
Glossary of Specification Terms
2–51
Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations
iv
3–1
CPU Overview
General CPU Features
DL230 CPU Features
DL240 CPU Features
DL250–1 CPU Features
DL260 CPU Features
3–2
3–2
3–2
3–2
3–3
3–3
CPU General Specifications
3–4
CPU Base Electrical Specifications
3–5
CPU Hardware Setup
Communication Port Pinout Diagrams
Port 1 Specifications
Port 2 Specifications
3–6
3–6
3–7
3–8
Selecting the Program Storage Media
Built-in EEPROM
EEPROM Sizes
EEPROM Operations
Installing the CPU
Connecting the Programming Devices
CPU Setup Information
Status Indicators
Mode Switch Functions
Changing Modes in the DL205 PLC
Mode of Operation at Power-up
3–9
3–9
3–9
3–9
3–10
3–10
3–11
3–12
3–12
3–13
3–13
Using Battery Backup
DL230 and DL240
DL250-1 and DL260
Battery Backup
Auxiliary Functions
Clearing an Existing Program
3–14
3–14
3–14
3–14
3–15
3–16
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Table of Contents
Initializing System Memory
Setting the Clock and Calendar
Setting the CPU Network Address
Setting Retentive Memory Ranges
Using a Password
Setting the Analog Potentiometer Ranges
3–16
3–16
3–17
3–17
3–18
3–19
CPU Operation
CPU Operating System
Program Mode Operation
Run Mode Operation
Read Inputs
Read Inputs from Specialty and Remote I/O
Service Peripherals and Force I/O
CPU Bus Communication
Update Clock, Special Relays and Special Registers
Solve Application Program
Solve PID Loop Equations
Write Outputs
Write Outputs to Specialty and Remote I/O
Diagnostics
3–21
3–21
3–22
3–22
3–23
3–23
3–23
3–24
3–24
3–25
3–25
3–25
3–26
3–26
I/O Response Time
Is Timing Important for Your Application?
Normal Minimum I/O Response
Normal Maximum I/O Response
Improving Response Time
3–27
3–27
3–27
3–27
3–28
CPU Scan Time Considerations
Initialization Process
Reading Inputs
Reading Inputs from Specialty I/O
Service Peripherals
CPU Bus Communication
Update Clock/Calendar, Special Relays, Special Registers
Writing Outputs
Writing Outputs to Specialty I/O
Diagnostics
Application Program Execution
3–29
3–30
3–30
3–31
3–31
3–32
3–32
3–32
3–33
3–33
3–34
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
v
Table of Contents
vi
PLC Numbering Systems
PLC Resources
V–Memory
Binary-Coded Decimal Numbers
Hexadecimal Numbers
3–35
3–35
3–36
3–36
3–36
Memory Map
Octal Numbering System
Discrete and Word Locations
V–Memory Locations for Discrete Memory Areas
Input Points (X Data Type)
Output Points (Y Data Type)
Control Relays (C Data Type)
Timers and Timer Status Bits (T Data type)
Timer Current Values (V Data Type)
Counters and Counter Status Bits (CT Data type)
Counter Current Values (V Data Type)
Word Memory (V Data Type)
Stages (S Data type)
Special Relays (SP Data Type)
Remote I/O Points (GX Data Type)
3–37
3–37
3–37
3–37
3–38
3–38
3–38
3–38
3–39
3–39
3–39
3–39
3–40
3–40
3–40
DL230 System V-memory
3–41
DL240 System V-memory
3–43
DL250–1 System V-memory (DL250 also)
3–46
DL260 System V-memory
3–49
DL205 Aliases
3–52
DL230 Memory Map
3–53
DL240 Memory Map
3–54
DL250–1 Memory Map (DL250 also)
3–55
DL260 Memory Map
3–56
X Input/Y Output Bit Map
3–57
Control Relay Bit Map
3–59
Stage Control/Status Bit Map
3–63
Timer and Counter Status Bit Maps
3–65
Remote I/O Bit Map
3–66
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Table of Contents
Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration
4–1
DL205 System Design Strategies
I/O System Configurations
Networking Configurations
4–2
4–2
4–2
Module Placement
Slot Numbering
Module Placement Restrictions
Automatic I/O Configuration
Manual I/O Configuration
Removing a Manual Configuration
Power–On I/O Configuration Check
I/O Points Required for Each Module
4–3
4–3
4–3
4–4
4–4
4–5
4–5
4–6
Calculating the Power Budget
Managing your Power Resource
CPU Power Specifications
Module Power Requirements
Power Budget Calculation Example
Power Budget Calculation Worksheet
4–7
4–7
4–7
4–7
4–9
4–10
Local Expansion I/O
D2–CM Local Expansion Module
D2–EM Local Expansion Module
D2–EXCBL–1 Local Expansion Cable
DL260 Local Expansion System
DL250–1 Local Expansion System
Expansion Base Output Hold Option
Enabling I/O Configuration Check using DirectSOFT
4–11
4–11
4–12
4–12
4–13
4–14
4–15
4–16
Expanding DL205 I/O
I/O Expansion Overview
Ethernet Remote Master, H2-ERM(100)(-F)
Ethernet Remote Master Hardware Configuration
Installing the ERM Module
Ethernet Base Controller, H2-EBC(100)(-F)
Install the EBC Module
Set the Module ID
Insert the EBC Module
Network Cabling
4–17
4–17
4–17
4–18
4–19
4–22
4–23
4–23
4–23
4–24
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
vii
Table of Contents
10BaseFL Network Cabling
Maximum Cable Length
Add a Serial Remote I/O Master/Slave Module
Configuring the CPU’s Remote I/O Channel
Configure Remote I/O Slaves
Configuring the Remote I/O Table
Remote I/O Setup Program
Remote I/O Test Program
4–25
4–25
4–26
4–27
4–29
4–29
4–30
4–31
Network Connections to Modbus and DirectNet
Configuring Port 2 For DirectNet
Configuring Port 2 For Modbus RTU
Modbus Port Configuration
DirectNET Port Configuration
4–32
4–32
4–32
4–33
4–34
Network Slave Operation
Modbus Function Codes Supported
Determining the Modbus Address
If Your Host Software Requires the Data Type and Address
If Your Modbus Host Software Requires an Address ONLY
Example 1: V2100 584/984 Mode
Example 2: Y20 584/984 Mode
Example 3: T10 Current Value 484 Mode
Example 4: C54 584/984 Mode
Determining the DirectNET Address
Network Master Operation
Communications from a Ladder Program
Multiple Read and Write Interlocks
4–35
4–35
4–35
4–35
4–38
4–40
4–40
4–40
4–40
4–40
4–41
4–44
4–44
Network Modbus RTU Master Operation (DL260 only)
Modbus Function Codes Supported
Modbus Port Configuration
RS–485 Network (Modbus only)
RS–232 Network
Modbus Read from Network (MRX)
MRX Slave Memory Address
MRX Master Memory Addresses
MRX Number of Elements
MRX Exception Response Buffer
Modbus Write to Network (MWX)
4–45
4–45
4–46
4–47
4–47
4–48
4–49
4–49
4–49
4–49
4–50
viii
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Table of Contents
MWX Slave Memory Address
MWX Master Memory Addresses
MWX Number of Elements
MWX Exception Response Buffer
MRX/MWX Example in DirectSOFT
Multiple Read and Write Interlocks
4–51
4–51
4–51
4–51
4–52
4–52
Non–Sequence Protocol (ASCII In/Out and PRINT)
Configure the DL260 Port 2 for Non-Sequence
RS–485 Network
RS–232 Network
Configure the DL250-1 Port 2 for Non-Sequence
RS–422 Network
RS–232 Network
Chapter 5: RLL and Intelligent Box (IBOX) Instructions
4–54
4–54
4–55
4–55
4–56
4–57
4–57
5–1
Introduction
5–2
Using Boolean Instructions
END Statement
Simple Rungs
Normally Closed Contact
Contacts in Series
Midline Outputs
Parallel Elements
Joining Series Branches in Parallel
Joining Parallel Branches in Series
Combination Networks
Comparative Boolean
Boolean Stack
Immediate Boolean
5–5
5–5
5–5
5–6
5–6
5–6
5–7
5–7
5–7
5–7
5–8
5–8
5–9
Boolean Instructions
5–10
Comparative Boolean
5–27
Immediate Instructions
5–33
Timer, Counter and Shift Register Instructions
Using Timers
Timer Example Using Discrete Status Bits
5–41
5–41
5–43
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
ix
Table of Contents
Timer Example Using Comparative Contacts
Accumulating Timer (TMRA)
Accumulating Timer Example using Discrete Status Bits
Accumulator Timer Example Using Comparative Contacts
Counter Example Using Discrete Status Bits
Counter Example Using Comparative Contacts
Stage Counter Example Using Discrete Status Bits
Stage Counter Example Using Comparative Contacts
Up/Down Counter Example Using Discrete Status Bits
Up/Down Counter Example Using Comparative Contacts
x
5–43
5–44
5–45
5–45
5–47
5–47
5–49
5–49
5–51
5–51
Accumulator/Stack Load and Output Data Instructions
5–53
Logical Instructions (Accumulator)
5–71
Math Instructions
5–88
Transcendental Functions (DL260 only)
5–121
Bit Operation Instructions
5–123
Number Conversion Instructions (Accumulator)
5–130
Table Instructions
5–144
Clock/Calendar Instructions
5–175
CPU Control Instructions
5–177
Program Control Instructions
5–179
Interrupt Instructions
5–187
Intelligent I/O Instructions
5–191
Network Instructions
5–193
Message Instructions
5–197
Modbus RTU Instructions (DL260)
Modbus Read from Network (MRX)
Modbus Write to Network (MWX)
5–205
5–205
5–208
ASCII Instructions (DL260)
5–211
Intelligent Box (IBox) Instructions (DL250-1/DL260)
5-230
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Volume Two:
Table of Contents
Chapter 6: Drum Instruction Programming (DL250-1/DL260 only)
6–1
Introduction
Purpose
Drum Terminology
Drum Chart Representation
Output Sequences
6–2
6–2
6–2
6–3
6–3
Step Transitions
Drum Instruction Types
Timer-Only Transitions
Timer and Event Transitions
Event-Only Transitions
Counter Assignments
Last Step Completion
6–4
6–4
6–4
6–5
6–6
6–6
6–7
Overview of Drum Operation
Drum Instruction Block Diagram
Powerup State of Drum Registers
6–8
6–8
6–9
Drum Control Techniques
Drum Control Inputs
Self-Resetting Drum
Initializing Drum Outputs
Using Complex Event Step Transitions
6–10
6–10
6–11
6–11
6–11
Drum Instruction
Timed Drum with Discrete Outputs (DRUM)
Event Drum (EDRUM)
Handheld Programmer Drum Mnemonics
Masked Event Drum with Discrete Outputs (MDRMD)
Masked Event Drum with Word Output (MDRMW)
6–12
6–12
6–14
6–16
6–19
6–21
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. C
xi
Table of Contents
Chapter 7: RLLPLUS Stage Programming
7–1
Introduction to Stage Programming
Overcoming “Stage Fright”
7–2
7–2
Learning to Draw State Transition Diagrams
Introduction to Process States
The Need for State Diagrams
A 2–State Process
RLL Equivalent
Stage Equivalent
Let’s Compare
Initial Stages
What Stage Bits Do
Stage Instruction Characteristics
7–3
7–3
7–3
7–3
7–4
7–4
7–5
7–5
7–6
7–6
Using the Stage Jump Instruction for State Transitions
Stage Jump, Set, and Reset Instructions
7–7
7–7
Stage Program Example: Toggle On/Off Lamp Controller
A 4–State Process
7–8
7–8
Four Steps to Writing a Stage Program
7–9
Stage Program Example: A Garage Door Opener
Garage Door Opener Example
Draw the Block Diagram
Draw the State Diagram
Add Safety Light Feature
Modify the Block Diagram and State Diagram
Using a Timer Inside a Stage
Add Emergency Stop Feature
Exclusive Transitions
7–10
7–10
7–10
7–11
7–12
7–12
7–13
7–14
7–14
Stage Program Design Considerations
Stage Program Organization
How Instructions Work Inside Stages
Using a Stage as a Supervisory Process
Stage Counter
Unconditional Outputs
Power Flow Transition Technique
7–15
7–15
7–16
7–17
7–17
7–18
7–18
Parallel Processing Concepts
7–19
xii
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Table of Contents
Parallel Processes
Converging Processes
Convergence Stages (CV)
Convergence Jump (CVJMP)
Convergence Stage Guidelines
7–19
7–19
7–19
7–20
7–20
Managing Large Programs
Stage Blocks (BLK, BEND)
Block Call (BCALL)
7–21
7–21
7–22
RLLPLUS (Stage) Instructions
Stage (SG)
Initial Stage (ISG)
Jump (JMP)
Not Jump (NJMP)
Converge Stage (CV) and Converge Jump (CVJMP)
Block Call (BCALL)
Block (BLK)
Block End (BEND)
Stage View in DirectSOFT
7–23
7–23
7–24
7–24
7–24
7–25
7–27
7–27
7–27
7–28
Questions and Answers about Stage Programming
7–29
Chapter 8: PID Loop Operation
8–1
DL250-1 and DL260 PID Loop Features
Main Features
8–2
8–2
Introduction to PID Control
Why use PID Control?
8–4
8–4
Introducing DL205 PID Control
Process Control Definitions
8–6
8–8
PID Loop Operation
Position Form of the PID Equation
Reset Windup Protection
Freeze Bias
Adjusting the Bias
Step Bias Proportional to Step Change in SP
Eliminating Proportional, Integral or Derivative Action
Velocity Form of the PID Equation
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
8–9
8–9
8–10
8–11
8–11
8–12
8–12
8–12
xiii
Table of Contents
Bumpless Transfer
Loop Alarms
Loop Operating Modes
Special Loop Calculations
8–13
8–13
8–14
8–14
Ten Steps to Successful Process Control
8–16
PID Loop Setup
Some Things to Do and Know Before Starting
PID Error Flags
Establishing the Loop Table Size and Location
Loop Table Word Definitions
PID Mode Setting 1 Bit Descriptions (Addr + 00)
PID Mode Setting 2 Bit Descriptions (Addr + 01)
Mode/Alarm Monitoring Word (Addr + 06)
Ramp/Soak Table Flags (Addr + 33)
Ramp/Soak Table Location (Addr + 34)
Ramp/Soak Table Programming Error Flags (Addr + 35)
PV Auto Transfer (Addr + 36) from I/O Module Base/Slot/Channel Option
PV Auto Transfer (Addr + 36) from V-memory Option
Control Output Auto Transfer (Addr + 37)
Configure the PID Loop
8–18
8–18
8–18
8–18
8–20
8–21
8–22
8–23
8–23
8–24
8–24
8–25
8–25
8–25
8–26
PID Loop Tuning
Open-Loop Test
Manual Tuning Procedure
Alternative Manual Tuning Procedures by Others
Tuning PID Controllers
Auto Tuning Procedure
Use DirectSOFT Data View with PID View
Open a New Data View Window
Open PID View
8–41
8–41
8–42
8–45
8–45
8–46
8–50
8–50
8–51
Using the Special PID Features
How to Change Loop Modes
Operator Panel Control of PID Modes
PLC Modes Effect on Loop Modes
Loop Mode Override
PV Analog Filter
Creating an Analog Filter in Ladder Logic
8–54
8–54
8–55
8–55
8–55
8–56
8–57
xiv
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Table of Contents
Use the DirectSOFT 5 Filter Intelligent Box (IBOX) Instruction
FilterB Example
8–58
8–58
Ramp/Soak Generator
Introduction
Ramp/Soak Table
Ramp/Soak Table Flags
Ramp/Soak Generator Enable
Ramp/Soak Controls
Ramp/Soak Profile Monitoring
Ramp/Soak Programming Errors
Testing Your Ramp/Soak Profile
8–59
8–59
8–60
8–62
8–62
8–62
8–63
8–63
8–63
DirectSOFT Ramp/Soak Example
Setup the Profile in PID Setup
Program the Ramp/Soak Control in Relay Ladder
Test the Profile
8–64
8–64
8–64
8–65
Cascade Control
Introduction
Cascaded Loops in the DL205 CPU
Tuning Cascaded Loops
8–66
8–66
8–67
8–68
Time-Proportioning Control
On/Off Control Program Example
8–69
8–70
Feedforward Control
Feedforward Example
8–71
8–72
PID Example Program
Program Setup for the PID Loop
8–73
8–73
Troubleshooting Tips
8–76
Glossary of PID Loop Terminology
8–78
Bibliography
8–80
Chapter 9: Maintenance and Troubleshooting
Hardware Maintenance
Standard Maintenance
Air Quality Maintenance
Low Battery Indicator
CPU Battery Replacement
9–1
9–2
9–2
9–2
9–2
9–2
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
xv
Table of Contents
Diagnostics
Diagnostics
Fatal Errors
Non-fatal Errors
Finding Diagnostic Information
V-memory Locations Corresponding to Error Codes
Special Relays (SP) Corresponding to Error Codes
I/O Module Codes
Error Message Tables
System Error Codes
Program Error Codes
9–3
9–3
9–3
9–3
9–4
9–4
9–5
9–6
9–7
9–8
9–9
CPU Error Indicators
9–10
PWR Indicator
Incorrect Base Power
Faulty CPU
Device or Module causing the Power Supply to Shutdown
Power Budget Exceeded
Run Indicator
CPU Indicator
BATT Indicator
9–11
9–11
9–11
9–12
9–12
9–13
9–13
9–13
Communications Problems
9–13
I/O Module Troubleshooting
Things to Check
I/O Diagnostics
Some Quick Steps
Testing Output Points
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes Used to Test an Output Point
9–14
9–14
9–14
9–15
9–16
9–16
Noise Troubleshooting
Electrical Noise Problems
Reducing Electrical Noise
9–17
9–17
9–17
Machine Startup and Program Troubleshooting
Syntax Check
Duplicate Reference Check
TEST-PGM and TEST-RUN Modes
Special Instructions
Run Time Edits
9–18
9–18
9–19
9–20
9–22
9–24
xvi
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Table of Contents
Forcing I/O Points
Regular Forcing with Direct Access
Bit Override Forcing
Bit Override Indicators
Reset the PLC to Factory Defaults
9–26
9–28
9–29
9–29
9-30
Appendix A: Auxiliary Functions
A–1
Introduction
What are Auxiliary Functions?
Accessing AUX Functions via DirectSOFT
Accessing AUX Functions via the Handheld Programmer
A–2
A–2
A–3
A–3
AUX 2* — RLL Operations
AUX 21-24
AUX 21 Check Program
AUX 22 Change Reference
AUX 23 Clear Ladder Range
AUX 24 Clear Ladders
A–4
A–4
A–4
A–4
A–4
A–4
AUX 3* — V-memory Operations
AUX 31
AUX 31 Clear V-Memory
AUX 4* — I/O Configuration
AUX 41-46
AUX 41 Show I/O Configuration
AUX 42 I/O Diagnostics
AUX 44 Power-up Configuration Check
AUX 45 Select Configuration
AUX 46 to I/O Configuration
A–5
A–5
A–5
A–5
A–5
A–5
A–5
A–5
A–6
A–6
AUX 5* — CPU Configuration
AUX 51-5C
AUX 51 Modify Program Name
AUX 52 Display/Change Calendar
AUX 53 Display Scan Time
AUX 54 Initialize Scratchpad
AUX 55 Set Watchdog Timer
AUX 56 CPU Network Address
AUX 57 Set Retentive Ranges
A–7
A–7
A–7
A–7
A–8
A–8
A–8
A–8
A–9
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
xvii
Table of Contents
AUX
AUX
AUX
AUX
58 Test Operations
59 Bit Override
5B Counter Interface Configuration
5C Display Error History
A–9
A–10
A–10
A–11
AUX 6* — Handheld Programmer Configuration
AUX 61, 62 and 65
AUX 61 Show Revision Numbers
AUX 62 Beeper On/Off
AUX 65 Run Self Diagnostics
A–12
A–12
A–12
A–12
A–12
AUX 7* - EEPROM Operations
AUX 71 - 76
Transferable Memory Areas
AUX 71 CPU to HPP EEPROM
AUX 72 HPP EEPROM to CPU
AUX 73 Compare HPP EEPROM to CPU
AUX 74 HPP EEPROM Blank Check
AUX 75 Erase HPP EEPROM
AUX 76 Show EEPROM Type
A–12
A–12
A–13
A–13
A–13
A–13
A–13
A–13
A–13
AUX 8* — Password Operations
AUX 81 - 83
AUX 81 Modify Password
AUX 82 Unlock CPU
AUX 83 Lock CPU
A–14
A–14
A–14
A–14
A–14
Appendix B: DL205 Error Codes
B–1
Appendix C: Instruction Execution Times
C–1
Introduction
V-Memory Data Registers
V-Memory Bit Registers
How to Read the Tables
C–2
C–2
C–2
C–2
Boolean Instructions
C–3
Comparative Boolean Instructions
C–4
Bit of Word Boolean Instructions
C–13
Immediate Instructions
C–14
xviii
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Table of Contents
Timer, Counter and Shift Register Instructions
C–15
Accumulator Data Instructions
C–16
Logical Instructions
C–18
Math Instructions
C–20
Differential Instructions
C–23
Bit Instructions
C–24
Number Conversion Instructions
C–25
Table Instructions
C–25
CPU Control Instructions
C–27
Program Control Instructions
C–27
Interrupt Instructions
C–28
Network Instructions
C–28
Intelligent I/O Instructions
C–28
Message Instructions
C–29
RLLPLUS Instructions
C–29
DRUM Instructions
C–29
Clock / Calender Instructions
C–30
Modbus Instructions
C–30
ASCII Instructions
C–30
Appendix D: Special Relays
D–1
DL230 CPU Special Relays
Startup and Real-Time Relays
CPU Status Relays
System Monitoring
Accumulator Status
Counter Interface Module Relays
Equal Relays for Multi-step Presets with Up/Down Counter #1 / DL230
(for use with a Counter Interface Module)
D–2
D–2
D–2
D–2
D–3
D–3
DL240/DL250-1/DL260 CPU Special Relays
Startup and Real-Time Relays
CPU Status Relays
System Monitoring Relays
D–5
D–5
D–5
D–6
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
D–4
xix
Table of Contents
Accumulator Status Relays
Counter Interface Module Relays
Communications Monitoring Relays
Equal Relays for Multi-step Presets with Up/Down Counter #1
(for use with a Counter Interface Module)
Equal Relays for Multi-step Presets with Up/Down Counter #2
(for use with a Counter Interface Module)
Appendix E: PLC Memory
DL205 PLC Memory
Non-volatile V-memory in the DL205
Appendix F: DL205 Product Weight Table
DL205 Product Weight Table
Appendix G: ASCII Table
ASCII Conversion Table
Appendix H: Numbering Systems
xx
D–6
D–7
D–8
D–9
D–10
E-1
E-2
E-3
F-1
F-2
G-1
G-2
H–1
Introduction
H–2
Binary Numbering System
H–2
Hexadecimal Numbering System
H–3
Octal Numbering System
H–4
Binary Coded Decimal (BCD) Numbering System
H–5
Real (Floating Point) Numbering System
H–5
BCD/Binary/Decimal/Hex/Octal -What is the Difference?
H–6
Data Type Mismatch
H–7
Signed vs. Unsigned Integers
H–8
AutomationDirect.com Products and Data Types
DirectLOGIC PLCs
C-more/C-more Micro-Graphic Panels
H–9
H–9
H–9
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Table of Contents
Appendix I: European Union Directives (CE)
European Union (EU) Directives
Member Countries
Applicable Directives
Compliance
General Safety
Special Installation Manual
Other Sources of Information
I-1
I-2
I-2
I-2
I-2
I-3
I-4
I-4
Basic EMC Installation Guidelines
Enclosures
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD)
AC Mains Filters
Suppression and Fusing
Internal Enclosure Grounding
Equi–potential Grounding
Communications and Shielded Cables
Analog and RS232 Cables
Shielded Cables within Enclosures
Analog Modules and RF Interference
Network Isolation
DC Powered Versions
Items Specific to the DL205
I-5
I-5
I-5
I-6
I-6
I-6
I-7
I-7
I-8
I-8
I-9
I-9
I-9
I-10
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
xxi
Table of Contents
Notes
xxii
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Getting Started
Chapter
1
In This Chapter...
Introduction................................................................................1–2
Conventions Used.......................................................................1–3
DL205 System Components........................................................1–4
Programming Methods...............................................................1–7
DirectLOGIC™ Part Numbering System......................................1–8
Quick Start for PLC Validation and Programming........................1–10
Steps to Designing a Successful System......................................1–13
Chapter 1: Getting Started
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Introduction
1-2
The Purpose of this Manual
Thank you for purchasing our DL205 family of products. This manual shows you how to
install, program, and maintain the equipment. It also helps you understand how to interface
them to other devices in a control system.
This manual contains important information for personnel who will install DL205 PLCs and
components and for the PLC programmer. If you understand PLC systems, our manuals will
provide all the information you need to start and keep your system up and running.
Where to Begin
If you already understand PLCs please read Chapter 2, “Installation, Wiring, and Specifications,”
and proceed on to other chapters as needed. Keep this manual handy for reference when you
have questions. If you are a new DL205 customer, we suggest you read this manual completely
to understand the wide variety of features in the DL205 family of products. We believe you will
be pleasantly surprised with how much you can accomplish with our products.
Supplemental Manuals
If you have purchased operator interfaces or DirectSOFT, you will need to supplement this
manual with the manuals that are written for those products.
Technical Support
We strive to make our manuals the best in the industry. We rely on your feedback to let us
know if we are reaching our goal. If you cannot find the solution to your particular application,
or, if for any reason you need technical assistance, please call us at:
770–844–4200
Our technical support group will work with you to answer your questions. They are available
Monday through Friday from 9:00 A.M. to 6:00 P.M. Eastern Time. We also encourage you
to visit our web site where you can find technical and non-technical information about our
products and our company.
http://www.automationdirect.com
If you have a comment, question or suggestion about any of our products, services, or manuals,
please fill out and return the ‘Suggestions’ card included with this manual.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 1: Getting Started
Conventions Used
When you see the “notepad” icon in the left–hand margin, the paragraph to its immediate
right will be a special note.
The word NOTE in boldface will mark the beginning of the text.
When you see the “exclamation mark” icon in the left–hand margin, the paragraph to its
immediate right will be a warning. This information could prevent injury, loss of property,
or even death (in extreme cases).
The word WARNING in boldface will mark the beginning of the text.
Key Topics for Each Chapter
The beginning of each chapter will list the key topics
that can be found in that chapter.
Getting Started
CHAPTER
1
In This Chapter...
General Information
.................................................................1-2
Specifications...........................................................................1-4
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
1-3
Chapter 1: Getting Started
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
DL205 System Components
1-4
The DL205 family is a versatile product line that provides a wide variety of features in an
extremely compact package. The CPUs are small, but offer many instructions normally only
found in larger, more expensive systems. The modular design also offers more flexibility in
the fast moving industry of control systems. The following is a summary of the major DL205
system components.
CPUs
This product line includes four feature-enhanced CPUs: the DL230, DL240, DL250–1 and
DL260. All CPUs include built-in communication ports. Each CPU offers a large amount
of program memory, a substantial instruction set and advanced diagnostics. The DL250–1
features drum timers, floating–point math, 4 built-in PID loops with automatic tuning and 2
bases of local expansion capability.
The DL260 features ASCII IN/OUT and extended MODBUS communications, table and
trigonometric instructions, 16 PID loops with autotuning and up to 4 bases of local expansion.
Details of these CPU features and more are covered in Chapter 3, CPU Specifications and
Operation.
Bases
Four base sizes are available: 3, 4, 6 and 9 slot. The DL205 PLCs use bases that can be expanded.
The part numbers for these bases end with –1. These bases have a connector for local expansion
located on the right end of the base. They can serve in local, local expansion and remote I/O
configurations. All bases include a built-in power supply. The bases with the –1 suffix can
replace existing bases without a suffix if expansion is required.
I/O Configuration
The DL230 and DL240 CPUs can support up to 256 local I/O points. The DL250–1 can
support up to 768 local I/O points with up to two expansion bases. The DL260 can support
up to 1280 local I/O points with up to four expansion bases. These points can be assigned
as input or output points. The DL240, DL250–1 and DL260 systems can also be expanded
by adding remote I/O points. The DL250–1 and DL260 provide a built–in master for
remote I/O networks. The I/O configurations are explained in Chapter 4, System Design and
Configuration. I/O Modules
I/O Modules
The DL205 has some of the most powerful modules in the industry. A complete range of
discrete modules which support 24 VDC, 110/220 VAC and up to 10A relay outputs
(subject to derating) are offered. The analog modules provide 12- and 16-bit resolution and
several selections of input and output signal ranges (including bipolar). Several specialty and
communications modules are also available.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 1: Getting Started
DL205 System Diagrams
Machine
Control
Packaging
Conveyors
Simple Motion Control
Elevators
Flexible solutions in one package
High-speed counting (up to 100 KHz)
Pulse train output (up to 50KHz
High–speed Edge timing
Handheld
Programmer
DL240
DL260 with H2–CTRIO(2) High Speed I/O Module
Stepper Motor
Pulse
Output
RS232C
(max.50ft/16.2m)
Programming or
Computer Interface
Local I/O Expansion
Programming or
Computer Interface
Simple programming
through the RLL Program
Drive
Amplifier
Networking
Operator Interface
DCM
Handheld Programmer
RS232C
(max.50ft/16.2m)
DL240
DL250–1 or DL260
RS232C
(max.50ft/16.2m)
(max.
6.5ft / 2m)
DL305
RS232/422
Convertor
RS232/422
Convertor
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Getting Started
The diagram below shows the major components and configurations of the DL205 system.
The next two pages show specific components for building your system.
1-5
1–6
Chapter 1: Getting Started
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
1-6
Direct LOGIC DL205 Family
DC INPUT
8pt 12–24 VDC
16pt 24 VDC
32pt 24 VDC
32pt 5–15 VDC
DC OUTPUT
4pt 12–24 VDC
8pt 12–24 VDC
16pt 12–24 VDC
2 Commons
32pt 12–24 VDC
4 Commons
AC INPUT
8pt 110 VAC
16pt 110 VAC
AC OUTPUT
8pt 18–220 VAC
12pt 18–110 VAC
2 commons
RELAY OUTPUT
4pt 5–30 VDC
5–240VAC
8pt 5–30 VDC
5 –240 VAC
12pt 5–30VDC
5–240VAC
(isolated pts.module
available)
CPUs
DL230 – 2.0K Built-in EEPROM Memory
DL240 – 2.5K Built-in EEPROM Memory
DL250–1 – 7.6K Built-in Flash Memory
DL260 – 15.8K Built-in Flash Memory
BASES
3 Slot Base, 110/220VAC, 24VDC
4 Slot Base, 110/220VAC, 24VDC
6 Slot Base, 110/220VAC, 24VDC, 125 VDC
9 Slot Base, 110/220VAC, 24VDC, 125 VDC
SPECIALTY MODULES
High Speed Counters
CPU Slot Controllers
Remote Masters
Remote Slaves
Communications
Temperature Input
Filler Module
PROGRAMMING
Handheld Programmer
with Built-in RLL PLUS
Direct SOFT Programming
for Windows
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
ANALOG
4CH INPUT
8CH INPUT
2CH OUTPUT
8CH OUTPUT
4 IN/2 OUT
8 IN/4 OUT
Chapter 1: Getting Started
Programming Methods
Two programming methods are available for the DL205 CPUs: Relay Ladder Logic (RLL)
and RLLPLUS (Stage Programming). Both the DirectSOFT5 programming package and the
handheld programmer support RLL and Stage.
DirectSOFT Programming for Windows
The DL205 can be programmed with one of the most advanced programming packages in the
industry ––DirectSOFT5. DirectSOFT5 is a Windows-based software package that supports
many Windows features you already know, such as cut and paste between applications, point
and click editing, viewing and editing multiple application programs at the same time, etc.
DirectSOFT5 universally supports the DirectLOGIC CPU families. This means you can use
the same DirectSOFT5 package to program DL05, DL06, DL105, DL205, DL305, DL405 or
any new CPUs we may add to our product line. A separate manual discusses the DirectSOFT5
programming software which is included with your software package.
Handheld Programmer
All DL205 CPUs have a built-in programming port for use with the handheld programmer
(D2–HPP). The handheld programmer can be used to create, modify and debug your
application program. A separate manual that discusses the DL205 Handheld Programmer is
available.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
1-7
Chapter 1: Getting Started
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
DirectLOGIC™ Part Numbering System
1-8
As you examine this manual, you will notice there are many different products available.
Sometimes it is difficult to remember the specifications for any given product. However, if
you take a few minutes to understand the numbering system, it may save you some time and
confusion. The charts below show how the part numbering systems work for each product
category. Part numbers for accessory items such as cables, batteries, memory cartridges, etc, are
typically an abbreviation of the description for the item.
CPUs
Specialty CPUs
DL05/06 Product family
DL105 Product family
DL205 Product family
DL305 Product family
DL405 Product family
D0/F0
D1/F1
D2/F2
D3/F3
D4/F4
Class of CPU / Abbreviation
230...,330...,430...
Denotes a differentiation between
similar modules
–1, –2, –3, –4
D4–
440DC
–1
D3–
05B
DC
D4–
16
N
D
2
D3–
16
N
D
2
Bases
DL205 Product family
DL305 Product family
DL405 Product family
D2/F2
D3/F3
D4/F4
Number of slots
Type of Base
##B
DC or empty
Discrete I/O
DL05/06 Product family
DL205 Product family
DL305 Product family
DL405 Product family
D0/F0
D2/F2
D3/F3
D4/F4
Number of points
04/08/12/16/32/64
Input
p
N
Output
p
T
Combination
AC
C
A
DC
D
Either
E
Relay
Current Sinking
g
R
1
Current Sourcing
g
2
Current Sinking/Sourcing
High
g Current
3
H
Isolation
S
Fast I/O
Denotes a differentiation between
similar modules
F
–1, –2, –3, –4
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
F
–1
Chapter 1: Getting Started
1–8
Analog I/O
F3–
DL05/06 Product family
D0/F0
DL205 Product
P d t ffamily
il
D2/F2
DL305 Product family
D3/F3
DL405 Product family
Number of channels
D4/F4
02/04/08/16
Input
p ((Analog
g to Digital)
g )
AD
Output
p ((Digital
g
to Analog)
g)
DA
Combination
Isolated
Denotes a differentiation between
Similar modules
AND
S
–1, –2, –3, –4
Communication and Networking
Special I/O and Devices
Programming
DL205 Product family
D2/F2
DL305 Product family
D3/F3
DL405 Product family
D4/F4
Name Abbreviation
see example
CoProcessors and ASCII BASIC Modules
DL205 Product family
y
D2/F2
DL305 Product family
y
D3/F3
DL405 Product family
D4/F4
CoProcessor
CP
ASCII BASIC
AB
64K memoryy
64
128K memory
y
128
512K memory
Radio modem
512
R
Telephone modem
T
04
AD
S
–1
Alternate example of Analog I/O
using abbreviations
F3–
08
THM
–n
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
note: –n indicates thermocouple type
such as: J, K, T, R, S or E
D4–
DCM
DCM (Data Communication Module)
D3–
HSC
D3–
HPP
HSC (High Speed Counter)
HPP (RLL PLUS Handheld Programmer)
F4–
CP
128
– R
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1-9
Chapter 1: Getting Started
Quick Start for PLC Validation and Programming
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
1-10
If you have experience using PLCs, or want to set up a quick example, this section is what
you want to use. This example is not intended to explain everything needed to start up your
system. It is only intended to provide a general picture of what is needed to get your system
powered up.
Step 1: Unpack the DL205 Equipment
Unpack the DL205 equipment and verify you have the parts necessary to build this
demonstration system. The minimum parts needed are as follows:
• Base
• CPU
• A discrete input module such as a D2–16ND3–2 DC or a F2–08SIM input simulator module
• A discrete output module such as a D2–16TD1–2 DC
• *Power cord
• *Hook up wire
• *One or more toggle switches (if not using the input simulator module)
• *A screwdriver, blade or Phillips type
*These items are not supplied with your PLC.
You will need at least one of the following programming options:
•D
irectSOFT5 Programming Software, DirectSOFT5 Manual, and a programming cable
(connects the CPU to a personal computer), or
• D2–HPP Handheld Programmer and the Handheld Programmer Manual.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 1: Getting Started
Step 2: Install the CPU and I/O Modules
Insert the CPU and I/O into the base. The CPU must be inserted into the first slot of the
base (next to the power supply).
• Each unit has a plastic retaining clip at the top and
bottom. Slide the retainer clips to the out position
before installing the module.
• With the unit square to the base, slide it in using
the upper and lower guides.
• Gently push the unit back until it is firmly seated in Retaining Clips
CPU must reside in first slot!
the backplane.
• Secure the unit to the base by pushing in the retainer clips.
Placement of discrete, analog and relay modules is not critical and may go in any slot in any
base; however, for this example, install the output module in the slot next to the CPU and the
input module in the next slot. Limiting factors for other types of modules are discussed in
Chapter 4, System Design and Configuration. You must also make sure you do not exceed the
power budget for each base in your system configuration. Power budgeting is also discussed
in Chapter 4.
Step 3: Remove Terminal Strip Access
Cover
Remove the terminal strip cover. It is a small
strip of clear plastic that is located on the base
Lift off
power supply.
Step 4: Add I/O Simulation
To finish this quick start exercise or study other examples in this manual, you will need to
install an input simulator module (or wire an input switch as shown below), and add an output
module. Using an input simulator is the quickest way to get physical inputs for checking out
the system or a new program. To monitor output status, any discrete output module will work.
Wire the switches or other field devices prior to applying power to the system to ensure a
point is not accidentally turned on during the wiring operation. This example uses DC input
Toggle switch
Output
Module
Input
Module
and output modules. Wire the input module, X0, to the toggle switch and 24VDC auxiliary
power supply on the CPU terminal strip as shown. Chapter 2, Installation, Wiring, and
Specifications, provides a list of I/O wiring guidelines.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
1-11
Chapter 1: Getting Started
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
1-12
Step 5: Connect the Power Wiring
Connect the wires as shown. Observe all precautions
stated earlier in this manual. For details on
wiring see Chapter 2 Installation, Wiring, and
Specifications. When the wiring is complete, replace
the CPU and module covers. Do not apply power at
this time.
Line
Neutral
Ground
Step 6: Connect the Programmer
Either connect the programming cable connected to
a computer loaded with DirectSOFT Programming
Software or a D2-HPP Handheld Programmer
(comes with programming cable) to the top port of
the CPU.
Step 7: Switch On the System Power
Apply power to the system and ensure the PWR indicator on the CPU is on. If not, remove
power from the system, check all wiring and refer to the troubleshooting section in Chapter 9
for assistance.
Step 8: Enter the Program
Slide the switch on the CPU to the STOP position (250–1/260 only) and then back to the
TERM position. This puts the CPU in the program mode and allows access to the CPU
program. Edit a DirectSOFT program using the relay ladder diagram below and load it into
the PLC. If using an HPP, the PGM indicator should be illuminated on the HPP. Enter the
following keystrokes on the HPP:
NOTE: It is not necessary for you to configure the I/O for this system since the DL205 CPUs automatically
examine any installed modules and establish the correct configuration.
X0
Handheld Program Keystrokes
$
STR
GX
OUT
B
C
1
2
Y0
ENT
ENT
END
After entering the example program put the CPU in the RUN mode with DirectSOFT or after
entering the program using the HPP, slide the switch from the TERM position to the RUN
position and back to TERM. The RUN indicator on the CPU will come on indicating the
CPU has entered the run mode. If not, repeat Step 8 ensuring the program is entered properly
or refer to the troubleshooting guide in Chapter 9.
During Run mode operation, the output status indicator “0” on the output module should
reflect the switch status. When the switch is on, the output should be on.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 1: Getting Started
Steps to Designing a Successful System
Step 1: Review the Installation Guidelines
Always make safety your first priority in any system
application. Chapter 2 provides several guidelines that will
help provide a safer, more reliable system. This chapter
also includes wiring guidelines for the various system
components.
Step 2: Understand the CPU Set-up Procedures
The CPU is the heart of your automation system and
is explained in Chapter 3. Make sure you take time to
understand the various features and set-up requirements.
Step 3: Understand the I/O System
Configurations
It is important to understand how your local
I/O system can be configured. It is also
important to understand how the system
Power Budget is calculated. This can affect
your I/O placement and/or configuration
options. See Chapter 4 for more information.
16pt
Input
8pt
Input
X0
X17
X20
X27
Step 4: Determine the I/O Module Specifications and
Wiring Characteristics
Many different I/O modules are available with the DL205 system.
Chapter 2 provides the specifications and wiring diagrams for the
discrete I/O modules.
NOTE: Analog and specialty modules have their own manuals and are not included in this manual.
Step 5: Understand the System Operation
Before you begin to enter a program, it is very helpful to
understand how the DL205 system processes information.
This involves not only program execution steps, but also
involves the various modes of operation and memory layout
characteristics. See Chapter 3 for more information.
Power up
Initialize hardware
Check I/O module
config. and verify
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
8pt
Output
Y0
Y7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
1-13
Chapter 1: Getting Started
Step 6: Review the Programming Concepts
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
1-14
The DL205 provides four main approaches to solving the application program, including the
PID loop task depicted in the next figure.
• RLL diagram style programming is the best tool for solving boolean logic and general CPU register/
accumulator manipulation. It includes dozens of instructions, which will augment drums, stages and
loops.
• The DL250-1 and DL260 have four timer/event drum types, each with up to 16 steps. They offer
both time and/or event-based step transitions. Drums are best for a repetitive process based on a
single series of steps.
• Stage programming, called RLLPLUS, is based on state-transition diagrams. Stages divide the ladder
program into sections which correspond to the states in a flow chart of your process.
• The DL260 PID loop operation uses set-up tables to configure 16 loops. The DL250-1 PID loop
operation uses setup to configure 4 loops. Features include: auto tuning, alarms, SP ramp/soak
generation and more.
Standard RLL Programming
(see Chapter 5)
X0
Timer/Event Drum Sequencer
(see Chapter 6)
LDD
V1076
CMPD
K309482
SP62
Y0
OUT
Stage Programming
(see Chapter 7)
Push–UP
PID Loop Operation
(see Chapter 8)
RAISE
SP
DOWN
LIGHT
UP
+
PID
Process
–
PV
LOWER
Push–
DOWN
Step 7: Choose the Instructions
Once you have installed the system and understand
the theory of operation, you can choose from one
of the most powerful instruction sets available.
Step 8: Understand the Maintenance and
Troubleshooting Procedures
Equipment failures can occur at any time.
Switches fail, batteries need to be replaced, etc. In
most cases, the majority of the troubleshooting
and maintenance time is spent trying to locate the
problem. The DL205 system has many built-in
features that help you quickly identify problems.
Refer to Chapter 9 for diagnostics.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
TMR
K30
T1
CNT CT3
K10
Installation, Wiring
and Specifications
Chapter
12
In This Chapter:
Safety Guidelines...............................................................................2–2
Mounting Guidelines.........................................................................2–5
Installing DL205 Bases......................................................................2–10
Installing Components in the Base.................................................. 2–12
Base Wiring Guidelines.....................................................................2–13
I/O Wiring Strategies........................................................................2–14
I/O Modules Position, Wiring, and Specification...............................2–26
Glossary of Specification Terms.........................................................2–51
Chapter 2: Installation, Wiring and Specifications
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Safety Guidelines
2-2
NOTE: Products with CE marks perform their required functions safely and adhere to relevant standards
as specified by CE directives, provided they are used according to their intended purpose and that the
instructions in this manual are adhered to. The protection provided by the equipment may be impaired if this
equipment is used in a manner not specified in this manual. A listing of our international affiliates is available
on our Web site: http://www.automationdirect.com
WARNING: Providing a safe operating environment for personnel and equipment is your responsibility
and should be your primary goal during system planning and installation. Automation systems can fail
and may result in situations that can cause serious injury to personnel and/or damage equipment. Do
not rely on the automation system alone to provide a safe operating environment. Sufficient emergency
circuits should be provided to stop either partially or totally the operation of the PLC or the controlled
machine or process. These circuits should be routed outside the PLC in the event of controller failure,
so that independent and rapid shutdown is available. Devices, such as “mushroom” switches or end of
travel limit switches, should operate motor starter, solenoids, or other devices without being processed
by the PLC. These emergency circuits should be designed using simple logic with a minimum number of
highly reliable electromechanical components. Every automation application is different, so there may
be special requirements for your particular application. Make sure to follow all national, state, and local
government requirements for the proper installation and use of your equipment.
Plan for Safety
The best way to provide a safe operating environment is to make personnel and equipment
safety part of the planning process. You should examine every aspect of the system to determine
which areas are critical to operator or machine safety.
If you are not familiar with PLC system installation practices, or your company does not
have established installation guidelines, you should obtain additional information from the
following sources.
• NEMA — The National Electrical Manufacturers Association, located in Washington, D.C.,
publishes many different documents that discuss standards for industrial control systems.
You can order these publications directly from NEMA. Some of these include:
ICS 1, General Standards for Industrial Control and Systems
ICS 3, Industrial Systems
ICS 6, Enclosures for Industrial Control Systems
• NEC — The National Electrical Code provides regulations concerning the installation and
use of various types of electrical equipment. Copies of the NEC Handbook can often be
obtained from your local electrical equipment distributor or your local library.
• Local and State Agencies — many local and state governments have additional requirements
above and beyond those described in the NEC Handbook. Check with your local Electrical
Inspector or Fire Marshall office for information.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 2: Installation, Wiring and Specifications
Three Levels of Protection
The publications mentioned provide many ideas and requirements for system safety. At a
minimum, you should follow these regulations. Also, you should use the following techniques,
which provide three levels of system control.
• Emergency stop switch for disconnecting system power
• Mechanical disconnect for output module power
• Orderly system shutdown sequence in the PLC control program
Emergency Stops
It is recommended that emergency stop circuits be incorporated into the system for every
machine controlled by a PLC. For maximum safety in a PLC system, these circuits must not
be wired into the controller, but should be hardwired external to the PLC. The emergency
stop switches should be easily accessed by the operator and are generally wired into a master
control relay (MCR) or a safety control relay (SCR) that will remove power from the PLC I/O
system in an emergency.
MCRs and SCRs provide a convenient means for removing power from the I/O system
during an emergency situation. By de-energizing an MCR (or SCR) coil, power to the input
(optional) and output devices is removed. This event occurs when any emergency stop switch
opens. However, the PLC continues to receive power and operate even though all its inputs
and outputs are disabled.
The MCR circuit could be extended by placing a PLC fault relay (closed during normal
PLC operation) in series with any other emergency stop conditions. This would cause
the MCR circuit to drop the PLC I/O power in case of a PLC failure (memory error, I/O
communications error, etc).
Use E-Stop and Master Relay
Guard Limit Switch
Emergency
Stop
E STOP
Power On
Guard
Limit
Master
Relay
Master Relay Contacts
Master
Relay
Contacts
Output
Module
To disconnect output
module power
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Saw
Arbor
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
2-3
Chapter 2: Installation, Wiring and Specifications
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
2-4
Emergency Power Disconnect
A properly rated emergency power disconnect should be used to power the PLC-controlled
system as a means of removing the power from the entire control system. It may be necessary
to install a capacitor across the disconnect to protect against a condition known as “outrush.”
This condition occurs when the output Triacs are turned off by powering off the disconnect,
thus causing the energy stored in the inductive loads to seek the shortest distance to ground,
which is often through the Triacs.
After an emergency shutdown or any other type of power interruption, there may be
requirements that must be met before the PLC control program can be restarted. For example,
there may be specific register values that must be established (or maintained from the state prior
to the shutdown) before operations can resume. In this case, you may want to use retentive
memory locations, or include constants in the control program to ensure a known starting
point.
Orderly System Shutdown
Ideally, the first level of fault detection is the PLC control
program, which can identify machine problems. Certain
shutdown sequences should be performed. The types of
problems are usually things such as jammed parts, etc., that
do not pose a risk of personal injury or equipment damage.
WARNING: The control program must not be the only form of
protection for any problems that may result in a risk of personal
injury or equipment damage.
Class 1, Division 2, Approval
Jam
Detect
Turn off
Saw
RST
RST
Retract
Arm
This equipment is suitable for use in Class 1, Zone 2,
Division 2, groups A, B, C and D or non-hazardous locations only.
WARNING: Explosion Hazard! Substitution of components may impair suitability for Class 1, Division 2.
Do not disconnect equipment unless power has been switched off or area is known to be nonhazardous.
WARNING: Explosion Hazard! Do not disconnect equipment unless power has been switched off or the
area is known to be non-hazardous.
WARNING: All models used with connector accessories must use R/C (ECBT2) mating plug for all
applicable models. All mating plugs shall have suitable ratings for device.
WARNING: This equipment is designed for use in Pollution Degree 2 environments (installed within an
enclosure rated at least IP54).
WARNING: Transient suppression must be provided to prevent the rated voltage from being exceeded
by 140%.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 2: Installation, Wiring and Specifications
Mounting Guidelines
Before installing the PLC system, you will need to know the dimensions of the components
considered. The diagrams on the following pages provide the component dimensions to use
in defining your enclosure specifications. Remember to leave room for potential expansion.
NOTE: If you are using other components in your system, refer to the appropriate manual to determine how
those units can affect mounting dimensions.
Base Dimensions
The following information shows the proper mounting dimensions. The height dimension is
the same for all bases. The depth varies depending on your choice of I/O module. The length
varies as the number of slots increase. Make sure you have followed the installation guidelines
for proper spacing.
Mounting depths with:
D2–DSCBL–1
on port 2
32pt. ZIPLink cable or
base exp. unit cable
12 or 16pt I/O
4 or 8pt. I/O
A
5.85”
(148mm)
C
4.45”
(113mm)
3.54”
(90mm)
2.99”
(76mm)
3.62”
(92mm)
B
2.95”
(75mm)
with D2–EM Expansion Unit
D
DIN Rail slot. Use rail conforming to
DIN EN 50022.
Base
3-slot
4-slot
6-slot
9-slot
C
(Component Width)
D
(Width with Exp.
Unit)
A
(Base Total Width)
B
(Mounting Hole)
Inches
Millimeters
Inches
Millimeters
Inches
Millimeters
Inches
Millimeters
6.77
7.99
10.43
14.09
172
203
265
358
6.41
7.63
10.07
13.74
163
194
256
349
5.8
7.04
9.48
13.14
148
179
241
334
7.24
8.46
10.90
14.56
184
215
277
370
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
2-5
Chapter 2: Installation, Wiring and Specifications
It is important to design your panel properly to help ensure the DL205 products operate
within their environmental and electrical limits. The system installation should comply with
all appropriate electrical codes and standards. It is important the system also conforms to the
operating standards for the application to ensure proper performance. The diagrams below
reference the items in the following list.
OK
Airflow
1. Mount the bases horizontally to provide proper ventilation.
2. I f you place more than one base in a cabinet, there should be a minimum of 7.2” (183mm)
between bases.
3. P
rovide a minimum clearance of 2” (50mm) between the base and all sides of the cabinet. There
should also be at least 1.2” (30mm) of clearance between the base and any wiring ducts.
4. T
here must be a minimum of 2” (50mm) clearance between the panel door and the nearest
DL205 component.
NOTE: The cabinet configuration below is not suitable for EU installations.
Refer to Appendix I, European Union Directives.
Temperature
Probe
2”
50mm
min.
2”
50mm
min.
DL205 CPU Base
2”
50mm
min.
Power
Source
2”
50mm
min.
Panel
BUS Bar
Panel Ground
Ground Braid
Terminal
Earth Ground Copper Lugs
Star Washers
Star Washers
2-6
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Panel or
Single Point
Ground
Note: there is a minimum of 2” (50mm)
clearance between the panel door
or any devices mounted in the panel door
and the nearest DL205 component
Safety Guidelines
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Panel Mounting and Layout
Chapter 2: Installation, Wiring and Specifications
5. T
he ground terminal on the DL205 base must be connected to a single point ground. Use copper
stranded wire to achieve a low impedance. Copper eye lugs should be crimped and soldered to the
ends of the stranded wire to ensure good surface contact. Remove anodized finishes and use copper
lugs and star washers at termination points. A general rule is to achieve a 0.1 ohm of DC resistance
between the DL205 base and the single point ground.
6. T
here must be a single point ground (i.e., copper bus bar) for all devices in the panel requiring an
earth ground return. The single point of ground must be connected to the panel ground termination.
The panel ground termination must be connected to earth ground. For this connection you should
use #12 AWG stranded copper wire at a minimum. Minimum wire sizes, color coding, and general
safety practices should comply with appropriate electrical codes and standards for your region. A
good common ground reference (Earth ground) is essential for proper operation of the DL205.
Methods of providing an adequate common ground reference include:
• Installing a ground rod as close to the panel as possible.
• Connection to incoming power system ground.
7. P
roperly evaluate any installations where the ambient temperature may approach the lower or upper
limits of the specifications. Place a temperature probe in the panel, close the door and operate the
system until the ambient temperature has stabilized. If the ambient temperature is not within the
operating specification for the DL205 system, measures such as installing a cooling/heating source
must be taken to get the ambient temperature within the DL205 operating specifications.
8. D
evice mounting bolts and ground braid termination bolts should be #10 copper bolts or equivalent.
Tapped holes instead of nut–bolt arrangements should be used whenever possible. To ensure good
contact on termination areas, impediments such as paint, coating or corrosion should be removed
in the area of contact.
9. T
he DL205 system is designed to be powered by 110/220 VAC, 24VDC, or 125VDC normally
available throughout an industrial environment. Electrical power in some areas where the PLCs
are installed is not always stable and storms can cause power surges. Due to this, powerline filters
are recommended for protecting the DL205 PLCs from power surges and EMI/RFI noise. The
Automation Powerline Filter, for use with 120VAC and 240VAC, 1–5 Amps, is an excellent choice
(can be located at www.automationdirect.com); however, you can use a filter of your choice. These
units install easily between the power source and the PLC.
Enclosures
Your selection of a proper enclosure is important to ensure safe and proper operation of your
DL205 system. Applications of DL205 systems vary and may require additional features. The
minimum considerations for enclosures include:
• Conformance to electrical standards
• Protection from the elements in an industrial environment
• Common ground reference
• Maintenance of specified ambient temperature
• Access to equipment
• Security or restricted access
• Sufficient space for proper installation and maintenance of equipment
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
2-7
Chapter 2: Installation, Wiring and Specifications
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Environmental Specifications
The following table lists the environmental specifications that generally apply to the DL205
system (CPU, Bases, I/O Modules). The ranges that vary for the Handheld Programmer are
noted at the bottom of this chart. I/O module operation may fluctuate depending on the
ambient temperature and your application. Refer to the appropriate I/O module specifications
for the temperature derating curves applying to specific modules.
Specification
Rating
Storage Temperature
Ambient Operating Temperature*
Ambient Humidity**
Vibration Resistance
Shock Resistance
Noise Immunity
Atmosphere
–4°F to 158°F (–20°C to 70°C)
32°F to 131°F (0°C to 55°C)
30% – 95% relative humidity (non–condensing)
MIL STD 810C, Method 514.2
MIL STD 810C, Method 516.2
NEMA (ICS3–304)
No corrosive gases
* Operating
temperature for the Handheld Programmer and the DV-1000 is 32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C) Storage temperature
for the Handheld Programmer and the DV-1000 is - 4° to 158° F (- 20° to 70°C).
** Equipment will operate below 30% humidity. However, static electricity problems occur much more frequently at lower
humidity levels. Make sure you take adequate precautions when you touch the equipment. Consider using ground
straps, anti-static floor coverings, etc., if you use the equipment in low humidity environments.
Power
The power source must be capable of supplying voltage and current complying with the base
power supply specifications.
Specification
Part Numbers
Input Voltage Range
Maximum Inrush Current
Maximum Power
Voltage Withstand (dielectric)
Insulation Resistance
Auxiliary 24 VDC Output
Fusing (internal to base power
supply)
2-8
AC Powered Bases
24VDC Powered Bases 125VDC Powered Bases
D2–03B–1,
D2–03BDC1–1,
D2–04B–1,
D2–04BDC1–1,
D2–06B–1
D2–06BDC1–1,
D2–09B–1
D2–09BDC1–1
100–240 VAC (+10%/ –15%) 10.2 – 28.8 VDC (24VDC) with
50/60Hz
less than 10% ripple
30A
10A
80VA
25W
D2–06BDC2–1,
D2–09BDC2–1
104–240 VDC
+10% –15%
20A
30W
1 minute @ 1500VAC between primary, secondary, and field ground
> 10 MΩ at 500VDC
20–28 VDC, less than 1V p-p
None
300mA max.
20–28 VDC, less than 1V p-p
300mA max.
Non–replaceable 2A @ 250V Non–replaceable 3.15A @
slow blow fuse
250V slow blow fuse
Non–replaceable 2A @ 250V
slow blow fuse
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 2: Installation, Wiring and Specifications
Marine Use
American Bureau of Shipping (ABS) certification requires flame-retarding insulation as per
4-8-3/5.3.6(a). ABS will accept Navy low smoke cables, cable qualified to NEC “Plenum
rated” (fire resistant level 4), or other similar flammability resistant rated cables. Use cable
specifications for your system that meet a recognized flame retardant standard (i.e., UL, IEEE,
etc), including evidence of cable test certification (i.e. tests certificate, UL file number, etc).
NOTE: Wiring needs to be “low smoke” per the above paragraph. Teflon coated wire is also recommended.
Agency Approvals
Some applications require agency approvals. Typical agency approvals that your application
may require are:
• UL (Underwriters Laboratories, LLC)
• CSA (Canadian Standards Association)
• FM (Factory Mutual Research Corporation)
• CUL (Underwriters Laboratories of Canada)
24 VDC Power Bases
Follow these additional installation guidelines when installing D2-03BDC1-1, D2-04BDC1-1,
D2-06BDC1-1 and D2-09BDC1-1 bases:
• Install these bases in compliance with the enclosure, mounting, spacing, and segregation
requirements of the ultimate application.
• These bases must be used within their marked ratings.
• These bases are intended to be installed within an enclosure rated at least IP54.
• Provisions should be made to prevent the rated voltage being exceeded by transient disturbances of
more than 40%.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
2-9
Chapter 2: Installation, Wiring and Specifications
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Installing DL205 Bases
2-10
Choosing the Base Type
The DL205 system offers four different sizes of bases and three different power supply options.
The following diagram shows an example of a 6-slot base.
Your choice of base depends on three things:
Power Wiring
Connections
CPU Slot
I/O Slots
• Number of I/O modules required
• Input power requirement (AC or DC power)
• Available power budget
Mounting the Base
All I/O configurations of the DL205 may use any of the base configurations. The bases are
secured to the equipment panel or mounting location using four M4 screws in the corner tabs
of the base. The full mounting dimensions are given in the previous section on Mounting
Guidelines.
Mounting Tabs
WARNING: To minimize the risk of electrical shock, personal injury, or equipment damage, always
disconnect the system power before installing or removing any system component.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 2: Installation, Wiring and Specifications
Using Mounting Rails
The DL205 bases can also be secured to the cabinet using mounting rails. You should use rails
that conform to DIN EN standard 50 022. Refer to our catalog for a complete line of DINrail, DINnectors and DIN-rail mounted apparatus. These rails are approximately 35mm high,
with a depth of 7.5 mm. If you mount the base on a rail, you should also consider using end
brackets on each end of the rail. The end brackets help keep the base from sliding horizontally
along the rail. This helps minimize the possibility of accidentally pulling the wiring loose.
If you examine the bottom of the base, you’ll notice small retaining clips. To secure the base
to a DIN-rail, place the base onto the rail and gently push up on the retaining clips. The clips
lock the base onto the rail.
To remove the base, pull down on the retaining clips, lift up on the base slightly, and pull it
away from the rail.
DIN Rail Dimensions
7.5mm
35 mm
Retaining Clips
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
2-11
Chapter 2: Installation, Wiring and Specifications
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Installing Components in the Base
2-12
To insert components into the base: first slide the module retaining clips to the out position
and align the PC board(s) of the module with the grooves on the top and bottom of the base.
Push the module straight into the base until it is firmly seated in the backplane connector.
Once the module is inserted into the base, push in the retaining clips to firmly secure the
module to the base.
CPU must be positioned in
the first slot of the base Align module PC board to
slots in base and slide in
Push the retaining
clips in to secure the module
to the DL205 base
WARNING: Minimize the risk of electrical shock, personal injury, or equipment damage.
disconnect the system power before installing or removing any system component.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Always
Chapter 2: Installation, Wiring and Specifications
Base Wiring Guidelines
Base Wiring
110/220 VAC Base T erminal Strip
The diagrams show the terminal connections
located on the power supply of the DL205
bases. The base terminals can accept up to 16
AWG. You may be able to use larger wiring
depending on the type of wire used, but 16 AWG
is the recommended size. Do not overtighten the
connector screws; the recommended torque value
is 7.81 lb·in (0.882 N·m).
NOTE: You can connect either a 115VAC or 220VAC
supply to the AC terminals. Special wiring or jumpers
are not required as with some of the other DirectLOGIC
products.
85 – 264 VAC
G
LG
+
24 VDC OUT, 0.3A
WARNING: Once the power wiring is connected, install the plastic protective cover. When the cover is
removed there is a risk of electrical shock if you accidentally touch the wiring or wiring terminals.
12/24 VDC Base Terminal Strip
+
12 – 24 VDC
–
G
125 VDC Base Terminal Strip
+
115 – 264 VDC
–
G
+
24 VDC OUT, 0.3A
–
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
2-13
Chapter 2: Installation, Wiring and Specifications
I/O Wiring Strategies
2-14
The DL205 PLC system is very flexible and will work in many different wiring configurations.
By studying this section before actual installation, you can probably find the best wiring
strategy for your application. This will help to lower system cost, wiring errors, and avoid
safety problems.
PLC Isolation Boundaries
PLC circuitry is divided into three main regions separated by isolation boundaries, shown in
the drawing below. Electrical isolation provides safety, so that a fault in one area does not
damage another. A powerline filter will provide isolation between the power source and the
power supply. A transformer in the power supply provides magnetic isolation between the
primary and secondary sides. Opto-couplers provide optical isolation in Input and Output
circuits. This isolates logic circuitry from the field side, where factory machinery connects.
Note the discrete inputs are isolated from the discrete outputs, because each is isolated from the
logic side. Isolation boundaries protect the operator interface (and the operator) from power
input faults or field wiring faults. When wiring a PLC, it is extremely important to avoid
making external connections that connect logic side circuits to any other.
Secondary, or
Logic side
Primary Side
PLC
Power
Input
Main
Power
Supply
Filter
Isolation
Boundary
CPU
Field Side
(backplane)
Input
Module
Inputs
(backplane)
Output
Module
Outputs
Programming Device,
Operator Interface, or Network
Isolation
Boundary
In addition to the basic circuits covered above, AC-powered and 125VDC bases include an
auxiliary +24VDC power supply with its own isolation boundary. Since the supply output is
isolated from the other three circuits, it can power input and/or output circuits!
Primary Side
Power
Input
Filter
+24VDC Out
Main
Power
Supply
Auxiliary
+24VDC
Supply
DL205
PLC
Secondary, or
Logic side
Internal
CPU
Comm.
To Programming
Device, Operator
Interface, Network
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Backplane
Input Module
Inputs Commons
Field Side
Output Module
Outputs Commons
Supply for
Output Circuit
Safety Guidelines
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Chapter 2: Installation, Wiring and Specifications
Powering I/O Circuits with the Auxiliary Supply
In some cases, using the built-in auxiliary +24VDC supply can result in a cost savings for your
control system. It can power combined loads up to 300mA. Be careful not to exceed the
current rating of the supply. If you are the system designer for your application, you may be
able to select and design in field devices which can use the +24VDC auxiliary supply.
All AC powered and 125VDC DL205 bases feature the internal auxiliary supply. If input
devices AND output loads need +24VDC power, the auxiliary supply may be able to power
both circuits as shown in the following diagram.
AC Power or 125VDC Bases
Power Input
Auxiliary
+24VDC
Supply
+
DL205 PLC
Input Module
Output Module
Inputs
Outputs Com.
Com.
–
Loads
The 12/24 VDC-powered DL205 bases are designed for application environments in which
low-voltage DC power is more readily available than AC. These include a wide range of
battery–powered applications, such as remotely-located control, in vehicles, portable machines,
etc. For this application type, all input devices and output loads typically use the same DC
power source. Typical wiring for DC-powered applications is shown in the following diagram.
+
+
–
–
DC Power
DL205 PLC
Power Input
Input Module
Inputs
Com.
Output Module
Outputs Com.
Loads
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
2-15
Chapter 2: Installation, Wiring and Specifications
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
2-16
Powering I/O Circuits Using Separate Supplies
In most applications it will be necessary to power the input devices from one power source, and
to power output loads from another source. Loads often require high-energy AC power, while
input sensors use low-energy DC. If a machine operator is likely to come in close contact with
input wiring, then safety reasons also require isolation from high-energy output circuits. It is
most convenient if the loads can use the same power source as the PLC, and the input sensors
can use the auxiliary supply, as shown to the left in the figure below.
If the loads cannot be powered from the PLC supply, then a separate supply must be used as
shown to the right in the figure below.
AC Power
Power Input
Auxiliary
+24VDC
Supply
+
AC Power
Power Input
DL205 PLC
Input Module
Output Module
Inputs
Outputs Com.
Com.
–
Auxiliary
+24VDC
Supply
+
DL205 PLC
Input Module
Output Module
Inputs
Outputs Com.
Com.
–
Loads
Loads
Load
Supply
Some applications will use the PLC external power source to also power the input circuit. This
typically occurs on DC-powered PLCs, as shown in the drawing below to the left. The inputs
share the PLC power source supply, while the outputs have their own separate supply. A worstcase scenario, from a cost and complexity viewpoint, is an application which requires separate
power sources for the PLC, input devices, and output loads. The example wiring diagram
below on the right shows how this can work, but also the auxiliary supply output is an unused
resource. You will want to avoid this situation if possible.
+
+
–
–
DC Power
AC Power
DL205 PLC
Power Input
Input Module
Inputs
Com.
Power Input
Output Module
Auxiliary
+24VDC
Supply
Outputs Com.
+
Loads
Load
Supply
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
DL205 PLC
Input Module
Output Module
Inputs
Com.
Outputs Com.
Input
Supply
Loads
–
Load
Supply
Chapter 2: Installation, Wiring and Specifications
Sinking / Sourcing Concepts
Before going further in the study of wiring strategies, you must have a solid understanding of
“sinking” and “sourcing” concepts. Use of these terms occurs frequently in input or output
circuit discussions. It is the goal of this section to make these concepts easy to understand,
further ensuring your success in installation. First the following short definitions are provided,
followed by practical applications.
Sinking = provides a path to supply ground (–)
Sourcing = provides a path to supply source (+)
First you will notice these are only associated with DC circuits and not AC, because of the
reference to (+) and (–) polarities. Therefore, sinking and sourcing terminology only applies to
DC input and output circuits. Input and output points that are sinking only or sourcing only
can conduct current in only one direction. This means it is possible to connect the external
supply and field device to the I/O point with current trying to flow in the wrong direction, and
the circuit will not operate. However, you can successfully connect the supply and field device
every time by understanding “sourcing” and “sinking”.
For example, the figure to the right depicts a “sinking”
PLC
input. To properly connect the external supply, you
Input
will have to connect it so the input provides a path to
(sinking)
ground (–). Start at the PLC input terminal, follow +
Input
through the input sensing circuit, exit at the common
Sensing
terminal, and connect the supply (–) to the common –
Common
terminal. By adding the switch, between the supply (+)
and the input, the circuit has been completed . Current
flows in the direction of the arrow when the switch is
closed.
Apply the circuit principle above to the four possible
combinations of input/output sinking/sourcing types as shown below. The I/O module
specifications at the end of this chapter list the input or output type.
Sinking Input
Sinking Output
Input
+
–
Common
PLC
Input
Sensing
Sourcing Input
Common
+
–
Input
PLC
Output
Switch
Output
Load
+
–
Common
Sourcing Output
PLC
Input
Sensing
PLC
Common
+
Output
Switch
Output
Load
–
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
2-17
Chapter 2: Installation, Wiring and Specifications
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
I/O “Common” Terminal Concepts
In order for a PLC I/O circuit to operate,
current must enter at one terminal and exit at
another. Therefore, at least two terminals are
associated with every I/O point. In the figure
to the right, the Input or Output terminal is
the main path for the current. One additional
terminal must provide the return path to the
power supply.
PLC
Main Path
(I/O Point)
I/O
Circuit
+
–
Return Path
PLC
If there was unlimited space and budget for
I/O terminals, every I/O point could have two
dedicated terminals as the figure above shows.
However, providing this level of flexibility
is not practical or even necessary for most
applications. So, most Input or Output points
on PLCs are in groups which share the return
path (called commons). The figure to the right
shows a group (or bank) of four input points
which share a common return path. In this
way, the four inputs require only five terminals
instead of eight.
Input 1
Input
Sensing
Input 2
Input 3
Input 4
+
–
Common
NOTE: In the circuit above, the current in the common path is 4 times any channel’s input current when all
inputs are energized. This is especially important in output circuits, where heavier gauge wire is sometimes
necessary on commons.
Most DL205 input and output modules group their I/O
points into banks that share a common return path.
The best indication of I/O common grouping is on the
wiring label, such as the one shown to the right. There
are two circuit banks with eight input points in each. The
common terminal for each is labeled “CA” and “CB”,
respectively.
In the wiring label example, the positive terminal of a DC
supply connects to the common terminals. Some symbols
you will see on the wiring labels, and their meanings are:
AC supply
DC supply
–
Input Switch
AC or DC supply
+
Output Load
L
2-18
Field
Device
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
IN
24
VDC
A 0
4
1
5
2
6
7
B 3
D2–16ND3–2
20-28VDC
8mA
CLASS 2
0
1
2
3
NC
0
1
2
3
CA
4
5
6
7
CB
4
5
6
7
D2-16ND3-2
Chapter 2: Installation, Wiring and Specifications
Connecting DC I/O to “Solid State” Field Devices
In the previous section on Sourcing and Sinking concepts, the DC I/O circuits were explained
to sometimes only allow current to flow one way. This is also true for many of the field devices
which have solid-state (transistor) interfaces. In other words, field devices can also be sourcing
or sinking. When connecting two devices in a series DC circuit, one must be wired as sourcing and
the other as sinking.
Solid State Input Sensors
Several DL205 DC input modules are flexible because they detect current flow in either
direction, so they can be wired as either sourcing or sinking. In the following circuit, a field
device has an open-collector NPN transistor output. It sinks current from the PLC input
point, which sources current. The power supply can be the +24 auxiliary supply or another
supply (+12VDC or +24VDC), as long as the input specifications are met.
Field Device
PLC DC Input
Input
(sourcing)
Output
(sinking)
Supply
Ground
–
+
Common
In the next circuit, a field device has an open-collector PNP transistor output. It sources
current to the PLC input point, which sinks the current back to ground. Since the field device
is sourcing current, no additional power supply is required.
Field Device
+V
PLC DC Input
Input
Output (sourcing)
Ground
(sinking)
Common
Solid State Output Loads
Sometimes an application requires connecting a PLC output point to a solid state input on a
device. This type of connection is usually made to carry a low-level control signal, not to send
DC power to an actuator.
Several of the DL205 DC output modules are the sinking type. This means that each DC
output provides a path to ground when it is energized. In the following circuit, the PLC output
point sinks current to the output common when energized. It is connected to a sourcing input
of a field device input.
PLC DC Sinking Output
Power
+DC pwr
Field Device
+V
Output
(sinking)
+
Common
–
Input
(sourcing)
10–30 VDC
Ground
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
2-19
Chapter 2: Installation, Wiring and Specifications
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
2-20
In the next example a PLC sinking DC output point is connected to the sinking input of a field
device. This is a little tricky, because both the PLC output and field device input are sinking
type. Since the circuit must have one sourcing and one sinking device, a sourcing capability
needs to be added to the PLC output by using a pull-up resistor. In the circuit below, a Rpull-up
is connected from the output to the DC output circuit power input.
PLC DC Output
Power
+DC pwr
Field Device
R pull-up
(sourcing)
(sinking)
Output
Supply
Common
+
Input
(sinking)
–
Ground
R input
NOTE 1: DO NOT attempt to drive a heavy load (>25mA) with this pull-up method
NOTE 2: Using the pull-up resistor to implement a sourcing output has the effect of inverting the output
point logic. In other words, the field device input is energized when the PLC output is OFF, from a ladder
logic point of view. Your ladder program must comprehend this and generate an inverted output. Or, you
may choose to cancel the effect of the inversion elsewhere, such as in the field device.
It is important to choose the correct value of Rpull-up. In order to do so, you need to know the
nominal input current to the field device (Iinput) when the input is energized. If this value is
not known, it can be calculated as shown (a typical value is 15mA). Then use Iinput and the
voltage of the external supply to compute Rpull-up. Then calculate the power Ppull-up (in watts),
in order to size Rpull-up properly.
I
input
=
R pull-up =
V
input (turn–on)
R input
V supply – 0.7
I
– R input
P
pull-up
=
input
V supply2
R pullup
Of course, the easiest way to drive a sinking input field device as shown below is to use a
DC sourcing output module. The Darlington NPN stage will have about 1.5 V ON-state
saturation, but this is not a problem with low-current solid-state loads.
PLC DC Sourcing Output
+DC pwr
Common
Field Device
Output (sourcing)
Supply
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
+
Input
(sinking)
–
Ground
R input
Chapter 2: Installation, Wiring and Specifications
Relay Output Guidelines
Several output modules in the DL205 I/O family feature relay outputs: D2–04TRS, D2–08TR,
D2–12TR, D2–08CDR, F2–08TR and F2–08TRS. Relays are best for the following
applications:
• Loads that require higher currents than the solid-state outputs can deliver
• Cost-sensitive applications
• Some output channels need isolation from other outputs (such as when some loads require different
voltages than other loads)
Some applications in which NOT to use relays:
• Loads that require currents under 10 mA
• Loads which must be switched at high speed or heavy duty cycle
Relay with Form A contacts
Relay outputs in the DL205 output modules are available in two
contact arrangements, shown to the right. The Form A type, or
SPST (single pole, single throw) type is normally open and is the
simplest to use. The Form C type, or SPDT (single pole, double
throw) type has a center contact which moves and a stationary
contact on either side. This provides a normally closed contact
and a normally open contact.
Some relay output module’s relays share common terminals,
which connect to the wiper contact in each relay of the bank.
Other relay modules have relays which are completely isolated
from each other. In all cases, the module drives the relay coil
when the corresponding output point is on.
Relay with Form C contacts
Relay Outputs – Transient Suppression for Inductive Loads in a Control System
The following pages are intended to give a quick overview of the negative effects of transient
voltages on a control system and provide some simple advice on how to effectively minimize
them. The need for transient suppression is often not apparent to the newcomers in the
automation world. Many mysterious errors that can afflict an installation can be traced back
to a lack of transient suppression.
What is a Transient Voltage and Why is it Bad?
Inductive loads (devices with a coil) generate transient voltages as they transition from being
energized to being de-energized. If not suppressed, the transient can be many times greater
than the voltage applied to the coil. These transient voltages can damage PLC outputs or other
electronic devices connected to the circuit, and cause unreliable operation of other electronics
in the general area. Transients must be managed with suppressors for long component life and
reliable operation of the control system.
This example shows a simple circuit with a small 24V/125mA/3W relay. As you can see, when
the switch is opened, thereby de-energizing the coil, the transient voltage generated across the
switch contacts peaks at 140V.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
2-21
Chapter 2: Installation, Wiring and Specifications
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
2-22
Example: Circuit with no Suppression
Oscilloscope
Volts
160
140
120
24 VDC
100
+
-
80
Relay Coil
(24V/125mA/3W,
AutomationDirect part no.
750-2C-24D)
60
40
20
0
-20
In the same circuit, replacing the relay with a larger 24V/290mA/7W relay will generate a
transient voltage exceeding 800V (not shown). Transient voltages like this can cause many
problems, including:
• Relay contacts driving the coil may experience arcing, which can pit the contacts and reduce the
relay’s lifespan.
• Solid state (transistor) outputs driving the coil can be damaged if the transient voltage exceeds the
transistor’s ratings. In extreme cases, complete failure of the output can occur the very first time a
coil is de-energized.
• Input circuits, which might be connected to monitor the coil or the output driver, can also be
damaged by the transient voltage.
A very destructive side-effect of the arcing across relay contacts is the electromagnetic
interference (EMI) it can cause. This occurs because the arcing causes a current surge, which
releases RF energy. The entire length of wire between the relay contacts, the coil, and the
power source carries the current surge and becomes an antenna that radiates the RF energy. It
will readily couple into parallel wiring and may disrupt the PLC and other electronics in the
area. This EMI can make an otherwise stable control system behave unpredictably at times.
PLC’s Integrated Transient Suppressors
Although the PLC’s outputs typically have integrated suppressors to protect against transients,
they are not capable of handling them all. It is usually necessary to have some additional
transient suppression for an inductive load.
The next example uses the same 24V/125mA/3W relay used earlier. This example measures
the PNP transistor output of a D0-06DD2 PLC, which incorporates an integrated Zener diode
for transient suppression. Instead of the 140V peak in the first example, the transient voltage
here is limited to about 40V by the Zener diode. While the PLC will probably tolerate repeated
transients in this range for some time, the 40V is still beyond the module’s peak output voltage
rating of 30V.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 2: Installation, Wiring and Specifications
Example: Small Inductive Load with Only Integrated Suppression
2VFLOORVFRSH
9ROWV
)RUWKLVH[DPSOHD9P$:
UHOD\LVXVHG $XWRPDWLRQ'LUHFW
SDUWQR&'
9'&
5HOD\
&RLO
The next example uses the same circuit as above, but with a larger 24V/290mA/7W relay,
thereby creating a larger inductive load. As you can see, the transient voltage generated is much
worse, peaking at over 50V. Driving an inductive load of this size without additional transient
suppression is very likely to permanently damage the PLC output.
Example: Larger Inductive Load with Only Integrated Suppression
2VFLOORVFRSH
9ROWV
)RUWKLVH[DPSOHD P$:
UHOD\LVXVHG $XWRPDWLRQ'LUHFW
SDUWQR6&(*9'&
9'&
5HOD\
&RLO
Additional transient suppression should be used in both these examples. If you are unable
to measure the transients generated by the connected loads of your control system, using
additional transient suppression on all inductive loads would be the safest practice.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
2-23
Chapter 2: Installation, Wiring and Specifications
Types of Additional Transient Protection
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
2-24
DC Coils:
The most effective protection against transients from a DC coil is a flyback diode. A flyback
diode can reduce the transient to roughly 1V over the supply voltage, as shown in this example.
DC Flyback Circuit
Volts
Oscilloscope
30
25
24 VDC
20
+
_
15
10
5
0
-5
Sinking
Sourcing
Many AutomationDirect socketed relays and motor starters have add-on flyback diodes
that plug or screw into the base, such as the AD-ASMD-250 protection diode module and
784-4C-SKT-1 socket module shown below. If an add-on flyback diode is not available for
your inductive load, an easy way to add one is to use AutomationDirect’s DN-D10DR-A
diode terminal block, a 600VDC power diode mounted in a slim DIN rail housing.
AD-ASMD-250
Protection Diode Module
784-4C-SKT-1
Relay Socket
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
DN-D10DR-A
Diode Terminal Block
Chapter 2: Installation, Wiring and Specifications
Two more common options for DC coils are Metal Oxide Varistors (MOV) or TVS diodes.
These devices should be connected across the driver (PLC output) for best protection as shown
below. The optimum voltage rating for the suppressor is the lowest rated voltage available that
will NOT conduct at the supply voltage, while allowing a safe margin.
AutomationDirect’s ZL-TSD8-24 transorb module is a good choice for 24VDC circuits. It is
a bank of 8 uni-directional 30V TVS diodes. Since they are uni-directional, be sure to observe
the polarity during installation. MOVs or bi-directional TVS diodes would install at the same
location, but have no polarity concerns.
DC MOV or TVS Diode Circuit
+
24 VDC _
Sinking
Sourcing
AC Coils:
Two options for AC coils are MOVs or bi-directional TVS diodes. These devices are most
effective at protecting the driver from a transient voltage when connected across the driver
(PLC output) but are also commonly connected across the coil. The optimum voltage rating
for the suppressor is the lowest rated voltage available that will NOT conduct at the supply
voltage, while allowing a safe margin.
AutomationDirect’s ZL-TSD8-120 transorb module is a good choice for 120VAC circuits. It
is a bank of eight bi-directional 180V TVS diodes.
AC MOV or Bi-Directional Diode Circuit
VAC
NOTE: Manufacturers of devices with coils frequently offer MOV or TVS diode suppressors as an add-on
option which mount conveniently across the coil. Before using them, carefully check the suppressor’s
ratings. Just because the suppressor is made specifically for that part does not mean it will reduce the
transient voltages to an acceptable level.
For example, a MOV or TVS diode rated for use on 24-48 VDC coils would need to have a
high enough voltage rating to NOT conduct at 48V. That suppressor might typically start
conducting at roughly 60VDC. If it were mounted across a 24V coil, transients of roughly
84V (if sinking output) or -60V (if sourcing output) could reach the PLC output. Many
semiconductor PLC outputs cannot tolerate such levels.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
2-25
Chapter 2: Installation, Wiring and Specifications
I/O Modules Position, Wiring, and Specification
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Slot Numbering
The DL205 bases each provide different numbers of slots for use with the I/O modules. You
may notice the bases refer to 3-slot, 4-slot, etc. One of the slots is dedicated to the CPU, so
you always have one less I/O slot. For example, you have five I/O slots with a 6-slot base. The
I/O slots are numbered 0–4. The CPU slot always contains a PLC CPU or other CPU–slot
controller and is not numbered.
Module Placement Restrictions
The following table lists the valid locations for
all types of modules in a DL205 system:
Module/Unit
Local CPU Base
CPUs
DC Input Modules .
AC Input Modules
DC Output Modules
AC Output Modules
Relay Output Modules
Analog Input and Output Modules
Local Expansion
Base Expansion Module
Base Controller Module
Serial Remote I/O
Remote Master
Remote Slave Unit
Ethernet Remote Master
CPU Interface
Ethernet Base Controller
WinPLC
DeviceNet
Profibus
SDS
Specialty Modules
Counter Interface
Counter I/O
Data Communications
Ethernet Communications
BASIC CoProcessor
Simulator
Filler
CPU Slot Only
CPU Slot
I/O Slots
Local Expansion Base
Remote I/O Base
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
CPU Slot Only
A
CPU Slot Only
A
Slot 0 Only
Slot 0 Only*
Slot 0 Only
Slot 0 Only
Slot 0 Only
Slot 0 Only
Slot 0 Only
A*
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
* When used with H2-ERM(100) Ethernet Remote I/O system
2-26
Slot 0 Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 3 Slot 4
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 2: Installation, Wiring and Specifications
Special Placement Considerations for Analog Modules
In most cases, the analog modules can be placed in any slot. However, the placement can
also depend on the type of CPU you are using and the other types of modules installed to the
left of the analog modules. If you’re using a DL230 CPU (or a DL240 CPU with firmware
earlier than V1.4) you should check the DL205 Analog I/O Manual for any possible placement
restrictions related to your particular module. You can order the DL205 Analog I/O Manual
by ordering part number D2–ANLG–M.
Discrete Input Module Status Indicators
The discrete modules provide LED status indicators to show the status of the input points.
Status indicators
Terminal
Terminal Cover
(installed)
Wire tray area
behind terminal cover
Color Coding of I/O Modules
The DL205 family of I/O modules have a color coding scheme to help you quickly identify if a
module is either an input module, output module, or a specialty module. This is done through
a color bar indicator located on the front of each module. The color scheme is listed below:
Color Bar
Module Type
Discrete/Analog Output
Discrete/Analog Input
Other
Color Code
Red
Blue
White
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
2-27
Chapter 2: Installation, Wiring and Specifications
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
2-28
Wiring the Different Module Connectors
There are two types of module connectors for the DL205 I/O. Some modules have normal
screw terminal connectors. Other modules have connectors with recessed screws. The recessed
screws help minimize the risk of someone accidentally touching active wiring.
Both types of connectors can be easily removed. If you examine the connectors closely, you’ll
notice there are squeeze tabs on the top and bottom. To remove the terminal block, press the
squeeze tabs and pull the terminal block away from the module.
We also have DIN rail mounted terminal blocks, DINnectors (refer to our catalog for a
complete listing of all available products). ZIPLinks come with special pre–assembled cables
with the I/O connectors installed and wired.
WARNING: For some modules, field device power may still be present on the terminal block even
though the PLC system is turned off. To minimize the risk of electrical shock, check all field device
power before you remove the connector.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 2: Installation, Wiring and Specifications
I/O Wiring Checklist
Use the following guidelines when wiring the I/O modules in your system.
1. T
here is a limit to the size of wire the modules can accept. The table below lists the suggested AWG
for each module type. When making terminal connections, follow the suggested torque values.
Terminal type
10-Terminal Fixed
10-Terminal Removable
20-Terminal Removable
Suggested AWG Range
14 – 24 AWG
16* – 24 AWG
16* – 24 AWG
Suggested Torque
3.5 lb-inch (0.4 N·m)
7.81 lb-inch (0.88 N·m)
2.65 lb-in (0.3 N·m)
*NOTE: 16 AWG Type TFFN or Type MTW is recommended. Other types of 16 AWG may be acceptable,
but it really depends on the thickness and stiffness of the wire insulation. If the insulation is too thick or
stiff and a majority of the module’s I/O points are used, then the plastic terminal cover may not close
properly or the connector may pull away from the module. This applies especially for high temperature
thermoplastics such as THHN.
2. Always use a continuous length of wire, do not combine wires to attain a needed length.
3. Use the shortest possible wire length.
4. Use wire trays for routing where possible.
5. A
void running wires near high energy wiring. Also, avoid running input wiring close to output
wiring where possible.
6. T
o minimize voltage drops when wires must run a long distance, consider using multiple wires for
the return line.
7. Avoid running DC wiring in close proximity to AC wiring where possible.
8. Avoid creating sharp bends in the wires.
DINnector External Fuses
(DIN rail mounted Fuses)
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Safety Guidelines
9. T
o reduce the risk of having a module with a blown fuse, we suggest you add external fuses to
your I/O wiring. A fast blow fuse, with a lower current rating than the I/O module fuse can
be added to each common, or a fuse with a rating of slightly less than the maximum current
per output point can be added to each output. Refer to our catalog for a complete line of
DINnectors, DIN-rail mounted fuse blocks.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
2-29
Chapter 2: Installation, Wiring and Specifications
D2-08ND3, DC Input
D2-08ND3 DC Input
Inputs per Module
Commons per Module
Input Voltage Range
Peak Voltage
ON Voltage Level
OFF Voltage Level
AC Frequency
Input Impedance
Input Current
Minimum ON Current
Maximum OFF Current
Base Power Required 5VDC
OFF to ON Response
ON to OFF Response
Terminal Type (included)
Status Indicator
Weight
D2-16ND3-2 DC Input
Inputs per Module
8 (sink/source)
1 (2 I/O terminal points)
10.2–26.4 VDC
26.4 VDC
9.5 VDC minimum
3.5 VDC maximum
N/A
2.7 kq
4.0 mA @ 12VDC
8.5 mA @ 24VDC
3.5 mA
1.5 mA
50mA
1 to 8 ms
1 to 8 ms
Removable, D2-8IOCON
Logic side
2.3 oz. (65g)
Commons per Module
Input Voltage Range
Peak Voltage
ON Voltage Level
OFF Voltage Level
AC Frequency
Input Impedance
Input Current
Minimum ON Current
Maximum OFF Current
Base Power Required 5VDC
OFF to ON Response
ON to OFF Response
Terminal Type (included)
Status Indicator
Weight
Derating Chart
Points
16 (sink/source)
2 isolated
(8 I/O terminal points/com)
20–28 VDC
30VDC (10mA)
19 VDC minimum
7VDC maximum
N/A
3.9 kq
6mA @ 24VDC
3.5 mA
1.5 mA
100mA
3 to 9 ms
3 to 9 ms
Removable, D2-16IOCON
Logic side
2.3 oz. (65g)
Derating Chart
Points
8
16
6
12
8
4
IN
2
0
10
20
30
40
50 55 °C
50
68
86
104
122131 °F
Ambient Temperature (°C/°F )
0
32
12--24VDC
- +
Source
Sink
-
+
Internally
connected
C
C
0
1
2
3
D2--08ND3
12--24
VDC
4
5
6
7
IN
4
0
0
32
10
20
30
40
50 55 °C
50
68
86
104
122131 ° F
Ambient Temperature (°C/°F )
24 VDC
Source
Sink
-
+
+
-
CA
4
20--28VDC
8mA
CLASS2
1
5
0
C
4
2
3
0
6
+
+
-
0
5
1
2
6
3
2
3
7
7
Internal module circuitry
D2--08ND3
INP UT
NC
1
6
V+
3
4
2
Internal module circuitry
CB
0
5
7
2
NC
1
3
1
7
Source
24 VDC
Sink
4
2
0
6
C
1
5
3
V+
INP UT
To LE D
+
Sink
-
Source
COM
- +
12--24VDC
2-30
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Source
+
-
Sink
To LE D
Optical
Is olator
+
COM
A 0
1
2
B 3
D2--16ND3--2
0
10.2--26.4VDC
4--12mA
-
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
D2-16ND3-2, DC Input
24 VDC
COM
Optical
Is olator
CA
4
5
6
7
CB
4
5
6
7
24
VDC
4
5
6
7
Chapter 2: Installation, Wiring and Specifications
D2–32ND3, DC Input
D2-32ND3 DC Input
Inputs per Module
Commons per Module
Input Voltage Range
Peak Voltage
ON Voltage Level
OFF Voltage Level
AC Frequency
Input Impedance
Input Current
Minimum ON Current
Maximum OFF Current
Base Power Required 5VDC
OFF to ON Response
ON to OFF Response
Terminal Type (not included)
Status Indicator
Weight
1
32 (sink/source)
4 isolated (8 I/O terminal points / com)
20-28 VDC
30VDC
19VDC minimum
7VDC maximum
N/A
4.8 kq
8.0 mA @ 24 VDC
3.5 mA
1.5 mA
25mA
3 to 9 ms
3 to 9 ms
Removable 40-pin Connector1
Module Activity LED
2.1 oz. (60 g)
Connector sold separately. See Terminal Blocks and Wiring for wiring options.
IN
Points
Derating Chart
32
ACT
16
+
24VDC
Source -
Sink
+
+
24VDC
-
10
20
30
40
50 55 °C
50
68
86
104
122131 °F
Ambient Temperature (°C/°F )
0
32
-
0
Sink
+
Source -
+
24VDC
V+
-
Internal module circuitry
Sink
+
Source -
INP UT
To Logic
24 VDC
COM
+
+ +
Source
24VDC
-
Sink
Optical
Is olator
Source
Sink
+
-
A0
A4
A1
A5
A2
A6
A3
A7
COM I
B0
B4
B1
B5
B2
B6
B3
B7
COM II
C0
C4
C1
C5
C2
C6
C3
C7
COM III
D0
D4
D1
D5
D2
D6
D3
D7
COM IV
24
VDC
D2--32ND3
A0
A1
A2
A3
CI
B0
B1
B2
B3
CII
C0
C1
C2
C3
CIII
D0
D1
D2
D3
CIV
A4
A5
A6
A7
CI
B4
B5
B6
B7
CII
C4
C5
C6
C7
CIII
D4
D5
D6
D7
CIV
22--26VDC
4--6mA
CLAS S 2
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
2-31
Chapter 2: Installation, Wiring and Specifications
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
D2–32ND3–2, DC Input
2-32
D2-32ND3-2 DC Input
Inputs per Module
Commons per Module
Input Voltage Range
Peak Voltage
ON Voltage Level
OFF Voltage Level
AC Frequency
Input Impedance
Input Current
Maximum Input Current
Minimum ON Current
Maximum OFF Current
Base Power Required 5VDC
OFF to ON Response
ON to OFF Response
Terminal Type (not included)
Status Indicator
Weight
1
32 (Sink/Source)
4 isolated (8 I/O terminal points / com)
4.50 to 15.6 VDC min. to max.
16VDC
4VDC minimum
2VDC maximum
N/A
1.0 kq @ 5–5 VDC
4mA @ 5VDC
11mA @ 12VDC
14mA @ 15VDC
16mA @ 15.6 VDC
3mA
0.5 mA
25mA
3 to 9 ms
3 to 9 ms
Removable 40-pin connector1
Module activity LED
2.1 oz. (60g)
Connector sold separately.
See Terminal Blocks and Wiring for wiring options.
Sink
5-15VDC
Source
Sink
5-15VDC
Source
Sink
5-15VDC
Source
Sink
5-15VDC
Source
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 2: Installation, Wiring and Specifications
D2-08NA-1, AC Input
D2-08NA-1 AC Input
Inputs per Module
Commons per Module
Input Voltage Range
Peak Voltage
ON Voltage Level
OFF Voltage Level
AC Frequency
Input Impedance
8
1 (2 I/O terminal points)
80–132 VAC
132VAC
75VAC minimum
20VAC maximum
47–63 Hz
12kq @ 60Hz
13mA @ 100VAC, 60Hz
11mA @ 100 VAC, 50Hz
5mA
2mA
50mA
5 to 30 ms
10 to 50 ms
Removable; D2-8IOCON
Logic side
2.5 oz. (70g)
Input Current
Minimum ON Current
Maximum OFF Current
Base Power Required 5VDC
OFF to ON Response
ON to OFF Response
Terminal Type (included)
Status Indicator
Weight
Derating Chart
Points
8
6
4
IN
2
0
10
20
30
40
50 55 ˚C
50
68
86
104
122131 ˚ F
Ambient Temperature (˚C/˚F )
0
32
110 VAC
Internally
connected
C
C
0
0
1
2
3
D2--08NA--1
110
VAC
4
5
6
7
80-132VAC
10-20mA
50/60Hz
4
C
5
0
6
1
C
1
2
4
3
5
7
2
6
Internal module circuitry
3
V+
7
D2--08NA-1
INP UT
To LE D
COM
Line
Optical
Is olator
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
110 VAC
COM
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
2-33
Chapter 2: Installation, Wiring and Specifications
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
D2-08NA-2, AC Input
Operating Temperature
Storage Temperature
Humidity
Atmosphere
Vibration
Shock
Insulation Withstand Voltage
Insulation Resistance
D2-08NA-2 AC Input
Inputs per Module
Commons per Module
Input Voltage Range
Peak Voltage
ON Voltage Level
OFF Voltage Level
AC Frequency
Input Impedance
8
1 (2 I/O terminal points)
170–265 VAC
265VAC
150VAC minimum
40VAC maximum
47–63 Hz
18kq @ 60Hz
9mA @ 220VAC, 50Hz
11mA @ 265VAC, 50Hz
10mA @ 220VAC, 60Hz
12mA @ 265VAC, 60Hz
10mA
2mA
100mA
5 to 30 ms
10 to 50 ms
Removable; D2-8IOCON
Logic side
2.5 oz. (70g)
Input Current
Minimum ON Current
Maximum OFF Current
Base Power Required 5VDC
OFF to ON Response
ON to OFF Response
Terminal Type (included)
Status Indicator
Weight
Noise Immunity
RFI
32ºF to 131ºF (0º to 55ºC)
-4ºF to 158ºF (-20ºC to 70ºC)
35% to 95% (non-condensing)
No corrosive gases permitted
MIL STD 810C 514.2
MIL STD 810C 516.2
1,500VAC 1 minute (COM-GND)
10M Q @ 500VDC
NEMA 1,500V 1 minute
SANKI 1,000V 1 minute
150MHz, 430MHz
Derating Chart
Points
8
6
4
220VAC
2
0
10
20
30
40
50 55 ˚ C
50
68
86
104
122131 ˚ F
Ambient Temperature (˚C/˚F )
0
32
Internally
connected
C
C
0
4
1
5
Internal module circuitry
V+
2
6
INP UT
3
To LE D
COM
Optical
Is olator
220VAC
2-34
COM
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
7
Chapter 2: Installation, Wiring and Specifications
D2-16NA, AC Input
F2-08SIM, Input Simulator
D2-16NA AC Input
Inputs per Module
Commons per Module
Input Voltage Range
Peak Voltage
ON Voltage Level
OFF Voltage Level
AC Frequency
Input Impedance
Input Current
Minimum ON Current
Maximum OFF Current
Base Power Required 5VDC
OFF to ON Response
ON to OFF Response
Terminal Type (included)
Status Indicator
Weight
F2-08SIM Input Simulator
16
2 (isolated)
80–132 VAC
132VAC
70VAC minimum
20VAC maximum
47–63 Hz
12kq @ 60Hz
11mA @ 100VAC, 50Hz
13mA @ 100VAC, 60Hz
15mA @ 132VAC, 60Hz
5mA
2mA
100mA
5 to 30 ms
10 to 50 ms
Removable; D2-16IOCON
Logic side
2.4 oz. (68g)
Inputs per Module
Base Power Required 5VDC
Terminal Type
Status Indicator
Weight
8
50mA
None
Switch side
2.65 oz. (75g)
Derating Chart
Points
16
12
8
IN
4
0
0
32
10
20
30
40
50 55 ˚ C
50
68
86
104
122131 ˚ F
Ambient Temperature (˚C/˚F )
110 VAC
CA
A 0
1
2
B 3
D2--16NA
110
VAC
4
5
6
7
IN
SIM
0
1
2
3
F 2--08SI M
4
5
6
7
0
4
80--132VAC
10--20mA
50/60Hz
1
0
> ON
5
2
6
0
7
1
3
110 VAC
NC
2
CB
3
0
4
NC
1
5
0
2
6
1
7
2
3
3
CA
4
5
1
2
6
7
CB
4
5
6
3
4
5
7
6
D2--16NA
7
Internal module circuitry
V+
INP UT
To LE D
COM
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Optical
Is olator
110 VAC
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
2-35
Chapter 2: Installation, Wiring and Specifications
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
D2-04TD1, DC Output
D2-04TD1 DC Output
Outputs per Module
Output Points Consumed
Commons per Module
Output Type
Operating Voltage
Peak Voltage
ON Voltage Drop
AC Frequency
Max Load Current
(resistive)
Max Leakage Current
Max Inrush Current
Minimum Load Current
Points
4 (current sinking)
8 points (only first 4 pts. used)
1 (4 I/O terminal points)
NMOS FET (open drain)
10.2-26.4 VDC
40VDC
0.72 VDC maximum
N/A
4A/point
8A/common
0.1 mA @ 40 VDC
6A for 100 ms, 15A for 10 ms
50 mA
External DC Required
Base Power Required 5VDC
OFF to ON Response
ON to OFF Response
Terminal Type (included)
Status Indicator
Weight
Fuses
Derating Chart
Inductive Load
Maximum Number of Switching Cycles per Minute
2A / Pt.
4
Load
Current
3
3A / Pt.
2
1
OUT
4A / Pt.
2-36
10
20
30
40
50 55 ˚ C
50
68
86
104
122131 ˚ F
Ambient Temperature (˚C/˚F )
10.2--26.4VDC
50mA--4A
24VDC
+
Internally
connected
0V
24V
C
+24V
C
12--24VDC +
L
L
L
L
0.1A
0.5A
1.0A
1.5A
2.0A
3.0A
4.0A
12--24
VDC
0
1
2
3
D2--04TD1
0
0
32
C
0
C
0
L
C
1
L
C
C
2
L
C
24VDC @ 20 mA max.
60mA
1ms
1ms
Removable; D2-8IOCON
Logic side
2.8 oz. (80 g)
4 (1 per point)
(6.3 A slow blow, non-replaceable)
C
3
L
Duration of output in ON s tate
100ms
7ms
40ms
8000
1600
800
540
400
270
200
1400
300
140
90
70
---
600
120
60
35
----
At 40 mS duration, loads of 3.0A or greater cannot be used.
At 100 mS duration, loads of 2.0A or greater cannot be used.
Find the load current you expect to use and the duration that the
output is ON. The number at the intersection of the row and column
represents the switching cycles per minute. For example, a 1A
inductive load that is on for 100 ms can be switched on and off a
maximum of 60 times per minute. To convert this to duty cycle
percentage use: (duration x cycles)/60. In this example,
(60 x .1)/60 = .1, or 10% duty cycle.
1
24VDC
-- +
2
Reg
0V
3
To LE D
Output
D2--04TD1
L
12--24 +
VDC --
6.3A
Optical
Is olator
Common
Other
Circuits
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 2: Installation, Wiring and Specifications
D2–08TD2, DC Output
D2–08TD1, DC Output
D2-08TD1 DC Output
Outputs per Module
Commons per Module
Output Type
Operating Voltage
Peak Voltage
ON Voltage Drop
AC Frequency
Minimum Load Current
Max Load Current
Max Leakage Current
Max Inrush Current
Base Power Required 5VDC
OFF to ON Response
ON to OFF Response
Terminal Type (included)
Status Indicator
Weight
Fuses
D2-08TD2 DC Output
8 (current sinking)
1 (2 I/O terminal points)
NPN open collector
10.2–26.4 VDC
40VDC
1.5 VDC maximum
N/A
0.5 mA
0.3 A/point; 2.4 A/common
0.1 mA @ 40VDC
1A for 10ms
100mA
1ms
1ms
Removable; D2-8IOCON
Logic side
2.3 oz. (65g)
1 per common
5A fast blow, non-replaceable
Outputs per Module
Commons per Module
Output Type
Operating Voltage
Output Voltage
Peak Voltage
ON Voltage Drop
AC Frequency
Minimum Load Current
Max Load Current
Max Leakage Current
Max Inrush Current
Base Power Required 5VDC
OFF to ON Response
ON to OFF Response
Terminal Type (included)
Status Indicator
Weight
Fuse
8 (current sourcing)
1
PNP open collector
12–24 VDC
10.8–26.4 VDC
40VDC
1.5 VDC
N/A
N/A
0.3 A per point; 2.4 A per
common
1.0 mA @ 40VDC
1A for 10 ms
100 mA
1ms
1ms
Removable; D2-8IOCON
Logic side
2.1 oz. (60g)
5A fast blow, non-replaceable
Derating Chart
Points
8
6
4
OUT
2
0
0
32
10
20
30
40
50 55 ˚ C
50
68
86
104
122131 ˚ F
Ambient Temperature (˚C/˚F )
12--24VDC
+
Internally
connected
C
C
0
1
2
3
D2--08TD1
12--24
VDC
4
5
6
7
10.2--26.4VDC
0.2mA-0.3A
0
L
C
4
L
C
1
L
5
L
2
L
6
L
3
L
L
0
L
1
5
7
L
4
2
6
3
Internal module circuitry
L
Optical
Is olator
OUTP UT
7
D2--08TD1
+
12--24VDC
COM
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5A
COM
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
2-37
Chapter 2: Installation, Wiring and Specifications
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
D2–16TD1–2, DC Output
D2-16TD1-2 DC Output
Outputs per Module
Commons per Module
Output Type
External DC required
Operating Voltage
Peak Voltage
ON Voltage Drop
AC Frequency
Minimum Load Current
D2-16TD2-2 DC Output
16 (current sinking)
1 (2 I/O terminal points)
NPN open collector
24VDC ±4V @ 80 mA max
10.2-26.4 VDC
30VDC
0.5 VDC maximum
N/A
0.2 mA
0.1A/point
1.6A/common
0.1 mA @ 30 VDC
150mA for 10 ms
200mA
0.5 ms
0.5 ms
Removable; D2-16IOCON
Logic side
Max Load Current
Max Leakage Current
Max Inrush Current
Base Power Required 5VDC
OFF to ON Response
ON to OFF Response
Terminal Type (included)
Status Indicator
2.3 oz. (65g)
Weight
None
Fuses
Derating Chart
Points
16
12
8
4
OUT
0
0
32
10
20
30
40
50 55 ˚C
50
68
86
104
122131 ˚ F
Ambient Temperature (˚C/˚F )
C
0
L
4
L
1
L
12--24
VDC
4
5
6
7
5
L
10.2--26.4
VDC 0.1A
CLASS2
2
L
6
L
A
3
L
L
12--24VDC
+
A 0
1
2
B 3
D2--16TD1--2
24VDC
+
7
0
C
1
+V
0
L
4
L
Internally
connected
1
L
5
L
2
L
6
L
3
L
7
L
2
3
+V
0
1
2
3
+V Internal module circuitry
B
C
4
5
6
7
C
4
5
6
7
+
24VDC
L
+
OUTP UT
Optical
Is olator
12--24
VDC
COM
COM
* Can also be used with 5VDC supply
2-38
D2–16TD2–2, DC Output
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Outputs per Module
Commons per Module
Output Type
Operating Voltage
Peak Voltage
ON Voltage Drop
AC Frequency
Minimum Load Current
Max Load Current
Max Leakage Current
Max Inrush Current
Base Power Required 5VDC
OFF to ON Response
ON to OFF Response
Terminal Type (included)
Status Indicator
Weight
Fuses
16 (current sourcing)
2
NPN open collector
10.2-26.4 VDC
30VDC
1.0 VDC maximum
N/A
0.2 mA
0.1A/point
1.6A/module
0.1 mA @ 30 VDC
150mA for 10 ms
200mA
0.5 ms
0.5 ms
Removable; D2-16IOCON
Logic side
2.8 oz. (80g)
None
Chapter 2: Installation, Wiring and Specifications
F2–16TD1(2)P, DC Output With Fault Protection
NOTE: Not supported in D2-230, D2-240
and D2-250 CPUs.
These modules detect the following fault status and
turn the related X bit(s) on.
1. Missing external 24VDC for the module
2. Open load1
3. Over temperature (the output is shut down)
4. Over load current (the output is shut down)
Fault Status
Missing external 24VDC
Open load1
Over temperature
Over load current
X bit Fault Status Indication
All 16 X bits are on.
Only the X bit assigned to the
faulted output is on
When these modules are installed, 16
X bits are automatically assigned as
the fault status indicator. Each X bit
indicates the fault status of each output.
In this example, X10-X27 are assigned as the fault
status indicator.
X10: Fault status indicator for Y0
X11: Fault status indicator for Y1
Example
D2-250-1 or D2-260
X26: Fault status indicator for Y16
X27: Fault status indicator for Y17
Slot 0 Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 3 Slot 4
The fault status indicators (X bits) can be reset
by performing the indicated operations in the
following table:
Fault Status
Missing external 24VDC
Open load1
Over temperature
Over load current
D2-08ND3
F2-16TD1P
or
F2-16TD2P
X0 - X7
X10 - X27
Y0 - Y17
Operation
Apply external 24VDC
Connect the load.
Jumper Switch J6
Turn the output (Y bit) off or
power cycle the PLC
PC Board
NOTE 1: Open load detection can be disabled by
removing the jumper switch J6 on the module PC
board.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Continued on next two pages.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
2-39
Chapter 2: Installation, Wiring and Specifications
F2–16TD1P, DC Output With Fault Protection
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
NOTE: Not supported in D2-230, D2-240
and D2-250 CPUs.
NOTE: Supporting Firmware:
D2-250-1 must be V4.80 or later
D2-260 must be V2.60 or later
Points
16
Derating Chart
12
8
4
OUT
0
10
20
30
40
50 55°C
50
68
86
104 122 131°F
Ambient Temperature (°C/°F)
0
32
0V
0
L
4
L
1
L
5
L
6
L
A
3
L
0
1
7
L
24VDC
12–24VDC
+
+
24V
0V
0
L
4
L
1
L
5
L
2
L
6
L
3
L
7
L
Internally
connected
2
3
24V
0
1
2
3
24V Internal module circuitry
12-24
VDC
4
5
6
7
10.2-26.4
VDC 0.25A
CLASS2
2
L
A 0
1
2
B 3
F2–16TD1P
B
0V
4
5
6
7
0V
4
5
6
7
+
24VDC
OUTPUT
L
+ 12–24
VDC
0V
0V
2-40
Optical
Isolator
When the A/B switch is in the A position,
the LEDs display the output status of the
module’s first 8 output points. Positon B
displays the output status of the module’s second group of 8 output points.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
F2-16TD1P DC Output with Fault Protection
Inputs per module
Outputs per module
Commons per module
Output type
Operating voltage
Peak voltage
AC frequency
ON voltage drop
Overcurrent trip
16 (status indication)
16 (current sinking)
1 (2 I/O terminal points)
NMOS FET (open drain)
10.2–26.4 VDC, external
40VDC
N/A
0.7 V (output current 0.5 A)
0.6A, min., 1.2A, max.
Minimum load current
0.2mA
Maximum load current
0.25A/point; 4A/common
Max leakage current
0.2mA (load detect enabled);
0.3mA disabled
Max inrush current
150 mA for 10ms
Base power required 5V
OFF to ON response
ON to OFF response
Terminal type
Status indicators
Weight
Fuses
External DC required
70 mA
0.5 ms
0.5 ms
Removable (D2-16IOCON)
Logic Side
2.0 oz. (25g)
None
External DC overvoltage
shutdown
27V, outputs are restored when
voltage is within limits
24VDC ±10% @ 50mA
Chapter 2: Installation, Wiring and Specifications
F2–16TD2P, DC Output with Fault Protection
NOTE: Not supported in D2-230, D2-240
and D2-250 CPUs.
NOTE: Supporting Firmware:
D2-250-1 must be V4.80 or later
D2-260 must be V2.60 or later
Derating Chart
2
4
OUT
10
50
0
32
20
68
30
86
40
50 55°C
104 122 131°F
C
12–24VDC
0V
+
4
A 0
1
2
B 3
F2–16TD2P
A
24V
+
V
0
1
2
L
4
L
L
3
24V
L
2
L
0
1
L
L
2
L
3
24VDC
– +
B
24V
16 (status indication)
16 (current sourcing)
1
NMOS FET (open source)
10.2–26.4 VDC, external
40VDC
N/A
0.7 V (output current 0.5 A)
0.6 A min., 1.2 A max.
Minimum load current
0.2 mA
Maximum load current
0.25 A/point; 4A/common
Max leakage current
0.2 mA (load detect enabled);
0.3 mA disabled
Max inrush current
150mA for 10ms
Base power required 5V
OFF to ON response
ON to OFF response
Terminal type
Status indicators
Weight
Fuses
External DC required
70mA
0.5 ms
0.5 ms
Removable (D2-16IOCON)
Logic Side
2.0 oz. (25g)
None
External DC overvoltage
shutdown
27V, outputs are restored when
voltage is within limits
24VDC ±10% @ 50mA
10.2-26.4
VDC 0.25A
CLASS2
2
24VDC
12-24
VDC
4
5
6
7
F2-16TD2P DC Output with Fault Protection
Inputs per module
Outputs per module
Commons per module
Output type
Operating voltage
Peak voltage
AC frequency
ON voltage drop
Overcurrent trip
V1
4
5
6
7
0V
4
5
6
7
Reg
0V
12–24VDC
+
L
O
0V
OUTPUT
When the A/B switch is in the A position,
the LEDs display the output status of the
module’s first 8 output points. Positon B
displays the output status of the module’s second group of 8 output points.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
2-41
Chapter 2: Installation, Wiring and Specifications
D2–32TD1, DC Output
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
D2–32TD2, DC Output
D2-32TD1 DC Output
32 (current sinking)
Outputs per Module
4 (8 I/O terminal points)
Commons per Module
NPN open collector
Output Type
12–24 VDC
Operating Voltage
30VDC
Peak Voltage
0.5 VDC maximum
ON Voltage Drop
0.2 mA
Minimum Load Current
0.1 A/point; 3.2 A per module
Max Load Current
0.1 mA @ 30VDC
Max Leakage Current
150mA for 10ms
Max Inrush Current
Base Power Required 5VDC 350mA
0.5 ms
OFF to ON Response
0.5 ms
ON to OFF Response
Terminal Type (not included) Removable 40-pin connector1
Status Indicator
Weight
Fuses
External DC Power Required
1
Module activity
(no I/O status indicators)
2.1 oz. (60g)
None
20–28 VDC max.
120mA (all points on)
Connector sold separately.
See Terminal Blocks and Wiring for wiring options.
2-42
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
D2-32TD2 DC Output
32 (current sourcing)
Outputs per Module
4 (8 I/O terminal points)
Commons per Module
Transistor
Output Type
12 to 24 VDC
Operating Voltage
30VDC
Peak Voltage
0.5 VDC @ 0.1 A
ON Voltage Drop
0.2 mA
Minimum Load Current
0.1 A/point; 0.8 A/common
Max Load Current
0.1 mA @ 30VDC
Max Leakage Current
150mA @ 10ms
Max Inrush Current
Base Power Required 5VDC 350mA
0.5 ms
OFF to ON Response
0.5 ms
ON to OFF Response
Terminal Type (not included) Removable 40-pin connector1
Status Indicator
Weight
Fuses
1
Module activity (no I/O status
indicators)
2.1 oz (60g)
None
Connector sold separately.
See Terminal Blocks and Wiring for wiring options.
Chapter 2: Installation, Wiring and Specifications
F2–08TA, AC Output
D2–08TA, AC Output
F2-08TA AC Output
Outputs per Module
Commons per Module
Output Type
Operating Voltage
Peak Voltage
ON Voltage Drop
AC Frequency
Minimum Load Current
Max Load Current
Max Leakage Current
Peak One Cycle Surge
Current
Base Power Required 5VDC
OFF to ON Response
ON to OFF Response
Terminal Type (included)
Status Indicator
Weight
Fuses
D2-08TA AC Output
8
2 (Isolated)
SSR (Triac with zero crossover)
24–140 VAC
140VAC
1.6 V(rms) @ 1.5 A
47 to 63 Hz
50 mA
1.5 A / pt @ 30ºC
1.0 A / pt @ 60ºC
4.0 A / common; 8.0 A / module
@ 60ºC
0.7 mA (rms)
Outputs per Module
Commons per Module
Output Type
Operating Voltage
Peak Voltage
15A
Max Inrush Current
Base Power Required 5VDC
OFF to ON Response
ON to OFF Response
Terminal Type (included)
Status Indicator
Weight
250mA
0.5 ms - 1/2 cycle
0.5 ms - 1/2 cycle
Removable; D2-8IOCON
Logic side
3.5 oz.
None
ON Voltage Drop
AC Frequency
Minimum Load Current
Max Load Current
Max Leakage Current
Fuses
8
1 (2 I/O terminal points)
SSR (Triac)
15–264 VAC
264VAC
< 1.5 VAC (>0.1 A)
< 3.0 VAC (<0.1 A)
47 to 63Hz
10mA
0.5 A/point; 4A/common
4mA (264VAC, 60Hz)
1.2 mA (100VAC, 60Hz)
0.9 mA (100VAC, 50Hz)
10A for 10ms
250mA
1 ms
1 ms + 1/2 cycle
Removable; D2-8IOCON
Logic side
2.8 oz. (80g)
1 per common, 6.3 A slow blow,
non-replaceable
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
2-43
Chapter 2: Installation, Wiring and Specifications
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
D2–12TA, AC Output
D2-12TA AC Output
Outputs per Module
Outputs Points Consumed
Commons per Module
Output Type
Operating Voltage
Peak Voltage
12
16 (four unused, see chart below)
2 (isolated)
SSR (Triac)
15–132 VAC
132VAC
< 1.5 VAC (>50mA)
< 4.0 VAC (<50mA)
47 to 63 Hz
10mA
0.3 A/point; 1.8 A/common
ON Voltage Drop
AC Frequency
Minimum Load Current
Max Load Current
Points
Derating Chart
Max Leakage Current
Max Inrush Current
Base Power Required 5VDC
OFF to ON Response
ON to OFF Response
Terminal Type (included)
Status Indicator
Weight
Fuses
250mA / Pt.
P oints
12
300mA / Pt.
9
OUT
6
3
0
0
32
2-44
10
20
30
40
50 55 ˚C
50
68
86
104
122131 ˚ F
Ambient Temperature (˚C/˚F )
15--132 VAC
L
L
L
L
L
L
15--132 VAC
L
L
L
L
L
L
CA
A 0
1
2
B 3
D2--12TA
15--132VAC
10mA--0.3A
50/60 Hz
0
4
1
0
5
1
NC
2
2
3
NC
NC
CB
0
4
1
5
2
2mA (132VAC, 60Hz)
10A for 10ms
350mA
1ms
1ms + 1/2 cycle
Removable; D2-16IOCON
Logic side
2.8 oz. (80g)
(2) 1 per common
3.15 A slow blow, replaceable
Order D2-FUSE-1 (5 per pack)
Addres s es Us ed
P oints
Us ed?
Yn+0
Yn+1
Yn+2
Yn+3
Yn+4
Yn+5
Yn+6
Yn+7
18--110
VAC
4
5
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
2
4
5
Internal module circuitry
CB
Optical
Is olator
L
4
5
3
COM
NC
3
NC
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
CA
OUTP UT
1
Us ed?
n is the starting address
3
0
Yn+10
Yn+11
Yn+12
Yn+13
Yn+14
Yn+15
Yn+16
Yn+17
D2--12TA
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
15--132
VAC
3.15A
To LE D
Chapter 2: Installation, Wiring and Specifications
D2–04TRS, Relay Output
Max Leakage Current
Max Inrush Current
Base Power Required 5VDC
OFF to ON Response
ON to OFF Response
Terminal Type (included)
Status Indicator
Weight
D2-04TRS Relay Output
Outputs per Module
Outputs Points Consumed
Commons per Module
Output Type
Operating Voltage
Peak Voltage
ON Voltage Drop
AC Frequency
Minimum Load Current
Max Load Current (resistive)
4
8 (only 1st 4pts. are used)
4 (isolated)
Relay, form A (SPST)
5-30 VDC / 5-240 VAC
30 VDC, 264 VAC
0.72 VDC maximum
47 to 63 Hz
10mA
4A/point; 8A/module (resistive)
Fuses
0.1 mA @ 264VAC
5A for < 10ms
250mA
10ms
10ms
Removable; D2-8IOCON
Logic side
2.8 oz. (80g)
1 per point
6.3 A slow blow, replaceable
Order D2-FUSE-3 (5 per pack)
Typical Relay Life (Operations)
Voltage & Load Current
Type of Load
1A
2A
3A
4A
24VDC Resistive
24VDC Solenoid
110 VAC Resistive
110 VAC Solenoid
220 VAC Resistive
220 VAC Solenoid
200k
40k
250k
100k
150k
50k
100k
––
150k
50k
100k
––
50k
–
100k
–
50k
––
500k
100k
500k
200k
350k
100k
Derating Chart
Points
4
2A /
Pt.
3
3A /
Pt.
4A /
Pt.
At 24 VDC, solenoid (inductive) loads over 2A cannot be used.
2
At 100 VAC, solenoid (inductive) loads over 3A cannot be used.
1
At 220 VAC, solenoid (inductive) loads over 2A cannot be used.
0
OUT
RELAY
10
50
0
32
20
30
40
68
86
104
Ambient Temperature (˚C/˚F )
50 55 ˚ C
122 131 ˚ F
0
1
2
3
D2--04TR S
5-240VAC
4A50/60Hz
5--30VDC
10mA--4A
NC
5--30 VDC
5--240 VAC
NC
0
L
C1
1
L
C2
2
L
C3
3
L
Internal module circuitry
NC
NC
C0
C0
L
C1
L
C2
L
C3
L
0
L
OUTP UT
1
To LE D
2
3
COM
5--30 VDC
5--240 VAC
6.3A
D2--04TR S
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
2-45
Chapter 2: Installation, Wiring and Specifications
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
D2–08TR, Relay Output
Max Leakage Current
D2-08TR Relay Output
Outputs per Module
Outputs Points Consumed
Commons per Module
Output Type
Operating Voltage
Peak Voltage
ON Voltage Drop
AC Frequency
Minimum Load Current
Max Load Current (resistive)
8
8
1 (2 I/O terminals)
Relay, form A (SPST)
5–30 VDC; 5–240 VAC
30VDC, 264VAC
N/A
47 to 60 Hz
5mA @ 5VDC
1A/point; 4A/common
Max Inrush Current
Base Power Required 5VDC
OFF to ON Response
ON to OFF Response
Terminal Type (included)
Status Indicator
Weight
Fuses
0.1 mA @265 VAC
Output: 3A for 10ms
Common: 10A for 10ms
250mA
12ms
10ms
Removable; D2-8IOCON
Logic side
3.9 oz. (110g)
One 6.3A slow blow, replaceable
Order D2-FUSE-3 (5 per pack)
Typical Relay Life (Operations)
Voltage/Load
Current
24VDC Resistive
24VDC Solenoid
110VDC Resistive
110VDC Solenoid
220VAC Resistive
220VAC Solenoid
1A
1A
1A
1A
1A
1A
Closures
500k
100k
500k
200k
350k
100k
Derating Chart
Points
8
OUT
0
1
2
3
D2--08TR
RELAY
6
4
5
6
7
4
0.5A / Pt.
1A / Pt.
2
0
5--30 VDC
5--240 VAC
2-46
Internally
connected
C
5-240VAC
1A50/60Hz
5--30VDC
5mA--1A
C
0
L
L
L
L
L
4
1
5
2
L
L
3
10
20
30
40
50 55 ˚C
50
68
86
104
122131 ˚ F
Ambient Temperature (˚C/˚F )
C
L
0
L
1
4
Internal module circuitry
5
2
6
6
L
0
32
C
L
3
OUTP UT
7
7
To LE D
D2--08TR
COM
5--30 VDC
5--240 VAC
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
6.3A
Chapter 2: Installation, Wiring and Specifications
F2–08TR, Relay Output
F2-08TR Relay Output
Outputs per Module
Outputs Points Consumed
Commons per Module
Output Type
Operating Voltage
Peak Voltage
ON Voltage Drop
AC Frequency
Minimum Load Current
Max Load Current (resistive)
Max Leakage Current
Max Inrush Current
Base Power Required 5VDC
OFF to ON Response
ON to OFF Response
Terminal Type (included)
Status Indicator
Weight
Fuses
8
8
2 (isolated), 4-pts. per common
8, Form A (SPST normally open)
7A @ 12–28 VDC, 12–250VAC;
0.5 A @ 120VDC
150VDC, 265VAC
N/A
47 to 63 Hz
10 mA @ 12 VDC
10A/point 3 (subject to derating)
Max of 10A/common
N/A
12A
670mA
15ms (typical)
5ms (typical)
Removable; D2-8IOCON
Logic side
5.5 oz. (156g)
None
Typical Relay Life1 (Operations) at Room
Temperature
Voltage &
Type of Load 2
Load Current
50mA
5A
7A
24 VDC Resistive
24 VDC Solenoid
110 VDC Resistive
110 VDC Solenoid
220 VAC Resistive
220 VAC Solenoid
10M
–
–
–
–
300k
75k
300k
200k
150k
100k
600k
150k
600k
500k
300k
250k
1) Contact life may be extended beyond those values shown with
the use of arc suppression techniques described in the DL205 User
Manual. Since these modules have no leakage current, they do not
have built-in snubber. For example, if you place a diode across a
24VDC inductive load, you can significantly increase the life of the
relay.
2) At 120VDC 0.5 A resistive load, contact life cycle is 200k cycles.
3) Normally closed contacts have 1/2 the current handling
capability of the normally open contacts.
Derating Chart
2.5 A/pt.
8
6
3 A/pt.
Number
Points On 4
(100% duty
2
cycle)
5A/pt.
10 A/pt.
0
0
32
OUT
10
20
30
40
50 55 °C
50
68
86
104
122 131 °F
Ambient Temperature (°C/°F )
RELAY
0
1
2
3
F 2--08TR
12--250VAC
10A50/60Hz
12--28VDC
10ma--10A
4
5
6
7
Typical Circuit
12--28VDC
12--250VAC
Internal Circuitry
Common
L
L
NO 0
NO 1
L
NO
C0-3
L
L
L
L
NO 2
NO 3
NO 4
NO 5
C4-7
L
L
NO 6
NO 7
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
2-47
Chapter 2: Installation, Wiring and Specifications
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
F2–08TRS, Relay Output
F2-08TRS Relay Output
Outputs per Module
Outputs Points Consumed
Commons per Module
Output Type
Operating Voltage
Peak Voltage
ON Voltage Drop
AC Frequency
Minimum Load Current
Max Load Current (resistive)
Max Leakage Current
Max Inrush Current
Base Power Required 5VDC
OFF to ON Response
ON to OFF Response
Terminal Type (included)
Status Indicator
Weight
Fuses
2-48
8
8
8 (isolated)
3, Form C (SPDT)
5, Form A (SPST normally open)
7A @ 12–28 VDC, 12–250 VAC
0.5A @ 120VDC
150VDC, 265VAC
N/A
47 to 63Hz
10mA @ 12VDC
7A/point 3 (subject to derating)
N/A
12A
670mA
15ms (typical)
5ms (typical)
Removable; D2-16IOCON
Logic side
5.5 oz. (156g)
None
Typical Relay Life1 (Operations) at Room
Temperature
Voltage &
Type of Load 2
Load Current
50mA
5A
7A
24VDC Resistive
24VDC Solenoid
110VDC Resistive
110VDC Solenoid
220VAC Resistive
220VAC Solenoid
10M
–
–
–
–
300k
75k
300k
200k
150k
100k
600k
150k
600k
500k
300k
250k
1) Contact life may be extended beyond those values shown with
the use of arc suppression techniques described in the DL205 User
Manual. Since these modules have no leakage current, they do not
have built-in snubber. For example, if you place a diode across a
24VDC inductive load, you can significantly increase the life of the
relay.
2) At 120VDC 0.5 A resistive load, contact life cycle is 200k cycles.
3) Normally, closed contacts have 1/2 the current handling
capability of the normally open contacts.
Derating Chart
8
4A/
pt.
6
5A/pt.
Number
Points On 4
(100% duty
2
cycle)
6A/
pt.
7A/pt.
0
0
32
OUT
12--28VDC
12--250VAC
NO 0
L
C1
C0
12--28VDC
12--250VAC
NO 1
L
12--28VDC
12--250VAC
NC 0
C2
C3
normally clos ed
L
12--28VDC
12--250VAC
NO 2
NO 3
L
C4
C5
12--28VDC
12--250VAC
NO 4
L
normally clos ed
L
12--28VDC
12--250VAC
NO 5
C6
NO 1
C2
NO 2
NO 4
L
NC 7 normally clos ed
L
C7
12--28VDC
12--250VAC
4
5
6
7
12--250VAC
7A50/60Hz
12--28VDC
10ma--7A
C4
NC 6
RELAY
0
1
2
3
F 2--08TR S
C1
L
12--28VDC
12--250VAC
NC 6
C6
NO 6
10
20
30
40
50 55 ˚C
50
68
86
104
122131 ˚ F
Ambient Temperature (˚C/˚F )
Typical Circuit
(points 1,2,3,4,5)
12--28VDC
12--250VAC
L
NO
NO 0
C0
NC 0
Typical Circuit
(P oints 0, 6, & 7 only)
C3
NO 3
C5
NO 5
12--28VDC
12--250VAC
NC 7
Common
C7
NO7
NO 6
L
L
L
NO 7
Internal Circuitry
Common
L
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
NO
NC
Internal Circuitry
Chapter 2: Installation, Wiring and Specifications
D2–12TR, Relay Output
D2-12TR Relay Output
Outputs per Module
Outputs Points Consumed
Commons per Module
Output Type
Operating Voltage
Peak Voltage
ON Voltage Drop
AC Frequency
Minimum Load Current
Max Load Current (resistive)
Max Leakage Current
Max Inrush Current
Base Power Required 5VDC
OFF to ON Response
ON to OFF Response
Terminal Type (included)
Status Indicator
Weight
Fuses
12
16 (four unused, see chart below)
2 (6-pts. per common)
Relay, form A (SPST)
5–30 VDC; 5–240 VAC
30VDC; 264VAC
N/A
47 to 60 Hz
5mA @ 5VDC
1.5 A/point; Max of 3A/common
0.1 mA @ 265VAC
Output: 3A for 10ms
Common: 10A for 10ms
450mA
10ms
10ms
Removable; D2-16IOCON
Logic side
4.6 oz. (130g)
(2) 4A slow blow, replaceable
Order D2-FUSE-4 (5 per pack)
Typical Relay Life (Operations)
Voltage/Load
Current
Closures
24VDC Resistive
24VDC Solenoid
110VDC Resistive
110VDC Solenoid
220VAC Resistive
220VAC Solenoid
1A
1A
1A
1A
1A
1A
500k
100k
500k
200k
350k
100k
Addresses Used
Points
Used?
Yn+0
Yn+1
Yn+2
Yn+3
Yn+4
Yn+5
Yn+6
Yn+7
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Points
Yn+10
Yn+11
Yn+12
Yn+13
Yn+14
Yn+15
Yn+16
Yn+17
n is the starting address
12
A 0
1
2
B 3
D2--12TR
5--30 VDC
5--240 VAC
L
L
L
L
L
L
5--30 VDC
5--240 VAC
L
L
L
L
L
CA
0
4
5
NC
3
NC
0
1
4
5
4
0.5A / Pt.
0.75A / Pt.
2
1.25A / Pt.
1.5A / Pt.
0
0
32
10
20
30
40
50 55 ˚C
50
68
86
104
122131 ˚ F
Ambient Temperature (˚C/˚F )
CA
Internal module circuitry
4
5
L
3
OUTP UT
NC
CB
0
4
1
5
0
1
2
CB
5
3
2
NC
NC
To LE D
4
3
L
8
5--240VAC
1.5A50/60Hz
5--30VDC
5mA--1.5A
1
2
RELAY
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Derating Chart
Points
OUT
Used?
COM
5--30 VDC
5--240 VAC
4A
D2--12TR
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
2-49
Chapter 2: Installation, Wiring and Specifications
D2–08CDR, 4 pt. DC Input / 4 pt. Relay Output
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
D2-08CDR 4-pt. DC In / 4pt. Relay Out
General Specifications
Base Power Required 5VDC
Terminal Type (included)
Status Indicator
Weight
Input Specifications
Inputs per Module
Input Points Consumed
Commons per Module
Input Voltage Range
Peak Voltage
ON Voltage Level
OFF Voltage Level
AC Frequency
Input Impedance
Input Current
Maximum Current
Minimum ON Current
Maximum OFF Current
OFF to ON Response
ON to OFF Response
Fuses (input circuits)
200mA
Removable; D2-8IOCON
Logic side
3.5 oz. (100 g)
4 (sink/source)
8 (only first 4-pts. are used)
1
20–28 VDC
30VDC
19VDC minimum
7VDC maximum
N/A
4.7 kq
5mA @ 24VDC
8mA @ 30VDC
4.5 mA
1.5 mA
1 to 10 ms
1 to 10 ms
None
Output Specifications
Outputs per Module
Outputs Points Consumed
Commons per Module
Output Type
Operating Voltage
Peak Voltage
ON Voltage Drop
AC Frequency
Minimum Load Current
Max Load Current (resistive)
Max Leakage Current
Max Inrush Current
OFF to ON Response
ON to OFF Response
Fuses (output circuits)
4
8 (only first 4-pts. are used)
1
Relay, form A (SPST)
5–30 VDC; 5–240 VAC
30VDC; 264VAC
N/A
47 to 63 Hz
5mA @ 5VDC
1A/point ; 4A/module
0.1 mA @ 264VAC
3A for < 100ms
10A for < 10ms (common)
12ms
10ms
1 (6.3 A slow blow, replaceable);
Order D2-FUSE-3 (5 per pack)
Derating Chart
Points
4
Outputs
1A / Pt.
Inputs
5mA /
Pt.
3
2
1
Typical Relay Life (Operations)
Voltage/Load
Current
24VDC Resistive
24VDC Solenoid
110VAC Resistive
110VAC Solenoid
220VAC Resistive
220VAC Solenoid
1A
1A
1A
1A
1A
1A
2-50
Closures
500k
100k
500k
200k
350k
100k
IN/
OUT
A 0
1
2
3
D2--08CDR
0
24VDC
RELAY
0 B
1
2
3
0
32
10
20
30
40
50 55°C
50
68
86 104 122131°F
Ambient Temperature (°C/°F )
Internal module circuitry
D2--08CDR
20--28VDC
8mA
INP UT
CA
0
Source
1
L
Sink
+
To LE D
0
L
24VD C
CA
--
2
Source
24VDC
Internal module circuitry
3
1
Optical
Is olator
COM
+
3
L
CB
2
L
2
L
0
1
L
Sink
1
O
L
L
OUTP UT
5--240VAC
1A50/60Hz
5--30VDC
5mA--1A
2
3
L
V+
To LE D
3
COM
CB
5--30 VDC
5--240 VAC
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5--30 VDC
5--240 VAC
6.3A
Chapter 2: Installation, Wiring and Specifications
Glossary of Specification Terms
Inputs or Outputs Per Module
Indicates number of input or output points per module and designates current sinking, current
sourcing, or either.
Commons Per Module
Number of commons per module and their electrical characteristics.
Input Voltage Range
The operating voltage range of the input circuit.
Output Voltage Range
The operating voltage range of the output circuit.
Peak Voltage
Maximum voltage allowed for the input circuit.
AC Frequency
AC modules are designed to operate within a specific frequency range.
ON Voltage Level
The voltage level at which the input point will turn ON.
OFF Voltage Level
The voltage level at which the input point will turn OFF.
Input impedance
Input impedance can be used to calculate input current for a particular operating voltage.
Input Current
Typical operating current for an active (ON) input.
Minimum ON Current
The minimum current for the input circuit to operate reliably in the ON state.
Maximum OFF Current
The maximum current for the input circuit to operate reliably in the OFF state.
Minimum Load
The minimum load current for the output circuit to operate properly.
External DC Required
Some output modules require external power for the output circuitry.
ON Voltage Drop
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Sometimes called “saturation voltage,” it is the voltage measured from an output point to its
common terminal when the output is ON at maximum load.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
2-51
Chapter 2: Installation, Wiring and Specifications
Maximum Leakage Current
The maximum current a connected maximum load will receive when the output point is OFF.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
2-52
Maximum Inrush Current
The maximum current used by a load for a short duration upon an OFF to ON transition
of an output point. It is greater than the normal ON state current and is characteristic of
inductive loads in AC circuits.
Base Power Required
Power from the base power supply is used by the DL205 input modules and varies between
different modules. The guidelines for using module power are explained in the power budget
configuration section in Chapter 4–7.
OFF to ON Response
The time the module requires to process an OFF to ON state transition.
ON to OFF Response
The time the module requires to process an ON to OFF state transition.
Terminal Type
Indicates whether the terminal type is a removable or non-removable connector or a terminal.
Status Indicators
The LEDs that indicate the ON/OFF status of an input point. These LEDs are electrically
located on either the logic side or the field device side of the input circuit.
Weight
Indicates the weight of the module. See Appendix F for a list of the weights for the various
DL205 components.
Fuses
Protective devices for an output circuit, which stop current flow when current exceeds the fuse
rating. They may be replaceable or non–replaceable, or located externally or internally.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
CPU Specifications and
Operations
In This Chapter
Chapter
3
CPU Overview.............................................................................3–2
CPU General Specifications.........................................................3–4
CPU Base Electrical Specifications................................................3–5
CPU Hardware Setup..................................................................3–6
Selecting the Program Storage Media.........................................3–9
Using Battery Backup..................................................................3–14
CPU Operation............................................................................3–21
I/O Response Time......................................................................3–27
CPU Scan Time Considerations...................................................3–29
PLC Numbering Systems.............................................................3–35
Memory Map..............................................................................3–37
DL230 System V-memory...........................................................3–41
DL240 System V-memory...........................................................3–43
DL250–1 System V-memory (DL250 also) ..................................3–46
DL260 System V-memory...........................................................3–49
DL205 Aliases..............................................................................3–52
DL230 Memory Map..................................................................3–53
DL240 Memory Map..................................................................3–54
DL250–1 Memory Map (DL250 also)..........................................3–55
DL260 Memory Map..................................................................3–56
X Input/Y Output Bit Map...........................................................3–57
Control Relay Bit Map.................................................................3–59
Stage Control/Status Bit Map......................................................3–63
Timer and Counter Status Bit Maps............................................3–65
Remote I/O Bit Map....................................................................3–66
Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
CPU Overview
3-2
The Central Processing Unit is the heart of the PLC. Almost all
system operations are controlled by the CPU, so it is important
that it is set up and installed correctly. This chapter provides the
information needed to understand:
• The differences between the various models of CPUs, and
• The steps required to set up and install the CPU.
General CPU Features
The DL230, DL240, DL250–1 and D2–260 are modular CPUs
which can be installed in 3, 4, 6, or 9 slot bases. All I/O modules
in the DL205 family will work with any of the CPUs. The DL205
CPUs offer a wide range of processing power and program instructions. All offer RLL and
Stage program instructions (See Chapter 5). They also provide extensive internal diagnostics
that can be monitored from the application program or from an operator interface.
DL230 CPU Features
The DL230 has 2.4K words of memory comprised of 2.0K of ladder memory and approximately
400 words of V-memory (data registers). It has 92 different instructions available for
programming, and supports a maximum of 256 I/O points.
Program storage is in the factory-installed EEPROM. In addition to the EEPROM there is
also RAM on the CPU which will store system parameters, V-memory, and other data which
is not in the application program.
The DL230 provides one built-in RS-232 communication port, so you can easily connect a
handheld programmer or a personal computer without needing any additional hardware.
DL240 CPU Features
The DL240 has a maximum of 3.8K of memory comprised of 2.5K of ladder memory and
approximately 1.3K of V-memory (data registers). There are 129 instructions available for
program development and a maximum of 256 points local I/O, and 896 points with remote
I/O are supported.
Program storage is in the factory-installed EEPROM. In addition to the EEPROM, there is
also RAM on the CPU that will store system parameters, V-memory and other data which is
not in the application program.
The DL240 has two communication ports. The top port is the same port configuration as the
DL230. The bottom port also supports the DirectNET protocol, so you can use the DL240 in
a DirectNET network. Since the port is RS-232, you must use an RS-232/RS-422 converter
for multi-drop connections.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations
DL250–1 CPU Features
The DL250–1 replaces the DL250 CPU. It offers all the DL240 features, plus more program
instructions and a built–in Remote I/O Master port. It offers all the features of the DL250 CPU
with the addition of supporting Local expansion I/O. It has a maximum of 14.8K of program
memory comprised of 7.6K of ladder memory and 7.2K of V-memory (data registers). It
supports a maximum of 256 points of local I/O and a maximum of 768 I/O points (maximum
of two local expansion bases). In addition, port 2 supports up to 2048 points if you use the
DL250–1 as a Remote master. It includes an internal RISC–based microprocessor for greater
processing power. The DL250–1 has 240 instructions. The instructions are in addition to
the DL240 instruction set which includes drum timers, a print function, floating point math,
PID loop control for 4 loops and the Intelligent Box (IBox) instructions.
The DL250–1 has a total of two built–in communications ports. The top port is identical to
the top port of the DL240, with the exception of the DirectNet slave feature. The bottom port
is a 15–pin RS-232/RS-422 port. It will interface with DirectSOFT and operator interfaces,
and provides DirectNet and Modbus RTU Master/Slave connections.
DL260 CPU Features
The DL260 offers all the DL250–1 features, plus ASCII IN/OUT and expanded Modbus
instructions. It also supports up to 1280 local I/O points by using up to four local expansion
bases. It has a maximum of 30.4K of program memory comprised of 15.8K of ladder memory
(saved on flash memory) and 14.6K of V-memory (data registers). It also includes an internal
RISC–based microprocessor for greater processing power. The DL260 has 297 instructions.
In addition to those in the DL250–1 instruction set, the DL260 instruction set includes table
instructions, trigonometric instructions and support for 16 PID loops.
The DL260 has a total of two built–in communications ports. The top port is identical to the
top port of the DL250–1. The bottom port is a 15–pin RS-232/RS-422/RS-485 port. It will
interface with DirectSOFT (version 4.0 or later), operator interfaces, and provides DirectNet,
Modbus RTU Master/Slave connections. Port 2 also supports ASCII IN/OUT instructions.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
3-3
Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
CPU General Specifications
Feature
Total Program memory (words)
Ladder memory (words)
V-memory (words)
Non-volatile V Memory (words)
Boolean execution /K
RLL and RLLPLUS Programming
Handheld programmer
DL230
DL240
DL250–1
DL260
3.8K
2560
1024
256
10–12 ms
Yes
Yes
14.8K
7680 (Flash)
7168
No
1.9 ms
Yes
Yes
DirectSOFT programming for Windows. Yes
Yes
Yes
Built-in communication ports
One RS–232
Two RS–232
EEPROM
Standard on CPU
Standard on CPU
One RS–232
One RS–232 or
RS–422
Flash
Total CPU memory I/O points available 256 (X,Y,CR)
896 (X, Y, CR)
2048 (X, Y, CR)
Local I/O points available
Local Expansion I/O points (including
local I/O and expansion I/O points)
256
256
256
N/A
N/A
768
1280
(2 exp. bases max.) (4 exp. bases max.)
Serial Remote I/O points (including
local I/O and expansion I/O points)
N/A
896
2048
8192
Serial Remote I/O Channels
N/A
2
8
8
Max Number of Serial Remote Slaves
N/A
7 Remote / 31 Slice 7 Remote / 31 Slice 7 Remote / 31 Slice
Ethernet Remote I/O Discrete points
N/A
896
Ethernet Remote I/O Analog I/O
channels
N/A
Map into V–memory Map into V–memory Map into V–memory
Ethernet Remote I/O channels
N/A
Limited by power
budget
Limited by power
budget
Limited by power
budget
Max Number of Ethernet slaves per
channel
N/A
16
16
16
I/O points per Remote channel
N/A
16,384 (limited to
896 by CPU)
16,384 (16 fully
expanded H4–EBC
slaves using V–
memory and bit–of–
word instructions)
16,384 (16 fully
expanded H4–EBC
slaves using V–
memory and bit–of–
word instructions
I/O Module Point Density
Slots per Base
4/8/12/16/32
3/4/6/9
4/8/12/16/32
3/4/6/9
4/8/12/16/32
3/4/6/9
4/8/12/16/32
3/4/6/9
3-4
2.4K
2048
256
128
4–6 ms
Yes
Yes
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
2048
30.4K
15872 (Flash)
14592
No
1.9 ms
Yes
Yes
Yes (requires
version 4.0 or
higher)
One RS–232
One RS–232,
RS–422 or RS–485
Flash
8192
(X, Y, CR, GX, GY)
256
8192
Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations
Feature
Number of instructions available
(see Chapter 5 for details)
Control relays
Special relays (system defined)
Stages in RLLPLUS
Timers
Counters
Immediate I/O
Interrupt input (hardware / timed)
Subroutines
Drum Timers
Table Instructions
For/Next Loops
DL230
DL240
DL250–1
DL260
92
129
240
297
256
112
256
64
64
Yes
Yes / No
No
No
No
No
256
144
512
128
128
Yes
Yes / Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
1024
144
1024
256
128
Yes
Yes / Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Math
Integer
Integer
Integer,
Floating Point
ASCII
PID Loop Control, Built In
Time of Day Clock/Calendar
Run Time Edits
Supports Overrides
Internal diagnostics
Password security
System error log
User error log
Battery backup
No
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes (optional)
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes (optional)
Yes, OUT
Yes, 4 Loops
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes (optional)
2048
144
1024
256
256
Yes
Yes / Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Integer,
Floating Point,
Trigonometric
Yes, IN/OUT
Yes, 16 Loops
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes (optional)
CPU Base Electrical Specifications
Specification
AC Powered Bases
24 VDC Powered Bases 125 VDC Powered Bases
D2–03BDC1–1
D2–04BDC1–1
D2–06BDC2–1
D2–06BDC1–1
D2–09BDC2–1
D2–09BDC1–1
10.2–28.8 VDC (24VDC)
100–240 VAC +10% –15%
104–240 VDC +10% –15%
Input Voltage Range
with less than 10% ripple
30A
10A
20A
Maximum Inrush Current
80VA
25W
30W
Maximum Power
Voltage Withstand (dielectric) 1 minute @ 1500VAC between primary, secondary, field ground, and run relay
> 10Mq at 500VDC
Insulation Resistance
20–28 VDC, less than 1V p-p
20–28 VDC, less than 1V p-p
None
Auxiliary 24 VDC Output
300mA max.
300mA max.
Part Numbers
D2–03B–1
D2–04B–1
D2–06B–1
D2–09B–1
Fusing (internal to base power Non–replaceable 2A @ 250V Non–replaceable 3.15 A @
slow blow fuse
250V slow blow fuse
supply)
Non–replaceable 2A @ 250V
slow blow fuse
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
3-5
Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
CPU Hardware Setup
Communication Port Pinout Diagrams
Cables are available that allow you to quickly and easily connect a Handheld Programmer or
a personal computer to the DL205 CPUs. However, if you need to build a cable(s), use the
pinout descriptions shown on the following pages. You can also use the Tech Support/Cable
Wiring diagrams located on our website.
The DL240, DL250–1 and DL260 CPUs have two ports while the DL230 has only one. All
of the CPUs require at least one RJ-12 connector. The DL250-1 and DL260 require one 15
pin D-shell connector.
Port 1
DL250–1 and DL260
RJ12 Phone Jack
RS-232, 9600 baud
Communication Port
–K-sequence
–DirectNET slave
–Modbus RTU slave
–easily connect
DirectSOFT,
handhelds, operator
interfaces, any DirectNet
master
3-6
RUN
CPU
PWR
BATT
DL230
CPU
DL260
Port 2
DL250–1 and DL260
15-pin HD Connector
RS-232/RS-422, up to 38.4K baud
Communication Port
–K-sequence
–DirectNET Master/Slave
–Modbus RTU Master/Slave
–easily connect
DirectSOFT,
handhelds, operator
interfaces, any DirectNet
or Modbus master or slave
Port 1
RJ12 Phone Jack
RS-232, 9600 baud
Communication Port
–K-sequence
–easily connect
DirectSOFT, handhelds,
operator interfaces, etc.
Port 2
PORT
?1
RJ12 Phone Jack
RS-232, up to 19.2K baud
Communication Port
–K-sequence
–DirectNET slave
–easily connect
DirectSOFT, handhelds,
operator interfaces, or any
DirectNet master
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Port 2
Additional DL260 Features
–ASCII IN/OUT Instructions
–Extended Modbus Instructions
–RS-485 support
PWR
BATT
RUN
CPU
DL240
CPU
RUN
TERM
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4
PORT1
PORT2
Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations
Port 1 Specifications
230
240
250-1
260
The operating parameters for Port 1 on the DL230 and DL240 CPUs are fixed.
• 6-pin female modular (RJ12 phone jack) type connector
• K–sequence protocol (slave only)
• RS-232, 9600 baud
• Connect to DirectSOFT, D2–HPP, DV–1000, HMI panels
• Fixed station address of 1
• 8 data bits, one stop
• Asynchronous, Half–duplex, DTE
• Odd parity
1
6
6-pin Female
Modular Connector
Port 1 Pin Descriptions (DL230 and DL240)
1
2
3
4
5
6
0V
5V
RXD
TXD
5V
0V
Power (–) connection (GND)
Power (+) connection
Receive Data (RS-232)
Transmit Data (RS-232)
Power (+) connection
Power (–) connection (GND)
Port 1 Specifications
230
240
250-1
260
The operating parameters for Port 1 on the DL250–1 and DL260 CPU are fixed. This applies
to the DL250 as well.
• 6-pin female modular (RJ12 phone jack) type connector
• K–sequence protocol (slave only)
• DirectNET (slave only)
• Modbus RTU (slave only) - supported only on D2-250-1 and D2-260
• RS-232, 9600 baud
• Connect to DirectSOFT, D2–HPP, DV1000 or DirectNET master
• 8 data bits, one start, one stop
• Asynchronous, Half–duplex, DTE
• Odd parity
Port 1 Pin Descriptions (DL250-1 and DL260)
1
6
6-pin Female
Modular Connector
1
2
3
4
5
6
0V
5V
RXD
TXD
5V
0V
Power (–) connection (GND)
Power (+) connection
Receive Data (RS-232C)
Transmit Data (RS-232C
Power (+) connection
Power (–) connection (GND)
NOTE: The 5V pins are rated at 200mA maximum, primarily for use with some operator interface units.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
3-7
Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Port 2 Specifications
230
240
250-1
260
The operating parameters for Port 2 on the DL240 CPU are configurable using Aux functions
on a programming device.
• 6-Pin female modular (RJ12 phone jack)
type connector
1
6
• K–sequence protocol, DirectNET (slave),
• RS-232, Up to 19.2K baud
6-pin Female
Modular Connector
• Address selectable (1–90)
• Connect to DirectSOFT, D2–HPP,
DV-1000, HMI, or DirectNET master
• 8 data bits, one start, one stop
• Asynchronous, Half–duplex, DTE
• Odd or no parity
Port 2 Specifications
230
240
250-1
260
3-8
Port 2 Pin Descriptions (DL240 only)
1
2
3
4
5
6
0V
5V
RXD
TXD
RTS
0V
Power (–) connection (GND)
Power (+) connection
Receive Data (RS-232)
Transmit Data (RS-232)
Request to Send
Power (–) connection (GND)
Port 2 on the DL250-1 and DL260 CPUs
is located on the 15-pin D-shell connector. It is configurable using AUX functions on a
programming device. This applies to the
6
11
1
DL250 as well.
• 15-Pin female D type connector
• Protocol: K-sequence, DirectNET Master/
Slave, Modbus RTU Master/Slave, Remote
I/O, (ASCII IN/OUT DL260 only)
10
5
• RS-232, non-isolated, distance within 15m
(approximately 50ft)
• RS-422, non-isolated, distance within
1000 m (approximately 3280ft)
• RS-485, non–isolated, distance within
1000m (DL260 only
15-pin Female
D Connector
Port 2 Pin Descriptions (DL250–1 / DL260)
1
2
• Up to 38.4 K baud
3
• Address selectable (1–90)
4
• Connects to DirectSOFT, D2–HPP,
5
operator interfaces, any DirectNET or
Modbus master/slave, (ASCII devices-DL260 6
7
only)
8
• 8 data bits, one start, one stop
9
• Asynchronous, Half–duplex, DTE Remote
10
I/O
11
• Odd/even/none parity
12
13
14
15
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
15
5V
TXD2
RXD2
RTS2
CTS2
RXD2 –
0V
0V
TXD2 +
TXD2 –
RTS2 +
RTS2 –
RXD2 +
CTS2 +
CTS2 –
5VDC
Transmit Data (RS-232)
Receive Data (RS-232)
Ready to Send (RS–232)
Clear to Send (RS–232)
Receive Data – ( RS–422) (RS–485 DL260)
Logic Ground
Logic Ground
Transmit Data + (RS–422) (RS–485 DL260)
Transmit Data – (RS–422) (RS–485 DL260)
Request to Send + (RS–422) (RS–485 DL260)
Request to Send – (RS–422)(RS–485 DL260)
Receive Data + (RS–422) (RS–485 DL260)
Clear to Send + (RS422) (RS–485 DL260)
Clear to Send – (RS–422) (RS–485 DL260)
Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations
Selecting the Program Storage Media
Built-in EEPROM
230
240
250-1
260
The DL230 and DL240 CPUs provide built-in EEPROM storage. This type of memory is
non-volatile and is not dependent on battery backup to retain the program. The EEPROM
can be electrically reprogrammed without being removed from the CPU. You can also set
Jumper 3, which will write protect the EEPROM. The jumper is set at the factory to allow
changes to EEPROM. If you select write protection by changing the jumper position, you
cannot make changes to the program.
WARNING: Do NOT change Jumper 2. This is for factory test operations. If you change Jumper 2, the
CPU will not operate properly.
Jumper in position
shown selects write
protect for EEPROM
EEPROM
EEPROM Sizes
The DL230 and DL240 CPUs use different sizes of EEPROMs. The CPUs come from the
factory with EEPROMs already installed. However, if you need extra EEPROMs, select one
that is compatible with the following part numbers.
CPU Type
EEPROM Part Number
Capacity
DL230
DL240
Hitachi HN58C65P–25
Hitachi HN58C256P–20
8K byte (2Kw)
32K byte (3Kw)
EEPROM Operations
Many AUX functions are specifically for use with an EEPROM in the Handheld Programmer.
This enables you to quickly and easily copy programs between a program developed offline in
the Handheld Programmer and the CPU. Also, you can erase EEPROMs, compare them, etc.
See the DL205 Handheld Programmer Manual for details on using these AUX functions with
the Handheld Programmer.
NOTE: If the instructions are supported in both CPUs and the program size is within the limits of the
DL230, you can move a program between the two CPUs. However, the EEPROM installed in the Handheld
Programmer must be the same size as (or larger than) the CPU being used. For example, you could not
install a DL240 EEPROM in the Handheld Programmer and download the program to a DL230. Instead, if
the program is within the size limits of the DL230, use a DL230 chip in the Handheld when you obtain the
program from the DL240.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
3-9
Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Installing the CPU
230
240
250-1
260
3-10
The CPU must be installed in the first slot in the base (closest to the power supply). You
cannot install the CPU in any other slot. When inserting the CPU into the base, align the
PC board with the grooves on the top and bottom of the base. Push the CPU straight into
the base until it is firmly seated in the backplane connector. Use the retaining clips to secure
the CPU to the base.
WARNING: To minimize the risk of electrical shock, personal injury, or equipment damage, always
disconnect the system power before installing or removing any system component.
Retaining Clips
CPU must reside in first slot!
Connecting the Programming Devices
The handheld programmer is connected to the CPU with a Handheld Programmer cable.
You can connect the Handheld Programmer to either port on a DL240 CPU. The Handheld
Programmer is shipped with a cable. The cable is approximately 6.5 ft (200cm).
Connect Handheld to either Port
If you are using a Personal Computer with the DirectSOFT programming package, you can
use either the top or bottom port.
Connect PC to either Port
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations
Status Indicators
PWR
PWR
BATT
RUN
CPU
BATT
DL240
Port 1
DL230
RUN
CPU
CPU
CPU
Mode Switch
RUN
TERM
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4
Adjustments
PORT1
Port 2
PORT1
Analog
PORT?
2
Status Indicators
DL260
DL250-1
Mode Switch
Port 1
Port 2
Battery Slot
CPU Setup Information
Even if you have years of experience using PLCs, there are a few tasks you need to do before
you can start entering programs. This section includes some basic tasks, such as changing the
CPU mode, but it also includes some tasks that you may never have to use. Here’s a brief list
of the items that are discussed:
• Using auxiliary functions
• Clearing the program (and other memory areas)
• How to initialize system memory
• Setting retentive memory ranges
The following paragraphs provide the setup information necessary to ready the CPU for
programming, including set-up instructions for either type of programming device you are
using. The D2–HPP Handheld Programmer Manual provides the Handheld keystrokes
required to perform all of these operations. The DirectSOFT Manual provides a description of
the menus and keystrokes required to perform the setup procedures via DirectSOFT.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
3-11
Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations
Status Indicators
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
The status indicator LEDs on the CPU front panels have specific functions that can help in
programming and troubleshooting.
Indicator
PWR
RUN
CPU
BATT
Status
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Blinking
ON
OFF
Meaning
ON
Power good
Power failure
CPU is in Run Mode
CPU is in Stop or Program Mode
CPU is in Firmware Upgrade Mode
CPU self diagnostics error
CPU self diagnostics good
Low battery voltage (only with System
Memory bit B7633.12 set)
OFF
CPU battery voltage is good or disabled
Mode Switch Functions
The mode switch on the DL240, DL250–1 and DL260 CPUs provides positions for enabling
and disabling program changes in the CPU. Unless the mode switch is in the TERM position,
RUN and STOP mode changes will not be allowed by any interface device, (Handheld
Programmer, DirectSOFT programing package or operator interface). Programs may be
viewed or monitored but no changes may be made. If the switch is in the TERM position and
no program password is in effect, all operating modes as well as program access will be allowed
through the connected programming or monitoring device.
The CPU mode can be changed in two ways:
• Use the CPU mode switch to select the operating mode.
• Place the CPU mode switch in the TERM position and use a programming device to change
operating modes. In this position, you can change between Run and Program modes.
NOTE: If the PLC is switched to the RUN Mode without a program in the CPU, the CPU will produce a
FATAL ERROR which can be cleared by cycling the power to the PLC.
Mode Switch Position
CPU Action
RUN (Run Program)
CPU is forced into the RUN mode if no errors are encountered. No
changes are allowed by the attached programming/monitoring device.
TERM (Terminal)
RUN, PROGRAM and the TEST modes are available. Mode and
program changes are allowed by the programming/monitoring device.
STOP (DL250–1 and DL260 only Stop Program)
CPU is forced into the STOP mode. No changes are allowed by the
programming/monitoring device.
3-12
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations
Changing Modes in the DL205 PLC
Mode Switch Position
CPU Action
CPU is forced into the RUN mode if no errors are encountered.
No changes are allowed by the attached programming/
monitoring device.
PROGRAM and the TEST modes are available. Mode and
program changes are allowed by the programming/monitoring
device.
CPU is forced into the STOP mode. No changes are allowed
by the programming/monitoring device.
RUN (Run Program)
TERM (Terminal) RUN
STOP
The CPU mode can be changed in two ways: you can use the CPU mode switch to select
the operating mode, or you can place the mode switch in the TERM position and use a
programming device to change operating modes. With the switch in this position, the CPU
can be changed between Run and Program modes. You can use either DirectSOFT or the
Handheld Programmer to change the CPU mode of operation. With DirectSOFT use the
PLC menu option PLC > Mode or use the Mode button located on the Online
toolbar. With the Handheld Programmer, use the MODE key.
PLC Menu
MODE Key
Mode of Operation at Power Up
The DL205 CPUs will normally power up in the mode that it was in just prior to the power
interruption. For example, if the CPU was in Program Mode when the power was disconnected,
the CPU will power up in Program Mode (see warning note below).
WARNING: Once the super capacitor has discharged, the system memory may not retain the previous
mode of operation. When this occurs, the PLC can power-up in either Run or Program Mode if the mode
switch is in the term position. There is no way to determine which mode will be entered as the startup
mode. Failure to adhere to this warning greatly increases the risk of unexpected equipment startup.
The mode in which the CPU will power up in is also determined by the state of System
Memory bit B7633.13. If the bit is set and the Mode Switch is in the TERM position, the
CPU will power-up in RUN mode. If B7633.13 is not set with the Mode Switch in TERM
position, then the CPU will power up in the state it was in when it was powered down.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
3-13
Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Using Battery Backup
3-14
An optional lithium battery is available to maintain the system RAM retentive memory when
the DL205 system is without external power. Typical CPU battery life is five years, which
includes PLC runtime and normal shut-down periods. However, consider installing a fresh
battery if your battery has not been changed recently and the system will be shut down for a
period of more than ten days.
NOTE: Before installing or replacing your CPU battery, back up your V-memory and system parameters. You
can do this by using DirectSOFT to save the program, V-memory, and system parameters to hard/floppy
disk on a personal computer.
To install the D2–BAT CPU battery in DL230 or
DL240 CPUs:
1. G
ently push the battery connector onto the circuit
board connector.
2. P
ush the battery into the retaining clip. Don’t use
excessive force. You may break the retaining clip.
3. Make a note of the date the battery was installed.
DL250-1 and DL260
-1
DL230
and DL240
DL230 and DL240
To install the D2–BAT–1 CPU battery in the DL250–1/DL260
CPUs: (#CR2354)
1. P
ress the retaining clip on the battery door down and swing the
battery door open.
2. P
lace the battery into the coin–type slot with the +, or larger, side
out.
3. Close the battery door making sure that it locks securely in place.
4. Make a note of the date the battery was installed.
WARNING: Do not attempt to recharge the battery or dispose of an old battery by fire. The battery may
explode or release hazardous materials.
Battery Backup
The battery backup is available immediately after the battery has been installed in the DL205
CPUs. The battery low (BATT) indicator will turn on if the battery is less than 2.5VDC (refer
to the Status Indicator table on page 3-12). Special Relay 43 (SP43) will also be activated. The
low battery indication is enabled by setting bit 12 of V7633 (B7633.12). If the low-battery
feature is not desired, do not set bit V7633.12.
The super capacitor will retain memory IF it is configured as retentive regardless of the state of
B7633.12. The battery will be the same, but for a much longer time.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations
Auxiliary Functions
Many CPU set-up tasks involve the use of Auxiliary (AUX) Functions. The AUX Functions
perform many different operations, including clearing ladder memory, displaying the scan
time, copying programs to EEPROM in the Handheld Programmer, etc. They are divided
into categories that affect different system parameters. Appendix A provides a description of
the AUX functions.
You can access the AUX Functions from DirectSOFT or from the DL205 Handheld
Programmer. The manuals for those products provide step-by-step procedures for accessing
the AUX Functions. Some of these AUX Functions are designed specifically for the Handheld
Programmer setup, so they will not be needed (or available) with the DirectSOFT package.
The following table shows a list of the Auxiliary functions for the different CPUs and the
Handheld Programmer.
NOTE: The Handheld Programmer may have additional AUX functions that are not supported with the DL205
CPUs.
AUX Function and
Description
AUX Function and
Description
230 240 250–1 260
AUX 2* — RLL Operations
21
22
23
24
Check Program
Change Reference
Clear Ladder Range
Clear All Ladders
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
AUX 6* — Handheld Programmer Configuration
ü
ü
ü
ü
AUX 3* — V-Memory Operations
31 Clear V Memory
ü
ü
ü
ü
AUX 4* — I/O Configuration
41 Show I/O Configuration
42 I/O Diagnostics
Power-up I/O
44
Configuration Check
45 Select Configuration
46 Configure I/O
61 Show Revision Numbers
62 Beeper On / Off
65 Run Self Diagnostics
71
72
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
74
75
ü
X
ü
X
ü
ü
ü
ü
76
ü
Modify Program Name
Display / Change Calendar X
ü
Display Scan Time
ü
Initialize Scratchpad
ü
Set Watchdog Timer
Set CPU Network Address X
ü
Set Retentive Ranges
ü
Test Operations
Bit Override
X
Counter Interface Config. ü
Display Error History
X
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
X
X
ü
X
X
ü
X
X
ü
X
X
–
ü
ü
AUX 7* — EEPROM Operations
ü
ü
AUX 5* — CPU Configuration
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
5B
5C
230 240 250–1 260 HPP
73
Copy CPU memory to
HPP EEPROM
Write HPP EEPROM to CPU
Compare CPU to
HPP EEPROM
Blank Check (HPP EEPROM)
Erase HPP EEPROM
Show EEPROM Type
(CPU and HPP)
X
X
X
X
ü
X
X
X
X
ü
X
X
X
X
ü
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
ü
ü
X
X
X
X
ü
ü
ü
ü
–
–
–
AUX 8* — Password Operations
81 Modify Password
82 Unlock CPU
83 Lock CPU
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü Supported
X Not Supported
- Not Applicable
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
3-15
Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Clearing an Existing Program
Before you enter a new program, you should always clear ladder memory. You can use AUX
Function 24 to clear the complete program.
You can also use other AUX functions to clear other memory areas.
AUX 23 — Clear Ladder Range
AUX 24 — Clear all Ladders
AUX 31 — Clear V-Memory
Initializing System Memory
The DL205 CPUs maintain system parameters in a memory area often referred to as the
“scratchpad.” In some cases, you may make changes to the system setup that will be stored in
system memory. For example, if you specify a range of Control Relays (CRs) as retentive, these
changes are stored. AUX 54 resets the system memory to the default values.
WARNING: You may never have to use this feature unless you want to clear any set-up information
that is stored in system memory. Usually, you will only need to initialize the system memory if you
are changing programs and the old program required a special system setup. You can usually change
from program to program without ever initializing system memory. Remember, this AUX function will
reset all system memory. If you have set special parameters such as retentive ranges, etc., they will
be erased when AUX 54 is used. Make sure that you have considered all ramifications of this operation
before you select it.
Setting the Clock and Calendar
230
240
250-1
260
3-16
The DL240, DL250–1 and DL260 also have a Clock/Calendar that can be used for many
purposes. If you need to use this feature, AUX functions are available that allow you to set the
date and time. For example, you would use AUX 52, Display/Change Calendar to set the time
and date with the Handheld Programmer. With DirectSOFT you would use the PLC set-up
menu options using K–Sequence protocol only.
The CPU uses the following format to display the date and time.
• Date — Year, Month, Date, Day of week (0 – 6, Sunday
through Saturday)
• Time —24-hour format, Hours, Minutes, Seconds
Handheld Programmer Display
23:08:17 08/02/20
You can use the AUX function to change any component of the date or time. However, the
CPU will not automatically correct any discrepancy between the date and the day of the week.
For example, if you change the date to the 15th of the month and the 15th is on a Thursday,
you will also have to change the day of the week (unless the CPU already shows the date as
Thursday). The day of the week can only be set using the Handheld Programmer.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations
Setting the CPU Network Address
240
250-1
260
230
The DL240, DL250–1 and DL260 CPUs have built in DirectNet ports. You can use the
Handheld Programmer to set the network address for the port and the port communication
parameters. The default settings are:
• Station Address 1
• Hex Mode
• Odd Parity
• 9600 Baud
The DirectNet Manual provides additional information about choosing the communication
settings for network operation.
Setting Retentive Memory Ranges
The DL205 CPUs provide certain ranges of retentive memory by default. The default ranges
are suitable for many applications, but you can change them if your application requires
additional retentive ranges or no retentive ranges at all. The default settings are:
DL230
Memory
Area
Control Relays
V-Memory
Timers
Counters
Stages
DL240
DL250–1
DL260
Default Range Avail. Range Default Range
Avail. Range Default Range
Avail. Range Default Range
Avail. Range
C300 – C377
V2000 – V7777
None by default
CT0 – CT77
None by default
C0 – C377
V0 – V7777
T0 – T177
CT0 – CT177
S0 – S777
C0 – C1777
V0 – V17777
T0 – T377
CT0 – CT177
S0 – S1777
C0 – C3777
V0 – V37777
T0 – T377
CT0 – CT377
S0 – S1777
C0 – C377
V0 – V7777
T0 – T77
CT0 – CT77
S0 – S377
C300 – C377
V2000 – V7777
None by default
CT0 – CT177
None by default
C1000 – C1777
V1400 – V3777
None by default
CT0 – CT177
None by default
C1000 – C3777
V400 – V37777
None by default
CT0 – CT377
None by default
You can use AUX 57 to set the retentive ranges. You can also use DirectSOFT menus to select
the retentive ranges.
WARNING: The DL205 CPUs do not come with a battery. The super capacitor will retain the values in
the event of a power loss, but only for a short period of time, depending on conditions. If the retentive
ranges are important for your application, make sure you obtain the optional battery.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
3-17
Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
3-18
Using a Password
The DL205 CPUs allow you to use a password to help minimize the risk of unauthorized
program and/or data changes. Once you enter a password you can “lock” the CPU against
access. Once the CPU is locked you must enter the password before you can use a programming
device to change any system parameters.
You can select an 8-digit numeric password. The CPUs are shipped from the factory with a
password of 00000000. All zeros removes the password protection. If a password has been
entered into the CPU, you cannot enter all zeros to remove it. Once you enter the correct
password, you can change the password to all zeros to remove the password protection. For
more information on passwords, see the appropriate appendix on auxiliary functions.
WARNING: Make sure you remember your password. If you forget your password you will not be able
to access the CPU. The CPU must be returned to the factory to have the password (along with the
ladder project) removed. It is the policy of AutomationDirect to require the memory of the PLC to be
cleared along with the password.
You can use the D2–HPP Handheld Programmer
or DirectSOFT to enter a password. The following
diagram shows how you can enter a password with the
Handheld Programmer.
Direct SOFT
Select AUX 81
CLR
CLR
I
8
B
1
AUX
ENT
D2–HPP
PASSWORD
00000000
Enter the new 8-digit password
X
X
X
ENT
PASSWORD
XXXXXXXX
Press CLR to clear the display
The CPU can be locked three ways once the password has been entered.
•If the CPU power is disconnected, the CPU will be automatically locked against access.
•If you enter the password with DirectSOFT, the CPU will be automatically locked against access
when you exit DirectSOFT.
•Use AUX 83 to lock the CPU.
When you use DirectSOFT, you will be prompted for a password if the CPU has been locked.
If you use the Handheld Programmer, you have to use AUX 82 to unlock the CPU. Once you
enter AUX 82, you will be prompted to enter the password.
NOTE: The DL240, DL250–1 and DL260 CPUs offer multi–level passwords for even more password
protection of the ladder program. This allows password protection while not locking the communication port
to an operator interface. The multi-level password can be invoked by creating a password with an upper case
“A” followed by seven numeric characters (e.g., A1234567).
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations
Setting the Analog Potentiometer Ranges
230
240
250-1
260
Four analog potentiometers (pots) are on the
face plate of the DL240 CPU. These pots can
be used to change timer constants, frequency of
pulse train output, value for an analog output
module, etc.
Each analog channel has corresponding
V-memory locations for setting lower and upper
limits for each analog channel.
To increase the value associated with the analog
pot, turn the pot clockwise. To decrease the
value, turn the pot counter clockwise
PWR
BATT
RUN
CPU
DL240
CPU
RUN
TERM
CH1
CH2
Analog Pots
CH3
CH4
PORT1
?
PORT2
0
Turn clockwise to increase value.
Max
CH1
The table below shows the V-memory locations
used for each analog channel. These are the
default locations for the analog pots.
CH1
Analog Data
Analog Data Lower Limit
Analog Data Upper Limit
V3774
V7640
V7641
CH2
CH2
V3775
V7642
V7643
You can use the program logic to load the limits
into these locations, or, you can use a programming
device to load the values. The range for each limit
is 0 – 9999.
These analog pots have a resolution of 256 pieces.
Therefore, if the span between the upper and lower
limits is less than or equal to 256, then you have
better resolution or, more precise control.
Use the formula shown to determine the smallest
amount of change that can be detected.
For example, a range of 100 – 600 would result in a
resolution of 1.95. Therefore, the smallest increment
would be 1.95 units. (The actual result depends on
exactly how you are using the values in the control
program).
CH3
V3776
V7644
V7645
CH4
V3777
V7646
V7647
Resolution = H – L
256
H = high limit of the range
L = low limit of the range
Example Calculations:
H = 600
L = 100
Resolution = 600–100
256
Resolution = 500
256
Resolution = 1.95
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
3-19
Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
The following example shows how you could use these analog potentiometers to change the
preset value for a timer. See Chapter 5 for details on how these instructions operate.
Program loads ranges into V-memory
DirectSOFT
SP0
LD
K100
Load the lower limit (100) for the analog range on Ch1 into V7640.
OUT
V7640
LD
K600
X1
OUT
V7641
Load the upper limit (600) for the analog range on Ch1 into V7641.
TMR
T20
V3774
Use V3774 as the preset for the timer. This will allow you to quickly
adjust the preset from 100 to 600 with the CH1 analog pot.
Y0
T20
OUT
Turn all the way counter-clockwise to use lowest value
100
Timing Diagram
preset = 100
600
CH1
X1
CH2
T2
Y0
Current
Value
0
100
200
300
400
1/10 Seconds
500
600
0
500
600
0
Turn clockwise to increase the timer preset.
3-20
100
CH1
Timing Diagram
preset = 300
600
X1
CH2
T2
Y0
Current
Value
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
0
100
200
300
400
1/10 Seconds
Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations
CPU Operation
Achieving the proper control for your equipment or process requires a good understanding
of how DL205 CPUs control all aspects of system operation. The flowchart below shows the
main tasks of the CPU operating system. In this section, we
will investigate four aspects of CPU operation:
Power up
• CPU Operating System — The CPU manages all aspects of
system control.
Initialize hardware
• CPU Operating Modes — The three primary modes of
operation are Program Mode, Run Mode, and Test Mode.
Check I/O module
config. and verify
• CPU Timing — The two important areas we discuss are the
I/O response time and the CPU scan time.
Initialize various memory
based on retentive
configuration
• CPU Memory Map — The CPU’s memory map shows the
CPU addresses of various system resources, such as timers,
counters, inputs, and outputs.
Update input
Read input data from
Specialty and Remote I/O
CPU Operating System
At power up, the CPU initializes the internal electronic
hardware. Memory initialization starts with examining
the retentive memory settings. In general, the contents of
retentive memory are preserved, and non-retentive memory
is initialized to zero (unless otherwise specified).
After the one-time power-up tasks, the CPU begins the
cyclical scan activity. The flowchart to the right shows how
the tasks differ based on the CPU mode and the existence
of any errors. The “scan time” is defined as the average
time around the task loop. Note that the CPU is always
reading the inputs, even during program mode. This allows
programming tools to monitor input status at any time.
The outputs are only updated in Run mode. In Program
mode, they are in the off state.
In Run Mode, the CPU executes the user ladder program.
Immediately afterwards, any PID loops which are
configured are executed (DL250-1 and DL260). Then
the CPU writes the output results of these two tasks to the
appropriate output points.
Error detection has two levels: Non-fatal and fatal. Nonfatal errors are reported, but the CPU remains in its current
mode. If a fatal error occurs, the CPU is forced into
program mode and the outputs go off.
Service peripheral
CPU Bus Communication
Update Clock / Calendar
PGM
Mode?
RUN
Execute ladder program
PID Operations (DL250-1/DL260)
Update output
Write output data to
Specialty and Remote I/O
Do diagnostics
OK
OK?
YES
NO
Report the error, set flag,
register, turn on LED
Fatal error
YES
Force CPU into
PGM mode
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
NO
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
3-21
Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
3-22
Program Mode Operation
In Program Mode the CPU does not execute
X0
Y0
_ X10
_
_
the application program or update the output
X7 X17 Y7
modules. The primary use for Program Mode
is to enter or change an application program.
You also use the program mode to set up
CPU parameters, such as the network address,
retentive memory areas, etc.
Download Program
You can use the mode switch on the DL250–1 and DL260 CPUs to select Program Mode
operation. Or, with the switch in TERM position, you can use a programming device such as
the Handheld Programmer to place the CPU in Program Mode.
Run Mode Operation
In Run Mode, the CPU executes the application
program, does PID calculations for configured
PID loops (DL250-1/DL260), and updates the
I/O system. You can perform many operations
during Run Mode. Some of these include:
• Monitor and change I/O point status
• Update timer/counter preset values
• Update Variable memory locations
Read Inputs
Read Inputs from Specialty I/O
Service Peripherals, Force I/O
CPU Bus Communication
Run Mode operation can be divided into several
Update Clock, Special Relays
key areas. It is very important you understand
how each of these areas of execution can affect
Solve the Application Program
the results of your application program solutions.
Solve PID Equations (DL250-1/DL260)
You can use the mode switch to select Run Mode
operation (DL240, DL250–1 and DL260).
Or, with the mode switch in TERM position,
Write Outputs
you can use a programming device, such as the
Handheld Programmer, to place the CPU in
Write Outputs to Specialty I/O
Run Mode.
You can also edit the program during Run Mode.
Diagnostics
The Run Mode Edits are not “bumpless.”
Instead, the CPU maintains the outputs in
their last state while it accepts the new program information. If an error is found in the new
program, then the CPU will turn all the outputs off and enter the Program Mode.
WARNING: Only authorized personnel fully familiar with all aspects of the application should make
changes to the program. Changes during Run Mode become effective immediately. Make sure you
thoroughly consider the impact of any changes to minimize the risk of personal injury or damage to
equipment.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations
Read Inputs
The CPU reads the status of all inputs, then stores it in the image register. Input image register
locations are designated with an X followed by a memory location. Image register data is used
by the CPU when it solves the application program. Of course, an input may change after
the CPU has read the inputs. Generally, the CPU scan time is measured in milliseconds. If
you have an application that cannot wait until the next I/O update, you can use Immediate
Instructions. These do not use the status of the input image register to solve the application
program. The Immediate instructions immediately read the input status directly from I/O
modules. However, this lengthens the program scan since the CPU has to read the I/O point
status again. A complete list of the Immediate instructions is included in Chapter 5.
Read Inputs from Specialty and Remote I/O
After the CPU reads the inputs from the input
modules, it reads any input point data from any
Specialty modules that are installed, such as Counter
Interface modules, etc. This is also the portion of
the scan that reads the input status from Remote I/O
bases.
_
_
_
DL250–1/260
RSSS
_
_
_
NOTE: It may appear the Remote I/O point status is
updated every scan. This is not quite true. The CPU will receive information from the Remote I/O Master
module every scan, but the Remote Master may not have received an update from all the Remote Slaves.
Remember, the Remote I/O link is managed by the Remote Master, not the CPU.
Service Peripherals and Force I/O
After the CPU reads the inputs from the input modules, it reads any attached peripheral
devices. This is primarily a communications service for any attached devices. For example,
it would read a programming device to see if any input, output, or other memory type status
needs to be modified. Two basic types of forcing are available with the DL205 CPUs.
NOTE: DirectNet protocol does not support bit operations.
• Forcing from a peripheral – not a permanent force, good only for one scan
• Bit Override (DL240, DL250–1 and DL260) – holds the I/O point (or other bit) in the current
state. Valid bits are X, Y, C, T, CT, and S. These memory types are discussed in more detail later
in this chapter.
Regular Forcing — This type of forcing can temporarily change the status of a discrete bit.
For example, you may want to force an input on, even though it is really off. This allows you
to change the point status that was stored in the image register. This value will be valid until
the image register location is written to during the next scan. This is primarily useful during
testing situations when you need to force a bit on to trigger another event.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
3-23
Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Bit Override — (DL240, DL250–1 and DL260) Bit override can be enabled on a point-bypoint basis by using AUX 59 from the Handheld Programmer or, by a menu option from
within DirectSOFT. Bit override basically disables any changes to the discrete point by the
CPU. For example, if you enable bit override for X1, and X1 is off at the time, then the CPU
will not change the state of X1. This means that even if X1 comes on, the CPU will not
acknowledge the change. So, if you used X1 in the program, it would always be evaluated as
“off” in this case. Of course, if X1 was on when the bit override was enabled, then X1 would
always be evaluated as “on.” There is an advantage available when you use the bit override
feature. The regular forcing is not disabled because the bit override is enabled. For example, if
you enabled the Bit Override for Y0 and it was off at the time, then the CPU would not change
the state of Y0. However, you can still use a programming device to change the status. Now, if
you use the programming device to force Y0 on, it will remain on and the CPU will not change
the state of Y0. If you then force Y0 off, the CPU will maintain Y0 as off. The CPU will never
update the point with the results from the application program or from the I/O update until
the bit override is removed. The following diagram shows a brief overview of the bit override
feature. Notice the CPU does not update the Image Register when bit override is enabled
Input Update
Bit Override OFF
3-24
X128
OFF
Y128
OFF
C377
OFF
Force from
Programmer
Result of Program
Solution
...
...
...
...
...
...
X2
ON
Y2
ON
C2
ON
X1
ON
Y1
ON
C1
OFF
Input Update
X0
OFF
Y0
OFF
C0
OFF
Force from
Programmer
Bit Override ON
Result of Program
Solution
Image Register (example)
CPU Bus Communication
Specialty Modules, such as the Data Communications Module, can transfer data to and from
the CPU over the CPU bus on the backplane. This data is more than standard I/O point
status. This type of communications can only occur on the CPU (local) base. A portion of the
execution cycle is used to communicate with these modules. The CPU performs both read and
write requests during this segment.
DCM
_
_
DATA
_
DCM
_
_
_
Update Clock, Special Relays and Special Registers
The DL240 , DL250–1 and DL260 CPUs have an internal real-time clock and calendar
timer which are accessible to the application program. Special V-memory locations hold this
information. This portion of the execution cycle makes sure these locations get updated on
every scan. Several different Special Relays, such as diagnostic relays, etc., are also updated
during this segment.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations
Solve Application Program
The CPU evaluates each instruction in the application
program during this segment of the scan cycle. The
instructions define the relationship between input
conditions and the system outputs.
The CPU begins with the first rung of the ladder program,
evaluating it from left to right and from top to bottom. It
continues, rung by rung, until it encounters the END coil
instruction. At that point, a new image for the outputs is
complete.
X0
X1
Y0
OUT
C0
Read Inputs from Specialty I/O
Service Peripherals, Force I/O
CPU Bus Communication
Update Clock, Special Relays
Solve the Application Program
Solve PID equations (DL250-1/DL260)
C100
X5
Read Inputs
LD
X10
K10
Write Outputs
Y3
OUT
END
Write Outputs to Specialty I/O
Diagnostics
The internal control relays (C), the stages (S), and the
variable memory (V) are also updated in this segment.
You may recall the CPU may have obtained and stored forcing information when it serviced
the peripheral devices. If any I/O points or memory data have been forced, the output image
register also contains this information.
NOTE: If an output point was used in the application program, the results of the program solution will
overwrite any forcing information that was stored. For example, if Y0 was forced on by the programming
device, and a rung containing Y0 was evaluated such that Y0 should be turned off, then the output image
register will show that Y0 should be off. Of course, you can force output points that are not used in the
application program. In this case, the point remains forced because there is no solution that results from
the application program execution.
Solve PID Loop Equations
230
240
250-1
260
The DL260 CPU can process up to 16 PID loops and the DL250–1 can process up to 4 PID
loops. The loop calculations are run as a separate task from the ladder program execution,
immediately following it. Only loops that have been configured are calculated, and then only
according to a built-in loop scheduler. The sample time (calculation interval) of each loop is
programmable. Please refer to Chapter 8, PID Loop Operation, for more on the effects of PID
loop calculation on the overall CPU scan time.
Write Outputs
Once the application program has solved the instruction logic and constructed the output
image register, the CPU writes the contents of the output image register to the corresponding
output points located in the local CPU base or the local expansion bases. Remember, the CPU
also made sure any forcing operation changes were stored in the output image register, so the
forced points get updated with the status specified earlier.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
3-25
Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
3-26
Write Outputs to Specialty and Remote I/O
After the CPU updates the outputs in the local and expansion bases, it sends the output point
information that is required by any Specialty modules that are installed. For example, this is
the portion of the scan that writes the output status from the image register to the Remote I/O
racks.
NOTE: It may appear the Remote I/O point status is updated every scan. This is not quite true. The
CPU will send the information to the Remote I/O Master module every scan, but the Remote Master will
update the actual remote modules during the next communication sequence between the master and slave
modules. Remember, the Remote I/O link communication is managed by the Remote Master, not the CPU.
Diagnostics
During this part of the scan, the CPU performs all
system diagnostics and other tasks, such as:
• calculating the scan time
• updating special relays
Read Inputs
Read Inputs from Specialty I/O
Service Peripherals, Force I/O
• resetting the watchdog timer
CPU Bus Communication
DL205 CPUs automatically detect and report
many different error conditions. Appendix
B contains a listing of the various error codes
Update Clock, Special Relays
available with the DL205 system.
Solve the Application Program
One of the more important diagnostic tasks is
the scan time calculation and watchdog timer
Solve PID Loop Equations
control. DL205 CPUs have a “watchdog” timer
that stores the maximum time allowed for the
CPU to complete the solve application segment
Write Outputs
of the scan cycle. The default value set from the
factory is 200ms. If this time is exceeded the CPU
Write Outputs to Specialty I/O
will enter the Program Mode, turn off all outputs,
and report the error. For example, the Handheld
Diagnostics
Programmer displays “E003 S/W TIMEOUT”
when the scan overrun occurs.
You can use AUX 53 to view the minimum, maximum, and current scan time. Use AUX 55
to increase or decrease the watchdog timer value. There is also an RSTWT instruction that can
be used in the application program to reset the watch dog timer during the CPU scan.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations
I/O Response Time
Is Timing Important for Your Application?
I/O response time is the amount of time required for the control system to sense a change in
an input point and update a corresponding output point. In the majority of applications, the
CPU performs this task practically instantaneously. However, some applications do require
extremely fast update times. Four things can affect the I/O response time:
• The point in the scan period when the field input changes states
• Input module Off to On delay time
• CPU scan time
• Output module Off to On delay time
Normal Minimum I/O Response
The I/O response time is shortest when the module senses the input change before the Read
Inputs portion of the execution cycle. In this case the input status is read, the application
program is solved, and the output point gets updated. The following diagram shows an
example of the timing for this situation.
Scan
Solve
Program
Scan
Solve
Program
Read
Inputs
Solve
Program
Solve
Program
Write
Outputs
Field Input
Input Module
Off/On Delay
CPU Reads
Inputs
CPU Writes
Outputs
Output Module
Off/On Delay
I/O Response Time
In this case, you can calculate the response time by simply adding the following items:
Input Delay + Scan Time + Output Delay = Response Time
Normal Maximum I/O Response
The I/O response time is longest when the module senses the input change after the Read
Inputs portion of the execution cycle. In this case the new input status does not get read until
the following scan. The following diagram shows an example of the timing for this situation.
In this case, you can calculate the response time by simply adding the following items:
Input Delay +(2 x Scan Time) + Output Delay = Response Time
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
3-27
Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations
Scan
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Solve
Program
Solve
Program
Scan
Read
Inputs
Solve
Program
Solve
Program
Write
Outputs
Field Input
CPU Reads
Inputs
Input Module
Off/On Delay
CPU Writes
Outputs
Output Module
Off/On Delay
I/O Response Time
Improving Response Time
You can do a few things to help improve throughput.
• Choose instructions with faster execution times
• Use immediate I/O instructions (which update the I/O points during the ladder program
execution segment)
• Choose modules that have faster response times
Immediate I/O instructions are probably the most useful technique. The following example
shows immediate input and output instructions and their effect.
Scan
Solve
Program
Scan
Normal Read
Input
Solve
Program
Read
Input
Immediate
Solve
Program
Write
Output
Immediate
Solve
Program
Normal
Write
Outputs
Field Input
Input Module
Off/On Delay
Output Module
Off/On Delay
3-28
I/O Response Time
In this case, you can calculate the response time by simply adding the following items:
Input Delay + Instruction Execution Time + Output Delay = Response Time
The instruction execution time is calculated by adding the time for the immediate input
instruction, the immediate output instruction, and all instructions in between.
NOTE: When the immediate instruction reads the current status from a module, it uses the results to solve
that one instruction without updating the image register. Therefore, any regular instructions that follow
will still use image register values. Any immediate instructions that follow will access the module again to
update the status.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations
CPU Scan Time Considerations
The scan time covers all the cyclical tasks
that the operating system performs. You
can use DirectSOFT or the Handheld
Programmer to display the minimum,
maximum, and current scan times that have
occurred since the previous Program Mode
to Run Mode transition. This information
can be very important when evaluating
system performance.
As shown previously, there are several
segments that make up the scan cycle. Each
of these segments requires a certain amount
of time to complete. Of all the segments,
the only one you really have the most control
over is the amount of time it takes to execute
the application program. This is because
different instructions take different amounts
of time to execute. So, if you think you need
a faster scan, then you can try to choose
faster instructions.
Your choice of I/O modules and system
configuration, such as expansion or remote
I/O, can also affect the scan time; however,
the application usually dictates them.
For example, if you need to count pulses at
high rates of speed, then you will probably
have to use a High-Speed Counter module.
Also, if you have I/O points that need to be
located several hundred feet from the CPU,
then you need remote I/O because it is much
faster and cheaper to install a single remote
I/O cable than it is to run all those signal
wires for each individual I/O point. The
following paragraphs provide some general
information on how much time some of the
segments can require.
Power up
Initialize hardware
Check I/O module
config. and verify
Initialize various memory
based on retentive
configuration
Update input
Read input data from
Specialty and Remote I/O
Service peripheral
CPU Bus Communication
Update Clock / Calendar
PGM
Mode?
RUN
Execute ladder program
PID Equations (DL250-1/DL260)
Update output
Write output data to
Specialty and Remote I/O
Do diagnostics
OK
OK?
YES
NO
Report the error, set flag,
register, turn on LED
Fatal error
NO
YES
Force CPU into
PGM mode
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
3-29
Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Initialization Process
The CPU performs an initialization task once the system power is on. The initialization task
is performed once at power up, so it does not affect the scan time for the application program.
Reading Inputs
Initialization
Minimum Time
Maximum Time
DL230
1.6 Seconds
3.6 Seconds
DL240
1.0 Seconds
2.0 Seconds
DL250–1
1.2 Seconds
2.7 Seconds(w/ 2 exp. bases)
DL260
1.2 Seconds
3.7 Seconds (w/ 4 exp. bases)
The time required to read the input status for the input modules depends on which CPU you
are using and the number of input points in the base. The following table shows typical update
times required by the CPU.
For example, the time required for a DL240 to read two 8-point input modules would be
Timing Factors
Overhead
Per input point
3-30
DL230
64.0 µs
6.0 µs
DL240
32.0 µs
12.3 µs
DL250–1
12.6 µs
2.5 µs
DL260
12.6 µs
2.5 µs
calculated as follows, where NI is the total number of input points:
Formula
Time = 32µs + (12.3 x NI)
Example
Time = 32µs + (12.3 x 16)
Time = 228.8 µs
NOTE: This information provides the amount of time the CPU spends reading the input status from the
modules. Don’t confuse this with the I/O response time that was discussed earlier.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations
Reading Inputs from Specialty I/O
During this portion of the cycle the CPU reads any input points associated with the following:
• Remote I/O
• Specialty Modules (such as High-Speed Counter, etc)
The time required to read any input status from these modules depends on which CPU you are
using, the number of modules, and the number of input points.
Remote Module
Overhead
Per module (with inputs)
Per input point
DL230
N/A
N/A
N/A
DL240
6.0 µs
67.0 µs
40.0 µs
DL250–1
1.82 µs
17.9 µs
2.0 µs
DL260
1.82 µs
17.9 µs
2.0 µs
For example, the time required for a DL240 to read two 8-point input modules (located in a
Remote base) would be calculated as follows, where NM is the number of modules and NI is
the total number of input points:
Remote I/O
Formula
Time = 6µs + (67µs x NM) + (40µs x NI)
Example
Time = 6µs + (67µs x 2) + (40µs x 16)
Time = 780µs
Service Peripherals
Communication requests can occur at any time during the scan, but the CPU only “logs” the
requests for service until the Service Peripherals portion of the scan. The CPU does not spend
any time on this if there are no peripherals connected.
To Log Request (anytime)
Nothing
Connected
Port 1
Port 2
DL230
DL240
DL250–1
DL260
Min. & Max.
0 µs
0 µs
0 µs
0 µs
Send Min. / Max.
Rec. Min. / Max.
Send Min. / Max.
Rec. Min. / Max.
22/28 µs
24/58 µs
N/A
N/A
23/26 µs
52/70 µs
26/30 µs
60/75 µs
3.2/9.2 µs
25.0/35.0 µs
3.6/11.5 µs
35.0/44.0 µs
3.2/9.2 µs
25.0/35.0 µs
3.6/11.5 µs
35.0/44.0 µs
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
3-31
Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
During the Service Peripherals portion of the scan, the CPU analyzes the communications
request and responds as appropriate. The amount of time required to service the peripherals
depends on the content of the request.
To Service Request
DL230
DL240
260µs
Minimum
30ms
Run Mode Max.
Program Mode Max. 3.5 Seconds
DL250–1
250µs
20ms
4 Seconds
8µs
410µs
2 Seconds
DL260
8µs
410µs
3.7 Seconds
CPU Bus Communication
Some specialty modules can also communicate directly with the CPU via the CPU bus. During
this portion of the cycle the CPU completes any CPU bus communications. The actual time
required depends on the type of modules installed and the type of request being processed.
NOTE: Some specialty modules can have a considerable impact on the CPU scan time. If timing is critical in
your application, consult the module documentation for any information concerning the impact on the scan
time.
Update Clock/Calendar, Special Relays, Special Registers
The clock, calendar, and special relays are updated and loaded into special V-memory locations
during this time. This update is performed during both Run and Program Modes.
Modes
Program Mode
Run Mode
DL230
Minimum
Maximum
Minimum
Maximum
8.0 µs fixed
8.0 µs fixed
20.0 µs
26.0 µs
DL240
DL250–1
35.0 µs
48.0 µs
60.0 µs
85.0 µs
11.0 µs
11.0 µs
19.0 µs
26.0 µs
DL260
11.0 µs
11.0 µs
19.0 µs
26.0 µs
Writing Outputs
The time required to write the output status for the local and expansion I/O modules depends
on which CPU you are using and the number of output points in the base. The following table
shows typical update times required by the CPU.
Timing Factors
Overhead
Per output point
3-32
DL230
66.0 µs
8.5 µs
DL240
33.0 µs
14.6 µs
DL250–1
28.1 µs
3.0 µs
DL260
28.1 µs
3.0 µs
For example, the time required for a DL240 to write data for two 8-point output modules
would be calculated as follows (where NO is the total number of output points):
Formula
Time = 33 + (NO x 14.6 µs)
Example
Time = 33 + (16 x 14.6 µs)
Time = 266.6 µs
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations
Writing Outputs to Specialty I/O
During this portion of the cycle the CPU writes any output points associated with the following.
• Remote I/O
• Specialty Modules (such as High-Speed Counter, etc)
The time required to write any output image register data to these modules depends on which
CPU you are using, the number of modules, and the number of output points.
Remote Module
Overhead
Per module (with outputs)
Per output point
DL230
N/A
N/A
N/A
DL240
6.0 µs
67.5 µs
46.0 µs
DL250–1
1.9 µs
17.7 µs
3.2 µs
DL260
1.9 µs
17.7 µs
3.2 µs
For example, the time required for a DL240 to write two 8-point output modules (located in
a Remote base) would be calculated as follows, where NM is the number of modules and NO
is the total number of output points:
Remote I/O
Formula
Time = 6µs + (67.5 µs x NM) + (46µs x NO)
Example
Time = 6µs + (67.5 µs x 2) + (46µs x 16)
Time = 877µs
NOTE: This total time is the actual time required for the CPU to update these outputs. This does not include
any additional time that is required for the CPU to actually service the particular specialty modules.
Diagnostics
The DL205 CPUs perform many types of system diagnostics. The amount of time required
depends on many things, such as the number of I/O modules installed, etc. The following
table shows the minimum and maximum times that can be expected.
Diagnostic Time
Minimum
Maximum
DL230
600.0 µs
900.0 µs
DL240
422.0 µs
855.0 µs
DL250–1
26.8 µs
103.0 µs
DL260
26.8 µs
103.0 µs
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
3-33
Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
3-34
Application Program Execution
The CPU processes the program from the top (address 0) to the END instruction. The CPU
executes the program left to right and top to bottom. As each rung is evaluated, the appropriate
image register or memory location is updated.
The time required to solve the application program depends on the type and number of
instructions used and the amount of execution overhead.
You can add the execution times for all the instructions in your program to find the total
program execution time. For example, the execution time for a DL240 running the program
shown would be calculated as follows:
Instruction
Time
STR X0
OR C0
ANDN X1
OUT Y0
STRN C100
LD K10
STRN C101
OUT V2002
STRN C102
LD K50
STRN C103
OUT V2006
STR X5
ANDN X10
OUT Y3
END
1.4µs
1.0µs
1.2µs
7.95µs
1.6µs
62.0µs
1.6µs
21.0µs
1.6µs
62.0µs
1.6µs
21.0µs
1.4µs
1.2µs
7.95µs
16.0µs
TOTAL
210.5µs
X0
X1
Y0
OUT
C0
C100
LD
C101
OUT
C102
LD
C103
X5
OUT
X10
K10
V2002
K50
V2006
Y3
OUT
END
Appendix C provides a complete list of instruction execution times for DL205 CPUs.
Program Control Instructions — the DL240, DL250–1 and DL260 CPUs offer additional
instructions that can change the way the program executes. These instructions include FOR/
NEXT loops, Subroutines, and Interrupt Routines. These instructions can interrupt the
normal program flow and affect the program execution time. Chapter 5 provides detailed
information on how these different types of instructions operate.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations
PLC Numbering Systems
octal
49.832
binary
If you are a new PLC user or are using DirectLOGIC
?
1482 BCD
PLCs for the first time, please take a moment to study
?
3
0402 ?
?
how our PLCs use numbers. You’ll find that each PLC
3A9
ASCII
7
manufacturer has its own conventions on the use of
hexadecimal
numbers in their PLCs. Take a moment to familiarize 1001011011
1011
–961428
yourself with how numbers are used in DirectLOGIC
?
PLCs. The information you learn here applies to all our decimal
A
72B
?
–300124
177
PLCs.
As any good computer does, PLCs store and manipulate numbers in binary form: ones and
zeros. So why do we have to deal with numbers in so many different forms? Numbers have
meaning, and some representations are more convenient than others for particular purposes.
Sometimes we use numbers to represent a size or amount of something. Other numbers refer
to locations or addresses, or to time. In science we attach engineering units to numbers to give
a particular meaning (see Appendix H for numbering system details).
?
PLC Resources
PLCs offer a fixed number of resources, depending on the model and configuration. We use
the word “resources” to include variable memory (V-memory), I/O points, timers, counters,
etc. Most modular PLCs allow you to add I/O points in groups of eight. In fact, all the
resources of our PLCs are counted in octal. It’s easier for computers to count in groups of eight
than ten, because eight is an even power of two.
Octal means simply counting in groups of eight. Decimal 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
In the figure to the right, there are eight circles.
The quantity in decimal is “8,” but in octal it is
“10” (8 and 9 are not valid in octal). In octal, Octal
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 10
“10” means 1 group of 8 plus 0 (no individuals).
In the figure below, we have two groups of eight circles. Counting in octal we have “20.”items,
meaning two groups of eight, plus zero individuals Don’t say “twenty,” say “two–zero octal”.
This makes a clear distinction between number systems.
Decimal 1 2 3 4
5
6
7 8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Octal
5
6
7 10
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 20
1
2 3 4
After counting PLC resources, it’s time to access PLC resources (there’s a difference). The CPU
instruction set accesses resources of the PLC using octal addresses. Octal addresses are the
same as octal quantities, except they start counting at zero. The number zero is significant to a
computer, so we don’t skip it.
X= 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Our circles are in an array of square containers to the right.
X
To access a resource, our PLC instruction will address its
1
location using the octal references shown. If these were X
counters, “CT14” would access the black circle location. 2 X
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
3-35
Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations
V–Memory
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Variable memory (called “V-memory”) stores data for the ladder program and for configuration settings.
V-memory locations and V-memory addresses are the same thing, and are numbered in octal. For example,
V2073 is a valid location, while V1983 is not valid (“9” and “8” are not valid octal digits).
Each V-memory location is one data word wide, meaning 16 bits. For configuration registers, our manuals will show
each bit of a V-memory word. The least significant bit (LSB) will be on the right, and the most significant bit (MSB)
on the left. We use the word “significant,” referring to the relative binary weighting of the bits.
V-memory data is 16-bit binary, but we rarely program the data registers one bit at a time. We use
V-memory address
(octal)
V2017
LSB
0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1
instructions or viewing tools that let us work with binary, decimal, octal, and hexadecimal numbers. All
these are converted and stored as binary for us. A frequently-asked question is “How do I tell if a number is
binary, octal, BCD, or hex”? The answer is that we usually cannot tell by looking at the data, but it does not
really matter. What matters is: the source or mechanism which writes data into a V-memory location and
the thing which later reads it must both use the same data type (i.e., octal, hex, binary, or whatever). The
V-memory location is a storage box, that’s all. It does not convert or move the data on its own.
Binary-Coded Decimal Numbers
Since humans naturally count in decimal, we prefer to enter and view PLC data in decimal as well (via
operator interfaces). However, computers are more efficient in using pure binary numbers. A compromise
solution between the two is Binary-Coded Decimal (BCD) representation. A BCD digit ranges from 0 to
9, and is stored as 4 binary bits (a nibble). This permits each V-memory location to store 4 BCD digits, with
a range of decimal numbers from 0000 to 9999.
4
BCD number
8
V-memory storage
4
9
2
1
0 1 0 0
8
4
3
2
1
1 0 0 1
8
4
6
2
1
0 0 1 1
8
4
2
1
0 1 1 0
In a pure binary sense, a 16-bit word represents numbers from 0 to 65535. In storing BCD numbers, the
range is reduced to 0 to 9999. Many math instructions use BCD data, and DirectSOFT and the Handheld
Programmer allow us to enter and view data in BCD. Special RLL instructions convert from BCD to
binary, or visa–versa.
Hexadecimal Numbers
Hexadecimal numbers are similar to BCD numbers, except they utilize all possible binary values in each 4-bit
digit. They are base-16 numbers so we need 16 different digits. To extend our decimal digits 0 through 9,
we use A through F as shown.
Decimal
Hexadecimal
0 1 2 3
0 1 2 3
4 5
4 5
6
6
7
7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
8 9 A B C D E F
A 4-digit hexadecimal number can represent all 65536 values in a V-memory word. The range is from 0000
to FFFF (hex). PLCs often need this full range for sensor data, etc. Hexadecimal is a convenient way for
humans to view full binary data.
Hexadecimal number
V-memory storage
3-36
V-memory data
(binary)
MSB
A
7
F
4
1 0 1 0
0 1 1 1
1 1 1 1
0 1 0 0
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations
Memory Map
With any PLC system, you generally have many different types of information to process. This
includes input device status, output device status, various timing elements, parts counts, etc. It
is important to understand how the system represents and stores the various types of data. For
example, you need to know how the system identifies input points, output points, data words,
etc. The following paragraphs discuss the various memory types used in the DL205 CPUs.
A memory map overview for the DL230, DL240, DL250–1 and DL260 CPUs follows the
memory descriptions.
Octal Numbering System
All memory locations or areas are numbered in Octal
(base 8). For example, the diagram shows how the
octal numbering system works for the discrete input
points. Notice the octal system does not contain any
numbers with the digits 8 or 9.
X0
X1
X2
X3
X0
_
X7
X10
_
X17
Y0
_
Y7
X4
X5
X6
X7
X10 X11 X12 X13 X14 X15 X16 X17
Discrete and Word Locations
As you examine the different memory types, you’ll
notice two types of memory in the DL205, discrete and
word memory. Discrete memory is one bit that can
be either a 1 or a 0. Word memory is referred to as
V memory (variable) and is a 16-bit location normally
used to manipulate data/numbers, store data/numbers,
etc. Some information is automatically stored in
V-memory. For example, the timer current values are
stored in V-memory.
Discrete – On or Off, 1 bit
X0
Word Locations – 16 bits
0 1 0 1 00 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1
V–Memory Locations for Discrete Memory Areas
The discrete memory area is for inputs, outputs, control relays, special relays, stages, timer status
bits and counter status bits. However, you can also access the bit data types as a V-memory
word. Each V-memory location contains 16 consecutive discrete locations. For example, the
following diagram shows how the X input points are mapped into V-memory locations.
16 Discrete (X) Input Points
X17 X16 X15 X14 X13 X12 X11 X10
Bit # 15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
X7
X6
X5
X4
X3
X2
X1
X0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
V40400
These discrete memory areas and their corresponding V-memory ranges are listed in the
memory area table for the DL230, DL240, DL250–1 and DL260 CPUs in this chapter.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
3-37
Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations
Input Points (X Data Type)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
3-38
The discrete input points are noted by an X
data type. Up to 512 discrete input points
are available with the DL205 CPUs. In this
example, the output point Y0 will be turned on
when input X0 energizes.
X0
Y0
OUT
X1
Y1
OUT
X10
C5
OUT
C5
Y10
OUT
Output Points (Y Data Type)
The discrete output points are noted by a Y
data type. Up to 512 discrete output points
are available with the DL205 CPUs. In this
example, output point Y1 will turn on when
input X1 energizes.
Control Relays (C Data Type)
Control relays are discrete bits normally used to
control the user program. The control relays do
not represent a real world device; that is, they
cannot be physically tied to switches, output
coils, etc. Control relays are internal to the
CPU and can be programmed as discrete inputs
or discrete outputs. These locations are used in
programming the discrete memory locations (C)
or the corresponding word location which has 16
consecutive discrete locations. In this example,
memory location C5 will energize when input
X10 turns on. The second rung shows a simple
example of how to use a control relay as an input.
Y20
OUT
Timers and Timer Status Bits (T Data Type)
The number of timers available depends on the
model of CPU you are using. The tables at
the end of this section provide the number of
timers for the DL230, DL240, D2-250-1 and
DL260. Regardless of the number of timers,
you have access to timer status bits that reflect
the relationship between the current value and
the preset value of a specified timer. The timer
status bit will be on when the current value is
equal to or greater than the preset value of a
corresponding timer.
When input X0 turns on, timer T1 will start.
When the timer reaches the preset of 3 seconds
(K of 30), timer status contact T1 turns on.
When T1 turns on, output Y12 turns on.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
X0
T1
TMR
K30
T1
Y12
OUT
Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations
Timer Current Values (V Data Type)
Some information is automatically stored in
V-memory, such as the current values associated with
timers. For example, V0 holds the current value for
Timer 0, V1 holds the current value for Timer 1, etc.
These are 4-digit BCD values.
The primary reason for this is programming flexibility.
The example shows how you can use relational contacts
to monitor several time intervals from a single timer.
Counters and Counter Status Bits
(CT Data Type)
You have access to counter status bits that reflect the
relationship between the current value and the preset
value of a specified counter. The counter status bit will
be on when the current value is equal to or greater than
the preset value of a corresponding counter.
Each time contact X0 transitions from off to on,
the counter increments by one (If X1 comes on, the
counter is reset to zero). When the counter reaches the
preset of 10 counts (K of 10), counter status contact
CT3 turns on. When CT3 turns on, output Y12 turns
on.
Counter Current Values (V Data Type)
Just like the timers, the counter current values are
also automatically stored in V-memory. For example,
V1000 holds the current value for Counter CT0,
V1001 holds the current value for Counter CT1, etc.
These are 4-digit BCD values. The primary reason for
this is programming flexibility. The example shows
how you can use relational contacts to monitor the
counter values.
Word Memory (V Data Type)
Word memory is referred to as V-memory (variable)
and is a 16-bit location normally used to manipulate
data/numbers, store data/numbers, etc. Some
information is automatically stored in V-memory.
For example, the timer current values are stored in
V-memory. The example shows how a four-digit
BCD constant is loaded into the accumulator and then
stored in a V-memory location.
X0
TMR
T1
K1000
V1
K30
Y12
OUT
V1
K50
Y13
OUT
V1
K75
V1
X0
K100
Y14
OUT
CNT
CT3
K10
X1
CT3
Y12
OUT
X0
CNT
K10
CT3
X1
V1003
K1
Y12
OUT
V1003
K3
Y13
OUT
V1003
K5
V1003
X0
K8
LD
Y14
OUT
K1345
OUT
V1400
Word Locations – 16 bits
0 0 0 1 00 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1
1
3
4
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5
3-39
Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
3-40
Stages (S Data type)
RLLPLUS
Stages are used in
programs to create a
structured program, similar to a flowchart. Each
program stage denotes a program segment. When
the program segment, or stage, is active, the logic
within that segment is executed. If the stage is
off, or inactive, the logic is not executed and the
CPU skips to the next active stage. (See Chapter
7 for a more detailed description of RLLPLUS
programming.)
Each stage also has a discrete status bit that can be
used as an input to indicate whether the stage is
active or inactive. If the stage is active, then the
status bit is on. If the stage is inactive, then the
status bit is off. This status bit can also be turned
on or off by other instructions, such as the SET
or RESET instructions. This allows you to easily
control stages throughout the program.
ISG
S0000
Wait forStart
Start
S1
JMP
X0
SG
S500
JMP
Check for a Part
S0001
Part
Present
S2
JMP
X1
Part
Present
S6
JMP
X1
SG
Clamp the part
S0002
Clamp
SET
S400
S3
JMP
Part
Locked
X2
Special Relays (SP Data Type)
Special relays are discrete memory locations
with pre-defined functionality. There are many
different types of special relays. For example,
some aid in program development, others
provide system operating status information, etc.
Appendix D provides a complete listing of the
special relays.
In this example, control relay C10 will energize
for 50ms and de–energize for 50 ms because SP5
is a pre–defined relay that will be on for 50ms and
off for 50ms.
SP5
C10
OUT
SP4: 1 second clock
SP5: 100 ms clock
SP6: 50 ms clock
Remote I/O Points (GX Data Type)
Remote I/O points are represented by global
relays. They are generally used only to control
remote I/O, but they can be used as normal
control relays when remote I/O is not used in the
system.
In this example, memory location GX0 represents
an output point and memory location GX10
represents an input point.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
X3
GX0
OUT
GX10
Y12
OUT
Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations
DL230 System V-memory
System
V-memory
V2320–V2377
V7620–V7627
V7620
V7621
V7622
V7623
V7624
V7625
V7626
V7627
Description of Contents
The default location for multiple preset values for the UP counter.
Locations for DV–1000 operator interface parameters
Sets the V-memory location that contains the value.
Sets the V-memory location that contains the message.
Sets the total number (1 - 16) of V-memory locations to be displayed.
Sets the V-memory location that contains the numbers to be displayed.
Sets the V-memory location that contains the character code to be displayed.
Sets the bit control pointer.
Power Up mode change preset value password.
Reserved for future use.
Default Values/Ranges
N/A
V0–V2377
V0–V2377
1–16
V0–V2377
V0–V2377
V-memory location for
X,Y, or C points used.
0,1,2,3,12 Default = 0000
V7630
Starting location for the multi–step presets for channel 1. The default value is Default: V2320
2320, which indicates the first value should be obtained from V2320. Since 24 Range: V0–V2320
presets are available, the default range is V2320 – V2377. You can change the
starting point if necessary.
V7631–V7632
V7633
Not used
Sets the desired mode for the high speed counter, interrupt, pulse catch,
pulse train, and input filter (see the D2-CTRINT Manual, D2-CTRIF-M for more
information). Location is also used for setting the with/without battery option,
enable/disable CPU mode change, and power-up in Run Mode option.
N/A
V7634
Contains set-up information for high-speed counter, interrupt, pulse catch,
pulse train output, and input filter for X0 (when D2–CTRINT is installed).
Contains set up-information for high-speed counter, interrupt, pulse catch,
pulse train output, and input filter for X1 (when D2–CTRINT is installed).
Contains set-up information for high-speed counter, interrupt, pulse catch,
pulse train output, and input filter for X2 (when D2–CTRINT is installed).
Contains set-up information for high-speed counter, interrupt, pulse catch,
pulse train output, and input filter for X3 (when D2–CTRINT is installed).
Default: 0000
V7635
V7636
V7637
V7640–V7642
V7640
V7641
V7642
V7643–V7647
V7751
Additional setup parameters for the DV-1000
Timer preset value pointer
Counter preset value pointer
Timer preset block size (high byte) / Counter preset block size (low byte)
Not used
Fault Message Error Code — stores the 4-digit code used with the FAULT
instruction when the instruction is executed.
Default: 0000
Lower Byte Range:
Range: 0–None
10–Up
40–Interrupt
50–Pulse Catch
60–Filtered discrete In.
Upper Byte Range:
Bits 8–11, 14,15: Unused
Bit 12: With Batt. installed:
0 = disable BATT LED
1 = enable BATT LED
Bit 13: Power-up in Run
Default: 0000
Default: 0000
Default: 0000
V2000–V2377
V2000–V2377
1–99
N/A
N/A
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
3-41
Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
System
V-memory
V7752
V7753
V7754
V7755
V7756
V7757
V7760–V7764
V7765
V7666–V7774
V7775
V7776
V7777
3-42
Description of Contents
I/O Configuration Error — s tores the module ID code for the module that
does not match the current configuration.
I/O Configuration Error — stores the correct module ID code.
I/O Configuration Error — identifies the base and slot number.
Error code — stores the fatal error code.
Error code — stores the major error code.
Error code — stores the minor error code.
Module Error —stores the slot number and error code where an I/O error
occurs.
Scan — stores the total number of scan cycles that have occurred since the
last Program Mode to Run Mode transition.
Not used
Scan — stores the current scan time (milliseconds).
Scan — stores the minimum scan time that has occurred since the last
Program Mode to Run Mode transition (milliseconds).
Scan — stores the maximum scan time that has occurred since the last
Program Mode to Run Mode transition (milliseconds).
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Default Values/Ranges
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations
DL240 System V-memory
System
V-memory
Description of Contents
default location for multiple preset values for UP/DWN and UP counter 1 or pulse
V3630–V3707 The
output function.
V3710–V3767 The default location for multiple preset values for UP/DWN and UP counter 2.
V3770–V3773 Not used
V3774–V3777 Default locations for analog potentiometer data (channels 1–4, respectively).
V7620–V7627 Locations for DV–1000 operator interface parameters
V7620 Sets the V-memory location that contains the value.
V7621 Sets the V-memory location that contains the message.
V7622 Sets the total number (1 – 16) of V-memory locations to be displayed.
V7623 Sets the V-memory location that contains the numbers to be displayed.
V7624 Sets the V-memory location that contains the character code to be displayed.
V7625 Sets the bit control pointer
V7626 Power Up Mode
V7627 Change Preset Value Password.
V7630
V7631
V7632
Default Values/
Ranges
Starting location for the multi–step presets for channel 1. Since there are 24 presets
available, the default range is V3630 – V3707. You can change the starting point if
necessary.
Starting location for the multi–step presets for channel 2. Since there are 24 presets
available, the default range is V3710– V3767. You can change the starting point if
necessary.
Contains the baud rate setting for Port 2. You can use AUX 56 (from the Handheld
Programmer) or, use DirectSOFT to set the port parameters if 9600 baud is
unacceptable. Also allows you to set a delay time between the assertion of the RTS
signal and the transmission of data. This is useful for radio modems that require a
key-up delay before data is transmitted.
e.g., a value of 0302 sets 10ms Turnaround Delay (TAD) and 9600 baud.
N/A
N/A
N/A
Range: 0 – 9999
V0 – V3760
V0 – V3760
1 – 16
V0 – V3760
V0 – V3760
V-memory location for
X, Y, or C points used.
0,1,2,3,12
Default=0000
Default: V3630
Range: V0 – V3710
Default: V3710
Range: V0 – V3710
Default: 2 – 9600 baud
Lower Byte = Baud Rate
Lower Byte Range:
00 = 300
01 = 1200
02 = 9600
03 = 19.2K
Upper Byte = Time Delay
Upper Byte Range:
01 = 2ms
02 = 5ms
03 = 10ms
04 = 20ms
05 = 50ms
06 = 100ms
07 = 500ms
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
3-43
Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
System
V-memory
Description of Contents
V7633
Sets the desired mode for the high speed counter, interrupt, pulse catch, pulse train,
and input filter (see the D2-CTRINT manual, D2-CTRIF-M, for more information).
Location is also used for setting the with/without battery option, enable/disable CPU
mode change.
V7634
Contains set-up information for high-speed counter, interrupt, pulse catch, pulse train
output, and input filter for X0 (when D2–CTRINT is installed).
Contains set-up information for high-speed counter, interrupt, pulse catch, pulse train
output, and input filter for X1 (when D2–CTRINT is installed).
Contains set-up information for high-speed counter, interrupt, pulse catch, pulse train
output, and input filter for X2 (when D2–CTRINT is installed).
Contains set-up information for high-speed counter, interrupt, pulse catch, pulse train
output, and input filter for X3 (when D2–CTRINT is installed).
V7635
V7636
V7637
V7644–V7645
V7646–V7647
V7650–V7737
V7720–V7722
V7720
V7721
V7722
V7746
V7747
V7751
V7752
3-44
Default: 0000
Lower Byte Range:
0 – None
10 – Up
20 – Up/Dwn.
30 – Pulse Out
40 – Interrupt
50 – Pulse Catch
60 – Filtered Dis.
Upper Byte Range:
Bits 8 – 11, 15 Unused
Bit 12: With Batt. installed:
0 = disable BATT LED
1 = enable BATT LED
Bit 13: Power-up in Run
Bit 14: Mode chg. enable
(K-sequence only)
Default: 0000
Default: 0000
Default: 0000
Default: 0000
Default: 0000
Range: 0 – 9999
Default: 0000
Location for setting the lower and upper limits for the CH2 analog pot.
Range: 0 – 9999
Default: 0000
Location for setting the lower and upper limits for the CH3 analog pot.
Range: 0 – 9999
Default: 0000
Location for setting the lower and upper limits for the CH4 analog pot.
Range: 0 – 9999
Locations reserved for set-up information used with future options (remote I/O and data communications).
Locations for DV–1000 operator interface parameters.
Titled Timer preset value pointer .
V2000–V2377
Titled Counter preset value pointer.
V2000–V2377
HiByte-Titled Timer preset block size, LoByte-Titled Counter preset block size.
1–99
Location contains the battery voltage, accurate to 0.1V. For example, a value of 32 indicates 3.2 volts.
Location contains a 10ms counter. This location increments once every 10ms.
Fault Message Error Code — stores the 4-digit code used with the FAULT instruction when the instruction is
executed. If you’ve used ASCII messages (DL240 only), then the data label (DLBL) reference number for that
message is stored here.
I/O configuration Error — stores the module ID code for the module that does not match the current configuration.
V7640–V7641 Location for setting the lower and upper limits for the CH1 analog pot.
V7642–V7643
Default Values/
Ranges
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations
System
V-memory
V7753
V7754
V7755
V7756
V7757
V7760–V7764
V7765
V7766
V7767
V7770
V7771
V7772
V7773
V7774
V7775
V7776
V7777
Description of Contents
I/O Configuration Error — stores the correct module ID code.
I/O Configuration Error — identifies the base and slot number.
Error code — stores the fatal error code.
Error code — stores the major error code.
Error code — stores the minor error code.
Module Error — stores the slot number and error code where an I/O error occurs.
Scan—stores the number of scan cycles that have occurred since the last Program to Run Mode transition.
Contains the number of seconds on the clock. (00 to 59).
Contains the number of minutes on the clock. (00 to 59).
Contains the number of hours on the clock. (00 to 23).
Contains the day of the week. (Mon, Tue, etc.).
Contains the day of the month (1st, 2nd, etc.).
Contains the month. (01 to 12)
Contains the year. (00 to 99)
Scan — stores the current scan time (milliseconds).
Scan — stores the minimum scan time that has occurred since the last Program Mode to Run Mode transition
(milliseconds).
Scan — stores the maximum scan time that has occurred since the last Program Mode to Run Mode transition
(milliseconds).
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
3-45
Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
DL250–1 System V-memory (DL250 also)
System
V-memory
Description of Contents
V3710–V3767
V3770–V3777
The default location for multiple preset values for UP/DWN and UP counter 1 or pulse N/A
output function
The default location for multiple preset values for UP/DWN and UP counter 2.
N/A
Not used
N/A
V7620–V7627
V7620
V7621
V7622
V7623
V7624
V7625
V7626
V7627
Locations for DV–1000 operator interface parameters
Sets the V-memory location that contains the value
Sets the V-memory location that contains the message
Sets the total number (1 – 32) of V-memory locations to be displayed
Sets the V-memory location that contains the numbers to be displayed
Sets the V-memory location that contains the character code to be displayed
Sets the bit control pointer
Sets the power up mode
Change Preset Value password
V3630–V3707
V7630
V7631
V7632
V7633
V7634
V7635
V7636
3-46
Starting location for the multi–step presets for channel 1. Since there are 24 presets
available, the default range is V3630 – V3707. You can change the starting point if
necessary.
Starting location for the multi–step presets for channel 2. Since there are 24 presets
available, the default range is V3710– V3767. You can change the starting point if
necessary.
Reserved
Sets the desired mode for the high-speed counter, interrupt, pulse catch, pulse train,
and input filter (see the D2-CTRINT manual, D2-CTRIF-M, for more information).
Location is also used for setting the with/without battery option, enable/disable CPU
mode change, and power-up in Run Mode option.
Default Values/
Ranges
V0 – V3760
V0 – V3760
1 – 32
V0 – V3760
V0 – V3760
V-memory for X, Y, or C
0,1,2,3,12
Default=0000
Default: V3630
Range: V0 – V3710
Default: V3710
Range: V0 – V3710
Default: 0060
Lower Byte Range:
Range: 0 – None
10 – Up
20 – Up/Dwn.
30 – Pulse Out
40 – Interrupt
50 – Pulse Catch
60 – Filtered Dis.
Upper Byte Range:
Bits 8 – 11, 14–15 Unused
Bit 12: With Batt. installed:
0 = disable BATT LED
1 = enable BATT LED
Bit 13: Power-up in Run
Contains set-up information for high-speed counter, interrupt, pulse catch,pulse train Default: 1006
output, and input filter for X0 (when D2–CTRINT is installed).
Contains set-up information for high-speed counter, interrupt, pulse catch, pulse train Default: 1006
output, and input filter for X1 (when D2–CTRINT is installed).
Contains set-up information for high-speed counter, interrupt, pulse catch, pulse train Default: 1006
output, and input filter for X2 (when D2–CTRINT is installed).
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations
System
V-memory
Description of Contents
Default Values/Ranges
V7637
Contains set-up information for high-speed counter, interrupt, pulse catch,
pulse train output, and input filter for X3 (when D2–CTRINT is installed).
V7640
Loop Table Beginning address.
V7641
V7642
V7643–V7647
V7650
V7651
V7652
V7653
V7654
V7655
V7656
V7657
V7660–V7717
V7720–V7722
V7720
V7721
V7722
V7740
V7741
V7747
V7750
Number of Loops Enabled
Error Code – V–memory Error Location for Loop Table.
Reserved.
Port 2 End–code setting Setting (A55A), Non–procedure communications start.
Port 2 Data format – Non–procedure communications format setting.
Port 2 Format Type setting – Non–procedure communications type code setting.
Port 2 Terminate–code setting – Non–procedure communications Termination code setting.
Port 2 Store v–mem address – Non–procedure communication data store V–Memory address
Port 2 Setup area –0–7 Comm protocol (flag 0) 8–15 Comm time out/response delay time (flag 1).
Port 2 Setup area – 0–15 Communication (flag 2, flag 3).
Port 2: Setup completion code.
Set–up Information – Locations reserved for set-up information used with future options.
Locations for DV–1000 operator interface parameters.
Titled Timer preset value pointer.
Title Counter preset value pointer.
HiByte-Titled Timer preset block size, LoByte-Titled Counter preset block size.
Port 2 Communication Auto Reset Timer setup.
Output Hold or reset setting: Expansion bases 1 and 2 (DL250–1).
Location contains a 10ms counter. This location increments once every 10ms.
Reserved.
V7751
V7752
V7753
V7754
V7755
V7756
V7757
V7760–V7764
V7765
Default: 1006
V1400–V7340 V10000–
V17740
1–4
Fault Message Error Code — stores the 4-digit code used with the FAULT instruction when the instruction
is executed. If you’ve used ASCII messages (DL240 only), then the data label (DLBL) reference number for
that message is stored here.
I/O configuration Error — stores the module ID code for the module that does not match the current
configuration.
I/O Configuration Error — stores the correct module ID code.
I/O Configuration Error — identifies the base and slot number.
Error code — stores the fatal error code.
Error code — stores the major error code.
Error code — stores the minor error code.
Module Error — stores the slot number and error code where an I/O error occurs.
Scan — stores the total number of scan cycles that have occurred since the last Program Mode to Run
Mode transition.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
3-47
Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
System
V-memory
V7766
V7767
V7770
V7771
V7772
V7773
V7774
V7775
V7776
V7777
V36000–36057
V36100–36157
V36400–36427
V37700–37737
System CRs
C740
C741
C743
C750 to C757
C760 to C767
3-48
Description of Contents
Contains the number of seconds on the clock. (00 to 59)
Contains the number of minutes on the clock. (00 to 59)
Contains the number of hours on the clock. (00 to 23)
Contains the day of the week. (Mon, Tue, etc.)
Contains the day of the month (1st, 2nd, etc.)
Contains the month. (01 to 12)
Contains the year. (00 to 99)
Scan — stores the current scan time (milliseconds)
Scan — stores the minimum scan time that has occurred since the last Program Mode to Run
Mode transition (milliseconds)
Scan — stores the maximum scan time that has occurred since the last Program Mode to Run
Mode transition (milliseconds)
Analog pointer method for expansion base 1 (DL250–1)
Analog pointer method for expansion base 2 (DL250–1)
Analog pointer method for local base
Port 2: Setup register for Koyo Remote I/O
Description of Contents
Completion of setups – ladder logic must turn this relay on when it has finished writing to the Remote I/O setup
table.
Erase received data – turning on this flag will erase the received data during a communication error.
Re-start – Turning on this relay will resume after a communications hang-up on an error.
Setup Error – The corresponding relay will be ON if the setup table contains an error.
(C750 = master, C751 = slave 1 C757 = slave 7)
Communications Ready – The corresponding relay will be ON if the set-up table data is valid.
(C760 = master, C761 = slave 1 C767 = slave 7)
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations
DL260 System V-memory
System
V-memory
Description of Contents
Default Values/Ranges
V3630–V3707
The default location for multiple preset values for UP/DWN and UP counter 1 or
pulse output function
N/A
V3710–V3767
The default location for multiple preset values for UP/DWN and UP counter 2
N/A
V3770–V3777
V7620–V7627
V7620
V7621
V7622
V7623
V7624
V7625
V7626
V7627
Not used
N/A
Locations for DV–1000 operator interface parameters
Sets the V-memory location that contains the value
Sets the V-memory location that contains the message
Sets the total number (1 – 32) of V-memory locations to be displayed
Sets the V-memory location that contains the numbers to be displayed
Sets the V-memory location that contains the character code to be displayed
Sets the bit control pointer
Sets the power up mode
Change Preset Value password
V0 – V3760
V0 – V3760
1 – 32
V0 – V3760
V0 – V3760
V-memory for X, Y, or C
0,1,2,3,12
Default=0000
V7630
Starting location for the multi–step presets for channel 1. Since there are 24
presets available, the default range is V3630 – V3707. You can change the
starting point if necessary.
Default: V3630
Range: V0 – V3710
V7631
Starting location for the multi–step presets for channel 2. Since there are 24
Default: V3710
presets available, the default range is V3710– V3767. You can change the starting
Range: V0 – V3710
point if necessary.
V7632
V7633
Reserved
Sets the desired mode for the high-speed counter, interrupt, pulse catch, pulse
train, and input filter (see the D2-CTRINT manual, D2-CTRIF-M, for more
information). Location is also used for setting the with/without battery option,
enable/disable CPU mode change, and power-up in Run Mode option.
V7634
Contains set-up information for high-speed counter, interrupt, pulse catch, pulse
train output, and input filter for X0 (when D2–CTRINT is installed)
Contains set-up information for high-speed counter, interrupt, pulse catch, pulse
train output, and input filter for X1 (when D2–CTRINT is installed)
Contains set-up information for high-speed counter, interrupt, pulse catch, pulse
train output, and input filter for X2 (when D2–CTRINT is installed)
V7635
V7636
Default: 0060
Lower Byte Range:
Range: 0 – None
10 – Up
20 – Up/Dwn
30 – Pulse Ou
40 – Interrupt
50 – Pulse Catch
60 – Fltered Dis.
Upper Byte Range
Bits 8 – 11, 14–15 Unused
Bit 12: With Batt. installed:
0 = disable BATT LED
1 = enable BATT LED
Bit 13: Power-up in Run
Default: 1006
Default: 1006
Default: 1006
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
3-49
Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
System
V-memory
Description of Contents
Default Values/
Ranges
V7637
Contains set up information for high speed counter, interrupt, pulse catch, pulse train
output, and input filter for X3 (when D2–CTRINT is installed).
V7640
PID Loop Table Beginning address.
V7641
V7642
V7643 - V7647
V7650
V7651
V7652
V7653
V7654
V7655
V7656
V7657
V7660–V7717
V7720–V7722
V7720
V7721
V7722
V7740
V7741
V7742
V7747
V7750
Number of Loops Enabled.
Error Code – V–memory Error Location for Loop Table.
Reserved.
Port 2 End–code Setting (A55A), Non-procedure communications start.
Port 2 Data format - Non-procedure communications format setting.
Port 2 Format Type setting – Non–procedure communications type code setting.
Port 2 Terminate–code setting – Non–procedure communications Termination code setting
Port 2 Store v–mem address – Non–procedure communication data store V–Memory address.
Port 2 Setup area –0–7 Comm protocol (flag 0) 8–15 Comm time out/response delay time (flag 1)
Port 2 Setup area – 0–15 Communication (flag 2, flag 3)
Port 2: Setup completion code.
Set–up Information – Locations reserved for set up information used with future options.
Locations for DV-1000 operator interface parameters.
Titled Timer preset value pointer.
Title Counter preset value pointer.
HiByte-Titled Timer preset block size, LoByte-Titled Counter preset block size.
V7751
V7752
V7753
V7754
V7755
V7756
V7757
V7763–V7764
V7765
3-50
Default: 1006
V400–640
V1400–V7340
V10000–V35740
1–16
Port 2 Communication Auto Reset Timer setup.
Output Hold or reset setting: Expansion bases 1 and 2.
Output Hold or reset setting: Expansion bases 3 and 4.
Location contains a 10ms counter. This location increments once every 10ms.
Reserved.
Fault Message Error Code — stores the 4-digit code used with the FAULT instruction when the instruction is
executed. If you’ve used ASCII messages (DL240 only), then the data label (DLBL) reference number for that
message is stored here.
I/O configuration Error — stores the module ID code for the module that does not match the current
configuration.
I/O Configuration Error — stores the correct module ID code.
I/O Configuration Error — identifies the base and slot number.
Error code — stores the fatal error code.
Error code — stores the major error code.
Error code — stores the minor error code.
Module Error — stores the slot number and error code where an I/O error occurs.
Scan — stores the total number of scan cycles that have occurred since the last Program Mode to Run Mode
transition.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations
System
V-memory
V7766
V7767
V7770
V7771
V7772
V7773
V7774
V7775
V7776
V7777
V36000–36057
V36100–36157
V36200–36257
V36300–36357
V36400–36427
V37700–37737
Description of Contents
Contains the number of seconds on the clock. (00 to 59).
Contains the number of minutes on the clock. (00 to 59).
Contains the number of hours on the clock. (00 to 23).
Contains the day of the week. (Mon, Tue, etc.).
Contains the day of the month (1st, 2nd, etc.).
Contains the month. (01 to 12)
Contains the year. (00 to 99)
Scan — stores the current scan time (milliseconds).
Scan — stores the minimum scan time that has occurred since the last Program Mode to Run Mode transition
(milliseconds).
Scan — stores the maximum scan time that has occurred since the last Program Mode to Run Mode transition
(milliseconds).
Analog pointer method for expansion base 1
Analog pointer method for expansion base 2
Analog pointer method for expansion base 3
Analog pointer method for expansion base 4
Analog pointer method for local base
Port 2: Set-up register for Koyo Remote I/O
The following system control relays are used for Koyo Remote I/O setup on Communications
Port 2.
System CRs
C740
C741
C743
C750 to C757
C760 to C767
Description of Contents
Completion of setups – ladder logic must turn this relay on when it has finished writing to the Remote I/O setup
table.
Erase received data – turning on this flag will erase the received data during a communication error.
Re-start – Turning on this relay will resume after a communications hang-up on an error.
Setup Error – The corresponding relay will be ON if the set-up table contains an error.
(C750 = master, C751 = slave 1... C757= slave 7
Communications Ready – The corresponding relay will be ON if the set-up table data is valid.
(C760 = master, C761 = slave 1...C767 = slave 7
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
3-51
Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
DL205 Aliases
3-52
An alias is an alternate way of referring to certain memory types, such as timer/counter current
values, V-memory locations for I/O points, etc., which simplifies understanding the memory
address. The use of the alias is optional, but some users may find the alias to be helpful when
developing a program. The table below shows how the aliases can be used.
DL205 Aliases
Address Start
Alias Start
Example
V0
TA0
V1000
CTA0
V40000
VGX
V40200
VGY
V40400
VX0
V40500
VY0
V40600
VC0
V41000
VS0
V41100
VT0
V41140
VCT0
V41200
VSP0
V0 is the timer accumulator value for timer 0, therefore, its
alias is TA0. TA1 is the alias for V1, etc.
V1000 is the counter accumulator value for counter 0,
therefore, its alias is CTA0. CTA1 is the alias for V1001, etc.
V40000 is the word memory reference for discrete bits GX0
through GX17, therefore, its alias is VGX0. V40001 is the
word memory reference for discrete bits GX20 through GX37,
therefore, its alias is VGX20.
V40200 is the word memory reference for discrete bits GY0
through GY17, therefore, its alias is VGY0. V40201 is the
word memory reference for discrete bits GY20 through GY37,
therefore, its alias is VGY20.
V40400 is the word memory reference for discrete bits X0
through X17, therefore, its alias is VX0. V40401 is the word
memory reference for discrete bits X20 through X37, therefore,
its alias is VX20.
V40500 is the word memory reference for discrete bits Y0
through Y17, therefore, its alias is VY0. V40501 is the word
memory reference for discrete bits Y20 through Y37, therefore,
its alias is VY20.
V40600 is the word memory reference for discrete bits C0
through C17, therefore, its alias is VC0. V40601 is the word
memory reference for discrete bits C20 through C37, therefore,
its alias is VC20.
V41000 is the word memory reference for discrete bits S0
through S17, therefore, its alias is VS0. V41001 is the word
memory reference for discrete bits S20 through S37, therefore,
its alias is VS20.
V41100 is the word memory reference for discrete bits T0
through T17, therefore, its alias is VT0. V41101 is the word
memory reference for discrete bits T20 through T37, therefore,
its alias is VT20.
V41140 is the word memory reference for discrete bits CT0
through CT17, therefore, its alias is VCT0. V41141 is the
word memory reference for discrete bits CT20 through CT37,
therefore, its alias is VCT20.
V41200 is the word memory reference for discrete bits SP0
through SP17, therefore, its alias is VSP0. V41201 is the
word memory reference for discrete bits SP20 through SP37,
therefore, its alias is VSP20.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations
DL230 Memory Map
Memory Type
Discrete Memory
Reference (octal)
Word Memory
Reference (octal)
Qty.
Decimal
Symbol
X0
Input Points
X0 – X177
V40400 – V40407
1281
Output Points
Y0 – Y177
V40500 – V40507
1281
Control Relays
C0 – C377
V40600 – V40617
256
Special Relays
SP0 – SP117
SP540 – SP577
V41200 – V41204
V41226 – V41227
112
Timers
T0 – T77
Timer Current Values
None
V0 – V77
64
Timer Status Bits
T0 – T77
V41100 – V41103
64
Counters
CT0 – CT77
Counter Current Values
None
V1000 – V1077
64
Counter Status Bits
CT0 – CT77
V41140 – V41143
64
Data Words
None
V2000 – V2377
256
None specific, used with many
instructions
Data Words Non–volatile None
V4000 – V4177
128
None specific, used with many
instructions
Stages
S0 – S377
V41000 – V41017
256
System parameters
None
V7620 – V7647
V7750–V7777
48
Y0
C0
C0
SP0
TMR
64
T0
K100
V0 K100
T0
CNT CT0
K10
64
V1000 K100
CT0
SG
S001
S0
None specific, used for various
purposes
NOTE 1: The DL230 systems are limited to 256 discrete I/O points (total) with the present system hardware
available. These can be mixed between inputs and output points as necessary.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
3-53
Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
DL240 Memory Map
Memory Type
Discrete Memory
Reference (octal)
Word Memory Qty. Decimal
Reference(octal)
Symbol
X0
Input Points
X0 – X477
V40400 – V40423
3201
Output Points
Y0 – Y477
V40500 – V40523
3201
Control Relays
C0 – C377
V40600 – V40617
256
Special Relays
SP0 – SP137
SP540 – SP617
V41200 – V41205
V41226 – V41230
144
Timers
T0 – T177
Timer Current Values
None
V0 – V177
128
Timer Status Bits
T0 – T177
V41100 – V41107
128
Counters
CT0 – CT177
Counter Current Values
None
V1000 – V1177
128
Counter Status Bits
CT0 – CT177
V41140 – V41147
128
Data Words
None
V2000 – V3777
1024
None specific, used with many
instructions
Data Words Non–volatile None
V4000 – V4377
256
None specific, used with many
instructions
Stages
S0 – S777
V41000 – V41037
512
System parameters
None
V7620 – V7737
V7746–V7777
106
3-54
128
Y0
C0
C0
SP0
TMR
T0
K100
V0 K100
T0
CNT CT0
K10
128
V1000 K100
CT0
SG
S001
S0
None specific, used for various
purposes
NOTE 1: The DL240 systems are limited to 256 discrete I/O points (total) with the present system hardware
available. These can be mixed between inputs and output points as necessary.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations
DL250–1 Memory Map (DL250 also)
Memory Type
Discrete Memory
Reference (octal)
Word Memory
Reference (octal)
Qty.
Decimal
Input Points
X0 – X777
V40400 – V40437
512
Output Points
Y0 – Y777
V40500 – V40537
512
Control Relays
C0 – C1777
V40600 – V40677
1024
Special Relays
SP0 – SP777
V41200 – V41237
512
Timers
T0 – T377
Timer Current Values
None
V0 – V377
256
Timer Status Bits
T0 – T377
V41100 – V41117
256
Counters
CT0 – CT177
Counter Current Values
None
V1000 – V1177
128
Counter Status Bits
CT0 – CT177
V41140 – V41147
128
Data Words
None
V1400 – V7377 V10000–
V17777
7168
Stages
S0 – S1777
V41000 – V41077
1024
System parameters
None
V7400–V7777 V36000–
V37777
768
256
128
Symbol
X0
Y0
C0
C0
SP0
TMR
T0
K100
V0 K100
T0
CNT CT0
K10
V1000 K100
CT0
None specific, used with many
instructions
SG
S001
S0
None specific, used for various
purposes
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
3-55
Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
DL260 Memory Map
Memory Type
Discrete Memory
Reference (octal)
Word Memory
Reference (octal)
Qty.
Decimal
Input Points
X0 – X1777
V40400 – V40477
1024
Output Points
Y0 – Y1777
V40500 – V40577
1024
Control Relays
C0 – C3777
V40600 – V40777
2048
Special Relays
SP0 – SP777
V41200 – V41237
512
Timers
T0 – T377
Timer Current Values
None
V0 – V377
256
Timer Status Bits
T0 – T377
V41100 – V41117
256
Counters
CT0 – CT377
Counter Current Values
None
V1000 – V1377
256
Counter Status Bits
CT0 – CT377
V41140 – V41157
256
Data Words
None
V400 – V777
V1400 – V7377 V10000–
V35777
14.6K
Stages
S0 – S1777
V41000 – V41077
1024
GX0 – GX3777
V40000 – V40177
2048
GY0 – GY3777
V40200–V40377
2048
Remote Input and
Output Points
System parameters
3-56
None
Symbol
X0
Y0
C0
SP0
TMR
256
V36000–V37777
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1.2K
T0
K100
V0 K100
T0
CNT CT0
K10
256
V7400–V7777
C0
V1000 K100
CT0
None specific, used with many
instructions
SG
S0
S001
GX0
GY0
None specific, used for various
purposes
Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations
X Input/Y Output Bit Map
This table provides a listing of the individual Input points associated with each V-memory
address bit for the DL230, DL240, and DL250–1 and DL260 CPUs. The DL250–1 ranges
apply to the DL250.
MSB
DL230/DL240/DL250-1/DL260 Input (X) and Output (Y) Points
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
017
037
057
077
117
137
157
177
016
036
056
076
116
136
156
176
015
035
055
075
115
135
155
175
014
034
054
074
114
134
154
174
013
033
053
073
113
133
153
173
012
032
052
072
112
132
152
172
011
031
051
071
111
131
151
171
010
030
050
070
110
130
150
170
007
027
047
067
107
127
147
167
006
026
046
066
106
126
146
166
005
025
045
065
105
125
145
165
004
024
044
064
104
124
144
164
003
023
043
063
103
123
143
163
002
022
042
062
102
122
142
162
001
021
041
061
101
121
141
161
216
236
256
276
316
336
356
376
416
436
456
476
215
235
255
275
315
335
355
375
415
435
455
475
202
222
242
262
302
322
342
362
402
422
442
462
201
221
241
261
301
321
341
361
401
421
441
461
516
536
556
576
616
636
656
676
716
736
756
776
515
535
555
575
615
635
655
675
715
735
755
775
MSB
217
237
257
277
317
337
357
377
417
437
457
477
DL240/DL250-1/DL260 Input (X) and Output (Y) Points
MSB
517
537
557
577
617
637
657
677
717
737
757
777
214
234
254
274
314
334
354
374
414
434
454
474
213
233
253
273
313
333
353
373
413
433
453
473
212
232
252
272
312
332
352
372
412
432
452
472
211
231
251
271
311
331
351
371
411
431
451
471
210
230
250
270
310
330
350
370
410
430
450
470
207
227
247
267
307
327
347
367
407
427
447
467
206
226
246
266
306
326
346
366
406
426
446
466
205
225
245
265
305
325
345
365
405
425
445
465
204
224
244
264
304
324
344
364
404
424
444
464
203
223
243
263
303
323
343
363
403
423
443
463
513
533
553
573
613
633
653
673
713
733
753
773
512
532
552
572
612
632
652
672
712
732
752
772
511
531
551
571
611
631
651
671
711
731
751
771
510
530
550
570
610
630
650
670
710
730
750
770
507
527
547
567
607
627
647
667
707
727
747
767
506
526
546
566
606
626
646
666
706
726
746
766
505
525
545
565
605
625
645
665
705
725
745
765
504
524
544
564
604
624
644
664
704
724
744
764
503
523
543
563
603
623
643
663
703
723
743
763
000
020
040
060
100
120
140
160
V40400
V40401
V40402
V40403
V40404
V40405
V40406
V40407
V40500
V40501
V40502
V40503
V40504
V40505
V40506
V40507
V40410
V40411
V40412
V40413
V40414
V40415
V40416
V40417
V40420
V40421
V40422
V40423
V40510
V40511
V40512
V40513
V40514
V40515
V40516
V40517
V40520
V40521
V40522
V40523
V40424
V40425
V40426
V40427
V40430
V40431
V40432
V40433
V40434
V40435
V40436
V40437
V40524
V40525
V40526
V40527
V40530
V40531
V40532
V40533
V40534
V40535
V40536
V40537
LSB
Additional DL250-1/DL260 Input (X) and Output (Y) Points
514
534
554
574
614
634
654
674
714
734
754
774
LSB X Input Y Output
0 Address Address
502
522
542
562
602
622
642
662
702
722
742
762
200
220
240
260
300
320
340
360
400
420
440
460
LSB
501
521
541
561
601
621
641
661
701
721
741
761
500
520
540
560
600
620
640
660
700
720
740
760
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
3-57
Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
MSB
Additional DL260 Input (X) and Output (Y) Points
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1017
1037
1057
1077
1117
1137
1157
1177
1217
1237
1257
1277
1317
1337
1357
1377
1417
1437
1457
1477
1517
1537
1557
1577
1617
1637
1657
1677
1717
1737
1757
1777
1016
1036
1056
1076
1116
1136
1156
1176
1216
1236
1256
1276
1316
1336
1356
1376
1416
1436
1456
1476
1516
1536
1556
1576
1616
1636
1656
1676
1716
1736
1756
1776
1015
1035
1055
1075
1115
1135
1155
1175
1215
1235
1255
1275
1315
1335
1355
1375
1415
1435
1455
1475
1515
1535
1555
1575
1615
1635
1655
1675
1715
1735
1755
1775
1014
1034
1054
1074
1114
1134
1154
1174
1214
1234
1254
1274
1314
1334
1354
1374
1414
1434
1454
1474
1514
1534
1554
1574
1614
1634
1654
1674
1714
1734
1754
1774
1013
1033
1053
1073
1113
1133
1153
1173
1213
1233
1253
1273
1313
1333
1353
1373
1413
1433
1453
1473
1513
1533
1553
1573
1613
1633
1653
1673
1713
1733
1753
1773
1012
1032
1052
1072
1112
1132
1152
1172
1212
1232
1252
1272
1312
1332
1352
1372
1412
1432
1452
1472
1512
1532
1552
1572
1612
1632
1652
1672
1712
1732
1752
1772
1011
1031
1051
1071
1111
1131
1151
1171
1211
1231
1251
1271
1311
1331
1351
1371
1411
1431
1451
1471
1511
1531
1551
1571
1611
1631
1651
1671
1711
1731
1751
1771
1010
1030
1050
1070
1110
1130
1150
1170
1210
1230
1250
1270
1310
1330
1350
1370
1410
1430
1450
1470
1510
1530
1550
1570
1610
1630
1650
1670
1710
1730
1750
1770
1007
1027
1047
1067
1107
1127
1147
1167
1207
1227
1247
1267
1307
1327
1347
1367
1407
1427
1447
1467
1507
1527
1547
1567
1607
1627
1647
1667
1707
1727
1747
1767
1006
1026
1046
1066
1106
1126
1146
1166
1206
1226
1246
1266
1306
1326
1346
1366
1406
1426
1446
1466
1506
1526
1546
1566
1606
1626
1646
1666
1706
1726
1746
1766
1005
1025
1045
1065
1105
1125
1145
1165
1205
1225
1245
1265
1305
1325
1345
1365
1405
1425
1445
1465
1505
1525
1545
1565
1605
1625
1645
1665
1705
1725
1745
1765
1004
1024
1044
1064
1104
1124
1144
1164
1204
1224
1244
1264
1304
1324
1344
1364
1404
1424
1444
1464
1504
1524
1544
1564
1604
1624
1644
1664
1704
1724
1744
1764
1003
1023
1043
1063
1103
1123
1143
1163
1203
1223
1243
1263
1303
1323
1343
1363
1403
1423
1443
1463
1503
1523
1543
1563
1603
1623
1643
1663
1703
1723
1743
1763
1002
1022
1042
1062
1102
1122
1142
1162
1202
1222
1242
1262
1302
1322
1342
1362
1402
1422
1442
1462
1502
1522
1542
1562
1602
1622
1642
1662
1702
1722
1742
1762
1001
1021
1041
1061
1101
1121
1141
1161
1201
1221
1241
1261
1301
1321
1341
1361
1401
1421
1441
1461
1501
1521
1541
1561
1601
1621
1641
1661
1701
1721
1741
1761
3-58
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
LSB X Input Y Output
0 Address Address
1000
1020
1040
1060
1100
1120
1140
1160
1200
1220
1240
1260
1300
1320
1340
1360
1400
1420
1440
1460
1500
1520
1540
1560
1600
1620
1640
1660
1700
1720
1740
1760
V40440
V40441
V40442
V40443
V40444
V40445
V40446
V40447
V40450
V40451
V40452
V40453
V40454
V40455
V40456
V40457
V40460
V40461
V40462
V40463
V40464
V40465
V40466
V40467
V40470
V40471
V40472
V40473
V40474
V40475
V40476
V40477
V40540
V40541
V40542
V40543
V40544
V40545
V40546
V40547
V40550
V40551
V40552
V40553
V40554
V40555
V40556
V40557
V40560
V40561
V40562
V40563
V40564
V40565
V40566
V40567
V40570
V40571
V40572
V40573
V40574
V40575
V40576
V40577
Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations
Control Relay Bit Map
This table provides a listing of the individual control relays associated with each V-memory address bit.
MSB
DL230/DL240/DL250-1/DL260 Control Relays (C)
LSB
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
017
037
057
077
117
137
157
177
217
237
257
277
317
337
357
377
016
036
056
076
116
136
156
176
216
236
256
276
316
336
356
376
015
035
055
075
115
135
155
175
215
235
255
275
315
335
355
375
014
034
054
074
114
134
154
174
214
234
254
274
314
334
354
374
013
033
053
073
113
133
153
173
213
233
253
273
313
333
353
373
012
032
052
072
112
132
152
172
212
232
252
272
312
332
352
372
011
031
051
071
111
131
151
171
211
231
251
271
311
331
351
371
010
030
050
070
110
130
150
170
210
230
250
270
310
330
350
370
007
027
047
067
107
127
147
167
207
227
247
267
307
327
347
367
006
026
046
066
106
126
146
166
206
226
246
266
306
326
346
366
005
025
045
065
105
125
145
165
205
225
245
265
305
325
345
365
004
024
044
064
104
124
144
164
204
224
244
264
304
324
344
364
003
023
043
063
103
123
143
163
203
223
243
263
303
323
343
363
002
022
042
062
102
122
142
162
202
222
242
262
302
322
342
362
001
021
041
061
101
121
141
161
201
221
241
261
301
321
341
361
000
020
040
060
100
120
140
160
200
220
240
260
300
320
340
360
416
436
456
476
516
536
556
576
616
636
656
676
716
736
756
776
415
435
455
475
515
535
555
575
615
635
655
675
715
735
755
775
414
434
454
474
514
534
554
574
614
634
654
674
714
734
754
774
403
423
443
463
503
523
543
563
603
623
643
663
703
723
743
763
402
422
442
462
502
522
542
562
602
622
642
662
702
722
742
762
401
421
441
461
501
521
541
561
601
621
641
661
701
721
741
761
MSB
417
437
457
477
517
537
557
577
617
637
657
677
717
737
757
777
Additional DL250-1/DL260 Control Relays (C)
413
433
453
473
513
533
553
573
613
633
653
673
713
733
753
773
412
432
452
472
512
532
552
572
612
632
652
672
712
732
752
772
411
431
451
471
511
531
551
571
611
631
651
671
711
731
751
771
410
430
450
470
510
530
550
570
610
630
650
670
710
730
750
770
407
427
447
467
507
527
547
567
607
627
647
667
707
727
747
767
406
426
446
466
506
526
546
566
606
626
646
666
706
726
746
766
405
425
445
465
505
525
545
565
605
625
645
665
705
725
745
765
404
424
444
464
504
524
544
564
604
624
644
664
704
724
744
764
Address
V40600
V40601
V40602
V40603
V40604
V40605
V40606
V40607
V40610
V40611
V40612
V40613
V40614
V40615
V40616
V40617
LSB Address
400
420
440
460
500
520
540
560
600
620
640
660
700
720
740
760
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
V40620
V40621
V40622
V40623
V40624
V40625
V40626
V40627
V40630
V40631
V40632
V40633
V40634
V40635
V40636
V40637
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
3-59
Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
MSB
Additional DL250-1/DL260 Control Relays (C)
15
14
13
12
11
10
1017
1037
1057
1077
1117
1137
1157
1177
1217
1237
1257
1277
1317
1337
1357
1377
1417
1437
1457
1477
1517
1537
1557
1577
1617
1637
1657
1677
1717
1737
1757
1777
1016
1036
1056
1076
1116
1136
1156
1176
1216
1236
1256
1276
1316
1336
1356
1376
1416
1436
1456
1476
1516
1536
1556
1576
1616
1636
1656
1676
1716
1736
1756
1776
1015
1035
1055
1075
1115
1135
1155
1175
1215
1235
1255
1275
1315
1335
1355
1375
1415
1435
1455
1475
1515
1535
1555
1575
1615
1635
1655
1675
1715
1735
1755
1775
1014
1034
1054
1074
1114
1134
1154
1174
1214
1234
1254
1274
1314
1334
1354
1374
1414
1434
1454
1474
1514
1534
1554
1574
1614
1634
1654
1674
1714
1734
1754
1774
1013
1033
1053
1073
1113
1133
1153
1173
1213
1233
1253
1273
1313
1333
1353
1373
1413
1433
1453
1473
1513
1533
1553
1573
1613
1633
1653
1673
1713
1733
1753
1773
1012
1032
1052
1072
1112
1132
1152
1172
1212
1232
1252
1272
1312
1332
1352
1372
1412
1432
1452
1472
1512
1532
1552
1572
1612
1632
1652
1672
1712
1732
1752
1772
3-60
9
1011
1031
1051
1071
1111
1131
1151
1171
1211
1231
1251
1271
1311
1331
1351
1371
1411
1431
1451
1471
1511
1531
1551
1571
1611
1631
1651
1671
1711
1731
1751
1771
8
1010
1030
1050
1070
1110
1130
1150
1170
1210
1230
1250
1270
1310
1330
1350
1370
1410
1430
1450
1470
1510
1530
1550
1570
1610
1630
1650
1670
1710
1730
1750
1770
7
1007
1027
1047
1067
1107
1127
1147
1167
1207
1227
1247
1267
1307
1327
1347
1367
1407
1427
1447
1467
1507
1527
1547
1567
1607
1627
1647
1667
1707
1727
1747
1767
6
1006
1026
1046
1066
1106
1126
1146
1166
1206
1226
1246
1266
1306
1326
1346
1366
1406
1426
1446
1466
1506
1526
1546
1566
1606
1626
1646
1666
1706
1726
1746
1766
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5
1005
1025
1045
1065
1105
1125
1145
1165
1205
1225
1245
1265
1305
1325
1345
1365
1405
1425
1445
1465
1505
1525
1545
1565
1605
1625
1645
1665
1705
1725
1745
1765
4
1004
1024
1044
1064
1104
1124
1144
1164
1204
1224
1244
1264
1304
1324
1344
1364
1404
1424
1444
1464
1504
1524
1544
1564
1604
1624
1644
1664
1704
1724
1744
1764
LSB
3
1003
1023
1043
1063
1103
1123
1143
1163
1203
1223
1243
1263
1303
1323
1343
1363
1403
1423
1443
1463
1503
1523
1543
1563
1603
1623
1643
1663
1703
1723
1743
1763
2
1002
1022
1042
1062
1102
1122
1142
1162
1202
1222
1242
1262
1302
1322
1342
1362
1402
1422
1442
1462
1502
1522
1542
1562
1602
1622
1642
1662
1702
1722
1742
1762
1
1001
1021
1041
1061
1101
1121
1141
1161
1201
1221
1241
1261
1301
1321
1341
1361
1401
1421
1441
1461
1501
1521
1541
1561
1601
1621
1641
1661
1701
1721
1741
1761
0
1000
1020
1040
1060
1100
1120
1140
1160
1200
1220
1240
1260
1300
1320
1340
1360
1400
1420
1440
1460
1500
1520
1540
1560
1600
1620
1640
1660
1700
1720
1740
1760
Address
V40640
V40641
V40642
V40643
V40644
V40645
V40646
V40647
V40650
V40651
V40652
V40653
V40654
V40655
V40656
V40657
V40660
V40661
V40662
V40663
V40664
V40665
V40666
V40667
V40670
V40671
V40672
V40673
V40674
V40675
V40676
V40677
Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations
This portion of the table shows additional Control Relays points available with the DL260.
MSB
Additional DL260 Control Relays (C)
LSB
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
2017
2037
2057
2077
2117
2137
2157
2177
2217
2237
2257
2277
2317
2337
2357
2377
2417
2437
2457
2477
2517
2537
2557
2577
2617
2637
2657
2677
2717
2737
2757
2777
2016
2036
2056
2076
2116
2136
2156
2176
2216
2236
2256
2276
2316
2336
2356
2376
2416
2436
2456
2476
2516
2536
2556
2576
2616
2636
2656
2676
2716
2736
2756
2776
2015
2035
2055
2075
2115
2135
2155
2175
2215
2235
2255
2275
2315
2335
2355
2375
2415
2435
2455
2475
2515
2535
2555
2575
2615
2635
2655
2675
2715
2735
2755
2775
2014
2034
2054
2074
2114
2134
2154
2174
2214
2234
2254
2274
2314
2334
2354
2374
2414
2434
2454
2474
2514
2534
2554
2574
2614
2634
2654
2674
2714
2734
2754
2774
2013
2033
2053
2073
2113
2133
2153
2173
2213
2233
2253
2273
2313
2333
2353
2373
2413
2433
2453
2473
2513
2533
2553
2573
2613
2633
2653
2673
2713
2733
2753
2773
2012
2032
2052
2072
2112
2132
2152
2172
2212
2232
2252
2272
2312
2332
2352
2372
2412
2432
2452
2472
2512
2532
2552
2572
2612
2632
2652
2672
2712
2732
2752
2772
2011
2031
2051
2071
2111
2131
2151
2171
2211
2231
2251
2271
2311
2331
2351
2371
2411
2431
2451
2471
2511
2531
2551
2571
2611
2631
2651
2671
2711
2731
2751
2771
2010
2030
2050
2070
2110
2130
2150
2170
2210
2230
2250
2270
2310
2330
2350
2370
2410
2430
2450
2470
2510
2530
2550
2570
2610
2630
2650
2670
2710
2730
2750
2770
2007
2027
2047
2067
2107
2127
2147
2167
2207
2227
2247
2267
2307
2327
2347
2367
2407
2427
2447
2467
2507
2527
2547
2567
2607
2627
2647
2667
2707
2727
2747
2767
2006
2026
2046
2066
2106
2126
2146
2166
2206
2226
2246
2266
2306
2326
2346
2366
2406
2426
2446
2466
2506
2526
2546
2566
2606
2626
2646
2666
2706
2726
2746
2766
2005
2025
2045
2065
2105
2125
2145
2165
2205
2225
2245
2265
2305
2325
2345
2365
2405
2425
2445
2465
2505
2525
2545
2565
2605
2625
2645
2665
2705
2725
2745
2765
2004
2024
2044
2064
2104
2124
2144
2164
2204
2224
2244
2264
2304
2324
2344
2364
2404
2424
2444
2464
2504
2524
2544
2564
2604
2624
2644
2664
2704
2724
2744
2764
2003
2023
2043
2063
2103
2123
2143
2163
2203
2223
2243
2263
2303
2323
2343
2363
2403
2423
2443
2463
2503
2523
2543
2563
2603
2623
2643
2663
2703
2723
2743
2763
2002
2022
2042
2062
2102
2122
2142
2162
2202
2222
2242
2262
2302
2322
2342
2362
2402
2422
2442
2462
2502
2522
2542
2562
2602
2622
2642
2662
2702
2722
2742
2762
2001
2021
2041
2061
2101
2121
2141
2161
2201
2221
2241
2261
2301
2321
2341
2361
2401
2421
2441
2461
2501
2521
2541
2561
2601
2621
2641
2661
2701
2721
2741
2761
2000
2020
2040
2060
2100
2120
2140
2160
2200
2220
2240
2260
2300
2320
2340
2360
2400
2420
2440
2460
2500
2520
2540
2560
2600
2620
2640
2660
2700
2720
2740
2760
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Address
V40700
V40701
V40702
V40703
V40704
V40705
V40706
V40707
V40710
V40711
V40712
V40713
V40714
V40715
V40716
V40717
V40720
V40721
V40722
V40723
V40724
V40725
V40726
V40727
V40730
V40731
V40732
V40733
V40734
V40735
V40736
V40737
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
3-61
Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
MSB
Additional DL260 Control Relays (C)
LSB
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
3017
3037
3057
3077
3117
3137
3157
3177
3217
3237
3257
3277
3317
3337
3357
3377
3417
3437
3457
3477
3517
3537
3557
3577
3617
3637
3657
3677
3717
3737
3757
3777
3016
3036
3056
3076
3116
3136
3156
3176
3216
3236
3256
3276
3316
3336
3356
3376
3416
3436
3456
3476
3516
3536
3556
3576
3616
3636
3656
3676
3716
3736
3756
3776
3015
3035
3055
3075
3115
3135
3155
3175
3215
3235
3255
3275
3315
3335
3355
3375
3415
3435
3455
3475
3515
3535
3555
3575
3615
3635
3655
3675
3715
3735
3755
3775
3014
3034
3054
3074
3114
3134
3154
3174
3214
3234
3254
3274
3314
3334
3354
3374
3414
3434
3454
3474
3514
3534
3554
3574
3614
3634
3654
3674
3714
3734
3754
3774
3013
3033
3053
3073
3113
3133
3153
3173
3213
3233
3253
3273
3313
3333
3353
3373
3413
3433
3453
3473
3513
3533
3553
3573
3613
3633
3653
3673
3713
3733
3753
3773
3012
3032
3052
3072
3112
3132
3152
3172
3212
3232
3252
3272
3312
3332
3352
3372
3412
3432
3452
3472
3512
3532
3552
3572
3612
3632
3652
3672
3712
3732
3752
3772
3011
3031
3051
3071
3111
3131
3151
3171
3211
3231
3251
3271
3311
3331
3351
3371
3411
3431
3451
3471
3511
3531
3551
3571
3611
3631
3651
3671
3711
3731
3751
3771
3010
3030
3050
3070
3110
3130
3150
3170
3210
3230
3250
3270
3310
3330
3350
3370
3410
3430
3450
3470
3510
3530
3550
3570
3610
3630
3650
3670
3710
3730
3750
3770
3007
3027
3047
3067
3107
3127
3147
3167
3207
3227
3247
3267
3307
3327
3347
3367
3407
3427
3447
3467
3507
3527
3547
3567
3607
3627
3647
3667
3707
3727
3747
3767
3006
3026
3046
3066
3106
3126
3146
3166
3206
3226
3246
3266
3306
3326
3346
3366
3406
3426
3446
3466
3506
3526
3546
3566
3606
3626
3646
3666
3706
3726
3746
3766
3005
3025
3045
3065
3105
3125
3145
3165
3205
3225
3245
3265
3305
3325
3345
3365
3405
3425
3445
3465
3505
3525
3545
3565
3605
3625
3645
3665
3705
3725
3745
3765
3004
3024
3044
3064
3104
3124
3144
3164
3204
3224
3244
3264
3304
3324
3344
3364
3404
3424
3444
3464
3504
3524
3544
3564
3604
3624
3644
3664
3704
3724
3744
3764
3003
3023
3043
3063
3103
3123
3143
3163
3203
3223
3243
3263
3303
3323
3343
3363
3403
3423
3443
3463
3503
3523
3543
3563
3603
3623
3643
3663
3703
3723
3743
3763
3002
3022
3042
3062
3102
3122
3142
3162
3202
3222
3242
3262
3302
3322
3342
3362
3402
3422
3442
3462
3502
3522
3542
3562
3602
3622
3642
3662
3702
3722
3742
3762
3001
3021
3041
3061
3101
3121
3141
3161
3201
3221
3241
3261
3301
3321
3341
3361
3401
3421
3441
3461
3501
3521
3541
3561
3601
3621
3641
3661
3701
3721
3741
3761
3000
3020
3040
3060
3100
3120
3140
3160
3200
3220
3240
3260
3300
3320
3340
3360
3400
3420
3440
3460
3500
3520
3540
3560
3600
3620
3640
3660
3700
3720
3740
3760
3-62
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Address
V40740
V40741
V40742
V40743
V40744
V40745
V40746
V40747
V40750
V40751
V40752
V40753
V40754
V40755
V40756
V40757
V40760
V40761
V40762
V40763
V40764
V40765
V40766
V40767
V40770
V40771
V40772
V40773
V40774
V40775
V40776
V40777
Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations
Stage Control/Status Bit Map
This table provides a listing of the individual Stage control bits associated with each V-memory
address.
DL230/DL240/DL250-1/DL260 Stage (S) Control Bits
MSB
LSB
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
17
037
057
077
117
137
157
177
217
237
257
277
317
337
357
377
16
036
056
076
116
136
156
176
216
236
256
276
316
336
356
376
15
035
055
075
115
135
155
175
215
235
255
275
315
335
355
375
14
034
054
074
114
134
154
174
214
234
254
274
314
334
354
374
13
033
053
073
113
133
153
173
213
233
253
273
313
333
353
373
12
032
052
072
112
132
152
172
212
232
252
272
312
332
352
372
11
031
051
071
111
131
151
171
211
231
251
271
311
331
351
371
10
030
050
070
110
130
150
170
210
230
250
270
310
330
350
370
7
027
047
067
107
127
147
167
207
227
247
267
307
327
347
367
6
026
046
066
106
126
146
166
206
226
246
266
306
326
346
366
5
025
045
065
105
125
145
165
205
225
245
265
305
325
345
365
4
024
044
064
104
124
144
164
204
224
244
264
304
324
344
364
3
023
043
063
103
123
143
163
203
223
243
263
303
323
343
363
2
022
042
062
102
122
142
162
202
222
242
262
302
322
342
362
1
021
041
061
101
121
141
161
201
221
241
261
301
321
341
361
0
020
040
060
100
120
140
160
200
220
240
260
300
320
340
360
MSB
Additional DL240/DL250-1/DL260 Stage (S) Control Bits
Address
LSB
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
417
437
457
477
517
537
557
577
617
637
657
677
717
737
757
777
416
436
456
476
516
536
556
576
616
636
656
676
716
736
756
776
415
435
455
475
515
535
555
575
615
635
655
675
715
735
755
775
414
434
454
474
514
534
554
574
614
634
654
674
714
734
754
774
413
433
453
473
513
533
553
573
613
633
653
673
713
733
753
773
412
432
452
472
512
532
552
572
612
632
652
672
712
732
752
772
411
431
451
471
511
531
551
571
611
631
651
671
711
731
751
771
410
430
450
470
510
530
550
570
610
630
650
670
710
730
750
770
407
427
447
467
507
527
547
567
607
627
647
667
707
727
747
767
406
426
446
466
506
526
546
566
606
626
646
666
706
726
746
766
405
425
445
465
505
525
545
565
605
625
645
665
705
725
745
765
404
424
444
464
504
524
544
564
604
624
644
664
704
724
744
764
403
423
443
463
503
523
543
563
603
623
643
663
703
723
743
763
402
422
442
462
502
522
542
562
602
622
642
662
702
722
742
762
401
421
441
461
501
521
541
561
601
621
641
661
701
721
741
761
400
420
440
460
500
520
540
560
600
620
640
660
700
720
740
760
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
V41000
V41001
V41002
V41003
V41004
V41005
V41006
V41007
V41010
V41011
V41012
V41013
V41014
V41015
V41016
V41017
Address
V41020
V41021
V41022
V41023
V41024
V41025
V41026
V41027
V41030
V41031
V41032
V41033
V41034
V41035
V41036
V41037
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
3-63
Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
MSB
Additional DL250-1/DL260 Stage (S) Control Bits
LSB
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
1017
1037
1057
1077
1117
1137
1157
1177
1217
1237
1257
1277
1317
1337
1357
1377
1417
1437
1457
1477
1517
1537
1557
1577
1617
1637
1657
1677
1717
1737
1757
1777
1016
1036
1056
1076
1116
1136
1156
1176
1216
1236
1256
1276
1316
1336
1356
1376
1416
1436
1456
1476
1516
1536
1556
1576
1616
1636
1656
1676
1716
1736
1756
1776
1015
1035
1055
1075
1115
1135
1155
1175
1215
1235
1255
1275
1315
1335
1355
1375
1415
1435
1455
1475
1515
1535
1555
1575
1615
1635
1655
1675
1715
1735
1755
1775
1014
1034
1054
1074
1114
1134
1154
1174
1214
1234
1254
1274
1314
1334
1354
1374
1414
1434
1454
1474
1514
1534
1554
1574
1614
1634
1654
1674
1714
1734
1754
1774
1013
1033
1053
1073
1113
1133
1153
1173
1213
1233
1253
1273
1313
1333
1353
1373
1413
1433
1453
1473
1513
1533
1553
1573
1613
1633
1653
1673
1713
1733
1753
1773
1012
1032
1052
1072
1112
1132
1152
1172
1212
1232
1252
1272
1312
1332
1352
1372
1412
1432
1452
1472
1512
1532
1552
1572
1612
1632
1652
1672
1712
1732
1752
1772
1011
1031
1051
1071
1111
1131
1151
1171
1211
1231
1251
1271
1311
1331
1351
1371
1411
1431
1451
1471
1511
1531
1551
1571
1611
1631
1651
1671
1711
1731
1751
1771
1010
1030
1050
1070
1110
1130
1150
1170
1210
1230
1250
1270
1310
1330
1350
1370
1410
1430
1450
1470
1510
1530
1550
1570
1610
1630
1650
1670
1710
1730
1750
1770
1007
1027
1047
1067
1107
1127
1147
1167
1207
1227
1247
1267
1307
1327
1347
1367
1407
1427
1447
1467
1507
1527
1547
1567
1607
1627
1647
1667
1707
1727
1747
1767
1006
1026
1046
1066
1106
1126
1146
1166
1206
1226
1246
1266
1306
1326
1346
1366
1406
1426
1446
1466
1506
1526
1546
1566
1606
1626
1646
1666
1706
1726
1746
1766
1005
1025
1045
1065
1105
1125
1145
1165
1205
1225
1245
1265
1305
1325
1345
1365
1405
1425
1445
1465
1505
1525
1545
1565
1605
1625
1645
1665
1705
1725
1745
1765
1004
1024
1044
1064
1104
1124
1144
1164
1204
1224
1244
1264
1304
1324
1344
1364
1404
1424
1444
1464
1504
1524
1544
1564
1604
1624
1644
1664
1704
1724
1744
1764
1003
1023
1043
1063
1103
1123
1143
1163
1203
1223
1243
1263
1303
1323
1343
1363
1403
1423
1443
1463
1503
1523
1543
1563
1603
1623
1643
1663
1703
1723
1743
1763
1002
1022
1042
1062
1102
1122
1142
1162
1202
1222
1242
1262
1302
1322
1342
1362
1402
1422
1442
1462
1502
1522
1542
1562
1602
1622
1642
1662
1702
1722
1742
1762
1001
1021
1041
1061
1101
1121
1141
1161
1201
1221
1241
1261
1301
1321
1341
1361
1401
1421
1441
1461
1501
1521
1541
1561
1601
1621
1641
1661
1701
1721
1741
1761
1000
1020
1040
1060
1100
1120
1140
1160
1200
1220
1240
1260
1300
1320
1340
1360
1400
1420
1440
1460
1500
1520
1540
1560
1600
1620
1640
1660
1700
1720
1740
1760
3-64
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Address
V41040
V41041
V41042
V41043
V41044
V41045
V41046
V41047
V41050
V41051
V41052
V41053
V41054
V41055
V41056
V41057
V41060
V41061
V41062
V41063
V41064
V41065
V41066
V41067
V41070
V41071
V41072
V41073
V41074
V41075
V41076
V41077
Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations
Timer and Counter Status Bit Maps
This table provides a listing of the individual timer and counter contacts associated with each
V-memory address bit.
MSB
DL230/DL240/DL250-1/DL260 Timer (T) and Counter (CT) Contacts
15 14 13 12 11 10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
017
037
057
077
016
036
056
076
015
035
055
075
014
034
054
074
013
033
053
073
012
032
052
072
011
031
051
071
010
030
050
070
007
027
047
067
006
026
046
066
005
025
045
065
004
024
044
064
003
023
043
063
002
022
042
062
LSB Timer Counter
0 Address Address
001
021
041
061
V41100
V41101
V41102
V41103
000
020
040
060
V41140
V41141
V41142
V41143
This portion of the table shows additional Timer and Counter contacts available with the
DL240/250–1/260.
MSB
Additional DL240/DL250-1/DL260 Timer (T) and Counter (CT) Contacts
LSB Timer Counter
0 Address Address
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
117
137
157
177
116
136
156
176
115
135
155
175
114
134
154
174
113
133
153
173
112
132
152
172
111
131
151
171
110
130
150
170
107
127
147
167
106
126
146
166
105
125
145
165
104
124
144
164
103
123
143
163
102
122
142
162
101
121
141
161
V41104
V41105
V41106
V41107
100
120
140
160
V41144
V41145
V41146
V41147
This portion of the table shows additional Timer contacts available with the DL250-1 and
DL260.
MSB
Additional DL250-1/DL260 Timer (T) Contacts
LSB
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Timer
Address
217
237
257
277
317
337
357
377
216
236
256
276
316
336
356
376
215
235
255
275
315
335
355
375
214
234
254
274
314
334
354
374
213
233
253
273
313
333
353
373
212
232
252
272
312
332
352
372
211
231
251
271
311
331
351
371
210
230
250
270
310
330
350
370
207
227
247
267
307
327
347
367
206
226
246
266
306
326
346
366
205
225
245
265
305
325
345
365
204
224
244
264
304
324
344
364
203
223
243
263
303
323
343
363
202
222
242
262
302
322
342
362
201
221
241
261
301
321
341
361
200
220
240
260
300
320
340
360
V41110
V41111
V41112
V41113
V41114
V41115
V41116
V41117
This portion of the table shows additional Counter contacts available with the DL260.
MSB
Additional DL260 Counter (CT) Contacts
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
217
237
257
277
317
337
357
377
216
236
256
276
316
336
356
376
215
235
255
275
315
335
355
375
214
234
254
274
314
334
354
374
213
233
253
273
313
333
353
373
212
232
252
272
312
332
352
372
211
231
251
271
311
331
351
371
210
230
250
270
310
330
350
370
207
227
247
267
307
327
347
367
206
226
246
266
306
326
346
366
205
225
245
265
305
325
345
365
204
224
244
264
304
324
344
364
203
223
243
263
303
323
343
363
202
222
242
262
302
322
342
362
201
221
241
261
301
321
341
361
LSB Counter
0 Address
200
220
240
260
300
320
340
360
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
V41150
V41151
V41152
V41153
V41154
V41155
V41156
V41157
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
3-65
Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Remote I/O Bit Map
This table provides a listing of the individual remote I/O points associated with each V-memory
address bit.
MSB
DL260 Remote I/O (GX) and (GY) Points
LSB
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
GX
Address
017
037
057
077
117
137
157
177
217
237
257
277
317
337
357
377
417
437
457
477
517
537
557
577
617
637
657
677
717
737
757
777
016
036
056
076
116
136
156
176
216
236
256
276
316
336
356
376
416
436
456
476
516
536
556
576
616
636
656
676
716
736
756
776
015
035
055
075
115
135
155
175
215
235
255
275
315
335
355
375
415
435
455
475
515
535
555
575
615
635
655
675
715
735
755
775
014
034
054
074
114
134
154
174
214
234
254
274
314
334
354
374
414
434
454
474
514
534
554
574
614
634
654
674
714
734
754
774
013
033
053
073
113
133
153
173
213
233
253
273
313
333
353
373
413
433
453
473
513
533
553
573
613
633
653
673
713
733
753
773
012
032
052
072
112
132
152
172
212
232
252
272
312
332
352
372
412
432
452
472
512
532
552
572
612
632
652
672
712
732
752
772
011
031
051
071
111
131
151
171
211
231
251
271
311
331
351
371
411
431
451
471
511
531
551
571
611
631
651
671
711
731
751
771
010
030
050
070
110
130
150
170
210
230
250
270
310
330
350
370
410
430
450
470
510
530
550
570
610
630
650
670
710
730
750
770
007
027
047
067
107
127
147
167
207
227
247
267
307
327
347
367
407
427
447
467
507
527
547
567
607
627
647
667
707
727
747
767
006
026
046
066
106
126
146
166
206
226
246
266
306
326
346
366
406
426
446
466
506
526
546
566
606
626
646
666
706
726
746
766
005
025
045
065
105
125
145
165
205
225
245
265
305
325
345
365
405
425
445
465
505
525
545
565
605
625
645
665
705
725
745
765
004
024
044
064
104
124
144
164
204
224
244
264
304
324
344
364
404
424
444
464
504
524
544
564
604
624
644
664
704
724
744
764
003
023
043
063
103
123
143
163
203
223
243
263
303
323
343
363
403
423
443
463
503
523
543
563
603
623
643
663
703
723
743
763
002
022
042
062
102
122
142
162
202
222
242
262
302
322
342
362
402
422
442
462
502
522
542
562
602
622
642
662
702
722
742
762
001
021
041
061
101
121
141
161
201
221
241
261
301
321
341
361
401
421
441
461
501
521
541
561
601
621
641
661
701
721
741
761
000
020
040
060
100
120
140
160
200
220
240
260
300
320
340
360
400
420
440
460
500
520
540
560
600
620
640
660
700
720
740
760
V40000
V40001
V40002
V40003
V40004
V40005
V40006
V40007
V40010
V40011
V40012
V40013
V40004
V40015
V40016
V40007
V40020
V40021
V40022
V40023
V40024
V40025
V40026
V40027
V40030
V40031
V40032
V40033
V40034
V40035
V40036
V40037
3-66
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
GY
Address
V40200
V40201
V40202
V40203
V40204
V40205
V40206
V40207
V40210
V40211
V40212
V40213
V40214
V40215
V40216
V40217
V40220
V40221
V40222
V40223
V40224
V40225
V40226
V40227
V40230
V40231
V40232
V40233
V40234
V40235
V40236
V40237
Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations
MSB
DL260 Remote I/O (GX) and (GY) Points
LSB
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
1017
1037
1057
1077
1117
1137
1157
1177
1217
1237
1257
1277
1317
1337
1357
1377
1417
1437
1457
1477
1517
1537
1557
1577
1617
1637
1657
1677
1717
1737
1757
1777
1016
1036
1056
1076
1116
1136
1156
1176
1216
1236
1256
1276
1316
1336
1356
1376
1416
1436
1456
1476
1516
1536
1556
1576
1616
1636
1656
1676
1716
1736
1756
1776
1015
1035
1055
1075
1115
1135
1155
1175
1215
1235
1255
1275
1315
1335
1355
1375
1415
1435
1455
1475
1515
1535
1555
1575
1615
1635
1655
1675
1715
1735
1755
1775
1014
1034
1054
1074
1114
1134
1154
1174
1214
1234
1254
1274
1314
1334
1354
1374
1414
1434
1454
1474
1514
1534
1554
1574
1614
1634
1654
1674
1714
1734
1754
1774
1013
1033
1053
1073
1113
1133
1153
1173
1213
1233
1253
1273
1313
1333
1353
1373
1413
1433
1453
1473
1513
1533
1553
1573
1613
1633
1653
1673
1713
1733
1753
1773
1012
1032
1052
1072
1112
1132
1152
1172
1212
1232
1252
1272
1312
1332
1352
1372
1412
1432
1452
1472
1512
1532
1552
1572
1612
1632
1652
1672
1712
1732
1752
1772
1011
1031
1051
1071
1111
1131
1151
1171
1211
1231
1251
1271
1311
1331
1351
1371
1411
1431
1451
1471
1511
1531
1551
1571
1611
1631
1651
1671
1711
1731
1751
1771
1010
1030
1050
1070
1110
1130
1150
1170
1210
1230
1250
1270
1310
1330
1350
1370
1410
1430
1450
1470
1510
1530
1550
1570
1610
1630
1650
1670
1710
1730
1750
1770
1007
1027
1047
1067
1107
1127
1147
1167
1207
1227
1247
1267
1307
1327
1347
1367
1407
1427
1447
1467
1507
1527
1547
1567
1607
1627
1647
1667
1707
1727
1747
1767
1006
1026
1046
1066
1106
1126
1146
1166
1206
1226
1246
1266
1306
1326
1346
1366
1406
1426
1446
1466
1506
1526
1546
1566
1606
1626
1646
1666
1706
1726
1746
1766
1005
1025
1045
1065
1105
1125
1145
1165
1205
1225
1245
1265
1305
1325
1345
1365
1405
1425
1445
1465
1505
1525
1545
1565
1605
1625
1645
1665
1705
1725
1745
1765
1004
1024
1044
1064
1104
1124
1144
1164
1204
1224
1244
1264
1304
1324
1344
1364
1404
1424
1444
1464
1504
1524
1544
1564
1604
1624
1644
1664
1704
1724
1744
1764
1003
1023
1043
1063
1103
1123
1143
1163
1203
1223
1243
1263
1303
1323
1343
1363
1403
1423
1443
1463
1503
1523
1543
1563
1603
1623
1643
1663
1703
1723
1743
1763
1002
1022
1042
1062
1102
1122
1142
1162
1202
1222
1242
1262
1302
1322
1342
1362
1402
1422
1442
1462
1502
1522
1542
1562
1602
1622
1642
1662
1702
1722
1742
1762
1001
1021
1041
1061
1101
1121
1141
1161
1201
1221
1241
1261
1301
1321
1341
1361
1401
1421
1441
1461
1501
1521
1541
1561
1601
1621
1641
1661
1701
1721
1741
1761
1000
1020
1040
1060
1100
1120
1140
1160
1200
1220
1240
1260
1300
1320
1340
1360
1400
1420
1440
1460
1500
1520
1540
1560
1600
1620
1640
1660
1700
1720
1740
1760
GX
GY
Address Address
V40040
V40041
V40042
V40043
V40044
V40045
V40046
V40047
V40050
V40051
V40052
V40053
V40054
V40055
V40056
V40057
V40060
V40061
V40062
V40063
V40064
V40065
V40066
V40067
V40070
V40071
V40072
V40073
V40074
V40075
V40076
V40077
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
V40240
V40241
V40242
V40243
V40244
V40245
V40246
V40247
V40250
V40251
V40252
V40253
V40254
V40255
V40256
V40257
V40260
V40261
V40262
V40263
V40264
V40265
V40266
V40267
V40270
V40271
V40272
V40273
V40274
V40275
V40276
V40277
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
3-67
Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
MSB
DL260 Remote I/O (GX) and (GY) Points
LSB
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
2017
2037
2057
2077
2117
2137
2157
2177
2217
2237
2257
2277
2317
2337
2357
2377
2417
2437
2457
2477
2517
2537
2557
2577
2617
2637
2657
2677
2717
2737
2757
2777
2016
2036
2056
2076
2116
2136
2156
2176
2216
2236
2256
2276
2316
2336
2356
2376
2416
2436
2456
2476
2516
2536
2556
2576
2616
2636
2656
2676
2716
2736
2756
2776
2015
2035
2055
2075
2115
2135
2155
2175
2215
2235
2255
2275
2315
2335
2355
2375
2415
2435
2455
2475
2515
2535
2555
2575
2615
2635
2655
2675
2715
2735
2755
2775
2014
2034
2054
2074
2114
2134
2154
2174
2214
2234
2254
2274
2314
2334
2354
2374
2414
2434
2454
2474
2514
2534
2554
2574
2614
2634
2654
2674
2714
2734
2754
2774
2013
2033
2053
2073
2113
2133
2153
2173
2213
2233
2253
2273
2313
2333
2353
2373
2413
2433
2453
2473
2513
2533
2553
2573
2613
2633
2653
2673
2713
2733
2753
2773
2012
2032
2052
2072
2112
2132
2152
2172
2212
2232
2252
2272
2312
2332
2352
2372
2412
2432
2452
2472
2512
2532
2552
2572
2612
2632
2652
2672
2712
2732
2752
2772
2011
2031
2051
2071
2111
2131
2151
2171
2211
2231
2251
2271
2311
2331
2351
2371
2411
2431
2451
2471
2511
2531
2551
2571
2611
2631
2651
2671
2711
2731
2751
2771
2010
2030
2050
2070
2110
2130
2150
2170
2210
2230
2250
2270
2310
2330
2350
2370
2410
2430
2450
2470
2510
2530
2550
2570
2610
2630
2650
2670
2710
2730
2750
2770
2007
2027
2047
2067
2107
2127
2147
2167
2207
2227
2247
2267
2307
2327
2347
2367
2407
2427
2447
2467
2507
2527
2547
2567
2607
2627
2647
2667
2707
2727
2747
2767
2006
2026
2046
2066
2106
2126
2146
2166
2206
2226
2246
2266
2306
2326
2346
2366
2406
2426
2446
2466
2506
2526
2546
2566
2606
2626
2646
2666
2706
2726
2736
2766
2005
2025
2045
2065
2105
2125
2145
2165
2205
2225
2245
2265
2305
2325
2345
2365
2405
2425
2445
2465
2505
2525
2545
2565
2605
2625
2645
2665
2705
2725
2735
2765
2004
2024
2044
2064
2104
2124
2144
2164
2204
2224
2244
2264
2304
2324
2344
2364
2404
2424
2444
2464
2504
2524
2544
2564
2604
2624
2644
2664
2704
2724
2734
2764
2003
2023
2043
2063
2103
2123
2143
2163
2203
2223
2243
2263
2303
2323
2343
2363
2403
2423
2443
2463
2503
2523
2543
2563
2603
2623
2643
2663
2703
2723
2733
2763
2002
2022
2042
2062
2102
2122
2142
2162
2202
2222
2242
2262
2302
2322
2342
2362
2402
2422
2442
2462
2502
2522
2542
2562
2602
2622
2642
2662
2702
2722
2732
2762
2001
2021
2041
2061
2101
2121
2141
2161
2201
2221
2241
2261
2301
2321
2341
2361
2401
2421
2441
2461
2501
2521
2541
2561
2601
2621
2641
2661
2701
2721
2731
2761
2000
2020
2040
2060
2100
2120
2140
2160
2200
2220
2240
2260
2300
2320
2340
2360
2400
2420
2440
2460
2500
2520
2540
2560
2600
2620
2640
2660
2700
2720
2730
2760
3-68
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
GX
GY
Address Address
V40100
V40101
V40102
V40103
V40104
V40105
V40106
V40107
V40110
V40111
V40112
V40113
V40114
V40115
V40116
V40117
V40120
V40121
V40122
V40123
V40124
V40125
V40126
V40127
V40130
V40131
V40132
V40133
V40134
V40135
V40136
V40137
V40300
V40301
V40302
V40303
V40304
V40305
V40306
V40307
V40310
V40311
V40312
V40313
V40314
V40315
V40316
V40317
V40320
V40321
V40322
V40323
V40324
V40325
V40326
V40327
V40330
V40331
V40332
V40333
V40334
V40335
V40336
V40337
Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations
MSB
DL260 Remote I/O (GX) and (GY) Points
LSB
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
3017
3037
3057
3077
3117
3137
3157
3177
3217
3237
3257
3277
3317
3337
3357
3377
3417
3437
3457
3477
3517
3537
3557
3577
3617
3637
3657
3677
3717
3737
3757
3777
3016
3036
3056
3076
3116
3136
3156
3176
3216
3236
3256
3276
3316
3336
3356
3376
3416
3436
3456
3476
3516
3536
3556
3576
3616
3636
3656
3676
3716
3736
3756
3776
3015
3035
3055
3075
3115
3135
3155
3175
3215
3235
3255
3275
3315
3335
3355
3375
3415
3435
3455
3475
3515
3535
3555
3575
3615
3635
3655
3675
3715
3735
3755
3775
3014
3034
3054
3074
3114
3134
3154
3174
3214
3234
3254
3274
3314
3334
3354
3374
3414
3434
3454
3474
3514
3534
3554
3574
3614
3634
3654
3674
3714
3734
3754
3774
3013
3033
3053
3073
3113
3133
3153
3173
3213
3233
3253
3273
3313
3333
3353
3373
3413
3433
3453
3473
3513
3533
3553
3573
3613
3633
3653
3673
3713
3733
3753
3773
3012
3032
3052
3072
3112
3132
3152
3172
3212
3232
3252
3272
3312
3332
3352
3372
3412
3432
3452
3472
3512
3532
3552
3572
3612
3632
3652
3672
3712
3732
3752
3772
3011
3031
3051
3071
3111
3131
3151
3171
3211
3231
3251
3271
3311
3331
3351
3371
3411
3431
3451
3471
3511
3531
3551
3571
3611
3631
3651
3671
3711
3731
3751
3771
3010
3030
3050
3070
3110
3130
3150
3170
3210
3230
3250
3270
3310
3330
3350
3370
3410
3430
3450
3470
3510
3530
3550
3570
3610
3630
3650
3670
3710
3730
3750
3770
3007
3027
3047
3067
3107
3127
3147
3167
3207
3227
3247
3267
3307
3327
3347
3367
3407
3427
3447
3467
3507
3527
3547
3567
3607
3627
3647
3667
3707
3727
3747
3767
3006
3026
3046
3066
3106
3126
3146
3166
3206
3226
3246
3266
3306
3326
3346
3366
3406
3426
3446
3466
3506
3526
3546
3566
3606
3626
3646
3666
3706
3726
3746
3766
3005
3025
3045
3065
3105
3125
3145
3165
3205
3225
3245
3265
3305
3325
3345
3365
3405
3425
3445
3465
3505
3525
3545
3565
3605
3625
3645
3665
3705
3725
3745
3765
3004
3024
3044
3064
3104
3124
3144
3164
3204
3224
3244
3264
3304
3324
3344
3364
3404
3424
3444
3464
3504
3524
3544
3564
3604
3624
3644
3664
3704
3724
3744
3764
3003
3023
3043
3063
3103
3123
3143
3163
3203
3223
3243
3263
3303
3323
3343
3363
3403
3423
3443
3463
3503
3523
3543
3563
3603
3623
3643
3663
3703
3723
3743
3763
3002
3022
3042
3062
3102
3122
3142
3162
3202
3222
3242
3262
3302
3322
3342
3362
3402
3422
3442
3462
3502
3522
3542
3562
3602
3622
3642
3662
3702
3722
3742
3762
3001
3021
3041
3061
3101
3121
3141
3161
3201
3221
3241
3261
3301
3321
3341
3361
3401
3421
3441
3461
3501
3521
3541
3561
3601
3621
3641
3661
3701
3721
3741
3761
3000
3020
3040
3060
3100
3120
3140
3160
3200
3220
3240
3260
3300
3320
3340
3360
3400
3420
3440
3460
3500
3520
3540
3560
3600
3620
3640
3660
3700
3720
3740
3760
GX
GY
Address Address
V40140
V40141
V40142
V40143
V40144
V40145
V40146
V40147
V40150
V40151
V40152
V40153
V40154
V40155
V40156
V40157
V40160
V40161
V40162
V40163
V40164
V40165
V40166
V40167
V40170
V40171
V40172
V40173
V40174
V40175
V40176
V40177
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
V40340
V40341
V40342
V40343
V40344
V40345
V40346
V40347
V40350
V40351
V40352
V40353
V40354
V40355
V40356
V40357
V40360
V40361
V40362
V40363
V40364
V40365
V40366
V40367
V40370
V40371
V40372
V40373
V40374
V40375
V40376
V40377
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
3-69
Chapter 3: CPU Specifications and Operations
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
3-70
Notes
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
System Design and
Configuration
Chapter
4
In This Chapter:
DL205 System Design Strategies................................................. 4–2
Module Placement...................................................................... 4–3
Calculating the Power Budget..................................................... 4–7
Local Expansion I/O.................................................................... 4–11
Expanding DL205 I/O................................................................. 4–17
Network Connections to Modbus and DirectNet........................ 4–32
Network Slave Operation............................................................ 4–35
Network Modbus RTU Master Operation (DL260 only)............... 4–45
Non–Sequence Protocol (ASCII In/Out and PRINT)..................... 4–54
Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
DL205 System Design Strategies
4-2
I/O System Configurations
The DL205 PLCs offer the following ways to add I/O to the system:
• Local I/O – consists of I/O modules located in the same base as the CPU.
•L
ocal Expansion I/O – consists of I/O modules in expansion bases located close to the CPU local
base. Expansion cables connect the expansion bases and CPU base in daisy–chain format.
•E
thernet Remote Master – provides a low-cost, high-speed Ethernet Remote I/O link to Ethernet
Remote Slave I/O.
•E
thernet Base Controller – provides a low-cost, high-speed Ethernet link between a network master
to AutomationDirect Ethernet Remote Slave I/O.
•R
emote I/O – consists of I/O modules located in bases which are serially connected to the local CPU
base through a Remote Master module, or may connect directly to the bottom port on a DL250–1
or DL260 CPU.
A DL205 system can be developed using many different arrangements of these configurations.
All I/O configurations use the standard complement of DL205 I/O modules and bases. Local
expansion requires using (–1) bases.
Networking Configurations
The DL205 PLCs offers the following way to add networking to the system:
• E
thernet Communications Module – connects DL205 systems (DL240, DL250–1 or DL260
CPUs only) and DL405 CPU systems in high–speed, peer–to–peer networks. Any PLC can initiate
communications with any other PLC when using either the ECOM or ECOM100 modules.
• D
ata Communications Module – connects a DL205 (DL240, DL250–1 and DL260 only) system
to devices using the DirectNET protocol, or connects as a slave to a Modbus RTU network.
• D
L250–1 Communications Port – The DL250–1 CPU has a 15–Pin connector on Port 2 that
provides a built–in Modbus RTU or DirectNET master/slave connection.
• D
L260 Communications Port – The DL260 CPU has a 15–Pin connector on Port 2 that provides
a built–in DirectNET master/slave or Modbus RTU master/slave connection with more Modbus
function codes than the DL250–1. (The DL260 MRX and MWX instructions allow you to
enter native Modbus addressing in your ladder program with no need to perform octal to decimal
conversions.) Port 2 can also be used for ASCII IN or ASCII OUT communications.
Module/Unit
DL240 CPU
DL250–1 CPU
DL260 CPU
ECOM
ECOM100
DCM
Master
Slave
DirectNet, K–Sequence
DirectNet, Modbus RTU
DirectNet, K–Sequence, Modbus RTU
DirectNet, Modbus RTU, ASCII
DirectNet, K–Sequence, Modbus RTU, ASCII
Ethernet
Ethernet
Ethernet, Modbus TCP
Ethernet, Modbus TCP
DirectNet
DirectNet, K–Sequence, Modbus RTU
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration
Module Placement
Slot Numbering
The DL205 bases each provide different
numbers of slots for use with the I/O
modules. You may notice the bases refer
to 3-slot, 4-slot, etc. One of the slots is
dedicated to the CPU, so you always have
one less I/O slot. For example, you have five
I/O slots with a 6-slot base. The I/O slots
are numbered 0 – 4. The CPU slot always
contains a CPU or a base controller (EBC)
or Remote Slave and is not numbered.
Slot 0 Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 3 Slot 4
Power Wiring
Connections
CPU Slot
I/O Slots
Module Placement Restrictions
The following table lists the valid locations for all types of modules in a DL205 system.
Module/Unit
CPUs
DC Input Modules
AC Input Modules
DC Output Modules
AC Output Modules
Relay Output Modules
Analog Input and Output Modules
Local Expansion
Base Expansion Unit
Base Controller Module
Serial Remote I/O
Remote Master
Remote Slave Unit
Ethernet Remote Master
Ethernet Slave (EBC)
CPU Interface
Ethernet Base Controller
WinPLC
DeviceNet
Profibus
SDS
Specialty Modules
Counter Interface (CTRINT)
Counter I/O (CTRIO)
Data Communications
Ethernet Communications
BASIC CoProcessor
Simulator
Filler
Local CPU Base Local Expansion Base
CPU Slot Only
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Remote I/O Base
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
CPU Slot Only
A (not Slot O)
CPU Slot Only
A (not Slot O)
CPU Slot Only
CPU Slot Only
CPU Slot Only
CPU Slot Only
CPU Slot Only
CPU Slot Only
Slot 0 Only
A
A (not Slot O)
A (not Slot O)
A (not Slot O)
A
A
*When used in H2–ERM(100) Ethernet Remote I/O systems.
CPU Slot Only*
A
A*
A
A
A
A
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
4-3
Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Automatic I/O Configuration
230
240
250-1
260
The DL205 CPUs automatically detect any installed I/O modules (including specialty modules)
at powerup, and establish the correct I/O configuration and addresses. This applies to modules
located in local and local expansion I/O bases. For most applications, you will never have to
change the configuration.
I/O addresses use octal numbering, starting at X0 and Y0 in the slot next to the CPU. The
addresses are assigned in groups of 8 or 16, depending on the number of points for the I/O
module. The discrete input and output modules can be mixed in any order, but there may
be restrictions placed on some specialty modules. The following diagram shows the I/O
numbering convention for an example system.
Both the Handheld Programmer and DirectSOFT provide AUX functions that allow you
to automatically configure the I/O. For example, with the Handheld Programmer AUX 46
executes an automatic configuration, which allows the CPU to examine the installed modules
and determine the I/O configuration and addressing. With DirectSOFT, the PLC Configure
I/O menu option would be used.
Automatic
Slot 0
8pt. Input
X0-X7
Slot 1
16pt. Output
Y0-Y17
Slot 2
16pt. Input
X10-X27
Slot 3
8pt. Input
X30-X37
Manual
Slot 0
8pt. Input
X0-X7
Slot 1
16pt. Output
Y0-Y17
Slot 2
16pt. Input
X100-X117
Slot 3
8pt. Input
X20-X27
230 Manual I/O Configuration
may never become necessary, but DL250–1 and DL260 CPUs allow manual I/O address
240 Itassignments
for any I/O slot(s) in local or local expansion bases. You can manually modify
250-1 an auto configuration to match arbitrary I/O numbering. For example, two adjacent input
260 modules can have starting addresses at X20 and X200. Use DirectSOFT PLC Configure I/O
4-4
menu option to assign manual I/O address.
In automatic configuration, the addresses are assigned on 8-point boundaries. Manual
configuration, however, assumes that all modules are at least 16 points, so you can only assign
addresses that are a multiple of 20 (octal). For example, X30 and Y50 are not valid starting
addresses. You can still use 8-point modules, but 16 addresses will be assigned and the upper
eight addresses will be unused.
WARNING: If you manually configure an I/O slot, the I/O addressing for the other modules may change.
This is because the DL250–1 and DL260 CPUs do not allow you to assign duplicate I/O addresses. You
must always correct any I/O configuration errors before you place the CPU in RUN mode. Uncorrected
errors can cause unpredictable machine operation that can result in a risk of personal injury or damage
to equipment.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration
Removing a Manual Configuration
After a manual configuration, the system will automatically retain the new I/O addresses
through a power cycle. You can remove (overwrite) any manual configuration changes by
changing all of the manually configured addresses back to automatic.
Power–On I/O Configuration Check
The DL205 CPUs can also be set to automatically check the I/O configuration on power-up.
By selecting this feature, you can detect any changes that may have occurred while the power
was disconnected. For example, if someone places an output module in a slot that previously
held an input module, the CPU will not go into RUN mode and the configuration check will
detect the change and print a message on the Handheld Programmer or DirectSOFT screen
(use AUX 44 on the HPP to enable the configuration check).
If the system detects a change in the PLC/Setup/I/O configuration check at power-up, error
code E252 will be generated. You can use AUX 42 (HPP) or DirectSOFT I/O diagnostics to
determine the exact base and slot location where the change occurred. When a configuration
error is generated, you may actually want to use the new I/O configuration. For example, you
may have intentionally changed an I/O module to use with a program change. You can use
PLC/Diagnostics/I/O Diagnostics in DirectSoft or AUX 45 to select the new configuration, or,
keep the existing configuration stored in memory.
WARNING: You should always correct any I/O configuration errors before you place the CPU into RUN
mode. Uncorrected errors can cause unpredictable machine operation that can result in a risk of
personal injury or damage to equipment.
WARNING: Verify that the I/O configuration being selected will work properly with the CPU program.
Always correct any I/O configuration errors before placing the CPU in RUN mode. Uncorrected errors
can cause unpredictable machine operation that can result in a risk of personal injury or damage to
equipment.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
4-5
Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration
I/O Points Required for Each Module
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Each type of module requires a certain number of I/O points. This is also true for some
specialty modules, such as analog, counter interface, etc.
DC Input Modules
D2–08ND3
D2–16ND3–2
D2–32ND3(–2)
AC Input Modules
D2–08NA–1
D2–08NA–2
D2–16NA
DC Output Modules
D2–04TD1
D2–08TD1
D2–16TD1–2 (2-2)
D2–16TD1(2)P
D2–32TD1(–2)
AC Output Modules
D2–08TA
F2–08TA
D2–12TA
Relay Output Modules
D2–04TRS
D2–08TR
F2–08TRS
F2–08TR
D2–12TR
Combination Modules
D2–08CDR
Analog Modules
F2–04AD–1 & 1L
F2–04AD–2 & 2L
F2–08AD–1
F2–02DA–1 & 1L
F2–02DA–2 & 2L
F2–08DA–1
F2–08DA–2
F2–02DAS–1
F2–02DAS–2
F2–4AD2DA
F2–8AD4DA-1
F2–8AD4DA-2
F2–04RTD
F2–04THM
4-6
Number of I/O Pts. Required Specialty Modules, etc. Number of I/O Pts. Required
8 Input
16 Input
32 Input
8 Input
8 Input
16 Input
8 Output (Only the first four
points are used)
8 Output
16 Output
16 Output
32 Output
8 Output
8 Output
16 Output (See note 1)
H2–ECOM(–F)
D2–DCM
H2–ERM(100,–F)
H2–EBC(–F)
D2–RMSM
D2–RSSS
F2–CP128
H2–CTRIO(2)
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
D2–CTRINT
8 Input 8 Output
F2–DEVNETS–1
H2–PBC
F2–SDS–1
D2–08SIM
D2-EM
D2-CM
H2-ECOM(100)
None
None
None
8 Input
None
None
None
8 Output (Only the first four
points are used)
8 Output
8 Output
8 Output
16 Output (See note 1)
8 In, 8 Out (Only the first four
points are used for each type)
16 Input
16 Input
16 Input
16 Output
16 Output
16 Output
16 Output
32 Output
32 Output
16 Input & 16 Output
32 Input & 32 Output
32 Input & 32 Output
32 Input
32 Input
NOTE: 12pt. modules consume 16 points. The first 6 points are assigned, two are skipped, and then the
next 6 points are assigned. For example, a D2–12TA installed in slot 0 would use Y0–Y5, and Y-10-Y15.
Y6–Y7 and Y16–Y17 would be unused.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration
Calculating the Power Budget
Managing Your Power Resource
When you determine the types and quantities of I/O modules you will be using in the DL205
system, it is important to remember there is a limited amount of power available from the
power supply. We have provided a chart to help you easily see the amount of power available
with each base. The following chart will help you calculate the amount of power you need
with your I/O selections. At the end of this section is an example of power budgeting and a
worksheet for your own calculations.
If the I/O you choose exceeds the maximum power available from the power supply, you may
need to use local expansion bases or remote I/O bases.
WARNING: It is extremely important to calculate the power budget. If you exceed the power budget,
the system may operate in an unpredictable manner, which may result in a risk of personal injury or
equipment damage.
CPU Power Specifications
The following chart shows the amount of current available for the two voltages supplied from
the DL205 base. Use these currents when calculating the power budget for your system. The
Auxiliary 24V Power Source mentioned in the table is a connection at the base terminal strip
allowing you to connect to devices or DL205 modules that require 24VDC.
Bases
D2–03B–1
D2–04B–1
D2–06B–1
D2–09B–1
D2–03BDC1–1
D2–04BDC1–1
D2–06BDC1–1
D2–09BDC1–1
D2–06BDC2–1
D2–09BDC2–1
5V Current Supplied
2600 mA
2600 mA
2600 mA
2600 mA
2600 mA
2600 mA
2600 mA
2600 mA
2600 mA
2600 mA
Auxiliary 24VDC Current Supplied
300 mA
300 mA
300 mA
300 mA
None
None
None
None
300 mA
300 mA
Module Power Requirements
Use the power requirements shown on the next page to calculate the power budget for your
system. If an External 24VDC power supply is required, the external 24VDC from the base
power supply may be used as long as the power budget is not exceeded.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
4-7
Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Power Consumed
Device
24V Auxilliary
(mA)
5V (mA)
CPUs
D2–230
D2–240
D2–250–1
D2–260
DC Input Modules
D2–08ND3
D2–16ND3–2
D2–32ND3(–2)
AC Input Modules
D2–08NA–1
D2–08NA–2
D2–16NA
120
120
330
330
0
0
0
0
50
100
25
0
0
0
50
100
100
0
0
0
DC Output Modules
D2–04TD1
D2–08TD1(–2)
D2–16TD1–2
D2–16TD2–2
D2–32TD1(–2)
60
100
200
200
350
20
0
80
0
0
AC Output Modules
D2–08TA
F2–08TA
D2–12TA
250
250
350
Relay Output Modules
D2–04TRS
D2–08TR
F2–08TRS
F2–08TR
D2–12TR
250
250
670
670
450
Analog Modules
F2–04AD–1
50
F2–04AD–1L
100
F2–04AD–2
110
F2–04AD–2L
60
F2–08AD–1
100
F2–08AD–2
100
F2–02DA–1
40
F2–02DA–1L
40
F2–02DA–2
40
F2–02DA–2L
40
F2–08DA–1
30
F2–08DA–2
60
*requires external 5VDC for outputs
**add an additional 20mA per loop
4-8
0
0
0
Power Consumed
Device
24V Auxilliary
(mA)
5V (mA)
Combination Modules
D2–08CDR
200
0
H2–PBC
H2–ECOM
H2–ECOM100
H2–ECOM-F
H2–ERM(100)
H2–ERM–F
H2–EBC
H2–EBC–F
H2–CTRIO(2)
D2–DCM
D2–RMSM
D2–RSSS
D2–CTRINT
D2–08SIM
D2–CM
D2–EM
F2–CP128
F2–DEVNETS–1
F2–SDS–1
530
450
300
640
320
450
320
450
275
300
200
150
50*
50
100
130
235
160
160
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
F2–02DAS–1
F2–02DAS–2
F2–4AD2DA
F2–8AD4DA-1
F2–8AD4DA-2
F2–04RTD
F2–04THM
100
100
90
35
35
90
110
50mA per channel
60mA per channel
80mA**
100
80
0
60
Specialty Modules
0
0
0
0
0
80
5mA @ 10-30V
5mA @ 10-30V
90mA @ 12V**
5mA @ 10-30V
5mA @ 10-30V
60**
70mA @ 12V**
60
70mA @ 12V**
50mA**
140
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration
Power Budget Calculation Example
The following example shows how to calculate the power budget for the DL205 system.
Base #
0
Module Type
5 VDC (mA)
Auxiliary
Power Source
24 VDC Output (mA)
Available Base Power
D2–09B–1
2600
300
D2–260
D2–16ND3–2
D2–16NA
D2–16NA
F2–04AD–1
F2–02DA–1
D2–08TA
D2–08TD1
D2–08TR
+ 330
+ 100
+ 100
+ 100
+ 50
+ 40
+ 250
+ 100
+ 250
+0
+0
+0
+ 80
+ 60
+0
+0
+0
D2–HPP
+ 200
+0
CPU Slot
Slot 0
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 3
Slot 4
Slot 5
Slot 6
Slot 7
Other
Handheld Programmer
Total Power Required
Remaining Power Available
1520
2600–1520 = 1080
140
300 – 140 = 160
1. U
se the power budget table to fill in the power requirements for all the system components.
First, enter the amount of power supplied by the base. Next, list the requirements for
the CPU, any I/O modules, and any other devices, such as the Handheld Programmer,
C-more HMI or the DV–1000 operator interface. Remember, even though the Handheld
Programmer or the DV–1000 are not installed in the base, they still obtain their power
from the system. Also, make sure you obtain any external power requirements, such as the
24VDC power required by the analog modules.
2. Add the current columns starting with CPU slot and put the total in the row labeled “Total
Power Required.”
3. Subtract the row labeled “Total Power Required” from the row labeled “Available Base
Power.” Place the difference in the row labeled “Remaining Power Available.”
4. If “Total Power Required” is greater than the power available from the base, the power
budget will be exceeded. It will be unsafe to use this configuration, and you will need to
restructure your I/O configuration.
WARNING: It is extremely important to calculate the power budget. If you exceed the power budget,
the system may operate in an unpredictable manner which may result in a risk of personal injury or
equipment damage.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
4-9
Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Power Budget Calculation Worksheet
This blank chart is provided for you to copy and use in your power budget calculations.
Base #
0
Module Type
5 VDC (mA)
Auxiliary
Power Source
24 VDC Output (mA)
Available Base Power
CPU Slot
Slot 0
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 3
Slot 4
Slot 5
Slot 6
Slot 7
Other
4-10
Total Power Required
Remaining Power Available
1. U
se the power budget table to fill in the power requirements for all the system components.
This includes the CPU, any I/O modules, and any other devices, such as the Handheld
Programmer, C-more HMI or the DV–1000 operator interface. Also, make sure you
obtain any external power requirements, such as the 24VDC power required by the analog
modules.
2. Add the current columns starting with CPU slot and put the total in the row labeled “Total
Power Required.”
3. Subtract the row labeled “Total Power Required” from the row labeled “Available Base
Power.” Place the difference in the row labeled “Remaining Power Available.”
4. If “Total Power Required” is greater than the power available from the base, the power
budget will be exceeded. It will be unsafe to use this configuration, and you will need to
restructure your I/O configuration.
WARNING: It is extremely important to calculate the power budget. If you exceed the power budget,
the system may operate in an unpredictable manner which may result in a risk of personal injury or
equipment damage.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration
Local Expansion I/O
Use local expansion when you need more I/O points, a greater power budget than the local
CPU base provides or when placing an I/O base at a location away from the CPU base, but
within the expansion cable limits. Each local expansion base requires the D2–CM controller
module in the CPU slot. The local CPU base requires the D2–EM expansion module, as well
as each expansion base. All bases in the system must be the new (–1) bases. These bases have
a connector on the right side of the base to which the D2–EM expansion module attaches. All
local and local expansion I/O points are updated on every CPU scan.
Use the DirectSOFT PLC Configure I/O menu option to view the local expansion system
automatic I/O addressing configuration. This menu also allows manual addresses to be
assigned if necessary.
DL230
Total number of local / expansion bases per system
Maximum number of expansion bases
Total I/O (includes CPU base and expansion bases)
Maximum inputs
Maximum outputs
Maximum expansion system cable length
DL240
DL250
DL250-1
These CPUs do not support local
expansion systems
DL260
3
5
2
4
768
1280
512
1024
512
1024
30m (98ft.)
D2–CM Local Expansion Module
The D2–CM module is placed in
the CPU slot of each expansion base.
The rotary switch is used to select the
expansion base number. The expansion
base I/O addressing (Xs and Ys) is based
on the numerical order of the rotary
switch selection and is recognized by the
CPU on power–up. Duplicate expansion
base numbers will not be recognized by
the CPU.
The status indicator LEDs on the D2–
CM front panels have specific functions
which can help in programming and
troubleshooting.
D2–CM Indicators
PWR (Green)
RUN (Green)
DIAG (Red)
Status
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON/OFF
OFF
Expansion
Controller
Meaning
Power good
Power failure
D2–CM has established communication with PLC
D2–CM has not established communication with PLC
Hardware watch–dog failure
I/O module failure (ON 500ms / OFF 500ms)
No D2–CM error
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
4-11
Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
D2–EM Local Expansion Module
The D2–EM expansion unit is attached to the right side of each base in the expansion system,
including the local CPU base. (All bases in the local expansion system must be the new
(–1) bases). The D2–EMs on each end of the expansion system should have the TERM
(termination) switch placed in the ON position. The expansion units between the endmost
bases should have the TERM switch placed in the OFF position. The CPU base can be located
at any base position in the expansion system. The bases are connected in a daisy–chain fashion
using the D2–EXCBL–1 (category 5 straight–through cable with RJ45 connectors). Either of
the RJ45 ports (labelled A and B) can be used to connect one expansion base to another.
The status indicator LEDs on the D2–EM front panels have specific functions which can help
in programming and troubleshooting.
D2–EM Indicator
Status
Meaning
ON
OFF
ACTIVE (Green)
D2–EM is communicating with other D2–EM
D2–EM is not communicating with other D2–EM
WARNING: Connect/disconnect the expansion cables with the PLC power turned OFF in order for the
ACTIVE indicator to function normally.
D2–EXCBL–1 Local Expansion Cable
The category 5 straight–through D2–EXCBL–1 (1m) is used to connect the D2–EM expansion
modules together. If longer cable lengths are required, we recommend that you purchase a
commercially manufactured cable with RJ45 connectors already attached. The maximum total
expansion system cable length is 30m (98ft). Do not use Ethernet hubs to connect the local
expansion network together.
D2–EXCBL–1 Cable
1 2 3 4 5 6 78
8-pin RJ45 Connector
(8P8C)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
RJ45
GRN/WHT
GRN
1
2
3
4
5
GRN 6
7
8
GRN/WHT
RJ45
NOTE: Commercially available Patch (Straight–through) Category 5, UTP cables will work in place of the
D2–EXCBL–1. The D2–EM modules only use the wires connected to pins 3 and 6 as shown above.
4-12
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration
DL260 Local Expansion System
The D2–260 supports local expansion up to five total bases (one CPU base + four local
expansion bases) and up to a maximum of 1280 total I/O points. An example local expansion
system is shown below. All local and expansion I/O points are updated on every CPU scan.
No specialty modules can be located in the expansion bases (refer to the Module Placement
Table earlier in this chapter for restrictions).
D2–CM Expansion
Base Number Selection
D2–EM Termination
Switch Settings
I/O addressing #5
NOTE: Do not use Ethernet hubs
to connect the local expansion
system together.
I/O addressing #4
D2–260
CPU
30m (98ft.) max. cable length
I/O addressing #1
NOTE: Use D2-EXCBL-1 (1m)
(Category 5 straight-through
cable) to connect the D2-EMs
together.
I/O addressing #2
I/O addressing #3
• The CPU base can be located at any base position in the expansion system.
• All discrete and analog modules are supported in the expansion bases. Specialty modules are
not supported in the expansion bases.
• The D2–CMs do not have to be in successive numerical order; however, the numerical rotary
selection determines the X and Y addressing order. The CPU will recognize the local and
expansion I/O on power–up. Do not duplicate numerical selections.
• The TERM (termination) switch on the two endmost D2–EMs must be in the ON position.
The other D2–EMs in between should be in the OFF position.
• Use the D2–EXCBL–1 or equivalent cable to connect the D2–EMs together. Either of the
RJ45 ports (labeled A and B) on the D2–EM can be used to connect one base to another.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
4-13
Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
NOTE: When applying power to the CPU (DL250–1/260) and local expansion bases, make sure the expansion
bases power up at the same time or before the CPU base. Expansion bases that power up after the CPU base
will not be recognized by the CPU. (See chapter 3 Initialization Process timing specifications).
DL250–1 Local Expansion System
The D2–250–1 supports local expansion up to three total bases ( one CPU base + two local
expansion bases) and up to a maximum of 768 total I/O points. An example local expansion
system is shown below. All local and expansion I/O points are updated on every CPU scan.
No specialty modules can be located in the expansion bases (refer to the Module Placement
Table earlier in this chapter for restrictions).
D2–CM Expansion
Base Number Selection
4-14
D2–EM Termination
Switch Settings
I/O addressing #3
D2–250–1
CPU
Use D2–EXCBL–1 (1m)
(Category 5 straight–
through cable) to connect
the D2-EMs together.
.
30m (98ft.) max. cable length
I/O addressing #1
I/O addressing #2
Note: Do not use
Ethernet hubs to
connect the local
expansion system
together.
• The CPU base can be located at any base position in the expansion system.
• All discrete and analog modules are supported in the expansion bases. Specialty modules are
not supported in the expansion bases.
• The D2–CMs do not have to be in successive numerical order, however, the numerical rotary
selection determines the X and Y addressing order. The CPU will recognize the local and
expansion I/O on power–up. Do not duplicate numerical selections.
• The TERM (termination) switch on the two endmost D2–EMs must be in the ON position.
The other D2–EMs in between should be in the OFF position.
• Use the D2–EXCBL–1 or equivalent cable to connect the D2–EMs together. Either of the
RJ45 ports (labelled A and B) on the D2–EM can be used to connect one base to another.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration
Expansion Base Output Hold Option
The bit settings in V–memory registers V7741 and V7742 determine the expansion bases’
outputs response to a communications failure. The CPU will exit the RUN mode to the STOP
mode when an expansion base communications failure occurs. If the Output Hold bit is ON,
the outputs on the corresponding module will hold their last state when a communication error
occurs. If OFF (default), the outputs on the module unit will turn off in response to an error.
The setting does not have to be the same for all the modules on an expansion base.
The selection of the output mode will depend on your application. You must consider the
consequences of turning off all the devices in one or all expansion bases at the same time vs.
letting the system run “steady state” while unresponsive to input changes. For example, a
conveyor system would typically suffer no harm if the system were shut down all at once. In a
way, it is the equivalent of an “E–STOP”. On the other hand, for a continuous process such
as waste water treatment, holding the last state would allow the current state of the process to
continue until the operator can intervene manually. V7741 and V7742 are reserved for the
expansion base Output Hold option. The bit definitions are as follows:
Bit = 0 Output Off (Default)
Bit = 1 Output Hold
D2–CM Expansion Base Hold Output
Expansion
V–memory Register Slot 0
Base No.
Exp.
Exp.
Exp.
Exp.
Base 1
Base 2
Base 3
Base 4
V7741
Bit
V7742
Bit
0
8
0
8
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 3
Slot 4
Slot 5
Slot 6
Slot 7
1
9
1
9
2
10
2
10
3
11
3
11
4
12
4
12
5
13
5
13
6
14
6
14
7
15
7
15
WARNING: Selecting “HOLD LAST STATE” means that outputs on the expansion bases will not be
under program control in the event of a communications failure. Consider the consequences to process
operation carefully before selecting this mode.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
4-15
Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
4-16
Enabling I/O Configuration Check using DirectSOFT
Enabling the I/O Config Check will force the CPU, at power up, to examine the local and
expansion I/O configuration before entering the RUN mode. If there is a change in the I/O
configuration, the CPU will not enter the RUN mode. For example, if local expansion base
#1 does not power up with the CPU and the other expansion bases, the I/O Configuration
Check will prevent the CPU from entering the RUN mode. If the I/O Configuration check
is disabled and automatic addressing is used, the CPU would assign addresses from expansion
base #1 to base #2 and possibly enter the RUN mode. This is not desirable, and can be
prevented by enabling the I/O Configuration check.
Manual addressing can be used to manually assign addresses to the I/O modules. This will
prevent any automatic addressing re–assignments by the CPU. The I/O Configuration Check
can also be used with manual addressing.
To display the I/O Config Check window, use DirectSOFT>PLC menu>Setup>I/O Config
Check.
Select “Yes,” then
save to disk or to
PLC, if connected to
the PLC.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration
Expanding DL205 I/O
I/O Expansion Overview
Expanding I/O beyond the local chassis is useful for a system which has a sufficient number of
sensors and other field devices located a relatively long distance from the CPU. Two forms of
communication can be used to add remote I/O to your system: either an Ethernet or a serial
communication network. A discussion of each method follows.
Ethernet Remote Master, H2-ERM(100, -F)
230
240
250-1
260
The Ethernet Remote Master, H2-ERM(100, -F), is a module that provides a low-cost, highspeed Ethernet Remote I/O link to connect either a DL240, a DL250-1 or a DL260 CPU to
slave I/O over a high-speed Ethernet link.
Each H2-ERM(100) module can support up to 16 additional H2-EBC systems, 16 Terminator
I/O EBC systems, or 16 fully expanded H4-EBC systems.
The H2-ERM(100) connects to your control network using Category 5 UTP cables for
distances up to 100m (328ft). Repeaters are used to extend the distances and to expand the
number of nodes. The fiber optic version, H2-ERM-F, uses industry standard 62.5/125
ST-style fiber optic cables and can be run up to 2,000m (6560ft).
The PLC, ERM and EBC slave modules work together to update the remote I/O points. These
three scan cycles are occurring at the same time, but asynchronously. We recommend that
critical I/O points that must be monitored every scan be placed in the CPU base.
Specifications
H2-ERM
H2-ERM100
H2-ERM-F
10BaseT Ethernet 10/100BaseT Ethernet 10BaseFL Ethernet
Communications
10Mbps
100Mbps
10Mbps
Data Transfer Rate
100 meters (328 ft)
2000 meters (6560 ft)
Link Distance
RJ45
ST-style fiber optic
Ethernet Port
Ethernet Protocols
Power Consumption
TCP/IP, IPX
TCP/IP, IPX, Modbus
TCP/IP, DHCP,
HTML configuration
320mA @ 5VDC
TCP/IP, IPX
450mA @ 5VDC
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
4-17
Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
4-18
Ethernet Remote Master Hardware Configuration
Use a PC equipped with a 10/100BaseT or a 10BaseFL network adapter card and the Ethernet
Remote Master (ERM) Workbench software configuration utility (included with the ERM
manual, H24-ERM-M) to configure the ERM module and its slaves over the Ethernet remote
I/O network.
PC running ERM WorkBench
to configure the ERM network
DirectLogic PLC
Dedicated Hub(s)
for ERM Network
ERM
Module
DirectLogic DL205 I/O
with EBC Module
GS–EDRV
or HA–EDRV2
DirectLogic DL405 I/O
with EBC Module
AC
Drive
Terminator I/O
with EBC Module
When networking ERMs with other Ethernet devices, we recommend that a dedicated Ethernet
remote I/O network be used for the ERM and its slaves. While Ethernet networks can handle
an extremely large number of data transactions, and normally very quickly, heavy Ethernet
traffic can adversely affect the reliability of the slave I/O and the speed of the I/O network.
Keep ERM networks, multiple ERM networks and ECOM/office networks isolated from one
another.
Once the ERM remote I/O network is configured and running, the PC can be removed from
the network.
DirectLogic PLC
Dedicated Hub(s)
for ERM Network
ERM
Module
DirectLogic DL205 I/O
with EBC Module
GS–EDRV
or HA–EDRV2
AC
Drive
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
DirectLogic DL405 I/O
with EBC Module
Terminator I/O
with EBC Module
Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration
Installing the ERM Module
This section will briefly describe the installation of the ERM module. More detailed
information is available in the Ethernet Remote Master Module manual, H24-ERM-M, which
will be needed to configure the communication link to the remote I/O.
In addition to the manual, configuration software will be needed. The ERM Workbench
software utility must be used to configure the ERM and its slave modules. The utility is
provided on a CD which comes with the ERM manual. The ERM module can be identified by
two different methods, either by Module ID (dip switch) or by Ethernet address. Whichever
method is used, the ERM Workbench is all that is needed to configure the network modules.
If IP addressing (UDP/IP) is necessary or if the Module ID is set with software, the NetEdit
software utility (included with the ERM Workbench utility) will be needed in addition to the
ERM Workbench.
ERM Module ID
Set the ERM Module ID before installing the module in the DL205 base. Always set the
module ID to 0. A Module ID can be set in one of two ways:
• Use the DIP switches on the module (1-63)
• Use the configuration tools in NetEdit
Use the DIP switch to install and change slave modules without using a PC to set the Module
ID. Set the module’s DIP switch, insert the module in the base, and connect the network
cable. The Module ID is set on power up, and it is ready to communicate on the network.
ON
7
Not Used
6
5 4
. .
25 24
. .
(32)(16)
3.
23
.
(8)
2.
22
.
(4)
1.
21
.
(2)
0
.
20
.
(1)
Binary Value
H2-ERM(100)
Installation and
Safety Guidelines
The Module IDs can also be set or changed on the network from a single PC by using the tools
in NetEdit.
The Module ID equals the sum of the binary values of the slide switches set in the ON position.
For example, if slide switches 1, 2 and 3 are set to the ON position, the Module ID will be 14.
This is found by adding 8+4+2=14. The maximum value which can be set on the DIP switch
is 32+16+8+4+2=63. This is achieved by setting switches 0 through 5 to the ON position. The
6 and 7 switch positions are inactive.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
4-19
Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
4-20
Insert the ERM Module
The DL205 system only supports the placement of the ERM module in the CPU base. It does
not support installation of the ERM module in either local expansion or remote I/O bases.
The number of usable slots depends on how many slots the base has. All of the DL205 CPUs
support the ERM module, except the D2-230.
DL205
CPU
Slot 0
Slot 1 Slot 2
Slot 3
Slot 4
Do not install the
ERM in Slot 0.
NOTE: The module will not work in slot 0 of the DL205 series PLCs, the slot next to the CPU.
Network Cabling
Of the three types of ERM modules available, one supports the 10BaseT standard, another
supports 10/100BaseT and the other one supports the 10BaseFL standard. The 10/100BaseT
standard uses twisted pairs of copper wire conductors and the 10BaseFL standard is used with
fiber optic cabling.
10/100BaseT
10BaseFL
Unshielded
Twisted-Pair
cable with RJ45
connectors
62.5/125 MMF
fiber optics cable
with ST-style
connectors
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration
10/100BaseT Networks
A patch (straight-through) cable is used to connect a PLC (or PC) to a hub or to a repeater. Use
a crossover cable to connect two Ethernet devices (point-to-point) together. It is recommended
that pre-assembled cables be purchased for convenient and reliable networking.
The above diagram illustrates the standard wire positions of the RJ45 connector. It is
recommended that Catagory 5, UTP cable be used for all ERM 10/100BaseT cables.
Patch (Straight–through) Cable
10/100BaseT
TD+ 1
TD– 2
RD+ 3
4
5
RD– 6
7
8
OR/WHT
OR
GRN/WHT
BLU
BLU/WHT
GRN
BRN/WHT
BRN
OR/WHT
OR
GRN/WHT
BLU
BLU/WHT
GRN
BRN/WHT
BRN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
RJ45
TD–
RJ45
Crossover Cable
1 2 3 4 5 6 78
8-pin RJ45 Connector
(8P8C)
RD+
RD–
TD+
TD+ 1
TD– 2
RD+ 3
4
5
RD– 6
7
8
RJ45
OR/WHT
OR
GRN/WHT
BLU
BLU/WHT
GRN
BRN/WHT
BRN
GRN/WHT
GRN
OR/WHT
BLU
BLU/WHT
OR
BRN/WHT
BRN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
TD+
TD–
RD+
RD–
RJ45
Refer to the ERM manual for using the fiber optic cable with the H2-ERM-F.
An explanation of the use of the ERM Workbench software is too lengthy for this manual. The
full use of the workbench and NetEdit utilities is discussed in the ERM manual.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
4-21
Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Ethernet Base Controller, H2-EBC(100)(-F)
The Ethernet Base Controller module H2-EBC(100)(-F) provides a low-cost, high-performance
Ethernet link between a network master controller and an DirectLOGIC PLC I/O slave system.
Also, the H2-EBC100 supports the Modbus TCP/IP client/server protocol.
The Ethernet Base Controller (EBC) serves as an interface between the master control system
and the DL205/405 I/O modules. The control function is performed by the master controller,
not the EBC slave. The EBC occupies the CPU slot in the base and communicates across the
backplane to input and output modules. Various master controllers with EBC slaves are shown
in the diagram below.
Example EBC Systems: Various Masters with EBC Slaves
Modbus TCP/IP Masters
(H2-EBC100 only)
PC-based Control System
OR
OR
All H2/H4 Series EBCs
UDP/IP, IPX
10Mbps
Ethernet
Hub
H2-EBC100
TCP/IP, UDP/IP, IPX
Modbus TCP/IP
10/100Mbps
EBC
Serial HMI
EBC
EBC
The H2-EBC module supports industry standard 10BaseT Ethernet communications, the
H2-EBC100 module supports industry standard 10/100BaseT Ethernet communications and
the H2-EBC-F module supports 10BaseFL (fiber optic) Ethernet standards.
H2-EBC
H2-EBC100
H2-EBC-F
Communications
Data Transfer Rate
Link Distance
Ethernet Port
Specifications
10BaseT Ethernet
10/100BaseT Ethernet
10BaseFL Ethernet
10 Mbps max.
100 Mbps max.
10 Mbps max.
100m (328ft)
100m (328ft)
2000m (6560ft)
RJ45
ST-style fiber optic
Ethernet Protocols
TCP/IP, IPX
RJ45
TCP/IP, IPX/Modbus TCP/IP,
DHCP, HTML configuration
RJ12
K-Sequence, ASCII IN/OUT,
Modbus RTU
300mA @ 5VDC
Serial Port
Serial Protocols
Power Consumption
4-22
DirectLOGIC PLC/
WinPLC with ERM
RJ12
K-Sequence, ASCII IN/
OUT
450mA @ 5VDC
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
TCP/IP, IPX
None
None
640mA @ 5VDC
Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration
Install the EBC Module
Like the ERM module discussed in the previous section, this section will briefly describe the
installation of the H2 Series EBCs. More detailed information is available in the Ethernet Base
Controller manual, H24-EBC-M, which will be needed to configure the remote I/O.
Each EBC module must be assigned at least one unique identifier to make it possible for master
controllers to recognize it on the network. Two methods for identifying the EBC module give
it the flexibility to fit most networking schemes. These identifiers are:
• Module ID (IPX protocol only)
• IP Address (for TCP/IP and Modbus TCP/IP protocols)
Set the Module ID
The two methods which can be used to set the EBC module ID are either by DIP switch or
by software. One software method is to use the NetEdit3 program which is included with the
EBC manual. To keep the set-up discussion simple here, only the DIP switch method will be
discussed. Refer to the EBC manual for the complete use of NetEdit3.
It is recommended to use the DIP switch to set the Module ID because the DIP switch is simple
to set, and the Module ID can be determined by looking at the physical module, without
reference to a software utility.
The DIP switch can be used to set the Module ID to a number from 1-63. Do not use Module
ID 0 for communication.
If the DIP switch is set to a number greater than 0, the software utilities are disabled from
setting the Module ID. Software utilities will only allow changes to the Module ID if the DIP
switch setting is 0 (all switches OFF).
NOTE: The DIP switch settings are read at powerup only. The power must be cycled each time the DIP
switches are changed.
Setting the Module ID with the DIP switches is identical to setting the DIP switches on the
H2-ERM(100) module. Refer to page 4-19 in this chapter.
Insert the EBC Module
Once the Module ID DIP switches are set, insert the module in the CPU slot of any DL205
base.
Insert H2-EBC in CPU slot
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
4-23
Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration
Network Cabling
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Of the two types of EBC modules available, one supports the 10/100BaseT standard and the
other one supports the 10BaseFL standard. The 10/100BaseT standard uses twisted pairs of
copper wire conductors and the 10BaseFL standard is used with fiber optic cabling.
10/100BaseT
RJ12
Serial
Port
RS232
ST-style
Bayonet
for
10BaseFL
RJ45 for
10/100BaseT
The 10BaseT and 100BaseT EBCs have an eight-pin modular jack that accepts RJ45
connectors. UTP Category 5 (CAT5) cable is highly recommended for use with all
Ethernet 10/100BaseT connections. For convenient and reliable networking, purchase
commercially manufactured cables which have the connectors already installed.
To connect an EBC, or a PC, to a hub or repeater, use a patch cable (sometimes called a
straight-through cable). The cable used to connect a PC directly to an EBC or to connect
two hubs is referred to as a crossover cable.
Patch (Straight–through) Cable
10/100BaseT
TD+ 1
TD– 2
RD+ 3
4
5
RD– 6
7
8
OR/WHT
OR
GRN/WHT
BLU
BLU/WHT
GRN
BRN/WHT
BRN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
RJ45
RD+
RD–
TD+
TD–
RJ45
Crossover Cable
1 2 3 4 5 6 78
8-pin RJ45 Connector
(8P8C)
TD+ 1
TD– 2
RD+ 3
4
5
RD– 6
7
8
RJ45
4-24
OR/WHT
OR
GRN/WHT
BLU
BLU/WHT
GRN
BRN/WHT
BRN
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
OR/WHT
OR
GRN/WHT
BLU
BLU/WHT
GRN
BRN/WHT
BRN
GRN/WHT
GRN
OR/WHT
BLU
BLU/WHT
OR
BRN/WHT
BRN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
TD+
TD–
RD+
RD–
RJ45
Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration
10BaseFL Network Cabling
The H2-EBC-F and the H2-ERM-F modules have two ST-style bayonet connectors. The
ST-style connector uses a quick release coupling which requires a quarter turn to engage or
disengage. The connectors provide mechanical and optical alignment of fibers.
Each cable segment requires two strands of fiber; one to transmit data and one to receive data.
The ST-style connectors are used to connect the H2-Exx-F module to a PC or a fiber optic hub
or repeater. The modules themselves cannot act as repeaters.
The H2-EBC-F and the H2-ERM-F modules accept 62.5/125 multimode fiber optic (MMF)
cable. The glass core diameter is 62.5 micrometers, and the glass cladding is 125 micrometers.
The fiber optic cable is highly immune to noise and permits communications over much
greater distances than 10/100BaseT.
Multimode Fiber Optic (MMF) Cable
Transmit
Receive
Transmit
Transmit
Receive
Receive
Connecting your fiber optic
EBC to a network adapter
card or fiber optic hub
62.5/125 MMF cable with
bayonet ST-style connectors
Maximum Cable Length
The maximum distance per 10/100BaseT cable segment is 100 meters (328 feet). Repeaters
extend the distance. Each cable segment attached to a repeater can be 100 meters. Two
repeaters connected together extend the total range to 300 meters. The maximum distance
per 10BaseFL cable segment is 2,000 meters (6,560 feet or 1.2 miles). Repeaters extend the
distance. Each cable segment attached to a repeater can be 2,000 meters. Two repeaters
connected together extend the total range to 6,000 meters.
10Base–T Ethernet Control Network shown
(also supports 10Base–FL Networks)
100 meters
(328 feet)
100 meters
(328 feet)
10Base–T Hub (required
if using more than one
Ethernet slave)
100 meters
(328 feet)
100 meters
(328 feet)
100 meters
(328 feet)
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
4-25
Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Add a Serial Remote I/O Master/Slave Module
230
240
250-1
260
In addition to the I/O located in the local base, adding remote I/O can be accomplished via
a shielded twisted-pair cable linking the master CPU to a remote I/O base. The methods of
adding serial remote I/O are:
• DL240 CPUs: Remote I/O requires a remote master module (D2–RMSM) to be installed in the
local base. The CPU updates the remote master, then the remote master handles all communication
to and from the remote I/O base by communicating to a remote slave module (D2–RSSS) installed
in each remote base.
• DL250–1 and D2–260 CPU: The CPU’s comm port 2 features a built-in Remote I/O channel. You
may also use up to seven D2–RMSM remote masters in the local base as described above (you can
use either or both methods).
DL230
DL240 DL250–1 DL260
Maximum number of Remote Masters supported in the local
CPU base (1 channel per Remote Master)
CPU built-in Remote I/O channels
Maximum I/O points supported by each channel
none
2
7
7
none
none
none
2048
1
2048
1
2048
Maximum Remote I/O points supported
none
Maximum number of Remote I/O bases per channel(RM–NET)
Maximum number of Remote I/O bases per channel (SM–NET)
none
none
Limited by total references available
7
31
7
31
Remote I/O points map into different CPU memory locations, therefore it does not reduce the
number of local I/O points. Refer to the DL205 Remote I/O manual for details on remote
I/O configuration and numbering. Configuring the built-in remote I/O channel is described
in the following section.
The figure below shows one CPU base, and one remote I/O channel with six remote bases.
If the CPU is a DL250–1 or DL260, adding the first remote I/O channel does not require
installing a remote master module (use the CPU’s built-in remote I/O channel).
Remote Masters
Maximum of:
2 per CPU base (DL240)
7 per CPU base (DL250-1 & DL260)
(for DL250-1 & DL260 the bottom port of
the CPU can serve as an eighth master)
Masters can go in any slot except next to CPU.
Remote Slaves
Maximum of
7 remote bases
per channel
Allowable distance is from farthest slave to the remote master.
4-26
7
31
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration
Configuring the CPU’s Remote I/O Channel
240
250-1
260
230
This section describes how to configure the DL250–1 and DL260’s built-in remote I/O
channel. Additional information is in the Remote I/O manual, D2–REMIO–M, which
you will need in configuring the Remote slave units on the network. You can use the D2–
REMIO–M manual exclusively when using regular Remote Masters and Remote Slaves for
remote I/O in any DL205 system.
The DL250–1 and DL260 CPU’s built-in remote I/O channel only supports RM–Net which
allows it to communicate with up to seven remote bases containing a maximum of 2048 I/O
points per channel, at a maximum distance of 1000 meters. If required, you can still use
Remote Master modules in the local CPU base (2048 I/O points on each channel).
You may recall from the CPU specifications in Chapter 3 that the DL250–1 and DL260’s Port
2 is capable of several protocols. To configure the port using the Handheld Programmer, use
AUX 56 and follow the prompts, making the same choices as indicated below on this page. To
configure the port in DirectSOFT, choose the PLC menu, then Setup, then Setup Secondary
Comm Port.
• Port: From the port number list box at the
top, choose “Port 2.”
•P
rotocol: Click the check box to the left
of “Remote I/O” (called “M–NET” on the
HPP), and then you’ll see the dialog box
shown below.
•S
tation Number: Choose “0” as the station
number, which makes the DL250–1 or
DL260 the master. Station numbers 1–7
are reserved for remote slaves.
•B
aud Rate: The baud rates 19200 and
38400 are available. Choose 38400
initially as the remote I/O baud rate, and
revert to 19200 baud if you experience
data errors or noise problems on the link.
• Memory Address: Choose a V-memory
address to use as the starting location of a
Remote I/O configuration table (V37700
is the default). This table is separate
and independent from the table for any
Remote Master(s) in the system, and it is
32 words in length.
Then click the button indicated to send the Port 2 configuration to the CPU, and click Close.
NOTE: You must configure the baud rate on the Remote Slaves with DIP switches to match the baud rate
selection for the CPU’s Port 2.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
4-27
Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
4-28
The next step is to make the connections between all devices on the Remote I/O link.
The location of Port 2 on the DL250–1 and DL260 is
on the 15-pin connector, as pictured to the right.
DL260
• Pin 7
Signal GND
• Pin 9
TXD+
• Pin 10
TXD–
• Pin 13
RXD+
• Pin 6
RXD–
Port 2
Now we are ready to discuss wiring the DL250–1 or DL260 to the remote slaves on the remote
base(s). The remote I/O link is a 3-wire, half-duplex type. Since Port 2 of the DL250–1 and
DL260 CPU is a 5-wire full duplex–capable port, we must jumper its transmit and receive lines
together as shown below (converts it to 3-wire, half-duplex).
RXD–
0V
TXD+
TXD–
DL250–1 / DL260 CPU Port 2
Remote I/O Master
6
D2-RSSS
Remote I/O Slave
7
Cable: Use AutomationDirect L19954
(Belden 9842) or equivalent
9
120 ohms
Termination Resistor
TXD+ / RXD+
13
RXD+
10
(TXD, RXD are
twisted pair)
T
D2-RSSS
Remote I/O Slave
(end of chain)
Jumper
T
1
1
TXD– / RXD–
2
2
Signal GND
3
3
Internal 150 ohms
resistor not used
with 120 ohms cable
(use 2 grounds leads - twisted pair)
The twisted/shielded pair connects to the DL250–1 or DL260 Port 2 as shown. A termination
resistor must be added externally to the CPU, as close as possible to the connector pins. Its
purpose is to minimize electrical reflections that occur over long cables. A termination resistor
must be present at both physical ends of the network.
Ideally, the two termination resistors at the cable’s opposite ends and the cable’s rated
impedance will all match. For cable impedances
Add series
T
greater than 150 ohms, add a series resistor
external
at the last slave as shown to the right. If less
resistor
Internal
1
than 150 ohms, parallel a matching resistance
150 ohm
across the slave’s pins 1 and 2 instead.
resistor
2
Remember to size the termination resistor at
Port 2 to match the cables rated impedance.
3
The resistance values should be between 100 and
500 ohms.
NOTE: To match termination resistance to AutomationDirect L19827 (Belden 9841), use a 120 ohm resistor
across terminals 1 and 2.
NOTE: See the transient suppression for inductive loads information in Chapter 2 of this manual for further
information on wiring practices.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration
Configure Remote I/O Slaves
After configuring the DL250–1 or DL260 CPU’s Port 2 and wiring it to the remote slave(s),
use the following checklist to complete the configuration of the remote slaves. Full instructions
for these steps are in the Remote I/O manual.
• Set the baud rate to match CPU’s Port 2 setting.
• Select a station address for each slave, from 1 to 7. Each device on the remote link must have
a unique station address. There can be only one master (address 0) on the remote link.
Configuring the Remote I/O Table
The beginning of the configuration table
for the built-in remote I/O channel is the
memory address we selected in the Port 2
setup.
The table consists of blocks of four words
which correspond to each slave in the
system, as shown to the right. The first
four table locations are reserved.
The CPU reads data from the table after
powerup, interpreting the four data words
in each block with these meanings:
1. Starting address of slave’s input data
2. Number of slave’s input points
3. Starting address of outputs in slave
4. Number of slave’s output points
The table is 32 words long. If your system
has fewer than seven remote slave bases,
then the remainder of the table must be
filled with zeros. For example, a three–slave
system will have a remote configuration
table containing four reserved words, 12
words of data and 16 words of “0000.”
A portion of the ladder program must
configure this table (only once) at powerup.
Use the LDA instruction as shown to the
right, to load an address to place in the
table. Use the regular LD constant to load
the number of the slave’s input or output
points. The following page gives a short
program example for one slave.
Memory Addr. Pointer
37700
Remote I/O data
Reserved
V37700
V37701
V37702
V37703
xxxx
xxxx
xxxx
xxxx
Slave 1
V37704
V37705
V37706
V37707
xxxx
xxxx
xxxx
xxxx
Slave 7
V37734
V37735
V37736
V37737
0000
0000
0000
0000
DirectSOFT
SP0
LDA
O40000
OUT
V37704
LD
K16
OUT
V37705
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
4-29
Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
4-30
Consider the simple system featuring Remote I/O shown below. The DL250–1 or DL260’s
built-in Remote I/O channel connects to one slave base, which we will assign a station
address=1. The baud rates on the master and slave will be 38.4KB.
We can map the remote I/O points as any type of I/O point, simply by choosing the appropriate
range of V-memory. Since we have plenty of standard I/O addresses available (X and Y), we
will have the remote I/O points start at the next X and Y addresses after the main base points
(X60 and Y40, respectively).
Main Base with CPU as Master
DL 260
CPU
Port 2
Remote Slave Worksheet
1
Remote Base Address _________(Choose
1–7)
16
I
X0-X17
V40400
16
16
I
I
16
O
X20-X37 X40-X57 Y0-Y17
V40401 V40402 V40500
16
O
Y20-Y37
V40501
Remote Slave
D2
RSSS
Slave
Slot
Module
Number Name
INPUT
OUTPUT
Input Addr.
No. Inputs
Output Addr.
No.Outputs
0
08ND3S
X060
8
1
08ND3S
X070
8
2
08TD1
Y040
8
3
08TD1
Y050
8
4
5
6
8
I
8
I
8
O
8
O
7
40403
X060
Input Bit Start Address: ________V-Memory
Address:V _______
16
Total Input Points _____
Y040
40502
Output Bit Start Address: ________V-Memory
Address:V _______
X60-X67 X70-X77 Y40-Y47 Y50-Y57
V40403 V40403 V40502 V40502
Remote I/O Setup Program
Using the Remote Slave Worksheet shown above can
help organize our system data in preparation for writing
our ladder program (a blank full-page copy of this
worksheet is in the Remote I/O Manual). The four
key parameters we need to place in our Remote I/O
configuration table are in the lower right corner of the
worksheet. You can determine the address values by
using the memory map given at the end of Chapter 3,
CPU Specifications and Operation.
The program segment required to transfer our
worksheet results to the Remote I/O configuration table
is shown to the right. Remember to use the LDA or LD
instructions appropriately.
The next page covers the remainder of the required
program to get this remote I/O link up and running.
16
Total Output Points _____
DirectSOFT
SP0
LDA
O40403
OUT
V37704
LD
K16
OUT
V37705
LDA
O40502
OUT
V37706
LD
K16
OUT
V37707
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Slave 1
Input
Slave 1
Output
Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration
When configuring a Remote I/O channel for
fewer than 7 slaves, we must fill the remainder
of the table with zeros. This is necessary
because the CPU will try to interpret any nonzero number as slave information.
We continue our set-up program from the
previous page by adding a segment which
fills the remainder of the table with zeros.
The example to the right fills zeros for slave
numbers 2–7, which do not exist in our
example system.
DirectSOFT
LD
K0
OUTD
V37710
OUTD
V37736
C740
SET
On the last rung in the example program above, we set a special relay contact C740. This
particular contact indicates to the CPU the ladder program has finished specifying a remote
I/O system. At that moment, the CPU begins remote I/O communications. Be sure to include
this contact after any Remote I/O set-up program.
Remote I/O Test Program
Now we can verify the remote I/O link and
set-up program operation. A simple quick
check can be done with one rung of ladder,
shown to the right. It connects the first input
of the remote base with the first output. After
placing the PLC in RUN mode, we can go
to the remote base and activate its first input.
Then its first output should turn on.
DirectSOFT
X60
Y40
OUT
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
4-31
Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Network Connections to Modbus and DirectNET
Configuring Port 2 For DirectNET
230
240
250-1
260
This section describes how to configure the CPU’s built-in networking ports for either Modbus
or DirectNET. This will allow you to connect the DL205 PLC system directly to Modbus
networks using the RTU protocol, or to other devices on a DirectNET network. For more
details on DirectNET, order our DirectNET manual, part number DA–DNET–M.
Configuring Port 2 For Modbus RTU
230
240
250-1
260
Modbus hosts system on the network must be capable of issuing the Modbus commands to
read or write the appropriate data. For details on the Modbus protocol, please refer to the
Gould Modbus Protocol reference Guide (P1–MBUS–300 Rev. J). In the event a more recent
version is available, check with your Modbus supplier before ordering the documentation.
You will need to determine whether the network connection is a 3-wire RS–232 type, or a
5-wire RS–422 type. Normally, the RS–232 signals are used for shorter distance (15 meters
(50 feet) maximum) communications between two devices. RS–422 signals are for longer
distance (1000 meters (3280ft) maximum) multi-drop networks (from two to 247 devices).
Use termination resistors at both ends of RS–422 network wiring, matching the impedance
rating of the cable (between 100 and 500 ohms).
PC/PLC Master
9 TXD+
10 TXD–
13 RXD+
6 RXD–
11 RTS+
12 RTS–
14 CTS+
15 CTS–
7 0V
PORT 1: DL250–1, DL260 (slave only)
PORT 2: DL240 (slave only)
1 0V
3 RXD
4
TXD
RS–232
Point-to-point
DTE Device
Signal GND
RXD
RS–232
Master
TXD
Port 1 Pinouts (DL250–1 / DL260)
6-pin Female
Modular Connector
1
2
3
4
5
6
0V
5V
RXD
TXD
5V
0V
Power (–) connection (GND)
Power (+) conection
Receive Data (RS-232)
Transmit Data (RS-232)
Power (+) conection
Power (–) connection (GND)
1
6
11
10
5
15
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
5V
TXD2
RXD2
RTS2
CTS2
RXD2–
0V
0V
TXD2+
TXD2 –
RTS2 +
RTS2 –
RXD2 +
CTS2 +
CTS2 –
1
2
3
4
5
6
0V
5V
RXD
TXD
RTS
0V
5 VDC
Transmit Data (RS-232)
Receive Data (RS-232)
Ready to Send (RS–232)
Clear to Send (RS–232)
Receive Data – (RS–422) (RS–485 DL260)
Logic Ground
Logic Ground
Transmit Data + (RS–422) (RS–485 DL260)
Transmit Data – (RS–422) (RS–485 DL260)
Request to Send + (RS–422) (RS–485 DL260)
Request to Send – (RS–422)(RS–485 DL260)
Receive Data + (RS–422) (RS–485 DL260)
Clear to Send + (RS422) (RS–485 DL260)
Clear to Send – (RS–422) (RS–485 DL260)
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Termination
Resistor on
last slave only
PORT 2
(DL250–1, DL260)
RS–422 Slave
Port 2 Pin Descriptions (DL240 only)
Port 2 Pin Descriptions (DL250–1 / DL260)
15-pin Female
D-Sub connector
4-32
RXD+
RXD–
TXD+
TXD–
Signal GND
RS–422
Multi–drop
Network
Power (–) connection (GND)
Power (+) conection
Receive Data (RS-232)
Transmit Data (RS-232)
Request to Send
Power (–) connection (GND)
The recommended cable
for RS-232 or RS-422 is
AutomationDirect L19772
(Belden 8102) or equivalent.
The recommended cable for
RS-485 is AutomationDirect L19827
(Belden 9841) or equivalent.
Note: The DL260 supports
RS–485 multi–drop networking. See the Network
Master Operation (DL260
Only) section later in this
chapter for details.
Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration
Modbus Port Configuration
240
250-1
260
230
In DirectSOFT, choose the PLC menu, then Setup, then “Secondary Comm Port.”
• Port: From the port number list box at the top, choose “Port 2.”
• Protocol: Click the check box to the left of “MODBUS” (use AUX 56 on the HPP, and select
“MBUS”), and then you’ll see the dialog
box below.
• Timeout: The amount of time the port
will wait after it sends a message to get a
response before logging an error.
• RTS On Delay Time: The amount of time
between raising the RTS line and sending
the data.
• RTS Off Delay Time: The amount of
time between resetting the RTS line after
sending the data.
• Station Number: To make the CPU
port a Modbus master, choose “1.” The
possible range for Modbus slave numbers
is from 1 to 247, but the DL250–1 and
DL260 WX and RX network instructions
used in Master mode will access only
slaves 1 to 90. Each slave must have a
unique number. At powerup, the port is
automatically a slave, unless and until the
DL250–1 or DL260 executes ladder logic
network instructions which use the port
as a master. Thereafter, the port reverts
back to slave mode until ladder logic
uses the port again.
NOTE: The DL250–1 does not support the
Echo Suppression feature
• Baud Rate: The available baud rates include 300, 600, 900, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, and 38400
baud. Choose a higher baud rate initially, reverting to lower baud rates if you experience data errors
or noise problems on the network. Important: You must configure the baud rates of all devices on
the network to the same value. Refer to the appropriate product manual for details.
• Stop Bits: Choose 1 or 2 stop bits for use in the protocol.
• Parity: Choose none, even, or odd parity for error checking.
• Echo Suppression: Select the appropriate radio button based on the wiring configuration used on
port 2.
Then click the button indicated to send the Port configuration to the CPU, and click Close.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
4-33
Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
DirectNET Port Configuration
230 In DirectSOFT, choose the PLC menu, then Setup, then “Secondary Comm Port.”
240 • Port: From the port number list box, choose “Port 2.”
250-1 • Protocol: Click the check box to the left of “DirectNET” (use AUX 56 on the HPP, then select
“DNET”), and then you’ll see the dialog box below.
260
4-34
• Timeout: The amount of time the port will wait after it sends a message to get a response before
logging an error.
• RTS On Delay Time: The amount of time between raising the RTS line and sending the data.
• RTS Off Delay Time: The amount of time between resetting the RTS line after sending the data.
• Station Number: To make the CPU port a DirectNET master, choose “1”. The allowable range
for DirectNET slaves is from 1 to 90 (each slave must have a unique number). At powerup,
the port is automatically a slave, unless and until the DL250–1 or DL260 executes ladder logic
instructions which attempt to use the port as a master. Thereafter, the port reverts back to slave
mode until ladder logic uses the port again.
• Baud Rate: The available baud rates include 300, 600, 900, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, and 38400
baud. Choose a higher baud rate initially, reverting to lower baud rates if you experience data errors
or noise problems on the network. Important: You must configure the baud rates of all devices on
the network to the same value.
• Stop Bits: Choose 1 or 2 stop bits for use in the protocol.
• Parity: Choose none, even, or odd parity for error checking.
• Format: Choose hex or ASCII formats.
Then click the button indicated to send the Port configuration to the CPU, and click Close.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration
Network Slave Operation
230
240
250-1
260
This section describes how other devices on a network can communicate with a CPU port that
you have configured as a DirectNET slave (DL240/250–1/260) or Modbus slave (DL250–1,
DL260). A Modbus host must use the Modbus RTU protocol to communicate with the
DL250–1 or DL260 as a slave. The host software must send a Modbus function code and
Modbus address to specify a PLC memory location the DL250–1 or DL260 comprehends.
The DirectNET host uses normal I/O addresses to access applicable DL205 CPU and system.
No CPU ladder logic is required to support either Modbus slave or DirectNET slave operation.
Modbus Function Codes Supported
230
240
250-1
260
The Modbus function code determines whether the access is a read or a write, and whether to
access a single data point or a group of them. The DL250–1 and DL260 support the Modbus
function codes described below.
Modbus Function Code
01
02
05
15
03, 04
06
16
Function
DL205 Data Types Available
Read a group of coils
Read a group of inputs
Set / Reset a single coil (slave only)
Set / Reset a group of coils
Read a value from one or more registers
Write a value into a single register (slave only)
Write a value into a group of registers
Y, C, T, CT
X, SP
Y, C, T, CT
Y, C, T, CT
V
V
V
Determining the Modbus Address
There are typically two ways that most host software conventions allow you to specify a PLC
memory location. These are:
• By specifying the Modbus data type and address
• By specifying a Modbus address only.
If Your Host Software Requires the Data Type and Address
Many Host software packages allow you to specify the Modbus data type and the Modbus
address that correspond to the PLC memory location. This is the easiest method, but not all
packages allow you to do it this way.
The actual equation used to calculate the address depends on the type of PLC data you are
using. The PLC memory types are split into two categories for this purpose.
• Discrete – X, SP, Y, C, S, T (contacts), CT (contacts)
• Word – V, Timer current value, Counter current value
In either case, you basically convert the PLC octal address to decimal and add the appropriate
Modbus address (if required). The table on the following page shows the exact equation used
for each group of data.
NOTE: For information about the Modbus protocol see www.Modbus.org and select Technical Resources.
For more information about the DirectNET protocol, order our DirectNET User Manual, DA-DNET-M, or
download the manual free from our website: www.automationdirect.com. Select Manuals/Docs>Online
User Manuals>Misc.>DA-DNET-M
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
4-35
Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
DL250–1 Memory
Type
QTY (Dec.)
For Discrete Data Types ............. Convert PLC Addr. to Dec.
Inputs (X)
512
Special Relays (SP)
512
Outputs (Y)
Control Relays (C)
Timer Contacts (T)
Counter Contacts (CT)
Stage Status Bits (S)
512
1024
256
128
1024
Modbus Address
Range (Decimal)
PLC Range (Octal)
X0
SP0
SP320
Y0
C0
T0
CT0
S0
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
+
Start of Range
X777
SP137
SP717
Y777
C1777
T377
CT177
S1777
2048
3072
3280
2048
3072
6144
6400
5120
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
2560
3167
3535
2560
4095
6399
6527
6143
0
512
768
4096
3480
–
–
–
–
–
255
639
3839
8191
3735
For Word Data Types .............................. Convert PLC Addr. to Dec.
Timer Current Values (V)
Counter Current Values (V)
V-Memory, user data (V)
V-Memory, system (V)
DL260 Memory Type
256
128
3072
4096
256
QTY (Dec.)
V0
V1000
V1400
V10000
V7400
–
–
–
–
–
V377
V1177
V7377
V17777
V7777
Inputs (X)
Remote Inputs (GX)
Special Relays (SP)
Outputs (Y)
Remote Outputs (GY)
Control Relays (C)
Timer Contacts (T)
Counter Contacts (CT)
Stage Status Bits (S)
1024
2048
512
1024
2048
2048
256
256
1024
X0
GX0
SP0
Y0
GY0
C0
T0
CT0
S0
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
+
X1777
GX3777
SP777
Y777
GY3777
C377
T177
CT177
S777
Start of Range
2048
3840
3072
2048
18432
3072
6144
6400
5120
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
256
256
V-Memory, user data (V)
14.6K
V-Memory, system (V)
256
1024
4-36
V0
V1000
V400
V1400
V10000
V7400
V36000
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
V177
V1177
V777
V7377
V35777
V7777
V37777
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Data Type
Input
Input
Coil
Coil
Coil
Coil
Coil
+
Data Type
Input Register
Input Register
Holding Register
Holding Register
Modbus Data Type
+
3071
18431
3583
3071
20479
5159
6399
6655
6143
For Word Data Types ............................. Convert PLC Addr. to Dec.
Timer Current Values (V)
Counter Current Values (V)
+
Modbus Address
Range (Decimal)
PLC Range (Octal)
For Discrete Data Types ............. Convert PLC Addr. to Dec.
Modbus Data Type
Data Type
Input
Input
Input
Coil
Coil
Coil
Coil
Coil
Coil
+
Data Type
0 – 255
512 – 767
Input Register
Input Register
1024 – 2047
Holding Register
3480 – 4095
15360 – 16383
Holding Register
Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration
The following examples show how to generate the Modbus address and data type for hosts which require
this format.
Example 1: V2100
PLC Address (Dec.) + Data Type
Find the Modbus address for User
V2100 = 1088 decimal
V location V2100.
1088 + Hold. Reg. = Holding Reg. 1089
1. Find V memory in the table.
2. Convert V2100 into decimal (1089).
3. Use the Modbus data type from the table.
Timer Current Values (V)
Counter Current Values (V)
V Memory, user data (V)
128
128
1024
V0 - V177
V1000 - V1177
V2000 - -V3777
Example 2: Y20
Find the Modbus address for output Y20.
0 - 127
512 - 639
1024 - 2047
PLC Addr. (Dec) + Start Addr.
+ Data Type
Y20 = 16 decimal
16 + 2049 + Coil =
1. Find Y outputs in the table.
2. Convert Y20 into decimal (16).
Input Register
Input Register
Holding Register
Coil 2065
3. Add the starting address for the range (2049).
4. Use the Modbus data type from the table.
Outputs (Y)
Control Relays (CR)
320
256
Y0 – Y477
C0 – C377
2049 – 2367
3072 - 3551
Coil
Coil
PLC Address (Dec.) + Data Type
Example 3: T10 Current Value
Find the Modbus address to obtain the current T10 = 8 decimal
value from Timer T10.
8 + Input Reg. = Input Reg. 9
1. Find Timer Current Values in the table.
2. Convert T10 into decimal (8).
3. Use the Modbus data type from the table.
Timer Current Values (V)
Counter Current Values (V)
128
128
V0 – V177
V1000 – V1177
Example 4: C54
Find the Modbus address for Control
Relay C54.
0 – 128
512 – 639
Input Register
Input Register
PLC Addr. (Dec) + Start Addr. +Data Type
C54 = 44 decimal
44 + 3073 + Coil =
Coil 3117
1. Find Control Relays in the table.
2. Convert C54 into decimal (44).
3. Add the starting address for the
range (3073).
4. Use the Modbus data type from the
table.
Outputs (Y)
Control Relays (C)
320
256
Y0 – Y477
C0 – C377
2048 - 2367
3073 – 3551
Coil
Coil
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
4-37
Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
4-38
If Your Modbus Host Software Requires an Address ONLY
Some host software does not allow you to specify the Modbus data type and address. Instead,
you specify an address only. This method requires another step to determine the address, but
it is not difficult. Basically, Modbus separates the data types by address ranges as well. So
this means an address alone can actually describe the type of data and location. This is often
referred to as “adding the offset.” One important thing to remember here is that two different
addressing modes may be available in your host software package. These are:
• 484 Mode
• 584/984 Mode
We recommend that you use the 584/984 addressing mode if your host software allows you
to choose. This is because the 584/984 mode allows access to a higher number of memory
locations within each data type. If your software only supports 484 mode, then there may be
some PLC memory locations that will be unavailable. The actual equation used to calculate
the address depends on the type of PLC data you are using. The PLC memory types are split
into two categories for this purpose.
• Discrete – X, GX, SP, Y, R, S, T, CT (contacts), C (contacts)
• Word – V, Timer current value, Counter current value
In either case, you basically convert the PLC octal address to decimal and add the appropriate
Modbus addresses (as required). The table below shows the exact equation used for each group
of data.
Discrete Data Types
DL260 Memory Type
Global Inputs (GX)
Inputs (X)
Special Relays (SP)
Global Outputs (GY)
Outputs (Y)
Control Relays (C)
Timer Contacts (T)
Counter Contacts (CT)
Stage Status Bits (S)
Range
PLC Range (Octal) Address
(484 Mode)
Address Range
(584/984 Mode) Modbus Data Type
GX0
GX1747
X0
SP0
–
–
–
–
GX1746
GX3777
X1777
SP777
1001 – 1999
-------
10001
11000
12049
13073
–
–
–
–
10999
12048
13072
13584
Input
Input
Input
Input
GY0
Y0
C0
T0
CT0
S0
–
–
–
–
–
–
GY3777
Y1777
C3777
T377
CT377
S1777
1
2049
3073
6145
6401
5121
1
2049
3073
6145
6401
5121
–
–
–
–
–
–
2048
3072
5120
6400
6656
6144
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
–
–
–
–
–
–
2048
3072
5120
6400
6656
6144
Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration
Word Data Types
Registers
PLC Range (Octal)
V-Memory (Timers)
V-Memory (Counters)
V-Memory (Data Words)
V0
V1000
V1200
V1400
V1747
V2000
V10000
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
V377
V1177
V1377
V1746
V1777
V7377
V17777
Input/Holding
(484 Mode)*
Input/Holding
(585/984 Mode)*
3001/4001
3513/4513
3641/4641
3769/4769
-------
30001/40001
30513/40513
30641/40641
30769/40769
31000/41000
41025
44097
*Modbus: Function 04
The DL-250 supports function 04 read input register (Address 30001). To use function 04,
put the number ‘4’ into the most significant position (4xxx) when defining the number of
bytes to read. Four digits must be entered for the instruction to work properly with this mode.
LD
LD
LDA
K101
K4128
The maximum constant possible is 4128. This
is due to the 128 maximum number of Bytes
that the RX/WX instruction can allow. The
value of 4 in the most significant position of
the word will cause the RX to use function 04
(30001 range).
O4000
RX
V0
Refer to your PLC user manual for the correct memory size of your PLC. Some of the addresses
shown above might not pertain to your particular CPU.
For an automated Modbus/Koyo address conversion utility, search and download the file
modbus_conversion.xls from the www.automationdirect.com website.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
4-39
Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration
Example 1: V2100 584/984 Mode
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
PLC Address (Dec.) + Mode Address
Find the Modbus address for User V location V2100.
V2100 = 1088 decimal
1. Find V memory in the table
2. Convert V2100 into decimal (1088).
1088 + 40001 = 41089
3. Add the Modbus starting address for the mode (40001).
For Word Data Types...
Timer Current Value (V)
Counter Current Value (V)
V Memory, User Data (V)
PLC Address (Dec.)
128
128
1024
V0 - V177
V1000 - V1177
V2000 - V3777
+
Appropriate Mode Address
0 - 127
512 - 639
1024 - 2047
3001
3001
4001
Find the Modbus address for output Y20.
1. Find Y outputs in the table.
2. Convert Y20 into decimal (16).
3. Add the starting address for the range (2048).
4. Add the Modbus address for the mode (1).
320
256
128
Y0 - Y477
C0 - C377
T0 - T177
2048 - 2367
3072 - 3551
6144 - 6271
1
1
1
Example 3: T10 Current Value 484 Mode
Find the Modbus address to obtain the
current value from Timer T10.
1. Find Timer Current Values in the table.
2. Convert T10 into decimal (8).
3. Add the Modbus starting address for the mode (3001).
For Word Data Types...
Timer Current Value (V)
Counter Current Value (V)
V Memory, User Data (V)
PLC Address (Dec.)
128
128
1024
V0 - V177
V1000 - V1177
V2000 - V3777
+
230
240
250-1
260
4-40
Y0 - Y477
C0 - C377
T0 - T177
Coil
Coil
Coil
PLC Address (Dec.) + Mode Address
TA10 = 8 decimal
8 + 3001 =
3009
3001
3001
4001
30001
30001
40001
Input Register
Input Register
Hold Register
PLC Addr. (Dec.) + Start Address +
Mode
C54 = 44 decimal
44 + 3072 + 1 = 3117
Find the Modbus address for Control Relay
C54.
1. Find Control Relays in the table.
2. Convert C54 into decimal (44).
3. Add the starting address for the range (3072).
4. Add the Modbus address for the mode (1).
320
256
128
1
1
1
Appropriate Mode Address
0 - 127
512 - 639
1024 - 2047
Example 4: C54 584/984 Mode
Outputs (Y)
Control Relays (CR)
Timer Contacts (T)
Input Register
Input Register
Hold Register
PLC Addr. (Dec.) + Start Address
+ Mode
Y20 = 16 decimal
16 + 2048 + 1 = 2065
Example 2: Y20 584/984 Mode
Outputs (Y)
Control Relays (CR)
Timer Contacts (T)
30001
30001
40001
2048 - 2367
3072 - 3551
6144 - 6271
1
1
1
1
1
1
Coil
Coil
Coil
Determining the DirectNET Address
Addressing the memory types for DirectNET slaves is very easy. Use the ordinary native
address of the slave device itself. To access a slave PLC’s memory address V2000 via
DirectNET, for example, the network master will request V2000 from the slave.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration
Network Master Operation
230
240
250-1
260
This section describes how the DL250–1 and DL260 can communicate on a Modbus or
DirectNET network as a master. For Modbus networks, it uses the Modbus RTU protocol,
which must be interpreted by all the slaves on the network. Both Modbus and DirectNET are
single master/multiple slave networks. The master is the only member of the network that can
initiate requests on the network. This section teaches you how to design the required ladder
logic for network master operation.
Master
Slave #1
Slave #2
Slave #3
Modbus RTU Protocol, or DirectNET
When using the DL250–1 or DL260 CPU
as the master station, you use simple RLL
Master
instructions to initiate the requests. The
WX instruction initiates network write
operations, and the RX instruction initiates
network read operations. Before executing
Slave
either the WX or RX commands, we will
need to load data related to the read or write
WX (write)
operation onto the CPU’s accumulator
stack. When the WX or RX instruction
RX (read)
executes, it uses the information on the stack
combined with data in the instruction box
Network
to completely define the task, which goes to
the port.
The following step-by-step procedure will provide the information necessary to set up your
ladder program to receive data from a network slave.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
4-41
Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Step 1: Identify Master Port # and Slave #
The first Load (LD) instruction identifies the
communications port number on the network
master (DL250-1/260) and the address of the
slave station. This instruction can address up
to 99 Modbus slaves, or 90 DirectNET slaves.
The format of the word is shown to the right.
The “F1” in the upper byte indicates the use of
the bottom port of the DL250-1/260 PLC, port
number 2. The lower byte contains the slave
address number in BCD (01 to 99).
F
1
0
Slave Address (BCD)
CPU bottom port (BCD)
Internal port (hex)
LD
KF101
1
Step 2: Load Number of Bytes to Transfer
1
2
8
The second Load (LD) instruction determines
the number of bytes which will be transferred
# of bytes to transfer
between the master and slave in the subsequent
WX or RX instruction. The value to be loaded is
LD
in BCD format (decimal), from 1 to 128 bytes.
K128
The number of bytes specified also depends on
the type of data you want to obtain. For example, the DL205 Input points can be accessed by
V-memory locations or as X input locations. However, if you only want X0 – X27, you’ll have
to use the X input data type because the V-memory locations can only be accessed in 2-byte
increments. The following table shows the byte ranges for the various types of DirectLOGIC™
products.
DL205/405 Memory
Bits per unit
Bytes
16
16
8
8
8
8
2
2
1
1
1
1
Bits per unit
Bytes
8
16
1
2
1
1
8
16
2
10
V-memory
T / C current value
Inputs (X, SP)
Outputs (Y, C, Stage, T/C bits)
Scratch Pad Memory
Diagnostic Status
DL305 Memory
Data registers
T / C accumulator
I/O, internal relays, shift register bits,
T/C bits, stage bits
Scratch Pad Memory
Diagnostic Status(5 word R/W)
4-42
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration
Step 3: Specify Master Memory Area
The third instruction in the RX or WX sequence is
a Load Address (LDA) instruction. Its purpose is to
load the starting address of the memory area to be
transferred. Entered as an octal number, the LDA
instruction converts it to hex and places the result
in the accumulator.
For a WX instruction, the DL250-1/260 CPU
sends the number of bytes previously specified from
its memory area beginning at the LDA address
specified.
For an RX instruction, the DL250-1/260 CPU
reads the number of bytes previously specified from
the slave, placing the received data into its memory
area beginning at the LDA address specified.
4
0
6
0
0
(octal)
Starting address of
master transfer area
LDA
O40600
MSB
V40600
LSB
15
MSB
0
V40601
LSB
15
0
NOTE: Since V-memory words are always 16 bits, you may not always use the whole word. For example,
if you only specify 3 bytes and you are reading Y outputs from the slave, you will only get 24 bits of data.
In this case, only the 8 least significant bits of the last word location will be modified. The remaining 8 bits
are not affected.
Step 4: Specify Slave Memory Area
The last instruction in our sequence is the WX
or RX instruction itself. Use WX to write to the
slave, and RX to read from the slave. All four of
our instructions are shown to the right. In the last
instruction, you must specify the starting address
and a valid data type for the slave.
SP116
LD
KF101
LD
K128
•D
irectNET slaves – specify the same address in the
WX and RX instruction as the slave’s native I/O
address.
LDA
O40600
• Modbus DL405 or DL205 slaves – specify the same
address in the WX and RX instruction as the slave’s
native I/O address.
RX
Y0
• Modbus 305 slaves – use the following table to
convert DL305 addresses to Modbus addresses.
DL305 Series CPU Memory Type–to–Modbus Cross Reference
PLC Memory Type
TMR/CNT Current Values
I/O Points
Data Registers
Stage Status Bits (D3-330P only)
PLC Base
Address
PLC Memory
Modbus
Base Address
Type
R600
V0
IO 000
R401,R400
S0
GY0
V100
GY200
TMR/CNT
Status Bits
Control Relays
Shift Registers
PLC Base
Address
Modbus
Base Address
CT600
GY600
CR160
SR400
GY160
GY400
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
4-43
Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
4-44
Communications from a Ladder Program
Typically, network communications will last
Port Communication Error
longer than one scan. The program must
wait for the communications to finish before SP117
Y1
starting the next transaction.
SET
Port 2, which can be a master, has two
Special Relay contacts associated with it. SP116
LD
KF201
One indicates “Port busy”(SP116), and
the other indicates ”Port Communication
LD
Port Busy
Error”(SP117). The example shows the use
K3
of these contacts for a network master that
only reads a device (RX). The “Port Busy”
LDA
O40600
bit is on while the PLC communicates with
the slave. When the bit is off, the program
RX
can initiate the next network request.
Y0
The “Port Communication Error” bit turns
on when the PLC has detected an error. Use
of this bit is optional. When used, it should be ahead of any network instruction boxes since
the error bit is reset when an RX or WX instruction is executed.
Multiple Read and Write Interlocks
If you are using multiple reads and writes in the RLL
program, you have to interlock the routines to make
sure all the routines are executed. If you don’t use the
interlocks, then the CPU will only execute the first
routine. This is because each port can only handle
one transaction at a time.
In the example to the right, after the RX instruction
is executed, C100 is set. When the port has finished
the communication task, the second routine is
executed and C100 is reset.
If you’re using RLLPLUS Stage Programming, you
can put each routine in a separate program stage to
ensure proper execution and switch from stage to
stage allowing only one of them to be active at a time.
Interlocking Relay
SP116
C100
LD
KF201
LD
K3
LDA
O40600
Interlocking
Relay
SP116
C100
RX
Y0
C100
SET
LD
KF201
LD
K3
LDA
O40400
WX
VY0
C100
RST
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration
Network Modbus RTU Master Operation (DL260 only)
230
240
250-1
260
This section describes how the DL260 can communicate on a Modbus RTU network as a
master using the MRX and MWX read/write instructions. These instructions allow you to
enter native Modbus addressing in your ladder logic program with no need to perform octalto-decimal conversions. Modbus is a single-master, multiple-slave network. The master is the
only member of the network that can initiate requests on the network. This section teaches you
how to design the required ladder logic for network master operation.
Master
Slave #1
Slave #2
Slave #3
Modbus RTU Protocol
Modbus Function Codes Supported
The Modbus function code determines whether the access is a read or a write, and whether
to access a single data point or a group of them. The DL260 supports the Modbus function
codes described below.
Modbus Function Code
Function
DL205 Data Types Available
01
Read a group of coils
02
Read a group of inputs
05
Set / Reset a single coil (slave only)
Y, C, T, CT
15
Set / Reset a group of coils
Y, C, T, CT
03, 04
Y, C, T, CT
X, SP
Read a value from one or more registers
V
06
Write a value into a single register (slave only)
V
07
Read Exception Status
V
08
Diagnostics
V
16
Write a value into a group of registers
V
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
4-45
Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Modbus Port Configuration
In DirectSOFT, choose the PLC menu, then Setup, then “Secondary Comm Port.”
240
250-1
260
230
• Port: From the port number list box at the top, choose “Port 2.”
• Protocol: Click the check box to the left of “MODBUS” (use AUX 56 on the HPP, and select
“MBUS”), and then you’ll see the dialog box below.
• Timeout: Amount of time the port will wait after it sends a message to get a response before logging
an error.
• RTS On Delay Time: The amount of time between raising the RTS line and sending the data.
• RTS Off Delay Time: The amount of time between resetting the RTS line after sending the data.
• Station Number: For making the CPU port a Modbus master, choose “1.” The possible range for
Modbus slave numbers is from 1 to 247. Each slave must have a unique number. At powerup, the
port is automatically a slave, unless and until the DL06 executes ladder logic MWX/MRX network
instructions which use the port as a master. Thereafter, the port reverts back to slave mode until
ladder logic uses the port again.
• Baud Rate: The available baud rates include 300, 600, 900, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, and 38400
baud. Choose a higher baud rate initially, reverting to lower baud rates if you experience data errors
or noise problems on the network. Important: You must configure the baud rates of all devices on
the network to the same value. Refer to the appropriate product manual for details.
• Stop Bits: Choose 1 or 2 stop bits for use in the protocol.
• Parity: Choose none, even, or odd parity for error checking.
• Echo Suppression: Select the appropriate radio button based on the wiring configuration used on
port 2.
Then click the button indicated to send the Port configuration to the CPU, and click Close.
4-46
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration
RS–485 Network (Modbus Only)
230
240
250-1
260
RS–485 signals are for longer distances (1000 meters maximum), and for multi-drop networks.
Use termination resistors at both ends of RS–485 network wiring, matching the impedance
rating of the cable (between 100 and 500 ohms).
Termination
Resistor
TXD+ / RXD+
TXD+ / RXD+
TXD+ / RXD+
TXD– / RXD–
Signal GND
Signal GND
Signal GND
RXD–
6
6
11
1
1
7
0V
0V
RTS+
TXD+
TXD– / RXD–
TXD– / RXD–
RXD+
11
7
RTS+
TXD+
RTS–
RXD–
RTS–
RXD+
CTS+
CTS–
15
5
CTS+
Cable: Use AutomationDirect L19954
(Belden 9842) or equivalent
10
TXD–
DL260 CPU Port 2
5
CTS–
10
15
TXD–
DL260 CPU Port 2
RS–232 Network
Normally, the RS–232 signals are used for shorter distances (15 meters maximum), for
communications between two devices.
Port 2 Pin Descriptions (DL260 only)
6
GND
RXD
TXD
CTS
RTS
ASCII Device
Signal GND
1
2
TXD
RXD
7
11
3
4
RTS
CTS
5
10
15
CPU Port 2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
5V
TXD2
RXD2
RTS2
CTS2
RXD2–
0V
0V
TXD2+
TXD2 –
RTS2 +
RTS2 –
RXD2 +
CTS2 +
CTS2 –
5 VDC
Transmit Data (RS-232)
Receive Data (RS-232)
Ready to Send (RS–232)
Clear to Send (RS–232)
Receive Data – (RS–422/RS-485)
Logic Ground
Logic Ground
Transmit Data + (RS–422/RS–485)
Transmit Data – (RS–422/RS–485)
Request to Send + (RS–422/RS–485)
Request to Send – (RS–422/RS–485)
Receive Data + (RS–422/RS–485)
Clear to Send + (RS422/RS–485)
Clear to Send – (RS–422/RS–485)
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
4-47
Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Modbus Read from Network (MRX)
230
240
250-1
260
4-48
The Modbus Read from Network (MRX) instruction is used by the DL260 network master
to read a block of data from a connected slave device and to write the data into V–memory
addresses within the master. The instruction allows the user to specify the Modbus Function
Code, slave station address, starting master and slave memory addresses, number of elements
to transfer, Modbus data format and the Exception Response Buffer.
• Port Number: must be DL260 Port 2 (K2)
• Slave Address: specify a slave station address (1–247)
• Function Code: the MRX instruction supports the following Modbus function codes:
01 – Read a group of coils
02 – Read a group of inputs
03 – Read holding registers
04 – Read input registers
07 – Read Exception status
• Start Slave Memory Address: specifies the starting slave memory address of the data to be read. See
the table on the following page.
• Start Master Memory Address: specifies the starting memory address in the master where the data
will be placed. See the table on the following page.
• Number of Elements: specifies how many coils, input, holding registers or input registers will be
read. See the table on the following page.
• Modbus Data Format: specifies Modbus 584/984 or 484 data format to be used.
• Exception Response Buffer: specifies the master memory address where the Exception Response
will be placed. See the table on the following page.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration
MRX Slave Memory Address
MRX Slave Address Ranges
Function Code
Modbus Data Format
01 – Read Coil
01 – Read Coil
02 – Read Input Status
484 Mode
584/984 Mode
484 Mode
02 – Read Input Status
584/984 Mode
03 – Read Holding Register
484 Mode
03 – Read Holding Register
584/984
04 – Read Input Register
484 Mode
04 – Read Input Register
584/984 Mode
07 – Read Exception Status
484 and 584/984 Mode
Slave Address Range(s)
1–999
1–65535
1001–1999
10001–19999 (5 digit) or
100001–165535 (6 digit)
4001–4999
40001–49999 (5 digit) or
4000001–465535 (6 digit)
3001–3999
30001–39999 (5 digit) or
3000001–365535 (6 digit)
N/A
MRX Master Memory Addresses
MRX Master Memory Address Ranges
Operand Data Type
DL260 Range
Inputs⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠
Outputs⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠
Control Relays⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠
Stage Bits⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠
Timer Bits⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠
Counter Bits⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠
Special Relays⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠
V–memory⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠
Global Inputs⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠
Global Outputs⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠
X
Y
C
S
T
CT
SP
V
GX
GY
0–1777
0–1777
0–3777
0–1777
0–377
0–377
0–777
All
0–3777
0–3777
MRX Number of Elements
Number of Elements
Operand Data Type
DL260 Range
V–memory⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠
Constant⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠
V
K
All (see page 3-56)
Bits:1–2000 Registers: 1-125
MRX Exception Response Buffer
Exception Response Buffer
Operand Data Type
V–memory⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠
DL260 Range
V
All (see page 3-56)
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
4-49
Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Modbus Write to Network (MWX)
230
240
250-1
260
4-50
The Modbus Write to Network (MWX) instruction is used to write a block of data from the
network master (DL260) memory to Modbus memory addresses within a slave device on the
network. The instruction allows the user to specify the Modbus Function Code, slave station
address, starting master and slave memory addresses, number of elements to transfer, Modbus
data format and the Exception Response Buffer.
•
Port Number: must be DL260 Port 2 (K2).
• Slave Address: specify a slave station address (0–247).
• Function Code: the MWX instruction supports the following Modbus function codes:
05 – Force Single coil
06 – Preset Single Register
08 – Diagnostics
15 – Force Multiple Coils
16 – Preset Multiple Registers
• Start Slave Memory Address: specifies the starting slave memory address where the data will be
written.
• Start Master Memory Address: specifies the starting address of the data in the master that is to
written to the slave.
• Number of Elements: specifies how many consecutive coils or registers will be written to. This
field is only active when either function code 15 or 16 is selected.
• Modbus Data Format: specifies Modbus 584/984 or 484 data format to be used.
• Exception Response Buffer: specifies the master memory address where the Exception Response
will be placed.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration
MWX Slave Memory Address
MWX Slave Address Ranges
Function Code
Modbus Data Format
05 – Force Single Coil
05 – Force Single Coil
06 – Preset Single Register
484 Mode
584/984 Mode
484 Mode
06 – Preset Single Register
584/984 Mode
15 – Force Multiple Coils
15 – Force Multiple Coils
16 – Preset Multiple Registers
484
584/984 Mode
484 Mode
16 – Preset Multiple Registers
584/984 Mode
Slave Address Range(s)
1–999
1–65535
4001–4999
40001–49999 (5 digit) or
400001–465535 (6 digit)
1–999
1–65535
4001–4999
40001–49999 (5 digit) or 4000001–
465535 (6 digit)
MWX Master Memory Addresses
MRX Master Memory Address Ranges
Operand Data Type
DL260 Range
Inputs⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠
Outputs⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠
Control Relays⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠
Stage Bits⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠
Timer Bits⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠
Counter Bits⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠
Special Relays⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠
V–memory⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠
Global Inputs⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠
Global Outputs⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠
X
Y
C
S
T
CT
SP
V
GX
GY
0–1777
0–1777
0–3777
0–1777
0–377
0–377
0–777
All (see page 3-56)
0–3777
0–3777
MWX Number of Elements
Number of Elements
Operand Data Type
V–memory ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠
Constant ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠
DL260 Range
V
K
All (see page 3-56)
Bits: 1–2000 Registers: 1-125
MWX Exception Response Buffer
Exception Response Buffer
Operand Data Type
V–memory ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠
DL260 Range
V
All (see page 3-56)
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
4-51
Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
4-52
MRX/MWX Example in DirectSOFT
DL260 port 2 has two Special Relay contacts associated with it (see Appendix D for comm
port special relays). One indicates “Port busy”(SP116), and the other indicates ”Port
Communication Error”(SP117). The “Port Busy” bit is on while the PLC communicates with
the slave. When the bit is off, the program can initiate the next network request. The “Port
Communication Error” bit turns on when the PLC has detected an error and use of this bit is
optional. When used, it should be ahead of any network instruction boxes since the error bit
is reset when an MRX or MWX instruction is executed. Typically, network communications
will last longer than one CPU scan. The program must wait for the communications to finish
before starting the next transaction.
The “Port Communication Error” bit turns on when the PLC has detected an error. Use of
this bit is optional. When used, it should be ahead of any network instruction boxes since the
error bit is reset when an RX or WX instruction is executed.
Multiple Read and Write Interlocks
SP116 will execute every time it attempts to poll the network. You should see this
counting up as you enable the MWX and MRX instructions. Some things that would
prevent this: 1) Com Port RTS and CTS not jumpered. 2) Port not set up for Modbus
RTU. 3) Problem in logic that is not allowing the MWX or MRX to enable.
CNT
Port 2 busy bit
1
SP116
Number of times that
the PLC has tried to
poll network
_FirstScan
CTO
K9999
SP0
SP117 will come on when: 1) The slave device sends an "Exception Response." If this
occurs, look at the V-memory location associated with that instruction and consult the
MODICON Modbus manual for details. 2) Cabling problem. Consult wiring diagram in
user manual and verify. 3) Setting for communications are not matching. For example:
Baud rates, parities, stop bits all must match. 4) Polling a slave address number that
doesn't exist.
Under good conditions, SP116 will be counting up and SP117 will not. You will get an
occasional error in many field environments that introduce electrical/RF noise into the
application. Each application will dictate what allowable "percentage" of error is
acceptable. Anything below 10% typically does not affect the throughput very much.
Port 2 error bit
2
SP117
_FirstScan
SP0
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
CNT
Number of times that
the PLC has errored
CT1
K9999
Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration
If you are using multiple reads and writes in the RLL program, you need to interlock the
routines to make sure all the routines are executed. If you don’t use the interlocks, then
the CPU will only execute the first routine. This is because each port can only handle one
transaction at a time. In the example, rungs 3 and 4 show that C100 will get set after the RX
instruction has been executed. When the port has finished the communication task, the second
routine is executed and C100 is reset. If you’re using RLLPLUS Stage Programming, you can
put each routine in a separate program stage to ensure proper execution and switch from stage
to stage allowing only one of them to be active at a time.
This rung does a Modbus write to the first holding register 40001 of slave address number one.
It writes the values over that reside in V2000. This particular function code only writes to one
register. Use function code 16 to write to multiple registers. Only one Network Instruction
(WX, RX, MWX, MRX) can be enabled in one scan. That is the reason for the interlock bits. For using
many network instructions on the same port, use the Shift Register instruction.
Port 2 Busy bit
3
SP116
Instruction Interlock bit
C100
MWX
Port Number:
K2
Slave Address:
K1
Function Code: 06 - Preset Single Register
Start Slave Memory Address:
40001
Start Master Memory Address:
V2000
Number of Elements:
n/a
Modbus Data Type:
584/984 Mode
Exception Response Buffer:
V400
Instruction interlock bit
C100
( SET )
This rung does a Modbus read from the first 32 coils of slave address number one.
It will place the values into 32 bits of the master starting at C0.
Port 2 Busy bit
4
SP116
Instruction Interlock bit
C100
MRX
Port Number:
K2
Slave Address:
K1
Function Code:
01 - Read Coil Status
Start Slave Memory Address:
1
Start Master Memory Address:
C0
Number of Elements:
32
Modbus Data Type:
584/984 Mode
Exception Response Buffer:
V400
Instruction interlock bit
C100
( RST )
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
4-53
Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Non–Sequence Protocol (ASCII In/Out and PRINT)
Configure the DL260 Port 2 for Non-Sequence
240
250-1
260
230
Configuring port 2 on the DL260 for Non–Sequence allows the CPU to use port 2 to
either read or write raw ASCII strings using the ASCII instructions. See the ASCII In/Out
instructions and the PRINT instruction in chapter 5.
In DirectSOFT, choose the PLC menu, then “Setup Secondary Comm Port.”
• Port: From the port number list box at the top, choose “Port 2.”
• Protocol: Click the check box to the left of “Non–Sequence.”
• Timeout: Amount of time the port will wait after it sends a message to get a response before logging
an error.
•R
TS On Delay Time: The amount of time between raising the RTS line and sending the data.
•R
TS Off Delay Time: The amount of time between resetting the RTS line after sending the data.
•D
ata Bits: Select either 7–bits or 8–bits to match the number of data bits specified for the
connected devices.
•B
aud Rate: The available baud rates include 300, 600, 900, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, and 38400
baud. Choose a higher baud rate initially, reverting to lower baud rates if you experience data errors
or noise problems on the network. Important: You must configure the baud rates of all devices on
the network to the same value. Refer to the appropriate product manual for details.
•S
top Bits: Choose 1 or 2 stop bits to match the number of stop bits specified for the connected
devices.
•P
arity: Choose none, even, or odd parity for error checking. Be sure to match the parity specified
for the connected devices.
• Memory Address: Starting V-memory address for ASCII In data storage.
4-54
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration
•X
ON/XOFF Flow Control: When this function is enabled, the PLC will send data (PRINT
command) until it receives a XOFF (0x13) Pause transmission command. It will continue to wait
until it then sees a XON (0x11) Resume transmission command. This selection is only available
when the “Non-Sequence(ASCII)” option has been selected and only functions when the PLC is
sending data (not receiving with AIN command).
•R
TS Flow Control: When this function is enabled, the PLC will assert the RTS signal(s) of the
port and wait to see the CTS signal(s) go true before sending data (PRINT command). This
selection is only available when the “Non-Sequence(ASCII)” option has been selected and only
functions when the PLC is sending data (not receiving with AIN command).
•E
cho Suppression: Select the appropriate radio button based on the wiring configuration used on
port 2.
Then click the button indicated to send the Port configuration to the CPU, and click Close.
RS–485 Network
RS–485 signals are for long distances (1000 meters maximum). Use termination resistors at
both ends of RS–485 network wiring, matching the impedance rating of the cable (between
100 and 500 ohms).
Termination
Resistor
TXD+ / RXD+
TXD+ / RXD+
TXD– / RXD–
TXD– / RXD–
Signal GND
Signal GND
6
1
0V
RXD–
ASCII Device
11
7
Cable: Use AutomationDirect L19954
(Belden 9842) or equivalent
RTS+
TXD+
RTS–
RXD+
CTS+
15
5
10
TXD–
CTS–
DL260 CPU Port 2
Port 2 Pin Descriptions (DL260 only)
1
RS–232 Network
RS–232 signals are used for shorter 2
distances (15 meters maximum) and 3
limited to communications between 4
5
two devices.
6
6
1
7
11
Signal GND
GND
8
7
2
RXD
9
TXD
10
3
TXD
RXD
11
4
CTS
RTS
12
RTS
5
13
CTS
15
10
14
15
CPU Port 2
ASCII Device
5V
TXD2
RXD2
RTS2
CTS2
RXD2–
0V
0V
TXD2+
TXD2 –
RTS2 +
RTS2 –
RXD2 +
CTS2 +
CTS2 –
5 VDC
Transmit Data (RS-232)
Receive Data (RS-232)
Ready to Send (RS–232)
Clear to Send (RS–232)
Receive Data – (RS–422/RS-485)
Logic Ground
Logic Ground
Transmit Data + (RS–422/RS–485)
Transmit Data – (RS–422/RS–485)
Request to Send + (RS–422/RS–485)
Request to Send – (RS–422/RS–485)
Receive Data + (RS–422/RS–485)
Clear to Send + (RS-422/RS–485)
Clear to Send – (RS–422/RS–485)
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
4-55
Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration
Configure the DL250-1 Port 2 for Non-Sequence
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
230
240
250-1
260
4-56
Configuring port 2 on the DL250–1 for Non–Sequence enables the CPU to use the PRINT
instruction to print embedded text or text/data variable message from port 2. See the PRINT
instruction in chapter 5.
In DirectSOFT, choose the PLC menu, then “Setup Secondary Comm Port.”
• Port: From the port number list box at the top, choose “Port 2.”
• Protocol: Click the check box to the left of “Non–Sequence.”
•M
emory Address: Choose a V-memory address to use as the starting
location for the port set-up parameters listed below.
This location is the
start of protocol memory buffer. It should not be used for other purposes.
Buffer size = 2 + (Max receiving data size) / 2 or to allocate the maximum allowable space
buffer size = 66 Words (for example V2000-V2102).
•U
se For Printing Only: Check the box to enable the port settings described below. Match
the settings to the connected device.
•D
ata Bits: Select either 7–bits or 8–bits to match the number of data bits specified for the
connected device.
•B
aud Rate: The available baud rates include 300, 600, 900, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200,
and 38400 baud. Choose a higher baud rate initially, reverting to lower baud rates if you
experience data errors or noise problems on the network. Important: You must configure the
baud rates of all devices on the network to the same value. Refer to the appropriate product
manual for details.
•S
top Bits: Choose 1 or 2 stop bits to match the number of stop bits specified for the connected
device.
•P
arity: Choose none, even, or odd parity for error checking. Be sure to match the parity
specified for the connected device.
Then click the button indicated to send the Port configuration to the CPU, and click Close.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration
RS–422 Network
RS–422 signals are for long distances (1000 meters max.). Use termination resistors at both
ends of RS–422 network wiring, matching the impedance rating of the cable (between 100 and
500 ohms).
NOTE: For RS–422 cabling, we recommend AutomationDirect L19853 (Belden 8103) or equivalent.
RXD+
RXD–
TXD+
TXD–
Signal GND
ASCII
Slave
Device
9 TXD+
10 TXD–
13 RXD+
6 RXD–
11 RTS+
12 RTS–
14 CTS+
15 CTS–
7 0V
Termination
Resistor at
both ends of
network
PORT 2
Master
RS–232 Network
RS–232 signals are used for shorter distances (15 meters maximum) and limited to
communications between two devices.
NOTE: For RS–232 cabling, we recommend AutomationDirect L19772 (Belden 8102) or equivalent.
Port 2 Pin Descriptions (DL250-1)
6
GND
RXD
TXD
CTS
RTS
ASCII Slave
ASCII
Device
Device
Signal GND
1
2
TXD
RXD
7
11
3
4
RTS
CTS
5
10
15
CPU Port 2
CPU
Port 2
Master
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
5V
TXD2
RXD2
RTS2
CTS2
RXD2–
0V
0V
TXD2+
TXD2 –
RTS2 +
RTS2 –
RXD2 +
CTS2 +
CTS2 –
5 VDC
Transmit Data (RS-232)
Receive Data (RS-232)
Ready to Send (RS–232)
Clear to Send (RS–232)
Receive Data – (RS–422)
Logic Ground
Logic Ground
Transmit Data + (RS–422)
Transmit Data – (RS–422)
Request to Send + (RS–422)
Request to Send – (RS–422)
Receive Data + (RS–422 )
Clear to Send + (RS422)
Clear to Send – (RS–422)
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
4-57
Chapter 4: System Design and Configuration
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
4-58
Notes
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
RLL and Intelligent
Box Instructions
In This Chapter:
Chapter
5
Introduction................................................................................5–2
Using Boolean Instructions..........................................................5–5
Boolean Instructions ...................................................................5–10
Comparative Boolean..................................................................5–27
Immediate Instructions................................................................5–33
Timer, Counter and Shift Register Instructions............................5–41
Accumulator/Stack Load and Output Data Instructions...............5–53
Logical Instructions (Accumulator)..............................................5–71
Math Instructions........................................................................5–88
Transcendental Functions (DL260 only)......................................5–121
Bit Operation Instructions...........................................................5–123
Number Conversion Instructions (Accumulator)..........................5–130
Table Instructions........................................................................5–144
Clock/Calendar Instructions........................................................5–175
CPU Control Instructions.............................................................5–177
Program Control Instructions......................................................5–179
Interrupt Instructions..................................................................5–187
Intelligent I/O Instructions..........................................................5–191
Network Instructions...................................................................5–193
Message Instructions...................................................................5–197
Modbus RTU Instructions (DL260)..............................................5–205
ASCII Instructions (DL260)..........................................................5–211
Intelligent Box (IBox) Instructions (DL250-1/DL260 Only)..........5–230
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Introduction
The DL205 CPUs offer a wide variety of instructions to perform many different types of
operations. Several instructions are not available in all of the CPUs. This chapter shows you
how to use these individual instructions. There are two ways to quickly find the instruction
you need:
• If you know the instruction category (Boolean, Comparative Boolean, etc), use the header at the top
of the page to find the pages that discuss the instructions in that category.
• If you know the individual instruction name, use the following table to find the page that discusses
the instruction.
Instruction
ACON
ACOSR
ACRB
ADD
ADDB
ADDBD
ADDBS
ADDD
ADDF
ADDR
ADDS
AEX
AFIND
AIN
AND
AND STR
ANDB
ANDD
ANDE
ANDF
ANDI
ANDMOV
ANDN
ANDNB
ANDND
ANDNE
ANDNI
ANDPD
ANDS
ASINR
ATANR
ATH
ATT
BCD
BCDCPL
5-2
ASCII Constant
Arc Cosine Real
ASCII Clear Buffer
Add BCD
Add Binary
Add Binary Double
Add Binary Top of Stack
Add Double BCD
Add Formatted
Add Real
Add Top of Stack
ASCII Extract
ASCII Find
ASCII IN
And for contacts or boxes
And Store
And Bit–of–Word
And Double
And if Equal
And Formatted
And Immediate
And Move
And Not
And Not Bit–of–Word
And Negative Differential
And if Not Equal
And Not Immediate
And Positive Differential
And Stack
Arc Sine Real
Arc Tangent Real
ASCII to Hex
Add to Top of Table
Binary Coded Decimal
Tens Complement
Page
5–199
5–122
5–229
5–88
5–101
5–102
5–117
5–89
5–109
5–90
5–113
5–220
5–217
5–212
5–14, 5–32, 5–71
5–16
5–15
5–72
5–29
5–73
5–35
5–171
5–14, 5–32
5–15
5–23
5–29
5–35
5–23
5–74
5–121
5–122
5–137
5–166
5–131
5–133
Instruction
BIN
BCALL
BEND
BLK
BTOR
CMP
CMPD
CMPF
CMPR
CMPS
CMPV
CNT
COSR
CV
CVJMP
DATE
DEC
DECB
DECO
DEGR
DISI
DIV
DIVB
DIVBS
DIVD
DIVF
DIVR
DIVS
DLBL
DRUM
EDRUM
ENCO
END
ENI
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Binary
Block Call (Stage)
Block End (Stage)
Block (Stage)
Binary to Real
Compare
Compare Double
Compare Formatted
Compare Real Number
Compare Stack
ASCII Compare
Counter
Cosine Real
Converge (Stage)
Converge Jump (Stage)
Date
Decrement
Decrement Binary
Decode
Degree Real Conversion
Disable Interrupts
Divide
Divide Binary
Divide Binary Top of Stack
Divide Double
Divide Formatted
Divide Real Number
Divide Top of Stack
Data Label
Timed Drum
Event Drum
Encode
End
Enable Interrupts
Page
5–130
7–27
7–27
7–27
5–134
5–83
5–84
5–85
5–87
5–86
5–221
5–46
5–121
7–25
7–25
5–175
5–100
5–108
5–129
5–136
5–188
5–97
5–106
5–120
5–98
5–112
5–99
5–116
5–199
6–12
6–14
5–128
5–177
5–188
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
Instruction
FAULT
FDGT
FILL
FIND
FINDB
FOR
GOTO
GRAY
GTS
HTA
INC
INCB
INT
INV
IRT
IRTC
ISG
JMP
LBL
LD
LDI
LDIF
LDA
LDD
LDF
LDR
LDX
LDLBL
LDSX
MDRMD
MDRMW
MLR
MLS
MOV
MOVMC
MRX
MWX
MUL
MULB
MULBS
MULD
MULF
MULR
MULS
NCON
NEXT
Fault
Find Greater Than
Fill
Find
Find Block
For/Next
Goto/Label
Gray Code
Goto Subroutine
Hex to ASCII
Increment
Increment Binary
Interrupt
Invert
Interrupt Return
Interrupt Return Conditional
Initial Stage
Jump
Label
Load
Load Immediate
Load Immediate Formatted
Load Address
Load Double
Load Formatted
Load Real Number
Load Indexed
Load Label
Load Indexed from Constant
Masked Drum Event Discrete
Masked Drum Event Word
Master Line Reset
Master Line Set
Move
Move Memory Cartridge
Read from MODBUS Network
Write to MODBUS
Multiply
Multiply Binary
Multiply Binary top of stack
Multiply Double
Multiply Formatted
Multiply Real
Multiply Top of Stack
Numeric Constand
Next (For/Next)
Page
5-197
5-152
5–150
5–151
5–173
5–180
5–179
5–141
5–182
5–138
5–100
5–107
5–187
5–132
5–188
7–188
7–24
5–24
5–179
5–58
5–39
5–40
5-61
5–59
5–60
5–64
5–62
5–145
5–63
6–19
6–21
5–185
5–185
5–144
5–145
5–205
5–208
5–94
5–105
5–119
5–95
5–111
5–96
5–115
5–199
5–180
Instruction
NJMP
NOP
NOT
OR
OR OUT
OR OUTI
OR STR
ORB
ORD
ORE
ORF
ORI
ORMOV
ORN
ORNB
ORND
ORNE
ORNI
ORPD
ORS
OUT
OUTB
OUTD
OUTF
OUTI
OUTIF
OUTL
OUTM
OUTX
PAUSE
PD
POP
PRINT
PRINTV
RADR
RD
RFB
RFT
ROTL
ROTR
RST
RSTB
RSTBIT
RSTI
RSTWT
Not Jump (Stage)
No Operation
Not
Or
Or Out
Or Out Immediate
Or Store
Or Bit–of–Word
Or Double
Or if Equal
Or Formatted
Or Immediate
Or Move
Or Not
Or Not Bit–of–Word
Or Negative Differential
Or if Not Equal
Or Not Immediate
Or Positive Differential
Or Stack
Out
Out Bit–of–Word
Out Double
Out Formatted
Out Immediate
Out Immediate Formatted
Out Least
Out Most
Out Indexed
Pause
Positive Differential
Pop
Print
ASCII Print from V–Memory
Radian Real Conversion
Read from Intelligent Module
Remove from Bottom of Table
Remove from Top of Table
Rotate Left
Rotate Right
Reset
Reset Bit–of–Word
Reset Bit
Reset Immediate
Reset Watch Dog Timer
Page
7–24
5-177
5–19
5–12, 5–31, 5–75
5–19
5–36
5–16
5–13
5–76
5–28
5–77
5–34
5–171
5–12, 5–31
5–13
5–22
5–28
5–34
5–22
5–78
5–17, 5–65
5–18
5–66
5–67
5–36
5–37
5–69
5–69
5–68
5–26
5–20
5–70
5–201
5–227
5–136
5–191
5–157
5–163
5–126
5–127
5–24
5–25
5–148
5–38
5–178
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-3
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Instruction
RT
RTC
RTOB
RX
SBR
SEG
SET
SETB
SETBIT
SETI
SFLDGT
SG
SGCNT
SHFL
SHFR
SINR
SQRTR
SR
STOP
STR
STRB
STRE
STRI
STRN
STRNB
STRND
STRNE
STRNI
STRPD
STT
5-4
Subroutine Return
Subroutine Return Conditional
Real to Binary
Read from Network
Subroutine (Goto Subroutine)
Segment
Set
Set Bit–of–Word
Set Bit
Set Immediate
Shuffle Digits
Stage
Stage Counter
Shift Left
Shift Right
Sine Real
Square Root Real
Shift Register
Stop
Store
Store Bit–of–Word
Store if Equal
Store Immediate
Store Not
Store Not Bit–of–Word
Store Negative Differential
Store if Not Equal
Store Not Immediate
Store Positive Differential
Source to Table
Page
5–182
5–182
5–135
5–193
5–182
5–140
5–24
5–25
5–148
5–38
5–142
7–23
5–48
5–124
5–125
5–121
5–122
5–52
5–177
5–10, 5–30
5–11
5–27
5–33
5–10, 5–30
5–11
5–21
5–27
5–33
5–21
5–160
Instruction
SUB
SUBB
SUBBD
SUBBS
SUBD
SUBF
SUBS
SUBR
SUM
SWAP
SWAPB
TANR
TIME
TMR
TMRF
TMRA
TMRAF
TSHFL
TSHFR
TTD
UDC
VPRINT
WT
WX
XOR
XORD
XORF
XORMOV
XORS
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Subtract
Subtract Binary
Subtract Binary Double
Subtract Binary Top of Stack
Subtract Double
Subtract Formatted
Subtract Top of Stack
Subtract Real Number
Sum
Swap Table Data
ASCII Swap Bytes
Tangent Real
Time
Timer
Fast Timer
Accumulating Timer
Fast Accumulating Timer
Table Shift Left
Table Shift Right
Table to Destination
Up Down Counter
ASCII Print to V–Memory
Write to Intelligent Module
Write to Network
Exclusive Or
Exclusive Or Double
Exclusive Or Formatted
Exclusive Or Move
Exclusive Or Stack
Page
5–91
5–103
5–104
5–118
5–92
5–110
5–114
5–93
5–123
5–174
5–228
5–121
5–176
5–42
5–42
5–44
5–44
5–169
5–169
5–154
5–50
5–222
5–192
5–195
5–79
5–80
5–81
5–171
5–82
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
Using Boolean Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
The following paragraphs show how these instructions are used to build simple ladder programs. 7
END Statement
All DL205 programs require an END statement as the last instruction. This tells the CPU that 8
this is the end of the program. Normally, any instructions placed after the END statement
will not be executed. There are exceptions to this such as interrupt routines, etc. Chapter 5 9
discusses the instruction set in detail.
10
11
12
13
Simple Rungs
You use a contact to start rungs that contain both contacts and coils. The boolean instruction
that does this is called a Store or, STR instruction. The output point is represented by the 14
Output or, OUT instruction. The following example shows how to enter a single contact and
a single output coil.
A
B
C
D
Do you ever wonder why so many PLC manufacturers always quote the scan time for a 1K
boolean program? Simple, most programs utilize many boolean instructions. These are
typically very simple instructions designed to join input and output contacts in various series
and parallel combinations. Our DirectSOFT programming package is a similar program. It
uses graphic symbols to develop a program; therefore, you don’t necessarily have to know the
instruction mnemonics in order to develop your program.
Many of the instructions in this chapter are not program instructions used in DirectSOFT, but
are implied. In other words, they are not actually keyboard commands but they can be seen
in a Mnemonic View of the program once the DirectSOFT program has been developed and
accepted (compiled). Each instruction listed in this chapter will have a small chart to indicate
how the instruction is used with DirectSOFT and the HPP.
DS
HPP
X0
Implied
Used
DirectSOFT Example
All programs must have
an END statement
Y0
OUT
END
DirectSOFT Example
X0
Handheld Mnemonics
Y0
OUT
STR X0
OUT Y0
END
END
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5-5
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-6
Normally Closed Contact
Normally closed contacts are also very common. This is accomplished with the Store Not, or
STRN instruction. The following example shows a simple rung with a normally closed contact.
DirectSOFT Example
Handheld Mnemonics
X0
Y0
OUT
STRN X0
OUT Y0
END
END
Contacts in Series
Use the AND instruction to join two or more contacts in series. The following example shows
two contacts in series and a single output coil. The instructions used would be STR X0, AND
X1, followed by OUT Y0.
DirectSOFT Example
X0
Handheld Mnemonics
Y0
X1
OUT
STR X0
AND X1
OUT Y0
END
END
Midline Outputs
Sometimes it is necessary to use midline outputs to get additional outputs that are conditional
on other contacts. The following example shows how you can use the AND instruction to
continue a rung with more conditional outputs.
DirectSOFT Example
X0
Handheld Mnemonics
Y0
X1
OUT
Y1
X2
OUT
X3
Y2
OUT
END
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
STR X0
AND X1
OUT Y0
AND X2
OUT Y1
AND X3
OUT Y2
END
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
Parallel Elements
1
2
3
4
5
6
Joining Series Branches in Parallel
Quite often it is necessary to join several groups of series elements in parallel. The Or Store
(ORSTR) instruction allows this operation. The following example shows a simple network
7
consisting of series elements joined in parallel.
8
9
10
Joining Parallel Branches in Series
11
You can also join one or more parallel branches in series. The And Store (ANDSTR) instruction
allows this operation. The following example shows a simple network with contact branches
12
in series with parallel contacts.
13
14
A
Combination Networks
B
You can combine the various types of
series and parallel branches to solve most
C
any application problem. The following
example shows a simple combination
D
network.
You may also have to join contacts in parallel. The OR instruction allows you to do this. The
following example shows two contacts in parallel and a single output coil. The instructions
would be STR X0, OR X1, followed by OUT Y0.
DirectSOFT Example
Handheld Mnemonics
X0
Y0
OUT
X1
STR X0
OR X1
OUT Y0
END
END
DirectSOFT Example
X0
Handheld Mnemonics
Y0
X1
OUT
X2
X3
END
DirectSOFT Example
X0
STR X0
AND X1
STR X2
AND X3
ORSTR
OUT Y0
END
Handheld Mnemonics
Y0
X1
OUT
X2
STR X0
STR X1
OR X2
ANDSTR
OUT Y0
END
END
X0
X2
X5
Y0
OUT
X1
X3
X4
X6
END
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5-7
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-8
Comparative Boolean
The DL205 Micro PLCs provide Comparative Boolean instructions that allow you to quickly
and easily solve compare two numbers. The Comparative Boolean provides evaluation of two
4-digit values using boolean contacts. The valid evaluations are: equal to, not equal to, equal
to or greater than, and less than.
In the example ,when the BCD value in V-memory location V1400 is equal to the constant
value 1234, Y3 will energize.
Y3
V1400 K1234
OUT
Boolean Stack
There are limits to how many elements you can
include in a rung. This is because the DL205 CPUs use an 8-level boolean stack to evaluate
the various logic elements. The boolean stack is a temporary storage area that solves the logic
for the rung. Each time you enter a STR instruction, the instruction is placed on the top
of the boolean stack. Any other STR instructions on the boolean stack are pushed down a
level. The ANDSTR, and ORSTR instructions combine levels of the boolean stack when they
are encountered. Since the boolean stack is only eight levels, an error will occur if the CPU
encounters a rung that uses more than the eight levels of the boolean stack.
The following example shows how the boolean stack is used to solve boolean logic.
X0
STR
STR
STR
X1 ORSTR
AND X4
Y0
OUT
X2 AND
X5
X3
Output
ANDSTR
OR
STR X0
STR X1
1
1
STR X1
1
STR X2
1
STR X2
2
2
STR X0
2
STR X1
2
STR X1
3
3
3
STR X0
3
STR X0
4
4
4
STR X0
STR X2
AND X3
4
ORSTR
AND X4
1
X1 or (X2 AND X3)
1
X4 AND {X1 or (X2 AND X3)}
1
NOT X5 OR X4 AND {X1 OR (X2 AND X3)}
2
STR X0
2
STR X0
2
STR X0
3
3
ANDSTR
1
XO AND (NOT X5 or X4) AND {X1 or (X2 AND X3)}
2
3
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
ORNOT X5
3
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
Immediate Boolean
1
2
3
4
NOTE: Even though the immediate input instruction reads the most current status from the input point, it only
uses the results to solve that one instruction. It does not use the new status to update the image register. 5
Therefore, any regular instructions that follow will still use the image register values. Any immediate
instructions that follow will access the I/O again to update the status. The immediate output instruction will 6
write the status to the I/O and update the image register.
7
8
9
CPU Scan
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
The DL205 Micro PLCs can usually complete an operation cycle in a matter of milliseconds.
However, in some applications you may not be able to wait a few milliseconds until the next
I/O update occurs. The DL205 PLCs offer immediate input and outputs which are special
boolean instructions that allow reading directly from inputs and writing directly to outputs
during the program execution portion of the CPU cycle. You may recall that this is normally
done during the input or output update portion of the CPU cycle. The immediate instructions
take longer to execute because the program execution is interrupted while the CPU reads or
writes the I/O point. This function is not normally done until the read inputs or the write
outputs portion of the CPU cycle.
X0
_
X7
X10
_
X17
X20
_
X27
X30
_
X37
Y0
_
Y7
Y10
_
Y17
Y20
_
Y27
Y30
_
Y37
Th e
CPU reads the inputs from
the local base and stores the
status in an input image
register .
Read Inputs
X128
OFF
...
X2
X1
X0
...
ON OFF OFF
Input Image Register
OFF
X0
OFF
X1
Read Inputs from Specialty I/O
Solve the Application Program
X0
I
Y0
Immediate instruction does
not use the input image
register , but instead reads the
status
from the module
I/O Point X0 Changes
immediately.
ON
X0
OFF
X1
Write Outputs
Write Outputs to Specialty I/O
Diagnostics
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5-9
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Boolean Instructions
Store (STR)
Store instruction begins a new rung or an additional
230 The
branch in a rung with a normally open contact. Status
240 of the contact will be the same state as the associated
250-1 image register point or memory location.
260 Store Not (STRN)
230
240
250-1
260
The Store Not instruction begins a new rung or an
additional branch in a rung with a normally closed
contact. Status of the contact will be opposite the
state of the associated image register point or memory
location.
In
the
following
Operand Data Type
Inputs
Outputs
Control Relays
Stage
Timer
Counter
Special Relay
Global
Global
DS
HPP
5-10
Used
Used
Aaaa
Store
Aaaa
DL230 Range
DL240 Range
DL250–1 Range
A
aaa
aaa
aaa
aaa
X
Y
C
S
T
CT
SP
GX
GY
0 – 177
0 – 177
0 – 377
0 – 377
0 – 77
0 – 77
0 – 117, 540 – 577
–
–
0 – 477
0 – 477
0 – 377
0 – 777
0 – 177
0 – 177
0 – 137 540 – 617
–
–
0 – 777
0 – 777
0 – 1777
0 – 1777
0 – 377
0 – 177
0 – 777
–
–
0 – 1777
0 – 1777
0 – 3777
0 – 1777
0 – 377
0 – 377
0 – 777
0 –3777
0 – 3777
example,
when
input
X1
is
on
output
Y2
DL260 Range
will
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
DirectSOFT
X1
Y2
OUT
$
B
STR
GX
OUT
C
1
2
ENT
ENT
In the following Store Not example, when input X1 is off output Y2 will energize.
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
DirectSOFT
X1
Y2
OUT
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
SP
STRN
B
GX
OUT
C
1
2
ENT
ENT
energize.
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
Store Bit-of-Word (STRB)
230
240
250-1
260
230
240
250-1
260
1
2
Store Not Bit-of-Word (STRNB)
3
The Store Not instruction begins a new rung or an
additional branch in a rung with a normally closed
4
contact. Status of the contact will be opposite the state
of the bit referenced in the associated memory location.
5
Operand Data Type
DL250-1 Range
DL260 Range
A
aaa
bb
aaa
bb
6
7
In the following Store Bit-of-Word example, when bit 12 of V-memory location V1400 is on,
8
output Y2 will energize.
9
10
11
12
13
In the following Store Not Bit-of-Word example, when bit 12 of V-memory location V1400
14
is off, output Y2 will energize.
A
B
C
D
The Store Bit-of-Word instruction begins a new rung
or an additional branch in a rung with a normally open
contact. Status of the contact will be the same state as
the bit referenced in the associated memory location.
Aaaa.bb
memory map BCD, 0 to 15 See memory map BCD, 0 to 15
B See page
3-55
page 3-56
See
memory
map
See
memory map BCD, 0 to 15
PB
BCD, 0 to 15
page 3-55
page 3-56
V-memory
Pointer
DS
HPP
Used
Used
Aaaa.bb
DirectSOFT
B1400.12
Y2
OUT
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
STR
SHFT
B
K
1
2
2
ENT
OUT
V
1
4
0
0
ENT
DirectSOFT
B1400.12
Y2
OUT
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
STRN
OUT
SHFT
B
V
K
1
2
2
ENT
1
4
0
0
ENT
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5-11
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Or (OR)
230
240
250-1
260
The Or instruction logically ors a normally open contact
in parallel with another contact in a rung. The status of
the contact will be the same state as the associated image
register point or memory location.
Aaaa
Or Not (ORN)
230
240
250-1
260
The Or Not instruction logically ors a normally closed
contact in parallel with another contact in a rung. The
status of the contact will be opposite the state of the
associated image register point or memory location.
Operand Data Type
DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250-1 Range DL260 Range
A
X
Y
C
S
T
CT
SP
GX
GY
Inputs
Outputs
Control Relays
Stage
Timer
Counter
Special Relay
Global
Global
Aaaa
aaa
aaa
aaa
aaa
0-177
0-177
0–377
0–377
0–77
0–77
0-117, 540-577
-
0-477
0-477
0–377
0–777
0–177
0–177
0-137, 540-617
-
0-777
0-777
0–1777
0–1777
0–377
0–177
0-137, 540-717
-
0-1777
0-1777
0–3777
0–1777
0–377
0–377
0-137, 540-717
0-3777
0-3777
In the following Or example, when input X1 or X2 is on, output Y5 will energize.
DS Implied
HPP Used
5-12
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
DirectSOFT
X1
Y5
OUT
X2
$
STR
Q
OR
GX
OUT
B
C
F
1
2
5
ENT
ENT
ENT
In the following Or Not example, when input X1 is on or X2 is off, output Y5 will energize.
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
DirectSOFT
X1
Y5
OUT
X2
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
$
STR
B
R
ORN
C
GX
OUT
F
1
2
5
ENT
ENT
ENT
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
Or Bit-of-Word (ORB)
240
250-1
260
230
230
240
250-1
260
1
2
3
Or Not Bit-of-Word (ORNB)
The Or Not Bit-of-Word instruction logically ors a
4
normally closed Bit-of-Word contact in parallel with
another contact in a rung. Status of the contact will be
opposite the state of the bit referenced in the associated
5
memory location.
Operand Data Type
DL250-1 Range
DL260 Range
6
aaa
bb
bb
7
8
In the following Or Bit-of-Word example, when input X1 or bit 7 of V1400 is on, output Y7
9
will energize.
10
11
12
13
In the following Or Not Bit-of-Word example, when input X1 is on or bit 7 of V1400 is off, 14
output Y7 will energize.
A
B
C
D
The Or Bit-of-Word instruction logically ors a normally
open Bit-of-Word contact in parallel with another
contact in a rung. Status of the contact will be the same
state as the bit referenced in the associated memory
location.
Aaaa.bb
Aaaa.bb
A
aaa
See
memory
map
See
memory
map BCD, 0 to 15
B
BCD, 0 to 15
page 3-55
page 3-56
memory map BCD, 0 to 15 See memory map BCD, 0 to 15
PB See page
3-55
page 3-56
V-memory
Pointer
DirectSOFT
DS
HPP
X1
Implied
Y7
OUT
Used
B1400.7
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
STR
OR
1
SHFT
B
K
7
OUT
ENT
V
1
4
V
1
4
0
0
ENT
ENT
7
DirectSOFT
X1
Y7
OUT
B1400.7
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
STR
ORN
OUT
1
ENT
SHFT
B
K
7
ENT
7
ENT
0
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
0
5-13
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
And (AND)
230
240
250-1
260
230
240
250-1
260
Aaaa
The AND instruction logically ands a normally open
contact in series with another contact in a rung. The
status of the contact will be the same state as the
associated image register point or memory location.
And Not (ANDN)
Aaaa
The And Not instruction logically “ANDs” a normally
closed contact in series with another contact in a rung.
The status of the contact will be opposite the state of the
associated image register point or memory location.
Operand Data Type
DL230 Range DL240 Range
A
X
Y
C
S
T
CT
SP
GX
GY
Inputs
Outputs
Control Relays
Stage
Timer
Counter
Special Relay
Global
Global
DL250-1
DL260 Range
aaa
aaa
aaa
aaa
0–177
0–177
0–377
0–377
0–77
0–77
0-117, 540-577
-
0–477
0–477
0–377
0–777
0–177
0–177
0-137, 540-617
-
0–777
0–777
0–1777
0–1777
0–377
0–177
0-137, 540-717
-
0–1777
0–1777
0–3777
0–1777
0–377
0–377
0-137, 540-717
0-3777
0-3777
In the following And example, when input X1 and X2 are on output Y5 will energize.
DS Implied
HPP Used
5-14
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
DirectSOFT
X1
X2
Y5
OUT
$
STR
B
V
AND
C
GX
OUT
F
1
2
5
ENT
ENT
ENT
In the following And Not example, when input X1 is on and X2 is off output Y5 will energize.
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
DirectSOFT
X1
X2
Y5
OUT
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
$
STR
B
W
ANDN
C
GX
OUT
F
1
2
5
ENT
ENT
ENT
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
AND Bit-of-Word (ANDB)
1
2
3
4
Operand Data Type
DL250-1 Range
DL260 Range
aaa
bb
aaa
bb
5
6
In the following And Bit-of-Word example, when input X1 and bit 4 of V1400 is on output 7
Y5 will energize.
8
9
10
11
12
In the following And Not Bit-of-Word example, when input X1 is on and bit 4 of V1400 is
13
off, output Y5 will energize.
14
A
B
C
D
The And Bit-of-Word instruction logically ands a normally open contact in seriesAaaa.bb
with another
contact
in
a
rung.
The
status
of
the
contact
will
be
the
same
state
as
the
bit
referenced
in the
240
250-1 associated memory location.
260
And Not Bit-of-Word (ANDNB)
230
The And Not Bit-of-Word instruction logically ands a normally closed contact in series with
Aaaa.bb
240
another contact in a rung. The status of the contact will be opposite the state
of the bit
250-1
referenced in the associated memory location.
260
230
A
V-memory
Pointer
memory map
B See page
3-55
memory map
PB See page
3-55
BCD, 0 to 15
BCD
See memory map
page 3-56
See memory map
page 3-56
BCD, 0 to 15
BCD
DirectSOFT
DS Implied
HPP Used
X1
B1400.4
Y5
OUT
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
STR
1
AND
ENT
SHFT
B
K
4
ENT
5
ENT
OUT
V
1
4
0
0
DirectSOFT
X1
Y5
B1400.4
OUT
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
STR
ANDN
OUT
1
ENT
SHFT
B
K
4
ENT
V
5
ENT
1
4
0
0
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5-15
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
And Store (ANDSTR)
230
240
250-1
260
OUT
The And Store instruction logically ands two branches
of a rung in series. Both branches must begin with
the Store instruction.
1
2
In the following And Store example, the branch consisting of contacts X2, X3, and X4 have
been anded with the branch consisting of contact X1.
DS Implied
HPP Used
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
DirectSOFT
X1
X2
X3
Y5
OUT
X4
$
$
B
STR
C
STR
V
AND
D
Q
E
OR
L
ANDST
Or Store (ORSTR)
2
3
4
ENT
ENT
ENT
ENT
ENT
GX
OUT
230
240
250-1
260
1
F
5
ENT
1
The Or Store instruction logically ors two branches
of a rung in parallel. Both branches must begin with
the Store instruction.
OUT
2
In the following Or Store example, the branch consisting of X1 and X2 have been OR’d with
the branch consisting of X3 and X4.
DS Implied
HPP Used
5-16
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
DirectSOFT
X1
X2
Y5
OUT
X3
X4
$
B
STR
V
AND
C
$
D
STR
V
AND
M
ORST
GX
OUT
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
E
1
2
3
4
ENT
ENT
ENT
ENT
ENT
F
5
ENT
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
Out (OUT)
230
240
250-1
260
1
2
3
Operand Data Type
DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250-1 Range DL260 Range 4
A
aaa
aaa
aaa
aaa
5
6
7
In the following Out example, when input X1 is on, output Y2 and Y5 will energize.
8
9
10
11
In the following Out example, the program contains two Out instructions using the same
location (Y10). The physical output of Y10 is ultimately controlled by the last rung of logic
referencing Y10. X1 will override the Y10 output being controlled by X0. To avoid this 12
situation, multiple outputs using the same location should not be used in programming. If
you need to have an output controlled by multiple inputs, see the OROUT instruction on 13
page 5–19.
14
A
B
C
D
The Out instruction reflects the status of the rung
(on/off) and outputs the discrete (on/off) state to the
specified image register point or memory location.
Multiple Out instructions referencing the same
discrete location should not be used since only the
last Out instruction in the program will control
the physical output point. Instead, use the next
instruction, the Or Out.
Inputs
Outputs
Control Relays
Global
Global
DS
HPP
Used
Used
X
Y
C
GX
GY
0–177
0–177
0–377
-
Aaaa
OUT
0–477
0–477
0–377
-
0–777
0–777
0–1777
-
0–1777
0–1777
0–3777
0–3777
0–3777
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
DirectSOFT
X1
Y2
OUT
Y5
OUT
X0
$
STR
B
GX
OUT
C
GX
OUT
F
1
2
5
ENT
ENT
ENT
Y10
OUT
X1
Y10
OUT
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5-17
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Out Bit-of-Word (OUTB)
230
240
250-1
260
The Out Bit-of-Word instruction reflects the status of
the rung (on/off) and outputs the discrete (on/off) state
to the specified bit in the referenced memory location.
Multiple Out Bit-of-Word instructions referencing the
same bit of the same word generally should not be used
since only the last Out instruction in the program will
control the status of the bit.
Operand Data Type
DL250-1 Range
A
Pointer
5-18
Used
Used
aaa
memory map
B See page
3-55
See
memory
map
PB
page 3-55
V-memory
DS
HPP
Aaaa.bb
OUT
DL260 Range
bb
aaa
bb
BCD, 0 to 15
See memory map
page 3-56
See memory map
page 3-56
BCD, 0 to 15
BCD
BCD
In the following Out Bit-of-Word example, when input X1 is on, bit 3 of V1400 and bit 6
of V1401 will turn on.
DirectSOFT
X1
B1400.3
OUT
B1401.6
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
STR
1
OUT
SHFT
K
3
OUT
SHFT
B
K
6
OUT
ENT
B
V
1
4
0
0
V
1
4
0
1
ENT
ENT
The following Out Bit-of-Word example contains two Out Bit-of-Word instructions using the
same bit in the same memory word. The final state bit 3 of V1400 is ultimately controlled by
the last rung of logic referencing it. X1 will override the logic state controlled by X0. To avoid
this situation, multiple outputs using the same location must not be used in programming.
location must not be used in programming.
X0
B1400.3
OUT
X1
B1400.3
OUT
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
Or Out (OROUT)
230
240
250-1
260
1
2
3
Operand Data Type
DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250-1 Range DL260 Range
A
aaa
aaa
aaa
aaa
4
5
6
In the following example, when X1 or X4 is on, Y2 will energize.
7
8
9
10
11
Not (NOT)
12
The Not instruction inverts the status of the rung at
the point of the instruction.
13
In the following example, when X1 is off, Y2 will energize. This is because the Not instruction
14
inverts the status of the rung at the Not instruction.
A
B
C
D
The Or Out instruction allows more than one rung of discrete
logic to control a single output. Multiple Or Out instructions
referencing the same output coil may be used, since all contacts
controlling the output are logically OR’d together. If the status
of any rung is on, the output will also be on.
Inputs
Outputs
Control Relays
Global
Global
DS
HPP
Used
Used
X
Y
C
GX
GY
0–177
0-177
0–377
-
0–477
0-477
0–377
-
Y2
$
OR OUT
$
Y2
230
240
250-1
260
DS
HPP
Used
Used
0–1777
0-1777
0–3777
0–3777
0–3777
F
3
E
D
F
3
1
5
4
5
ENT
ENT
ENT
C
ENT
C
2
ENT
ENT
ENT
2
ENT
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
DirectSOFT
X1
D
STR
O
INST#
OR OUT
B
STR
O
INST#
X4
0–777
0-777
0–1777
-
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
DirectSOFT
X1
A aaa
OR OUT
Y2
OUT
$
B
STR
SHFT
GX
OUT
N
TMR
1
O
INST#
C
2
ENT
T
MLR
ENT
ENT
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5-19
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Positive Differential (PD)
The Positive Differential instruction is typically
known as a one shot. When the input logic
produces an off-to-on transition, the output will
energize for one CPU scan.
230
240
250-1
260
Operand Data Type
Inputs
Outputs
Control Relays
A aaa
PD
DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250-1 Range DL260 Range
A
aaa
aaa
aaa
aaa
X
Y
C
0–177
0–177
0–377
0–477
0–477
0–377
0–777
0–777
0–1777
0–1777
0–1777
0–3777
In the following example, every time X1 makes an off to on transition, C0 will energize for
one scan.
DS
HPP
5-20
Used
Used
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
DirectSOFT
X1
C0
PD
$
B
STR
SHFT
P
CV
1
SHFT
ENT
D
3
A
0
ENT
NOTE: To generate a “one–shot” pulse on an on–to–off transition, place a NOT instruction immediately before
the PD instruction. The DL250–1 and DL260 CPUs support the STRND instruction.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
Store Positive Differential (STRPD)
230
240
250-1
260
230
240
250-1
260
1
2
3
4
Store Negative Differential (STRND)
5
The Store Negative Differential instruction begins a
new rung or an additional branch in a rung with a
6
contact. The contact closes for one CPU scan when
the state of the associated image register point makes
an on-to-off transition. Thereafter, the contact
7
remains open until the next on-to-off transition (the
symbol inside the contact represents the transition).
8
Operand Data Type
DL250-1 Range
DL260 Range
9
aaa
aaa
10
11
12
In the following example, each time X1 is makes an off-to-on transition, Y4 will energize for one scan. 13
14
A
B
In the following example, each time X1 makes an on-to-off transition, Y4 will energize for one
scan.
C
D
The Store Positive Differential instruction begins a
Aaaa
new rung or an additional branch in a rung with a
contact. The contact closes for one CPU scan when
the state of the associated image register point makes
an off-to-on transition. Thereafter, the contact
remains open until the next off-to-on transition (the
symbol inside the contact represents the transition). This function is sometimes called a “oneshot.” ‘This contact will also close on a program-to-run transition if it is within a retentive range
and on before the PLC mode transition.
Aaaa
Inputs
Outputs
Control Relays
Stage
Timer
Counter
Global
Global
DS
HPP
A
X
Y
C
S
T
CT
GX
GY
0–777
0–777
0–1777
0–1777
0–377
0–177
–
–
0–1777
0–1777
0–3777
0–1777
0–377
0–377
0–3777
0–3777
Used
Used
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
DirectSOFT
X1
Y4
OUT
STR
SHFT
GX
OUT
P
CV
E
4
D
3
B
1
ENT
ENT
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
DirectSOFT
X1
$
Y4
OUT
$
STR
GX
OUT
SHFT
N
TMR
E
4
D
3
B
1
ENT
ENT
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5-21
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Or Positive Differential (ORPD)
230
240
250-1
260
The Or Positive Differential instruction logically ORs a
contact in parallel with another contact in a rung. The status
of the contact will be open until the associated image register
point makes an off-to-on transition, closing it for one CPU
scan. Thereafter, it remains open until another off-to-on
transition.
Aaaa
Or Negative Differential (ORND)
230
240
250-1
260
The Or Negative Differential instruction logically ORs a
contact in parallel with another contact in a rung. The status
of the contact will be open until the associated image register
point makes an on-to-off transition, closing it for one CPU
scan. Thereafter, it remains open until another on-to-off
transition.
Operand Data Type
DL250-1 Range
Inputs
Outputs
Control Relays
Stage
Timer
Counter
Global
Global
Aaaa
DL260 Range
A
aaa
aaa
X
Y
C
S
T
CT
GX
GY
0–777
0–777
0–1777
0–1777
0–377
0–177
–
–
0–1777
0–1777
0–3777
0–1777
0–377
0–377
0–3777
0–3777
In the following example, Y5 will energize whenever X1 is on, or for one CPU scan when X2
transitions from off to on.
DS Implied
HPP Used
5-22
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
DirectSOFT
X1
Y5
OUT
X2
$
B
STR
Q
OR
SHFT
P
1
CV
F
GX
OUT
5
ENT
D
3
C
2
ENT
ENT
In the following example, Y5 will energize whenever X1 is on, or for one CPU scan when X2
transitions from on to off.
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
DirectSOFT
X1
Y5
OUT
X2
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
$
B
STR
Q
OR
GX
OUT
SHFT
1
N
TMR
F
5
ENT
D
3
ENT
C
2
ENT
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
And Positive Differential (ANDPD)
1
2
3
And Negative Differential (ANDND)
4
The And Negative Differential instruction logically
ANDs a normally open contact in series with another
contact 5-23in a rung. The status of the contact will
5
be open until the associated image register point makes
an on-to-off transition, closing it for one CPU scan.
6
Thereafter, it remains open until another on-to-off transition.
Operand Data Type
DL250-1 Range
DL260 Range
7
A
aaa
aaa
8
9
10
11
In the following example, Y5 will energize for one CPU scan whenever X1 is on and X2
transitions from off to on.
12
13
14
A
In the following example, Y5 will energize for one CPU scan whenever X1 is on and X2
B
transitions from on to off.
C
D
230
240
250-1
260
The And Positive Differential instruction logically ANDs
a normally open contact in series with another contact
in a rung. The status of the contact will be open until
the associated image register point makes an off-to-on
transition, closing it for one CPU scan. Thereafter, it
remains open until another off-to-on transition.
Aaaa
Aaaa
230
240
250-1
260
Inputs
Outputs
Control Relays
Stage
Timer
Counter
Global
Global
X
Y
C
S
T
CT
GX
GY
0–777
0–777
0–1777
0–1777
0–377
0–177
–
–
0–1777
0–1777
0–3777
0–1777
0–377
0–377
0–3777
0–3777
DS Implied
HPP Used
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
DirectSOFT
X1
X2
Y5
OUT
$
B
STR
V
AND
SHFT
1
CV
F
GX
OUT
5
ENT
D
3
C
2
ENT
ENT
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
DirectSOFT
X1
P
X2
Y5
OUT
$
B
STR
V
AND
GX
OUT
SHFT
1
N
TMR
F
5
ENT
D
3
C
2
ENT
ENT
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5-23
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Set (SET)
The Set instruction sets or turns on an image register
point/memory location or a consecutive range of image
register points/memory locations. Once the point/
location is set, it will remain on until it is reset using
the Reset instruction. It is not necessary for the input
controlling the Set instruction to remain on.
240
250-1
260
230
Reset (RST)
240
250-1
260
The Reset instruction resets or turns off an image register
point/memory location or a range of image registers
points/memory locations. Once the point/location is
reset, it is not necessary for the input to remain on.
230
Operand Data Type
Optional
memory range
A aaa
aaa
SET
Optional
Memory
range
.
A aaa
aaa
RST
DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250-1 Range DL260 Range
A
aaa
aaa
Inputs
X
0–177
0–477
Outputs
Y
0-177
0-477
Control Relays
C
0–377
0–377
Stage
S
0-377
0-777
Timer*
T
0-77
0-177
Counter *
CT
0-77
0-177
Global
GX
Global
GY
* Timer and counter operand data types are not valid using the Set instruction
aaa
aaa
0–777
0-777
0–1777
0-1777
0-377
0-177
-
0–1777
0-1777
0–3777
0-1777
0-377
0-377
0–3777
0–3777
NOTE: You cannot set inputs (Xs) that are assigned to input modules
In the following example, when X1 is on, Y2 through Y5 will energize.
DS
HPP
5-24
Used
Used
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
DirectSOFT
X1
Y2
Y5
SET
$
STR
X
SET
B
C
1
ENT
F
2
5
ENT
In the following example, when X2 is on, Y2 through Y5 will be reset or de–energized.
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
DirectSOFT
X2
Y2
Y5
RST
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
$
STR
S
RST
C
C
2
2
ENT
F
5
ENT
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
Set Bit-of-Word (SETB)
Aaaa.bb
SET
230 The Set Bit-of-Word instruction sets or turns on a bit in a V-memory
Once the bit is set, it will remain on until it is reset using
240 location.
the Reset Bit-of-Word instruction. It is not necessary for the input
250-1 controlling the Set Bit-of-Word instruction to remain on.
260 Reset Bit-of-Word (RSTB)
230
240
250-1
260
Operand Data Type
DL250-1 Range
Used
Used
DL260 Range
A
aaa
aaa
bb
bb
B See memory map BCD, 0 to 15 See memory map BCD, 0 to 15
PB See memory map
BCD
See memory map
BCD
V-memory
Pointer
DS
HPP
A aaa.bb
RST
The Reset Bit-of-Word instruction resets or turns off a bit in a
V-memory location. Once the bit is reset, it is not necessary for the
input to remain on.
In the following example, when X1 turns on, bit 1 in V1400 is set to the on state.
DirectSOFT
X1
B1400.1
SET
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
STR
1
SET
SHFT
B
K
1
ENT
V
1
4
0
0
ENT
In the following example, when X2 turns on, bit 1 in V1400 is reset to the off state.
DirectSOFT
X2
B1400.1
RST
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
STR
RST
2
SHFT
B
K
1
ENT
V
1
4
0
0
ENT
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-25
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Pause (PAUSE)
230
240
250-1
260
The Pause instruction disables the output update on a
range of outputs. The ladder program will continue to
run and update the image register; however, the outputs
in the range specified in the Pause instruction will be
turned off at the output points.
Operand Data Type
Y aaa
aaa
PAUSE
DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250-1 Range DL260 Range
Outputs
Y
aaa
aaa
aaa
aaa
0-177
0-477
0-777
0-1777
In the following example, when X1 is ON, Y5–Y7 will be turned OFF. The execution of the
ladder program will not be affected.
DS
HPP
5-26
Used
Used
DirectSOFT
X1
Y5
Y7
PAUSE
Since the D2–HPP Handheld Programmer does not have a specific Pause key, you can use the
corresponding instruction number for entry (#960) or type each letter of the command.
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
$
B
STR
O
INST#
J
9
G
1
6
ENT
A
0
ENT
ENT
F
5
H
7
ENT
In some cases, you may want certain output points in the specified pause range to operate
normally. In that case, use Aux 58 to override the Pause instruction.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
Comparative Boolean
1
A aaa B bbb
The Store If Equal instruction begins a new rung or
2
additional branch in a rung with a normally open
comparative contact. The contact will be on when Vaaa
equals Bbbb .
3
Store If Not Equal (STRNE)
A aaa B bbb
4
The
Store
If
Not
Equal
instruction
begins
a
new
rung
or additional branch in a rung with a normally closed
comparative contact. The contact will be on when Vaaa
5
does not equal Bbbb.
6
Operand Data
DL230
Range
DL240
Range
DL250-1
Range
DL260
Range
Type
7
A/B
aaa
bbb
aaa
bbb
aaa
bbb
aaa
bbb
8
9
10
In the following example, when the value in V-memory location V2000 = 4933 , Y3 will
11
energize.
12
13
14
In the following example, when the value in V-memory location V2000 =/ 5060, Y3 will energize. A
B
C
D
Store If Equal (STRE)
230
240
250-1
260
230
240
250-1
260
All. (See
All. (See
All. (See
All. (See
All. (See
V memory map memory map memory map memory map memory map
page 3-53) page 3-53) page 3-54) page 3-54) page 3-54)
All. (See
P
–
–
–
memory map
–
page 3-54)
V-memory
Pointer
Constant
K
–
0-FFFF
–
0-FFFF
All. (See
All. (See
memory map memory map
page 3-55) page 3-56)
All. (See
memory map
–
page 3-55)
–
0-FFFF
All. (See
memory map
page 3-56)
All. (See
memory map
page 3-56)
–
0-FFFF
DS Implied
HPP Used
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
DirectSOFT
V2000
K4933
Y3
OUT
$
STR
SHFT
E
E
J
4
GX
OUT
9
3
D
3
D
2
3
A
0
A
0
A
0
ENT
ENT
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
DirectSOFT
V2000
D
C
4
K5060
Y3
OUT
SP
STRN
GX
OUT
SHFT
E
F
A
5
D
C
4
0
3
G
6
A
2
0
A
0
A
0
A
0
ENT
ENT
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5-27
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Or If Equal (ORE)
The Or If Equal instruction connects a normally open
comparative contact in parallel with another contact.
The contact will be on when Vaaa equals Bbbb.
230
240
250-1
260
A aaa
B bbb
A aaa
B bbb
Or If Not Equal (ORNE)
230
240
250-1
260
The Or If Not Equal instruction connects a normally
closed comparative contact in parallel with another
contact. The contact will be on when Vaaa does not
equal Bbbb.
Operand Data
Type
A/B
DL230 Range
DL240 Range
DL250-1 Range
DL260 Range
aaa
aaa
aaa
bbb
aaa
0-FFFF
–
bbb
bbb
All. (See
All. (See
All. (See
All. (See
All. (See
V memory map memory map memory map memory map memory map
page 3-53) page 3-53) page 3-54) page 3-54) page 3-55)
All. (See
P
–
–
–
memory map
–
page 3-54)
V-memory
Pointer
Constant
K
–
0-FFFF
–
0-FFFF
All. (See
All. (See
memory map memory map
page 3-55) page 3-56)
All. (See
memory map
–
page 3-55)
–
bbb
All. (See
memory map
page 3-56)
All. (See
memory map
page 3-56)
0-FFFF
In the following example, when the value in V-memory location V2000 = 4500 or V2202 =
2345, Y3 will energize.
DS Implied
HPP Used
DirectSOFT
V2000
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
K4500
Y3
OUT
V2002
$
STR
E
Q
K2345
C
4
OR
2
E
A
5
SHFT
E
D
E
3
GX
OUT
D
C
4
0
A
0
4
3
F
5
A
0
A
0
A
0
ENT
C
4
2
2
A
0
A
0
C
2
ENT
ENT
In the following example, when the value in V-memory location V2000 = 3916 or V2002 =/
2500, Y3 will energize.
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
DirectSOFT
V2000
K3916
Y3
OUT
V2002
K2500
$
STR
D
3
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
SHFT
E
J
B
9
R
ORN
SHFT
E
C
F
A
2
GX
OUT
5-28
SHFT
F
5
D
C
4
1
G
6
0
3
A
0
ENT
A
0
A
0
A
0
ENT
C
4
2
2
ENT
A
0
A
0
C
2
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
And If Equal (ANDE)
1
2
And If Not Equal (ANDNE)
The And If Not Equal instruction connects a normally
3
closed comparative contact in series with another contact.
A aaa B bbb
The contact will be on when Vaaa does not equal Bbbb
4
In the following example, when the value in V-memory
location V2000 = 5000 and V2002 = 2345, Y3 will
energize.
5
Operand
DL230 Range
DL240 Range
DL250-1 Range
DL260 Range
Data Type
6
A/B
aaa
bbb
aaa
bbb
aaa
bbb
aaa
bbb
7
8
9
10
In the following example, when the value in V-memory location V2000 = 5000 and V2002 =/
2345, Y3 will energize.
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
The And If Equal instruction connects a normally open
comparative contact in series with another contact. The
contact will be on when Vaaa equals Bbbb.
240
250-1
260
230
A aaa
B bbb
230
240
250-1
260
V-memory
Pointer
Constant
All. (See
All. (See
All. (See
All. (See
All. (See
All. (See
All. (See
All. (See
V memory map memory map memory map memory map memory map memory map memory map memory map
page 3-53) page 3-53) page 3-54) page 3-54)
page 3-55)
page 3-55)
page 3-56)
page 3-56)
All V-memory.
All V-memory.
All V-memory.
(See memory
(See memory
(See memory
P
–
–
–
–
–
map page
map page
map page
3-54)
3-55)
3-56)
K
–
0-FFFF
–
0-FFFF
–
0-FFFF
–
0-FFFF
DS Implied
HPP Used
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
DirectSOFT
V2000
K5000
V2002
K2345
$
Y3
OUT
SHFT
E
A
A
STR
F
5
0
V
AND
SHFT
E
C
D
E
2
3
GX
OUT
0
A
C
4
F
A
0
A
0
A
0
ENT
0
4
D
2
2
A
0
A
0
C
2
ENT
5
ENT
3
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
DirectSOFT
V2000
C
4
K5000
V2002
K2345
Y3
OUT
$
STR
F
5
SHFT
E
A
A
0
W
ANDN
SHFT
E
C
D
E
2
GX
OUT
3
D
C
4
0
A
0
4
3
F
5
A
0
A
0
A
0
ENT
C
4
2
2
A
0
A
0
C
2
ENT
ENT
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5-29
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Store (STR)
The Comparative Store instruction begins a new rung or additional
230
branch in a rung with a normally open comparative contact. The
240
250-1 contact will be on when Aaaa is equal to or greater than Bbbb.
260 Store Not (STRN)
The Comparative Store Not instruction begins a new rung or
additional branch in a rung with a normally open comparative
contact. The contact will be on when Aaaa is less than Bbbb.
230
240
250-1
260
Operand
Data Type
DL230 Range
A/B
V-memory
Pointer
Constant
aaa
bbb
DL240 Range
aaa
A aaa
B bbb
A aaa
B bbb
DL250-1 Range
bbb
aaa
DL260 Range
bbb
aaa
bbb
All. (See
All. (See
All. (See
All. (See
All. (See
All. (See
All. (See
All. (See
V memory map memory map memory map memory map memory map memory map memory map memory map
page 3-53) page 3-53) page 3-54)
page 3-54)
page 3-55)
page 3-55)
page 3-56)
page 3-56)
All V-memory.
All V-memory.
All V-memory.
(See memory
(See memory
(See memory
P
–
–
–
–
–
map page
map page
map page
3-54)
3-55)
3-56)
K
–
0-FFFF
–
0-FFFF
–
0-FFFF
–
0-FFFF
In the following example, when the value in V-memory location V2000 M 1000, Y3 will
energize.
DS Implied
HPP Used
5-30
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
DirectSOFT
V2000
K1000
Y3
OUT
$
STR
B
1
GX
OUT
SHFT
V
AND
C
A
A
A
D
0
3
0
2
0
A
0
A
0
A
0
ENT
ENT
In the following example, when the value in V-memory location V2000 < 4050, Y3 will
energize.
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
DirectSOFT
V2000
K4050
Y3
OUT
SP
STRN
E
GX
OUT
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
4
SHFT
V
AND
C
A
F
A
D
0
3
5
ENT
2
0
A
0
ENT
A
0
A
0
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
Or (OR)
1
2
Or Not (ORN)
3
The Comparative Or Not instruction connects a normally
open comparative contact in parallel with another contact.
4
The contact will be on when Aaaa is less than Bbbb.
Operand
5
DL230 Range
DL240 Range
DL250-1 Range
DL260 Range
Data Type
A/B
aaa
bbb
aaa
bbb
aaa
bbb
aaa
bbb
6
7
8
9
In the following example, when the value in V-memory location V2000 = 6045 or
V2002 M 2345, Y3 will energize.
10
11
12
13
14
In the following example when the value in V-memory location V2000 = 1000 or
V2002 < 2500, Y3 will energize.
A
B
C
D
The Comparative Or instruction connects a normally open
comparative contact in parallel with another contact. The
contact will be on when Aaaa is equal to or greater than
Bbbb.
230
240
250-1
260
A aaa
B bbb
A aaa
B bbb
230
240
250-1
260
V-memory
Pointer
Constant
All. (See
All. (See
All. (See
All. (See
All. (See
All. (See
All. (See
All. (See
V memory map memory map memory map memory map memory map memory map memory map memory map
page 3-53) page 3-53) page 3-54)
page 3-54)
page 3-55)
page 3-55)
page 3-56)
page 3-56)
All V-memory.
All V-memory.
All V-memory.
(See memory
(See memory
(See memory
P
–
–
–
–
–
map page
map page
map page
3-54)
3-55)
3-56)
K
–
0-FFFF
–
0-FFFF
–
0-FFFF
–
0-FFFF
DS Implied
HPP Used
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
DirectSOFT
V2000
K6045
Y3
OUT
V2002
$
STR
G
Q
K2345
C
6
SHFT
E
A
E
0
OR
2
D
3
GX
OUT
K1000
Y3
OUT
V2002
4
F
5
SHFT
V
AND
E
F
D
4
5
2
A
0
A
0
A
0
ENT
C
2
A
0
A
0
C
2
ENT
ENT
3
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
DirectSOFT
V2000
C
4
K2500
$
STR
B
1
SHFT
E
A
A
0
R
ORN
C
2
GX
OUT
F
5
C
4
0
A
0
SHFT
V
AND
A
A
D
0
3
0
2
A
0
A
0
A
0
ENT
C
2
A
0
A
0
C
2
ENT
ENT
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5-31
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
And (AND)
230
240
250-1
260
230
240
250-1
260
The Comparative And instruction connects a normally
open comparative contact in series with another contact.
The contact will be on when Aaaa is equal to or greater
than Bbbb.
And Not (ANDN)
The Comparative And Not instruction connects a normally
open comparative contact in series with another contact.
The contact will be on when Aaaa < Bbbb.
Operand
Data Type
DL230 Range
A/B
V-memory
Pointer
Constant
aaa
DL240 Range
bbb
aaa
DL250-1 Range
bbb
aaa
A aaa
B bbb
A aaa
B bbb
DL260 Range
bbb
aaa
bbb
All (See
All (See
All (See
All (See
All (See
All (See
All (See
All (See
V memory map memory map memory map memory map memory map memory map memory map memory map
page 3-53) page 3-53) page 3-54)
page 3-54)
page 3-55)
page 3-55)
page 3-56)
page 3-56)
All V-memory
All V-memory
All V-memory
(See memory
(See memory
(See memory
P
map page
map page
map page
3-54)
3-55)
3-56)
K
0-FFFF
0-FFFF
0-FFFF
0-FFFF
In the following example, when the value in V-memory location V2000 = 5000, and V2002
M 2345, Y3 will energize.
DS Implied
HPP Used
5-32
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
DirectSOFT
V2000
K5000
V2002
K2345
Y3
OUT
$
STR
F
5
SHFT
E
A
A
0
V
AND
C
2
D
3
GX
OUT
C
4
0
A
V
AND
E
F
D
4
A
0
A
0
A
0
ENT
0
SHFT
2
C
2
A
0
A
0
C
2
ENT
5
ENT
3
In the following example, when the value in V-memory location V2000 = 7000 and
V2002 < 2500, Y3 will energize.
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
DirectSOFT
V2000
K7000
V2002
K2500
Y3
OUT
$
STR
H
7
SHFT
E
A
A
0
W
ANDN
C
2
GX
OUT
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
F
5
C
4
0
A
0
SHFT
V
AND
A
A
D
0
3
0
ENT
2
A
0
A
0
A
0
ENT
C
2
ENT
A
0
A
0
C
2
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
Immediate Instructions
Store Immediate (STRI)
230
240
250-1
260
The Store Immediate instruction begins a new rung or
additional branch in a rung. The status of the contact
will be the same as the status of the associated input point
at the time the instruction is executed. The image register
is not updated.
X aaa
Store Not Immediate (STRNI)
240
250-1
260
230
X aaa
The Store Not Immediate instruction begins a new rung
or additional branch in a rung. The status of the contact
will be opposite the status of the associated input point at
the time the instruction is executed. The image register is
not updated.
Operand Data Type
Inputs
DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250-1 Range DL260 Range
X
aaa
aaa
aaa
aaa
0–177
0–477
0–777
0–1777
In the following example, when X1 is on, Y2 will energize.
DS Implied
HPP Used
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
DirectSOFT
X1
$
Y2
OUT
STR
SHFT
GX
OUT
I
B
8
C
2
1
ENT
ENT
In the following example, when X1 is off, Y2 will energize.
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
DirectSOFT
X1
Y2
OUT
SP
STRN
GX
OUT
SHFT
I
C
B
8
2
ENT
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
ENT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-33
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Or Immediate (ORI)
240
250-1
260
The Or Immediate connects two contacts in parallel. The
status of the contact will be the same as the status of the
associated input point at the time the instruction is executed.
The image register is not updated.
230
X aaa
Or Not Immediate (ORNI)
230
240
250-1
260
The Or Not Immediate connects two contacts in parallel.
The status of the contact will be opposite the status of the
associated input point at the time the instruction is executed.
The image register is not updated.
Operand Data Type
Inputs
X aaa
DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250-1 Range DL260 Range
X
aaa
aaa
aaa
aaa
0–177
0–477
0–777
0–1777
In the following example, when X1 or X2 is on, Y5 will energize.
DS Implied
HPP Used
5-34
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
DirectSOFT
X1
Y5
$
OUT
Q
X2
B
STR
OR
SHFT
GX
OUT
I
F
1
ENT
C
8
5
2
ENT
ENT
In the following example, when X1 is on or X2 is off, Y5 will energize.
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
DirectSOFT
X1
Y5
OUT
X2
$
R
ORN
GX
OUT
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
B
STR
SHFT
I
F
1
ENT
C
8
5
ENT
2
ENT
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
And Immediate (ANDI)
240
250-1
260
230
230
240
250-1
260
The And Immediate connects two contacts in series. The
status of the contact will be the same as the status of the
associated input point at the time the instruction is executed.
The image register is not updated.
X aaa
And Not Immediate (ANDNI)
The And Not Immediate connects two contacts in series.
The status of the contact will be opposite the status of the
associated input point at the time the instruction is executed.
The image register is not updated.
Operand Data Type
Inputs
X aaa
DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250-1 Range DL260 Range
X
aaa
aaa
aaa
aaa
0–177
0–477
0–777
0–1777
In the following example, when X1 and X2 are on, Y5 will energize.
DS Implied
HPP Used
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
DirectSOFT
X1
X2
Y5
OUT
$
B
STR
V
AND
SHFT
GX
OUT
I
F
1
ENT
C
8
5
2
ENT
ENT
In the following example, when X1 is on and X2 is off, Y5 will energize.
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
DirectSOFT
X1
X2
Y5
OUT
$
B
STR
W
ANDN
GX
OUT
SHFT
I
F
1
ENT
C
8
5
ENT
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
2
ENT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-35
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Out Immediate (OUTI)
230
240
250-1
260
The Out Immediate instruction reflects the status of the
rung (on/off) and outputs the discrete (on/off) status to the
specified module output point and the image register at the
time the instruction is executed. If multiple Out Immediate
instructions referencing the same discrete point are used, it
is possible for the module output status to change multiple
times in a CPU scan. See Or Out Immediate.
Y aaa
OUTI
Or Out Immediate (OROUTI)
240
250-1
260
230
The Or Out Immediate instruction has been designed
to use more than one rung of discrete logic to control a
single output. Multiple Or Out Immediate instructions
referencing the same output coil may be used, since all
contacts controlling the output are ORed together. If
the status of any rung is on at the time the instruction is
executed, the output will also be on.
Operand Data Type
Outputs
Y aaa
OROUTI
DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250-1 Range DL260 Range
Y
aaa
aaa
aaa
aaa
0–177
0–477
0–777
0–1777
In the following example, when X1 is on, output point Y2 on the output module will turn
on. For instruction entry on the Handheld Programmer, you can use the instruction number
(#350) as shown, or type each letter of the command.
DS
HPP
5-36
Used
Used
DirectSOFT
X1
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
Y2
OUTI
$
B
STR
O
INST#
D
C
G
3
ENT
1
A
6
ENT
0
ENT
ENT
2
In the following example, when X1 or X4 is on, Y2 will energize.
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
DirectSOFT
X1
Y2
OR OUTI
X4
$
O
INST#
D
C
Y2
OR OUTI
B
STR
$
2
F
D
C
3
2
5
ENT
A
0
ENT
ENT
ENT
ENT
ENT
E
STR
O
INST#
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
3
1
F
4
5
ENT
ENT
A
0
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
Out Immediate Formatted (OUTIF)
230
240
250-1
260
1
2
Operand Data Type
DL260 Range
3
aaa
bbb
4
In the following example, when C0 is on,the binary pattern for X10 –X17 is loaded into the 5
accumulator using the Load Immediate Formatted instruction. The binary pattern in the
accumulator is written to Y30–Y37 using the Out Immediate Formatted instruction. This
6
technique is useful to quickly copy an input pattern to outputs (without waiting for the CPU
scan).
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
The Out Immediate Formatted instruction outputs a 1 to
32 bit binary value from the accumulator to specified output
points at the time the instruction is executed. Accumulator bits
that are not used by the instruction are set to zero.
Outputs
Constant
DS
HPP
Used
Used
DirectSOFT
CO
Y
K
LDIF
0–1777
–
X10
Location
K8
X17 X16 X15 X14 X13 X12 X11 X10
K8
ON OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF ON
Unused accumulator bits
are set to zero
Acc.
OUTIF
–
1–32
Constant
X10
Load the value of 8
consecutive locations into the
accumulator, starting with X10.
Y aaa
OUTIF
K bbb
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
8
7 6 5
4 3
2
1
0
0
0
1 0
1
1 0
1
0
0
0 0
0
0
0
0 0
0
0
0
0 0
0
0
0
0
0 0
0
0
1
0
Y30
K8
Copy the value in the lower
8 bits of the accumulator to
Y30-Y37
Location
Y30
Constant
Y37 Y36 Y35 Y34 Y33 Y32 Y31 Y30
K8
ON OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF ON
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
$
STR
NEXT
NEXT
NEXT
I
F
SHFT
L
ANDST
D
GX
OUT
SHFT
I
3
8
F
8
5
NEXT
A
B
5
D
3
A
0
1
0
ENT
A
I
0
I
8
8
ENT
ENT
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5-37
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Set Immediate (SETI)
The Set Immediate instruction immediately sets or
turns on an output or a range of outputs in the image
register and the corresponding output point(s) at the
time the instruction is executed. Once the outputs are
set, it is not necessary for the input to remain on. The
Reset Immediate instruction can be used to reset the
outputs.
230
240
250-1
260
Y aaa
aaa
SETI
Reset Immediate (RSTI)
The Reset Immediate instruction immediately resets
or turns off an output or a range of outputs in the
image register and the output point(s) at the time the
instruction is executed. Once the outputs are reset, it is
not necessary for the input to remain on.
240
250-1
260
230
Operand Data Type
Outputs
Y aaa
aaa
RSTI
DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250-1 Range DL260 Range
Y
aaa
aaa
aaa
aaa
0–177
0–477
0–777
0–1777
In the following example, when X1 is on, Y2 through Y5 will be set on in the image register
and on the corresponding output points.
DS
HPP
Used
Used
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
DirectSOFT
X1
Y2
$
Y5
SETI
B
STR
X
SET
I
SHFT
1
ENT
C
8
F
2
ENT
5
In the following example, when X1 is on, Y5 through Y22 will be reset (off) in the image
register and on the corresponding output module(s).
DirectSOFT
5-38
X1
Y5
Y22
RSTI
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
$
B
STR
S
RST
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
SHFT
I
1
8
ENT
F
5
C
2
C
2
ENT
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
Load Immediate (LDI)
230
240
250-1
260
1
2
3
Operand Data Type
DL260 Range
aaaaa
4
5
In the following example, when C0 is on, the binary pattern of X0–X17 will be loaded into the
accumulator using the Load Immediate instruction. The Out Immediate instruction could be
6
used to copy the 16 bits in the accumulator to output points, such as Y40–Y57. This technique
is useful to quickly copy an input pattern to output points (without waiting for a full CPU
7
scan to occur).
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
The Load Immediate instruction loads a 16-bit V-memory value
into the accumulator. The valid address range includes all input
point addresses on the local base. The value reflects the current
status of the input points at the time the instruction is executed.
This instruction may be used instead of the LDIF instruction,
which requires you to specify the number of input points.
Inputs V-memory
DS
HPP
Used
Used
DirectSOFT
C0
V
Location
LDI
Load the inputs from X0 to
X17 into the accumulator,
immediately
V aaa
40400–40477
X17 X16 X15 X14 X13 X12 X11 X10
V40400
V40400
LDI
X7
X6
X5
X4
X3
X2
X1
X0
ON OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF ON
Unused accumulator bits
are set to zero
Acc.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
8
7 6 5
4 3
2
1
0
0
0
1 0
1
1 0
1
0
0
0 0
0
0
0
0 0
0
0
0
0 0
0
1
0
1
1 0
1
0
1
0
OUTI
V40502
Output the value in the
accumulator to output points
Y40 to Y57
Location
Y57 Y56 Y55 Y54 Y53 Y52 Y51 Y50 Y47 Y46 Y45 Y44 Y43 Y42 Y41 Y40
ON OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF ON
V40502
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
$
SHFT
C
SHFT
L
ANDST
D
I
GX
OUT
SHFT
I
STR
3
8
A
2
0
ENT
E
8
NEXT
E
4
4
A
A
0
0
E
F
4
5
A
A
0
0
A
C
0
2
ENT
ENT
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5-39
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Load Immediate Formatted (LDIF)
230
240
250-1
260
The Load Immediate Formatted instruction loads a 1–32 bit binary
value into the accumulator. The value reflects the current status of the
input module(s) at the time the instruction is executed. Accumulator
bits that are not used by the instruction are set to zero.
Operand Data Type
X aaa
LDIF
K bbb
DL260 Range
Intputs
Constant
X
K
aaa
bbb
0–1777
–
–
1–32
In the following example, when C0 is on, the binary pattern of X10–X17 will be loaded into
the accumulator using the Load Immediate Formatted instruction. The Out Immediate
Formatted instruction could be used to copy the specified number of bits in the accumulator
to the specified outputs on the output module, such as Y30–Y37. This technique is useful to
quickly copy an input pattern to outputs (without waiting for the CPU scan).
DS
HPP
Used
Used
DirectSOFT
5-40
C0
LDIF
X10
K8
Load the value of 8
consecutive locations into the
accumulator starting with
X10
Constant
K8
X17 X16 X15 X14 X13 X12 X11 X10
ON OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF ON
Unused accumulator bits
are set to zero
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
8
7 6 5
4 3
2
1
0
0
0
1 0
1
1 0
1
Acc.
OUTIF
Location
X10
0
0
0 0
0
0
0
0 0
0
0
0
0 0
0
0
0
0
0 0
0
0
1
0
Y30
K8
Copy the value of the lower
8 bits of the accumulator to
Y30 - Y37
Location
Constant
Y37 Y36 Y35 Y34 Y33 Y32 Y31 Y30
Y30
K8
ON OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF ON
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
$
STR
SHFT
C
I
SHFT
L
ANDST
D
GX
OUT
SHFT
I
3
8
F
A
2
8
5
F
0
ENT
B
5
D
3
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
A
1
0
A
I
0
I
8
8
ENT
ENT
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
Timer, Counter and Shift Register Instructions
1
Timers are used to time an event for a desired length of time. The single input timer will time
as long as the input is on. When the input changes from on to off, the timer current value 2
is reset to 0. There is a tenth of a second and a hundredth of a second timer available with a
maximum time of 999.9 and 99.99 seconds respectively. A discrete bit is associated with each 3
timer to indicate that the current value is equal to or greater than the preset value. The timing
diagram below shows the relationship between the timer input, associated discrete bit, current
4
value, and timer preset.
5
6
Timer Preset
7
8
9
Some applications that need an accumulating timer, meaning it has the ability to time, stop,
and then resume from where it previously stopped. The accumulating timer works similarly 10
to the regular timer, but two inputs are required. The enable input starts and stops the timer.
When the timer stops, the elapsed time is maintained. When the timer starts again, the timing 11
continues from the elapsed time. When the reset input is turned on, the elapsed time is cleared
and the timer will start at 0 when it is restarted. A tenth of a second and a hundredth of
a second timers are available with a maximum time of 9999999.9 and 999999.99 seconds 12
respectively. The timing diagram below shows the relationship between the timer input, timer
reset, associated discrete bit, current value, and timer preset.
13
14
A
B
C
D
Using Timers
0
1
2
3
Seconds
4
5
6
7
8
X1
TMR
T1
K30
X1
T1
T1
0
Current
Value
0
1
10
20
2
3
30
40
1/10 Seconds
Seconds
4
5
50
60
6
7
Y0
OUT
0
8
X1
TMRA
Enable
X1
T0
K30
X2
X2
Reset Input
T0
Current
Value
0
10
10
20
30
1/10 Seconds
40
50
0
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5-41
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Timer (TMR) and Timer Fast (TMRF)
230
240
250-1
260
DS Used
HPP Used
The Timer instruction is a 0.1 second single-input timer
that times to a maximum of 999.9 seconds. The Timer Fast
instruction is a 0.01 second single input timer that times up
to a maximum of 99.99 seconds. These timers will be enabled
if the input logic is true (on) and will be reset to 0 if the input
logic is false (off).
T aaa
TMR
B bbb
Preset
Timer#
Instruction Specifications
Timer Reference (Taaa): Specifies the timer number.
TMRF
T aaa
Preset Value (Bbbb): Constant value (K) or a V-memory
B bbb
location. (Pointer (P) for DL240, DL250-1 and DL260).
Current Value: Timer current values are accessed by
Timer#
referencing the associated V or T memory location.* For Preset
example, the timer current value for T3 physically resides in
V-memory location V3.
Discrete Status Bit: The discrete status bit is referenced by the
associated T memory location. It will be on if the current value is equal to or greater than the
preset value. For example, the discrete status bit for Timer 2 would be T2.
NOTE: A V-memory preset is required only if the ladder program or an Operator Interface unit must change
the preset.
Operand Data
Type
DL230 Range
B
aaa
Timers
T
V-memory for
preset values V
Pointers
(presets only) P
Constants
(presets only) K
Timer discrete
status bits T/V*
Timer current
values
V/T*
0-77
5-42
–
bbb
DL240 Range
aaa
bbb
0-177
2000-2377
–
DL250-1 Range
aaa
0-377
2000-3777
–
2000-3777
–
0-9999
–
0-9999
bbb
1400-7377
10000-17777
1400-7377
10000-17777
–
0-9999
DL260 Range
aaa
0-377
–
bbb
1400-7377
10000-37777
1400-7377
10000-37777
–
0-9999
0-77 or V41100-41103
0-177 or V41100-41107
0-377 or V41100-41117
0-377 or V41100-41117
0-77
0-177
0-377
0-377
NOTE: Both the Timer discrete status bits and the current value are accessed with the same data reference
with the HPP. DirectSOFT uses separate references, such as “T2” for discrete status bit for Timer T2, and
“TA2” for the current value of Timer T2.
You can perform functions when the timer reaches the specified preset using the discrete status
bit. Or, use the comparative contacts to perform functions at different time intervals based on
one timer. The examples on the following page show these methods of programming timers.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
Timer Example Using Discrete Status Bits
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Timer Example Using Comparative Contacts
In the following example, a single-input timer is used with a preset of 4.5 seconds. Comparative 8
contacts are used to energize Y3, Y4, and Y5 at one-second intervals respectively. When X1 is
turned off, the timer will be reset to 0 and the comparative contacts will turn off Y3, Y4, and 9
Y5.
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
In the following example, a single-input timer is used with a preset of 3 seconds. The timer
discrete status bit (T2) will turn on when the timer has timed for 3 seconds. The timer is reset
when X1 turns off, turning the discrete status bit off and resetting the timer current value to 0.
Timing Diagram
DirectSOFT
X1
TMR
T2
K30
0
OUT
STR
N
TMR
$
STR
GX
OUT
B
C
D
2
T
MLR
SHFT
A
0
10
20
C
A
3
ENT
0
6
7
30
40
50
60
8
0
ENT
2
ENT
0
Timing Diagram
X1
TMR
K45
Seconds
T20
0
Y3
K10
2
3
0
10
20
4
5
6
7
30
40
50
60
8
Y3
Y4
K20
1
X1
OUT
TA20
5
1/10th Seconds
DirectSOFT
TA20
Seconds
4
Y0
Current
Value
ENT
1
3
T2
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
$
2
X1
Y0
T2
1
Y4
OUT
Y5
TA20
Y5
K30
T2
OUT
Current
Value
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
$
STR
N
TMR
$
STR
GX
OUT
$
STR
B
C
1
2
SHFT
D
3
SHFT
GX
OUT
E
$
SHFT
STR
GX
OUT
F
4
5
0
1/10th Seconds
ENT
A
E
0
T
MLR
C
2
A
4
0
F
5
ENT
B
1
A
0
ENT
ENT
T
MLR
C
2
A
0
C
2
A
0
ENT
ENT
T
MLR
C
2
A
0
D
3
A
0
ENT
ENT
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5-43
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Accumulating Timer (TMRA)
230 The Accumulating Timer is a 0.1 second two-input timer that
time to a maximum of 9999999.9. The TMRA uses two timer
240 will
registers in V-memory.
250-1
260 Accumulating Fast Timer (TMRAF)
230
240
250-1
260
DS Used
HPP Used
Enable
T aaa
TMRA
B bbb
Reset
Preset
Timer
The Accumulating Fast Timer is a 0.01 second two-input timer that
T aaa
Enable TMRAF
will time to a maximum of 999999.99. The TMRAF uses two timer
B bbb
registers in V-memory.
Reset
These timers have two inputs: an enable and a reset. The timer will
Preset
Timer
start timing when the enable is on and stop timing when the enable
is off without resetting the value to 0. The reset will reset the timer
when on and allow the timer to time when off.
Instruction Specifications
Timer Reference (Taaa): Specifies the timer number.
Preset Value (Bbbb): Constant value (K) or two consecutive V-memory locations. (Pointer (P)
for DL240, DL250-1 and DL260).
Current Value: Timer current values are accessed by referencing the associated V or T memory
location. For example, the timer current value for T3 resides in V-memory location V3.
Discrete Status Bit: The discrete status bit is accessed by referencing the associated T memory
location. It will be on if the current value is equal to or greater than the preset value. For
example, the discrete status bit for Timer 2 would be T2.
NOTE: The accumulating timer uses two consecutive V-memory locations for the 8-digit value; therefore,
two consecutive timer locations. For example, if TMRA T1 is used, the next available timer number is T3.
NOTE: A V-memory preset is required only if the ladder program or an OIT must be used to change the preset.
Operand Data
Type
DL230 Range
B
aaa
Timers
T
V-memory for
preset values V
Pointers
(presets only) P
Constants
(presets only) K
Timer discrete
status bits T/V*
Timer current
values
V/T*
0-76
5-44
–
bbb
DL240 Range
aaa
bbb
0-176
2000-2377
–
DL250-1 Range
aaa
0-376
2000-3777
–
2000-3777
–
0-99999999
–
0-99999999
–
bbb
1400-7377
10000-17777
1400-7377
10000-17777
0-99999999
DL260 Range
aaa
0-376
–
–
bbb
1400-7377
10000-37777
1400-7377
10000-37777
0-99999999
0-76 or V41100-41103
0-176 or V41100-41107
0-376 or V41100-41117
0-376 or V41100-41117
0-76
0-176
0-376
0-376
NOTE: * Both the Timer discrete status bits and the current value are accessed with the same data reference
with the HPP. DirectSOFT uses separate references, such as “T2” for discrete status bit for Timer T2, and
“TA2” for the current value of Timer T2.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
Accumulating Timer Example using Discrete Status Bits
In the following example, a two input timer (accumulating timer) is used with a preset of three
seconds. The timer discrete status bit (T6) will turn on when the timer has timed for three
seconds. Notice in this example that the timer times for one second, stops for one second, then
resumes timing. The timer will reset when C10 turns on, turning the discrete status bit off and
resetting the timer current value to zero.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Accumulator Timer Example Using Comparative Contacts
In the following example, a two-input timer is used with a preset of 4.5 seconds. Comparative
contacts are used to energize Y3, Y4, and Y5 at one-second intervals respectively. The 9
comparative contacts will turn off when the timer is reset.
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Timing Diagram
DirectSOFT
X1
TMRA
0
T6
2
3
Seconds
4
5
6
7
0
10
10
20
30
40
50
8
X1
K30
C10
1
C10
T6
Y10
T6
OUT
Current
Value
1/10th Seconds
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
$
$
B
STR
C
SHFT
STR
N
TMR
A
SHFT
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes (cont’d)
D
ENT
1
0
B
2
G
0
A
1
$
ENT
0
A
3
ENT
0
STR
GX
OUT
6
SHFT
T
MLR
B
A
1
0
G
ENT
6
ENT
Contacts
DirectSOFT
Timing Diagram
X1
TMRA
0
T20
K45
C10
1
2
3
Seconds
4
5
6
7
0
10
10
20
30
40
50
8
X1
C10
TA20
K10 TA21
Y3
K0
Y3
OUT
Y4
TA21
K1
TA20
K20 TA21
TA21
K1
TA20
K30 TA21
Y5
Y4
K0
T20
OUT
Current
Value
1/10th Seconds
Y5
K1
0
OUT
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
$
$
SHFT
A
V
AND
SHFT
Q
OR
SHFT
E
E
D
C
2
$
B
C
T
MLR
4
4
3
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes (cont’d)
ENT
0
SHFT
STR
GX
OUT
1
SHFT
STR
N
TMR
$
B
STR
ENT
C
1
2
2
A
A
A
0
SHFT
ENT
Q
OR
SHFT
ENT
GX
OUT
ENT
E
0
B
0
SHFT
T
MLR
C
SHFT
T
MLR
C
2
2
B
B
4
1
1
1
F
A
5
0
SHFT
STR
V
AND
A
B
0
1
ENT
$
ENT
V
AND
E
E
SHFT
E
F
T
MLR
4
4
4
SHFT
STR
GX
OUT
E
2
A
C
0
SHFT
T
MLR
C
SHFT
T
MLR
C
C
A
2
2
B
B
2
A
0
ENT
A
1
B
1
0
1
ENT
ENT
ENT
T
MLR
2
SHFT
4
5
C
D
0
T
MLR
C
2
B
3
A
0
1
ENT
B
1
ENT
ENT
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5-45
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Counter (CNT)
230
240
250-1
260
DS Used
HPP Used
Counter#
The Counter is a two-input counter that increments
when the count input logic transitions from off to
Count CNT
CT aaa
on. When the counter reset input is on, the counter
B bbb
resets to zero. When the current value equals the preset
Reset
value, the counter status bit comes on and the counter
continues to count up to a maximum count of 9999.
The maximum value will be held until the counter is
Preset
reset.
Instruction Specifications
Counter Reference (CTaaa): Specifies the counter number.
Preset Value (Bbbb): Constant value (K) or a V-memory location. (Pointer (P) for DL240,
DL250-1 and DL260.)
Current Values: Counter current values are accessed by referencing the associated V or CT
memory locations. The V-memory location is the counter location + 1000. For example, the
counter current value for CT3 resides in V-memory location V1003.
Discrete Status Bit: The discrete status bit is accessed by referencing the associated CT memory
location. It will be on if the value is equal to or greater than the preset value. For example, the
discrete status bit for Counter 2 would be CT2.
NOTE: A V-memory preset is required only if the ladder program or an OIT must used to change the preset
Operand Data
Type
DL230 Range
B
aaa
Counters
CT
V-memory for
preset values V
Pointers
(presets only) P
Constants
(presets only) K
Counter discrete
status bits CT/V*
Counter current
values
V/CT*
0-77
5-46
–
bbb
DL240 Range
aaa
bbb
0-177
2000-2377
–
DL250-1 Range
aaa
0-177
2000-3777
–
2000-3777
–
0-9999
–
0-9999
–
bbb
1400-7377
10000-17777
1400-7377
10000-17777
0-9999
DL260 Range
aaa
0-377
–
–
bbb
1400-7377
10000-37777
1400-7377
10000-37777
0-9999
0-77 or V41140-41143
0-177 or V41140-41147
0-177 or V41140-41147
0-377 or V41100-41157
1000-1077
1000-1177
1000-1177
1000-1377
NOTE: * Both the Counter discrete status bits and the current value are accessed with the same data reference
with the HPP. DirectSOFT uses separate references, such as “CT2” for discrete status bit for Counter CT2,
and “CTA2” for the current value of Counter CT2.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
Counter Example Using Discrete Status Bits
In the following example, when X1 makes an off-to-on transition, counter CT2 will increment
by one. When the current value reaches the preset value of 3, the counter status bit CT2 will
turn on and energize Y7. When the reset C10 turns on, the counter status bit will turn off
and the current value will be 0. The current value for counter CT2 will be held in V-memory
location V1002.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Counter Example Using Comparative Contacts
9
In the following example, when X1 makes an off-to-on transition, counter CT2 will increment
by one. Comparative contacts are used to energize Y3, Y4, and Y5 at different counts. When
the reset C10 turns on, the counter status bit will turn off and the counter current value will be 10
0, and the comparative contacts will turn off.
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Counting diagram
DirectSOFT
X1
CNT
CT2
X1
K3
C10
C10
CT2 or
Y7
Y7
CT2
OUT
1
Current Value
$
B
STR
C
SHFT
STR
GY
CNT
C
$
ENT
1
3
4
0
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes (cont)
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
$
2
B
2
D
2
A
1
ENT
0
C
SHFT
STR
GX
OUT
H
2
T
MLR
SHFT
C
2
ENT
ENT
7
ENT
3
Counting diagram
DirectSOFT
X1
CNT
CT2
X1
K3
C10
CTA2
C10
Y3
K1
Y3
OUT
Y4
CTA2
Y4
K2
OUT
CTA2
Y5
K3
Y5
1
Current
Value
2
3
4
0
OUT
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
$
$
B
STR
1
SHFT
STR
GY
CNT
C
$
SHFT
STR
B
GX
OUT
1
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes (cont)
$
ENT
C
2
B
D
2
C
2
1
3
SHFT
A
0
T
MLR
C
ENT
ENT
C
2
3
$
SHFT
STR
GX
OUT
3
C
2
SHFT
T
MLR
C
SHFT
T
MLR
C
2
ENT
E
D
ENT
2
GX
OUT
ENT
D
SHFT
STR
4
ENT
C
2
2
ENT
F
5
ENT
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5-47
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Stage Counter (SGCNT)
230
240
250-1
260
DS Used
HPP Used
Counter#
The Stage Counter is a single-input counter that
increments when the input logic transitions from off
CT aaa
SGCNT
to on. This counter differs from other counters since
B bbb
it will hold its current value until reset using the RST
instruction. The Stage Counter is designed for use in
Preset
RLLPLUS programs but can be used in relay ladder logic
programs. When the current value equals the preset value,
the counter status bit turns on and the counter continues The counter discrete status bit and the
current value are not specified in the
to count up to a maximum count of 9999. The maximum
counter instruction.
value will be held until the counter is reset.
Instruction Specifications
Counter Reference (CTaaa): Specifies the counter number.
Preset Value (Bbbb): Constant value (K) or a V-memory location.(Pointer (P) for DL240,
DL250-1 and DL260.)
Current Values: Counter current values are accessed by referencing the associated V or CT
memory locations.* The V-memory location is the counter location + 1000. For example, the
counter current value for CT3 resides in V-memory location V1003.
Discrete Status Bit: The discrete status bit is accessed by referencing the associated CT memory
location. It will be on if the value is equal to or greater than the preset value. For example, the
discrete status bit for Counter 2 would be CT2.
NOTE: When using a counter inside a stage, the stage must be active for one scan before the input to the
counter makes a 0-1 transition. Otherwise, there is no real transition and the counter will not count.
NOTE: A V-memory preset is required only if the ladder program or an OIT must used to change the preset.
Operand Data
Type
DL230 Range
B
aaa
Counters
CT
V-memory for
preset values V
Pointers
(presets only) P
Constants
(presets only) K
Counter discrete
status bits CT/V
Counter current
values
V/CT
0-77
5-48
–
bbb
DL240 Range
aaa
bbb
0-177
2000-2377
–
DL250-1 Range
aaa
0-177
2000-3777
–
2000-3777
–
0-9999
–
0-9999
–
bbb
1400-7377
10000-17777
1400-7377
10000-17777
0-9999
DL260 Range
aaa
0-377
–
–
bbb
1400-7377
10000-37777
1400-7377
10000-37777
0-9999
0-77 or V41140-41143
0-177 or V41140-41147
0-177 or V41140-41147
0-377 or V41140-41157
1000-1077
1000-1177
1000-1177
1000-1377
NOTE: * Both the Counter discrete status bits and the current value are accessed with the same data reference
with the HPP. DirectSOFT uses separate references, such as “CT2” for discrete status bit for Counter CT2,
and “CTA2” for the current value of Counter CT2.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
Stage Counter Example Using Discrete Status Bits
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Stage Counter Example Using Comparative Contacts
9
In the following example, when X1 makes an off-to-on transition, counter CT2 will increment
by one. Comparative contacts are used to energize Y3, Y4, and Y5 at different counts. Although
this is not shown in the example, when the counter is reset using the Reset instruction, the 10
counter status bit will turn off and the current value will be 0. The current value for counter
CT2 will be held in V-memory location V1002.
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
In the following example, when X1 makes an off-to-on transition, stage counter CT7 will
increment by one. When the current value reaches 3, the counter status bit CT7 will turn on
and energize Y7. The counter status bit CT7 will remain on until the counter is reset using
the RST instruction. When the counter is reset, the counter status bit will turn off and the
counter current value will be 0. The current value for counter CT7 will be held in V-memory
location V1007.
Counting diagram
DirectSOFT
X1
SGCNT
K3
CT7
X1
Y7
CT7
Y7
OUT
C5
CT7
STR
S
RST
SHFT
H
$
1
SHFT
D
7
3
SHFT
STR
ENT
G
6
SHFT
GY
CNT
2
GX
OUT
H
$
SHFT
C
SHFT
C
STR
S
RST
ENT
C
SHFT
CTA2
T
MLR
H
7
Y3
K1
CTA2
Y4
K2
OUT
CTA2
Y5
K3
OUT
B
STR
S
RST
1
6
1
SHFT
STR
GX
OUT
G
B
2
B
4
0
ENT
5
T
MLR
SHFT
2
H
7
ENT
1
A
C
0
2
Y4
Y5
Current
Value
1
2
C
ENT
SHFT
3
SHFT
STR
GY
CNT
T
MLR
C
2
E
SHFT
STR
GX
OUT
3
C
2
SHFT
T
MLR
C
SHFT
T
MLR
C
2
ENT
$
D
ENT
2
GX
OUT
ENT
D
3
RST
CT2
$
ENT
SHFT
X1
Y3
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes (cont)
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
$
F
2
ENT
SGCNT
CT2
K10
OUT
C
0
Counting diagram
X1
SHFT
4
ENT
7
DirectSOFT
$
3
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes (cont)
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
B
2
RST
CT7
RST
$
1
Current
Value
4
ENT
C
2
2
ENT
F
5
ENT
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5-49
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Up Down Counter (UDC)
230
240
250-1
260
DS Used
HPP Used
UDC
Up
CT aaa
This Up/Down Counter counts up on each off-to-on
B bbb
transition of the Up input and counts down on each
Down
off to on transition of the Down input. The counter
Counter #
is reset to 0 when the Reset input is on. The count
range is 0 to 99999999. The count input not being
Reset
Preset
used must be off in order for the active count input to
function.
Instruction Specification
Caution: The UDC uses two
Counter Reference (CTaaa): Specifies the counter V-memory locations for the 8-digit
current value. This means that the
number.
UDC uses two consecutive
Preset Value (Bbbb): Constant value (K) or two counter locations. If UDC CT1 is
consecutive V-memory locations. (Pointer (P) for used in the program, the next
available counter is CT3.
DL240, DL250-1 and DL260).
Current Values: Current count is a double word value
accessed by referencing the associated V or CT memory locations. The V-memory location
is the counter location + 1000. For example, the counter current value for CT5 resides in
V-memory location V1005 and V1006.
Discrete Status Bit: The discrete status bit is accessed by referencing the associated CT memory
location. It will be on if the value is equal to or greater than the preset value. For example, the
discrete status bit for Counter 2 would be CT2.
NOTE: The UDC uses two consecutive V-memory locations for the 8-digit value, therefore two consecutive
counter locations. For example, if UDC CT1 is used, the next available counter number is CT3.
NOTE: A V-memory preset is required only if the ladder program or an OIT must be used to change the preset.
Operand Data
Type
DL230 Range
B
aaa
Counters
CT
V-memory for
preset values V
Pointers
(presets only) P
Constants
(presets only) K
Counter discrete
status bits CT/V*
Counter current
values
V/CT*
0-76
5-50
–
bbb
DL240 Range
aaa
bbb
0-176
2000-2377
–
DL250-1 Range
aaa
0-176
2000-3777
–
2000-3777
–
0-99999999
–
0-99999999
–
bbb
1400-7377
10000-17777
1400-7377
10000-17777
0-99999999
DL260 Range
aaa
0-376
–
–
bbb
1400-7377
10000-37777
1400-7377
10000-37777
0-99999999
0-76 or V41140-41143
0-176 or V41140-41147
0-176 or V41140-41147
0-376 or V41100-41157
1000-1076
1000-1176
1000-1176
1000-1376
NOTE: * Both the Counter discrete status bits and the current value are accessed with the same data
reference with the HPP. DirectSOFT uses separate references, such as “CT2” for discrete status bit for
Counter CT2, and “CTA2” for the current value of Counter CT2.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
Up/Down Counter Example Using Discrete Status Bits
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Up/Down Counter Example Using Comparative Contacts
In the following example, when X1 makes an off to on transition, counter CT2 will increment 10
by one. Comparative contacts are used to energize Y3 and Y4 at different counts. When the
reset (X3) turns on, the counter status bit will turn off, the current value will be 0, and the
11
comparative contacts will turn off.
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
In the following example, if X2 and X3 are off, when X1 toggles from off to on the counter will
increment by one. If X1 and X3 are off, the counter will decrement by one when X2 toggles
from off to on. When the count value reaches the preset value of 3, the counter status bit will
turn on. When the reset X3 turns on, the counter status bit will turn off and the current value
will be 0.
Counting Diagram
DirectSOFT
X1
UDC
CT2
K3
X2
X1
X2
X3
X3
Y10
CT2
OUT
CT2
$
$
B
STR
1
C
STR
D
STR
U
ISG
SHFT
D
2
3
3
D
ENT
ENT
$
ENT
GX
OUT
C
2
2
1
3
0
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes (cont)
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
$
1
Current
Value
C
2
ENT
3
SHFT C
STR
B
A
1
SHFT T
MLR
2
C
ENT
2
ENT
0
2
Counting Diagram
DirectSOFT
X1
UDC
X2
V2000
CT2
X1
X2
X3
X3
CTA2
Y3
K1
Y3
OUT
Y4
CTA2
Y4
K2
OUT
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
$
$
$
B
STR
C
STR
D
STR
SHFT
U
SHFT
V
AND
$
STR
ISG
D
C
1
2
3
3
2
SHFT
Current
Value
1
2
B
1
D
ENT
$
SHFT
C
C
2
0
2
0
ENT
ENT
GX
OUT
A
4
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes (cont)
ENT
C
3
A
0
SHFT
A
STR
C
2
0
T
MLR
ENT
C
GX
OUT
2
3
ENT
C
2
SHFT
T
MLR
C
2
ENT
E
4
ENT
2
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5-51
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Shift Register (SR)
The Shift Register instruction shifts data through a
predefined number of control relays. The control ranges in
the shift register block must start at the beginning of an 8-bit
boundary and use 8-bit blocks.
The Shift Register has three contacts.
230
240
250-1
260
DS Used
HPP Used
• Data — determines the value (1 or 0) that will enter the
register
DATA
SR
From A aaa
CLOCK
To
B bbb
RESET
• Clock — shifts the bits one position on each low to high
transition
• Reset —resets the Shift Register to all zeros.
With each off-to-on transition of the clock input, the bits which make up the shift register
block are shifted by one bit position and the status of the data input is placed into the starting
bit position in the shift register. The direction of the shift depends on the entry in the From
and To fields. From C0 to C17 would define a block of 16 bits to be shifted from left to
right. From C17 to C0 would define a block of 16 bits, to be shifted from right to left. The
maximum size of the shift register block depends on the number of available control relays.
The minimum block size is 8 control relays.
Operand Data
DL230 Range
DL240 Range
DL250-1 Range
DL260 Range
Type
A/B
Control Relay
5-52
C
aaa
bbb
aaa
bbb
aaa
bbb
aaa
bbb
0-377
0-377
0-377
0-377
0-1777
0-1777
0-3777
0-3777
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
DirectSOFT
X1
$
Data Input
SR
$
From
X2
C0
$
Clock Input
To
X3
Data
Clock
Reset
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
Indicates
ON
D
STR
Reset Input
Inputs on Successive Scans
C
STR
SHFT
C17
B
STR
1
2
3
S
RST
SHFT
B
H
1
7
Shift Register Bits
C0
C17
Indicates
OFF
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
ENT
ENT
ENT
R
ORN
ENT
SHFT
A
0
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
Accumulator/Stack Load and Output Data Instructions
1
The accumulator in the DL205 series CPUs is a 32-bit register that is used as a temporary
storage location for data that is being copied or manipulated in some manner. For example, you 2
have to use the accumulator to perform math operations, such as, add, subtract, multiply, etc.
Since there are 32 bits, you can use up to an 8-digit BCD number or a 32-bit 2’s compliment 3
number. The accumulator is reset to 0 at the end of every CPU scan.
4
Copying Data to the Accumulator
The Load and Out instructions and their variations are used to copy data from a V-memory
location to the accumulator, or to copy data from the accumulator to V-memory. The 5
following example copies data from V-memory location V1400 to V-memory location V1410.
6
7
8
9
10
Since the accumulator is 32 bits and V-memory locations are 16 bits, the Load Double and 11
Out Double (or variations thereof) use two consecutive V-memory locations or 8-digit BCD
constants to copy data either to the accumulator from a V-memory address or from a V-memory
address to the accumulator. For example, if you wanted to copy data from V1400 and V1401 12
to V1410 and V1411, the most efficient way to perform this function would be as follows:
13
14
A
B
C
D
Using the Accumulator
X1
V1400
LD
8
V1400
Copy data from V1400 to the
lower 16 bits of the
accumulator
9
3
5
8
9
3
5
8
9
3
5
Unused accumulator bits
are set to zero
Acc. 0
0
0
0
OUT
V1410
V1410
Copy data from the lower 16 bits
of the accumulator to V1410
X1
V1400
V1401
LDD
V1400
6
7
3
9
5
0
2
6
Acc. 6
7
3
9
5
0
2
6
6
7
3
9
5
0
2
6
Copy data from V1400 and
V1401 to the accumulator
OUTD
V1410
Copy data from the accumulator to
V1410 and V1411
V1411
V1410
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5-53
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-54
Using the Accumulator Stack
The accumulator stack is used for instructions that require more than one parameter to
execute a function or for user-defined functionality. The accumulator stack is used when more
than one Load instruction is executed without the use of an Out instruction. The first Load
instruction in the scan places a value into the accumulator. Every Load instruction thereafter
without the use of an Out instruction places a value into the accumulator and the value that
was in the accumulator is placed onto the accumulator stack. The Out instruction nullifies the
previous Load instruction and does not place the value that was in the accumulator onto the
accumulator stack when the next Load instruction is executed. Every time a value is placed
onto the accumulator stack, the other values in the stack are pushed down one location. The
accumulator is eight levels deep (eight 32-bit registers). If there is a value in the eighth location
when a new value is placed onto the stack, the value in the eighth location is pushed off the
stack and cannot be recovered.
X1
Constant
LD
K3245
Load the value 3245 into the accumulator
Acc. 0
0
0
0
Acc. 0
3
2
4
X
X
0
0
Accumulator Stack
5
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Level 3
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
5
X
1
X
5
X
Level 4
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Level 5
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Level 6
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
1
X
Level 7
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Level 8
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
0
55
1
5
X
Level 1
0
0
0
0
3
2
Level 2
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Level 3
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Level 4
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Level 5
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Level 6
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Level 7
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Level 8
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Level 2
0
0
0
33 22 44 55
6
3
6
3
Current Acc. value
0
0
0
0
0
Bucket
4
5
66 33 66 33
Bucket
Accumulator Stack
Previous Acc. value
Acc. 0
X
Accumulator Stack
Constant
Acc. 0
X
1
Previous Acc. value
LD
Load the value 6363 into the accumulator, pushing the value 5151 to the 1st
stack location and the value 3245 to
the 2nd stack location
5
Current Acc. value
Acc. 0
K6363
4
Level 1
Constant
LD
Load the value 5151 into the accumulator, pushing the value 3245 onto the
stack
2
Previous Acc. value
Acc. X
K5151
3
Current Acc. value
0
55
1
5
1
Level 1
0
0
0
Level 2
Level 3
0
0
X
0
0
X
0 0 3 2 4 5
0 0
X X X X X X
0
5
1
5
1
Level 4
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Level 5
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Level 6
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Level 7
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Level 8
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Bucket
The POP instruction rotates values upward through the stack into the accumulator. When
a POP is executed, the value that was in the accumulator is cleared and the value that was on
top of the stack is in the accumulator. The values in the stack are shifted up one position in
the stack.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
X1
Previous Acc. value
POP
Acc. X
POP the 1st value on the stack into the
accumulator and move stack values
up one location
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
0
44 55
4
5
Accumulator Stack
Current Acc. value
Acc. 0
0
OUT
0
V2000
V2000
4
5
4
5
Cop data rom the accum ulator to
V2000
Level 1
0
0
0
0
3
7
9
2
Level 2
0
0
0
0
7
9
3
0
Level 3
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Level 4
X
?
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Level 5
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Level 6
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Level 7
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Level 8
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Level 1
0
0
0
0
7
9
Level 2
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Level 3
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Level 4
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Level 5
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Level 6
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Level 7
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Level 8
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Level 1
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Level 2
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Level 3
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Level 4
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Level 5
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Level 6
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Level 7
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Level 8
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Previous Acc. value
POP
Acc. 0
POP the 1st value on the stack into the
accumulator and move stack values
up one location
0
0
0
44 55 44 55
0
33 77 99 22
Accumulator Stack
Current Acc. value
Acc. 0
0
OUT
0
V2001
V2001
3
7
9
2
Cop data rom the accum ulator to
V2001.
3
0
Previous Acc. value
POP
Acc. 0
0
0
0
33 47 69 02
Accumulator Stack
Current Acc. value
POP the 1st value on the stack into the
accumulator and move stack values
up one location
OUT
V2002
Cop data rom the accum ulator to
V2002
Acc. X
X
X
X
V2002
7
7
9
9
3
3
0
0
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
11
22
33
44
55
66
77
88
99
10
10
11
11
12
12
13
13
14
14
AA
BB
CC
DD
5-55
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-56
Changing the Accumulator Data
Instructions that manipulate data also use the accumulator. The result of the manipulated
data resides in the accumulator. The data that was being manipulated is cleared from the
accumulator. The following example loads the constant value 4935 into the accumulator,
shifts the data right 4 bits, and outputs the result to V1410.
X1
4
Constant
LD
9
3
5
K4935
Load the value 4935 into the
accumulator
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
Acc.
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
8
7
6 5
4 3
2
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
The upper 16 bits of the accumulator
will be set to 0
Shifted out of
accumulator
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
SHFR
K4
Acc.
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
8
7
6 5
4 3
2
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
9
3
0
0
Shift the data in the accumulator
4 bits (K4) to the right
OUT
V1410
0
Output the lower 16 bits of the
accumulator to V1410
4
V1410
Some of the data manipulation instructions use 32 bits. They use two consecutive V-memory
locations or an 8-digit BCD constant to manipulate data in the accumulator.
The following example rotates the value 67053101 two bits to the right and outputs the value
to V1410 and V1411.
X1
Constant 6
LDD
7
0
5
3
1
0
1
K67053101
Load the value 67053101
into the accumulator
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
Acc.
ROTR
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
K2
Acc.
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
9
C
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
8
7
6 5
4 3
2
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
8
7
6 5
4 3
2
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
C
4
0
Rotate the data in the
accumulator 2 bits to the right
OUTD
V1410
Output the value in the
accumulator to V1410 and V1411
5
V1411
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
8
0
V1410
0
0
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
Using Pointers
1
2
NOTE: In the DL205, V-memory addressing is in octal. However the value in the pointer location which will 3
reference a V-memory location is viewed as HEX. Use the Load Address instruction to move an address into
the pointer location. This instruction performs the Octal to Hexadecimal conversion for you.
4
The following example uses a pointer operand in a Load instruction. V-memory location
3000 is the pointer location. V3000 contains the value 400, which is the HEX equivalent of 5
the Octal address V-memory location V2000. The CPU copies the data from V2000 into the
lower word of the accumulator.
6
7
8
9
10
The following example is similar to the one above, except for the LDA (load address) instruction,
which automatically converts the Octal address to the Hex equivalent.
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Many of the DL205 series instructions will allow V-memory pointers as an operand. Pointers
can be useful in ladder logic programming, but can be difficult to understand or implement
in your application if you do not have prior experience with pointers (commonly known as
indirect addressing). Pointers allow instructions to obtain data from V-memory locations
referenced by the pointer value.
X1
LD
P3000
V3000 (P3000) contains the value 400
Hex. 400 Hex. = 2000 Octal which
contains the value 2635.
V3000
0
4
0
0
V2000
2
6
3
5
V2001
X
X
X
X
V2002
X
X
X
X
V2003
X
X
X
X
V2004
X
X
X
X
V2005
X
X
X
X
Accumulator
2
6
3
5
OUT
V3100
Copy the data from the lower 16 bits of
the accumulator to V3100.
X1
LDA
O 2000
OUT
V 3000
LD
P 3000
Load the lower 16 bits of the
accumulator with Hexadecimal
equivalent to Octal 2000 (400))
V3100
2
6
3
5
V3101
X
X
X
X
2
0
0
0
2000 Octal is converted to Hexadecimal
400 and loaded into the accumulator
Unused accumulator bits
are set to zero
Copy the data from the lower 16 bits of
the accumulator to V3000
Acc. 0
0
0
0
V3000 (P3000) contains the value 400
HEX = 2000 Octal which contains the
value 2635
0
4
0
0
0
4
0
0
V3000
OUT
V 3100
Copy the data from the lower 16 bits of
the accumulator to V3100
V3000
0
4
0
0
V2000
2
6
3
5
V2001
X
X
X
X
V2002
X
X
X
X
V2003
X
X
X
X
V2004
X
X
X
X
V2005
X
X
X
X
V3100
2
6
3
5
V3101
X
X
X
X
Accumulator
0
0
0
0
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
2
6
3
5
5-57
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Load (LD)
240
250-1
260
230
The Load instruction is a 16-bit instruction that loads the value
(Aaaa), which is either a V-memory location or a 4-digit constant,
into the lower 16 bits of the accumulator. The upper 16 bits of
the accumulator are set to 0.
Operand Data
Type
DL230 Range
DL240 Range
LD
A aaa
DL250-1 Range
A
aaa
aaa
aaa
V-memory
V
All. See Memory map
Pointer
P
–
Constant
K
0-FFFF
All. See Memory map
All V-memory
See Memory map
0-FFFF
All See Memory map
All V-memory
See Memory map
0-FFFF
Discrete Bit Flags
SP76
DL260 Range
aaa
bbb
All See Memory map
All V-memory
See Memory map
0-FFFF
Description
On when the value loaded into the accumulator by any instruction is zero.
NOTE: Two consecutive Load instructions will place the value of the first Load instruction onto the
accumulator stack.
DS Used
HPP Used
5-58
In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V2000 will be loaded into the accumulator
and output to V2010.
DirectSOFT
X1
V2000
LD
8
V2000
9
3
5
The unused accumulator
bits are set to zero
Load the value in V2000 into
the lower 16 bits of the
accumulator
Acc. 0
0
0
0
88 99 33 55
OUT
V2010
8
Copy the value in the lower
16 bits of the accumulator to
V2010
B
STR
SHFT
L
ANDST
D
C
A
A
2
GX
OUT
0
1
ENT
3
0
SHFT
A
0
V
AND
ENT
C
2
A
3
V2010
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
$
9
0
B
1
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
A
0
ENT
5
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
Load Double (LDD)
1
2
3
Operand Data
DL230 Range
DL240 Range
DL250-1 Range
DL260 Range
Type
A
aaa
aaa
aaa
aaa
bbb
4
5
6
Discrete Bit Flags
Description
SP76
7
NOTE: Two consecutive Load instructions will place the value of the first load instruction onto the 8
accumulator stack.
In the following example, when X1 is on, the 32-bit value in V2000 and V2001 will be loaded 9
into the accumulator and output to V2010 and V2011.
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
230
240
250-1
260
The Load Double instruction is a 32-bit instruction that loads
the value (Aaaa), which is either two consecutive V-memory
locations or an 8-digit constant value, into the accumulator.
V-memory
V
All. See Memory map
Pointer
P
–
Constant
K
0-FFFFFFFF
All. See Memory map
All V-memory
See Memory map
0-FFFFFFFF
LDD
A aaa
All See Memory map
All V-memory
See Memory map
0-FFFFFFFF
All See Memory map
All V-memory
See Memory map
0-FFFFFFFF
On when the value loaded into the accumulator by any instruction is zero.
DS Used
HPP Used
DirectSOFT
X1
V2001
LDD
V2000
Load the value in V2000 and
V2001 into the 32 bit
accumulator
OUTD
7
?
3
9
5
Acc. 6
7
3
9
2 66
65 00 2?
6
7
3
9
5
V2011
V2010
V2000
6
0
0
2
2
6
6
V2010
Copy the value in the 32 bit
accumulator to V2010 and
V2011
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
$
B
STR
SHFT
L
ANDST
D
C
A
A
2
0
GX
OUT
SHFT
D
C
A
B
2
0
1
3
0
ENT
D
A
3
0
ENT
3
1
A
0
ENT
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5-59
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Load Formatted (LDF)
The Load Formatted instruction loads 1 to 32 consecutive bits
from discrete memory locations into the accumulator. The
instruction requires a starting location (Aaaa) and the number of
bits (Kbbb) to be loaded. Unused accumulator bit locations are
set to zero.
230
240
250-1
260
Operand Data Type
DL240 Range
A
Inputs
Outputs
Control Relays
Stage bits
Timer bits
Counter bits
Special Relays
Global I/O
Constant
aaa
X
0–477
Y
0–477
C
0–377
S
0–777
T
0–177
CT
0–177
SP 0-137, 540-617
GX/GY
–
K
–
A aaa
K bbb
DL250-1 Range
DL260 Range
bbb
aaa
bbb
aaa
bbb
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
1–32
0–777
0–777
0–1777
0–1777
0–377
0–177
0–777
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
1–32
0–1777
0–1777
0–3777
0–1777
0–377
0–377
0–777
0–3777
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
1–32
Discrete Bit Flags
SP76
LDF
Description
On when the value loaded into the accumulator by any instruction is zero.
NOTE: Two consecutive Load instructions will place the value of the first Load instruction onto the
accumulator stack.
In the following example, when C0 is on, the binary pattern of C10–C16 (7 bits) will be
loaded into the accumulator using the Load Formatted instruction. The lower 7 bits of the
accumulator are output to Y0–Y6 using the Out Formatted instruction.
DS Used
HPP Used
DirectSOFT
C0
LDF
C10
K7
Load the status of 7
consecutive bits (C10–C16)
into the accumulator
Location
Constant
C10
K7
C16 C15 C14 C13 C12 C11 C10
OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF
The unused accumulator bits are set to zero
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
Acc.
OUTF
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
8
7
6 5
4 3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
Y0
K7
Copy the value from the
specified number of bits in
the accumulator to Y0 – Y6
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
$
SHFT
C
SHFT
L
ANDST
D
F
SHFT
C
B
STR
GX
OUT
A
5-60
0
2
SHFT
F
H
3
1
A
2
A
0
ENT
5
0
H
7
ENT
5
7
ENT
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Location
Constant
Y0
K7
Y6 Y5
?
Y4
?
Y3
?
?
Y2 Y1
?
Y0
OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
Load Address (LDA)
230
240
250-1
260
1
2
3
Operand Data
DL230
Range
DL240
Range
DL250-1
Range
DL260
Range
Type
4
aaa
aaa
aaa
aaa
5
Discrete Bit Flags
Description
6
SP76
7
NOTE: Two consecutive Load instructions will place the value of the first Load instruction onto the accumulator
stack.
8
In the following example, when X1 is on, the octal number 40400 will be converted to a HEX
4100 and loaded into the accumulator using the Load Address instruction. The value in the
9
lower 16 bits of the accumulator is copied to V2000 using the Out instruction.
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
The Load Address instruction is a 16-bit instruction. It
converts any octal value or address to the HEX equivalent
value and loads the HEX value into the accumulator. This
instruction is useful when an address parameter is required
since all addresses for the DL205 system are in octal.
Octal Address
All V-memory
See Memory map
O
LDA
O aaa
All V-memory
See Memory map
All V-memory
See Memory map
All V-memory
See Memory map
On when the value loaded into the accumulator by any instruction is zero.
DS Used
HPP Used
DirectSOFT
X1
Octal
LDA
4
O 40400
0
Load The HEX equivalent to
the octal number into the
lower 16 bits of the
accumulator
4
Hexadecimal
0
0
4
1
0
0
4
1
0
0
4
1
0
0
The unused accumulator
bits are set to zero
Acc. 0
OUT
0
0
0
V2000
V2000
Copy the value in lower 16
bits of the accumulator to
V2000
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
$
B
STR
SHFT
L
ANDST
D
E
A
E
4
GX
OUT
0
1
3
4
SHFT
ENT
A
A
0
0
V
AND
A
C
0
2
ENT
A
0
A
0
A
0
ENT
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5-61
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Load Accumulator Indexed (LDX)
230
240
250-1
260
DS Used
HPP Used
5-62
Load Accumulator Indexed is a 16-bit instruction that specifies
a source address (V-memory) which will be offset by the value in
LDX
the first stack location. This instruction interprets the value in
A aaa
the first stack location as HEX. The value in the offset address
(source address + offset) is loaded into the lower 16 bits of the
accumulator. The upper 16 bits of the accumulator are set to 0.
Helpful hint: — The Load Address instruction can be used to convert an octal address to a
HEX address and load the value into the accumulator.
Operand Data Type
DL250-1 Range
DL260 Range
A
aaa
aaa
V-memory
V
Pointer
P
All. See
memory map
All V-memory.
See memory map
All. See
memory map
All V-memory.
See memory map
NOTE: Two consecutive Load instructions will place the value of the first load instruction onto the
accumulator stack.
In the following example, when X1 is on, the HEX equivalent for octal 25 will be loaded into
the accumulator (this value will be placed on the stack when the Load Accumulator Indexed
instruction is executed). V-memory location V1410 will be added to the value in the first level
of the stack and the value in this location (V1435 = 2345) is loaded into the lower 16 bits of
the accumulator using the Load Accumulator Indexed instruction. The value in the lower 16
bits of the accumulator is output to V1500 using the Out instruction.
X1
LDA
O 25
Load The HEX equivalent to
octal 25 into the lower 16
bits of the accumulator
Octal
Hexadecimal
2
0
0
1
5
0
0
1
5
V 1
4
5
The unused accumulator
bits are set to zero
Acc. 0
0
0
0
LDX
V1410
Move the offset to the stack.
Load the accumulator with
the address to be offset
HEX Value in 1st
stack location
Octal
V 1
4
1
0
+
1
5
Accumulator Stack
Octal
=
3
5
The unused accumulator
bits are set to zero
OUT
V1500
Copy the value in the lower
16 bits of the accumulator
to V1500
Acc. 0
0
0
0
2
3
4
The value in V1435
is 2345
2
3
4
V1500
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5
5
Level 1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
5
Level 2
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
Level 3
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
Level 4
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
Level 5
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
Level 6
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
Level 7
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
Level 8
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
Load Accumulator Indexed from Data Constants (LDSX)
240
250-1
260
230
DS Used
HPP Used
1
2
3
4
5
Operand Data Type
DL240 Range DL250-1 Range
DL260 Range
aaa
aaa
aaa
6
7
NOTE: Two consecutive Load instructions will place the value of the first load instruction onto the
accumulator stack.
8
In the following example, when X1 is on, the offset of 1 is loaded into the accumulator. This
value will be placed into the first level of the accumulator stack when the LDSX instruction 9
is executed. The LDSX instruction specifies the Data Label (DLBL K2) where the numerical
constant(s) are located in the program and loads the constant value, indicated by the offset in
10
the stack, into the lower 16 bits of the accumulator.
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
The Load Accumulator Indexed from Data Constants is a
16-bit instruction. The instruction specifies a Data Label
LDSX
Area (DLBL) where numerical or ASCII constants are stored.
K aaa
This value will be loaded into the lower 16 bits.
The LDSX instruction uses the value in the first level of the
accumulator stack as an offset to determine which numerical
or ASCII constant within the Data Label Area will be loaded into the accumulator. The LDSX
instruction interprets the value in the first level of the accumulator stack as a HEX value.
Helpful hint: — The Load Address instruction can be used to convert octal to HEX and load
the value into the accumulator.
Constant
K
X1
1-FFFF
1-FFFF
Hexadecimal
LD
0
K1
Load the offset value of 1 (K1) into the lower 16
bits of the accumulator.
0
0
1
0
0
1
Acc. 0
0
0
0
Accumulator Stack
0
K2
Constant
Move the offset to the stack.
Load the accumulator with the data label
number
OUT
Copy the value in the lower
16 bits of the accumulator
to V2000
0
K
0
0
2
The unused accumulator
bits are set to zero
Acc. 0
V2000
Value in 1st. level of stack is
used as offset. The value is 1
The unused accumulator
bits are set to zero
LDSX
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
Level 1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
Level 2
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
Level 3
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
Level 4
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
Level 5
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
Level 6
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
Level 7
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
Level 8
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
The unused accumulator
bits are set to zero
END
DLBL
1-FFFF
Acc. 0
0
0
0
2
3
2
3
2
3
2
3
K2
NCON
K3333
NCON
K2323
NCON
K4549
Offset 0
V2000
Offset 1
Offset 2
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5-63
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
$
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
B
STR
SHFT
L
ANDST
D
SHFT
L
ANDST
D
1
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
ENT
SHFT
3
S
RST
X
SET
SHFT
V
AND
C
4
N
TMR
D
3
L
ANDST
B
GX
OUT
SHFT
E
SHFT
D
SHFT
N
TMR
C
SHFT
N
TMR
C
SHFT
N
TMR
C
3
3
2
K
JMP
B
C
A
A
0
1
2
0
ENT
ENT
A
0
ENT
ENT
1
L
ANDST
C
2
O
INST#
N
TMR
D
2
O
INST#
N
TMR
C
2
O
INST#
N
TMR
E
2
3
2
4
ENT
D
D
F
3
3
5
D
C
E
3
2
4
D
D
J
3
3
9
Load Real Number (LDR)
230
240
250-1
260
DS Used
HPP N/A
5-64
The Load Real Number instruction loads a real number
contained in two consecutive V-memory locations, or an
8-digit constant into the accumulator.
Operand Data Type
A
V-memory
Pointer
Real Constants
ENT
ENT
ENT
LDR
A aaa
DL250-1 Range
DL260 Range
aaa
aaa
V
All. See memory map
All. See memory map
P All V-memory. See memory map All V-memory. See memory map
-3.402823E+038 to
-3.402823E+038 to
R
+3.402823E+038
+3.402823E+038
LDR
DirectSOFT allows you to enter real numbers directly,
R3.14159
by using the leading “R” to indicate a real number
entry. You can enter a constant such as Pi, shown in
the example to the right. To enter negative numbers,
LDR
use a minus (–) after the “R”.
R5.3E6
For very large numbers or very small numbers, you can
use exponential notation. The number to the right is
OUTD
5.3 million. The OUTD instruction stores it in V1400
V1400
and V1401.
These real numbers are in the IEEE 32-bit floating point format, so they occupy two V-memory
locations, regardless of how big or small the number may be! If you view a stored real number in
hex, binary, or even BCD, the number shown will be very difficult to decipher. Just like all
other number types, you must keep track of real number locations in memory, so they can be
read with the proper instructions later.
The previous example above stored a real number in V1400
and V1401. Suppose that now we want to retrieve that
LDR
number. Just use the Load Real with the V data type, as
V1400
shown to the right. Next we could perform real math on it,
or convert it to a binary number.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
Out (OUT)
230
240
250-1
260
1
2
Operand Data Type
DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250-1 Range DL260 Range 3
A
aaa
aaa
aaa
aaa
4
5
Discrete Bit Flags
Description
6
SP76
In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V2000 will be loaded into the lower 7
16 bits of the accumulator using the Load instruction. The value in the lower 16 bits of the
accumulator are copied to V2010 using the Out instruction.
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
The Out instruction is a 16-bit instruction that copies the
value in the lower 16 bits of the accumulator to a specified
V-memory location (Aaaa).
V-memory
V
All. See
memory map
Pointer
P
-
OUT
A aaa
All. See
All. See
memory map
memory map
All V-memory.
All V-memory.
See memory map See memory map
All. See
memory map
All V-memory.
See memory map
On when the value loaded into the accumulator by any instruction is zero.
DS Used
HPP Used
DirectSOFT
X1
V2000
LD
8
V2000
Load the value in V2000 into
the lower 16 bits of the
accumulator
9
3
5
The unused accumulator
bits are set to zero
Acc. 0
0
0
0
88 99 33 55
OUT
V2010
Copy the value in the lower
16 bits of the accumulator to
V2010
8
9
3
5
V2010
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
$
B
STR
SHFT
L
ANDST
D
C
A
A
2
GX
OUT
0
1
ENT
3
0
SHFT
A
0
V
AND
ENT
C
2
A
0
B
1
A
0
ENT
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5-65
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Out Double (OUTD)
240
250-1
260
230
The Out Double instruction is a 32-bit instruction that
copies the value in the accumulator to two consecutive
V-memory locations at a specified starting location (Aaaa).
Operand Data Type
DS Used
HPP Used
DL230 Range
5-66
DL240 Range DL250-1 Range DL260 Range
A
aaa
aaa
V-memory
V
All. See
memory map
Pointer
P
-
All. See
memory map
All V-memory.
See memory map
aaa
aaa
All. See
All. See
memory map
memory map
All V-memory.
All V-memory.
See memory map See memory map
In the following example, when X1 is on, the 32-bit value in V2000 and V2001 will be loaded
into the accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The value in the accumulator is
output to V2010 and V2011 using the Out Double instruction.
V2001
DirectSOFT
X1
OUTD
A aaa
6
LDD
7
?
3
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
V2000
9
5
0
2
6
V2000
Load the value in V2000 and
V2001 into the accumulator
Acc. 6
7
3
9
55 00 2?
2 66
OUTD
V2010
Copy the value in the
accumulator to V2010 and
V2011
6
7
3
9
5
V2011
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
0
2
V2010
6
$
B
STR
SHFT
L
ANDST
D
C
A
A
2
0
GX
OUT
SHFT
D
C
A
B
2
0
1
3
0
ENT
D
A
3
0
ENT
3
1
A
0
ENT
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
Out Formatted (OUTF)
230
240
250-1
260
DS Used
HPP Used
1
2
3
Operand Data Type
DL240 Range
DL250-1 Range
DL260 Range
A
aaa
bbb
aaa
bbb
aaa
bbb
4
In the following example, when C0 is on, the binary pattern of C10–C16 (7 bits) will be 5
loaded into the accumulator using the Load Formatted instruction. The lower 7 bits of the
accumulator are output to Y20–Y26 using the Out Formatted instruction.
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
The Out Formatted instruction outputs 1 to 32 bits from the
accumulator to the specified discrete memory locations. The
instruction requires a starting location (Aaaa) for the destination
and the number of bits (Kbbb) to be output.
Constant
DirectSOFT
C0
K
LDF
1-32
OUTF
A aaa
K bbb
1-32
C10
K7
Load the status of 7
consecutive bits (C10–C16)
into the accumulator
Location
Constant
C10
K7
1-32
C16 C15 C14 C13 C12 C11 C10
OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF
The unused accumulator bits are set to zero
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
OUTF
0
Y20
Copy the value of the
specified number of bits
from the accumulator to
Y20–Y26
SHFT
C
SHFT
L
ANDST
D
F
SHFT
C
B
2
GX
OUT
SHFT
C
A
2
0
F
3
1
A
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Y20
A
0
0
Location
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
STR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
8
7
6 5
4 3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
Accumulator
K7
$
0
Constant
Y26 Y25 Y24 Y23 Y22 Y21 Y20
K7
OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF
ENT
5
H
0
7
ENT
5
H
7
ENT
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5-67
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Out Indexed (OUTX)
230
240
250-1
260
The Out Indexed instruction is a 16-bit instruction. It
copies a 16-bit or 4-digit value from the first level of the
accumulator stack to a source address offset by the value
in the accumulator (V-memory + offset). This instruction
interprets the offset value as a HEX number. The upper 16
bits of the accumulator are set to zero.
DS Used
HPP Used
Operand Data Type
O UT X
A aaa
DL250-1 Range
DL260 Range
A
aaa
aaa
V-memory
V
Pointer
P
All. See
memory map
All V-memory.
See memory map
All. See
memory map
All V-memory.
See memory map
In the following example, when X1 is on, the constant value 3544 is loaded into the
accumulator. This is the value that will be output to the specified offset V-memory location
(V1525). The value 3544 will be placed onto the stack when the Load Address instruction
is executed. Remember, two consecutive Load instructions places the value of the first load
instruction onto the stack. The Load Address instruction converts octal 25 to HEX 15 and
places the value in the accumulator. The Out Indexed instruction outputs the value 3544,
which resides in the first level of the accumulator stack to V1525.
DirectSOFT
5-68
X1
Constant
LD
3
K3544
5
4
4
5
4
4
The unused accumulator
bits are set to zero.
Load the accumulator with
the value 3544.
0
Acc.
0
0
0
3
Octal
LDA
2
O25
Load the HEX equivalent to
octal 25 into the lower 16 bits
of the accumulator. This is the
offset for the Out Indexed
instruction, which determines
the final destinaltion address.
HEX
0
0
1
5
0
0
1
5
V 1
5
2
5
3
5
4
4
5
The unused accumulator
bits are set to zero.
Acc.
0
0
+ 2
V
V1500
1
5
0
0
Octal
Octal
OUTX
0
0
5
Octal
=
The hex 15 converts
to 25 octal, which is
added to the base
address of V1500 to yield
the final destination.
Copy the value in the first
level of the stack to the
offset address V1525
(V1500+25).
V1525
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
$
B
STR
1
SHFT
L
ANDST
D
SHFT
L
ANDST
D
GX
OUT
SHFT
X
SET
ENT
PREV
3
3
A
D
C
0
B
1
F
3
2
5
F
F
A
5
E
4
ENT
5
0
4
E
A
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
0
ENT
ENT
Accumulator Stack
Level 1
0
0
0
0
3
5
4
4
Level 2
X
X X
X
X
X X
X
Level 3
X
X X
X
X
X X
X
Level 4
X
X X
X
X
X X
X
Level 5
X
X X
X
X
X X
X
Level 6
X
X X
X
X
X X
X
Level 7
X
X X
X
X
X X
X
Level 8
X
X X
X
X
X X
X
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
Out Least (OUTL)
230
240
250-1
260
1
2
3
Operand Data Type
DL260 Range
4
A
aaa
5
6
7
8
9
Out Most (OUTM)
10
The Out Most instruction copies the value in the upper eight bits
O UT M
of the lower 16 bits of the accumulator to the upper eight bits of
A aaa
11
the specified V-memory location (i.e., it copies the high byte of
the low word of the accumulator).
12
Operand Data Type
DL260 Range
aaa
13
14
In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V1400 will be loaded into the lower 16
bits of the accumulator using the Load instruction. The value in the upper 8 bits of the lower
A
16 bits of the accumulator are copied to V1500 using the Out Most instruction.
B
C
D
DS Used
HPP Used
The Out Least instruction copies the value in the lower eight
O UT L
bits of the accumulator to the lower eight bits of the specified
A aaa
V-memory location (i.e., it copies the low byte of the low word
of the accumulator).
In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V1400 will be loaded into the lower
16 bits of the accumulator using the Load instruction. The value in the lower 8 bits of the
accumulator are copied to V1500 using the Out Least instruction.
V-memory
Pointer
V
P
X1
All V-memory. See memory map
All V-memory. See memory map
V1400
Load the value in V1400 into
the lower 16 bits of the
accumulater
LD
V1400
Copy the value in the lower
8 bits of the accumulator to
V1500
OUTL
V1500
8
9
3
5
9
3
5
0
3
5
The unused accumulator
bits are set to zero
Acc. 0
0
0
0
8
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
$
B
STR
SHFT
GX
OUT
230
240
250-1
260
DS Used
HPP Used
1
L
ANDST
D
SHFT
L
ANDST
ENT
B
3
1
B
1
E
F
4
5
A
A
0
0
A
A
X1
V1500
ENT
0
A
V
P
V-memory
Pointer
0
ENT
0
All V-memory. See memory map
All V-memory. See memory map
V1400
Load the value in V1400 into
the lower 16 bits of the
accumulator
LD
V1400
Copy the value in the upper
8 bits of the lower 16 bits of
the accumulator to V1500
OUTM
V1500
8
9
3
5
9
3
5
9
0
0
The unused accumulator
bits are set to zero
Acc.
0
0
0
0
8
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
$
B
STR
1
SHFT
L
ANDST
D
GX
OUT
SHFT
M
ORST
3
8
ENT
B
B
1
1
E
F
4
5
A
A
0
0
A
A
V1500
0
0
ENT
ENT
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5-69
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Pop (POP)
The Pop instruction moves the value from the first level
POP
of the accumulator stack (32 bits) to the accumulator and
shifts each value in the stack up one level. In the example
below, when C0 is on, the value 4545 that was on top of
the stack is moved into the accumulator using the Pop
instruction. The value is output to V2000 using the Out instruction. The next Pop moves
DS Used the value 3792 into the accumulator and outputs the value to V2001. The last Pop moves the
HPP Used value 7930 into the accumulator and outputs the value to V2002. Please note if the value in
the stack were greater than 16 bits (4 digits) the Out Double instruction would be used and
two V-memory locations for each Out Double must be allocated.
230
240
250-1
260
Discrete Bit Flags
On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero.
DirectSOFT
Previous Acc. value
C0
POP
Acc. X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
0
44 55 44 55
Accumulator Stack
Current Acc. value
Pop the 1st. value on the stack into the
accumulator and move stack values
up one location
Acc. 0
0
0
OUT
V2000
V2000
Copy the value in the lower 16 bits of
the accumulator to V2000
POP
4
5
4
5
Level 1
0
0
0
0
0
3
7
9
2
Level 2
0
0
0
0
0
7
9
3
0
Level 3
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Level 4
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Level 5
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Level 6
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Level 7
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Level 8
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Level 1
0
0
0
0
7
9
3
0
Level 2
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Level 3
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Level 4
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Level 5
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Level 6
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Level 7
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Level 8
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Level 1
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Level 2
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Level 3
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Level 4
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Level 5
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Level 6
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Level 7
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Level 8
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Previous Acc. value
Acc. 0
Pop the 1st. value on the stack into the
accumulator and move stack values
up one location
0
0
0
44 55 44 55
Accumulator Stack
Current Acc. value
Acc. 0
0
0
0
3
7
9
2
OUT
V2001
Copy the value in the lower 16 bits of
the accumulator to V2001
V2001
3
7
9
2
POP
Previous Acc. value
Pop the 1st. value on the stack into the
accumulator and move stack values
up one location
Acc. 0
0
0
0
3
7
9
2
0
7
9
3
0
Accumulator Stack
Current Acc. value
Acc. 0
OUT
0
0
V2002
Copy the value in the lower 16 bits of
the accumulator to V2002
V2002
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
$
STR
SHFT
P
CV
GX
OUT
SHFT
P
CV
GX
OUT
SHFT
GX
OUT
5-70
Description
SP63
P
CV
SHFT
C
SHFT
O
INST#
P
SHFT
V
AND
C
SHFT
O
INST#
P
SHFT
V
AND
C
SHFT
O
INST#
P
SHFT
V
AND
C
2
A
0
CV
2
CV
2
CV
2
ENT
ENT
A
0
A
0
A
0
ENT
ENT
A
0
A
0
B
1
ENT
ENT
A
0
A
0
C
2
ENT
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
7
9
3
0
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
Logical Instructions (Accumulator)
1
The And instruction is a 16-bit instruction that logically
2
ANDs the value in the lower 16 bits of the accumulator with a
specified V-memory location (Aaaa). The result resides in the
accumulator. The discrete status flag indicates if the result of
3
the And is zero.
4
Operand Data Type
DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250-1 Range DL260 Range
A
aaa
aaa
aaa
aaa
5
6
Discrete Bit Flags
Description
7
8
NOTE: The status flags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same flags is executed.
In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V2000 will be loaded into the accumulator 9
using the Load instruction. The value in the accumulator is anded with the value in V2006
using the And instruction. The value in the lower 16 bits of the accumulator is output to
10
V2010 using the Out instruction.
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
And (AND)
230
240
250-1
260
DS Used
HPP Used
DirectSOFT
X1
AND
A aaa
All. See
All. See
memory map
memory map
All V-memory.
All V-memory.
See memory map See memory map
V-memory
V
All. See
memory map
All. See
memory map
All V-memory.
See memory map
Pointer
P
-
SP63
On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero.
V2000
LD
2
V2000
8
?
7
A
The upper 16 bits of the accumulator
will be set to 0
Load the value in V2000 into
the lower 16 bits of the
accumulator
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
8
7
6 5
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
Acc.
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
1 1
6A38
AND (V2006)
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1 1
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
8
3
8
Acc.
4 3
2
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
1 1
1
0
0
0
1 1
AND
V2006
AND the value in the
accumulator with
the value in V2006
Acc.
1
OUT
V2010
2
Copy the lower 16 bits of the
accumulator to V2010
V2010
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
$
STR
SHFT
V
AND
GX
OUT
B
L
ANDST
D
1
ENT
C
3
SHFT
V
AND
C
SHFT
V
AND
C
2
2
2
A
A
A
0
0
0
A
A
B
0
0
1
A
G
A
0
6
0
ENT
ENT
ENT
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5-71
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
And Double (ANDD)
230
240
250-1
260
DS Used
HPP Used
The And Double is a 32-bit instruction that
logically ANDs the value in the accumulator with
two consecutive V-memory locations or an 8-digit
(max) constant value (Aaaa). The result resides in
the accumulator. Discrete status flags indicate if
the result of the And Double is zero or a negative
number (the most significant bit is on).
Operand Data Type
DL230 Range
A
V-memory
V
Pointer
P
Constant
K
ANDD
A aaa
DL240 Range DL250-1 Range DL260 Range
aaa
aaa
-
-
0-FFFFFFFF
0-FFFFFFFF
-
aaa
-
Discrete Bit Flags
aaa
All. See
memory map
All V-memory.
See memory map
0-FFFFFFFF
All. See
memory map
All V-memory.
See memory map
0-FFFFFFFF
Description
SP63
SP70
Will be on if the result in the accumulator is zero
Will be on if the result in the accumulator is negative
NOTE: The status flags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same flags is executed.
In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V2000 and V2001 will be loaded into
the accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The value in the accumulator is anded
with 36476A38 using the And Double instruction. The value in the accumulator is output to
V2010 and V2011 using the Out Double instruction.
DirectSOFT
V2000
X1
5
LDD
4
7
V2000
E
2
8
7
A
V2000
Load the value in V2000 and
V2001 into the accumulator
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
Acc.
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
8
7
6 5
1
0
0
0
0
1
4 3
1 1
2
1
0
1
0
1
0
ANDD
Acc.
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
1 1
1
1
0
1
0
AND 36476A38
0
0
1 1
0
1 1
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
1 1
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
1 1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
1 1
1
0
0
0
4
4
6
8
3
8
K36476A38
AND the value in the
accumulator with
the constant value
36476A38
Acc.
0
1
0
0
OUTD
V2010
1
2
V2011
Copy the value in the
accumulator to V2010 and
V2011
V2010
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
$
B
STR
SHFT
L
ANDST
D
V
AND
SHFT
D
SHFT
D
GX
OUT
5-72
1
3
3
3
ENT
D
C
3
2
A
SHFT
K
JMP
D
C
A
B
2
0
0
3
1
A
G
A
0
6
0
A
E
0
4
ENT
H
7
G
ENT
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
6
SHFT
A
0
SHFT
D
3
I
8
ENT
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
And Formatted (ANDF)
1
2
Operand Data Type
DL250-1 Range
DL260 Range
3
A
aaa
bbb
aaa
bbb
4
5
6
7
Discrete Bit Flags
Description
8
9
NOTE: Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag.
10
In the following example, when X1 is on, the Load Formatted instruction loads C10–C13
(4 binary bits) into the accumulator. The accumulator content is logically ANDed with the bit
pattern from Y20–Y23 using the And Formatted instruction. The Out Formatted instruction 11
outputs the accumulator’s lower four bits to C20–C23.
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
The And Formatted instruction logically ANDs the binary value in
the accumulator and a specified range of discrete memory bits (1 to
32). The instruction requires a starting location (Aaaa) and number
of bits (Kbbb) to be ANDed. Discrete status flags indicate if the result
is zero or a negative number (the most significant bit =1).
DS Used
HPP Used
Inputs
Outputs
Control Relays
Stage bits
Timer bits
Counter bits
Special Relays
Global I/O
Constant
X
Y
C
S
T
CT
SP
GX/GY
K
0–777
0–777
0–1777
0–1777
0–377
0–177
0-777
-
SP63
SP70
DirectSOFT
X1
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
1–32
ANDF
A aaa
K bbb
0–1777
0–1777
0–3777
0–1777
0–377
0–377
0–777
0-3777
-
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
1–32
Will be on if the result in the accumulator is zero
Will be on if the result in the accumulator is negative
C10
LDF
K4
Load the status of 4
consecutive bits (C10-C13)
into the accumulator
ANDF
Constant
K4
C13 C12 C11 C10
ON ON ON OFF
The unused accumulator bits are set to zero
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
8
7 6 5
4 3
2
1
0
0
0
0 0
0
0
1 1
0
Y20
K4
0
0
0 0
0
0
0
0
0 0
0 0
0
0
0
0
0
0 0
0 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Acc.
0
0
0 0
0
0
1
0 0
0
0
0
0 0
0
0
0
0 1
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
0 0
0
0
0
0 0
0
0
0
0 1
0
0
0
Accumulator
And the binary bit pattern
(Y20-Y23) with the value in
the accumulator
0
Acc.
0 0
0
0
0
0
Y23 Y22 Y21 Y20
ON OFF OFF OFF
AND (Y20-Y23)
C20
OUTF
Location
C10
K4
Copy the value in the lower
4 bits in accumulator to
C20-C23
Location
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
$
STR
B
L
ANDST
D
V
AND
SHFT
F
GX
OUT
SHFT
F
SHFT
1
3
5
5
C20
ENT
F
NEXT
NEXT
NEXT
C
A
PREV
PREV
5
2
C
NEXT
0
2
NEXT
E
A
0
4
B
1
A
0
E
4
Constant
C23 C22 C21 C20
K4
ON OFF OFF OFF
ndard RLL
230
240
250-1
260
ENT
ENT
E
4
ENT
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5-73
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
And with Stack (ANDS)
230
240
250-1
260
DS Used
HPP Used
The And with Stack instruction is a 32-bit instruction that
logically ANDs the value in the accumulator with the first level
of the accumulator stack. The result resides in the accumulator.
The value in the first level of the accumulator stack is removed
from the stack and all values are moved up one level. Discrete
status flags indicate if the result of the And with Stack is zero or
a negative number (the most significant bit is on).
Discrete Bit Flags
ANDS
Description
SP63
SP70
Will be on if the result in the accumulator is zero
Will be on if the result in the accumulator is negative
NOTE: Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag.
In the following example, when X1 is on, the binary value in the accumulator will be anded
with the binary value in the first level of the accumulator stack. The result resides in the
accumulator. The 32-bit value is then output to V1500 and V1501.
DirectSOFT
X1
V1401
LDD
5
V1400
4
7
V1400
E
2
8
7
A
Load the value in V1400 and
1401 into the accumulator
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
8 7
6 5
4 3
2
1
0
0
1
0 1
0
1
0
0 0
1
1
1
1 1
1
0
0
0
1 0
1
0
0
0 0
1
1
1
1 0
1
0
0
1
0 1
0
1
0
0 0
1
1
1
1 1
1
0
0
0
1 0
1
0
0
0 0
1
1
1
1 0
1
0
(top of stack)
0
0
1
0 1
1
0
1 0
0
0
1 1
0
1
1
1 0
1
0
0 1
1
1
0
0 0
Acc.
0
0
0 1
0
0
0
0 0
0
1
0
0 1
0
0
1
0
0
1 0
1
0
0 0
0
1
1 0
0 0
4
6
8
8
Acc.
ANDS
Acc.
AND the value in the
accumulator with the
first level of the
accumulator stack
36476A38
AND
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
OUTD
V1500
1
Copy the value in the
accumulator to V1500
and 1501
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
$
B
STR
1
L
ANDST
D
V
AND
SHFT
S
RST
GX
OUT
SHFT
D
SHFT
5-74
3
3
ENT
D
B
3
1
E
4
A
0
A
0
ENT
ENT
B
1
4
V1501
F
5
A
0
A
0
ENT
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
2
3
V1500
1
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
Or (OR)
230
240
250-1
260
DS Used
HPP Used
1
2
3
Operand Data Type
DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250-1 Range DL260 Range
A
aaa
aaa
aaa
aaa
4
5
Discrete Bit Flags
Description
6
7
NOTE: The status flags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same flags is executed.
In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V2000 will be loaded into the accumulator 8
using the Load instruction. The value in the accumulator is OR’d with V2006 using the OR
instruction. The value in the lower 16 bits of the accumulator are output to V2010 using the
9
Out instruction.
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
The Or instruction is a 16-bit instruction that logically
ORs the value in the lower 16 bits of the accumulator with
a specified V-memory location (Aaaa). The result resides
in the accumulator. The discrete status flag indicates if the
result of the OR is zero.
V-memory
V
All
See memory map
Pointer
P
-
SP63
DirectSOFT
X1
All
See memory map
All V-memory.
See memory map
OR
A aaa
All
See memory map
All V-memory.
See memory map
All
See memory map
All V-memory.
See memory map
Will be on if the result in the accumulator is zero
V2000
LD
2
V2000
8
7
A
The upper 16 bits of the accumulator
will be set to 0
Load the value in V2000 into
the lower 16 bits of the
accumulator
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
Acc.
8
7
6 5
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
1 1
1
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
1 1
1
0
1
0
4 3
OR
V2006
Acc.
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Or the value in the
accumulator with
the value in V2006
6A38
OR (V2006)
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
1 1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1 1
1
0
1
0
A
7
A
Acc.
OUT
V2010
6
Copy the value in the lower
16 bits of the accumulator to
V2010
V2010
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
$
B
STR
SHFT
Q
OR
GX
OUT
L
ANDST
D
1
ENT
C
3
SHFT
V
AND
C
SHFT
V
AND
C
2
2
2
A
A
A
0
0
0
A
A
B
0
0
1
A
G
A
0
6
0
ENT
ENT
ENT
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5-75
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Or Double (ORD)
230
240
250-1
260
The Or Double is a 32-bit instruction that ORs the value in
the accumulator with the value (Aaaa) or an 8-digit (max)
constant value. The result resides in the accumulator.
Discrete status flags indicate if the result of the Or Double
is zero or a negative number (the most significant bit is on).
Operand Data Type
DS Used
HPP Used
DL230 Range
A
V-memory
V
Pointer
P
Constant
K
ORD
A aaa
DL240 Range DL250-1 Range DL260 Range
aaa
aaa
-
-
0-FFFFFFFF
0-FFFFFFFF
-
aaa
-
Discrete Bit Flags
aaa
All. See
memory map
All V-memory.
See memory map
0-FFFFFFFF
All. See
memory map
All V-memory.
See memory map
0-FFFFFFFF
Description
SP63
SP70
Will be on if the result in the accumulator is zero
Will be on if the result in the accumulator is negative
NOTE: The status flags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same flags is executed.
In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V2000 and V2001 will be loaded into
the accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The value in the accumulator is OR’d
with 36476A38 using the Or Double instruction. The value in the accumulator is output to
V2010 and V2011 using the Out Double instruction.
DirectSOFT
X1
V2001
LDD
5
V2000
4
7
V2000
E
2
8
7
A
Load the value in V2000 and
V2001 into accumulator
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
8
7
6 5
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
Acc.
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
1 1
OR 36476A38
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
1 1
1
0
1 1
0
1
0
1
0
0
Acc.
0
1
0
0
1 10
0
1 10
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1 0
1 1
0
0
1 10
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
6
7
F
A
7
A
Acc.
4 3
2
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
1 1
1
0
0
0
1
1 1
1
0
1
0
1 1
ORD
K36476A38
OR the value in the
accumulator with
the constant value
36476A38
1
OUTD
V2010
7
Copy the value in the
accumulator to V2010 and
V2011
6
V2011
V2010
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
$
B
STR
SHFT
L
ANDST
D
Q
SHFT
D
SHFT
D
OR
GX
OUT
5-76
1
3
3
3
ENT
D
C
3
2
A
SHFT
K
JMP
D
C
A
B
2
0
0
3
1
A
G
A
0
6
0
A
E
0
4
ENT
H
7
G
ENT
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
6
SHFT
A
0
SHFT
D
3
I
8
ENT
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
Or Formatted (ORF)
1
2
3
Operand Data Type
DL250-1 Range
DL260 Range
A
aaa
bbb
aaa
bbb
4
5
6
7
8
Discrete Bit Flags
Description
9
NOTE: Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag.
10
In the following example, when X1 is on the Load Formatted instruction loads C10–C13
(4 binary bits) into the accumulator. The Or Formatted instruction logically ORs the 11
accumulator contents with Y20–Y23 bit pattern. The Out Formatted instruction outputs the
accumulator’s lower four bits to C20–C23.
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
The Or Formatted instruction logically ORs the binary value
in the accumulator and a specified range of discrete bits (1 to
32). The instruction requires a starting location (Aaaa) and
the number of bits (Kbbb) to be ORed. Discrete status flags
indicate if the result is zero or negative (the most significant
bit =1).
230
240
250-1
260
DS Used
HPP Used
Inputs
Outputs
Control Relays
Stage bits
Timer bits
Counter bits
Special Relays
Global I/O
Constant
X
Y
C
S
T
CT
SP
GX/GY
K
SP63
SP70
0–777
0–777
0–1777
0–1777
0–377
0–177
0-777
-
ORF
A aaa
K bbb
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
1–32
0–1777
0–1777
0–3777
0–1777
0–377
0–377
0–777
0-3777
-
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
1–32
Will be on if the result in the accumulator is zero
Will be on if the result in the accumulator is negative
DirectSOFT
Location
X1
LDF
C10
C10
Constant
C13 C12 C11 C10
K4
OFF ON ON OFF
K4
The unused accumulator bits are set to zero
Load the status of 4
consecutive bits (C10-C13)
into the accumulator
ORF
Acc.
Y20
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
8
7 6 5
4 3
2
1
0
0
0
0 0
0
0
0
1 1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0 1
1
1
0
0
0
0 0
0
0
0
0 0
0
0
0
0 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0 0
0
0
0
0 0
0
0
0 0
0 0
0
0
0
0
0 0
K4
OR the binary bit pattern
(Y20 - Y23) with the value in
the accumulator
OUTF
Y23 Y22 Y21 Y20
ON OFF OFF OFF
OR (Y20-- Y23)
Acc.
C20
0
0
0
0 0
0
0
0
K4
Copy the specified number
of bits from the accumulator
to C20-C23
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
$
STR
SHFT
Q
OR
GX
OUT
B
L
ANDST
D
SHFT
F
SHFT
F
1
3
5
5
Location
Constant
C23 C22 C21 C20
C20
K4
ON ON ON OFF
ENT
F
NEXT
NEXT
NEXT
C
A
PREV
PREV
5
2
C
NEXT
0
2
NEXT
E
A
0
4
B
1
A
0
E
4
ENT
ENT
E
4
ENT
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5-77
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Or with Stack (ORS)
230
240
250-1
260
DS Used
HPP Used
The Or with Stack instruction is a 32-bit instruction that
logically ORs the value in the accumulator with the first
level of the accumulator stack. The result resides in the
accumulator. The value in the first level of the accumulator
stack is removed from the stack and all values are moved up
one level. Discrete status flags indicate if the result of the Or
with Stack is zero or a negative number (the most significant
bit is on).
Discrete Bit Flags
OR S
Description
SP63
SP70
Will be on if the result in the accumulator is zero
Will be on if the result in the accumulator is negative
In the following example, when X1 is on, the binary value in the accumulator will be ORed
with the binary value in the first level of the stack. The result resides in the accumulator.
DirectSOFT
X1
V1401
LDD
5
V1400
4
7
E
2
V1400
8 7
A
Load the value in V1400 and
V1401 in the accumulator
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
Acc.
0
1
0 1
0
1
0
0 0
1
1
1
1 1
1
0
0
0
1 0
1
0
0
8 7
6 5
4 3
0 0
1
1
1
2
1
0
1 0
1
0
0
ORS
Acc.
OR the value in the
accumulator with the value
in the first level of the
accumulator stack
36476A38
OR (top of stack)
Acc.
0
1
0 1
0
1
0
0 0
1
1
1
1 1
1
0
0
0
1 0
1
0
0
0 0
1
1
1
1 0
1
0
0
1
0 1
1
0
1 0
0
0
1 1
0
1
1
1 0
1
0
0 1
1
1
0 0
0
0
1
0 1
1
0
0
0
1
0 0
0
1
0
1
0 1
1
0
0
1
0
1
1 0
1
1
0 0
1
1
1 0
6
F
A
A
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
OUTD
V1500
Copy the value in the
accumulator to V1500 and
V1501
7
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
5-78
$
B
STR
1
SHFT
L
ANDST
D
Q
SHFT
S
RST
SHFT
D
OR
GX
OUT
3
3
ENT
D
B
3
1
E
4
A
0
A
0
ENT
ENT
B
1
7
V1501
F
5
A
0
A
0
ENT
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
6
7
V1500
1
0
1
0
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
Exclusive Or (XOR)
230
240
250-1
260
DS Used
HPP Used
1
2
3
Operand Data Type
DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250-1 Range DL260 Range
A
aaa
aaa
aaa
aaa
4
5
Discrete Bit Flags
Description
6
7
NOTE: The status flags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same flags is executed.
In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V2000 will be loaded into the accumulator 8
using the Load instruction. The value in the accumulator is exclusive OR’d with V2006 using
the Exclusive Or instruction. The value in the lower 16 bits of the accumulator are output to
9
V2010 using the Out instruction.
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
The Exclusive Or instruction is a 16-bit instruction that
performs an exclusive OR of the value in the lower 16 bits of
the accumulator and a specified V-memory location (Aaaa). The
result resides in the accumulator. The discrete status flag indicates
if the result of the XOR is zero.
V-memory
V
All
See memory map
Pointer
P
-
SP63
SP70
DirectSOFT
X1
All
See memory map
All V-memory.
See memory map
XOR
A aaa
All
See memory map
All V-memory.
See memory map
All
See memory map
All V-memory.
See memory map
Will be on if the result in the accumulator is zero
Will be on if the result in the accumulator is negative
V2000
LD
2
V2000
8
7
A
The upper 16 bits of the accumulator
will be set to 0
Load the value in V2000 into
the lower 16 bits of the
accumulator
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Acc. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 1 0 0 1
0 0 0 1 1 1
1 0 1 0
XOR
V2006
XOR the value in the
accumulator with
the value in V2006
Acc.
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1
1 0 1 0
6A38
XOR (V2006)
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 1 1
1 0 0 0
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Acc. 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1
0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0
OUT
V2010
4
Copy the lower 16 bits of the
accumulator to V2010
E
4
2
V2010
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
$
B
STR
1
SHFT
L
D
3
ANDST
SHFT
X
SET
GX
OUT
ENT
SHFT
SHFT
Q
SHFT
V
AND
OR
C
2
V
AND
C
SHFT
V
AND
C
A
B
A
0
2
1
A
0
2
0
A
A
0
0
A
A
0
0
ENT
G
6
ENT
ENT
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5-79
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Exclusive Or Double (XORD)
230
240
250-1
260
DS Used
HPP Used
The Exclusive Or Double is a 32-bit instruction
that performs an exclusive OR of the value in the
accumulator and the value (Kaaa), which is an
8-digit (max) constant. The result resides in the
accumulator. Discrete status flags indicate if the
result of the Exclusive Or Double is zero or a negative
number (the most significant bit is on).
Operand Data Type
Constant
DL230 Range
K
XORD
K aaa
DL240 Range DL250-1 Range DL260 Range
aaa
aaa
aaa
aaa
0-FFFFFFFF
0-FFFFFFFF
0-FFFFFFFF
0-FFFFFFFF
NOTE: The status flags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same flags is executed.
Discrete Bit Flags
Description
SP63
SP70
Will be on if the result in the accumulator is zero
Will be on if the result in the accumulator is negative
In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V2000 and V2001 will be loaded
into the accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The value in the accumulator is
exclusively OR’d with 36476A38 using the Exclusive Or Double instruction. The value in the
accumulator is output to V2010 and V2011 using the Out Double instruction.
DirectSOFT
V2001
X1
5
LDD
V2000
Load the value in V2000 and
V2001 into the accumulator
4
?
7
V2000
E
2
8
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
A
8
7
6 5
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
Acc.
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
1 1
XORD 36476A38
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
1 1
1
0
1 1
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
2
3
9
2
4
2
XORD
Acc.
K36476A38
XORD the value in the
accumulator with
the constant value
36476A38
7
OUTD
Acc.
0
0
2
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
1 1
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
V2010
Copy the value in the
accumulator to V2010
and V2011
6
V2011
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
$
B
STR
SHFT
L
ANDST
D
SHFT
X
SET
Q
D
G
E
3
GX
OUT
5-80
6
SHFT
D
1
3
OR
4
3
ENT
D
C
3
SHFT
D
H
G
7
C
2
2
0
A
0
SHFT
K
JMP
SHFT
A
SHFT
A
B
3
6
A
0
0
1
A
0
A
D
ENT
0
3
I
8
ENT
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
ENT
4
V2010
4 3
1 1
0
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
Exclusive OR Formatted (XORF)
DS Used
HPP Used
1
2
3
Operand Data Type
DL250-1 Range
DL260 Range
4
A
aaa
bbb
aaa
bbb
5
6
7
8
Discrete Bit Flags
Description
9
10
NOTE: Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag.
11
In the following example, when X1 is on, the binary pattern of C10–C13 (4 bits) will be loaded
into the accumulator using the Load Formatted instruction. The value in the accumulator
will be logically Exclusive OR’d with the bit pattern from Y20–Y23 using the Exclusive Or 12
Formatted instruction. The value in the lower 4 bits of the accumulator are output to C20–
C23 using the Out Formatted instruction.
13
14
A
B
C
D
The Exclusive Or Formatted instruction performs an exclusive OR of
the binary value in the accumulator and a specified range of discrete
memory bits (1 to 32).
The instruction requires a starting location (Aaaa) and the number
of bits (Kbbb) to be exclusive OR’d. Discrete status flags indicate if
the result of the Exclusive Or Formatted is zero or negative (the most
significant bit is on).
Inputs
Outputs
Control Relays
Stage bits
Timer bits
Counter bits
Special Relays
Global I/O
Constant
X
Y
C
S
T
CT
SP
GX/GY
K
SP63
SP70
0–777
0–777
0–1777
0–1777
0–377
0–177
0-777
-
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
1–32
XORF
K bbb
0–1777
0–1777
0–3777
0–1777
0–377
0–377
0–777
0-3777
-
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
1–32
Will be on if the result in the accumulator is zero
Will be on if the result in the accumulator is negative
DirectSOFT32
X1
LDF
C10
Location
Constant
C13 C12 C11 C10
C10
K4
OFF ON
K4
Load the status of 4
consecutive bits (C10-C13)
into the accumulator
X0RF
Y20
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
8
7 6 5
4 3
2
1
0
0
0
0 0
0
0
1 1
0
0
0
0 0
0
0
0
0
0 0
0 0
0
0
0
0
0
0 0
0 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Acc.
0
0
0 0
0
0
0
0 0
0
0
0
0 0
0
0
0
0 0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
0 0
0
0
0
0 0
0
0
0
0 1
1
0
0
Accumulator
Exclusive OR the binary bit
pattern (Y20-Y23) with the
value in the accumulator
OUTF
ON OFF
The unused accumulator bits are set to zero
K4
Acc.
0
0 0
0
0
0
0
Y23 Y22 Y21 Y20
XORF (Y20-Y23) ON OFF ON OFF
C20
K4
Copy the specified number
of bits from the accumulator
to C20-C23
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
$
B
STR
A aaa
SHFT
L
ANDST
D
SHFT
X
SET
Q
GX
OUT
SHFT
F
1
3
OR
5
Location
Constant
C20
K4
ENT
F
NEXT
5
SHFT
F
5
PREV
PREV
NEXT
NEXT
NEXT
NEXT
C
A
C
A
2
2
0
B
1
A
E
0
E
4
E
0
4
4
C23 C22 C21 C20
ON ON OFF OFF
Standard RLL
230
240
250-1
260
ENT
ENT
ENT
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5-81
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Exclusive Or with Stack (XORS)
The Exclusive Or with Stack instruction is a 32-bit
instruction that performs an Exclusive Or of the value in
the accumulator with the first level of the accumulator
stack. The result resides in the accumulator. The value in
the first level of the accumulator stack is removed from the
stack and all values are moved up one level. Discrete status
flags indicate if the result of the Exclusive Or with Stack is
zero or a negative number (the most significant bit is on).
230
240
250-1
260
DS Used
HPP Used
Discrete Bit Flags
XO R S
Description
SP63
SP70
Will be on if the result in the accumulator is zero
Will be on if the result in the accumulator is negative
NOTE: Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag.
In the following example, when X1 is on, the binary value in the accumulator will be Exclusive
OR’d with the binary value in the first level of the accumulator stack. The result will reside in
the accumulator.
DirectSOFT
V1401
LDD
X1
5
V1400
4
7
V1400
E
2
8
7
A
Load the value in V1400 and
V1401 into the accumulator
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
Acc.
8 7
6 5
4 3
2
1
0
0
1
0 1
0
1
0
0 0
1
1
1
1 1
1
0
0
0
1 0
1
0
0
0 0
1
1
1
1 0
1
0
XORS
0
1
0 1
0
1
0
0 0
1
1
1
1 1
1
0
0
0
1 0
1
0
0
0 0
1
1
1
1 0
1
0
36476A38
XOR (1st level of Stack) 0
0
1 1
0
1
1
0 0
1
0
0
0 1
1
1
0
1
1 0
1
0
1
0 0
0
1
1
1 0
0
0
0
0
1
0 0
1
0
1
0
0
1
0 0
0
0
1
0
1
0 0
1
0
0
1
0
1
0 0
0
0
1
0 0
1
0
0
0 0
1
0
2
9
2
2
Acc.
Exclusive OR the value
in the accumulator
with the value in the
first level of the
accumulator stack
OUTD
Acc.
V1500
6
Copy the value in the
accumulator to V1500 and V1501
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
$
B
STR
SHFT
L
ANDST
D
SHFT
X
SET
Q
GX
OUT
SHFT
D
5-82
1
3
OR
3
ENT
D
B
3
SHFT
S
RST
B
1
1
E
4
A
0
A
0
ENT
ENT
F
5
3
V1501
A
0
A
0
ENT
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
4
4
V1500
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
Compare (CMP)
230
240
250-1
260
DS Used
HPP Used
1
A aaa
2
3
Operand Data Type
DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250-1 Range DL260 Range
A
aaa
aaa
aaa
aaa
4
5
Discrete Bit Flags
Description
6
7
NOTE: The status flags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same flags is executed.
8
In the following example, when X1 is on, the constant 4526 will be loaded into the lower 16
bits of the accumulator using the Load instruction. The value in the accumulator is compared
9
with the value in V2000 using the Compare instruction. The corresponding discrete status
flag will be turned on indicating the result of the comparison. In this example, if the value in
the accumulator is less than the value specified in the Compare instruction, SP60 will turn on, 10
energizing contact C30.
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
The compare instruction is a 16-bit instruction that
compares the value in the lower 16 bits of the accumulator
with the value in a specified V-memory location (Aaaa).
The corresponding status flag will be turned on indicating
the result of the comparison.
V-memory
All
V See memory
map
Pointer
P
SP60
SP61
SP62
-
CMP
All
See memory map
All V-memory.
See memory map
All
See memory map
All V-memory.
See memory map
All
See memory map
All V-memory.
See memory map
On when the value in the accumulator is less than the instruction value.
On when the value in the accumulator is equal to the instruction value.
On when the value in the accumulator is greater than the instruction value.
DirectSOFT
X1
CONSTANT
LD
4
K4526
Load the constant value
4526 into the lower 16 bits of
the accumulator
5
?
2
6
The unused accumulator
bits are set to zero
Acc. 0
0
0
0
44 55 2?
2 66
Compared
with
CMP
V2000
8
Compare the value in the
accumulator with the value
in V2000
SP60
9
4
5
V2000
C30
OUT
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
$
B
STR
SHFT
L
ANDST
SHFT
C
$
STR
GX
OUT
2
D
1
ENT
SHFT
3
SHFT
M
ORST
P
SHFT
SP
STRN
G
SHFT
C
D
2
K
JMP
C
CV
6
3
E
A
A
0
0
4
2
F
A
5
0
C
A
2
0
G
A
6
0
ENT
ENT
ENT
ENT
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5-83
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Compare Double (CMPD)
230
240
250-1
260
DS Used
HPP Used
The Compare Double instruction is a 32–bit instruction that
compares the value in the accumulator with the value (Aaaa),
which is either two consecutive V-memory locations or an 8–digit
(max) constant. The corresponding status flag will be turned on
indicating the result of the comparison.
Operand Data Type
DL240 Range DL250-1 Range DL260 Range
A
aaa
aaa
V-memory
V
All
See memory map
Pointer
P
-
Constant
K
0-FFFFFFFF
All
See memory map
All V-memory.
See memory map
0-FFFFFFFF
Discrete Bit Flags
aaa
All
See memory map
All V-memory.
See memory map
0-FFFFFFFF
aaa
All
See memory map
All V-memory.
See memory map
0-FFFFFFFF
Description
SP60
SP61
SP62
On when the value in the accumulator is less than the instruction value
On when the value in the accumulator is equal to the instruction value
On when the value in the accumulator is greater than the instruction value
NOTE: The status flags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same flags is executed.
In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V2000 and V2001 will be loaded into
the accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The value in the accumulator is compared
with the value in V2010 and V2011 using the CMPD instruction. The corresponding discrete
status flag will be turned on indicating the result of the comparison. In this example, if the
value in the accumulator is less than the value specified in the Compare instruction, SP60 will
turn on, energizing contact C30.
DirectSOFT
X1
V2001
LDD
V2000
4
5
2
6
7
2
9
9
Acc. 4
5
?
2
6
77 72
9
9
2
6
V2000
Load the value in V2000 and
V2001 into the accumulator
Compared
with
CMPD
V2010
6
Compare the value in the
accumulator with the value
in V2010 and V2011
SP60
7
3
9
5
V2011
0
V2010
C30
OUT
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
$
B
STR
1
ENT
SHFT
L
ANDST
D
SHFT
C
SHFT
M
ORST
P
SHFT
SP
STRN
G
SHFT
C
D
$
STR
GX
OUT
5-84
DL230 Range
CMPD
A aaa
2
3
D
C
3
2
CV
6
3
D
A
A
2
A
0
C
3
0
0
A
0
2
ENT
ENT
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
A
A
0
0
ENT
B
1
A
0
ENT
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
Compare Formatted (CMPF)
1
2
3
Operand Data Type
DL250-1 Range
DL260 Range
A
aaa
bbb
aaa
bbb
4
5
6
7
8
Discrete Bit Flags
Description
9
10
NOTE: Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag.
In the following example, when X1 is on the Load Formatted instruction loads the binary 11
value (6) from C10–C13 into the accumulator. The CMPF instruction compares the value
in the accumulator to the value in Y20–Y23 (E hex). The corresponding discrete status flag 12
will be turned on indicating the result of the comparison. In this example, if the value in the
accumulator is less than the value specified in the Compare instruction, SP60 will turn on,
13
energizing C30.
14
A
B
C
D
230
240
250-1
260
The Compare Formatted compares the value in the
accumulator with a specified number of discrete locations
(1–32). The instruction requires a starting location (Aaaa)
and the number of bits (Kbbb) to be compared. The
corresponding status flag will be turned on indicating the
result of the comparison.
CMPF
A aaa
K bbb
DS Used
HPP Used
Inputs
Outputs
Control Relays
Stage bits
Timer bits
Counter bits
Special Relays
Global I/O
Constant
SP60
SP61
SP62
X
Y
C
S
T
CT
SP
GX/GY
K
0–777
0–777
0–1777
0–1777
0–377
0–177
0-777
-
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
1–32
0–1777
0–1777
0–3777
0–1777
0–377
0–377
0–777
0-3777
-
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
1–32
On when the value in the accumulator is less than the first level value in the Accumulator Stack.
On when the value in the accumulator is equal to the first level value in the Accumulator Stack
On when the value in the accumulator is greater than the first level value in the Accumulator Stack.
DirectSOFT
X1
LDF
C10
K4
CMPF
Y20
K4
SP60
C30
OUT
Load the value of the
specified discrete locations
(C10-- C13) into the
accumulator
Compare the value in the
accumulator with the value
of the specified discrete
location (Y20-- Y23)
Location
Constant
C10
K4
C13 C12 C11 C10
OFF ON ON OFF
The unused accumulator
bits are set to zero
Acc.
Y23 Y22 Y21 Y20
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
6
Compared
with
ON ON ON OFF
E
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5-85
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Compare with Stack (CMPS)
230
240
250-1
260
DS Used
HPP Used
The Compare with Stack instruction is a 32-bit instruction that
compares the value in the accumulator with the value in the first
level of the accumulator stack.
The corresponding status flag will be turned on indicating the
result of the comparison. This does not affect the value in the
accumulator.
Discrete Bit Flags
Description
On when the value in the Accumulator is less than the first level value in the
Accumulator Stack
On when the value in the Accumulator is equal to the first level value in the
Accumulator Stack
On when the value in the Accumulator is greater than the first level value in the
Accumulator Stack
SP60
SP61
SP62
NOTE: Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag.
In the following example when X1 is on, the value in V1400 and V1401 is loaded into the
accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The value in V1410 and V1411 is loaded
into the accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The value that was loaded into the
accumulator from V1400 and V1401 is placed on top of the stack when the second Load
instruction is executed. The value in the accumulator is compared with the value in the first
level of the accumulator stack using the CMPS instruction. The corresponding discrete status
flag will be turned on indicating the result of the comparison. In this example, if the value in
the accumulator is less than the value in the stack, SP60 will turn on, energizing C30.
DirectSOFT
X1
LDD
V1400
LDD
V1410
SP60
6
5
0
0
3
5
4
4
Load the value in V1410 and
V1411 into the accumulator
Acc. 6
5
0
0
3
5
4
4
V1411
C30
OUT
B
STR
1
ENT
SHFT
L
ANDST
D
SHFT
L
ANDST
D
SHFT
C
SHFT
M
ORST
P
SHFT
SP
STRN
G
C
D
$
STR
2
3
3
SHFT
D
D
B
3
B
3
2
5
5
0
0
3
V1410
5 4 4
Acc. 5
5
0
0
3
5
4
4
Compared with
Top of Stack
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
$
V1400
V1401
Load the value in V1400 and
V1401 into the accumulator
Compare the value in the
accumulator with the value
in the first level of the
accumulator stack
CMPS
GX
OUT
5-86
C MP S
CV
6
3
1
1
E
E
4
4
S
RST
ENT
A
ENT
A
0
0
ENT
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
A
B
0
1
A
A
0
0
ENT
ENT
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
Compare Real Number (CMPR)
230
240
250-1
260
DS Used
HPP N/A
1
2
3
Operand Data Type
DL250-1 Range
DL260 Range
aaa
aaa
4
5
6
Discrete Bit Flags
Description
7
8
9
NOTE: Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag.
10
In the following example, when X1 is on, the LDR instruction loads the real number
representation for 7 decimal into the accumulator. The CMPR instruction compares the 11
accumulator contents with the real representation for decimal 6. Since 7 > 6, the corresponding
discrete status flag is turned on (special relay SP62).
12
13
14
A
B
OUT
C
D
The Compare Real Number instruction compares a real
number value in the accumulator with two consecutive
V-memory locations containing a real number. The
corresponding status flag will be turned on indicating the
result of the comparison. Both numbers being compared are
32 bits long.
CMPR
A aaa
A
V-memory
V
Pointer
P
Constant
R
SP60
SP61
SP62
SP71
SP75
LDR
R7.0
CMPR
R6.0
SP62
All. See
memory map
All V-memory.
See memory map
-3.402823E+038 to
+ 3.402823E+038
On when the value in the accumulator is less than the instruction value.
On when the value in the accumulator is equal to the instruction value.
On when the value in the accumulator is greater than the instruction value.
On anytime the V-memory specified by a pointer (P) is not valid
On when a real number instruction is executed and a non-real number encountered.
DirectSOFT
X1
All. See
memory map
All V-memory.
See memory map
-3.402823E+038 to
+ 3.402823E+038
Load the real number
representation for decimal 7
into the accumulator
Compare the value with the
real number representation
for decimal 6
Acc.
4
0
E
0
0
0
0
0
CMPR
4
0
D
0
0
0
0
0
C1
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5-87
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Math Instructions
Add (ADD)
230
240
250-1
260
DS Used
HPP Used
Add is a 16-bit instruction that adds a BCD value in the
accumulator with a BCD value in a V-memory location (Aaaa).
(You cannot use a constant (K) as the BCD value in the box.)
The result resides in the accumulator.
Operand Data Type
A
aaa
All
V See memory
map
Pointer
P
-
aaa
aaa
All
See memory map
All V-memory.
See memory map
All
See memory map
All V-memory.
See memory map
Discrete Bit Flags
aaa
All
See memory map
All V-memory.
See memory map
Description
On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero
On when the 16-bit addition instruction results in a carry
On when the 32-bit addition instruction results in a carry
On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative
On when a BCD instruction is executed and a NON-BCD number is encountered
NOTE: The status flags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same flags is executed.
In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V2000 will be loaded into the accumulator
using the Load instruction. The value in the lower 16 bits of the accumulator are added to the
value in V2006 using the Add instruction. The value in the accumulator is copied to V2010
using the Out instruction.
DirectSOFT
V2000
X1
4
LD
9
3
5
V2000
Load the value in V2000 into
the lower 16 bits of the
accumulator
The unused accumulator
bits are set to zero
0 0 0 0 4
ADD
+
V2006
2
Acc.
Add the value in the lower
16 bits of the accumulator
with the value in V2006
9
3
5
(Accumulator)
5
0
0
(V2006)
7
4
3
5
7
4
3
5
OUT
V2010
Copy the value in the lower
16 bits of the accumulator to
V2010
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
$
B
STR
SHFT
L
ANDST
D
SHFT
A
D
GX
OUT
5-88
A aaa
DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250-1 Range DL260 Range
V-memory
SP63
SP66
SP67
SP70
SP75
ADD
0
1
ENT
C
3
3
SHFT
V2010
D
2
C
3
V
AND
A
C
2
A
0
2
0
A
A
B
0
0
1
A
A
A
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
0
0
0
ENT
G
6
ENT
ENT
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
Add Double (ADDD)
230
240
250-1
260
DS Used
HPP Used
1
2
Operand Data Type
DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250-1 Range DL260 Range 3
A
aaa
aaa
aaa
aaa
4
5
6
Discrete Bit Flags
Description
7
8
9
NOTE: The status flags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same flags is executed.
In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V2000 and V2001 will be loaded into 10
the accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The value in the accumulator is added
with the value in V2006 and V2007 using the Add Double instruction. The value in the
11
accumulator is copied to V2010 and V2011 using the Out Double instruction.
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Add Double is a 32-bit instruction that adds the BCD
value in the accumulator with a BCD value (Aaaa), which
is either two consecutive V-memory locations or an
8–digit (max) BCD constant. The result resides in the
accumulator.
-
All
See memory map
All V-memory.
See memory map
All
See memory map
All V-memory.
See memory map
All
See memory map
All V-memory.
See memory map
0-99999999
0-99999999
0-99999999
0-99999999
V-memory
V
All
See memory map
Pointer
P
Constant
K
SP63
SP66
SP67
SP70
SP75
ADDD
A aaa
On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero
On when the 16-bit addition instruction results in a carry
On when the 32-bit addition instruction results in a carry
On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative
On when a BCD instruction is executed and a NON-BCD number is encountered
DirectSOFT
X1
V2001
LDD
V2000
6
7
3
9
5
0
2
6
V2000
Load the value in V2000 and
V2001 into the accumulator
ADDD
V2006
Add the value in the
accumulator with the value
in V2006 and V2007
6
7
3
9
5
0
2
6
(Accumulator)
+ 2
0
0
0
4
0
4
6
(V2006 and V2007)
Acc. 8
7
3
9
9
0
7
2
8
7
3
9
9
0
7
2
OUTD
V2010
V2010
V2011
Copy the value in the
accumulator to V2010 and
V2011
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
$
B
STR
SHFT
L
ANDST
D
SHFT
A
D
GX
OUT
0
SHFT
D
1
3
3
3
ENT
D
D
C
3
3
D
2
C
3
SHFT
A
V
AND
C
0
2
2
A
A
A
0
0
0
A
A
B
0
0
1
ENT
G
A
6
0
ENT
ENT
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5-89
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
Add Real (ADDR)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
230
240
250-1
260
DS Used
HPP N/A
5-90
Add Real is a 32-bit instruction that adds a real number, which is
either two consecutive V-memory locations or a 32-bit constant,
to a real number in the accumulator. Both numbers must conform
to the IEEE floating point format. The result is a 32-bit real
number that resides in the accumulator.
Operand Data Type
ADDR
A aaa
DL250-1 Range
DL260 Range
A
aaa
aaa
V-memory
V
Pointer
P
Constant
R
All. See
memory map
All V-memory.
See memory map
-3.402823E+038 to
+ 3.402823E+038
All. See
memory map
All V-memory.
See memory map
-3.402823E+038 to
+ 3.402823E+038
Discrete Bit Flags Description
SP63
SP70
SP71
SP72
SP73
SP74
SP75
On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero
On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative
On anytime the V-memory specified by a pointer (P) is not valid
On anytime the value in the accumulator is an invalid floating point number
On when a signed addition or subtraction results in a incorrect sign bit
On anytime a floating point math operation results in an underflow error
On when a real number instruction is executed and a non-real number was encountered
NOTE: Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag.
DirectSOFT
X1
LDR
4
0
E
0
0
0
0
0
R7.0
Load the real number 7.0
into the accumulator
4
0
E
0
0
0
0
0
(Accumulator)
1
5
+ 4
1
7
0
0
0
0
0
(ADDR)
2
2
Acc. 4
1
B
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
7
+
(decimal)
ADDR
R15.0
V1401
Add the real number 15.0 to
the accumulator contents,
which is in real number
format.
OUTD
V1400
Copy the result in the accumulator
to V1400 and V1401.
4
1
B
V1400
0
0
0
(Hex number)
Real Value
Acc.
Sign Bit
8 4
2
1
8
4 2
1
8
4
2 1
8
4
2
1
8 4
2
1
8
4 2
1
8
4
2 1
8
4
2
1
0 1
0
0
0
0 0
1
1
0
1 1
0
0
0
0
0 0
0
0
0
0 0
0
0
0
0 0
0
0
0
0
Exponent (8 bits)
128 + 2 + 1 = 131
131 - 127 = 4
Implies 2 (exp 4)
Mantissa (23 bits)
1.011 x 2 (exp 4) = 10110. binary= 22 decimal
NOTE1: The current HPP does not support real number entry with automatic conversion to the 32-bit IEEE
format. You must use DirectSOFT for this feature.
NOTE2: If the value being added to a real number is 16,777,216 times smaller than the real number, the
calculation will not work.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
Subtract (SUB)
230
240
250-1
260
DS Used
HPP Used
Subtract is a 16-bit instruction that subtracts the BCD
value (Aaaa) in a V-memory location from the BCD value
in the lower 16 bits of the accumulator. The result resides
in the accumulator.
1
2
Operand Data Type
DL230 Range DL240 Range DL250-1 Range DL260 Range 3
A
aaa
aaa
aaa
aaa
4
5
Discrete Bit Flags
Description
6
7
8
NOTE: A constant (K) cannot be used for the BCD value.
Status flags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same flags is executed.
9
In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V2000 will be loaded into the
accumulator using the Load instruction. The value in V2006 is subtracted from the value 10
in the accumulator using the Subtract instruction. The value in the accumulator is copied to
V2010 using the Out instruction.
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
V-memory
V
All
See memory map
Pointer
P
-
SP63
SP66
SP67
SP70
SP75
SUB
A aaa
All
See memory map
All V-memory.
See memory map
All
See memory map
All V-memory.
See memory map
All
See memory map
All V-memory.
See memory map
On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero
On when the 16 bit addition instruction results in a carry
On when the 32 bit addition instruction results in a carry
On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative
On when a BCD instruction is executed and a NON-BCD number is encountered
V2000
Direct SOFT
X1
2
LD
4
7
5
V2000
Load the value in V2000 into
the lower 16 bits of the
accumulator
The unused accumulator
bits are set to zero
0 0 0 0
_
SUB
V2006
Acc.
Subtract the value in V2006
from the value in the lower
16 bits of the accumulator
OUT
V2010
2
4
7
5
(Accumulator)
1
5
9
2
(V2006)
0
8
8
3
0
8
8
3
V2010
Copy the value in the lower
16 bits of the accumulator to
V2010
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
$
B
STR
SHFT
L
ANDST
D
SHFT
S
RST
U
GX
OUT
1
ENT
C
3
ISG
SHFT
B
2
1
V
AND
C
2
A
0
A
0
A
SHFT
V
AND
C
A
B
A
0
1
0
2
0
ENT
A
0
A
0
G
6
ENT
ENT
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5-91
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Subtract Double (SUBD)
230
240
250-1
260
Subtract Double is a 32-bit instruction that subtracts the
BCD value (Aaaa), which is either two consecutive V-memory
locations or an 8-digit (max) constant, from the BCD value in
the accumulator. The result resides in the accumulator.
Operand Data Type
SUBD
A aaa
DL230 Range
DL240 Range
DL250-1 Range
A
aaa
aaa
aaa
aaa
V-memory
V
All (See page 3 - 53)
Pointer
P
-
Constant
K
0-99999999
All (See page 3-54)
All V-memory
(See page 3-54)
0-99999999
All (See page 3-55)
All V-memory
(See page 3-55)
0-99999999
All (See page 3-56)
All V-memory
(See page 3-56)
0-99999999
Discrete Bit Flags
SP63
SP64
SP65
SP70
SP75
DL260 Range
Description
On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero
On when the 16 bit subtraction instruction results in a borrow
On when the 32 bit subtraction instruction results in a borrow
On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative
On when a BCD instruction is executed and a NON-BCD number was encountered
NOTE: The status flags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same flags is executed.
DS Used
HPP Used
5-92
In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V2000 and V2001 will be loaded
into the accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The value in V2006 and V2007
is subtracted from the value in the accumulator. The value in the accumulator is copied to
V2010 and V2011 using the Out Double instruction.
V2001
DirectSOFT
X1
0
LDD
1
0
V2000
6
3
2
7
4
V2000
Load the value in V2000 and
V2001 into the accumulator
0 1
0
6
3
2
7
4
6
7
2
3
7
5
0
3
9
0
8
9
9
0
3
9
0
8
9
9
_
SUBD
V2006
0
ACC.
The value in V2006 and V2007
is subtracted from the value in
the accumulator
OUTD
0
V2010
V2011
V2010
Copy the value in the
accumulator to V2010 and
V2011
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
$
B
STR
D
1
SHFT
L
ANDST
SHFT
S
RST
SHFT
GX
OUT
SHFT
D
3
3
ENT
D
U
C
3
ISG
B
C
1
2
D
A
2
A
0
C
3
0
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
A
B
1
A
0
2
0
A
A
0
0
ENT
ENT
A
0
G
6
ENT
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
Subtract Real (SUBR)
DS Used
HPP N/A
The Subtract Real is a 32-bit instruction that subtracts a real
number, which is either two consecutive V-memory locations or
a 32-bit constant, from a real number in the accumulator. The
result is a 32-bit real number that resides in the accumulator. Both
numbers must be Real data type (IEEE floating point format).
Operand Data Type
DL250-1 Range
DL260 Range
aaa
aaa
A
V-memory
Pointer
SUBR
A aaa
V
All. (See page 3-55)
All. (See page 3-56)
P All V-memory (See page 3-55) All V-memory (See page 3-56)
-3.402823E+038 to
-3.402823E+038 to
R
+ 3.402823E+038
+ 3.402823E+038
Constant
Discrete Bit Flags
SP63
SP70
SP71
SP72
SP73
SP74
SP75
Description
On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero
On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative
On anytime the V-memory specified by a pointer (P) is not valid
On anytime the value in the accumulator is an invalid floating point number
On when a signed addition or subtraction results in an incorrect sign bit
On anytime a floating point math operation results in an underflow error
On when a real number instruction is executed and a non-real number was encountered
NOTE: Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag.
DirectSOFT
X1
LDR
4
1
B
0
0
0
0
0
R22.0
Load the real number
22.0 into the accumulator.
_
2
2
B
0
0
0
0
0
(Accumulator)
5
4
_ 4
1
1
1
7
0
0
0
0
0
(SUBR)
7
Acc. 4
0
E
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
(decimal)
SUBR
R15.0
V1401
4
Subtract the real number
15.0 from the accumulator
contents, which is in real
number format.
OUTD
V1400
Copy the result in the
accumulator to V1400
and V1401.
0
E
V1400
0
0
0
(Hex number)
Real Value
Acc.
Sign Bit
8 4
2
1
8
4 2
1
8
4
2 1
8
4
2
1
8 4
2
1
8
4 2
1
8
4
2 1
8
4
2
1
0 1
0
0
0
0 0
0
1
1
1 0
0
0
0
0
0 0
0
0
0
0 0
0
0
0
0 0
0
0
0
0
Exponent (8 bits)
128 + 1 = 129
129 - 127 = 2
Implies 2 (exp 2)
Mantissa (23 bits)
1.11 x 2 (exp 2) = 111. binary= 7 decimal
NOTE: The current HPP does not support real number entry with automatic conversion to the 32-bit IEEE
format. You must use DirectSOFT for this feature.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
ndard RLL
structions
230
240
250-1
260
5-93
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Multiply (MUL)
230
240
250-1
260
Multiply is a 16-bit instruction that multiplies the BCD value
(Aaaa), which is either a V-memory location or a 4–digit
(max) constant, by the BCD value in the lower 16 bits of the
accumulator The result can be up to 8 digits and resides in
the accumulator.
Operand Data Type
MUL
A aaa
DL230 Range
DL240 Range
DL250-1 Range
A
aaa
aaa
aaa
aaa
V-memory
V
All (See page 3-53)
Pointer
P
-
Constant
K
0-9999
All (See page 3-54)
All V-memory
(See page 3-54)
0-9999
All (See page 3-55)
All V-memory
(See page 3-55)
0-9999
All (See page 3-56)
All V-memory
(See page 3-56)
0-9999
Discrete Bit Flags
DL260 Range
Description
SP63
SP70
SP75
On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero.
On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative.
On when a BCD instruction is executed and a NON-BCD number was encountered.
NOTE: The status flags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same flags is executed.
In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V2000 will be loaded into the
accumulator using the Load instruction. The value in V2006 is multiplied by the value in
the accumulator. The value in the accumulator is copied to V2010 and V2011 using the Out
Double instruction.
DS Used
HPP Used
5-94
V2000
DirectSOFT
X1
1
LD
0
0
0
V2000
The unused accumulator
bits are set to zero
Load the value in V2000 into
the lower 16 bits of the
accumulator
0
0
0
0
1 0 0 0
X
MUL
Acc.
V2006
2
0
0
0
2
5
0
0
2
5
5
0
0
0
0
0
0
The value in V2006 is
multiplied by the value in the
accumulator
0
OUTD
V2011
V2010
V2010
Copy the value in the
accumulator to V2010 and
V2011
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
$
B
STR
SHFT
L
ANDST
D
SHFT
M
ORST
U
GX
OUT
SHFT
D
1
ENT
C
3
ISG
3
2
L
ANDST
A
C
C
2
A
0
2
0
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
A
A
B
0
0
1
A
A
A
0
0
0
ENT
G
6
ENT
ENT
(Accumulator)
(V2006)
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
Multiply Double (MULD)
230
240
250-1
260
1
2
3
Operand Data Type
DL250-1 Range
DL260 Range
A
aaa
aaa
4
5
Discrete Bit Flags
Description
6
7
NOTE: Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag.
8
In the following example, when X1 is on, the constant Kbc614e hex will be loaded into the
accumulator. When converted to BCD the number is ”12345678”. That number is stored in
9
V1400 and V1401. After loading the constant K2 into the accumulator, we multiply it times
12345678, which is 24691356.
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Multiply Double is a 32-bit instruction that multiplies the
8-digit BCD value in the accumulator by the 8-digit BCD
value in the two consecutive V-memory locations specified
in the instruction. The lower 8 digits of the results reside
in the accumulator. Upper digits of the result reside in the
accumulator stack.
V-memory
Pointer
SP63
SP70
SP75
DS Used
HPP Used
V
P
All V-mem (See page 3-55)
All V-mem (See page 3-55)
MULD
A aaa
All V-mem (See page 3-56)
All V-mem (See page 3-56)
On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero
On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative
On when a BCD instruction is executed and a NON-BCD number was encountered
DirectSOFT
1
X1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
(Accumulator)
Load the hex equivalent
of 12345678 decimal into
the accumulator.
LDD
Kbc614e
Convert the value to
BCD format. It will
occupy eight BCD digits
(32 bits).
BCD
V1401
Output the number to
V1400 and V1401 using
the OUTD instruction.
OUTD
V1400
V1400
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
2
4
6
9
1
3
5
6
2
4
6
9
1
3
5
6
X
2
Acc.
(Accumulator)
Load the constant K2
into the accumulator.
LD
K2
Multiply the accumulator
contents (2) by the
8-digit number in V1400
and V1401.
MULD
V1400
V1403
V1402
Move the result in the
accumulator to V1402
and V1403 using the
OUTD instruction.
OUTD
V1402
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
$
B
STR
SHFT
L
ANDST
D
SHFT
B
C
GX
OUT
SHFT
D
SHFT
L
ANDST
D
SHFT
M
ORST
U
SHFT
D
GX
OUT
1
1
3
2
ENT
D
D
3
3
B
3
ISG
3
1
PREV
3
L
ANDST
PREV
SHFT
B
E
A
A
1
C
2
SHFT
G
6
B
1
E
4
SHFT
E
4
ENT
ENT
D
B
C
4
2
1
E
4
0
ENT
ENT
B
3
0
A
1
0
E
C
4
2
A
0
A
0
ENT
ENT
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5-95
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Multiply Real (MULR)
230
240
250-1
260
DS Used
HPP N/A
5-96
The Multiply Real instruction multiplies a real number in
the accumulator with either a real constant or a real number
occupying two consecutive V-memory locations. The result
resides in the accumulator. Both numbers must be Real data
type (IEEE floating point format).
Operand Data Type
DL250-1 Range
DL260 Range
aaa
aaa
A
V-memory
Pointer
MULR
A aaa
V
All. (See page 3-55)
All. (See page 3-56)
P All V-memory (See page 3-55) All V-memory (See page 3-56)
-3.402823E+038 to
-3.402823E+038 to
R
+ 3.402823E+038
+ 3.402823E+038
Constant
Discrete Bit Flags
SP63
SP70
SP71
SP72
SP73
SP74
SP75
Description
On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero
On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative
On anytime the V-memory specified by a pointer (P) is not valid
On anytime the value in the accumulator is an invalid floating point number
On when a signed addition or subtraction results in an incorrect sign bit
On anytime a floating point math operation results in an underflow error
On when a real number instruction is executed and a non-real number was encountered
NOTE: Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag.
DirectSOFT
X1
LDR
4
0
E
0
0
0
0
0
R 7.0
Load the real number 7.0
into the accumulator.
4
0
E
0
0
0
0
0
(Accumulator)
x
1
5
X 4
1
7
0
0
0
0
0
(MULR)
1
0
5
Acc. 4
2
D
2
0
0
0
0
2
0
7
(decimal)
MULR
R 15.0
V1401
4
Multiply the accumulator
contents by the real number
15.0
2
D
V1400
0
0
0
(Hex number)
Real Value
OUTD
V1400
Copy the result in the accumulator
to V1400 and V1401.
Acc.
8 4
2
1
8
4 2
1
8
4
2 1
8
4
2
1
8 4
2
1
8
4 2
1
8
4
2 1
8
4
2
1
0 1
0
0
0
0 1
0
1
1
0 1
0
0
1
0
0 0
0
0
0
0 0
0
0
0
0 0
0
0
0
0
Exponent (8 bits)
Sign Bit
128 + 4 + 1 = 133
133 - 127 = 6
Implies 2 (exp 6)
Mantissa (23 bits)
1.101001 x 2 (exp 6) = 1101001. binary= 105 decimal
NOTE: The current HPP does not support real number entry with automatic conversion to the 32-bit IEEE
format. You must use DirectSOFT for this feature.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
Divide (DIV)
1
2
3
Operand Data Type
DL230 Range
DL240 Range
DL250-1 Range
DL260 Range
A
aaa
aaa
aaa
aaa
4
5
Discrete Bit Flags
Description
6
7
8
NOTE: The status flags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same flags is executed.
In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V2000 will be loaded into the accumulator 9
using the Load instruction. The value in the accumulator will be divided by the value in V2006
using the Divide instruction. The value in the accumulator is copied to V2010 using the Out 10
instruction.
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
230
240
250-1
260
Divide is a 16-bit instruction that divides the BCD value
in the accumulator by a BCD value (Aaaa), which is either
a V-memory location or a 4-digit (max) constant. The first
part of the quotient resides in the accumulator, and the
remainder resides in the first stack location.
V-memory
V
All (See page 3-53)
Pointer
P
-
Constant
K
1-9999
SP53
SP63
SP70
SP75
DS Used
HPP Used
All (See page 3-54)
All V-memory
(See page 3-54)
1-9999
DIV
A aaa
All (See page 3-55)
All V-memory
(See page 3-55)
1-9999
All (See page 3-56)
All V-memory
(See page 3-56)
1-9999
On when the value of the operand is larger than the accumulator can work with
On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero
On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative
On when a BCD instruction is executed and a NON-BCD number was encountered
DirectSOFT
V2000
X1
5
0
0
0
The unused accumulator
bits are set to zero
0 0 0 0
5
0
0
0
(Accumulator)
5
0
(V2006)
0
0
LD
V2000
Load the value in V2000 into
the lower 16 bits of the
accumulator
DIV
÷
V2006
1
Acc.
The value in the
accumulator is divided by
the value in V2006
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
First stack location contains
the remainder
1
OUT
V2010
0
0
V2010
Copy the value in the lower
16 bits of the accumulator to
V2010
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
$
B
STR
SHFT
L
ANDST
D
SHFT
D
I
GX
OUT
3
1
ENT
C
3
8
SHFT
2
V
AND
V
AND
A
C
C
2
A
0
2
0
A
A
B
0
0
1
A
A
A
0
0
0
ENT
G
6
ENT
ENT
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5-97
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Divide Double (DIVD)
230
240
250-1
260
DS Used
HPP Used
5-98
Divide Double is a 32-bit instruction that divides the BCD
value in the accumulator by a BCD value (Aaaa), which must
be obtained from two consecutive V-memory locations (You
cannot use a constant as the parameter in the box). The
first part of the quotient resides in the accumulator, and the
remainder resides in the first stack location.
Operand Data Type
V-memory
Pointer
A aaa
DL250-1 Range
DL260 Range
A
aaa
aaa
V
P
All V-memory (See page 3-55)
All V-memory (See page 3-55)
All V-memory (See page 3-56)
All V-memory (See page 3-56)
Discrete Bit Flags
SP53
SP63
SP70
SP75
DIVD
Description
On when the value of the operand is larger than the accumulator can work with
On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero
On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative
On when a BCD instruction is executed and a NON-BCD number was encountered
NOTE: Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag.
In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V1400 and V1401 will be loaded into
the accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The value in the accumulator is divided
by the value in V1420 and V1421 using the Divide Double instruction. The first part of the
quotient resides in the accumulator and the remainder resides in the first stack location. The
value in the accumulator is copied to V1500 and V1501 using the Out Double instruction.
DirectSOFT
V1401
X1
0
LDD
1
V1400
5
0
0
0
0
0
V1400
The unused accumulator
bits are set to zero
Load the value in V1400 and
V1401 into the accumulator
0
1
5
0
0
0
0
0
(Accumulator)
÷
0
0
0
0
0
0
5
0
(V1421 and V1420)
Acc.
0
0
0
3
0
0
0
0
DIVD
V1420
The value in the accumulator
is divided by the value in
V1420 and V1421
0
V1500
0
0
3
0
V1501
Copy the value in the
accumulator to V1500
and V1501
B
SHFT
L
ANDST
D
SHFT
D
I
GX
OUT
SHFT
3
D
1
3
8
3
ENT
D
B
3
V
AND
B
B
1
F
1
1
5
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
E
E
A
4
4
0
A
C
A
0
2
0
A
A
0
0
ENT
0
0
V1500
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
STR
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
First stack location contains
the remainder
OUTD
$
0
ENT
ENT
0
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
Divide Real (DIVR)
The Divide Real instruction divides a real number in the
accumulator by either a real constant or a real number
occupying two consecutive V-memory locations. The result
resides in the accumulator. Both numbers must conform to the
IEEE floating point format.
230
240
250-1
260
Operand Data Type
DS Used
HPP N/A
DIVR
A aaa
DL250-1 Range
DL260 Range
A
aaa
aaa
V-memory
Pointer
V
P
Constant
R
All (See page 3-55)
All V-mem (See page 3-55)
-3.402823E + 038 to
+ 3.402823E+038
All (See page 3-56)
All V-mem (See page 3-56)
-3.402823E + 038 to
+ 3.402823E+038
Discrete Bit Flags
SP63
SP70
SP71
SP72
SP73
SP74
SP75
Description
On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero.
On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative.
On anytime the V-memory specified by a pointer (P) is not valid.
On anytime the value in the accumulator is a valid floating point number.
On when a signed addition or subtraction results in a incorrect sign bit.
On anytime a floating point math operation results in an underflow error.
On when a real number instruction is executed and a non-real number was encountered.
NOTE: Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag.
DirectSOFT
LDR
4
1
7
0
0
0
0
0
R15.0
Load the real number 15.0
into the accumulator.
1
5
4
1
7
0
0
0
0
0
(Accumulator)
÷ 1
0
÷ 4
1
2
0
0
0
0
0
(DIVR )
1 . 5
Acc. 3
F
C
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
(decimal)
DIVR
R10.0
V1401
3
Divide the accumulator contents
by the real number 10.0.
F
C
V1400
0
0
0
(Hex number)
Real Value
OUTD
V1400
Copy the result in the accumulator
to V1400 and V1401.
Acc.
Sign Bit
8 4
2
1
8
4 2
1
8
4
2 1
8
4
2
1
8 4
2
1
8
4 2
1
8
4
2 1
8
4
2
1
0 0
1
1
1
1 1
1
1
1
0 0
0
0
0
0
0 0
0
0
0
0 0
0
0
0
0 0
0
0
0
0
Exponent (8 bits)
64 + 32 + 16 + 8 + 4 + 2 + 1 = 127
127 - 127 = 0
Implies 2 (exp 0)
Mantissa (23 bits)
1.1 x 2 (exp 0) = 1.1 binary= 1.5 decimal
ndard RLL
X1
NOTE: The current HPP does not support real number entry with automatic conversion to the 32-bit IEEE
format. You must use DirectSOFT for this feature.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-99
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Increment (INC)
The Increment instruction increments a BCD value in a
INC
230 specified V-memory location by “1” each time the instruction
240 is executed.
250-1
260 Decrement (DEC)
230
240
250-1
260
The Decrement instruction decrements a BCD value in a
specified V-memory location by “1” each time the instruction
is executed.
Operand Data Type
V-memory
Pointer
DS Used
HPP Used
5-100
A aaa
A aaa
DL250-1 Range
DL260 Range
A
aaa
aaa
V
P
All V mem (See page 3-55)
All V mem (See page 3-55)
All V mem (See page 3-56)
All V mem (See page 3-56)
Discrete Bit Flags
SP63
SP75
DEC
Description
On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero.
On when a BCD instruction is executed and a NON-BCD number was encountered.
NOTE: Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag.
In the following increment example, the value in V1400 increases by one each time that C5 is
closed (true).
V1400
DirectSOFT
C5
INC
8
9
8
9
3
5
V1400
Increment the value in
V1400 by “1”.
V1400
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
$
STR
SHFT
SHFT
P
CV
D
I
N
TMR
C
8
3
2
3
6
F
NEXT
NEXT
NEXT
NEXT
B
E
A
A
1
4
0
5
ENT
ENT
0
In the following decrement example, the value in V1400 is decreased by one each time that C5
is closed (true).
DirectSOFT
V1400
C5
DEC
8
9
8
9
3
5
V1400
Decrement the value in
V1400 by “1”.
V1400
3
4
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
$
STR
SHFT
SHFT
P
CV
D
D
E
C
3
4
3
2
NEXT
NEXT
NEXT
NEXT
B
E
A
A
1
4
0
0
F
5
ENT
ENT
NOTE: Use a pulsed contact closure to INC/DEC the value in V–memory once per closure.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
Add Binary (ADDB)
230
240
250-1
260
DS Used
HPP Used
The Add Binary instruction adds a 16-bit number (Aaaa)
to the value stored in the accumulator. The number in the
ADDB
accumulator can be up to 32 bits long. The source of the
A aaa
16-bit operand can be a constant or a data value located in
V-memory. Add Binary performs the addition operation on the
full binary representation of the operands, which distinguishes
it from the Add instruction (see page 5-88), which treats the operands as BCD numbers.
Although the addition operation is performed on the underlying binary values, the native
display format is hexadecimal. For that reason you will need to load constants in hex.
The sum of the Add Binary operation occupies the full 32-bit accumulator and requires an Out
Double to move the sum to V-memory. If the value in the accumulator occupies fewer than 32
bits, leading zeros are loaded in the left-most empty bit positions.
1
2
3
4
5
Operand Data Type
DL250-1 Range
DL260 Range
6
A
aaa
aaa
7
8
Discrete Bit Flags
Description
9
10
NOTE: Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag.
11
In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V1400 will be loaded into the accumulator
using the Load instruction. The binary value in V1420 is added to the binary value in the 12
accumulator using the Add Binary instruction. The value in the accumulator is copied to
V1500 - V1501 using the Out Double instruction.
13
14
A
B
C
D
V-memory
Pointer
Constant.
V
P
K
SP63
SP66
SP67
SP70
SP73
All (See page 3-55)
All V mem (See page 3-55)
0-FFFF
All (See page 3-56)
All V mem (See page 3-56)
0-FFFF
On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero
On when the 16-bit addition instruction results in a carry
On when the 32-bit addition instruction results in a carr
On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative
On when a signed addition or subtraction results in an incorrect sign bit.
Use either
V-memory
DirectSOFT
X1
OR
Constant
V1400
0
A
The unused accumulator
bits are set to zero
0 0 0 0
0
LD
LD
0
5
K2565
V1400
Load the value in V1400
into the lower 16 bits of
the accumulator
BIN
+
ADDB
V1420
Acc.
A
0
5
1
2
C
4
1
C
C
9
C
C
9
(Accumulator)
(V1420)
A05 (Hex) = 2565 (decimal)
12C4 (Hex) = 4804 (decimal)
(Accumulator) 1CC9 (Hex) = 7369 (decimal)
The binary value in the
accumulator is added to the
binary value in V1420
OUTD
V1500
1
V1500
Copy the value in the lower
16bits of the accumulator to
V1500 and V1501
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
STR
1
E NT
SHFT
L
D
1
4
SHFT
A
D
D
B
OUT
SHFT
D
1
0
5
0
ENT
1
4
2
0
0
ENT
0
ENT
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5-101
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Add Binary Double (ADDBD)
230
240
250-1
260
DS Used
HPP Used
Add Binary Double is a 32-bit instruction that adds the binary
value in the accumulator with the value (Aaaa), which is either
two consecutive V-memory locations or an 8-digit (max.) binary
constant. The result resides in the accumulator.
Operand Data Type
V-memory
Pointer
Constant.
DL260 Range
A
aaa
V
P
K
All (See page 3-56)
All V mem (See page 3-56)
0-FFFFFFFF
Discrete Bit Flags
Description
SP63
SP66
SP67
SP70
SP73
5-102
ADDBD
A aaa
On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero
On when the 16-bit addition instruction results in a carry
On when the 32-bit addition instruction results in a carry
On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative
On when a signed addition or subtraction results in an incorrect sign bit
NOTE: Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag.
In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V1400 and V1401 will be loaded into the
accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The binary value in the accumulator is added
with the binary value in V1420 and V1421 using the Add Binary Double instruction. The
value in the accumulator is copied to V1500 and V1501 using the Out Double instruction.
Use either
V-memory
DirectSOFT
X1
OR
Constant
V1401
LDD
V1400
LDD
K2561
Load the value in V1400
and V1401 into the
accumulator
BIN
ADDBD
V1420
V1400
0
0
0
0
0
A
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
A
0
1
(Accumulator)
+ 1
0
0
0
C
0
1
0
(V1421 and V1420)
1
0
0
0
C
A
1
1
1
0
0
0
C
A
1
1
Acc.
The binary value in the
accumulator is added with the
value in V1420 and V1421
OUTD
V1501
V1500
V1500
Copy the value in the
accumulator to V1500
and V1501
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
STR
1
LD
SHFT
D
SHFT
4
0
0
ADD
SHFT
B
D
SHFT
1
4
2
OUT
SHFT
D
SHFT
1
5
0
0
1
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
0
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
Subtract Binary (SUBB)
230
240
250-1
260
DS Used
HPP Used
SUBB
1
2
3
4
5
Operand Data Type
DL250-1 Range
DL260 Range
6
A
aaa
aaa
7
8
Discrete Bit Flags
Description
9
10
NOTE: Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag.
11
In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V1400 will be loaded into the accumulator
using the Load instruction. The binary value in V1420 is subtracted from the binary value in
the accumulator using the Subtract Binary instruction. The value in the accumulator is copied 12
to V1500 - V1501 using the Out Double instruction.
13
14
A
B
C
D
The Subtract Binary instruction subtracts a 16-bit number (Aaaa)
A aaa
from the value stored in the accumulator. The number in the
accumulator can be up to 32 bits long. The source of the 16-bit
operand can be a constant or a data value located in V-memory. Subtract Binary performs the
subtraction operation on the full binary representation of the operands, which distinguishes
it from the Subtract instruction (see page 5-91), which treats the operands as BCD numbers.
Although the subtraction operation is performed on the underlying binary values, the native
display format is hexadecimal. For that reason, you will need to load constants in hex.
The difference (result) of the Subtract Binary operation occupies the full 32 bits of the
accumulator and requires an Out Double to move the value to V-memory. If the value in the
accumulator occupies fewer than 32 bits, leading zeros are loaded in the left-most empty bit
positions of the accumulator.
V-memory
Pointer
Constant
V
P
K
SP63
SP64
SP65
SP70
All (See page 3-55)
All V-mem (See page 3-55)
0-FFFF
All (See page 3-56)
All V-mem (See page 3-56)
0-FFFF
On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero
On when the 16-bit subtraction instruction results in a borrow
On when the 32-bit subtraction instruction results in a borrow
On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative
Use either
V-memory
DirectSOFT
X1
OR
Constant
LD
LD
K1024
V1400
Load the value in V1400
into the lower 16 bits of
the accumulator
1
BIN
SUBB
The unused accumulator
bits are set to zero
0 0 0 0
1
V1420
The binary value in V1420 is
subtracted from the value in
the accumulator
-
Acc.
OUT
V1400
0 2
0
4
2
4
(Accumulator) 1024 (Hex) = 4132 (decimal)
0
A 0
B
(V1420)
0
6
1
9
(Accumulator) 619 (Hex) = 1561 (decimal)
0
6
1
9
A0B (Hex) = 2571 (decimal)
V1500
Copy the value in the lower 16
bits of the accumulator to V1500
V1500
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
STR
1
ENT
SHFT
L
D
1
4
0
SHFT
S
SHFT
U
B
B
1
4
2
0
ENT
OUT
SHFT
1
5
0
0
ENT
0
ENT
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5-103
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Subtract Binary Double (SUBBD)
230
240
250-1
260
DS Used
HPP Used
Subtract Binary Double is a 32-bit instruction that subtracts
the binary value (Aaaa), which is either two consecutive
V-memory locations or an 8-digit (max) binary constant, from
the binary value in the accumulator. The result resides in the
accumulator.
Operand Data Type
DL260 Range
V-memory
Pointer
Constant
A
aaa
V
P
K
All (See page 3-56)
All V mem (See page 3-56)
0-FFFFFFFF
Discrete Bit Flags
Description
SP63
SP64
SP65
SP70
5-104
SUBBD
A aaa
On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero
On when the 16-bit subtraction instruction results in a borrow
On when the 32-bit subtraction instruction results in a borrow
On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative
NOTE: Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag.
In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V1400 and V1401 will be loaded into
the accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The binary value in V1420 and V1421
is subtracted from the binary value in the accumulator using the Subtract Binary Double
instruction. The value in the accumulator is copied to V1500 and V1501 using the Out
Double instruction.
Use either
V-memory
DirectSOFT
X1
OR
Constant
V1401
LDD
K393471
LDD
V1400
Load the value in V1400
and V1401 into the
accumulator
V1400
0
0
0
6
0
0
F
F
0
0
0
0
0
0
6
0
0
F
F
(Accumulator)
0
1
A
0
1
0
0
(V1421 and V1420)
0
5
E 6
F
E
0
0
0
5
E 6
F
E
BIN
-
SUBBD
V1420
Acc.
The binary value in V1420 and
V1421 is subtracted from the
binary value in the accumulator
OUTD
V1500
V1501
Copy the value in the
accumulator to V1500
and V1501
V1500
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
1
ENT
SHFT
STR
L
D
D
SHFT
S
SHFT
U
B
1
4
2
0
ENT
OUT
SHFT
D
1
1
4
B
D
5
0
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
0
0
0
ENT
ENT
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
Multiply Binary (MULB)
1
2
3
4
5
Operand Data Type
DL250-1 Range
DL260 Range
6
A
aaa
aaa
7
8
Discrete Bit Flags
Description
9
NOTE: Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag.
10
In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V1400 will be loaded into the accumulator
using the Load instruction. The binary value in V1420 is multiplied by the binary value in the 11
accumulator using the Multiply Binary instruction. The value in the accumulator is copied to
V1500 - V1501 using the Out Double instruction.
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
230
240
250-1
260
DS Used
HPP Used
The Multiply Binary instruction multiplies a 16-bit number
MULB
A(aaa) by the value stored in the accumulator. The number
A aaa
in the accumulator can be up to 32 bits long. The source of
the 16-bit operand can be a constant or a data value located
in V-memory. Multiply Binary performs the multiplication operation on the full binary
representation of the operands, which distinguishes it from the Multiply instruction (see page
5-94), which treats the operands as BCD numbers. Although the multiplication operation is
performed on the underlying binary values, the native display format is hexadecimal. For that
reason, you will need to load constants in hex.
The product of the Multiply Binary operation occupies the full 32-bit accumulator and requires
an Out Double to move the product to V-memory. If the value in the accumulator occupies
fewer than 32 bits, leading zeros are loaded in the left-most empty bit positions.
V-memory
Pointer
Constant
SP63
SP70
V
P
K
All (See page 3-55)
All V mem (See page 3-55)
0-FFFF
All (See page 3-56)
All V mem (See page 3-56)
0-FFFF
On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero
On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative
Use either
V-memory
DirectSOFT
X1
OR
Constant
LD
V1400
LD
V1400
K2561
Load the value in V1400
into the lower 16 bits of
the accumulator
BIN
The unused accumulator
bits are set to zero
0 0 0 0
MULB
x
V1420
Acc.
The binary value in V1420 is
multiplied by the binary
value in the accumulator
OUTD
V1500
0
A
0
1
0
A 0
1
(Accumulator)
0
0
2
E
(V1420)
A01 (Hex) = 2561 (decimal)
2E (Hex) = 46 (decimal)
0
0
0
1
C
C
2
E
(Accumulator) 1CC2E (Hex) = 117806 (decimal)
0
0
0
1
C
C
2
E
(V1500 - V1501 value = 117806 decimal)
Copy the value of the accumulator
to V1500 and V1501
V1501
V1500
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
STR
1
ENT
SHFT
L
D
1
4
SHFT
M
U
L
B
OUT
SHFT
D
1
0
5
0
ENT
1
4
2
0
0
ENT
0
ENT
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5-105
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Divide Binary (DIVB)
230
240
250-1
260
DS Used
HPP Used
The Divide Binary instruction divides a 16-bit number
DIVB
(Aaaa) into the value stored in the accumulator. The number
A aaa
in the accumulator can be up to 32 bits long. The source of
the 16-bit divisor can be a constant or a data value located
in V-memory. Divide Binary performs the division operation on the full binary representation
of the operands, which distinguishes it from the Divide instruction (see page 5-97), which
treats the operands as BCD numbers. Although the division operation is performed on the
underlying binary values, the native display format is hexadecimal. For that reason you will
need to load constants in hex.
At the completion of the division operation, the quotient resides in the accumulator and the
remainder resides in the first stack location.
The quotient occupies the full 32-bit accumulator and requires an Out Double to move the
quotient to V-memory. If the value in the accumulator occupies fewer than 32 bits, leading
zeros are loaded in the left-most empty bit positions.
Operand Data Type
DL250-1 Range
DL260 Range
V-memory
Pointer
Constant
A
aaa
aaa
V
P
K
All (See page 3-55)
All V mem (See page 3-55)
0-FFFF
All (See page 3-56)
All V mem (See page 3-56)
0-FFFF
Discrete Bit Flags
Description
SP53
SP63
SP70
5-106
On when the value of the operand is larger than the accumulator can work with
On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero
On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative
NOTE: Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag.
In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V1400 will be loaded into the accumulator
using the Load instruction. The binary value in the accumulator is divided by the binary value
in V1420 using the Divide Binary instruction. The value in the accumulator is copied to
V1500 using the Out Double instruction.
Use either
V-memory
DirectSOFT
X1
OR
LD
V1400
Load the value in V1400
into the lower 16 bits of
the accumulator
Constant
LDD
K64001
V1400
A 0
1
The unused accumulator
bits are set to zero
BIN
0
_..
DIVB
V1420
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
F
A 0
1
(Accumulator) FA01 (Hex) = 64001 (decimal)
0
0
5
0
(V1420)
0
3
2
0
(Accumulator)
0
The binary value in the
accumulator is divided by
the binary value in V1420
50 (Hex) = 80 (decimal)
0
320 (Hex) = 800 (decimal)
0
0
0
0
0
1
1 (Hex) = 1 (decimal)
Top of stack holds remainder
OUT
0
V1501
V1500
Copy the value in the lower 16
bits of the accumulator to V1500
F
3
2
0
V1500
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
STR
1
ENT
SHFT
L
D
1
4
SHFT
D
I
V
B
OUT
SHFT
V
1
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
0
5
0
ENT
1
4
2
0
0
ENT
0
ENT
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
Increment Binary (INCB)
The Increment Binary instruction increments a binary value in
a specified V-memory location by “1” each time the instruction
is executed.
230
240
250-1
260
INCB
A aaa
DS Used
HPP Used
Operand Data Type
DL230 Range
DL240 Range
DL250-1 Range
A
aaa
aaa
aaa
aaa
V-memory
V
All (See page 3 - 53)
Pointer
P
-
All (See page 3-54)
All V-memory
(See page 3-54)
All (See page 3-55)
All V-memory
(See page 3-55)
All (See page 3-56)
All V-memory
(See page 3-56)
Discrete Bit Flags
SP63
DL260 Range
Description
On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero
NOTE: The status flags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same flags is executed.
In the following example, when C5 is on, the binary value in V2000 is increased by 1.
DirectSOFT
C5
V2000
4
INCB
A
3
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
C
V2000
$
STR
SHFT
Increment the binary value
in V2000 by “1”
I
8
SHFT
C
N
TMR
C
2
2
F
B
5
1
ENT
C
2
A
0
A
0
V2000
4
A
3
D
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
A
0
ENT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-107
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Decrement Binary (DECB)
230
240
250-1
260
The Decrement Binary instruction decrements a binary
value in a specified V-memory location by “1” each time the
instruction is executed.
DECB
A aaa
DS Used
HPP Used
Operand Data Type
DL230 Range
DL240 Range
DL250-1 Range
A
aaa
aaa
aaa
aaa
V-memory
V
All (See page 3 - 53)
Pointer
P
-
All (See page 3 - 54)
All V-memory
(See page 3 - 54)
All (See page 3 - 55)
All V-memory
(See page 3 - 55)
All (See page 3 - 56)
All V-memory
(See page 3 - 56)
Discrete Bit Flags
SP63
DL260 Range
Description
On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero.
NOTE: The status flags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same flag is executed.
In the following example, when C5 is on, the value in V2000 is decreased by 1.
V2000
DirectSOFT
5-108
C5
4
DECB
A
?
3
C
V2000
Decrement the binary value
in V2000 by “1”
A
?
3
$
STR
SHFT
V2000
4
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
SHFT
P
D
E
3
B
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
CV
4
D
C
SHFT
3
2
B
1
C
C
2
2
F
A
5
0
ENT
A
0
A
0
ENT
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
Add Formatted (ADDF)
230
240
250-1
260
DS Used
HPP Used
SP63
SP66
SP67
SP70
SP75
1
2
Operand Data Type
DL260 Range
3
A
aaa
bbb
4
5
6
7
Discrete Bit Flags
Description
8
9
10
11
NOTE: Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag.
In the following example, when X6 is on, the value formed by discrete locations X0–X3 is
loaded into the accumulator using the Load Formatted instruction. The value formed by 12
discrete locations C0–C3 is added to the value in the accumulator using the Add Formatted
instruction. The value in the lower four bits of the accumulator is copied to Y10–Y13 using 13
the Out Formatted instruction.
14
A
B
C
D
Add Formatted is a 32-bit instruction that adds the BCD value
in the accumulator with the BCD value (Aaaa), which is a range
of discrete bits. The specified range (Kbbb) can be 1 to 32
consecutive bits. The result resides in the accumulator.
Inputs
Outputs
Control Relays
Stage Bits
Timer Bits
Counter Bits
Special Relays
Global I/O
Constant
X
Y
C
S
T
CT
SP
GX/GY
K
A aaa
ADDF
K bbb
0-1777
0-1777
0-3777
0-1777
0-377
0-377
0-777
0-3777
-
1-32
On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero
On when the 16-bit addition instruction results in a carry
On when the 32-bit addition instruction results in a carry
On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative
On when a BCD instruction is executed and a NON-BCD number was encountered
DirectSOFT
X6
LDF
X0
Load the BCD value represented
by discrete locations X0–X3
into the accumulator
C0
Add the BCD value in the
accumulator with the value
represented by discrete
location C0–C3
K4
ADDF
K4
OUTF
Y10
K4
X3 X2 X1 X0
ON OFF OFF OFF
The unused accumulator
bits are set to zero
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
+
Acc.
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
8
(Accumulator)
3
(C0-C3)
C3
C2
C1
C0
OFF OFF ON ON
1
Copy the lower 4 bits of the
accumulator to discrete
locations Y10–Y13
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
$
G
STR
SHFT
L
ANDST
D
SHFT
A
D
GX
OUT
0
SHFT
F
6
3
3
5
Y13 Y12 Y11 Y10
ENT
F
D
OFF OFF OFF ON
A
5
3
F
B
NEXT
5
1
E
0
A
0
4
NEXT
E
4
ENT
NEXT
NEXT
A
0
E
4
ENT
ENT
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5-109
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Subtract Formatted (SUBF)
Subtract Formatted is a 32-bit instruction that subtracts the
BCD value (Aaaa), which is a range of discrete bits, from the
BCD value in the accumulator. The specified range (Kbbb)
can be 1 to 32 consecutive bits. The result resides in the
accumulator.
230
240
250-1
260
DS Used
HPP Used
Operand Data Type
DL260 Range
A
Inputs
Outputs
Control Relays
Stage Bits
Timer Bits
Counter Bits
Special Relays
Global I/O
Constant
X
Y
C
S
T
CT
SP
GX/GY
K
aaa
bbb
0-1777
0-1777
0-3777
0-1777
0-377
0-377
0-777
0-3777
-
1-32
Discrete Bit Flags
Description
SP63
SP64
SP65
SP70
SP75
On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero
On when the 16-bit subtraction instruction results in a borrow
On when the 32-bit subtraction instruction results in a borrow
On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative
On when a BCD instruction is executed and a NON-BCD number was encountered
NOTE: Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag.
In the following example, when X6 is on, the value formed by discrete locations X0–X3 is
loaded into the accumulator using the Load Formatted instruction. The value formed by
discrete location C0–C3 is subtracted from the value in the accumulator using the Subtract
Formatted instruction. The value in the lower four bits of the accumulator is copied to Y10–
Y13 using the Out Formatted instruction.
DirectSOFT
X3
X6
K4
Load the BCD value represented
by discrete locations X0-X3 into
the accumulator
K4
Subtract the BCD value
represented by C0-C3 from
the value in the accumulator
LDF
X0
SUBF
C0
Y10
K4
X2
X1
X0
ON OFF OFF ON
The unused accumulator
bits are set to zero
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
_
ACC. 0
OUTF
0
0
0
0
0
0
9
(Accumulator)
C3
8
(C0-- C3)
ON OFF OFF OFF
1
Copy the lower 4 bits of the
accumulator to discrete
locations Y10-- Y13
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
$
G
STR
Y13 Y12 Y11 Y10
6
SHFT
L
ANDST
D
SHFT
S
RST
SHFT
SHFT
F
GX
OUT
5-110
SUBF
A aaa
K bbb
3
5
ENT
F
U
OFF OFF OFF ON
A
5
ISG
B
B
1
1
F
A
0
5
0
E
4
NEXT
E
4
ENT
NEXT
NEXT
ENT
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
NEXT
A
0
E
4
ENT
C2
C1
C0
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
Multiply Formatted (MULF)
1
2
Operand Data Type
DL260 Range
3
A
aaa
bbb
4
5
6
7
Discrete Bit Flags
Description
8
9
10
NOTE: Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag.
In the following example, when X6 is on, the value formed by discrete locations X0–X3 is 11
loaded into the accumulator using the Load Formatted instruction. The value formed by
discrete locations C0–C3 is multiplied by the value in the accumulator using the Multiply
12
Formatted instruction. The value in the lower four bits of the accumulator is copied to Y10–
Y13 using the Out Formatted instruction.
13
14
A
B
C
D
230
240
250-1
260
DS Used
HPP Used
SP63
SP70
SP75
Multiply Formatted is a 16-bit instruction that multiplies the
BCD value in the accumulator by the BCD value (Aaaa) which
is a range of discrete bits. The specified range (Kbbb) can be 1
to 16 consecutive bits. The result resides in the accumulator.
Inputs
Outputs
Control Relays
Stage Bits
Timer Bits
Counter Bits
Special Relays
Global I/O
Constant
X
Y
C
S
T
CT
SP
GX/GY
K
A aaa
MULF
K bbb
0-1777
0-1777
0-3777
0-1777
0-377
0-377
0-777
0-3777
-
1-16
On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero
On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative
On when a BCD instruction is executed and a NON-BCD number was encountered
DirectSOFT
X3
X6
LDF
X0
K4
Load the value represented
by discrete locations X0-- X3
into the accumulator
X2
X1
X0
OFF OFF ON ON
The unused accumulator
bits are set to zero
MULF
C0
K4
OUTF
Y10
K4
Multiply the value in the
accumulator with the value
represented by discrete
locations C0-- C3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
X
Acc. 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
(Accumulator)
C3
2
(C0-- C3)
OFF OFF ON OFF
C2
C1
C0
6
Copy the lower 4 bits of the
accumulator to discrete
locations Y10-- Y13
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
$
G
STR
SHFT
L
ANDST
D
SHFT
M
ORST
U
GX
OUT
SHFT
F
6
3
ISG
5
Y13 Y12 Y11 Y10
ENT
F
OFF ON ON OFF
A
5
L
ANDST
F
B
NEXT
5
1
E
0
A
0
ENT
4
NEXT
E
4
NEXT
NEXT
A
0
E
4
ENT
ENT
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5-111
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Divide Formatted (DIVF)
230
240
250-1
260
Divide Formatted is a 16-bit instruction that divides the BCD
value in the accumuator by the BCD value (Aaaa), a range
of discrete bits. The specified range (Kbbb) can be 1 to 16
consecutive bits. The first part of the quotient resides in the
accumulator and the remainder resides in the first stack location.
Operand Data Type
DS Used
HPP Used
X
Y
C
S
T
CT
SP
GX/GY
K
aaa
bbb
0-1777
0-1777
0-3777
0-1777
0-377
0-377
0-777
0-3777
-
1-16
Discrete Bit Flags
Description
SP63
SP70
SP75
5-112
A aaa
K bbb
DL260 Range
A
Inputs
Outputs
Control Relays
Stage Bits
Timer Bits
Counter Bits
Special Relays
Global I/O
Constant
DIVF
On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero
On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative
On when a BCD instruction is executed and a NON-BCD number was encountered
NOTE: Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag.
In the following example, when X6 is on, the value formed by discrete locations X0–X3
is loaded into the accumulator using the Load Formatted instruction. The value in the
accumulator is divided by the value formed by discrete location C0–C3 using the Divide
Formatted instruction. The value in the lower four bits of the accumulator is copied to Y10–
Y13 using the Out Formatted instruction.
DirectSOFT
X3
X6
LDF
X0
K4
DIVF
C0
K4
OUTF
Y10
K4
Load the value represented
by discrete locations X0-- X3
into the accumulator
G
STR
SHFT
L
ANDST
D
SHFT
D
I
GX
OUT
3
SHFT
F
6
_..
0
Acc. 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
8
0
0
5
0
0
0
0
8
(Accumulator)
C3
2
(C0-- C3)
OFF OFF ON OFF
4
0
OFF ON OFF OFF
A
F
B
0
NEXT
5
1
E
A
0
4
NEXT
E
4
0
0
0
0
0
C2
0
First stack location contains
the remainder
Y13 Y12 Y11 Y10
5
V
AND
X0
Copy the lower 4 bits of the
accumulator to discrete
locations Y10-- Y13
ENT
F
X1
The unused accumulator
bits are set to zero
Divide the value in the
accumulator with the value
represented by discrete
location C0-- C3
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
$
X2
ON OFF OFF OFF
ENT
NEXT
NEXT
ENT
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
A
0
E
4
ENT
0
C1
C0
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
Add Top of Stack (ADDS)
1
2
3
Discrete Bit Flags
Description
4
5
6
NOTE: Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag.
In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V1400 and V1401 will be loaded into 7
the accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The value in V1420 and V1421 is loaded
into the accumulator using the Load Double instruction, pushing the value previously loaded
in the accumulator onto the accumulator stack. The value in the first level of the accumulator 8
stack is added with the value in the accumulator using the Add Stack instruction. The value in
the accumulator is copied to V1500 and V1501 using the Out Double instruction.
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
230
240
250-1
260
SP63
SP66
SP67
SP70
SP75
Add Top of Stack is a 32-bit instruction that adds the BCD
value in the accumulator with the BCD value in the first
level of the accumulator stack. The result resides in the
accumulator. The value in the first level of the accumulator
stack is removed and all stack values are moved up one level.
ADDS
On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero
On when the 16-bit addition instruction results in a carr
On when the 32-bit addition instruction results in a carry.
On anytime the value in the accumulator is negativ.
On when a BCD instruction is executed and a NON-BCD number was encountered
DS Used
HPP Used
DirectSOFT
V1400
V1401
X1
0
Load the value in V1400 and
V1401 into the accumulator
LDD
V1400
Acc.
0
0
0
3
3
9
9
5
5
0
Load the value in V1420 and
V1421 into the accumulator
V1420
Add the value in the
accumulator with the value
in the first level of the
accumulator stack
ADDS
V1500
B
STR
SHFT
L
ANDST
D
SHFT
L
ANDST
D
SHFT
A
D
GX
OUT
0
SHFT
D
1
3
3
3
3
D
D
B
B
3
3
S
RST
B
1
1
1
E
E
4
4
A
C
0
2
2
0
5
6
0
1
7
2
0
5
6
Acc.
0
0
5
6
7
0
8
2
0
5
V1501
3
7
0
ENT
D
6
Acc.
0
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
$
1
2
6
Accumulator stack
after 1st LDD
Level 1
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
Level 2
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
Level 3
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
Level 4
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
Level 5
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
Level 6
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
Level 7
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
Level 8
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
Level 1
0
0
3
9
5
0
2
6
Level 2
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
Level 3
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
Level 4
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
Level 5
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
Level 6
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
Level 7
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
Level 8
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
Accumulator stack
after 2nd LDD
Copy the value in the
accumulator to V1500
and V1501
OUTD
0
0
2
V1420
V1421
LDD
0
A
A
0
0
ENT
6
7
0
8
V1500
2
ENT
ENT
F
5
A
0
A
0
ENT
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5-113
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Subtract Top of Stack (SUBS)
230
240
250-1
260
Subtract Top of Stack is a 32-bit instruction that subtracts
the BCD value in the first level of the accumulator stack from
the BCD value in the accumulator. The result resides in the
accumulator. The value in the first level of the accumulator
stack is removed and all stack values are moved up one level.
Discrete Bit Flags
S UBS
Description
SP63
SP64
SP65
SP70
SP75
On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero
On when the 16-bit subtraction instruction results in a borrow
On when the 32-bit subtraction instruction results in a borrow
On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative
On when a BCD instruction is executed and a NON-BCD number was encountered
NOTE: Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag.
DS Used
HPP Used
5-114
In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V1400 and V1401 will be loaded into
the accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The value in V1420 and V1421 is loaded
into the accumulator using the Load Double instruction, pushing the value previously loaded
into the accumulator onto the accumulator stack. The BCD value in the first level of the
accumulator stack is subtracted from the BCD value in the accumulator using the Subtract
Stack instruction. The value in the accumulator is copied to V1500 and V1501 using the Out
Double instruction.
DirectSOFT
V1400
V1401
X1
0
Load the value in V1400 and
V1401 into the accumulator
LDD
V1400
Acc.
Load the value in V1420 and
V1421 into the accumulator
LDD
V1420
0
1
1
7
7
2
2
V1421
0
Subtract the value in the first
level of the accumulator
stack from the value in the
accumulator
SUBS
0
0
0
3
0
0
5
5
6
6
V1420
9
5
0
2
6
Acc.
0
0
3
9
5
0
2
6
Acc.
0
0
2
2
2
9
7
0
Accumulator stack
after 1st LDD
Level 1
X
X X
X X
X X
X
Level 2
X
X X
X X
X X
X
Level 3
X
X X
X X
X X
X
Level 4
X
X X
X X
X X
X
Level 5
X
X X
X X
X X
X
Level 6
X
X X
X X
X X
X
Level 7
X
X X
X X
X X
X
Level 8
X
X X
X X
X X
X
Accumulator stack
after 2nd LDD
Copy the value in the
accumulator to V1500
and V1501
OUTD
V1500
0
0
2
V1501
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
$
B
STR
1
SHFT
L
ANDST
D
SHFT
L
ANDST
D
SHFT
S
RST
SHFT
GX
OUT
SHFT
D
3
3
3
ENT
D
D
U
B
3
B
3
ISG
B
B
1
1
1
1
S
RST
F
5
E
E
4
4
A
C
0
2
A
A
0
0
ENT
A
0
A
0
ENT
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
ENT
ENT
2
2
9
7
V1500
0
Level 1
0
0
5
6
Level 2
X
X X
1
7
X X
2
0
X X
X
Level 3
X
X X
X X
X X
X
Level 4
X
X X
X X
X X
X
Level 5
X
X X
X X
X X
X
Level 6
X
X X
X X
X X
X
Level 7
X
X X
X X
X X
X
Level 8
X
X X
X X
X X
X
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
Multiply Top of Stack (MULS)
1
2
3
Discrete Bit Flags
Description
4
5
NOTE: Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag.
In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V1400 will be loaded into the accumulator 6
using the Load instruction. The value in V1420 is loaded into the accumulator using the Load
instruction, pushing the value previously loaded in the accumulator onto the accumulator 7
stack. The BCD value in the first level of the accumulator stack is multiplied by the BCD
value in the accumulator using the Multiply Stack instruction. The value in the accumulator
8
is copied to V1500 and V1501 using the Out Double instruction.
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Multiply Top of Stack is a 16-bit instruction that multiplies a
4-digit BCD value in the first level of the accumulator stack by
a 4-digit BCD value in the accumulator. The result resides in
the accumulator. The value in the first level of the accumulator
stack is is removed, and all stack values are moved up one level.
230
240
250-1
260
SP63
SP70
SP75
MULS
On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero
On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative
On when a BCD instruction is executed and a NON-BCD number was encountered
DS Used
HPP Used
DirectSOFT
X1
Load the value in V1400 into
the accumulator
LD
V1400
5
V1400
0 0 0
5
0
The unused accumulator
bits are set to zero
Acc.
0
0
0
0
0
0
V1420
Load the value in V1420 into
the accumulator
LD
V1420
0
Acc.
Multiply the value in
the accumulator with the
value in the first level
of the accumulator stack
MULS
Acc.
Copy the value in the
accumulator to V1500
and V1501
OUTD
V1500
STR
SHFT
L
ANDST
D
SHFT
L
ANDST
D
SHFT
M
ORST
U
GX
OUT
SHFT
D
1
ENT
B
3
B
3
ISG
3
L
ANDST
1
1
S
RST
B
1
E
E
4
4
A
C
0
2
A
A
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
B
0
0
1
0
V1501
$
2
The unused accumulator
bits are set to zero
0
0
0
0
V1500
0
Accumulator stack
after 1st L DD
Level 1
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
Level 2
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
Level 3
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
Level 4
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
Level 5
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
Level 6
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
Level 7
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
Level 8
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
Accumulator stack
after 2nd L DD
Level 1
0
0
0
0 5
0
0
0
Level 2
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
Level 3
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
Level 4
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
Level 5
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
Level 6
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
Level 7
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
Level 8
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
ENT
ENT
ENT
F
5
A
0
A
0
ENT
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5-115
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Divide by Top of Stack (DIVS)
230
240
250-1
260
Divide Top of Stack is a 32-bit instruction that divides the
8-digit BCD value in the accumulator by a 4-digit BCD
value in the first level of the accumulator stack. The result
resides in the accumulator and the remainder resides in the
first level of the accumulator stack.
Discrete Bit Flags
DIVS
Description
SP53
SP63
SP70
SP75
On when the value of the operand is larger than the accumulator can work with
On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zer
On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative.
On when a BCD instruction is executed and a NON-BCD number was encountered
NOTE: Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag.
DS Used
HPP Used
5-116
In the following example, when X1 is on, the Load instruction loads the value in V1400 into
the accumulator. The value in V1420 is loaded into the accumulator using the Load Double
instruction, pushing the value previously loaded in the accumulator onto the accumulator
stack. The BCD value in the accumulator is divided by the BCD value in the first level of the
accumulator stack using the Divide Stack instruction. The Out Double instruction copies the
value in the accumulator to V1500 and V1501.
DirectSOFT
V1400
X1
Load the value in V1400 into
the accumulator
LD
V1400
0
The unused accumulator
bits are set to zero
Acc.
0
0
0
0
0
Load the value V1420 and
V1421 into the accumulator
LDD
V1420
Acc.
Acc.
Copy the value in the
accumulator to V1500
and V1501
OUTD
V1500
5
STR
SHFT
L
ANDST
D
SHFT
L
ANDST
D
SHFT
D
I
GX
OUT
SHFT
3
D
1
8
3
0
0
0
0
5
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
5
0
0
0
Level 1
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
Level 2
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
Level 3
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
Level 4
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
Level 5
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
Level 6
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
Level 7
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
Level 8
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
0
0
0
2
5
0
0
V1500
0
Level 1
0
0
0
0 0
0
2
0
Level 2
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
Level 3
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
Level 4
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
Level 5
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
Level 6
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
Level 7
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
Level 8
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
The remainder resides in the
first stack location
ENT
B
3
3
0
0
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
B
0
0
V1501
$
2
Accumulator stack
after 1st L DD
0
Accumulator stack
after 2nd L DD
Divide the value in the
accumulator by the value in
the first level of the
accumulator stack
DIVS
0
0
2
V1420
V1421
0
0
D
1
3
V
AND
E
B
S
RST
B
1
4
1
A
E
0
4
A
C
0
2
ENT
A
0
ENT
F
5
A
0
A
0
ENT
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
ENT
Level 1
0
0
0
0 0
0
0
0
Level 2
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
Level 3
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
Level 4
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
Level 5
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
Level 6
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
Level 7
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
Level 8
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
Add Binary Top of Stack (ADDBS)
230
240
250-1
260
SP63
SP66
SP67
SP70
SP73
DS Used
HPP Used
1
2
3
Discrete Bit Flags
Description
4
5
6
NOTE: Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag.
7
In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V1400 and V1401 will be loaded into the
accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The value in V1420 and V1421 is loaded into
the accumulator using the Load Double instruction, pushing the value previously loaded in the 8
accumulator onto the accumulator stack. The binary value in the first level of the accumulator
stack is added with the binary value in the accumulator using the Add Stack instruction. The 9
value in the accumulator is copied to V1500 and V1501 using the Out Double instruction.
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Add Binary Top of Stack instruction is a 32-bit instruction
that adds the binary value in the accumulator with the
binary value in the first level of the accumulator stack.
The result resides in the accumulator. The value in the
first level of the accumulator stack is removed, and all stack
values are moved up one level.
ADDBS
On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero
On when the 16-bit addition instruction results in a carry
On when the 32-bit addition instruction results in a carry
On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative
On when a signed addition or subtraction results in a incorrect sign bit
DirectSOFT
V1401
X1
0
Load the value in V1400 and
V1401 into the accumulator
LDD
V1400
Acc.
0
0
0
3
3
V1400
A
A
5
5
V1421
0
Load the value in V1420 and
V1421 into the accumulator
LDD
V1420
Add the binary value in the
accumulator with the binary
value in the first level of the
accumulator stack
ADDBS
V1500
B
STR
SHFT
L
ANDST
D
SHFT
L
ANDST
D
SHFT
A
D
GX
OUT
SHFT
0
D
1
3
3
3
3
D
D
B
3
B
3
3
B
B
1
1
1
1
S
RST
F
5
E
E
4
4
C
0
2
V1420
7
B
0
5
F
0
1
7
B 0
5
F
Acc.
0
0
5
2
0
2
5
0
A
6
0
ENT
D
C
6
Acc.
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
$
1
0
C
1
Accumulator stack
after 1st LDD
Level 1
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
Level 2
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
Level 3
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
Level 4
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
Level 5
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
Level 6
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
Level 7
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
Level 8
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
Accumulator stack
after 2nd LDD
Copy the value in the
accumulator to V1500
and V1501
OUTD
0
0
A
A
0
0
ENT
0
5
2
0
1
2
5
Level 1
0
0
3
A 5
0
C
6
Level 2
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
Level 3
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
Level 4
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
Level 5
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
Level 6
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
Level 7
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
Level 8
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
ENT
ENT
A
0
A
0
ENT
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5-117
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Subtract Binary Top of Stack (SUBBS)
Subtract Binary Top of Stack is a 32-bit instruction that
subtracts the binary value in the first level of the accumulator
stack from the binary value in the accumulator. The result
resides in the accumulator. The value in the first level of
the accumulator stack is removed, and all stack locations are
moved up one level.
230
240
250-1
260
Discrete Bit Flags
S UBBS
Description
SP63
SP64
SP65
SP70
On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero
On when the 16-bit subtraction instruction results in a borrow
On when the 32-bit subtraction instruction results in a borrow
On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative
NOTE: Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag.
In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V1400 and V1401 will be loaded into
the accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The value in V1420 and V1421 is loaded
into the accumulator using the Load Double instruction, pushing the value previously loaded
in the accumulator onto the accumulator stack. The binary value in the first level of the
accumulator stack is subtracted from the binary value in the accumulator using the Subtract
Stack instruction. The value in the accumulator is copied to V1500 and V1501 using the Out
Double instruction.
DS Used
HPP Used
5-118
DirectSOFT
V1400
V1401
X1
Load the value in V1400 and
V1401 into the accumulator
LDD
V1400
Acc.
0
0
1
A
2
0
5
B
0
0
1
A
2
0
5
B
V1421
0
Load the value in V1420 and
V1421 into the accumulator
LDD
V1420
Subtract the binary value in
the first level of the
accumulator stack from the
binary value in the
accumulator
SUBBS
V1500
B
STR
1
SHFT
L
ANDST
D
SHFT
L
ANDST
D
SHFT
S
RST
SHFT
GX
OUT
SHFT
D
3
3
3
D
U
3
B
3
ISG
B
B
1
1
B
F
1
1
1
5
E
E
4
4
S
RST
A
0
C
0
2
0
6
5
0 C
6
Acc.
0
0
2
0
3
0
B
6
Level 1
X X
X
X X
X
X
X
Level 2
X X
X
X X
X
X
X
Level 3
X X
X
X X
X
X
X
Level 4
X X
X
X X
X
X
X
Level 5
X X
X
X X
X
X
X
Level 6
X X
X
X X
X
X
X
Level 7
X X
X
X X
X
X
X
Level 8
X X
X
X X
X
X
X
Accumulator stack
after 2nd LDD
A
A
0
0
ENT
ENT
ENT
A
C
A
0
A
0
3
0
2
V1501
B
5
0
ENT
D
A
0
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
$
3
Acc.
Copy the value in the
accumulator to V1500
and V1501
OUTD
0
V1420
Accumulator stack
after 1st LDD
ENT
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
0
3
0
6
V1500
B
Level 1
0
0
1
A 2
0
5
B
Level 2
X X
X
X X
X
X
X
Level 3
X X
X
X X
X
X
X
Level 4
X X
X
X X
X
X
X
Level 5
X X
X
X X
X
X
X
Level 6
X X
X
X X
X
X
X
Level 7
X X
X
X X
X
X
X
Level 8
X X
X
X X
X
X
X
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
Multiply Binary Top of Stack (MULBS)
1
2
3
Discrete Bit Flags
Description
4
5
NOTE: Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag.
6
In the following example, when X1 is on, the Load instruction moves the value in V1400
into the accumulator. The value in V1420 is loaded into the accumulator using the Load 7
instruction, pushing the value previously loaded in the accumulator onto the stack. The binary
value in the accumulator stack’s first level is multiplied by the binary value in the accumulator
using the Multiply Binary Stack instruction. The Out Double instruction copies the value in 8
the accumulator to V1500 and V1501.
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Multiply Binary Top of Stack is a 16-bit instruction that
multiplies the 16-bit binary value in the first level of
the accumulator stack by the 16-bit binary value in the
accumulator. The result resides in the accumulator and can
be 32 bits (8 digits maximum). The value in the first level of
the accumulator stack is removed, and all stack locations are
moved up one level.
230
240
250-1
260
SP63
SP70
MULBS
On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero
On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative
DS Used
HPP Used
DirectSOFT
X1
V1400
Load the value in V1400 into
the accumulator
LD
V1400
C
3
5
Acc.
0
0
0
0
C
3
5
0
V1420
Load the value in V1420 into
the accumulator
LD
V1420
0
Copy the value in the
accumulator to V1500
and V1501
OUTD
V1500
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
4
Acc.
0
0
0
F
4
2
4
0
0
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
B
STR
SHFT
L
ANDST
D
SHFT
L
ANDST
D
SHFT
M
ORST
U
GX
OUT
SHFT
D
1
ENT
B
3
B
3
ISG
3
L
ANDST
B
B
1
1
1
1
E
E
4
4
S
RST
F
5
A
C
0
2
A
A
0
0
4
Acc.
0
0
V1501
$
1
The unused accumulator
bits are set to zero
Multiply the binary value in
the accumulator with the
binary value in the first level
of the accumulator stack
MULBS
0
F
4
2
4
V1500
Accumulator stack
after 1st LDD
0
The unused accumulator
bits are set to zero
0
Level 1
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
Level 2
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
Level 3
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
Level 4
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
Level 5
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
Level 6
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
Level 7
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
Level 8
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
Level 1
0
0
0
0 C
3
5
0
Level 2
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
Level 3
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
Level 4
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
Level 5
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
Level 6
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
Level 7
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
Level 8
X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
Accumulator stack
after 2nd LDD
ENT
ENT
ENT
A
0
A
0
ENT
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5-119
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Divide Binary by Top of Stack (DIVBS)
Divide Binary Top of Stack is a 32-bit instruction that divides
the 32-bit binary value in the accumulator by the 16-bit binary
value in the first level of the accumulator stack. The result
resides in the accumulator. and the remainder resides in the
first level of the accumulator stack.
230
240
250-1
260
Discrete Bit Flags
DIVBS
Description
SP53
SP63
SP70
On when the value of the operand is larger than the accumulator can work with
On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero
On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative
NOTE: Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag.
In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V1400 will be loaded into the accumulator
using the Load instruction. The value in V1420 and V1421 is loaded into the accumulator
using the Load Double instruction, pushing the value previously loaded in the accumulator
onto the accumulator stack. The binary value in the accumulator is divided by the binary value
in the first level of the accumulator stack using the Divide Binary Stack instruction. The value
in the accumulator is copied to V1500 and V1501 using the Out Double instruction.
DS Used
HPP Used
DirectSOFT
Accumulator stack
after 1st LDD
V1400
X1
Load the value in V1400 into
the accumulator
LD
V1400
0
The unused accumulator
bits are set to zero
Acc. 0
0
0
0
0
0
LDD
V1420
Divide the binary value in
the accumulator by the
binary value in the first level
of the accumulator stack
DIVBS
Acc. 0
0
Acc. 0
0
Copy the value in the
accumulator to V1500
and V1501
OUTD
V1500
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
4
4
V1420
V1421
Load the value in V1420 and
V1421 into the accumulator
0
0
0
C
C
3
3
5
5
0
0
Level 1
X
X X
X X
X X
X
Level 2
X
X X
X X
X X
X
Level 3
X
X X
X X
X X
X
Level 4
X
X X
X X
X X
X
Level 5
X
X X
X X
X X
X
Level 6
X
X X
X X
X X
X
Level 7
X
X X
X X
X X
X
Level 8
X
X X
X X
X X
X
Accumulator stack
after 2nd LDD
0
0
0
V1501
0
0
0
0
9
9
C
C
V1500
4
4
Level 1
0
0
1
4
Level 2
X
X X
X X
X X
X
Level 3
X
X X
X X
X X
X
Level 4
X
X X
X X
X X
X
Level 5
X
X X
X X
X X
X
Level 6
X
X X
X X
X X
X
Level 7
X
X X
X X
X X
X
Level 8
X
X X
X X
X X
X
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
$
B
STR
SHFT
L
ANDST
D
SHFT
L
ANDST
D
SHFT
D
I
GX
OUT
5-120
3
SHFT
D
1
B
3
8
3
D
1
E
B
3
V
AND
0
0
0
The remainder resides in the
first stack location
ENT
3
0
B
B
1
1
4
1
S
RST
F
5
A
E
0
4
A
C
0
2
ENT
A
0
ENT
ENT
A
0
A
0
ENT
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Level 1
0
0
0
0
Level 2
X
X X
0
0
X X
0
0
X X
X
Level 3
X
X X
X X
X X
X
Level 4
X
X X
X X
X X
X
Level 5
X
X X
X X
X X
X
Level 6
X
X X
X X
X X
X
Level 7
X
X X
X X
X X
X
Level 8
X
X X
X X
X X
X
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
Transcendental Functions (DL260 only)
230
240
250-1
260
DS Used
HPP N/A
The DL260 CPU features special numerical functions to complement its real number
capability. The transcendental functions include the trigonometric sine, cosine, and tangent,
and also their inverses (arc sine, arc cosine, and arc tangent). The square root function is also
grouped with these other functions.
The transcendental math instructions operate on a real number in the accumulator (it cannot
be BCD or binary). The real number result resides in the accumulator. The square root
function operates on the full range of positive real numbers. The sine, cosine and tangent
functions require numbers expressed in radians. You can work with angles expressed in degrees
by first converting them to radians with the Radian (RADR) instruction, then performing the
trig function. All transcendental functions utilize the following flag bits.
Discrete Bit Flags
Description
SP63
SP70
SP72
SP73
SP75
On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero
On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative
On anytime the value in the accumulator is a valid floating point number
On when a signed addition or subtraction results in a incorrect sign bit
On when a real number instruction is executed and a non-real number was encountered
Math Function
SP53
Range of Argument
On when the value of the operand is larger than the accumulator can work with
Sine Real (SINR)
The Sine Real instruction takes the sine of the real number stored
in the accumulator. The result resides in the accumulator. Both
the original number and the result are in IEEE 32-bit format.
SINR
Cosine Real (COSR)
The Cosine Real instruction takes the cosine of the real number
stored in the accumulator. The result resides in the accumulator.
Both the original number and the result are in IEEE 32-bit
format.
COSR
Tangent Real (TANR)
The Tangent Real instruction takes the tangent of the real
number stored in the accumulator. The result resides in the
accumulator. Both the original number and the result are in
IEEE 32-bit format.
TANR
Arc Sine Real (ASINR)
The Arc Sine Real instruction takes the inverse sine of the real
number stored in the accumulator. The result resides in the
accumulator. Both the original number and the result are in
IEEE 32-bit format.
ASINR
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-121
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Arc Cosine Real (ACOSR)
The Arc Cosine Real instruction takes the inverse cosine of the
real number stored in the accumulator. The result resides in the
accumulator. Both the original number and the result are in
IEEE 32-bit format.
ACOSR
Arc Tangent Real (ATANR)
The Arc Tangent Real instruction takes the inverse tangent of
the real number stored in the accumulator. The result resides in
the accumulator. Both the original number and the result are in
IEEE 32-bit format.
Square Root Real (SQRTR)
The Square Root Real instruction takes the square root of the
real number stored in the accumulator. The result resides in
the accumulator. Both the original number and the result are in
IEEE 32-bit format.
ATANR
SQRTR
NOTE: The square root function can be useful in several situations. However, if you are trying to do the
square-root extract function for an orifice flow meter measurement as the PV to a PID loop, note that the PID
loop already has the square-root extract function built in.
DS Used
HPP N/A
5-122
The following example takes the sine of 45 degrees. Since these transcendental functions
operate only on real numbers, we do a LDR (Load Real) 45. The trig functions operate only
in radians, so we must convert the degrees to radians by using the RADR command. After
using the SINR (Sine Real) instruction, we use an OUTD (Out Double) instruction to move
the result from the accumulator to V-memory. The result is 32-bits wide, requiring the Out
Double to move it.
Accumulator contents
(viewed as real number)
DirectSOFT
X1
LDR
Load the real number 45
into the accumulator.
45.000000
RADR
Convert the degrees into
radians, leaving the result
in the accumulator.
0.7853981
SINR
Take the sine of the number
in the accumulator, which
is in radians.
0.7071067
Copy the valus in the
accumulator to V2000
and V2001.
0.7071067
R45
OUTD
V2000
NOTE: The current HPP does not support real number entry with automatic conversion to the 32-bit IEEE
format. You must use DirectSOFT for entering real numbers, using the LDR (Load Real) instruction.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
Bit Operation Instructions
1
The Sum instruction counts the number of bits that are set to “1”
2
SUM
in the accumulator. The HEX result resides in the accumulator.
3
Math Function
Range of Argument
4
In the following example, when X1 is on, the value formed by discrete locations X10–X17 is 5
loaded into the accumulator using the Load Formatted instruction. The number of bits in the
accumulator set to “1” is counted using the Sum instruction. The value in the accumulator is
6
copied to V1500 using the Out instruction.
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Sum (SUM)
230
240
250-1
260
DS Used
HPP Used
DirectSOFT
X1
SP63
On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero
X17 X16 X15 X14 X13 X12 X11 X10
LDF
ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON
X10
K8
The unused accumulator
bits are set to zero
Load the value represented by
discrete locations X10–X17
into the accumulator
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
Acc.
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Acc. 0
SUM
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
5
0
0
0
5
0
0
0
8
7
0
1 1
6 5
0
4 3
2
1
0
0
1 1
1
0
Sum the number of bits in
the accumulator set to “1”
OUT
V1500
V1500
Copy the value in the lower
16 bits of the accumulator
to V1500
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
$
B
STR
SHFT
L
ANDST
SHFT
S
RST
GX
OUT
D
1
3
ENT
F
B
5
SHFT
U
ISG
M
ORST
PREV
PREV
PREV
1
A
I
0
8
ENT
ENT
B
1
F
5
A
0
A
0
ENT
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5-123
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
230
240
250-1
260
Shift Left is a 32-bit instruction that shifts the bits in the
accumulator a specified number (Aaaa) of places to the left. The
vacant positions are filled with zeros, and the bits shifted out of
the accumulator are lost.
Operand Data Type
V-memory
Constant
DL230 Range
DL240 Range
SHFL
A aaa
DL250-1 Range
DL260 Range
A
aaa
aaa
aaa
aaa
V
K
All (See page 3-53)
1-32
All (See page 3-54)
1-32
All (See page 3-55)
1-32
All (See page 3-56)
1-32
In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V2000 and V2001 will be loaded into
the accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The bit pattern in the accumulator is
shifted 10 bits to the left using the Shift Left instruction. The value in the accumulator is
copied to V2010 and V2011 using the Out Double instruction.
DS Used
HPP Used
Standard RLL
Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Shift Left (SHFL)
5-124
Direct SOFT
V2001
X1
6
LDD
7
0
V2000
5
3
1
0
1
V2000
Load the value in V2000 and
V2001 into the accumulator
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
SHFL
cc
K10
The bit pattern in the
accumulator is shifted 10 bit
positions to the left
8
7
6 5
4 3
2
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
Shifted out of the
accumulator
OUTD
V2010
Copy the value in the
accumulator to V2010 and
V2011
cc
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
1 4
STR
1
L
NDST
D
SHFT
S
RST
SHFT
X
OUT
SHFT
D
3
3
ENT
D
H
C
3
7
F
C
5
2
2
0
L
NDST
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
ENT
ENT
ENT
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
0
C 4
V2011
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
SHFT
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
8
7
6 5
4 3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0 0
0
0
4
0
0
V2010
0
0
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
Shift Right (SHFR)
1
2
3
Operand Data Type
DL230 Range
DL240 Range
DL250-1 Range
DL260 Range
A
aaa
aaa
aaa
aaa
4
5
In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V2000 and V2001 will be loaded into
the accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The bit pattern in the accumulator is 6
shifted 10 bits to the right using the Shift Right instruction. The value in the accumulator is
copied to V2010 and V2011 using the Out Double instruction.
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
230
240
250-1
260
Shift Right is a 32-bit instruction that shifts the bits in the
accumulator a specified number (Aaaa) of places to the right.
The vacant positions are filled with zeros, and the bits shifted out
of the accumulator are lost.
V-memory
Constant
V
K
All (See page 3-53)
1-32
All (See page 3-54)
1-32
SHFR
A aaa
All (See page 3-55)
1-32
All (See page 3-56)
1-32
DS Used
HPP Used
Direct SOFT
V2001
X1
Constant 6
LDD
7
0
V2000
5
3
1
0
1
V2000
Load the value in V2000 and
V2001 into the accumulator
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
SHFR
cc
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
8
7
6 5
4 3
2
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
K10
The bit pattern in the
accumulator is shifted 10 bit
positions to the right
Shifted out of the
accumulator
OUTD
V2010
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
cc
Copy the value in the
accumulator to V2010 and
V201
1
00
0
0
0
0
0
1
0 0 0
0
0
1
V2011
0
9
0
01 1
0 0
0 1
0
1 1
0
0 0
0
0
C
6 5
4 3
2
1
0
1 0
8
7
1
0
1
0
0
1
C
4
0
1
V2010
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
L
DST
D
SHFT
S
RST
SHFT
SHFT
D
X
OUT
T
1
STR
SHFT
3
3
D
H
C
3
7
F
C
2
5
R
OR
2
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
T
T
T
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5-125
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Rotate Left (ROTL)
230
240
250-1
260
Rotate Left is a 32-bit instruction that rotates the bits in the
accumulator a specified number (Aaaa) of places to the left.
Operand Data Type
V-memory
Constant
DS Used
HPP Used
DL250-1 Range
ROTL
A aaa
DL260 Range
A
aaa
aaa
V
K
All (See page 3-55)
1-32
All (See page 3-56)
1-32
In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V1400 and V1401 will be loaded into the
accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The bit pattern in the accumulator is rotated
2 bit positions to the left using the Rotate Left instruction. The value in the accumulator is
copied to V1500 and V1501 using the Out Double instruction.
DirectSOFT
V1401
X1
LDD
6 7
V1400
V1400
0 5
3 1
0 1
Load the value in V1400 and
V1401 into the accumulator
ROTL
K2
Acc.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
The bit pattern in the
accumulator is rotated 2
bit positions to the left
OUTD
V1500
Copy the value in the
accumulator to V1500
and V1501
Acc.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
4
0 5
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
9 C 1 4
V1501
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
$
B
STR
1
SHFT
L
ANDST
D
SHFT
R
ORN
O
INST#
GX
OUT
SHFT
D
5-126
3
3
ENT
D
B
3
T
MLR
1
L
ANDST
B
1
E
C
F
5
A
4
2
0
A
0
A
0
ENT
ENT
A
0
ENT
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
C
V1500
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
Rotate Right (ROTR)
1
2
Operand Data Type DL250-1 Range
DL260 Range
A
aaa
aaa
3
In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V1400 and V1401 will be loaded into the 4
accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The bit pattern in the accumulator is rotated
2 bit positions to the right using the Rotate Right instruction. The value in the accumulator is 5
copied to V1500 and V1501 using the Out Double instruction.
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Rotate Right is a 32-bit instruction that rotates the bits in the
accumulator a specified number (Aaaa) of places to the right.
230
240
250-1
260
V-memory
Constant
DS Used
HPP Used
DirectSOFT
X1
V
K
All (See page 3-55)
1-32
ROTR
A aaa
All (See page 3-56)
1-32
V1401
LDD
6
7
0
V1400
5
3
1
0
1
V1400
Load the value in V1400 and
V1401 into the accumulator
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
ROTR
Acc.
K2
0
1 1
0
0
1 1 1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
1 1
0
0
0
8
7
6 5
4 3
2
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
The bit pattern in the
accumulator is rotated 2
bit positions to the right
OUTD
V1500
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
Copy the value in the
accumulator to V1500
and V1501
Acc.
0
0
1
0
0 10 01 0 10 10 10 00 00 00 00 00 10
1
5
$
STR
B
1
SHFT
L
ANDST
D
SHFT
R
ORN
O
INST#
SHFT
D
GX
OUT
3
3
9
C
V1501
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
1
0
1
0
0
1 1
0
4
8
7
6 5
4 3
2
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
C
4
0
0
0
V1500
ENT
D
B
3
T
MLR
1
R
ORN
B
1
E
C
F
5
A
4
2
0
A
0
A
0
ENT
ENT
A
0
ENT
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5-127
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Encode (ENCO)
230
240
250-1
260
DS Used
HPP Used
The Encode instruction encodes the bit position in the
ENCO
accumulator having a value of 1, and returns the appropriate
binary representation. If the most significant bit is set to
1 (Bit 31), the Encode instruction would place the value
HEX 1F (decimal 31) in the accumulator. If the value to be
encoded is 0000 or 0001, the instruction will place a zero in the accumulator. If the value to
be encoded has more than one bit position set to a “1”, the least significant “1” will be encoded
and SP53 will be set on.
Discrete Bit Flags
SP53
Description
On when the value of the operand is larger than the accumulator can work with
NOTE: The status flags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same flags is executed.
In the following example, when X1 is on, The value in V2000 is loaded into the accumulator
using the Load instruction. The bit position set to a “1” in the accumulator is encoded to the
corresponding 5-bit binary value using the Encode instruction. The value in the lower 16 bits
of the accumulator is copied to V2010 using the Out instruction.
V2000
DirectSOFT
X1
5-128
1
LD
0
0
0
V2000
Load the value in V2000 into
the lower 16 bits of the
accumulator
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
Acc.
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
8
7
6 5
4 3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
1
0
1 1
0
0
0
Bit postion 12 is
converted
to binary
ENCO
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
Encode the bit position set
to “1” in the accumulator to a
5 bit binary value
Acc.
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
8
7
6 5
4 3
0
0
0
0
0
OUT
V2010
0
Copy the value in the lower 16 bits
of the accumulator to V2010
B
STR
1
ENT
SHFT
L
ANDST
D
SHFT
E
N
TMR
C
SHFT
V
AND
GX
OUT
4
C
3
2
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
0
C
V2010 Binary value
for 12.
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
$
0
2
O
INST#
C
2
A
0
A
0
A
0
ENT
ENT
A
0
B
1
A
0
ENT
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
Decode (DECO)
230
240
250-1
260
DS Used
HPP Used
The Decode instruction decodes a 5-bit binary value of 0 to 31
DECO
(0 to 1F HEX) in the accumulator by setting the appropriate bit
position to a 1. If the accumulator contains the value F (HEX),
bit 15 will be set in the accumulator. If the value to be decoded
is greater than 31, the number is divided by 32 until the value is
less than 32 and then the value is decoded.
In the following example, when X1 is on, the value formed by discrete locations X10–X14 is
loaded into the accumulator using the Load Formatted instruction. The 5-bit binary pattern in
the accumulator is decoded by setting the corresponding bit position to a “1” using the Decode
instruction.
DirectSOFT
X1
X14 X13 X12 X11 X10
LDF
OFF ON OFF ON ON
X10
K5
Load the value in
represented by discrete
locations X10–X14 into the
accumulator
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
Acc.
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
8
7
6 5
4 3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
1 1
0
1
0
The binary vlaue
is converted to
bit position 11.
DECO
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
Decode the five bit binary
pattern in the accumulator
and set the corresponding
bit position to a “1”
Acc.
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
8
7
6 5
4 3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
$
B
STR
SHFT
L
ANDST
D
SHFT
D
E
3
1
3
4
ENT
F
C
B
5
2
O
INST#
1
A
0
F
5
ENT
ENT
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-129
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Number Conversion Instructions (Accumulator)
Binary (BIN)
230
240
250-1
260
DS Used
HPP Used
5-130
BIN
The Binary instruction converts a BCD value in the
accumulator to the equivalent binary value. The result resides
in the accumulator.
In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V2000
and V2001 is loaded into the accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The BCD value
in the accumulator is converted to the binary (HEX) equivalent using the BIN instruction.
The binary value in the accumulator is copied to V2010 and V2011 using the Out Double
instruction. (The Handheld Programmer will display the binary value in V2010 and V2011
as a HEX value.)
DirectSOFT
X1
V2001
0
LDD
0
V2000
0
2
8
5
2
9
V2000
Load the value in V2000 and
V2001 into the accumulator
Acc.
8 4
2
1
8
4 2
1
8
4
2 1
8
4
2
1
8 4
2
1
8
4 2
1
8
4
2 1
8
4
2
1
0 0
0
0
0
0 0
0
0
0
0 0
0
0
1
0
1 0
0
0
0
1 0
1
0
0
1 0
1
0
0
1
BCD Value
28529 = 16384 + 8192 + 2048 + 1024 + 512 + 256 + 64 + 32 + 16 + 1
Binary Equivalent Value
BIN
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
Convert the BCD value in
the accumulator to the
binary equivalent value
Acc.
7
6 5
4 3
2
1
0
0
0 0
0
0
0
0 0
0
0
0
0 0
0
0
0
0
1 1
0
1
1
1 1
0
1
1
1 0
0
0
1
2
1
4
7
4
4
8
3
6
4
8
1
0
7
3
7
4
1
8
2
4
2
6
8
4
3
5
4
5
6
1
3
4
2
1
7
7
2
8
6
7
1
0
8
8
6
4
3
3
5
5
4
4
3
2
8
3
8
8
6
0
8
4
1
9
4
3
0
4
2
0
9
7
1
5
2
1
0
4
8
5
7
6
2
6
2
1
4
4
1
3
1
0
7
2
6
5
5
3
6
3
2
7
6
8
1
6
3
8
4
8
1
9
2
4
0
9
6
2
0
4
8
1
0
2
4
5 2
1 5
2 6
1 6
2 4
8
3
2
1 8
6
4
2
1
F
7
1
5
3
6
8
7
0
9
1
2
1
6
7
7
7
2
1
6
5
2
4
2
8
8
OUTD
V2010
0
Copy the binary data in the
accumulator to V2010 and V2011
0
0
0
6
V2011
V2010
The Binary (HEX)
value copied to
V2010
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
$
STR
B
SHFT
L
ANDST
D
SHFT
B
I
GX
OUT
SHFT
1
D
1
3
8
ENT
D
C
3
N
TMR
3
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
2
A
0
A
0
A
0
ENT
C
2
A
0
B
1
A
0
ENT
ENT
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
Binary Coded Decimal (BCD)
230
240
250-1
260
DS Used
HPP Used
The Binary Coded Decimal instruction converts a binary value
BCD
in the accumulator to the equivalent BCD value. The result
resides in the accumulator.
In the following example, when X1 is on, the binary (HEX)
value in V2000 and V2001 is loaded into the accumulator using the Load Double instruction.
The binary value in the accumulator is converted to the BCD equivalent value using the BCD
instruction. The BCD value in the accumulator is copied to V2010 and V2011 using the Out
Double instruction.
DirectSOFT
X1
V2001
0
LDD
0
0
V2000
0
6
F
7
1
Binary Value
V2000
Load the value in V2000 and
V2001 into the accumulator
Acc.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
8
7 6 5
4 3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0 0
0
0
0
0 0
0
0
0
0 0
0
0
1
1
0 1
1
1
1
0 1
1
1
0
0 0
1
2
1
4
7
4
4
8
3
6
4
8
1
0
7
3
7
4
1
8
2
4
5
3
6
8
7
0
9
1
2
2
6
8
4
3
5
4
5
6
6
7
1
0
8
8
6
4
3
3
5
5
4
4
3
2
1
6
7
7
7
2
1
6
8
3
8
8
6
0
8
2
0
9
7
1
5
2
1
0
4
8
5
7
6
5
2
4
2
8
8
2
6
2
1
4
4
6
5
5
3
6
3
2
7
6
8
1
6
3
8
4
8
1
9
2
4
0
9
6
1
0
2
4
5
1
2
2
5
6
1 6
2 4
8
3
2
1
6
8
4
1
3
4
2
1
7
7
2
8
BCD
4
1
9
4
3
0
4
1
3
1
0
7
2
2
0
4
8
2 1
16384 + 8192 + 2048 + 1024 + 512 + 256 + 64 + 32 + 16 + 1 = 28529
BCD Equivalent Value
Convert the binary value in
the accumulator to the BCD
equivalent value
Acc.
8
4 2
1
8
4
2 1
8
4
2
1 8
4
2
1
8
4 2
1
8
4
2 1
8
4
2
1 8
4
2
1
0
0
0 0
0
0
0 0
0
0
0 1
0
1
0
0
0 0
1
0
0 0
1
0
0 0
1
2
8
5
2
9
0
0
0
1
OUTD
V2010
Copy the BCD value in the
accumulator to V2010 and V2011
0
0
0
V2011
V2010
The BCD value
copied to
V2010 and V2011
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
$
B
STR
SHFT
SHFT
GX
OUT
L
ANDST
D
B
C
1
SHFT
D
1
3
2
3
ENT
D
D
C
3
3
2
A
0
A
0
A
0
ENT
ENT
C
2
A
0
B
1
A
0
ENT
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-131
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Invert (INV)
230
240
250-1
260
DS Used
HPP Used
The Invert instruction inverts or takes the one’s complement
of the 32-bit value in the accumulator. The result resides in
the accumulator.
In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V2000 and V2001 will be loaded into
the accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The value in the accumulator is inverted
using the Invert instruction. The value in the accumulator is copied to V2010 and V2011
using the Out Double instruction.
DirectSOFT
X1
5-132
INV
V2001
0
LDD
4
0
V2000
5
00 22 55 00
V2000
Load the value in V2000 and
V2001 into the accumulator
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
Acc.
INV
Acc.
Invert the binary bit pattern
in the accumulator
8
7
6 5
4 3
2
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
8
7
6 5
4 3
2
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
1 1
0
1 1
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
F
OUTD
V2010
1
0
1
0
1
0
B
F
A
0
0
1 1
F
V2011
D
0
A
V2010
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
B
STR
1
SHFT
L
ANDST
D
SHFT
I
N
TMR
GX
OUT
SHFT
8
D
3
3
ENT
D
C
3
V
AND
2
A
0
A
0
A
0
ENT
C
2
A
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
0
B
1
A
0
ENT
0
1 1 1
Copy the value in the
accumulator to V2010 and
V2011
$
0
ENT
F
0
1
0
1 1
0
1
1
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
Ten’s Complement (BCDCPL)
230
240
250-1
260
DS Used
HPP Used
11
22
100000000
— accumulator value
33
10’s complement value
4
In the following example when X1 is on, the value in V2000 and V2001 is loaded into the 4
accumulator. The 10’s complement is taken for the 8-digit accumulator using the Ten’s
Complement instruction. The value in the accumulator is copied to V2010 and V2011 using 5
5
the Out Double instruction.
66
77
88
99
10
10
11
11
12
12
13
13
14
14
AA
BB
CC
DD
The Ten’s Complement instruction takes the 10’s complement
(BCD) of the 8-digit accumulator. The result resides in the
accumulator. The calculation for this instruction is :
DirectSOFT
BCDCPL
V2000
V2001
X1
0
0
0
0
0
0
8
7
Acc. 0
0
0
0
0
0
8
7
Acc. 9
9
9
9
9
9
1
3
9
9
9
9
9
9
1
3
LDD
V2000
Load the value in V2000 and
V2001 into the accumulator
BCDCPL
Takes a 10’s complement of
the value in the accumulator
OUTD
V2010
V2011
Copy the value in the
accumulator to V2010 and
V2011
V2010
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
$
B
STR
SHFT
L
ANDST
D
SHFT
B
C
GX
OUT
SHFT
1
D
1
3
2
3
ENT
D
D
C
3
3
C
C
2
2
P
A
2
CV
0
A
0
L
ANDST
B
1
A
0
A
0
ENT
ENT
A
0
ENT
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5-133
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
Binary to Real Conversion (BTOR)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
230
240
250-1
260
The Binary-to-Real instruction converts a binary value in the
accumulator to its equivalent real number (floating point)
format. The result resides in the accumulator. Both the binary
and the real number may use all 32 bits of the accumulator.
BTOR
NOTE: This instruction only works with unsigned binary, or decimal values. It will not work with signed
decimal values.
Discrete Bit Flags
SP63
SP70
DS Used
HPP Used
5-134
Description
On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero
On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative
In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V1400 and V1401 is loaded into the
accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The BTOR instruction converts the binary
value in the accumulator the equivalent real number format. The binary weight of the MSB
is converted to the real number exponent by adding it to 127 (decimal). Then the remaining
bits are copied to the mantissa as shown. The value in the accumulator is copied to V1500
and V1501 using the Out Double instruction. The Handheld Programmer would display the
binary value in V1500 and V1501 as a HEX value.
DirectSOFT
X1
V1401
0
LDD
0
V1400
0
5
7
2
4
1
V1400
Load the value in V1400 and
V1401 into the accumulator
Acc.
8 4
2
1
8
4 2
1
8
4
2 1
8
4
2
1
8 4
2
1
8
4 2
1
8
4
2 1
8
4
2
1
0 0
0
0
0
0 0
0
0
0
0 0
0
1
0
1
0 1
1
1
0
0 1
0
0
0
1 0
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0 0
0
0
0
1 0
0
0
0
0
Binary Value
2 (exp 18)
127 + 18 = 145
145 = 128 + 16 + 1
BTOR
Convert the binary value in
the accumulator to the real
number equivalent format
Acc.
0 1
Sign Bit
0
0
1
0 0
0
1
0
1 0
1
1
1
0
0 0
Exponent (8 bits)
Mantissa (23 bits)
Real Number Format
OUTD
V1500
4
Copy the real value in the
accumulator to V1500 and V1501
8
A
E
4
8
V1501
2
0
V1500
The real number (HEX) value
copied to V1500
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
$
B
STR
1
SHFT
L
ANDST
D
SHFT
B
T
MLR
GX
OUT
SHFT
1
D
3
3
ENT
D
B
3
O
INST#
R
ORN
B
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
1
E
4
A
0
A
0
ENT
F
5
A
0
A
0
ENT
ENT
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
Real to Binary Conversion (RTOB)
1
2
3
NOTE : The decimal portion of the result will be rounded down (14.1 to 14 or - 14.1 to -15).
NOTE : If the real number is negative, it becomes a signed decimal value.
4
Discrete Bit Flags
Description
5
6
7
In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V1400 and V1401 is loaded into the
accumulator using the Load Double instruction. The RTOB instruction converts the real
value in the accumulator the equivalent binary number format. The value in the accumulator 8
is copied to V1500 and V1501 using the Out Double instruction. The Handheld Programmer
would display the binary value in V1500 and V1501 as a HEX value.
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
230
240
250-1
260
The Real-to-Binary instruction converts the real number in
the accumulator to a binary value. The result resides in the
accumulator. Both the binary and the real number may use all
32 bits of the accumulator.
RTOB
1
2
SP63
SP70
SP72
SP73
SP75
On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero
On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative
On anytime the value in the accumulator is a valid floating point number
On when a signed addition or subtraction results in an incorrect sign bit.
On when a number cannot be converted to binary
DS Used
HPP Used
DirectSOFT
X1
4 8 A
LDD
4 8 2 0
V1401
V1400
Load the value in V1400 and
V1401 into the accumulator
Si n Bit
Acc. 0
ponent
1
0
0
1
0
8 bit
0
0
1
Real
anti
0
1
0
1
1
umber Format
V1400
1
0
0
0
a
2
bit
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
RTOB
Convert the real number in
the accumulator to binary
format.
128
12
1
18
1 14
5
14
5
2
e p 18
Binary Value
8
4
2
1
8
4
2
1
8
4
2
1
8
4
2
1
8
4
2
1
8
4
2
1
8
4
2
1
8
4
2
1
Acc. 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
OUTD
V1500
Copy the real value in the
accumulator to V1500 and V1501
V1501
V1500
0 0 0 5
andheld
ro rammer
B
STR
The binary number copied to V1400
ey tro e
T
1
S FT
L
D
A DST
D
S FT
R
OR
T
O
S FT
D
X
OUT
2 4 1
LR
B
ST
B
B
1
A
0
A
T
0
T
1
1
4
F
5
A
0
A
0
T
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5-135
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Radian Real Conversion (RADR)
230
240
250-1
260
The Radian Real Conversion instruction converts the real
degree value stored in the accumulator to the equivalent real
number in radians. The result resides in the accumulator.
RADR
Degree Real Conversion (DEGR)
230
240
250-1
260
DS Used
HPP N/A
The Degree Real instruction converts the degree real radian
DEGR
value stored in the accumulator to the equivalent real number
in degrees. The result resides in the accumulator.
The two instructions described above convert real numbers in
the accumulator from degree format to radian format, and visaversa. In degree format, a circle contains 360 degrees. In radian format, a circle contains 2
P. These convert between both positive and negative real numbers, and for angles greater
than a full circle. These functions are very useful when combined with the transcendental
trigonometric functions (see the section on math instructions).
Discrete Bit Flags
SP63
SP70
SP71
SP72
SP74
SP75
Description
On when the result of the instruction causes the value in the accumulator to be zero
On anytime the value in the accumulator is negative
On anytime the V-memory specified by a pointer (P) is not valid
On anytime the value in the accumulator is a valid floating point number
On anytime a floating point math operation results in an underflow error
On when a BCD instruction is executed and a NON-BCD number was encountered
NOTE: The current HPP does not support real number entry with automatic conversion to the 32-bit IEEE
format. You must use DirectSOFT for entering real numbers, using the LDR (Load Real) instruction.
The following example takes the sine of 45 degrees. Since transcendental functions operate
only on real numbers, we do a LDR (Load Real) 45. The trig functions operate only in radians,
so we must convert the degrees to radians by using the RADR command. After using the SINR
(Sine Real) instruction, we use an OUTD (Out Double) instruction to move the result from
the accumulator to V-memory. The result is 32-bits wide, requiring the Out Double to move
it.
Accumulator contents
(viewed as real number)
DirectSOFT
X1
LDR
R45
45.000000
RADR
Convert the degrees into radians,
leaving the result in the
accumulator.
0.7853982
SINR
Take the sine of the number in
the accumulator, which is in
radians.
0.7071067
Copy the value in the
accumulator to V2000
and V2001.
0.7071067
OUTD
V2000
5-136
Load the real number 45 into
the accumulator.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
ASCII to HEX (ATH)
230
240
250-1
260
DS Used
HPP N/A
1
2
This means an ASCII table of four V-memory locations would only require two V-memory
locations for the equivalent HEX table. The function parameters are loaded into the 3
accumulator stack and the accumulator by two additional instructions. Listed below are the
steps necessary to program an ASCII to HEX table function. The example on the following 4
page shows a program for the ASCII to HEX table function.
Step 1: L
oad the number of V-memory locations for the ASCII table into the first level of the
5
accumulator stack.
Step 2:Load the starting V-memory location for the ASCII table into the accumulator. This
6
parameter must be a HEX value.
Step 3:Specify the starting V-memory location (Vaaa) for the HEX table in the ATH instruction.
Helpful hint: — For parameters that require HEX values when referencing memory locations, 7
the LDA instruction can be used to convert an octal address to the HEX equivalent and load
the value into the accumulator.
8
Operand Data Type DL250-1 Range
DL260 Range
aaa
aaa
9
In the example on the following page, when X1 is ON, the constant (K4) is loaded into the 10
accumulator using the Load instruction and will be placed in the first level of the accumulator
stack when the next Load instruction is executed. The starting location for the ASCII table 11
(V1400) is loaded into the accumulator using the Load Address instruction. The starting
location for the HEX table (V1600) is specified in the ASCII to HEX instruction. The table
12
below lists valid ASCII values for ATH conversion.
13
ASCII Values Valid for ATH Conversion
ASCII
Hex Value
ASCII Value
Hex Value
14
A
B
C
D
The ASCII TO HEX instruction converts a table of ASCII
values to a specified table of HEX values. ASCII values are
two digits and their HEX equivalents are one digit.
V-memory
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
V
All (See page 3-55)
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
38
39
41
42
43
44
45
46
ATH
V aaa
All (See page 3-56)
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5-137
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
DirectSOFT
X1
ASCII TABLE
Load the constant value
into the lower 16 bits of the
accumulator. This value
defines the number of V
memory locations in the
ASCII table
LD
K4
V1400
Convert octal 1400 to HEX
300 and load the value into
the accumulator
LDA
O 1400
V1600
33 34
V1401
31 32
V1402
37 38
V1600 is the starting
location for the HEX table
ATH
Hexadecimal
Equivalents
1234
V1600
5678
V1601
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
$
B
STR
1
SHFT
L
ANDST
D
SHFT
L
ANDST
D
SHFT
A
T
MLR
0
ENT
PREV
3
3
A
H
0
7
E
B
B
4
1
1
ENT
E
G
4
6
A
A
A
0
A
0
0
0
ENT
V1403
35 36
ENT
HEX to ASCII (HTA)
230
240
250-1
260
DS Used
HPP N/A
5-138
The HEX to ASCII instruction converts a table of HEX
HTA
values to a specified table of ASCII values. HEX values are
V aaa
one digit and their ASCII equivalents are two digits.
This means a HEX table of two V-memory locations would
require four V-memory locations for the equivalent ASCII table. The function parameters are
loaded into the accumulator stack and the accumulator by two additional instructions. Listed
below are the steps necessary to program a HEX to ASCII table function. The example on the
following page shows a program for the HEX to ASCII table function.
Step 1: L
oad the number of V-memory locations in the HEX table into the first level of the
accumulator stack.
Step 2: L
oad the starting V-memory location for the HEX table into the accumulator. This
parameter must be a HEX value.
Step 3: S pecify the starting V-memory location (Vaaa) for the ASCII table in the HTA instruction.
Helpful hint: — For parameters that require HEX values when referencing memory locations,
the LDA instruction can be used to convert an octal address to the HEX equivalent and load
the value into the accumulator.
Operand Data Type
V-memory
V
DL250-1 Range
DL260 Range
aaa
aaa
All (See page 3-55)
All (See page 3-56)
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
In the following example, when X1 is ON, the constant (K2) is loaded into the accumulator
using the Load instruction. The starting location for the HEX table (V1500) is loaded into
the accumulator using the Load Address instruction. The starting location for the ASCII table
(V1400) is specified in the HEX to ASCII instruction.
DirectSOFT
X1
Hexadecimal
Equivalents
LD
ASCII TABLE
K2
Load the constant value into
the lower 16 bits of the
accumulator. This value
defines the number of V
locations in the HEX table.
33 34
V1400
31 32
V1401
37 38
V1402
35 36
V1403
1234
V1500
LDA
O 1500
Convert octal 1500 to HEX
340 and load the value into
the accumulator
HTA
V1400
5678
V1501
V1400 is the starting
location for the ASCII table.
The conversion is executed
by this instruction.
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
$
B
STR
1
SHFT
L
ANDST
D
SHFT
L
ANDST
D
SHFT
H
T
MLR
7
ENT
PREV
3
3
A
A
0
0
C
B
B
2
1
1
ENT
F
E
5
4
A
A
0
0
A
A
0
0
ENT
ENT
The table below lists valid ASCII values for HTA conversion.
ASCII Values Valid for HTA Conversion
Hex Value
ASCII Value
Hex Value
ASCII Value
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
38
39
41
42
43
44
45
46
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-139
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Segment (SEG)
230
240
250-1
260
DS Used
HPP Used
The BCD / Segment instruction converts a 4digit HEX value
in the accumulator to a 7-segment display format. The result
resides in the accumulator.
In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in V1400 is loaded into the lower 16 bits
of the accumulator using the Load instruction. The binary (HEX) value in the accumulator
is converted to 7-segment format using the Segment instruction. The bit pattern in the
accumulator is copied to Y20–Y57 using the Out Formatted instruction.
DirectSOFT
5-140
SEG
V1400
X1
6
LD
F
7
1
V1400
Load the value in V1400 nto the
lower 16 bits of the accumulator
Acc.
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
8
7
6 5
4 3
2 1
0
1
1
0
1 1
1
0
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
8
7
6 5
4 3
2 1
0
1
1
1
1 1
0
1
0
1 1
1
0
0
0 1
0
0
0
0
0 1
1
1
0
0 0
0
0
1
1 0
-
g
f
e
d c
b
a
-
g f
e
d
c
b a
-
g
f
e
d c
b
a
-
g f
e
d
c
b a
0
0
0
0 0
0
0
0
0 0
0
0
0
0 0
0
1
1
0
1 1
0
0
0 1
SEG
Convert the binary (HEX)
value in the accumulator to
seven segment display
format
OUTF
Y20
K32
Copy the value in the
accumulator to Y20-- Y57
Acc.
0
a
f
b
Segment
Labels
g
e
Y57 Y56 Y55 Y54 Y53
Y24 Y23 Y22 Y21 Y20
OFF ON ON
OFF OFF ON ON OFF
ON ON
c
d
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
$
B
STR
L
ANDST
D
1
3
SHFT
S
RST
GX
OUT
SHFT
ENT
B
SHFT
F
5
E
1
4
E
G
C
4
6
2
A
0
A
0
ENT
ENT
A
0
D
3
C
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
2
ENT
Segment
Labels
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
Gray Code (GRAY)
230
240
250-1
260
DS Used
HPP Used
The Gray code instruction converts a 16-bit gray code value
GRAY
to a BCD value. The BCD conversion requires 10 bits of the
accumulator. The upper 22 bits are set to “0.” This instruction
is designed for use with devices (typically encoders) that use
the grey code numbering scheme. The Gray Code instruction
will directly convert a gray code number to a BCD number
for devices having a resolution of 512 or 1024 counts per
revolution. If a device having a resolution of 360 counts per
revolution is to be used, you must subtract a BCD value of 76
from the converted value to obtain the proper result. For a
device having a resolution of 720 counts per revolution, you
must subtract a BCD value of 152.
In the following example, when X1 is ON the binary value represented by X10–X27 is loaded
into the accumulator using the Load Formatted instruction. The gray code value in the
accumulator is converted to BCD using the Gray Code instruction. The value in the lower 16
bits of the accumulator is copied to V2010.
DirectSOFT
X1
LDF
K16
X27 X26 X25
X12 X11 X10
OFF OFF OFF
ON OFF ON
X10
Load the value represented
by X10–X27 into the lower
16 bits of the accumulator
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
Acc.
GRAY
Convert the 16 bit grey code
value in the accumulator to a
BCD value
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
Acc.
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
8
7
6 5
4 3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
8
7
6 5
4 3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
6
0
OUT
V2010
Copy the value in the lower
16 bits of the accumulator to
V2010
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
$
B
STR
1
ENT
SHFT
L
ANDST
D
SHFT
G
R
ORN
A
SHFT
V
AND
GX
OUT
6
3
F
B
5
0
Y
MLS
C
2
1
A
B
0
1
ENT
A
0
B
1
A
0
ENT
G
6
ENT
Gray Code
BCD
0000000000
0000
0000000001
0001
0000000011
0002
0000000010
0003
0000000110
0004
0000000111
0005
0000000101
0006
0000000100
0007
•
•
•
•
•
•
1000000001
1022
1000000000
1023
V2010
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-141
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Shuffle Digits (SFLDGT)
230
240
250-1
260
The Shuffle Digits instruction shuffles a maximum of 8 digits
SFLDGT
rearranging them in a specified order. This function requires
parameters to be loaded into the first level of the accumulator
stack and the accumulator with two additional instructions.
Listed below are the steps necessary to use the Shuffle Digit
function. The example on the following page shows a program for the Shuffle Digits function.
Step 1: Load the value (digits) to be shuffled into the first level of the accumulator stack.
DS Used
HPP Used
5-142
Step 2: Load the order that the digits will be shuffled to into the accumulator.
Step 3: Insert the SFLDGT instruction.
NOTE: If the number used to specify the order contains a 0 or 9–F, the corresponding position will be set
to 0.
See example on the next page.
NOTE: If the number used to specify the order contains duplicate numbers, the most significant duplicate
number is valid. The result resides in the accumulator.
Shuffle Digits Block Diagram
Digits to be
shuffled (first stack location)
A maximum of 8 digits can be shuffled. The bit
positions in the first level of the accumulator stack
define the digits to be shuffled. They correspond
to the bit positions in the accumulator that define
the order in which the digits will be shuffled. The
digits are shuffled and the result resides in the
accumulator.
9
A
B
C D
E
F
0
1
2
8
7
6
5
4
3
Specified order (accumulator)
Bit Positions
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
B
C
E
F
0
D
A
9
Result (accumulator)
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
In the following example, when X1 is on, the value in the first level of the accumulator stack
will be reorganized in the order specified by the value in the accumulator.
Example A shows how the shuffle digits works when 0 or 9 –F is not used when specifying the
order the digits are to be shuffled. Also, there are no duplicate numbers in the specified order.
Example B shows how the shuffle digits works when a 0 or 9–F is used when specifying the
order the digits are to be shuffled. Notice when the Shuffle Digits instruction is executed, the
bit positions in the first stack location that had a corresponding 0 or 9–F in the accumulator
(order specified) are set to “0”.
Example C shows how the shuffle digits works when duplicate numbers are used specifying the
order the digits are to be shuffled. Notice when the Shuffle Digits instruction is executed, the
most significant duplicate number in the order specified is used in the result.
Direct SOFT
X1
A
V2001
LDD
9
V2000
Load the value in V2000 and
V2001 into the accumulator
A
B
C
Original
8 7 6 5
bit
Positions 9 A B C
D
1
V2006
Load the value in V2006 and
V2007 into the accumulator
SFLDGT
Specified
order
New bit
Positions
8
1
8
2
7
2
7
8
6
5
7
6
F
0
4
3
2
1
E
F
0
3
6
0
Acc.
F
5
5
E
V2000
C
B
A
9
8 7 6 5
0 F E D
4
C
3
B
2
A
1
9
0
0
2
1
V2007
4
4
3
2
1
3
6
5
4
4
3
2
1
B
C
E
F
0
D
A
9
B
C
E
F
0
D
A
9
V2001
D
V2006
7
8
E
C
V2001
D
V2007
LDD
B
V2000
0
0
8
7
4
6
5
A
B
V2000
C
D
E
F
0
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
4
3
1
4
3
2
1
V2007
4
3
2
1
0
3
0
0
2
1
Acc.
8 7 6 5
0 0 0 0
4
E
3
D
2
A
1
9
0
E
D
A
9
4
Acc.
V2006
3
Acc.
0
9
Acc.
Acc.
2
V2006
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
9
A
B
C
0
0
0
0
9
A
B
C
Shuffle the digits in the first
level of the accumulator
stack based on the pattern
in the accumulator. The
result is in the accumulator.
OUTD
V2010
Copy the value in the
accumulator to V2010 and
V2011
0
V2010
V2011
0
0
V2011
V2011
V2010
V2010
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
$
B
STR
1
SHFT
L
ANDST
D
SHFT
L
ANDST
D
SHFT
S
RST
SHFT
GX
OUT
SHFT
D
3
3
3
ENT
D
D
F
C
3
C
3
5
L
ANDST
D
C
A
2
2
2
3
0
A
A
G
B
0
0
6
1
A
A
0
0
A
G
0
6
T
MLR
ENT
A
ENT
0
Acc.
ENT
ENT
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Acc.
Acc.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-143
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Table Instructions
Move (MOV)
230
240
250-1
260
DS Used
HPP Used
The Move instruction moves the values from a V-memory
table to another V-memory table the same length. The
function parameters are loaded into the first level of the
accumulator stack and the accumulator by two additional
instructions. Listed below are the steps necessary to program
the Move function.
MOV
V aaa
Step 1: L
oad the number of V-memory locations to be moved into the first level of the accumulator
stack. This parameter is a HEX value (KFFF max, 7777 octal).
Step 2: L
oad the starting V-memory location for the locations to be moved into the accumulator.
This parameter must be a HEX value.
Step 3: I nsert the MOVE instruction which specifies starting V-memory location (Vaaa) for the
destination table.
Helpful hint: — For parameters that require HEX values when referencing memory locations,
the LDA instruction can be used to convert an octal address to the HEX equivalent and load
the value into the accumulator.
Operand Data Type
V-memory
Pointer
5-144
V
P
DL230 Range
DL240 Range
DL250-1 Range
aaa
aaa
aaa
DL260 Range
aaa
All (See page 3-53)
All (See page 3-53)
All (See page 3-54)
All (See page 3-54)
All (See page 3-55)
All (See page 3-55)
All (See page 3-56)
All (See page 3-56)
In the following example, when X1 is on, the constant value (K6) is loaded into the accumulator
using the Load instruction. This value specifies the length of the table and is placed in the first
stack location after the Load Address instruction is executed. The octal address 2000 (V2000),
the starting location for the source table is loaded into the accumulator. The destination table
location (V2030) is specified in the Move instruction.
X1
LD
Load the constant value 6
(HEX) into the lower 16 bits
of the accumulator
K6
LDA
Convert octal 2000 to HEX
400 and load the value into
the accumulator
O 2000
Copy the specified table
locations to a table
beginning at location V2030
MOV
V2030
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
SR
1
SH
L
A DS
D
SH
L
A DS
D
SH
M
ORS
O
IS
E
SH
3
3
A
0
V
AD
K
C
C
MP
2
2
6
A
A
0
0
E
A
D
0
3
A
A
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
0
0
E
E
X
X
X
X V1776
X
X
X
X V2026
X
X
X
X V1777
X
X
X
X V2027
0
1
2
3 V2000
0
1
2
3 V2030
0
5
0
0 V2001
0
5
0
0 V2031
9
9
9
9 V2002
9
9
9
9 V2032
3
0
7
4 V2003
3
0
7
4 V2033
8
9
8
9 V2004
8
9
8
9 V2034
1
0
1
0 V2005
1
0
1
0 V2035
X
X
X
X V2006
X
X
X
X V2036
X
X
X
X V2007
X
X
X
X V2037
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
Move Memory Cartridge (MOVMC)
Load Label (LDLBL)
1
MOVMC
2
V aaa
3
LDLBL
4
K aaa
5
Step 1: L
oad the number of words to be copied into the second level of the accumulator stack.
Step 2: L
oad the offset for the data label area in the program ladder memory and the beginning of the
6
V-memory block into the first level of the accumulator stack.
Step 3: L
oad the source data label (LDLBL Kaaa) into the accumulator when copying data from
7
ladder memory to V-memory. Load the source address into the accumulator when copying
data from V-memory to ladder memory. This is where the value will be copied from. If the
source address is a V-memory location, the value must be entered in HEX.
8
Step 4: I nsert the MOVMC instruction which specifies destination (Aaaa). This is where the value
will be copied to.
9
Operand Data Type
DL230 Range
DL240 Range
DL250-1 Range
DL260 Range
10
aaa
aaa
aaa
aaa
11
WARNING: The offset for this usage of the instruction starts at 0, but may be any number that does not 12
result in data outside of the source data area being copied into the destination table. When an offset
is outside of the source information boundaries, then unknown data values will be transferred into the
13
destination table.
14
A
B
C
D
230
240
250-1
260
DS Used
HPP Used
V-memory
Constant
The Move Memory Cartridge instruction is used to copy data
between V-memory and program ladder memory. The Load
Label instruction is only used with the MOVMC instruction
when copying data from program ladder memory to V-memory.
To copy data between V-memory and program ladder memory,
the function parameters are loaded into the first two levels of
the accumulator stack and the accumulator by two additional
instructions. Listed below are the steps necessary to program the
Move Memory Cartridge and Load Label functions.
V
K
All (See page 3-53)
K1-KFFFF
All (See page 3-54)
K1-KFFFF
All (See page 3-55)
K1-KFFFF
All (See page 3-56)
K1-KFFFF
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5-145
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
Copy Data From a Data Label Area to V-Memory
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
230
240
250-1
260
DS Used
HPP Used
5-146
In the following example, data is copied from a Data Label Area to V-memory. When X1 is
on, the constant value (K4) is loaded into the accumulator using the Load instruction. This
value specifies the length of the table and is placed in the second stack location after the next
Load and Load Label (LDLBL) instructions are executed. The constant value (K0) is loaded
into the accumulator using the Load instruction. This value specifies the offset for the source
and destination data, and is placed in the first stack location after the LDLBL instruction is
executed. The source address where data is being copied from is loaded into the accumulator
using the LDLBL instruction. The MOVMC instruction specifies the destination starting
location and executes the copying of data from the Data Label Area to V-memory.
DirectSOFT
X1
Data Label Area
Programmed
After the END
Instruction
LD
K4
DLBL K1
Load the value 4 into the
accumulator specifying the
number of locations to be
copied.
LD
K0
Load the value 0 into the
accumulator specifying the
offset for source and
destination locations
LDLBL
N
C O N
K
1
N
C O N
K
4
N
C O N
K
6
N
C O N
K
8
2
3
5
3
1
5
8
4
X
X
X
X V1777
1
2
3
4
V2000
4
5
3
2
V2001
6
1
5
1
V2002
8
8
4
5
V2003
X
X
X
X V2004
4
2
1
5
K1
Load the value 1 into the
accumulator specifying the
Data Label Area K1 as the
starting address of the data
to be copied.
MOVMC
V2000
V2000 is the destination
starting address for the data
to be copied.
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
$
B
STR
1
SHFT
L
ANDST
D
SHFT
L
ANDST
D
SHFT
L
ANDST
D
3
SHFT
M
ORST
O
INST#
ENT
SHFT
K
JMP
E
SHFT
K
JMP
A
L
ANDST
B
L
ANDST
B
V
AND
M
ORST
C
C
3
3
1
4
0
2
ENT
ENT
1
2
ENT
A
0
A
0
A
0
ENT
WARNING: The offset for this usage of the instruction starts at 0, but may be any number that does not
result in data outside of the source data area being copied into the destination table. When an offset
is outside of the source information boundaries, then unknown data values will be transferred into the
destination table.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
Copy Data From V-Memory to a Data Label Area
230
240
250-1
260
DS Used
HPP Used
1
2
3
4
5
DLBL K1
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
WARNING: The offset for this usage of the instruction starts at 0. If the offset (or the specified data table C
range) is large enough to cause data to be copied from V-memory to beyond the end of the DLBL area,
then anything after the specified DLBL area will be replaced with invalid instructions.
D
In the following example, data is copied from V-memory to a data label area. When X1 is
on, the constant value (K4) is loaded into the accumulator using the Load instruction. This
value specifies the length of the table and is placed in the second stack location after the next
Load and Load Address instructions are executed. The constant value (K2) is loaded into
the accumulator using the Load instruction. This value specifies the offset for the source and
destination data, and is placed in the first stack location after the Load Address instruction is
executed. The source address where data is being copied from is loaded into the accumulator
using the Load Address instruction. The MOVMC instruction specifies the destination starting
location and executes the copying of data from V-memory to the data label area.
DirectSOFT
X1
Data Label Area
Programmed
After the END
Instruction
LD
K4
Load the value 4 into the
accumulator specifying the
number of locations to be
copied.
LD
K2
X
X
X
X V1777
1
2
3
4
V2000
N
Offset
4
Load the value 2 into the
accumulator specifying the
offset for source and
destination locations.
6
LDA
O 2000
Convert octal 2000 to HEX
400 and load the value into
the accumulator. This
specifies the source location
where the data will be
copied from
MOVMC
5
3
1
5
2
1
V2001
V2002
C O N
K
7
N
C O N
0
K
4
N
C O N
6
1
4
4
K
6
C O N
5
8
8
4
5
V2003
N
K
8
2
5
0
0
V2004
N
C O N
K
2
6
8
3
5
V2005
N
C O N
K
6
X
X
X
X V2006
8
5
8
4
0
3
1
Offset
8
1
5
0
5
K1
K1 is the data label
destination area where the
data will be copied to
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
$
B
STR
1
SHFT
L
ANDST
D
SHFT
L
ANDST
D
SHFT
L
ANDST
D
SHFT
M
ORST
O
INST#
ENT
3
3
3
A
SHFT
K
JMP
E
SHFT
K
JMP
C
C
A
0
V
AND
M
ORST
C
2
2
4
2
0
ENT
ENT
A
0
SHFT
A
0
K
JMP
ENT
B
1
ENT
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5-147
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Set Bit (SETBIT)
The Set Bit instruction sets a single bit to one within a range
of V-memory locations.
230
240
250-1
260
Reset Bit (RSTBIT)
230
240
250-1
260
DS Used
HPP Used
The Reset Bit instruction resets a single bit to zero within a
range of V-memory locations.
SETBIT
V aaa
RSTBIT
V aaa
The following description applies to both the Set Bit and Reset Bit table instructions.
Step 1: L
oad the length of the table (number of V-memory locations) into the first level of the
accumulator stack. This parameter must be a HEX value, 0 to FF.
Step 2: L
oad the starting V-memory location for the table into the accumulator. This parameter
must be a HEX value. You can use the LDA instruction to convert an octal address to hex.
Step 3: I nsert the Set Bit or Reset Bit instruction. This specifies the reference for the bit number of
the bit you want to set or reset. The bit number is in octal, and the first bit in the table is
number “0.”
Helpful hint: — Remember that each V-memory location contains 16 bits. So, the bits of the
first word of the table are numbered from 0 to 17 octal. For example, if the table length is 6
words, then 6 words = (6 x 16) bits, = 96 bits (decimal), or 140 octal. The permissible range of
bit reference numbers would be 0 to 137 octal. Flag 53 will be set if the bit specified is outside
the range of the table.
Operand Data Type
DL260 Range
aaa
V-memory
V
Discrete Bit Flags
SP53
5-148
All (See page 3-56)
Description
On when the bit number which is referred in the Set Bit or Reset Bit exceeds the range of
the table
NOTE: Status flags are only valid until the end of the scan or another instruction that uses the same flag is
executed.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
B
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
For example, suppose we have a table starting at V3000
that is two words long, as shown to the right. Each word
in the table contains 16 bits, or 0 to 17 in octal. To set bit
12 in the second word, we use its octal reference (bit 14).
Then we compute the bit’s octal address from the start of
the table, so 17 + 14 = 34 octal. The following program
shows how to set the bit as shown to a “1.”
MSB
V3000
LSB
1
2
3
In this ladder example, we will use input X0 to trigger the Set Bit operation. First, we will load
the table length (two words) into the accumulator stack. Next, we load the starting address 4
into the accumulator. Since V3000 is an octal number we have to convert it to hex by using
the LDA command. Finally, we use the Set Bit (or Reset Bit) instruction and specify the octal 5
address of the bit (bit 34), referenced from the table beginning.
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
16 bits
MSB
V3001
LSB
1 1 1 1 11 1 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
7 6 5 4 32 1 0
DirectSOFT
X0
Load the constant value 2
(Hex.) into the lower 16 bits
of the accumulator.
LD
K2
Convert octal 3000 to HEX
and load the value into the
accumulator. This is the
table beginning.
LDA
O 3000
Set bit 34 (octal) in the table
to a ”1”.
SETBIT
O 34
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
$
A
STR
SHFT
L
ANDST
D
SHFT
L
ANDST
D
X
SET
SHFT
B
ENT
0
PREV
3
3
1
A
I
D
0
8
C
T
MLR
2
3
NEXT
ENT
A
D
0
3
A
E
0
4
A
0
ENT
ENT
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5-149
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Fill (FILL)
240
250-1
260
230
DS Used
HPP Used
5-150
The Fill instruction fills a table of up to 255 V-memory locations
with a value (Aaaa), which is either a V-memory location or a
4-digit constant. The function parameters are loaded into the
first level of the accumulator stack and the accumulator by two
additional instructions. Listed below are the steps necessary to
program the Fill function.
FILL
A aaa
Step 1: L
oad the number of V-memory locations to be filled into the first level of the accumulator
stack. This parameter must be a HEX value, 0 to FFFF.
Step 2: L
oad the starting V-memory location for the table into the accumulator. This parameter
must be a HEX value.
Step 3: Insert the Fill instructions which specifies the value to fill the table with.
Helpful hint: For parameters that require HEX values when referencing memory locations, the
LDA instruction can be used to convert an octal address to the HEX equivalent and load the
value into the accumulator.
Operand Data Type
DL260 Range
A
V-memory
Pointer
Constant
aaa
V All (See page 3-56)
P All V mem (See page 3-56)
K 0-FFFF
Discrete Bit Flag
Description
SP53
On if V-memory address is out of range
In the following example, when X1 is on, the constant value (K4) is loaded into the accumulator
using the Load instruction. This value specifies the length of the table and is placed on the
first level of the accumulator stack when the Load Address instruction is executed. The octal
address 1600 (V1600) is the starting location for the table and is loaded into the accumulator
using the Load Address instruction. The value to fill the table with (V1400) is specified in the
Fill instruction.
DirectSOFT
X1
Load the constant value 4
(HEX) into the lower 16 bits
of the accumulator
LD
K4
V1576
V1577
Convert the octal address
1600 to HEX 380 and load the
value into the accumulator
LDA
O 1600
V1400
2
5
0
0
Fill the table with the value
in V1400
FILL
V1400
2
5
0
0 V1600
2
5
0
0 V1601
2
5
0
0 V1602
2
5
0
0 V1603
V1604
V1605
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
$
B
STR
SHFT
L
ANDST
D
SHFT
L
ANDST
D
SHFT
F
I
5
1
ENT
PREV
3
3
8
A
0
L
L
ANDST ANDST
E
B
4
1
ENT
G
B
6
1
A
E
0
4
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
A
A
0
0
ENT
A
0
ENT
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
Find (FIND)
230
240
250-1
260
DS Used
HPP Used
1
A aaa
2
3
Step 1: L
oad the length of the table (number of V-memory locations) into the second level of the
accumulator stack. This parameter must be a HEX value, 0 to FFFF.
4
Step 2: L
oad the starting V-memory location for the table into the first level of the accumulator stack.
This parameter must be a HEX value.
Step 3: L
oad the offset from the starting location to begin the search. This parameter must be a HEX 5
value.
Step 4: I nsert the Find instruction which specifies the first value to be found in the table.
6
Results: The offset from the starting address to the first V-memory location which contains the
search value is returned to the accumulator as a HEX value. SP53 will be set on if an address
outside the table is specified in the offset or the value is not found. If the value is not found, 7
0 will be returned in the accumulator.
Helpful hint: For parameters that require HEX values when referencing memory locations, the 8
LDA instruction can be used to convert an octal address to the HEX equivalent and load the
value into the accumulator.
9
Operand Data Type
DL260 Range
10
A
aaa
11
12
Discrete Bit Flag
Description
13
NOTE: Status flags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same flags is executed. The
14
pointer for this instruction starts at 0 and resides in the accumulator.
In the example on the following page, when X1 is on, the constant value (K6) is loaded into A
the accumulator using the Load instruction. This value specifies the length of the table and is
placed in the second stack location when the following Load Address and Load instruction is
executed. The octal address 1400 (V1400) is the starting location for the table and is loaded B
into the accumulator. This value is placed in the first level of the accumulator stack when the
following Load instruction is executed. The offset (K2) is loaded into the lower 16 bits of the C
accumulator using the Load instruction. The value to be found in the table is specified in the
Find instruction. If a value is found equal to the search value, the offset (from the starting
D
location of the table) where the value is located will reside in the accumulator.
The Find instruction is used to search for a specified value
in a V-memory table of up to 255 locations. The function
parameters are loaded into the first and second levels of the
accumulator stack and the accumulator by three additional
instructions. Listed below are the steps necessary to program
the Find function.
V-memory
Constant
SP53
V
K
FIND
All (See page 3-56)
0-FFFF
On if there is no value in the table that is equal to the search value.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5-151
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
DirectSOFT
X1
LD
K6
Load the constant value 6
(HEX) into the lower 16 bits
of the accumulator
Offset
Begin here
LDA
O 1400
Convert octal 1400 to HEX
300 and load the value into
the accumulator
0
1
2
3
V1400
0
0
5
0
0
V1401
1
9
9
9
9
V1402
2
3
0
7
4
V1403
3
8
9
8
9
V1404
4
1
0
1
0
V1405
5
X
X X
X V1406
X
X X
X V1407
Table length
Accumulator
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
4
V1404 contains the location
where the match was found.
The value 8989 was the 4th
location after the start of the
specified table.
LD
K2
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
Load the constant value 2
into the lower 16 bits of
the accumulator
FIND
K8989
Find the location in the table
where the value 8989 resides
$
B
STR
SHFT
L
ANDST
D
SHFT
L
ANDST
D
SHFT
L
ANDST
D
SHFT
F
I
5
1
ENT
PREV
3
3
3
8
A
G
B
0
PREV
C
N
TMR
D
2
3
6
1
ENT
E
4
A
0
A
0
ENT
ENT
NEXT
I
8
J
9
I
8
J
9
ENT
Find Greater Than (FDGT)
230
240
250-1
260
The Find Greater Than instruction is used to search for the first
occurrence of a value in a V-memory table that is greater than the
specified value (Aaaa), which can be either a V-memory location
or a 4-digit constant. The function parameters are loaded into
the first level of the accumulator stack and the accumulator by
two additional instructions. Listed below are the steps necessary
to program the Find Greater Than function.
FDGT
A aaa
NOTE: This instruction does not have an offset, such as the one required for the FIND instruction.
DS Used
HPP Used
5-152
Step 1: L
oad the length of the table (up to 255 locations) into the first level of the accumulator stack.
This parameter must be a HEX value, 0 to FFFF.
Step 2: L
oad the starting V-memory location for the table into the accumulator. This parameter
must be a HEX value.
Step 3: Insert the FDGT instruction which specifies the greater than search value.
Results:The offset from the starting address to the first V-memory location which contains the
greater than search value is returned to the accumulator as a HEX value. SP53 will be set on
if the value is not found and 0 will be returned in the accumulator.
Helpful hint: For parameters that require HEX values when referencing memory locations, the
LDA instruction can be used to convert an octal address to the HEX equivalent and load the
value into the accumulator.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
Operand Data Type
DL260 Range
1
2
Discrete Bit Flags
Description
3
4
NOTE: Status flags are only valid until another instruction that uses the same flags is executed. The
pointer for this instruction starts at 0 and resides in the accumulator.
5
In the following example, when X1 is on, the constant value (K6) is loaded into the accumulator
using the Load instruction. This value specifies the length of the table and is placed in the first
stack location after the Load Address instruction is executed. The octal address 1400 (V1400) 6
is the starting location for the table and is loaded into the accumulator. The greater than search
value is specified in the Find Greater Than instruction. If a value is found greater than the 7
search value, the offset (from the starting location of the table) where the value is located will
reside in the accumulator. If there is no value in the table that is greater than the search value,
8
a zero is stored in the accumulator and SP53 will come ON.
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
A
V-memory
Constant
SP53
aaa
V All (See page 3-56)
K 0-FFFF
On if there is no value in the table that is equal to the search value.
DirectSOFT
X1
LD
Begin here
K6
Load the constant value 6
(HEX) into the lower 16 bits
of the accumulator
LDA
O1400
Convert octal 1400 to HEX
300 and load the value into
the accumulator
Table length
0
1
2
3
V1400
0
0
5
0
0
V1401
1
9
9
9
9
V1402
2
0
3
0
7
4
V1403
3
8
9
8
9
V1404
4
1
0
1
0
V1405
5
X
X X
X V1406
X
X X
X V1407
V1402 contains the location
where the first value greater
than the search value was
found. 9999 was the 2nd
location after the start of the
specified table.
Accumulator
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
FDGT
K8989
Find the value in the table
greater than the specified value
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
$
B
STR
SHFT
L
ANDST
D
SHFT
L
ANDST
D
SHFT
F
D
5
1
ENT
PREV
3
3
3
A
G
B
0
6
G
T
MLR
6
1
ENT
E
4
NEXT
A
I
0
8
A
J
ENT
0
9
I
8
J
9
ENT
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5-153
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Table to Destination (TTD)
230
240
250-1
260
DS Used
HPP Used
The Table To Destination instruction moves a value from a
V-memory table to a V-memory location and increments the
table pointer by 1. The first V-memory location in the table
contains the table pointer which indicates the next location in
the table to be moved. The instruction will be executed once
per scan provided the input remains on. The table pointer will
reset to 1 when the value equals the last location in the table.
The function parameters are loaded into the first level of the
accumulator stack and the accumulator by two additional
instructions. Listed below are the steps necessary to program the
Table To Destination function.
TTD
Vaaa
Step 1: L
oad the length of the data table (number of V-memory locations) into the first level of the
accumulator stack. This parameter must be a HEX value, 0 to FF.
Step 2: L
oad the starting V-memory location for the table into the accumulator. (Remember, the
starting location of the table is used as the table pointer.) This parameter must be a HEX
value.
Step 3: I nsert the TTD instruction that specifies the destination V-memory location (Vaaa).
Helpful hint: For parameters that require HEX values when referencing memory locations, the
LDA instruction can be used to convert an octal address to the HEX equivalent and load the
value into the accumulator.
Helpful hint: The instruction will be executed every scan if the input logic is on. If you do not
want the instruction to execute for more than one scan, a one shot (PD) should be used in the
input logic.
Helpful hint: The pointer location should be set to the value where the table operation will
begin. The special relay SP0 or a one shot (PD) should be used so the value will only be set in
one scan and will not affect the instruction operation.
Operand Data Type
DL260 Range
aaa
V-memory
Discrete Bit Flags
SP53
5-154
V
All (See page 3 - 56)
Description
On if there is no value in the table that is equal to the search value.
NOTE: Status flags (SPs) are only valid until:
— another instruction that uses the same flag is executed, or
— the end of the scan.
The pointer for this instruction starts at 0 and resets when the table length is reached. At first glance it
may appear that the pointer should reset to 0. However, it resets to 1, not 0.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
In the following example, when X1 is on, the constant value (K6) is loaded into the accumulator
using the Load instruction. This value specifies the length of the table and is placed in the
first stack location after the Load Address instruction is executed. The octal address 1400
(V1400) is the starting location for the source table and is loaded into the accumulator.
Remember, V1400 is used as the pointer location, and is not actually part of the table data
source. The destination location (V1500) is specified in the Table to Destination instruction.
The table pointer (V1400 in this case) will be increased by “1” after each execution of the TTD
instruction.
DirectSOFT
X1
Load the constant value 6
(HEX) into the lower 16 bits
of the accumulator
LD
K6
Convert octal 1400 to HEX
300 and load the value into
the accumulator. This is the
table pointer location
LDA
0 1400
Copy the specified value from
the table to the specified
destination (V1500)
TTD
V1500
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
$
B
STR
1
SHFT
L
ANDST
D
SHFT
L
ANDST
D
SHFT
T
MLR
T
MLR
ENT
PREV
3
3
A
D
0
3
G
B
B
6
1
1
ENT
E
F
4
5
A
A
0
0
A
A
It is important to understand how the table
locations are numbered. If you examine the
example table, you’ll notice that the first data
location, V1401, will be used when the pointer is
equal to 0, and again when the pointer is equal to
6. Why? Because the pointer is only equal to 0
before the very first execution. From then on, it
increments from 1 to 6, and then resets to 1.
0
0
ENT
ENT
Table Pointer
Table
V1401
0
5
0
0
06
V1402
9
9
9
9
1
V1403
3
0
7
4
2
V1404
8
9
8
9
3
V1405
1
0
1
0
4
V1406
2
0
4
6
5
V1407
X
X X
X
Also, our example uses a normal input contact (X1) to
control the execution. Since the CPU scan is extremely
fast, and the pointer increments automatically, the table
would cycle through the locations very quickly. If this is a
problem, you have an option of using SP56 in conjunction
with a one-shot (PD) and a latch (C1 for example) to
allow the table to cycle through all locations one time and
then stop. The logic shown here is not required, it’s just
an optional method.
0
0
0
0 V1400
Destination
X
X X
X V1500
.
.
DirectSOFT
Display (optional latch example using SP56)
X1
C1
C0
PD
LD
K6
Load the constant value 6
(HEX) into the lower 16 bits
of the accumulator
C0
C1
SET
SP56
C1
RST
Since Special Relays are
reset at the end of the scan,
this latch must follow the TTD
instruction in the program.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-155
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-156
The following diagram shows the scan-by-scan results of the execution for our example
program. Notice how the pointer automatically cycles from 0 to 6, and then starts over at 1
instead of 0. Also, notice how SP56 is only on until the end of the scan.
Scan N
Before TTD Execution
After TTD Execution
Table
Table Pointer
V1401
0
5
0
0
0 6
V1402
9
9
9
9
1
V1403
3
0
7
4
2
V1404
8
9
8
9
3
V1405
1
0
1
0
4
V1406
2
0
4
6
5
V1407
X
X X
X
0
0
0
Table
0 V1400
Destination
X
X X
X V1500
SP56
SP56 = OFF
0
5
0
0
0 6
V1402
9
9
9
9
1
V1403
3
0
7
4
2
V1404
8
9
8
9
3
V1405
1
0
1
0
4
V1406
2
0
4
6
5
V1407
X
X
X
X
.
.
Scan N+1
Table Pointer (Automatically Incremented)
V1401
0
0
0
1 V1400
Destination
0
5
0
0
V1500
SP56
SP56 = OFF
.
.
Before TTD Execution
After TTD Execution
Table
Table Pointer
V1401
0
5
0
0
0 6
V1402
9
9
9
9
1
V1403
3
0
7
4
2
V1404
8
9
8
9
3
V1405
1
0
1
0
4
V1406
2
0
4
6
5
V1407
X
X X
X
0
0
0
Table
1 V1400
Destination
0
5
0
0 V1500
SP56
SP56 = OFF
Table Pointer (Automatically Incremented)
V1401
0
5
0
0
0 6
V1402
9
9
9
9
1
V1403
3
0
7
4
2
V1404
8
9
8
9
3
V1405
1
0
1
0
4
V1406
2
0
4
6
5
V1407
X
X
X
X
0
0
0
2 V1400
Destination
9
9
9
SP56
9 V1500
SP56 = OFF
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Scan N+5
After TTD Execution
Before TTD Execution
Table
Table Pointer
V1401
0
5
0
0
0 6
V1402
9
9
9
9
1
V1403
3
0
7
4
2
V1404
8
9
8
9
3
V1405
1
0
1
0
4
V1406
2
0
4
6
5
V1407
X
X X
X
0
0
0
Table
5 V1400
Destination
1
0
1
0 V1500
SP56
SP56 = OFF
0
5
0
0
0 6
V1402
9
9
9
9
1
V1403
3
0
7
4
2
V1404
8
9
8
9
3
V1405
1
0
1
0
4
V1406
2
0
4
6
5
V1407
X
X
X
X
.
.
Scan N+6
Table Pointer (Automatically Incremented)
V1401
0
0
0
6 V1400
Destination
2
0
4
6 V1500
SP56
SP56 = ON
until end of scan
or next instruction
that uses SP56
.
.
After TTD Execution
Before TTD Execution
Table
Table Pointer
V1401
0
5
0
0
0 6
V1402
9
9
9
9
1
V1403
3
0
7
4
2
V1404
8
9
8
9
3
V1405
1
0
1
0
4
V1406
2
0
4
6
5
V1407
X
X X
X
0
0
0
Table
6 V1400
Destination
2
0
4
6 V1500
SP56
SP56 = OFF
.
.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Table Pointer (Resets to 1, not 0)
V1401
0
5
0
0
0 6
V1402
9
9
9
9
1
V1403
3
0
7
4
2
V1404
8
9
8
9
3
V1405
1
0
1
0
4
V1406
2
0
4
6
5
V1407
X
X
X
X
.
.
0
0
0
1 V1400
Destination
0
5
0
0 V1500
SP56
SP56 = OFF
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
Remove from Bottom (RFB)
240
250-1
260
230
1
2
3
4
5
Step 1: L
oad the length of the table (number of V-memory locations) into the first level of the
accumulator stack. This parameter must be a HEX value, 0 to FF.
6
Step 2: L
oad the starting V-memory location for the table into the accumulator. (Remember, the
starting location of the table blank is used as the table pointer.) This parameter must be a
HEX value.
7
Step 3: I nsert the RFB instructions which specifies destination V-memory location (Vaaa).
Helpful hint: For parameters that require HEX values when referencing memory locations, the 8
LDA instruction can be used to convert an octal address to the HEX equivalent and load the
value into the accumulator.
9
Helpful hint: The instruction will be executed every scan if the input logic is on. If you do not
want the instruction to execute for more than one scan, a one shot (PD) should be used in the
10
input logic.
Helpful hint: The pointer location should be set to the value where the table operation will
begin. The special relay SP0 or a one shot (PD) should be used so the value will only be set in 11
one scan and will not affect the instruction operation.
12
Operand Data Type
DL260 Range
aaa
13
Discrete Bit Flags
Description
14
A
NOTE: Status flags (SPs) are only valid until:
— another instruction that uses the same flag is executed, or
— the end of the scan.
B
The pointer for this instruction can be set to start anywhere in the table. It is not set automatically. You
C
have to load a value into the pointer somewhere in your program.
D
DS Used
HPP Used
The Remove From Bottom instruction moves a value from
the bottom of a V-memory table to a V-memory location and
decrements a table pointer by 1. The first V-memory location
in the table contains the table pointer which indicates the next
location in the table to be moved. The instruction will be executed
once per scan provided the input remains on. The instruction
will stop operation when the pointer equals 0. The function
parameters are loaded into the first level of the accumulator stack
and the accumulator by 2 additional instructions. Listed below
are the steps necessary to program the Remove From Bottom
function.
V-memory
SP56
V
RFB
Vaaa
All (See page 3-56)
On when the table pointer equals 0
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5-157
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-158
In the following example, when X1 is on, the constant value (K6) is loaded into the accumulator
using the Load instruction. This value specifies the length of the table and is placed in the first
stack location after the Load Address instruction is executed. The octal address 1400 (V1400)
is the starting location for the source table and is loaded into the accumulator. Remember,
V1400 is used as the pointer location, and is not actually part of the table data source. The
destination location (V1500) is specified in the Remove From Bottom. The table pointer
(V1400 in this case) will be decremented by “1” after each execution of the RFB instruction.
DirectSOFT
X1
LD
K6
Load the constant value 6
(HEX) into the lower 16 bits
of the accumulator
LDA
0 1400
Convert octal 1400 to HEX
300 and load the value into
the accumulator. This is the
table pointer location
RFB
V1500
Copy the specified value from
the table to the specified
destination (V1500)
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
$
B
STR
SHFT
L
ANDST
D
SHFT
L
ANDST
D
SHFT
R
ORN
F
1
ENT
PREV
3
3
5
A
B
0
1
G
B
B
6
1
1
ENT
E
F
4
5
A
A
0
0
It is important to understand how the table locations are
numbered. If you examine the example table, you’ll notice
that the first data location, V1401, will be used when the
pointer is equal to one. The second data location, V1402,
will be used when the pointer is equal to two, etc.
Also, our example uses a normal input contact (X1) to
control the execution. Since the CPU scan is extremely
fast, and the pointer decrements automatically, the table
would cycle through the locations very quickly. If this is a
problem for your applicaton, you have an option of using
a one-shot (PD) to remove one value each time the input
contact transitions from low to high.
A
A
ENT
0
ENT
0
Table
Table Pointer
V1401
0
5
0
0
1
V1402
9
9
9
9
2
V1403
3
0
7
4
3
V1404
8
9
8
9
4
V1405
1
0
1
0
5
V1406
2
0
4
6
6
V1407
X
X
X
X
0
0
0
X
X
X
S
S
DirectSOFT (optional one-shot method)
X1
C0
C0
PD
LD
K6
Load the constant value 6
(HEX) into the lower 16 bits
of the accumulator
LDA
O 1400
Convert octal 1400 to HEX
300 and load the value into
the accumulator. This is the
table pointer location.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
0 V1400
Des tination
X V1500
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
The following diagram shows the scan-by-scan results of the execution for our example
program. Notice how the pointer automatically decrements from 6 to 0. Also, notice how
SP56 is only on until the end of the scan.
Example of Execution
Scan N
Before RFB Execution
After RFB Execution
Table
Table Pointer
V1401
0
5
0
0
1
V1402
9
9
9
9
2
V1403
3
0
7
4
3
V1404
8
9
8
9
4
V1405
1
0
1
0
5
V1406
2
0
4
6
6
V1407
X
X X
X
0
0
0
Table
6 V1400
Destination
X
X X
X V1500
SP56
SP56 = OFF
0
5
0
0
1
V1402
9
9
9
9
2
V1403
3
0
7
4
3
V1404
8
9
8
9
4
V1405
1
0
1
0
5
V1406
2
0
4
6
6
V1407
X
X
X
X
0
0
0
5 V1400
Destination
2
0
4
6
V1500
SP56
SP56 = OFF
.
.
.
.
Scan N+1
Table Pointer (Automatically Decremented)
V1401
Before RFB Execution
After RFB Execution
Table
Table Pointer
V1401
0
5
0
0
1
V1402
9
9
9
9
2
V1403
3
0
7
4
3
V1404
8
9
8
9
4
V1405
1
0
1
0
5
V1406
2
0
4
6
6
V1407
X
X X
X
0
0
0
Table
5 V1400
Destination
2
0
4
6 V1500
SP56
SP56 = OFF
Table Pointer (Automatically Decremented)
V1401
0
5
0
0
1
V1402
9
9
9
9
2
V1403
3
0
7
4
3
V1404
8
9
8
9
4
V1405
1
0
1
0
5
V1406
2
0
4
6
6
V1407
X
X
X
X
.
.
0
0
0
4 V1400
Destination
1
0
1
0 V1500
SP56
SP56 = OFF
.
.
.
.
.
Scan N+4
Before RFB Execution
After RFB Execution
Table
Table Pointer
V1401
0
5
0
0
1
V1402
9
9
9
9
2
V1403
3
0
7
4
3
V1404
8
9
8
9
4
V1405
1
0
1
0
5
V1406
2
0
4
6
6
V1407
X
X X
X
0
0
0
Destination
3
0
7
4 V1500
SP56
SP56 = OFF
V1401
0
5
0
0
1
V1402
9
9
9
9
2
V1403
3
0
7
4
3
V1404
8
9
8
9
4
V1405
1
0
1
0
5
V1406
2
0
4
6
6
V1407
X
X
X
X
.
.
Scan N+5
0
0
0
1 V1400
Destination
9
9
9
9 V1500
SP56
SP56 = OFF
.
.
Before RFB Execution
After RFB Execution
Table
Table Pointer
V1401
0
5
0
0
1
V1402
9
9
9
9
2
V1403
3
0
7
4
3
V1404
8
9
8
9
4
V1405
1
0
1
0
5
V1406
2
0
4
6
6
V1407
X
X X
X
.
.
Table Pointer (Automatically Decremented)
Table
2 V1400
0
0
0
Table
1 V1400
Destination
9
9
9
9 V1500
SP56
SP56 = OFF
Table Pointer
V1401
0
5
0
0
1
V1402
9
9
9
9
2
V1403
3
0
7
4
3
V1404
8
9
8
9
4
V1405
1
0
1
0
5
V1406
2
0
4
6
6
V1407
X
X
X
X
.
.
0
0
0
0 V1400
Destination
0
5
0
0 V1500
SP56
SP56 = ON
until end of scan
or next instruction
that uses SP56
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-159
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Source to Table (STT)
230
240
250-1
260
DS Used
HPP Used
The Source To Table instruction moves a value from a
V-memory location into a V-memory table and increments a
table pointer by 1. When the table pointer reaches the end of
the table, it resets to 1. The first V-memory location in the table
contains the table pointer which indicates the next location
in the table to store a value. The instruction will be executed
once per scan provided the input remains on. The function
parameters are loaded into the first level of the accumulator
stack and the accumulator with two additional instructions.
Listed below are the steps necessary to program the Source To
Table function.
ST T
V aaa
Step 1: L
oad the length of the table (number of V-memory locations) into the first level of the
accumulator stack. This parameter must be a HEX value, 0 to FF.
Step 2:Load the starting V-memory location for the table into the accumulator. (Remember, the
starting location of the table is used as the table pointer.) This parameter must be a HEX
value.
Step 3:Insert the STT instruction which specifies the source V-memory location (Vaaa). This is
where the value will be moved from.
Helpful hint: For parameters that require HEX values when referencing memory locations, the
LDA instruction can be used to convert an octal address to the HEX equivalent and load the
value into the accumulator.
Helpful hint: The instruction will be executed every scan if the input logic is on. If you do not
want the instruction to execute for more than one scan, a one shot (PD) should be used in the
input logic.
Helpful hint: The table counter value should be set to indicate the starting point for the
operation. Also, it must be set to a value that is within the length of the table. For example, if
the table is 6 words long, then the allowable range of values that could be in the pointer should
be between 0 and 6. If the value is outside of this range, the data will not be moved. Also, a
one shot (PD) should be used so the value will only be set in one scan and will not affect the
instruction operation.
Operand Data Type
DL260 Range
aaa
V-memory
Discrete Bit Flags
SP56
5-160
V
All (See page 3-56)
Description
On when the table pointer equals the table length.
NOTE: Status flags (SPs) are only valid until:
— another instruction that uses the same flag is executed, or
— the end of the scan
The pointer for this instruction starts at 0 and resets to 1 automatically when the table length is reached.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
In the following example, when X1 is on, the constant value (K6) is loaded into the accumulator
using the Load instruction. This value specifies the length of the table and is placed in the first
stack location after the Load Address instruction is executed. The octal address 1400 (V1400),
which is the starting location for the destination table and table pointer, is loaded into the
accumulator. The data source location (V1500) is specified in the Source to Table instruction.
The table pointer will be increased by “1” after each time the instruction is executed.
DirectSOFT
X1
LD
K6
Load the constant value 6
(HEX) into the the lower 16 bits
of the accumulator
LDA
0 1400
Convert octal 1400 to HEX
300 and load the value into
the accumulator
STT
V1500
Copy the specified value
from the source location
(V1500) to the table
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
$
B
STR
SHFT
L
ANDST
D
SHFT
L
ANDST
D
SHFT
S
RST
1
ENT
PREV
3
3
SHFT
A
B
0
T
MLR
G
T
MLR
6
1
ENT
E
B
4
1
A
F
0
5
A
A
0
0
ENT
A
0
It is important to understand how the table
locations are numbered. If you examine the
example table, you’ll notice that the first data
storage location, V1401, will be used when
the pointer is equal to 0, and again when the
pointer is equal to 6. Why? Because the pointer
is only equal to 0 before the very first execution.
From then on, it increments from 1 to 6, and
then resets to 1.
ENT
Table
X
X
X
X
0 6
V1402
X
X
X
X
1
V1403
X
X
X
X
2
V1404
X
X
X
X
3
V1405
X
X
X
X
4
V1406
X
X
X
X
5
V1407
X
X
X
X
0
0
0
0 V1400
Data S ource
0
5
0
0 V1500
S
S
DirectSOFT
Also, our example uses a normal input contact
(X1) to control the execution. Since the
CPU scan is extremely fast, and the pointer
increments automatically, the source data
would be moved into all the table locations
very quickly. If this is a problem for your
application, you have an option of using a oneshot (PD) to move 1 value each time the input
contact transitions from low to high.
Table Pointer
V1401
(optional one-shot method)
X1
C0
C0
PD
LD
K6
Load the constant value 6
(HEX) into the lower 16 bits
of the accumulator
LDA
O 1400
Convert octal 1400 to HEX
300 and load the value into
the accumulator. This is the
starting table location.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-161
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
The following diagram shows the scan-by-scan results of the execution for our example
program. Notice how the pointer automatically cycles from 0 to 6, and then starts over at 1
instead of 0. Also, notice how SP56 is affected by the execution. Although our example does
not show it, we are assuming that there is another part of the program that changes the value in
V1500 (data source) prior to the execution of the STT instruction. This is not required, but it
makes it easier to see how the data source is copied into the table.
Example of Execution
Scan N
Before STT Execution
After STT Execution
Table
Table Pointer
V1401
X
X
X
X
0 6
V1402
X
X
X
X
1
V1403
X
X
X
X
2
V1404
X
X
X
X
3
V1405
X
X
X
X
4
V1406
X
X
X
X
5
V1407
X
X
X
X
0
0
0
Table
0 V1400
Source
0
5
0
0 V1500
SP56
SP56 = OFF
0
5
0
0
0 6
V1402
X
X
X
X
1
V1403
X
X
X
X
2
V1404
X
X
X
X
3
V1405
X
X
X
X
4
V1406
X
X
X
X
5
V1407
X
X
X
X
0
0
0
1 V1400
Source
0
5
0
0
V1500
SP56
SP56 = OFF
.
.
.
.
Scan N+1
Table Pointer (Automatically Incremented)
V1401
After STT Execution
Before STT Execution
Table
Table Pointer
V1401
0
5
0
0
0 6
V1402
X
X
X
X
1
V1403
X
X
X
X
2
V1404
X
X
X
X
3
V1405
X
X
X
X
4
V1406
X
X
X
X
5
V1407
X
X
X
X
0
0
0
Table
1 V1400
Source
9
9
9
9 V1500
SP56
SP56 = OFF
Table Pointer (Automatically Incremented)
V1401
0
5
0
0
0 6
V1402
9
9
9
9
1
V1403
X
X
X
X
2
V1404
X
X
X
X
3
V1405
X
X
X
X
4
V1406
X
X
X
X
5
V1407
X
X
X
X
.
.
0
0
0
2 V1400
Source
9
9
9
SP56
9 V1500
SP56 = OFF
.
.
.
.
.
Scan N+5
Before STT Execution
After STT Execution
Table
Table Pointer
V1401
0
5
0
0
0 6
V1402
9
9
9
9
1
V1403
3
0
7
4
2
V1404
8
9
8
9
3
V1405
1
0
1
0
4
V1406
X
X X
X
5
V1407
X
X X
X
0
0
0
Source
2
0
4
6 V1500
SP56
SP56 = OFF
V1401
0
5
0
0
0 6
V1402
9
9
9
9
1
V1403
3
0
7
4
2
V1404
8
9
8
9
3
V1405
1
0
1
0
4
V1406
2
0
4
6
5
V1407
X
X
X
X
.
.
Scan N+6
5-162
Table Pointer (Automatically Incremented)
Table
5 V1400
0
0
0
Source
2
0
4
6 V1500
SP56
SP56 = ON
until end of scan
or next instruction
that uses SP56
.
.
Before STT Execution
6 V1400
After STT Execution
Table
Table Pointer
V1401
0
5
0
0
0 6
V1402
9
9
9
9
1
V1403
3
0
7
4
2
V1404
8
9
8
9
3
V1405
1
0
1
0
4
V1406
2
0
4
6
5
V1407
X
X X
X
0
0
0
Table
6 V1400
Source
1
2
3
4 V1500
SP56
SP56 = OFF
.
.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Table Pointer (Resets to 1, not 0)
V1401
1
2
3
4
0 6
V1402
9
9
9
9
1
V1403
3
0
7
4
2
V1404
8
9
8
9
3
V1405
1
0
1
0
4
V1406
2
0
4
6
5
V1407
X
X
X
X
.
.
0
0
0
1 V1400
Source
1
2
3
4 V1500
SP56
SP56 = OFF
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
Remove from Table (RFT)
240
250-1
260
230
DS Used
HPP Used
1
2
3
4
5
Step 1: Load the length of the table (number of V-memory locations) into the first level of the
6
accumulator stack. This parameter must be a HEX value, 0 to FF.
Step 2: Load the starting V-memory location for the table into the accumulator. (Remember, the
7
starting location of the table is used as the table length counter.) This parameter must be a
HEX value.
8
Step 3: Insert the RFT instructions which specifies destination V-memory location (Vaaa). This is
where the value will be moved to.
Helpful hint: For parameters that require HEX values when referencing memory locations, the 9
LDA instruction can be used to convert an octal address to the HEX equivalent and load the
value into the accumulator.
10
Helpful hint: The instruction will be executed every scan if the input logic is on. If you do not
want the instruction to execute for more than one scan, a one shot (PD) should be used in the
11
input logic.
Helpful hint: The table counter value should be set to indicate the starting point for the
operation. Also, it must be set to a value that is within the length of the table. For example, if 12
the table is 6 words long, then the allowable range of values that could be in the table counter
should be between 1 and 6. If the value is outside of this range or 0, the data will not be moved 13
from the table. Also, a one shot (PD) should be used so the value will only be set in one scan
and will not affect the instruction operation.
14
Operand Data Type
DL260 Range
aaa
A
B
Discrete Bit Flags
Description
C
NOTE: Status flags (SPs) are only valid until:
— another instruction that uses the same flag is executed, or
D
— the end of the scan
The Remove From Table instruction pops a value off of a table
RFT
and stores it in a V-memory location. When a value is removed
V aaa
from the table all other values are shifted up 1 location. The
first V-memory location in the table contains the table length
counter. The table counter decrements by 1 each time the
instruction is executed. If the length counter is 0 or greater than the maximum table length
(specified in the first level of the accumulator stack), the instruction will not execute and SP56
will be on.
The instruction will be executed once per scan provided the input remains on. The function
parameters are loaded into the first level of the accumulator stack and the accumulator by 2
additional instructions. Listed below are the steps necessary to program the Remove From
Table function.
V-memory
SP56
V
All (See page 3-56)
On when the table counter equals 0.
The pointer for this instruction can be set to start anywhere in the table. It is not set automatically. You
have to load a value into the pointer somewhere in your program.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5-163
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-164
In the following example, when X1 is on, the constant value (K6) is loaded into the accumulator
using the Load instruction. This value specifies the length of the table and is placed in the first
stack location after the Load Address instruction is executed. The octal address 1400 (V1400)
is the starting location for the source table and is loaded into the accumulator. The destination
location (V1500) is specified in the Remove from Table instruction. The table counter will be
decreased by “1” after the instruction is executed.
DirectSOFT
X1
K6
Load the constant value 6
(Hex.) into the lower 16 bits
of the accumulator
O 1400
Convert octal 1400 to HEX
300 and load the value into
the accumulator
V1500
Copy the specified value
from the table to the
specified location (V1500)
LD
LDA
RFT
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
$
B
STR
SHFT
L
ANDST
D
SHFT
L
ANDST
D
SHFT
R
ORN
F
1
ENT
PREV
3
3
5
A
0
T
MLR
G
B
B
6
1
1
ENT
E
F
4
5
Since the table counter specifies the range of data
that will be removed from the table, it is important
to understand how the table locations are numbered.
If you examine the example table, you’ll notice that
the data locations are numbered from the top of the
table. For example, if the table counter started at 6,
then all 6 of the locations would be affected during
the instruction execution.
Also, our example uses a normal input contact (X1) to
control the execution. Since the CPU scan is extremely
fast, and the pointer decrements automatically, the
data would be removed from the table very quickly.
If this is a problem for your application, you have the
option of using a one-shot (PD) to remove one value
each time the input contact transitions from low to
high.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
A
A
0
0
A
A
ENT
0
ENT
0
Table
Table C ounter
V1401
0
5
0
0
1
V1402
9
9
9
9
2
V1403
3
0
7
4
3
V1404
8
9
8
9
4
V1405
1
0
1
0
5
V1406
2
0
4
6
6
V1407
X
X
X
X
0
0
0
6 V1400
Des tination
X
X
X
X V1500
S
S
DirectSOFT
(optional one-shot method)
X1
C0
C0
PD
LD
K6
Load the constant value 6
(HEX) into the lower 16 bits
of the accumulator
LDA
O 1400
Convert octal 1400 to HEX
300 and load the value into
the accumulator. This is the
table pointer location.
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
The following diagram shows the scan-by-scan results of the execution for our example
program. In our example we’re showing the table counter set to 4 initially (Remember, you
can set the table counter to any value that is within the range of the table). The table counter
automatically decrements from 4 to 0 as the instruction is executed. Notice how the last 2 table
positions, 5 and 6, are not moved up through the table. Also, notice how SP56, which comes
on when the table counter is 0, is only on until the end of the scan.
Scan N
Table Counter
Table
Table Counter
indicates that
these 4
positions will
be
used
After RFT Execution
Before RFT Execution
V1401
0
5
0
0
1
V1402
9
9
9
9
2
V1403
3
0
7
4
3
V1404
8
9
8
9
4
V1405
1
0
1
0
5
V1406
2
0
4
6
6
V1407
X
X X
X
Scan N+1
0
0
0
Destination
X
X X
X V1500
Start here
SP56
SP56 = OFF
9
9
9
9
1
V1402
4
0
7
9
2
V1403
8
9
8
9
3
V1404
8
9
8
9
4
V1405
1
0
1
0
5
V1406
2
0
4
6
6
V1407
X
X
X
X
0
0
0
V1401
4
0
7
9
1
V1402
8
9
8
9
2
V1403
8
9
8
9
3
V1404
8
9
8
9
4
V1405
1
0
1
0
5
V1406
2
0
4
6
6
V1407
X
X X
X
Destination
0
5
0
Start here
0 V1500
SP56
SP56 = OFF
0
0
0
2
V1403
8
9
8
9
3
V1404
8
9
8
9
4
V1405
1
0
1
0
5
V1406
2
0
4
6
6
V1407
X
X
X
X
V1401
8
8
9
8
9
2
V1403
8
9
8
9
3
V1404
8
9
8
9
4
V1405
1
0
1
0
5
V1406
2
0
4
6
6
X
1
0
5
0
0
0
0
0
3 V1400
Destination
0
5
0
0
V1500
SP56
SP56 = OFF
Table Counter
(Automatically decremented)
V1401
4
0
7
9
1
V1402
8
9
8
9
2
V1403
8
9
8
9
3
V1404
8
9
8
9
4
V1405
1
0
1
0
5
V1406
2
0
4
6
6
V1407
X
X
X
X
9
9
0
9
Start here
Destination
9
9
9
9 V1500
SP56
0
0
1 V1400
Destinatio
4
0
7
9 V1500
SP56
SP56 = OFF
Start here
0
0
2 V1400
Destination
9
9
9
9 V1500
SP56
SP56 = OFF
8
9
8
9
1
V1402
8
9
8
9
2
V1403
8
9
8
9
3
V1404
8
9
8
9
4
V1405
1
0
1
0
5
V1406
2
0
4
6
6
V1407
X
X
X
X
4
0
0
7
9
0
0
1 V1400
Destination
4
0
7
9 V1500
SP56
SP56 = OFF
After RFT Execution
0
9
Table Counter
(Automatically decremented)
V1401
Table Counter
V1402
X
1
9
Table
2 V1400
SP56 = OFF
Table
9 8 9
X
9
7
After RFT Execution
Before RFT Execution
X
9
0
Table Counter
Table
V1407
9
4
Table
3 V1400
Before RFT Execution
Scan N+3
9
V1402
Table Counter
V1401
Scan N+2
V1401
After RFT Execution
Before RFT Execution
Table
Table Counter
(Automatically d ecremented)
Table
4 V1400
Table Counter
(Automatically decremented)
V1401
Table
8 9 8
9
1
V1402
8
9
8
9
2
V1403
8
9
8
9
3
V1404
8
9
8
9
4
V1405
1
0
1
0
5
V1406
2
0
4
6
6
V1407
X
X
X
X
8
9
0
8
9
0
0
0 V1400
Destination
8 9 8 9 V1500
SP56
SP56 = ON
until end of scan
or next instruction
that uses SP56
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-165
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Add to Top (ATT)
230
240
250-1
260
DS Used
HPP Used
5-166
The Add To Top instruction pushes a value onto a V-memory
ATT
table from a V-memory location. When the value is added to
V aaa
the table, all other values are pushed down 1 location.
The instruction will be executed once per scan provided the
input remains on. The function parameters are loaded into the first level of the accumulator
stack and the accumulator by 2 additional instructions. Listed below are the steps necessary to
program the Add To Top function.
Step 1: L
oad the length of the table (number of V-memory locations) into the first level of the
accumulator stack. This parameter must be a HEX value, 0 to FF.
Step 2: L
oad the starting V-memory location for the table into the accumulator. (Remember, the
starting location of the table is used as the table length counter.) This parameter must be a
HEX value.
Step 3: I nsert the ATT instruction that specifies the source V-memory location (Vaaa). This is where
the value will be moved from.
Helpful hint: For parameters that require HEX values when referencing memory locations, the
LDA instruction can be used to convert an octal address to the HEX equivalent and load the
value into the accumulator.
Helpful hint: The instruction will be executed every scan if the input logic is on. If you do not
want the instruction to execute for more than one scan, a one shot (PD) should be used in the
input logic.
Helpful hint: The table counter value should be set to indicate the starting point for the
operation. Also, it must be set to a value that is within the length of the table. For example, if
the table is 6 words long, then the allowable range of values that could be in the table counter
should be between 1 and 6. If the value is outside of this range or zero, the data will not be
moved into the table. Also, a one shot (PD) should be used so the value will only be set in one
scan and will not affect the instruction operation.
Operand Data Type
DL260 Range
aaa
V-memory
Discrete Bit Flags
SP56
V
All (See page 3-56)
Description
On when the table counter equals 0.
NOTE: Status flags (SPs) are only valid until:
— another instruction that uses the same flag is executed, or
— the end of the scan
The pointer for this instruction can be set to start anywhere in the table. It is not set automatically. You
have to load a value into the pointer somewhere in your program.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
In the following example, when X1 is on, the constant value (K6) is loaded into the accumulator
using the Load instruction. This value specifies the length of the table and is placed in the first
stack location after the Load Address instruction is executed. The octal address 1400 (V1400),
which is the starting location for the destination table and table counter, is loaded into the
accumulator. The source location (V1500) is specified in the Add to Top instruction. The
table counter will be increased by “1” after the instruction is executed.
DirectSOFT
X1
LD
K6
Load the constant value 6
(Hex.) into the lower 16 bits
of the accumulator
LDA
O 1400
Convert octal 1400 to HEX
300 and load the value into
the accumulator
ATT
V1500
Copy the specified value
from V1500 to the table
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
$
B
STR
1
SHFT
L
ANDST
D
SHFT
L
ANDST
D
SHFT
A
T
MLR
0
ENT
PREV
3
3
A
0
T
MLR
G
B
B
6
1
1
ENT
E
F
4
5
A
A
0
0
A
A
For the ATT instruction, the table counter determines
the number of additions that can be made before the V1401
instruction will stop executing. So, it is helpful to V1402
understand how the system uses this counter to control V1403
V1404
the execution.
V1405
For example, if the table counter was set to 2, and the V1406
table length was 6 words, then there could only be 4 V1407
additions of data before the execution was stopped. This
can be calculated easily by:
Table length – table counter = number of executions
Also, our example uses a normal input contact (X1) to
control the execution. Since the CPU scan is extremely
fast, and the table counter increments automatically, the
data would be moved into the table very quickly. If this
is a problem for your applicaton, you have an option of
using a one-shot (PD) to add one value each time the
input contact transitions from low to high.
ENT
0
ENT
0
Table
Table Counter
0
5
0
0
1
9
9
9
9
2
3
0
7
4
3
8
9
8
9
4
1
0
1
0
5
2
0
4
6
6
X
X X
X
0
0
0
2 V1400
Data Source
X
X X
X V1500
( e .g .: 6 - 2 = 4 )
DirectSOFT (optional one-shot method)
X1
C0
C0
PD
LD
K6
Load the constant value 6
(HEX) into the lower 16 bits
of the accumulator
LDA
O 1400
Convert octal 1400 to HEX
300 and load the value into
the accumulator. This is the
starting table location.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-167
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
The following diagram shows the scan-by-scan results of the execution for our example
program. The table counter is set to 2 initially, and it will automatically increment from 2 to 6
as the instruction is executed. Notice how SP56 comes on when the table counter is 6, which
is equal to the table length. Plus, although our example does not show it, we are assuming that
there is another part of the program that changes the value in V1500 (data source) prior to the
execution of the ATT instruction.
Example of Execution
Scan N
Before ATT Execution
Table
After ATT Execution
V1401
0
5
0
0
1
V1402
9
9
9
9
2
V1403
3
0
7
4
3
V1404
8
9
8
9
4
V1405
1
0
1
0
5
V1406
2
0
4
6
6
V1407
X
X X
X
0
0
0
2 V1400
Data Source
1
2
3
Table counter
(Automatically Incremented)
Table
Table counter
4 V1500
SP56
SP56 = OFF
V1401
1
2
3
4
1
V1402
0
5
0
0
2
V1403
9
9
9
9
3
V1404
3
0
7
4
4
V1405
8
9
8
9
5
V1406
1
0
1
0
6
V1407
X
X
X
X
1
2
0
3
4
0
0
3 V1400
Data Source
1
2
3
4
V1500
SP56
SP56 =
OFF
Discard Bucket
2046
Scan N+1
After ATT Execution
Before ATT Execution
Table counter
Table
V1401
1
2
3
4
1
V1402
0
5
0
0
2
V1403
9
9
9
9
3
V1404
3
0
7
4
4
V1405
8
9
8
9
5
V1406
1
0
1
0
6
V1407
X
X
X
X
0
0
0
3 V1400
Data Source
5
6
7
Table counter
(Automatically Incremented)
Table
8 V1500
SP56
SP56 = OFF
V1401
5
6
7
8
1
V1402
1
2
3
4
2
V1403
0
5
0
0
3
V1404
9
9
9
9
4
V1405
3
0
7
4
5
V1406
8
9
8
9
6
V1407
X
X
X
X
5
6
V1401
5
V1402
1
2
3
8
1
4
2
V1403
0
5
0
0
3
V1404
9
9
9
9
4
V1405
3
0
7
4
5
V1406
8
9
8
9
6
V1407
X
X
X
X
Table counter
0 0 0 4 V1400
Data Source
4
3
3
4 V1500
SP56
SP56 = OFF
0
0
4 V1400
Data Source
6
7
8 V1500
SP56
SP56 =
OFF
Discard Bucket
After ATT Execution
Before ATT Execution
Table
6 7
8
5
1010
Scan N+2
0
7
Table counter
(Automatically Incremented)
V1401
Table
4 3 4
3
1
V1402
5
6
7
8
2
V1403
1
2
3
4
3
V1404
0
5
0
0
4
V1405
9
9
9
9
5
V1406
3
0
7
4
6
V1407
X
X
X
X
4
3
0
4
3
0
0
5 V1400
Data Source
4
3
4
3 V1500
SP56
SP56 = OFF
Discard Bucket
8989
Scan N+3
Before ATT Execution
V1401
4
Table
3 4
V1402
5
6
7
After ATT Execution
Table counter
Table
(Automatically Incremented)
Table counter
3
1
8
2
V1403
1
2
3
4
3
V1404
0
5
0
0
4
V1405
9
9
9
9
5
V1406
3
0
7
4
6
V1407
X
X
X
X
0
0
0
5 V1400
Data Source
7
7
7
7 V1500
SP56
SP56 = OFF
V1401
7
7
7
7
1
V1402
4
3
4
3
2
V1403
5
6
7
8
3
V1404
1
2
3
4
4
V1405
0
5
0
0
5
V1406
9
9
9
9
6
V1407
X
X
X
X
7
0
7
7
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
0
0
6 V1400
Data Source
7
7
7
7 V1500
SP56
Discard Bucket
3074
5-168
7
SP56 = ON
until end of scan
or next instruction
that uses SP56
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
Table Shift Left (TSHFL)
1
2
The Table Shift Right instruction shifts all the bits in a V-memory
3
table to the right a specified number of bit positions.
TSHFR
Vaaa
4
The following description applies to both the Table Shift Left and
Table Shift Right instructions. A table is a range of V-memory
5
locations. The Table Shift Left and Table Shift Right instructions shift bits serially throughout
the entire table. Bits are shifted out the end of one word and into the opposite end of an
adjacent word. At the ends of the table, bits are either discarded, or zeros are shifted into the 6
table. The example tables below are arbitrarily four words long.
7
8
9
10
11
Step 1: L
oad the length of the table (number of V-memory locations) into the first level of the
accumulator stack. This parameter must be a HEX value, 0 to FF.
Step 2: L
oad the starting V-memory location for the table into the accumulator. This parameter
12
must be a HEX value. You can use the LDA instruction to convert an octal address to hex.
Step 3: I nsert the Table Shift Left or Table Shift Right instruction. This specifies the number of bit
13
positions you wish to shift the entire table. The number of bit positions must be in octal.
Helpful hint: Remember that each V-memory location contains 16 bits. The bits of the first
word of the table are numbered from 0 to 17 octal. If you want to shift the entire table by 20 14
bits, that is 24 octal. Flag 53 will be set if the number of bits to be shifted is larger than the
total bits contained within the table. Flag 67 will be set if the last bit shifted (just before it is A
discarded) is a “1”.
Operand Data Type
DL260 Range
B
aaa
C
D
Table Shift Left instruction shifts all the bits in a V-memory
230 The
table
to the left a specified number of bit positions.
240
250-1
260 Table Shift Right (TSHFR)
230
240
250-1
260
DS Used
HPP Used
Table Shift Left
Table Shift Right
Shift in zeros
V - xxxx
TSHFL
Vaaa
Discard Bits
V - xxxx + 1
V - xxxx + 2
Discard Bits
Shift in zeros
V-memory
V
All (See page 3-56)
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5-169
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Discrete Bit Flags
Description
SP53
On when the number of bits to be shifted is larger than the total bits contained within the
table
SP67
On when the last bit shifted (just before it is discarded) is a “1”
5-170
V 3000
NOTE: Status flags are only valid until:
— the end of the scan
— or another instruction that uses the same flag is executed.
V 3000
1 2 3 4
6 7 8 1
5 6 7 8
1 2 2 5
The example table to the right contains BCD data
1 1 2 2
3 4 4 1
as shown (for demonstration purposes). Suppose we
want to do a table shift right by 3 BCD digits (12 bits). 3 3 4 4
5 6 6 3
Converting to octal, 12 bits is 14 octal. Using the Table
0 0 0 5
Shift Right instruction and specifying a shift by octal 14, 5 5 6 6
we have the resulting table shown at the far right. Notice
that the 2–3–4 sequence has been discarded, and the
0–0–0 sequence has been shifted in at the bottom.
The following ladder example assumes the data at V3000 to V3004 already exists as shown
above. We will use input X0 to trigger the Table Shift Right operation. First, we will load the
table length (5 words) into the accumulator stack. Next, we load the starting address into the
accumulator. Since V3000 is an octal number we have to convert it to hex by using the LDA
command. Finally, we use the Table Shift Right instruction and specify the number of bits to
be shifted (12 decimal), which is 14 octal.
DirectSOFT
X0
Load the constant value 5
(Hex.) into the lower 16 bits
of the accumulator.
LD
K5
Convert octal 3000 to HEX
and load the value into the
accumulator. This is the
table beginning.
LDA
O 3000
Do a table shift right by 12
bits, which is 14 octal.
TSHFR
O 14
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
$
A
STR
SHFT
L
ANDST
D
SHFT
L
ANDST
D
SHFT
T
MLR
0
ENT
PREV
3
3
SHFT
A
D
0
S
RST
F
H
7
F
5
3
5
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
ENT
A
0
R
ORN
A
0
A
0
NEXT
ENT
B
1
E
4
ENT
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
AND Move (ANDMOV)
ANDMOV
Vaaa
1
2
ORMOV
Vaaa
3
OR Move (ORMOV)
The Or Move instruction copies data from a table to the
4
specified memory location, ORing each word with the
XORMOV
accumulator contents as it is written.
Vaaa
5
Exclusive OR Move (XORMOV)
The Exclusive OR Move instruction copies data from a table to
6
the specified memory location, XORing each word with the accumulator value as it is written.
The following description applies to the AND Move, OR Move, and Exclusive OR Move 7
instructions. A table is just a range of V-memory locations. These instructions copy the data
of a table to another specified location, preforming a logical operation on each word with the
8
accumulator contents as the new table is written.
Step 1: Load the length of the table (number of V-memory locations) into the first level of the
accumulator stack. This parameter must be a HEX value, 0 to FF.
9
Step 2: Load the starting V-memory location for the table into the accumulator. This parameter must
be a HEX value. You can use the LDA instruction to convert an octal address to hex.
10
Step 3: Load the BCD/hex bit pattern into the accumulator which will be logically combined with the
table contents as they are copied.
11
Step 4: Insert the AND Move, OR Move, or XOR Move instruction. This specifies the starting
location of the copy of the original table. This new table will automatically be the same length
as the original table.
12
Operand Data Type
DL260 Range
13
aaa
14
The example table to the right contains BCD data as
shown (for demonstration purposes). Suppose we want
to move a table of two words at V3000 and AND it with
A
K6666. The copy of the table at V3100 shows the result
of the AND operation for each word.
B
The program on the next page performs the ANDMOV
operation example above. It assumes that the data in the table at V3000 – V3001 already
exists. First we load the table length (two words) into the accumulator. Next we load the C
starting address of the source table, using the LDA instruction. Then we load the data into the
accumulator to be ANDed with the table. In the ANDMOV command, we specify the table D
destination, V3100.
230
240
250-1
260
The AND Move instruction copies data from a table to the
specified memory location, ANDing each word with the
accumulator data as it is written.
230
240
250-1
260
DS Used
HPP Used
V-memory
V
All (See page 3-56)
V 3000
3 3 3 3
V 3100
ANDMOV
K 6666
F F F F
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
2 2 2 2
6 6 6 6
5-171
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
DirectSOFT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-172
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
$
STR
A
0
SHFT
L
D
3
ANDST
SHFT
L
D
3
ANDST
SHFT
L
D
3
ANDST
V
AND
SHFT
M
ORST
X0
LD
ENT
K2
PREV
A
D
0
PREV
O
INST#
C
2
A
3
G
6
V
AND
Load the constant value 2
(Hex.) into the lower 16
bits of the accumulator.
ENT
0
G
6
D
3
A
G
B
0
6
1
A
G
A
0
6
0
ENT
LDA
ENT
A
0
0 3000
Convert otal 3000 to HEX
and load the value into the
accumulator. This is the
table beginning.
ENT
The example to the right shows a table of two words at V3000
and logically ORs it with K8888. The copy of the table at
V3100 shows the result of the OR operation for each word.
The program to the right performs the ORMOV example
above. It assumes that the data in the table at V3000 –
V3001 already exists. First we load the table length (two
words) into the accumulator. Next we load the starting
address of the source table, using the LDA instruction.
V 3000
Then we load the data into the accumulator to be ORed
with the table. In the ORMOV command, we specify 1 1 1
the table destination, V3100.
LD
K6666
Load the constant value
6666 (Hex.) into the lower
16 bits of the accumulator.
ANDMOV
0 3100
Copy the table to V3100,
ANDing its contents with the
accumulator as it is written.
V 3100
1
OR MOV
K 8888
9 9 9 9
1 1 1 1
DirectSOFT 32
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
A
$
STR
0
SHFT
L
D
ANDST
3
SHFT
L
D
ANDST
3
SHFT
L
D
ANDST
3
Q
SHFT
OR
M
ORST
X0
ENT
PREV
A
C
D
0
PREV
O
INST#
9 9 9 9
V
AND
I
LD
K2
ENT
2
3
8
A
I
D
0
8
3
A
I
B
0
8
1
A
I
A
0
8
0
Load the constant value 2
(Hex) into the lower 16 bits
of the accumulator.
ENT
LDA
ENT
A
0 3000
0
ENT
Convert octal 3000 to HEX
and load the value into the
accumulator. This is the
table beginning.
The example to the right shows a table of two words at
V3000 and logical XORs it with K3333. The copy of the
table at V3100 shows the result of the XOR operation for
each word.
The ladder program example for the XORMOV is similar
to the one above for the ORMOV. Just use the XORMOV
instruction. On the Handheld Programmer, you must use
the SHFT key and spell “XORMOV” explicitly.
LD
K8888
Load the constant value
8888 (Hex.) into the lower
16 bits of the accumulator.
ORMOV
0 3100
Copy the table to V3100,
ORing its contents with the
accumulator as it is written.
V 3000
1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
V 3100
X OR MOV
K 3333
2 2 2 2
2 2 2 2
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
Find Block (FINDB)
1
2
3
Operand Data Type
DL260 Range
4
A
aaa
5
6
Discrete Bit Flags
Description
7
The steps below are necessary to program the Find Block function.
Step 1: Load the number of bytes in the block to be located. This parameter must be a decimal value 8
from 1 to 256.
Step 2: Load the length of a table (number of words) to be searched. The Find Block will search
multiple tables that are adjacent in V-memory. This parameter must be a decimal value from 9
1 to 128.
Step 3: Load the ending location for all the tables into the accumulator. This parameter must be a 10
HEX value. You can use the LDA instruction to convert an octal address to hex.
Step 4: Load the table starting location for all the tables into the accumulator. This parameter must be 11
a HEX value. You can use the LDA instruction to convert an octal address to hex.
Step 5: Insert the Find Block instruction. This specifies the starting location of the block of data you
12
are trying to locate.
13
14
A
B
C
D
The Find Block instruction searches for an occurrence of a
specified block of values in a V-memory table. The function
parameters are loaded into the first and second levels of the
accumulator stack and the accumulator by three additional
instructions. If the block is found, its starting address will be
stored in the accumulator. If the block is not found, flag SP53
will be set.
230
240
250-1
260
DS Used
HPP N/A
V-memory
V-memory
V2000
V2017
V2020
V2037
V2040
V2057
Sample Program of FINDB
Table 1
16 words
Table 2
16 words
Table 3
16 words
V2777
End Addr.
Table 32
X1
LD
Start Addr.
LD
V3000
Block
32 bytes
V3017
V2760
All (See page 3 - 56)
All (See page 3 - 56)
On when the Find Block instruction was executed but did not
find the block of data in table specified.
SP53
Start Addr.
V
P
FINDB
Aaaa
K32
K16
LDA
O2777
LDA
O2000
16 words
FINDB
V3000
END
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5-173
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Swap (SWAP)
230
240
250-1
260
DS Used
HPP Used
5-174
The Swap instruction exchanges the data in two tables of equal
length.
SWAP
V aaa
The following steps apply to both the Set Bit and Reset Bit table
instructions.
Step 1: L
oad the length of the tables (number of V-memory locations) into the first level of the
accumulator stack. This parameter must be a HEX value, 0 to FF. Remember that the tables
must be of equal length.
Step 2: L
oad the starting V-memory location for the first table into the accumulator. This parameter
must be a HEX value. You can use the LDA instruction to convert an octal address to hex.
Step 3: I nsert the Swap instruction. This specifies the starting address of the second table.
Helpful hint: The data swap occurs within a single scan. If the instruction executes on multiple
consecutive scans, it will be difficult to know the actual contents of either table at any particular
time. So, remember to swap just on a single scan.
Operand Data Type
DL260 Range
aaa
V-memory
V
All (See page 3-56)
V 3000
The example to the right shows a table of two words at
V3000. We will swap its contents with another table of
two words at V3100 by using the Swap instruction.
V 3100
1 2 3 4
S WAP
5 6 7 8
A B C D
0 0 0 0
The example program below uses a PD contact (triggers for one scan for off-to-on transition).
First, we load the length of the tables (two words) into the accumulator. Then we load the
address of the first table (V3000) into the accumulator using the LDA instruction, converting
the octal address to hex. Note that it does not matter which table we declare “first,” because
the swap results will be the same.
DirectSOFT
X0
Load the constant value 2
(Hex.) into the lower 16 bits
of the accumulator.
LD
K2
Convert octal 3000 to HEX
and load the value into the
accumulator. This is the
table beginning.
LDA
O 3000
Swap the contents of the
table in the previous
instruction with the one at
V3100.
SWAP
V 3100
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
$
STR
SHFT
P
SHFT
L
ANDST
D
SHFT
L
ANDST
D
SHFT
S
RST
CV
D
PREV
3
3
SHFT
A
3
A
D
0
W
ANDN
C
A
0
P
0
2
3
CV
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
ENT
ENT
A
0
A
D
0
3
A
B
0
1
ENT
A
0
A
0
ENT
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
Clock/Calendar Instructions
1
The Date instruction can be used to set the date in the CPU.
DATE
2
The instruction requires two consecutive V-memory locations
V aaa
(Vaaa) to set the date. If the values in the specified locations
are not valid, the date will not be set. The current date can be
3
read from 4 consecutive V-memory locations (V7771–V7774).
4
V-memory Location (BCD)
Date
Range
(READ Only)
Year
5
Month
Day
6
Day of Week
7
Operand Data Type DL250-1 Range
DL260 Range
8
aaa
aaa
9
In the following example, when C0 is on, the constant value (K94010301) is loaded into
the accumulator using the Load Double instruction (C0 should be a contact from a one shot
(PD) instruction). The value in the accumulator is output to V2000 using the Out Double 10
instruction. The Date instruction uses the value in V2000 to set the date in the CPU.
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Date (DATE)
230
240
250-1
260
DS Used
HPP Used
0-99
1-12
1-31
0-06
V7774
V7773
V7772
V7771
The values entered for the day of week are:
0=Sunday, 1=Monday, 2=Tuesday, 3=Wednesday, 4=Thursday, 5=Friday, 6=Saturday.
V-memory
V
All (See page 3-55)
DirectSOFT
All (See page 3-56)
Constant (K)
C0
9
4
0
1
0
3
0
1
Acc. 9
4
0
1
0
3
0
1
9
4
0
1
0
3
0
1
9
4
0
1
0
3
0
1
LDD
In this example, the Date
instruction uses the value set in
V2000 and V2001 to set the date
in the appropriate V memory
locations (V7771-V7774).
K94010301
Load the constant
value (K94010301)
into the accumulator
Acc.
OUTD
V2000
Copy the value in
the accumulator to
V2000 and V2001
V2001
V2000
DATE
V2000
9
Set the date in the CPU
using the value in V2000
and 2001
STR
NEXT
NEXT
D
SHFT
L
ANDST
D
A
D
A
0
3
GX
OUT
SHFT
D
SHFT
D
A
3
3
0
B
0
NEXT
3
1
T
MLR
0
NEXT
A
PREV
J
A
A
0
9
V2000
1
Month
0
3
Day
0
1
Day of Week
ENT
E
4
A
0
B
1
ENT
ENT
C
3
4
Year
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
$
Format
V2001
E
2
4
0
C
0
2
A
A
0
0
ENT
A
0
A
0
ENT
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5-175
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Time (TIME)
230
240
250-1
260
The Time instruction can be used to set the time (24-hour
TIME
clock) in the CPU. The instruction requires two consecutive
V aaa
V-memory locations (Vaaa) which are used to set the time. If
the values in the specified locations are not valid, the time will
not be set. The current time can be read from memory locations V7747 and V7766–V7770.
5-176
Range
V-memory Location
(BCD) (READ Only)
0-99
0-59
0-59
0-23
V7747
V7766
V7767
V7770
DL250-1 Range
DL260 Range
Date
DS Used
HPP Used
1/100 seconds (10ms)
Seconds
Minutes
Hour
Operand Data Type
V-memory
V
aaa
aaa
All (See page 3-55)
All (See page 3-56)
In the following example, when C0 is on, the constant value (K73000) is loaded into the
accumulator using the Load Double instruction (C0 should be a contact from a one shot
(PD) instruction). The value in the accumulator is output to V2000 using the Out Double
instruction. The Time instruction uses the value in V2000 to set the time in the CPU.
DirectSOFT
Constant (K)
C0
0
0
0
7
3
0
0
0
Acc. 0
0
0
7
3
0
0
0
Acc. 0
0
0
7
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
7
3
0
0
0
LDD
The Time instruction uses the
value set in V2000 and V2001 to
set the time in the appropriate Vmemory locations (V7766–V7770)
K73000
Load the constant
value (K73000) into
the accumulator
OUTD
V2000
Copy the value in the
accumulator to V2000
and V2001
V2001
Format
V2000
V2001
TIME
0
V2000
0
0
V2000
7
3
0
0
0
Set the time in the CPU
using the value in V2000
and V2001
Not
Used
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
$
NEXT
NEXT
L
ANDST
D
D
GX
OUT
SHFT
D
SHFT
T
MLR
SHFT
STR
SHFT
3
NEXT
3
C
3
I
8
2
M
ORST
NEXT
A
PREV
H
A
A
E
0
4
0
7
0
ENT
D
A
C
3
0
2
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
A
0
A
0
A
Hour Minutes
0
ENT
ENT
A
0
A
0
A
0
ENT
Seconds
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
CPU Control Instructions
1
The No Operation is an empty (not programmed) memory location.
2
NOP
3
4
5
6
End (END)
The End instruction marks the termination point of the normal program
7
END
scan. An End instruction is required at the end of the main program
body. If the End instruction is omitted, an error will occur and the CPU
will not enter the Run Mode. Data labels, subroutines and interrupt
8
routines
are
placed
after
the
End
instruction.
The
End
instruction
is
not
conditional; therefore, no input contact is allowed.
9
10
11
12
Stop (STOP)
The Stop instruction changes the operational mode of the CPU from
STOP
13
Run to Program (Stop) mode. This instruction is typically used to stop
PLC operation in a shutdown condition such as an I/O module failure.
14
In the following example, when SP45 comes on indicating an I/O module failure, the CPU will
stop operation and switch to the program mode.
A
B
C
D
No Operation (NOP)
230
240
250-1
260
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
DirectSOFT
SHFT
NOP
DS Used
HPP Used
N
TMR
O
INST#
P
ENT
CV
230
240
250-1
260
DS Used
HPP Used
DirectSOFT
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
SHFT
END
E
4
N
TMR
D
ENT
3
230
240
250-1
260
DS Used
HPP Used
DirectSOFT
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
$
SP45
STOP
SP45 will turn on
if there is an I/O
module failure.
STR
SHFT
S
RST
SHFT
SP
STRN
E
SHFT
T
MLR
O
INST#
4
F
P
5
CV
ENT
ENT
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5-177
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Reset Watch Dog Timer (RSTWT)
230
240
250-1
260
DS Used
HPP Used
5-178
The Reset Watch Dog Timer instruction resets the CPU scan
RSTWT
timer. The default setting for the watch dog timer is 200ms.
Scan times very seldom exceed 200ms, but it is possible. For/next
loops, subroutines, interrupt routines, and table instructions can
be programmed such that the scan becomes longer than 200ms.
When instructions are used in a manner that could exceed the
watch dog timer setting, this instruction can be used to reset the
timer.
A software timeout error (E003) will occur and the CPU will enter the program mode if the
scan time exceeds the watch dog timer setting. Placement of the RSTWT instruction in the
program is very important. The instruction has to be executed before the scan time exceeds the
watch dog timer’s setting.
If the scan time is consistently longer than the watch dog timer’s setting, the timeout value
may be permanently increased from the default value of 200ms by AUX 55 on the HPP or the
appropriate auxiliary function in your programming package. This eliminates the need for the
RSTWT instruction.
In the following example, the CPU scan timer will be reset to 0 when the RSTWT instruction
is executed. See the For/Next instruction for a detailed example.
DirectSOFT
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
SHFT
RSTWT
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
R
ORN
S
RST
T
MLR
W
ANDN
T
MLR
ENT
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
Program Control Instructions
1
The Goto / Label skips all instructions between the Goto
2
and the corresponding LBL instruction. The operand
value for the Goto and the corresponding LBL instruction
is the same. The logic between Goto and LBL instruction
3
is not executed when the Goto instruction is enabled. Up
LBL
K aaa
to 128 Goto instructions and 64 LBL instructions can be
4
used in the program.
5
Operand Data Type
DL240 Range
DL250-1 Range
DL260 Range
aaa
aaa
aaa
6
7
In the following example, when C7 is on, all the program logic between the GOTO and the
corresponding LBL instruction (designated with the same constant Kaaa value) will be skipped.
8
The instructions being skipped will not be executed by the CPU.
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Goto Label (GOTO) (LBL)
230
240
250-1
260
DS Used
HPP Used
K aaa
GOTO
Constant
K
1-FFFF
DirectSOFT
C7
1-FFFF
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
K5
GOTO
$
C2
OUT
STR
SHFT
$
X1
STR
GX
OUT
SHFT
LBL
$
K5
STR
GX
OUT
X5
1-FFFF
G
6
SHFT
C
O
INST#
T
B
1
SHFT
L
B
ANDST
1
F
C
5
2
2
MLR
H
7
ENT
O
INST#
F
5
ENT
ENT
C
2
L
ANDST
C
2
ENT
F
5
ENT
ENT
ENT
Y2
OUT
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5-179
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
For/Next (FOR) (NEXT)
230
240
250-1
260
DS Used
HPP Used
5-180
The For and Next instructions are used to execute a section of
ladder logic between the For and Next instruction a specified
A aaa
FOR
numbers of times. When the For instruction is enabled, the
program will loop the specified number of times. If the For
instruction is not energized, the section of ladder logic between the
For and Next instructions is not executed.
For/Next instructions cannot be nested. Up to 64 For/Next loops
may be used in a program. If the maximum number of For/Next
NEXT
loops is exceeded, error E413 will occur.
The normal I/O update and CPU housekeeping is suspended while
executing the For/Next loop. The program scan time can increase
significantly, depending on the number of times the logic between the For and Next instruction
is executed. With the exception of immediate I/O instructions, I/O will not be updated until
the program execution is completed for that scan. Depending on the length of time required
to complete the program execution, it may be necessary to reset the watchdog timer inside of
the For/Next loop using the RSTWT instruction.
Operand Data Type
V-memory
Constant
DL240 Range
DL250-1 Range
DL260 Range
A
aaa
aaa
aaa
V
K
All (See page 3 - 54)
1-9999
All (See page 3 - 55)
1-9999
All (See page 3 - 56)
1-9999
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
In the following example, when X1 is on, the application program inside the For/Next loop
will be executed three times. If X1 is off, the program inside the loop will not be executed.
The immediate instructions may or may not be necessary depending on your application. Also,
The RSTWT instruction is not necessary if the For/Next loop does not extend the scan time
larger the Watchdog Timer setting. For more information on the Watchdog Timer, refer to
the RSTWT instruction.
DirectSOFT
X1
1
K3
2
3
FOR
RSTWT
X20
Y5
OUT
NEXT
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
$
B
STR
1
ENT
SHFT
F
5
O
INST#
R
ORN
SHFT
R
ORN
S
RST
T
MLR
SHFT
I
$
STR
GX
OUT
SHFT
F
N
TMR
E
8
5
4
D
3
ENT
W
ANDN
T
MLR
ENT
C
A
ENT
2
0
ENT
X
SET
T
MLR
ENT
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-181
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Goto Subroutine (GTS) (SBR)
230
240
250-1
260
DS Used
HPP Used
The Goto Subroutine instruction allows a section of ladder
logic to be placed outside the main body of the program
and execute only when needed. There can be a maximum
of 128 GTS instructions and 64 SBR instructions used in
a program. The GTS instructions can be nested up to 8
levels. An error E412 will occur if the maximum limits
are exceeded. Typically this will be used in an application
where a block of program logic may be slow to execute and
is not required to execute every scan. The subroutine label
and all associated logic is placed after the End statement in
the program. When the subroutine is called from the main
program, the CPU will execute the subroutine (SBR) with
the same constant number (K) as the GTS instruction that
called the subroutine.
By placing code in a subroutine, it is only scanned and
executed when needed since it resides after the End
instruction. Code which is not scanned does not impact
the overall scan time of the program.
Operand Data Type
Constant
230
240
250-1
260
K aaa
SBR
DL240 Range
DL250-1 Range
aaa
aaa
aaa
1-FFFF
1-FFFF
1-FFFF
K
DL260 Range
Subroutine Return (RT)
When a Subroutine Return is executed in the subroutine,
the CPU will return to the point in the main body of the
program from which it was called. The Subroutine Return
is used as termination of the subroutine, which must be
the last instruction in the subroutine and is a stand-alone
instruction (no input contact on the rung).
Return Conditional (RTC)
230 Subroutine
The
Subroutine
Return Conditional instruction is
240 an optional instruction used with an input contact to
250-1 implement a conditional return from the subroutine. The
260 Subroutine Return (RT) is still required for termination
of the Subroutine.
DS Used
HPP Used
5-182
K aaa
GTS
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
RT
RTC
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
In the following example, when X1 is on, Subroutine K3 will be called. The CPU will jump to
the Subroutine Label K3, and the ladder logic in the subroutine will be executed. If X35 is on,
the CPU will return to the main program at the RTC instruction. If X35 is not on, Y0–Y17
will be reset to off and then the CPU will return to the main body of the program.
DirectSOFT
X1
K3
GTS
C0
LD
K10
END
SBR
K3
X20
Y5
OUTI
X21
Y10
OUTI
X35
RTC
X35
Y0
Y17
RSTI
RT
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
STR
SHFT
G
1
ENT
T
S
K
3
ENT
SHFT
E
N
D
ENT
SHFT
S
SHFT
B
R
K
1
3
STR
SHFT
I
X
2
0
ENT
ENT
SHFT
I
Y
5
STR
SHFT
I
X
2
1
ENT
OUT
SHFT
I
Y
1
0
ENT
STR
SHFT
I
X
3
5
ENT
SHFT
R
T
STRN
SHFT
I
X
3
5
ENT
RST
SHFT
I
Y
0
Y
1
SHFT
R
T
C
Standard RLL
Instructions
OUT
ENT
ENT
7
ENT
ENT
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-183
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-184
In the following example, when X1 is on, Subroutine K3 will be called. The CPU will jump
to the Subroutine Label K3 and the ladder logic in the subroutine will be executed. The CPU
will return to the main body of the program after the RT instruction is executed.
Direct SOFT
X1
K3
GTS
END
SBR
K3
X20
Y5
OUT
X21
Y10
OUT
RT
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
$
B
STR
SHFT
G
1
ENT
6
T
MLR
S
RST
4
N
TMR
D
B
D
3
ENT
SHFT
E
SHFT
S
RST
SHFT
SHFT
I
$
STR
GX
OUT
$
STR
F
SHFT
GX
OUT
SHFT
I
B
R
ORN
3
1
C
8
5
T
MLR
2
D
A
0
3
ENT
ENT
C
8
1
ENT
R
ORN
A
0
2
ENT
ENT
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
B
1
ENT
ENT
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
Master Line Set (MLS)
1
2
3
4
Operand Data Type
DL230 Range
DL240 Range
DL250-1 Range
DL260 Range
aaa
aaa
aaa
aaa
5
Master Line Reset (MLR)
6
K aaa
The Master Line Reset instruction marks the end of control for the
MLR
corresponding MLS instruction. The MLR reference is one less than
7
the corresponding MLS.
8
Operand Data Type
DL230 Range
DL240 Range
DL250-1 Range
DL260 Range
aaa
aaa
aaa
aaa
9
10
Understanding Master Control Relays
The Master Line Set (MLS) and Master Line Reset (MLR) instructions allow you to quickly
enable (or disable) sections of the RLL program. This provides program control flexibility. 11
The following example shows how the MLS and MLR instructions operate by creating a sub
power rail for control logic.
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
230
240
250-1
260
Constant
The Master Line Set instruction allows the program to control sections
K aaa
of ladder logic by forming a new power rail controlled by the main left
MLS
power rail. The main left rail is always master line 0. When an MLS
K1 instruction is used, a new power rail is created at level 1. Master
Line Sets and Master Line Resets can be used to nest power rails up to
seven levels deep. Note that unlike stages in RLLPLUS, the logic within
the master control relays is still scanned and updated even though it will not function if the
MLS is off.
K
1-7
1-7
1-7
1-7
Constant
K
0-6
0-6
0-6
0-6
DS Used
HPP Used
DirectSOFT
230
240
250-1
260
X0
K1
MLS
X1
When contact X0 is ON, logic under the first MLS
will be executed.
Y7
OUT
K2
X2
MLS
X3
When contact X0 and X2 are ON, logic under the
second MLS will be executed.
Y10
OUT
K1
MLR
K0
The MLR instructions note the end of the Master
Control area.
MLR
X10
Y11
OUT
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5-185
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-186
MLS/MLR Example
In the following MLS/MLR example, logic between the first MLS K1 (A) and MLR K0 (B)
will function only if input X0 is on. The logic between the MLS K2 (C) and MLR K1 (D)
will function only if input X10 and X0 is on. The last rung is not controlled by either of the
MLS coils.
DirectSOFT
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
X0
K1
MLS
X1
A
C0
OUT
X2
C1
OUT
X3
Y0
OUT
X10
K2
MLS
X5
C
Y1
OUT
X4
Y2
$
MLR
X5
D
C2
OUT
X6
Y3
OUT
K0
MLR
X7
Y4
OUT
B
B
$
B
STR
0
1
1
GX
OUT
SHFT
$
C
STR
2
GX
OUT
SHFT
$
D
STR
GX
OUT
A
$
B
STR
Y
MLS
C
$
F
STR
GX
OUT
B
$
E
STR
GX
OUT
C
T
MLR
B
$
F
STR
3
0
1
2
5
1
4
2
1
5
GX
OUT
SHFT
$
G
STR
GX
OUT
D
T
MLR
A
$
H
STR
GX
OUT
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
A
Y
MLS
OUT
K1
STR
E
6
3
0
7
4
ENT
ENT
ENT
C
2
A
0
ENT
ENT
C
2
B
1
ENT
ENT
ENT
A
0
ENT
ENT
ENT
ENT
ENT
ENT
ENT
ENT
C
2
ENT
ENT
ENT
ENT
ENT
C
2
ENT
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
Interrupt Instructions
1
The Interrupt instruction allows a section of ladder logic to
2
be placed outside the main body of the program and executed
when needed. Interrupts can be called from the program or
by external interrupts via the counter interface module (D2–
3
CTRINT), which provides 4 interrupts.
4
The software interrupt uses interrupt #00 which means the hardware interrupt #0 and the
software interrupt cannot be used together.
5
Typically, interrupts will be used in an application where a fast response to an input is needed
or a program section needs to execute faster than the normal CPU scan. The interrupt label 6
and all associated logic must be placed after the End statement in the program. When the
interrupt routine is called from the interrupt module or software interrupt, the CPU will
complete execution of the instruction it is currently processing in ladder logic, then execute the 7
designated interrupt routine. Interrupt module interrupts are labeled in octal to correspond
with the hardware input signal (X1 will initiate interrupt INT1). There is only one software 8
interrupt, and it is labeled INT 0. The program execution will continue from the point it was
before the interrupt occurred once the interrupt is serviced.
9
The software interrupt is set up by programming the interrupt time in V7634. The valid range
is 3 to 999 ms. The value must be a BCD value. The interrupt will not execute if the value is
10
out of range.
NOTE: See the example program of a software interrupt.
11
Operand Data Type
DL240 Range
DL250-1 Range
DL260 Range
12
aaa
aaa
aaa
13
DL240/250-1/260 Software
DL240/250-1/260 Hardware
14
Interrupt Input
Interrupt Routine
Interrupt Input
Interrupt Routine
A
B
C
D
Interrupt (INT)
230
240
250-1
260
DS Used
HPP Used
O aaa
INT
Constant
0
0-3
0-3
0-3
V7634 sets interrupt time
INT 0
INT 0
-
-
X0 (cannot be used along
with s/w interrupt)
X1
X2
X3
INT 1
INT 2
INT 3
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5-187
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Interrupt Return (IRT)
230
240
250-1
260
When an Interrupt Return is executed in the interrupt routine, the
CPU will return to the point in the main body of the program from
which it was called. The Interrupt Return is programmed as the last
instruction in an interrupt routine and is a stand alone instruction (no
input contact on the rung).
IRT
Interrupt Return Conditional (IRTC)
240
250-1
260
230
230
240
250-1
260
230
240
250-1
260
5-188
The Interrupt Return Conditional instruction is a optional instruction
used with an input contact to implement a conditional return from the
interrupt routine. The Interrupt Return is required to terminate the
interrupt routine.
IRTC
Enable Interrupts (ENI)
The Enable Interrupt instruction is programmed in the main body of
the application program (before the End instruction) to enable hardware
or software interrupts. Once the coil has been energized, interrupts will
be enabled until they are disabled by the Disable Interrupt instruction.
ENI
Disable Interrupts (DISI)
The Disable Interrupt instruction is programmed in the main body of
the application program (before the End instruction) to disable both
hardware or software interrupts. Once the coil has been energized,
interrupts will be disabled until they are enabled by the Enable Interrupt
instruction.
DISI
DS Used
HPP Used
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
Interrupt Example for Interrupt Module
In the following example, when X40 is on, the interrupts will be enabled. When X40 is off,
the interrupts will be disabled. When an interrupt signal X1 is received, the CPU will jump
to the interrupt label INT O 1. The application ladder logic in the interrupt routine will be
performed. The CPU will return to the main body of the program after the IRT instruction
is executed.
DirectSOFT
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
$
X40
ENI
E
STR
SHFT
E
4
SP
STRN
X40
DISI
.
.
.
END
INT
O1
X20
Y5
SETI
X21
Y10
4
N
TMR
I
E
A
D
SHFT
E
SHFT
I
$
SHFT
I
X
SET
SHFT
I
$
SHFT
I
X
SET
SHFT
I
SHFT
I
R
ORN
STR
STR
I
4
SHFT
3
A
8
ENT
8
ENT
0
S
RST
4
N
TMR
D
8
N
TMR
T
MLR
8
ENT
0
3
I
8
ENT
B
C
8
F
8
C
8
B
8
T
MLR
ENT
2
5
2
1
A
1
0
ENT
ENT
ENT
B
A
1
0
ENT
SETI
IRT
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
ENT
ENT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-189
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
In the following example, when X1 is on, the value 10 is copied to V7634. This value sets the
software interrupt to 10ms. When X20 turns on, the interrupt will be enabled. When X20
turns off, the interrupt will be disabled. Every 10ms the CPU will jump to the interrupt label
INT O 0. The application ladder logic in the interrupt routine will be performed. If X35
is not on, Y0–Y17 will be reset to off and then the CPU will return to the main body of the
program.
DirectSOFT
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
SP0
$
LD
K40
V7633
X1
K104*
V7634
X20
ENI
X20
DISI
.
.
.
END
INT
B
STR
O0
L
ANDST
D
SP
STRN
3
$
V
3
SHFT
V
AND
$
C
A
STR
E
4
SP
STRN
2
N
TMR
I
C
A
SHFT
SHFT
E
SHFT
I
$
SHFT
I
X
SET
SHFT
I
SP
STRN
SHFT
I
S
RST
SHFT
I
SHFT
I
R
ORN
STR
3
I
2
D
8
0
SHFT
B
H
G
D
7
SHFT
K
JMP
B
H
G
D
3
A
D
0
3
ENT
ENT
0
4
D
8
N
TMR
T
MLR
3
8
A
8
T
MLR
4
E
4
ENT
ENT
ENT
A
D
8
0
ENT
F
8
3
E
ENT
I
C
8
6
A
ENT
0
S
RST
7
1
ENT
2
5
3
0
A
0
0
ENT
ENT
ENT
F
5
ENT
B
1
H
7
ENT
ENT
Y5
SETI
Y0
Y17
RSTI
5-190
6
4
* The value entered, 3-999, must be followed by the digit 4 to complete the instruction.
X20
X35
ENT
K
JMP
8
N
TMR
8
A
ENT
1
GX
OUT
SHFT
Copy the value in the lower
16 bits of the accumulator to
V7634
D
SHFT
SHFT
OUT
L
ANDST
GX
OUT
LD
Load the constant value
(K10) into the lower 16 bits
of the accumulator *
SHFT
STR
SHFT
OUT
Standard RLL
Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Interrupt Example for Software Interrupt
IRT
NOTE: Only one software interrupt is allowed and it must be Int0.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
Intelligent I/O Instructions
1
The Read from Intelligent Module instruction reads a block of data
2
(1 to 128 bytes maximum) from an intelligent I/O module into the
CPU’s V-memory. It loads the function parameters into the first and
second level of the accumulator stack, and the accumulator by three
3
additional instructions.
Listed below are the steps to program the Read from Intelligent module function.
4
Step 1: L
oad the base number (0 to 3) into the first byte and the slot number (0 to 7) into the second
byte of the second level of the accumulator stack.
5
Step 2: L
oad the number of bytes to be transferred into the first level of the accumulator stack
(maximum of 128 bytes).
6
Step 3: L
oad the address from which the data will be read into the accumulator. This parameter
must be a HEX value.
Step 4:Insert the RD instruction that specifies the starting V-memory location (Vaaa) into which the 7
data will be read.
Helpful hint: Use the LDA instruction to convert an octal address to its HEX equivalent and 8
load it into the accumulator when the hex format is required.
9
Operand Data Type DL230 Range
DL240 Range DL250-1 Range DL260 Range
aaa
aaa
aaa
aaa
10
Discrete Bit Flags
Description
11
NOTE: Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag.
12
In the following example, when X1 is on, the RD instruction will read six bytes of data from
an intelligent module in base 1, slot 2 starting at address 0 in the intelligent module and copy 13
the information into V-memory locations V1400–V1402.
14
A
B
C
D
Read from Intelligent Module (RD)
230
240
250-1
260
DS Used
HPP Used
RD
V aaa
V-memory
V
All (See page 3-53)
SP54
All (See page 3-54)
All (See page 3-55)
All (See page 3-56)
On when RX, WX, RD, WT instructions are executed with the wrong parameters.
DirectSOFT
X1
CPU
LD
K0102
LD
K6
The constant value K0102
specifies the base number
(01) and the base slot
number (02)
The constant value K6
specifies the number of
bytes to be read
K0
RD
V1400
The constant value K0
specifies the starting address
in the intelligent module
V1400 is the starting location
in the CPU where the
specified data will be stored
Data
12
Address 0
34
Address 1
56
90
Address 2
Address 3
Address 4
01
Address 5
V1402 0 1 9 0
V1403 X X X X
78
V1404 X X X X
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
$
LD
Intelligent Module
V1400 3 4 1 2
V1401 7 8 5 6
B
STR
SHFT
L
ANDST
D
SHFT
L
ANDST
D
SHFT
L
ANDST
D
SHFT
R
ORN
D
1
3
3
3
3
ENT
PREV
A
PREV
G
PREV
A
B
E
1
0
6
0
4
B
1
A
0
C
2
ENT
ENT
ENT
A
0
A
0
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
ENT
5-191
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
230
240
250-1
260
DS Used
HPP Used
5-192
The Write to Intelligent Module instruction writes a block of data (1
WT
V aaa
to 128 bytes maximum) to an intelligent I/O module from a block
of V-memory in the CPU. The function parameters are loaded into
the first and second level of the accumulator stack and the accumulator by three additional
instructions. Listed below are the steps necessary to program the Read from Intelligent module
function.
Step 1:Load the base number (0 to 3) into the first byte and the slot number (0 to 7) into the second
byte of the second level of the accumulator stack.
Step 2:Load the number of bytes to be transferred into the first level of the accumulator stack
(maximum of 128 bytes).
Step 3:Load the intelligent module address which will receive the data into the accumulator. This
parameter must be a HEX value.
Step 4:Insert the WT instruction which specifies the starting V-memory location (Vaaa) where the
data will be written from in the CPU.
Helpful hint: Use the LDA instruction to convert an octal address to its HEX equivalent and
load it into the accumulator when the hex format is required.
Operand Data Type
V-memory
V
DL230 Range
DL240 Range
DL250-1 Range
aaa
aaa
aaa
aaa
All (See page 3-53)
All (See page 3-54)
All (See page 3-55)
All (See page 3-56)
Discrete Bit Flags
SP54
DL260 Range
Description
On when RX, WX, RD, WT instructions are executed with the wrong parameters.
NOTE: Status flags are valid only until another instruction uses the same flag.
In the following example, when X1 is on, the WT instruction will write six bytes of data to an
intelligent module in base 1, slot 2 starting at address 0 in the intelligent module and copy the
information from V-memory locations V1400–V1402.
Standard
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Write to Intelligent Module (WT)
DirectSOFT
X1
LD
K0102
LD
K6
LD
K0
CPU
The constant value K0102
specifies the base number
(01) and the base slot
number (02)
The constant value K6
specifies the number of
bytes to be written
The constant value K0
specifies the starting address
in the intelligent module
V1400
V1400 is the starting
location in the CPU where
the specified data will be
written from
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Data
V1377
X
X
X
X
V1400
3
4
1
2
V1401
7
8
5
6
V1402
0
1
9
0
V1403
X
X
X
X
V1404
X
X
X
X
12
Address 0
34
Address 1
56
Address 2
78
Address 3
90
Address 4
01
Address 5
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
$
WT
Intelligent Module
B
STR
1
SHFT
L
ANDST
D
SHFT
L
ANDST
D
SHFT
L
ANDST
D
SHFT
W
ANDN
T
MLR
3
3
3
ENT
PREV
A
PREV
G
PREV
A
B
E
1
0
6
0
4
B
1
A
0
C
2
ENT
ENT
A
0
A
0
ENT
ENT
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
Network Instructions
1
The Read from Network instruction is used by the master device
2
on a network to read a block of data from another CPU. The
function parameters are loaded into the first and second levels of
the accumulator stack and the accumulator by three additional
3
instructions. Listed below are the steps necessary to program the
Read from Network function.
4
Step 1: L
oad the slave address (0 to 90 BCD) into the first byte, and load the PLC internal port
(KF1) or slot number of the master DCM or ECOM (0 to 7) into the second byte of the
5
second level of the accumulator stack.
Step 2:Load the number of bytes (0 to 128 BCD, multiple of 2) to be transferred into the first level
of the accumulator stack.
6
Step 3:Load the address of the data to be read into the accumulator. This parameter requires a HEX
value.
7
Step 4:Insert the RX instruction which specifies the starting V-memory location (Aaaa) where the
data will be read from in the slave.
8
Helpful hint: For parameters that require HEX values, the LDA instruction can be used to
convert an octal address to the HEX equivalent and load the value into the accumulator.
9
Operand Data Type
DL240 Range
DL250-1 Range
DL260 Range
A
aaa
aaa
aaa
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Read from Network (RX)
230
240
250-1
260
DS Used
HPP Used
RX
A aaa
V-memory
V
Pointer
P
Inputs
Outputs
Control Relays
Stage
Timer
Counter
Global I/O
Special Relay
X
Y
C
S
T
CT
GX/GY
SP
All (See page 3 - 54)
All V-memory
(See page 3 - 54)
0-477
0-477
0-377
0-777
0-177
0-177
0-137 540-617
All (See page 3 - 55)
All V-memory
(See page 3 - 55)
0-777
0-777
0-1777
0-1777
0-377
0-177
0-777
All (See page 3 - 56)
All V-memory
(See page 3 - 56)
0-1777
0-1777
0-3777
0-1777
0-377
0-377
0-3777
0-777
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5-193
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
DirectSOFT
X1
SP124
LD
5-194
LD
–or–
K0205
The constant value K0205 specifies
the ECOM/DCM slot number (2) and
the slave address (5)
LD
KF105
The constant value KF105
specifies the bottom port
and the slave address (5)
(DL250–1 and DL260 only)
K10
Master
CPU
The constant value K10
specifies the number of
bytes to be read
LDA
O 2300
Octal address 2300 is
converted to 4C0 HEX and
loaded into the accumulator.
V2300 is the starting
location for the Master CPU
where the specified data will
be read into
Slave
CPU
V2277
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X V1777
V2300
3
4
5
7
3
4
5
7
V2000
V2301
8
5
3
4
8
5
3
4
V2001
V2302
1
9
3
6
1
9
3
6
V2002
V2303
9
5
7
1
9
5
7
1
V2003
V2304
1
4
2
3
1
4
2
3
V2004
V2305
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X V2005
RX
V2000
V2000 is the starting location
in the Slave CPU where the
specified data will be read from
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
$
B
STR
W
ANDN
1
SHFT
SHFT
L
ANDST
D
SHFT
L
ANDST
D
SHFT
L
ANDST
D
SHFT
R
ORN
X
SET
ENT
SP
STRN
3
3
3
A
B
1
C
2
E
SHFT
K
JMP
C
SHFT
K
JMP
B
C
D
0
C
Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
In the following example, when X1 is on and the module busy relay SP124 (see special relays) is
not on, the RX instruction will access an ECOM or DCM operating as a master in slot 2. Ten
consecutive bytes of data (V2000 – V2004) will be read from a CPU at station address 5 and
copied into V-memory locations V2300–V2304 in the CPU with the master DCM or ECOM.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
2
A
2
0
A
4
2
1
3
0
ENT
A
A
A
A
0
0
0
0
F
5
ENT
ENT
A
0
ENT
ENT
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
Write to Network (WX)
230
240
250-1
260
DS Used
HPP Used
1
2
3
Step 1: L
oad the slave address (0 to 90 BCD) into the first byte and the PLC internal port (KF1) or
slot number of the master DCM or ECOM (0 to 7) into the second byte of the second level
4
of the accumulator stack.
Step 2: L
oad the number of bytes (0 to 128 BCD, multiple of 2) to be transferred into the first level
of the accumulator stack.
5
Step 3: L
oad the address of the data in the master that is to be written to the network into the
accumulator. This parameter requires a HEX value.
6
Step 4: I nsert the WX instruction which specifies the starting V-memory location (Aaaa) where the
data will be written to the slave.
7
Helpful hint: — For parameters that require HEX values, the LDA instruction can be used to
convert an octal address to the HEX equivalent and load the value into the accumulator.
8
Operand Data Type
DL240 Range
DL250-1 Range
DL260 Range
A
aaa
aaa
aaa
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
The Write to Network instruction is used to write a block of data
from the master device to a slave device on the same network. The
function parameters are loaded into the first and second levels of
the accumulator stack and the accumulator by three additional
instructions. Listed below are the steps necessary to program the
Write to Network function.
V-memory
V
Pointer
P
Inputs
Outputs
Control Relays
Stage
Timer
Counter
Global I/O
Special Relay
X
Y
C
S
T
CT
GX/GY
SP
All (See page 3 - 54)
All V-memory
(See page 3 - 54)
0-477
0-477
0-377
0-777
0-177
0-177
0-137 540-617
All (See page 3 - 55)
All V-memory
(See page 3 - 55)
0-777
0-777
0-1777
0-1777
0-377
0-177
0-777
WX
A aaa
All (See page 3 - 56)
All V-memory
(See page 3 - 56)
0-1777
0-1777
0-3777
0-1777
0-377
0-377
0-3777
0-777
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5-195
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-196
In the following example when X1 is on and the module busy relay SP124 (see special relays) is
not on, the WX instruction will access a DCM or ECOM operating as a master in slot 2. Ten
consecutive bytes of data is read from the CPU at station address 5 and copied to V-memory
locations V2000–V2004 in the slave CPU.
DirectSOFT
X1
SP124
LD
LD
–or–
K0205
KF105
The constant value K0205 specifies
the ECOM/DCM slot number (2) and
the slave address (5)
The constant value KF105
specifies the bottom port
and the slave address (5)
(DL250–1 and DL260 only)
LD
K10
The constant value K10
specifies the number of
bytes to write
Master
CPU
LDA
O 2300
Octal address 2300 is
converted to 4C0 HEX and
loaded into the accumulator.
V2300 is the starting
location for the Master CPU
where the specified data will
be written from.
Slave
CPU
V2277
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X V1777
V2300
3
4
5
7
3
4
5
7
V2000
V2301
8
5
3
4
8
5
3
4
V2001
V2302
1
9
3
6
1
9
3
6
V2002
V2303
9
5
7
1
9
5
7
1
V2003
V2304
1
4
2
3
1
4
2
3
V2004
V2305
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X V2005
WX
V2000
V2000 is the starting location
in the Slave CPU where the
specified data will be written to.
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
$
B
STR
W
ANDN
1
SHFT
SHFT
L
ANDST
D
SHFT
L
ANDST
D
SHFT
L
ANDST
D
SHFT
W
ANDN
X
SET
ENT
SP
STRN
3
3
3
A
B
1
C
2
E
4
ENT
SHFT
K
JMP
C
SHFT
K
JMP
B
SHFT
O
INST#
C
V
AND
C
A
0
SHFT
2
1
2
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
A
A
0
0
2
0
F
5
ENT
ENT
D
A
3
0
A
A
0
0
A
0
ENT
ENT
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
Message Instructions
1
The Fault instruction is used to display a message on the
2
handheld programmer or DirectSOFT. The message has a
maximum of 23 characters and can be either V-memory data,
numerical constant data, or ASCII text. See Appendix G for the
3
ASCII Conversion Table.
To display the value in a V-memory location, specify the
4
V-memory location in the instruction. To display the data
in ACON (ASCII constant) or NCON (Numerical constant)
5
instructions, specify the constant (K) value for the corresponding
data label area.
6
Operand Data Type
DL240 Range
DL250-1 Range
DL260 Range
A
aaa
aaa
aaa
7
8
NOTE: The FAULT instruction takes a considerable amount of time to execute. This is because the FAULT
parameters are stored in EEPROM. Make sure you consider the instruction execution times (shown in 9
Appendix C) if you are attempting to use the FAULT instructions in applications that require faster than
normal execution cycles.
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Fault (FAULT)
230
240
250-1
260
DS Used
HPP Used
FAULT
A aaa
V-memory
Constant.
V
K
All (See page 3-54)
1-FFFF
All (See page 3-55)
1-FFFF
All (See page 3-56)
1-FFFF
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5-197
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
In the following example, when X1 is on, the message SW 146 will display on the handheld
programmer. The NCONs use the HEX ASCII equivalent of the text to be displayed. (The
HEX ASCII for a blank is 20, a 1 is 31, 4 is 34 ...)
DirectSOFT
X1
FAULT
K1
SW 146
END
DLBL
K1
ACON
A SW
NCON
K 2031
NCON
K 3436
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
$
B
STR
SHFT
F
5
A
1
0
ENT
U
ISG
L
ANDST
T
MLR
B
5-198
1
ENT
SHFT
E
SHFT
D
4
N
TMR
D
3
L
ANDST
B
C
SHFT
A
SHFT
N
TMR
C
SHFT
N
TMR
C
0
3
ENT
1
L
ANDST
B
2
O
INST#
N
TMR
S
RST
W
ANDN
2
O
INST#
N
TMR
C
A
2
O
INST#
N
TMR
D
1
2
3
Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Fault Example
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
ENT
E
0
4
ENT
D
D
3
3
B
G
1
6
ENT
ENT
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
Data Label (DLBL)
230
240
250-1
260
The Data Label instruction marks the beginning of an
ASCII / numeric data area. DLBLs are programmed
after the End statement. A maximum of 64 (DL240 and
DL250–1/260) or 32 (DL230) DLBL instructions can be
used in a program. Multiple NCONs and ACONs can be
used in a DLBL area.
Operand Data Type
Constant
K
DLBL
K aaa
DL230 Range
DL240 Range
DL250-1 Range
aaa
aaa
aaa
DL260 Range
aaa
1-FFFF
1-FFFF
1-FFFF
1-FFFF
ASCII Constant (ACON)
The ASCII Constant instruction is used with the DLBL
ACON
instruction to store ASCII text for use with other
A aaa
instructions. Two ASCII characters can be stored in an
ACON instruction. If only one character is stored in
an ACON, a leading space will be printed in the Fault
message.
Operand Data Type
DL230 Range
DL240 Range
DL250-1 Range
DL260 Range
230
240
250-1
260
ASCII
A
aaa
aaa
aaa
aaa
0-9 A-Z
0-9 A-Z
0-9 A-Z
0-9 A-Z
Numerical Constant (NCON)
240
250-1
260
230
The Numerical Constant instruction is used with the
DLBL instruction to store the HEX ASCII equivalent of
numerical data for use with other instructions. Two digits
can be stored in an NCON instruction.
Operand Data Type
Constant
K
NCON
K aaa
DL230 Range
DL240 Range
DL250-1 Range
aaa
aaa
aaa
DL260 Range
aaa
0-FFFF
0-FFFF
0-FFFF
0-FFFF
DS Used
HPP Used
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-199
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-200
Data Label Example
In the following example, an ACON and two NCON instructions are used within a DLBL
instruction to build a text message. See the FAULT instruction for information on displaying
messages.
DirectSOFT
END
DLBL
K1
ACON
A SW
NCON
K 2031
NCON
K 3436
Handheld Programmer Keystrokes
SHFT
E
4
N
TMR
D
SHFT
D
3
L
ANDST
B
1
L
ANDST
B
SHFT
A
C
2
O
INST#
N
TMR
S
RST
W
ANDN
SHFT
N
TMR
C
2
O
INST#
N
TMR
C
A
SHFT
N
TMR
C
2
O
INST#
N
TMR
D
0
3
ENT
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
ENT
E
0
4
ENT
D
D
3
3
B
G
1
6
ENT
ENT
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
Print Message (PRINT)
230
240
250-1
260
DS Used
HPP N/A
1
2
Data Type
DL250-1 Range
DL260 Range
3
A
aaa
aaa
4
You may recall from the CPU specifications in Chapter 3 that the DL250–1 and DL260 ports
are capable of several protocols. To configure a port using the Handheld Programmer, use 5
AUX 56 and follow the prompts, making the same choices as indicated below on this page.
To configure a port in DirectSOFT, choose the PLC menu, then Setup, then Setup Secondary
6
Comm Port.
•P
ort: From the port number list box at the top, choose “Port 2.”
7
•P
rotocol: Click the check box to the left of “Non-sequence.” The Setup Communication Ports
dialog box opens.
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
• Memory Address: Choose a V-memory address for DirectSOFT to use to store the port setup
A
information. You will need to reserve 66 contiguous words in V-memory for this purpose. Select
“Use for printing only” if it applies.
• Baud Rate: Choose the baud rate that matches your printer.
B
• Stop Bits, Parity: Choose number of stop bits and parity setting to match your printer.
Then click the button indicated to send the Port 2 configuration to the CPU, and click
C
Close. See Chapter 3 for port wiring information to connect your printer to the DL2501/260.
D
The Print Message instruction prints the embedded
text or text/data variable message to the specified
communications port (2 on the DL250–1/260 CPU),
which must have the communications port configured.
Constant
K
2
PRINT
A aaa
“Hello, this is a PLC message”
2
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5-201
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-202
Port 2 on the DL250–1/260 has standard RS232 levels, and should work with most printer
serial input connections.
Text element - used for printing character strings. The character strings are defined as the
character (more than 0) ranged by the double quotation marks. Two hex numbers preceded
by the dollar sign means an 8-bit ASCII character code. Also, two characters preceded by the
dollar sign is interpreted according to the following table:
#
Character code
Description
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
$$
$”
$L or $1
$N or $n
$P or $p
$R or $r
$T or $t
Dollar sign ($)
Double quotation (“)
Line feed (LF)
Carriage return line feed (CRLF)
Form feed
Carriage return (CR)
Tab
The following examples show various syntax conventions and the length of the output to the
printer.
Example:
” ”
Length 0 without character
”A”
Length 1 with character A
” ”
Length 1 with blank
” $” ”
Length 1 with double quotation mark
” $ R $ L ”
Length 2 with one CR and one LF
” $ 0 D $ 0 A ”
Length 2 with one CR and one LF
” $ $ ”
Length 1 with one $ mark
In printing an ordinary line of text, you will need to include double quotation marks before
and after the text string. Error code 499 will occur in the CPU when the print instruction
contains invalid text or no quotations. It is important to test your PRINT instruction data
during the application development.
The following example prints the message to port 2. We use a PD contact, which causes the
message instruction to be active for just one scan. Note the $N at the end of the message,
which produces a carriage return / line feed on the printer. This prepares the printer to print
the next line, starting from the left margin.
X1
PRINT
K2
“Hello, this is a PLC message.$N”
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Print the message to Port 2 when
X1 makes an off-to-on transition.
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
V-memory element – used for printing V-memory contents in the integer format or real
format. Use V-memory number or V-memory number with “:” and data type. The data types
are shown in the table below. The Character code must be capital letters.
1
NOTE: There must be a space entered before and after the V-memory address to separate it from the text
2
string. Failure to do this will result in an error code 499.
#
Character code
Description
3
4
5
6
Example:
V2000
Print binary data in V2000 for decimal number
7
V2000 : B
Print BCD data in V2000
V2000 : D
Print binary number in V2000 and V2001 for decimal number
8
V2000 : D B
Print BCD data in V2000 and V2001
V2000 : R
Print floating point number in V2000/V2001 as real number
9
V2000 : E
Print floating point number in V2000/V2001 as real number with
exponent
10
Example: The following example prints a message containing text and a variable. The “reactor
temperature” labels the data, which is at V2000. You can use the ‘: B’ qualifier after the V2000
if the data is in BCD format, for example. The final string adds the units of degrees to the line 11
of text, and the $N adds a carriage return / line feed.
12
13
14
V-memory text element – used for printing text stored in V-memory. Use the % followed
by the number of characters after V-memory number for representing the text. If you assign A
“0” as the number of characters, the print function will read the character count from the first
location. Then it will start at the next V-memory location and read that number of ASCII
B
codes for the text from memory.
Example:
C
V2000 % 16
16 characters in V2000 to V2007 are printed.
V2000 % 0
The characters in V2001 to Vxxxx (determined by the number in
D
V2000) will be printed.
1
2
3
4
5
6
X1
none
:B
:D
:DB
:R
:E
16-bit binary (decimal number)
4-digit BCD
32-bit binary (decimal number)
8-digit BCD
Floating point number (real number)
Floating point number (real number with exponent)
PRINT
K2
“Reactor temperature = ” V2000 “deg. $N”
^
^
Message will read:
Reactor temperature = 0156 deg.
Print the message to Port 2
when X1 makes an off-to-on
transition.
^
represents a space
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5-203
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-204
Bit element – used for printing the state of the designated bit in V-memory or a relay bit.
The bit element can be assigned by the designating point (.) and bit number preceded by the
V-memory number or relay number. The output type is described as shown in the table below.
#
Data format
Description
1
2
3
none
: BOOL
: ONOFF
Print 1 for an ON state, and 0 for an OFF state
Print “TRUE” for an ON state, and “FALSE” for an OFF state
Print “ON” for an ON state, and “OFF” for an OFF state
Example:
V2000.15
Prints the status of bit 15 in V2000, in 1/0 format
C100
Prints the status of C100 in 1/0 format
C100 : BOOL
Prints the status of C100 in TRUE/FALSE format
C100 : ON/OFF
Prints the status of C100 in ON/OFF format
V2000.15 : BOOL
Prints the status of bit 15 in V2000 in TRUE/FALSE format
The maximum numbers of characters you can print is 128. The number of characters for each
element is listed in the table below:
Element type
Text, 1 character
16-bit binary
32-bit binary
4-digit BCD
8-digit BCD
Floating point (real number)
Floating point (real with exponent)
V-memory/text
Bit (1/0 format)
Bit (TRUE/FALSE format)
Bit (ON/OFF format)
Maximum
Characters
1
6
11
4
8
13
13
2
1
5
3
The Handheld Programmer’s mnemonic is “PRINT,” followed by the DEF field.
Special relay flags SP116 and SP117 indicate the status of the DL250–1/260 CPU ports (busy,
or communications error). See the appendix on special relays for a description.
NOTE: You must use the appropriate special relay in conjunction with the PRINT command to ensure
the ladder program does not try to PRINT to a port that is still busy from a previous PRINT or WX or RX
instruction.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
Modbus RTU Instructions (DL260)
1
The Modbus Read from Network (MRX) instruction is used by the DL260 network master
to read a block of data from a connected slave device and to write the data into V–memory 2
addresses within the master. The instruction allows the user to specify the Modbus Function
Code, slave station address, starting master and slave memory addresses, number of elements to 3
transfer, Modbus data format and the Exception Response Buffer.
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
•P
ort Number: must be DL260 Port 2 (K2)
11
•S
lave Address: specify a slave station address (1 to 247)
•F
unction Code: The following Modbus function codes are supported by the MRX instruction:
12
01 – Read a group of coils
02 – Read a group of inputs
13
03 – Read holding registers
04 – Read input registers
14
07 – Read Exception status
•S
tart Slave Memory Address: specifies the starting slave memory address of the data to be read. See A
the table on the following page.
•S
tart Master Memory Address: specifies the starting memory address in the master where the data
B
will be placed. See the table on the following page.
•N
umber of Elements: specifies how many coils, inputs, holding registers or input registers will be
read. See the table on the following page.
C
•M
odbus Data Format: specifies Modbus 584/984 or 484 data format to be used.
D
Modbus Read from Network (MRX)
230
240
250-1
260
DS Used
HPP N/A
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5-205
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-206
•E
xception Response Buffer: specifies the master memory address where the Exception Response
will be placed (6 bytes in length). See the table on the following page. The exception response
buffer uses 3 words. These bytes are swapped in the MRX/MWX exception response buffer
V-memory so:
V-Memory 1 Hi Byte = Function Code Byte (Most Significant Bit Set)
V-Memory 1 Lo Byte = Address Byte
V-Memory 2 Hi Byte = One of the CRC Bytes
V-Memory 2 Lo Byte = Exception Code
V-Memory 3 Hi Byte = 0
V-Memory 3 Lo Byte = Other CRC Byte
MRX Slave Memory Address
MRX Slave Address Ranges
Function Code
Modbus Data Format
Slave Address Range(s)
01-Read Coil
01-Read Coil
02-Read Input Status
484 Mode
584/984 Mode
484 Mode
02-Read Input Status
584/984 Mode
03-Read Holding Register
484 Mode
03-Read Holding Register
584/984
04-Read Input Register
484 Mode
04-Read Input Register
584/984 Mode
07-Read Exception Status
484 and 584/984 Mode
1-999
1-65535
1001-1999
10001-19999 (5 digit) or 100001165535 (6 digit)
4001-4999
40001-49999 9 (5 digit) or
4000001-465535 (6 digit)
3001-3999
30001-39999 (5 digit) or 3000001365535 (6 digit)
n/a
MRX Master Memory Addresses
MRX Master Memory Address Ranges
Operand Data Type
Inputs
Outputs
Control Relays
Stage Bits
Timer Bits
Counter Bits
Special Relays
V-memory
Global Inputs
Global Outputs
DL260 Range
X
Y
C
S
T
CT
SP
V
GX
GY
0-1777
0-1777
0-3777
0-1777
0-377
0-377
0-777
all (see page 3-56)
0-3777
0-3777
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
MRX Number of Elements
1
2
3
MRX Exception Response Buffer
4
Exception Response Buffer
Operand Data Type
DL260 Range
5
6
MRX Example
DL260 port 2 has two Special Relay contacts associated with it (see Appendix D for comm 7
port special relays). One indicates “Port busy” (SP116), and the other indicates ”Port
Communication Error” (SP117). The “Port Busy” bit is on while the PLC communicates 8
with the slave. When the bit is off, the program can initiate the next network request. The
“Port Communication Error” bit turns on when the PLC has detected an error. Use of this bit
is optional. When used, it should be ahead of any network instruction boxes since the error bit 9
is reset when an MRX or MWX instruction is executed.
Typically, network communications will last longer than one CPU scan. The program must 10
wait for the communications to finish before starting the next transaction.
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Number of Elements
Operand Data Type
DL260 Range
V-memory
V
Constant
K
V-memory
V
All (see page 3-56)
Bits: 1-2000
Registers: 1-125
All (see page 3-56)
This rung does a Modbus read from the first 32 coils of slave address number one.
It will place the value into 32 bits of the master starting at C0.
Port 2 Busy Bit
1
SP116
Instruction Interlock Bit
C100
MRX
CPU
CPU/DCM Slot:
K2
Port Number:
K1
Slave Address:
01 - Read Coil Status
Function Code:
K1
Start Slave Memory Address:
C0
Start Master Memory Address:
K32
Number of Elements:
584/984 Mode
Modbus Data Type:
V400
Exception Response Buffer:
Instruction Interlock Bit
C100
RST
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5-207
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Modbus Write to Network (MWX)
230
240
250-1
260
The Modbus Write to Network (MWX) instruction is used to write a block of data from the
network master’s (DL260) memory to Modbus memory addresses within a slave device on the
network. The instruction allows the user to specify the Modbus Function Code, slave station
address, starting master and slave memory addresses, number of elements to transfer, Modbus
data format and the Exception Response Buffer.
DS Used
HPP N/A
5-208
•P
ort Number: must be DL260 Port 2 (K2)
•S
lave Address: specify a slave station address (0 to 247)
•F
unction Code: The following Modbus function codes are supported by the MWX instruction:
05 – Force Single coil
06 – Preset Single Register
15 – Force Multiple Coils
16 – Preset Multiple Registers
•S
tart Slave Memory Address: specifies the starting slave memory address where the data will be
written
•S
tart Master Memory Address: specifies the starting address of the data in the master that is to be
written to the slave
•N
umber of Elements: specifies how many consecutive coils or registers will be written to. This field
is only active when either function code 15 or 16 is selected
•M
odbus Data Format: specifies Modbus 584/984 or 484 data format to be used
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
•E
xception Response Buffer: specifies the master memory address where the Exception Response
will be placed (6-bytes in length). See the table on the following page. The exception response
buffer uses 3 words. These bytes are swapped in the MRX/MWX exception response buffer
V-memory so:
V-Memory 1 Hi Byte = Function Code Byte (Most Significant Bit Set)
V-Memory 1 Lo Byte = Address Byte
V-Memory 2 Hi Byte = One of the CRC Bytes
V-Memory 2 Lo Byte = Exception Code
V-Memory 3 Hi Byte = 0
V-Memory 3 Lo Byte = Other CRC Byte
MWX Slave Memory Address
MWX Slave Address Ranges
Function Code
Modbus Data Format
05 - Force Sinlge Coil
05 - Force Single Coil
06 - Preset Single Register
484 Mode
584/984 Mode
484 Mode
06 - Preset Single Register
584/984 Mode
15 - Force Multiple Coils
15 - Force Multiple Coils
16 - Preset Multiple Registers
484 Mode
584/984 Mode
484 Mode
16 - Preset Multiple Registers
584/984 Mode
Slave Address Range(s)
1-999
1-65535
4001-4999
40001-49999 (5 digit) or
400001-465535 (6 digit)
1-999
1-65535
4001-4999
40001-49999 (5 digit) or
4000001-465535 (6 digit)
MWX Master Memory Addresses
MWX Master Memory Address Ranges
Operand Data Type
Inputs
Outputs
Control Relays
Stage Bits
Timer Bits
Counter Bits
Special Relays
V-memory
Global Inputs
Global Outputs
DL260 Range
X
Y
C
S
T
CT
SP
V
GX
GY
0-1777
0-1777
0-3777
0-1777
0-377
0-377
0-777
all (see page 3-56)
0-3777
0-3777
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-209
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-210
MWX Number of Elements
Number of Elements
Operand Data Type
V-memory
V
Constant
K
DL260 Range
all (see page 3-56)
Bits: 1-2000
Registers: 1-125
MWX Exception Response Buffer
Exception Response Buffer
Operand Data Type
V-memory
V
DL260 Range
all (see page 3-56)
MWX Example
DL260 port 2 has two Special Relay contacts associated with it (see Appendix D for comm
port special relays). One indicates “Port busy” (SP116), and the other indicates ”Port
Communication Error” (SP117). The “Port Busy” bit is on while the PLC communicates
with the slave. When the bit is off, the program can initiate the next network request. The
“Port Communication Error” bit turns on when the PLC has detected an error. Use of this bit
is optional. When used, it should be ahead of any network instruction boxes since the error bit
is reset when an MRX or MWX instruction is executed.
Typically, network communications will last longer than one CPU scan. The program must
wait for the communications to finish before starting the next transaction.
This rung does a Modbus write to the first holding register 40001 of the slave address 1. It will write the
values to V2000. This particular function code only writes to one register. Use Function Code 16 to write
to multiple registers. Only one network instruction (WX, RX, MWX, MRX) can be enabled in each one scan.
That is the reason for the interlock bits. For using many network instructions on the same port, look at
using the shift register instruction.
Port 2 Busy Bit
SP116
Instruction Interlock Bit
C100
1
MWX
CPU
CPU/DCM Slot:
K2
Port Number:
K1
Slave Address:
05 - Force Single Coil
Function Code:
40001
Start Slave Memory Address:
V2000
Start Master Memory Address:
n/a
Number of Elements:
584/984 Mode
Modbus Data Type:
V400
Exception Response Buffer:
Instruction Interlock Bit
C100
RST
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
ASCII Instructions (DL260)
1
2
3
4
Reading ASCII Input Strings
5
There are several methods which the DL260 can use to read ASCII input strings:
1) A
SCII IN (AIN) – This instruction configures port 2 for raw ASCII input strings with parameters
such as fixed and variable length ASCII strings, termination characters, byte swapping options, and 6
instruction control bits. Use barcode scanners, weight scales, etc., to write raw ASCII input strings
into port 2 based on the (AIN) instruction’s parameters.
7
2) Write embedded ASCII strings directly to V–memory from an external HMI or similar master
device via a supported communications protocol using the CPU ports, H2–ECOM or D2–DCM
8
module. The AIN instruction is not used in this case.
3) If a DL260 PLC is a master on a network, the Network Read instruction (RX) can be used to read
embedded ASCII data from a slave device via a supported communications protocol using port 2,
9
H2–ECOM or D2–DCM module. The RX instruction places the data directly into V–memory.
Writing ASCII Output Strings
10
The following instructions can be used to write ASCII output strings:
1) Print from V–memory (PRINTV) – Use this instruction to write raw ASCII strings out of port 2 11
to a display panel or a serial printer, etc. The instruction features the starting V–memory address,
string length, byte swapping options, etc. When the instruction’s permissive bit is enabled, the
12
string is written to port 2.
2) Print to V–memory (VPRINT) – Use this instruction to create pre–coded ASCII strings in the
PLC (i.e. alarm messages). When the instruction’s permissive bit is enabled, the message is loaded 13
into a pre–defined V–memory address location. Then use the PRINTV instruction to write the
pre–coded ASCII string out of port 2. American, European and Asian Time/Date stamps are
14
supported.
Additionally, if a DL260 PLC is a master on a network, the Network Write instruction (WX) A
can be used to write embedded ASCII data to an HMI or slave device directly from V–memory
via a supported communications protocol using port 2, H2–ECOM or D2–DCM module.
B
C
D
230
240
250-1
260
DS Used
HPP N/A
The DL260 CPU supports several instructions and methods that allow ASCII strings to be read
into and written from the PLC communications ports.
Specifically, port 2 on the DL260 can be used for either reading or writing raw ASCII strings,
but cannot be used for both on the same CPU.
The DL260 can also decipher ASCII embedded within a supported protocol (K–Sequence,
DirectNET, Modbus, Ethernet) via the CPU ports, H2–ECOM or D2–DCM module.
ASCII character tables and descriptions can be found at www.asciitable.com.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5-211
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Managing the ASCII Strings
The following instructions can be helpful in managing the ASCII strings within the CPU’s
V-memory:
ASCII Find (AFIND) – Finds where a specific portion of the ASCII string is located in
continuous V-memory addresses. Forward and reverse searches are supported.
ASCII Extract (AEX) – Extracts a specific portion (usually some data value) from the ASCII
find location or other known ASCII data location.
Compare V-memory (CMPV) – This instruction is used to compare two blocks of
V-memory addresses and is usually used to detect a change in an ASCII string. Compared data
types must be of the same format (i.e., BCD, ASCII, etc.).
Swap Bytes (SWAPB) – usually used to swap V-memory bytes on ASCII data that was written
directly to V-memory from an external HMI or similar master device via a communications
protocol. The AIN and AEX instructions have a built–in byte swap feature.
ASCII Input (AIN)
230
240
250-1
260
The ASCII Input instruction allows the CPU to receive ASCII strings through the specified
communications port and places the string into a series of specified V-memory registers. The
ASCII data can be received as a fixed number of bytes or as a variable length string with a
specified termination character(s). Other features include Byte Swap preferences, Character
Timeout, and user-defined flag bits for Busy, Complete and Timeout Error.
DS Used
HPP N/A
5-212
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
AIN Fixed Length Configuration
1
•P
ort Number: must be DL260 port 2 (K2).
2
• Data Destination: specifies where the ASCII string will be placed in V–memory.
• Fixed Length: specifies the length, in bytes, of the fixed-length ASCII string the port will receive.
• Inter–character Timeout: if the amount of time between incoming ASCII characters exceeds the set 3
time, the specified Timeout Error bit will be set. No data will be stored at the Data Destination V–
memory location. The bit will reset when the AIN instruction permissive bits are disabled. None
4
selection disables this feature.
• First Character Timeout: if the amount of time from when the AIN is enabled to the time the first
character is received exceeds the set time, the specified First Character Timeout bit will be set. The 5
bit will reset when the AIN instruction permissive bits are disabled. None selection disables this
feature.
6
• Byte Swap: swaps the high–byte and low–byte within each V–memory register of the Fixed Length
ASCII string. See the SWAPB instruction for details.
7
• Busy Bit: is ON while the AIN instruction is receiving ASCII data.
• Complete Bit: is set once the ASCII data has been received for the specified fixed length and reset
8
when the AIN instruction permissive bits are disabled.
• Inter–character Timeout Error Bit: is set when the Character Timeout is exceed. See Character
Timeout explanation above.
9
• First Character Timeout Error Bit: is set when the First Character Timeout is exceeded. See First
Character Timeout explanation above.
10
Parameter
DL260 Range
11
12
13
Discrete Bit Flags
Description
14
A
B
C
D
• Length Type: select fixed length based on the length of the ASCII string that will be sent to the
CPU port.
Data Destination
Fixed Length
Bits: Busy, Complete, Timeout Error, Overflow
SP53
SP71
SP116
SP117
All V-memory (See page 3 -56)
K1-128
C0-3777
On if the CPU cannot execute the instruction
On when a value used by the instruction is invalid
On when CPU port 2 is communicating with another device
On when CPU port 2 has experienced a communication error
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5-213
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-214
AIN Fixed Length Examples
Fixed Length example when the PLC is reading the port continuously and timing is not critical.
Fixed Length example when character to character timing is critical.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
AIN Variable Length Configuration:
7
•L
ength Type: select Variable Length if the ASCII string length followed by termination characters
will vary in length.
8
• Port Number: must be DL260 port 2 (K2).
• Data Destination: specifies where the ASCII string will be placed in V–memory.
9
• Maximum Variable Length: specifies, in bytes, the maximum length of a Variable Length ASCII
string the port will receive.
• Inter–character Timeout: if the amount of time between incoming ASCII characters exceeds the set 10
time, the Timeout Error bit will be set. No data will be stored at the Data Destination V–memory
location. The Timeout Error bit will reset when the AIN instruction permissive bits are disabled.
11
None selection disables this feature.
• First Character Timeout: if the amount of time from when the AIN is enabled to the time the first
character is received exceeds the set time, the specified First Character Timeout bit will be set. The 12
bit will reset when the AIN instruction permissive bits are disabled. None selection disables this
feature.
13
• Byte Swap: swaps the high–byte and low–byte within each V–memory register of the Varaible
Length ASCII string. See the SWAPB instruction for details.
14
• Termination Code Length: consists of either 1 or 2 characters. Refer to the ASCII table in
Appendix G.
A
• Overflow Error Bit: is set when the ASCII data received exceeds the Maximum Variable Length
specified.
• Busy Bit: is ON while the AIN instruction is receiving ASCII data.
B
• Complete Bit: is set once the ASCII data has been received up to the termination code characters.
It will be reset when the AIN instruction permissive bits are disabled.
C
• Inter–character Timeout Error Bit: is set when the Character Timeout is exceed. See Character
Timeout explanation above.
D
• First Character Timeout Error Bit: is set when the First Character Timeout is exceeded. See First
Character Timeout explanation above.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5-215
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-216
Parameter
Data Destination
Max. Variable Length
Bits: Busy, Complete, Timeout Error, Overflow
DL260 Range
All V-memory (See page 3-56)
K1-128
C0-3777
AIN Variable Length Example
AIN Variable Length example used to read barcodes on boxes (PE = photoelectric sensor).
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
ASCII Find (AFIND)
230
240
250-1
260
DS Used
HPP N/A
The ASCII Find instruction locates a specific ASCII string or portion of an ASCII string within
a range of V-memory registers and places the string’s Found Index number (byte number where
desired string is found) in Hex, into a specified V-memory register. Other features include,
Search Starting Index number for skipping over unnecessary bytes before beginning the FIND
operation, Forward or Reverse direction search, and From Beginning and From End selections
to reference the Found Index Value.
•B
ase Address: specifies the beginning V-memory
register where the entire ASCII string is stored in
memory.
• Total Number of Bytes: specifies the total number
of bytes to search for the desired ASCII string.
• Search Starting Index: specifies which byte to skip to
(with respect to the Base Address) before beginning
the search.
• Direction: Forward begins the search from lower
numbered V-memory registers to higher numbered
V-memory registers. Reverse does the search from
higher numbered V–memory registers to lowernumbered V-memory registers.
• Found Index Value: specifies whether the Beginning
or the End byte of the ASCII string found will be
loaded into the Found Index register.
• Found Index: specifies the V–memory register where
the Found Index Value will be stored. A value of
FFFF will result if the desired string is not located
in the memory registers specified. A value of EEEE
will result if there is a conflict in the AFIND search
parameters specified.
• Search for String: up to 128 characters.
Parameter
DL260 Range
Base Address
All V-memory (See page 3-56)
Total Number of Bytes
All V-memory (See page 3-56)
or K1-128
Search Starting Index
All V-memory (See page 3-56)
or K0-127
Found Index
All V-memory (See page 3-56)
Discrete Bit Flags
SP53
SP71
Description
On if the CPU cannot execute the instruction.
On when a value used by the instruction is invalid.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-217
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
AFIND Search Example
In the following example, the AFIND instruction is used to search for the “day” portion
of “Friday” in the ASCII string “Today is Friday,” which had previously been loaded into
V–memory. Note that a Search Starting Index of constant (K) 5 combined with a Forward
Direction Search is used to prevent finding the “day” portion of the word “Today.” The Found
Index will be placed into V4000.
ASCII Characters
HEX Equivalent
Base Address 0
1
Reverse Direction Search
2
3
4
Search start Index Number
5
6
7
8
Forward Direction Search
9
10
11
Beginning Index Number
12
13
End Index Number
14
15
Found Index Number =
5-218
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
T
o
d
a
y
i
s
F
r
i
d
a
y
.
54h
6Fh
64h
61h
79h
20h
69h
73h
20h
46h
72h
69h
64h
61h
79h
2Eh
Low
High
Low
High
Low
High
Low
High
Low
High
Low
High
Low
High
Low
High
0012
V3000
V3001
V3002
V3003
V3004
V3005
V3006
V3007
V4000
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
AFIND Example Combined with AEX Instruction
When an AIN instruction has executed, its Complete bit can be used to trigger an AFIND
instruction to search for a desired portion of the ASCII string. Once the string is found, the
AEX instruction can be used to extract the located string.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-219
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
ASCII Extract (AEX)
230
240
250-1
260
DS Used
HPP N/A
5-220
The ASCII Extract instruction extracts a specified number of bytes of ASCII data from one
series of V-memory registers and places them into another series of V-memory registers. Other
features include Extract at Index for skipping over unnecessary bytes before begining the
Extract operation, Shift ASCII Option, for One Byte Left or One Byte Right, Byte Swap and
Convert data to a BCD format number.
• Source Base Address: specifies the beginning
V-memory register where the entire ASCII string
is stored in memory.
• Extract at Index: specifies which byte to skip to
(with respect to the Source Base Address) before
extracting the data.
• Number of Bytes: specifies the number of bytes
to be extracted.
• Shift ASCII Option: shifts all extracted data
one byte left or one byte right to displace
“unwanted” characters, if necessary.
• Byte Swap: swaps the high–byte and the low–
byte within each V-memory register of the
extracted data. See the SWAPB instruction for
details.
• Convert BCD(Hex) ASCII to BCD (Hex):
if enabled, this will convert ASCII numerical
characters to Hexadecimal numerical values.
• Destination Base Address: specifies the
V-memory register where the extracted data
will be stored.
Parameter
DL260 Range
Source Base Address
Extract at Index
All V-memory (See page 3-56)
All V-memory (See page 3-56) or K0-127
Number of Bytes
Destination Base Address
K1-128
All V-memory (See page 3-56)
See the previous page for an example using the AEX instruction.
Discrete Bit Flags
SP53
SP71
Description
On if the CPU cannot execute the instruction.
On when a value used by the instruction is invalid.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
ASCII Compare (CMPV)
230
240
250-1
260
DS Used
HPP N/A
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
If the compared
14
A
B
C
D
The ASCII Compare instruction compares two groups of V–memory registers. The CMPV
will compare any data type (ASCII to ASCII, BCD to BCD, etc) of one series (group) of
V–memory registers to another series of V–memory registers for a specified byte length.
“Compare from” Starting Address:
specifies the beginning V–memory
register of the first group of V–memory
registers to be compared from.
“Compare to” Starting Address: specifies
the beginning V–memory register of the
second group of V–memory registers to
be compared to.
Number of Bytes: specifies the length of
each V–memory group to be compared.
SP61 = 1 (ON), the result is equal
SP61 = 0 (OFF), the result is not equal
Parameter
Compare from Starting Address
Compare to Starting Address
Number of Bytes
Discrete Bit Flags
SP53
SP61
SP71
DL260 Range
All V-memory (See page 3-56)
All V-memory (See page 3-56)
All V-memory (See page 3-56) or K0-127
Description
On if the CPU cannot execute the instruction.
On when result is equal.
On when a value used by the instruction is invalid.
CMPV Example
The CMPV instruction executes when the AIN instruction is complete.
V–memory tables are equal, SP61 will turn ON.
AIN Complete
C1
CMPV
"Compare from" Starting Address: V3400
"Compare to" Starting Address:
V3500
Number of Bytes:
K12
SP61
Strings are equal
C11
OUT
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5-221
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
ASCII Print to V-memory (VPRINT)
230
240
250-1
260
DS Used
HPP N/A
5-222
The ASCII Print to V–memory instruction will write a specified ASCII string into a series of
V–memory registers. Other features include Byte Swap, options to suppress or convert leading
zeros or spaces, and _Date and _Time options for U.S., European, and Asian date formats and
12- or 24-hour time formats.
• Byte Swap: swaps the high–byte and low–byte
within each V–memory register to which
the ASCII string is printed. See the SWAPB
instruction for details.
• Print to Starting V–memory Address:
specifies the beginning of a series of V–
memory addresses where the ASCII string will
be placed by the VPRINT instruction.
• Starting V–memory Address: the first V–
memory register of the series of registers
specified will contain the ASCII string’s length
in bytes.
• Starting V–memory Address +1: the 2nd and
subsequent registers will contain the ASCII
string printed to V–memory.
VPRINT Time/Date Stamping
Parameter
Print to Starting V-memory Address
DL260 Range
All V-memory (See page 3-56)
Discrete Bit Flags
SP53
SP71
Description
On if the CPU cannot execute the instruction.
On when a value used by the instruction is invalid.
The codes in the table below can be used in the VPRINT ASCII string message to “print to
V–memory” the current time and/or date.
#
1
2
3
4
5
Character Code
_Date:us
_Date:e
_Date:a
_Time:12
_Time:24
Date/Time Stamp Options
American standard (month/day/2 digit year)
European standard (day/month/2 digit year)
Asian standard (2 digit year/month/day)
standard 12 hour clock (0-12 hour:min am/pm)
standard 24 hour clock (0-23 hour:min am/pm)
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
VPRINT V-memory element
1
2
NOTE: There must be a space entered before and after the V-memory address to separate it from the text
3
string. Failure to do this will result in error code 499.
# Character Code
Description
4
5
6
7
Examples:
V2000
Print binary data in V2000 for decimal number
8
V2000 : B
Print BCD data in V2000
V2000 : D
Print binary number in V2000 and V2001 for decimal number
9
V2000 : D B Print BCD data in V2000 and V2001
V2000 : R
Print floating point number in V2000/V2001 as real number
10
V2000 : E
Print floating point number in V2000/V2001 as real number with exponent
The following modifiers can be added to any of the modifies above to suppress or convert 11
leading zeros or spaces. The character code must be capital letters.
12
# Character Code
Description
13
14
Example with V2000 = 0018 (binary format)
Number of Characters
A
V-memory Register
with Modifier
1
2
3
4
B
C
D
The following modifiers can be used in the VPRINT ASCII string message to “print to
V–memory” register contents in integer format or real format. Use V-memory number or
V-memory number with “:” and data type. The data types are shown in the table below. The
Character code must be capital letters.
1
2
3
4
5
6
none
:B
:D
:DB
:R
:E
16-bit binary (decimal number)
4-digit BCD
32-bit binary (decimal number)
8-digit BCD
Floating point number (real number)
Floating point number (real number with exponent)
1
2
3
S
C0
0
Suppresses leading spaces
Converts leading spaces to zeros
Suppresses leading zeros
V2000
V2000:B
V2000:B0
0
0
1
0
0
2
1
1
8
2
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5-223
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
Example with V2000 = sp sp18 (binary format) where sp = space
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-224
V-memory Register
with Modifier
Number of Characters
2
3
1
V2000
V2000:B
V2000:BS
V2000:BC0
sp
sp
1
0
sp
sp
2
0
4
1
1
8
2
1
2
VPRINT V-memory text element
The following is used for “printing to V-memory” text stored in registers. Use the % followed
by the number of characters after V-memory number for representing the text. If you assign
“0” as the number of characters, the function will read the character count from the first
location. Then it will start at the next V-memory location and read that number of ASCII
codes for the text from memory.
Example:
V2000 % 16
16 characters in V2000 to V2007 are printed.
V2000 % 0
The characters in V2001 to Vxxxx (determined by the number in
V2000) will be printed.
VPRINT Bit element
The following is used for “printing to V–memory” the state of the designated bit in
V-memory or a control relay bit. The bit element can be assigned by the designating point
(.) and bit number preceded by the V-memory number or relay number. The output type is
described as shown in the table below.
#
Data format
1
none
2
: BOOL
3
: ONOFF
Example:
V2000.15
C100
C100 : BOOL
C100 : ON/OFF
V2000.15 : BOOL
Description
Print 1 for an ON state, and 0 for an OFF state
Print “TRUE” for an ON state, and “FALSE” for an
OFF state
Print “ON” for an ON state, and “OFF” for an OFF state
Prints the status of bit 15 in V2000, in 1/0 format
Prints the status of C100 in 1/0 format
Prints the status of C100 in TRUE/FALSE format
Prints the status of C100 in ON/OFF format
Prints the status of bit 15 in V2000 in TRUE/FALSE format
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
The maximum numbers of characters you can VPRINT is 128. The number of characters
required for each element, regardless of whether the :S, :C0 or :0 modifiers are used, is listed
in the table below.
1
Maximum
Element Type
2
Characters
3
4
5
6
7
Text element
The following is used for “printing to V-memory” character strings. The character strings 8
are defined as the character (more than 0) ranged by the double quotation marks. Two hex
numbers preceded by the dollar sign means an 8-bit ASCII character code. Also, two characters 9
preceded by the dollar sign is interpreted according to the following table:
10
#
Character code
Description
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Text, 1 character
16-bit binary
32-bit binary
4-digit BCD
8-digit BCD
Floating point (real number)
Floating point (real with exponent)
V-memory/text
Bit (1/0 format)
Bit (TRUE/FALSE format)
Bit (ON/OFF format)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
$$
$”
$L or $l
$N or $n
$P or $p
$R or $r
$T or $t
1
6
11
4
8
13
13
2
1
5
3
Dollar sign ($)
Double quotation (“)
Line feed (LF)
Carriage return line feed (CRLF)
Form feed
Carriage return (CR)
Tab
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5-225
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-226
The following examples show various syntax conventions and the length of the output to the
printer.
Example:
” ”
Length 0 without character
”A”
Length 1 with character A
” ”
Length 1 with blank
” $” ”
Length 1 with double quotation mark
”$R$L”
Length 2 with one CR and one LF
” $ 0 D $ 0 A ” Length 2 with one CR and one LF
”$$”
Length 1 with one $ mark
In printing an ordinary line of text, you will need to include double quotation marks before
and after the text string. Error code 499 will occur in the CPU when the print instruction
contains invalid text or no quotations. It is important to test your VPRINT instruction data
during application development.
VPRINT Example Combined with PRINTV Instruction
The VPRINT instruction is used to create a string in V–memory. The PRINTV is used to
print the string out of port 2.
Create string permissive
C12
14
VPRINT
Byte Swap:
“Print to” Address:
All
V4000
“STX” V3000:B “$0D”
Delay permissive for VPRINT
C13
SET
Delay Permissive for VPRINT
C13
15
TMR
Delay for VPRINT
to complete
T1
K10
Delay for VPRINT to complete
T1
16
PRINTV
CPU/DCM Slot:
Port Number:
Start Address:
Number of Bytes:
Append:
Byte Swap:
Busy:
Complete:
CPU
K2
V4000
K12
0D (hexadecimal)
None
C0
C1
Delay permissive for VPRINT
C13
RST
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
ASCII Print from V-memory (PRINTV)
230
240
250-1
260
DS Used
HPP N/A
The ASCII Print from V–memory instruction will send an ASCII string out of the designated
communications port from a specified series of V–memory registers for a specified length in
number of bytes. Other features include user specified Append Characters to be placed after
the desired data string for devices that require specific termination character(s), Byte Swap
options, and user specified flags for Busy and Complete.
• Port Number: must be DL260 port 2 (K2).
• Start Address: specifies the beginning of series of
V–memory registers that contain the ASCII string
to print.
• Number of Bytes: specifies the length of the string
to print.
• Append Characters: specifies ASCII characters to
be added to the end of the string for devices that
require specific termination characters.
• Byte Swap: swaps the high–byte and low–byte
within each V–memory register of the string while
printing. See the SWAPB instruction for details.
• Busy Bit: will be ON while the instruction is
printing ASCII data.
• Complete Bit: will be set once the ASCII data
has been printed and reset when the PRINTV
instruction permissive bits are disabled.
Parameter
Port Number
Start Address
Number of Bytes
Bits: Busy, Complete
DL260 Range
port 2 (K2)
All V-memory (See page 3-56)
All V-memory (See page 3-56) or K1-128
C0-3777
See the facing page for an example using the PRINTV instruction.
Discrete Bit Flags
SP53
SP71
SP116
SP117
Description
On if the CPU cannot execute the instruction.
On when a value used by the instruction is invalid.
On when CPU port 2 is communicating with another device.
On when CPU port 2 has experienced a communication error.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-227
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
ASCII Swap Bytes (SWAPB)
230
240
250-1
260
DS Used
HPP N/A
5-228
The ASCII Swap Bytes instruction swaps byte positions (high–byte to low–byte and low–byte
to high–byte) within each V-memory register of a series of V-memory registers for a specified
number of bytes.
• Starting Address: specifies the beginning
of a series of V–memory registers
the instruction will use to begin byte
swapping
• Number of Bytes: specifies the number
of bytes, beginning with the Starting
Address, to byte swap
Parameter
Starting Address
Number of Bytes
DL260 Range
All V-memory (See page 3-56)
All V-memory (See page 3-56) or K1 to 128
Discrete Bit Flags
SP53
SP71
Byte Swap
Preferences
Description
On if the CPU cannot execute the instruction.
On when a value used by the instruction is invalid.
Byte
High Low
No Byte Swapping
(AIN, AEX, PRINTV, VPRINT)
A B C D E
V2000
V2001
V2002
V2003
0005h
A
B
C
D
xx
E
Byte Swap All
Byte
High Low
A B C D E
B A D C E
V2000
V2001
V2002
V2003
0005h
B
A
C
D
xx
E
Byte Swap All but Null
Byte
High Low
A B C D E
B A D C E
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
V2000
V2001
V2002
V2003
0005h
B
A
C
D
xx
E
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
SWAPB Example
The AIN Complete bit is used to trigger the SWAPB instruction. Use a one–shot so the
SWAPB only executes once.
ASCII Clear Buffer (ACRB)
230
240
250-1
260
The ASCII Clear Buffer instruction will clear the
ASCII receive buffer of the specified communications
port number.
Port Number: must be DL260 port 2 (K2)
DS Used
HPP N/A
ACRB Example
The AIN Complete bit or the AIN diagnostic bits are used to clear the ASCII buffer.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-229
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Intelligent Box (IBox) Instructions (DL250-1/DL260 Only)
5-230
A new class of instructions, called Ibox Instructions, became available with the introduction
of DirectSOFT. These powerful, yet easy-to-use instructions simplify many of the more
complicated tasks that could previously be accomplished only through the use of multiple
RLL Instructions. The IBox Instructions are supported by DL250-1 and DL260 PLCs.
The D2-250-1 CPU requires firmware version v4.60 or later, and the D2-260 CPU requires
firmware version v2.40 or later. For more information on DirectSOFT or to download our free
version, please visit our Web site at: www.automationdirect.com.
Analog Helper IBoxes
Instruction
Analog Input / Output Combo Module Pointer Setup (ANLGCMB)
Analog Input Module Pointer Setup (ANLGIN)
Analog Output Module Pointer Setup (ANLGOUT)
Analog Scale 12-Bit BCD to BCD (ANSCL)
Analog Scale 12-Bit Binary to Binary (ANSCLB)
Filter Over Time - BCD (FILTER)
Filter Over Time - Binary (FILTERB)
Hi/Low Alarm - BCD (HILOAL)
Hi/Low Alarm - Binary (HILOALB)
IBox #
Page
IB-462
IB-460
IB-461
IB-423
IB-403
IB-422
IB-402
IB-421
IB-401
5-232
5-234
5-236
5-238
5-239
5-240
5-242
5-244
5-246
Discrete Helper IBoxes
Instruction
Off Delay Timer (OFFDTMR)
On Delay Timer (ONDTMR)
One Shot (ONESHOT)
Push On / Push Off Circuit (PONOFF)
Ibox #
Page
IB-302
IB-301
IB-303
IB-300
5-248
5-250
5-252
5-253
Memory IBoxes
Instruction
Move Single Word (MOVEW)
Move Double Word (MOVED)
Ibox #
Page
IB-200
IB-201
5-254
5-255
Math IBoxes
Instruction
Ibox #
Page
BCD to Real with Implied Decimal Point (BCDTOR)
Double BCD to Real with Implied Decimal Point (BCDTORD)
Math - BCD (MATHBCD)
Math - Binary (MATHBIN)
Math - Real (MATHR)
Real to BCD with Implied Decimal Point and Rounding (RTOBCD)
Real to Double BCD with Implied Decimal Point and Rounding (RTOBCDD)
Square BCD (SQUARE)
Square Binary (SQUAREB)
Square Real(SQUARER)
Sum BCD Numbers (SUMBCD)
Sum Binary Numbers (SUMBIN)
Sum Real Numbers (SUMR)
IB-560
IB-562
IB-521
IB-501
IB-541
IB-561
IB-563
IB-523
IB-503
IB-543
IB-522
IB-502
IB-542
5-256
5-257
5-258
5-260
5-262
5-263
5-264
5-265
5-266
5-267
5-268
5-269
5-270
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
Communication IBoxes
Instruction
ECOM100 Configuration (ECOM100)
ECOM100 Disable DHCP (ECDHCPD)
ECOM100 Enable DHCP (ECDHCPE)
ECOM100 Query DHCP Setting (ECDHCPQ)
ECOM100 Send E-mail (ECEMAIL)
ECOM100 Restore Default E-mail Setup (ECEMRDS)
ECOM100 E-mail Setup (ECEMSUP)
ECOM100 IP Setup (ECIPSUP)
ECOM100 Read Description (ECRDDES)
ECOM100 Read Gateway Address (ECRDGWA)
ECOM100 Read IP Address (ECRDIP)
ECOM100 Read Module ID (ECRDMID)
ECOM100 Read Module Name (ECRDNAM)
ECOM100 Read Subnet Mask (ECRDSNM)
ECOM100 Write Description (ECWRDES)
ECOM100 Write Gateway Address (ECWRGWA)
ECOM100 Write IP Address (ECWRIP)
ECOM100 Write Module ID (ECWRMID)
ECOM100 Write Name (ECWRNAM)
ECOM100 Write Subnet Mask (ECWRSNM)
ECOM100 RX Network Read (ECRX)
ECOM100 WX Network Write (ECWX)
NETCFG Network Configuration (NETCFG)
Network RX Read (NETRX)
Network WX Write (NETWX)
Ibox #
Page
IB-710
IB-736
IB-735
IB-734
IB-711
IB-713
IB-712
IB-717
IB-726
IB-730
IB-722
IB-720
IB-724
IB-732
IB-727
IB-731
IB-723
IB-721
IB-725
IB-733
IB-740
IB-741
IB-700
IB-701
IB-702
5-272
5-274
5-276
5-278
5-280
5-283
5-286
5-290
5-292
5-294
5-296
5-298
5-300
5-302
5-304
5-306
5-308
5-310
5-312
5-314
5-316
5-319
5-322
5-324
5-327
Counter I/O IBoxes (Work with H2-CTRIO and H2-CTRIO2)
Instruction
CTRIO Configuration (CTRIO)
CTRIO Add Entry to End of Preset Table (CTRADPT)
CTRIO Clear Preset Table (CTRCLRT)
CTRIO Edit Preset Table Entry (CTREDPT)
CTRIO Edit Preset Table Entry and Reload (CTREDRL)
CTRIO Initialize Preset Table (CTRINPT)
CTRIO Initialize Preset Table (CTRINTR)
CTRIO Load Profile (CTRLDPR)
CTRIO Read Error (CTRRDER)
CTRIO Run to Limit Mode (CTRRTLM)
CTRIO Run to Position Mode (CTRRTPM)
CTRIO Velocity Mode (CTRVELO)
CTRIO Write File to ROM (CTRWFTR)
Ibox #
Page
IB-1000
IB-1005
IB-1007
IB-1003
IB-1002
IB-1004
IB-1010
IB-1001
IB-1014
IB-1011
IB-1012
IB-1013
IB-1006
5-330
5-332
5-335
5-338
5-342
5-346
5-350
5-354
5-357
5-359
5-362
5-365
5-368
NOTE: Check your CPU firmware version using DirectSOFT: PLC Menu > Diagnostics > System
Information. The latest firmware and update tool are available from:
http://support.automationdirect.com/firmware/index.html
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-231
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Analog Input/Output Combo Module Pointer Setup (ANLGCMB) (IB-462)
230
240
250-1
260
DS5
Used
HPP
N/A
5-232
The Analog Input/Output Combo Module Pointer Setup instruction generates the logic to
configure the pointer method for an analog input/output combination module on the first PLC
scan following a Program to Run transition.
The ANLGCMB IBox instruction
determines the data format and Pointer
addresses based on the CPU type, the
Base# and the module Slot#.
The Input Data Address is the starting
location in user V-memory where the
analog input data values will be stored,
one location for each input channel
enabled.
The Output Data Address is the starting
location in user V-memory where the
analog output data values will be stored
by ladder code or external device, one
location for each output channel enabled.
Since the IBox logic only executes on the first scan, the instruction cannot have any input logic.
ANLGCMB Parameters
• Base # (K0-Local): specifies which base the module is in.
• Slot #: specifies which slot is occupied by the analog module.
• Number of Input Channels: specifies the number of analog input channels to scan.
• Input Data Format (0-BCD 1-BIN): specifies the analog input data format (BCD or Binary) - the
binary format may be used for displaying data on some OI panels.
• Input Data Address: specifies the starting V-memory location that will be used to store the analog
input data.
• Number of Output Channels: specifies the number of analog output channels that will be used.
• Output Data Format (0-BCD 1-BIN): specifies the format of the analog output data (BCD or
Binary).
• Output Data Address: specifies the starting V-memory location that will be used to source the
analog output data.
NOTE The ANLGCMB instruction does not currently support the F2-8AD4DA-1 or F2-8AD4DA-2.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
Parameter
DL205 Range
1
2
3
4
ANLGCMB Example
In the following example, the ANLGCMB instruction is used to set up the pointer method for 5
an analog I/O combination module that is installed in option slot 2. Four input channels are
enabled and the analog data will be written to V2000 - V2003 in BCD format. Two output
channels are enabled and the analog values will be read from V2100 - V2101 in BCD format. 6
7
8
9
10
11
12
NOTE: An Analog I/O IBox instruction is used without a permissive contact. The top line will be identified in
BOLD italics, and the instruction name and ID will be in BOLD characters.
13
14
A
B
C
D
Base # (K0-Local) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠K
Slot # ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠K
Number of Input Channels ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠K
Input Data Format (0-BCD 1-BIN)⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠K
Input Data Address ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V
Number of Output Channels ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠K
Output Data Format (0-BCD 1-BIN) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠K
Output Data Address ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V
K0-3
K0-7
K1-8
BCD: K0; Binary: K1
See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
K1-8
BCD: K0; Binary: K1
See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
No permissive contact
or input logic is used
with this instruction
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5-233
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Analog Input Module Pointer Setup (ANLGIN) (IB-460)
240
250-1
260
230
DS5
Used
HPP
N/A
5-234
Analog Input Module Pointer Setup generates the logic to configure the pointer method for
one analog input module on the first PLC scan following a Program to Run transition.
This IBox determines the data format and Pointer addresses based on the CPU type, the Base#,
and the Slot#.
The Input Data Address is the starting
location in user V-memory where the
analog input data values will be stored,
one location for each input channel
enabled.
Since this logic only executes on the
first scan, this IBox cannot have any
input logic.
ANLGIN Parameters
• Base # (K0-Local): specifies which base the analog module is in.
• Slot #: specifies which PLC slot is occupied by the analog module.
• Number of Input Channels: specifies the number of input channels to scan.
• Input Data Format (0-BCD 1-BIN): specifies the analog input data format (BCD or Binary) - the
binary format may be used for displaying data on some OI panels.
• Input Data Address: specifies the starting V-memory location that will be used to store the analog
input data.
Parameter
Base # (K0-Local) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K
Slot # ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K
Number of Input Channels ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K
Input Data Format (0-BCD 1-BIN)⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K
Input Data Address ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
DL205 Range
K0-3
K0-7
K1-8
BCD: K0; Binary: K1
See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
ANLGIN Example
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
NOTE: An Analog I/O IBox instruction is used without a permissive contact. The top line will be identified in
BOLD italics, and the instruction name and ID will be in BOLD characters.
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
In the following example, the ANLGIN instruction is used to set up the pointer method for
an analog input module that is installed in option slot 1. Eight input channels are enabled and
the analog data will be written to V2000 - V2007 in BCD format.
No permissive contact or
input logic is used with
this instruction
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5-235
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Analog Output Module Pointer Setup (ANLGOUT) (IB-461)
230
240
250-1
260
DS5
Used
HPP
N/A
5-236
Analog Output Module Pointer Setup generates the logic to configure the pointer method for
one analog output module on the first PLC scan following a Program to Run transition.
This IBox determines the data format
and Pointer addresses based on the
CPU type, the Base#, and the Slot#.
The Output Data Address is the
starting location in user V-memory
where the analog output data values
will be placed by ladder code or
external device, one location for each
output channel enabled.
Since this logic only executes on the
first scan, this IBox cannot have any
input logic.
ANLGOUT Parameters
• Base # (K0-Local): specifies which base the analog module is in
• Slot #: specifies which PLC slot is occupied by the analog module
• Number of Output Channels: specifies the number of analog output channels that will be used
• Output Data Format (0-BCD 1-BIN): specifies the format of the analog output data (BCD or
Binary)
• Output Data Address: specifies the starting V-memory location that will be used to source the
analog output data
Parameter
Base # (K0-Local) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K
Slot # ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K
Number of Output Channels ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K
Output Data Format (0-BCD 1-BIN)⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K
Output Data Address ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
DL205 Range
K0-3
K0-7
K1-8
BCD: K0; Binary: K1
See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
ANLGOUT Example
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
NOTE: An Analog I/O IBox instruction is used without a permissive contact. The top line will be identified in
BOLD italics, and the instruction name and ID will be in BOLD characters.
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
In the following example, the ANLGOUT instruction is used to set up the pointer method for
an analog output module that is installed in option slot 3. Two output channels are enabled
and the analog data will be read from V2100 - V2101 in BCD format.
No permissive contact or input logic is
used with this instruction
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5-237
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Analog Scale 12-Bit BCD to BCD (ANSCL) (IB-423)
230
240
250-1
260
DS5
Used
HPP
N/A
5-238
Analog Scale 12-Bit BCD to BCD scales a 12-bit BCD analog value (0 to 4095 BCD) into
BCD engineering units. You specify the engineering unit high value (when raw is 4095), and
the engineering low value (when raw is 0), and
the output V-memory address where you want
to place the scaled engineering unit value. The
engineering units are generated as BCD and can
be the full range of 0 to 9999 (see ANSCLB Analog Scale 12-Bit Binary to Binary if your raw
units are in Binary format).
Note that this IBox only works with unipolar
unsigned raw values. It does NOT work with
bipolar or sign plus magnitude raw values.
ANSCL Parameters
• Raw (0 to 4095 BCD): specifies the V-memory location of the unipolar unsigned raw 0 to 4095
unscaled value
• High Engineering: specifies the high engineering value when the raw input is 4095
• Low Engineering: specifies the low engineering value when the raw input is 0
• Engineering (BCD): specifies the V-memory location where the scaled engineering BCD value will
be placed
ANSCL Example
Parameter
Raw (0-4095 BCD) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,P
High Engineering ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K
Low Engineering ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K
Engineering (BCD)⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,P
DL205 Range
See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
K0-9999
K0-9999
See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
In the following example, the ANSCL instruction is used to scale a raw value (0 to 4095 BCD)
that is in V2000. The engineering scaling range is set 0 to 100 (low engineering value - high
engineering value). The scaled value will be placed in V2100 in BCD format.
SP1
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
Analog Scale 12-Bit Binary to Binary (ANSCLB) (IB-403)
1
2
3
4
5
6
ANSCLB Parameters
7
• Raw (12-bit binary): specifies the V-memory location of the unipolar unsigned raw decimal
unscaled value (12-bit binary = 0 to 4095 decimal)
8
• High Engineering: specifies the high engineering value when the raw input is 4095 decimal
• Low Engineering: specifies the low engineering value when the raw input is 0 decimal
9
• Engineering (binary): specifies the V-memory location where the scaled engineering decimal value
will be placed
10
ANSCLB Example
11
Parameter
DL205 Range
12
13
In the following example, the ANSCLB instruction is used to scale a raw value (0 to 4095
binary) that is in V2000. The engineering scaling range is set 0 to 1000 (low engineering value 14
- high engineering value). The scaled value will be placed in V2100 in binary format.
A
B
C
D
240
250-1
260
230
DS5
Used
HPP
N/A
Analog Scale 12-Bit Binary to Binary scales a 12-bit binary analog value (0 to 4095 decimal)
into binary (decimal) engineering units. You specify the engineering unit high value (when raw
is 4095), and the engineering low value (when
raw is 0), and the output V-memory address
where you want to place the scaled engineering
unit value. The engineering units are generated
as binary and can be the full range of 0 to
65535 (see ANSCL - Analog Scale 12-Bit BCD
to BCD if your raw units are in BCD format).
Note that this IBox only works with unipolar
unsigned raw values. It does NOT work with
bipolar, sign plus magnitude, or signed 2’s
complement raw values.
Raw (12-bit binary) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,P
High Engineering ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K
Low Engineering ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K
Engineering (binary)⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,P
See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
K0-65535
K0-65535
See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
SP1
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5-239
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Filter Over Time - BCD (FILTER) (IB-422)
230
240
250-1
260
DS5
Used
HPP
N/A
5-240
Filter Over Time BCD will perform a first-order filter on the Raw Data on a defined time
interval. The equation is:
New = Old + [(Raw - Old) / FDC]
where,
New: New Filtered Value
Old: Old Filtered Value
FDC: Filter Divisor Constant
Raw: Raw Data
The Filter Divisor Constant is an integer in
the range K1 to K100, such that if it equaled
K1 then no filtering would be done.
The rate at which the calculation is performed is specified by time in hundredths of a second
(0.01 seconds) as the Filter Freq Time parameter. Note that this Timer instruction is embedded
in the IBox and must NOT be used anywhere else in your program. Power flow controls
whether the calculation is enabled. If it is disabled, the Filter Value is not updated. On the
first scan from Program to Run mode, the Filter Value is initialized to 0 to give the calculation
a consistent starting point.
FILTER Parameters
• Filter Frequency Timer: specifies the Timer (T) number which is used by the Filter instruction.
• Filter Frequency Time (0.01sec): specifies the rate at which the calculation is performed.
• Raw Data (BCD): specifies the V-memory location of the raw unfiltered BCD value.
• Filter Divisor (1 to 100): this constant is used to control the filtering effect. A larger value will
increase the smoothing effect of the filter. A value of 1 results with no filtering.
• Filtered Value (BCD): specifies the V-memory location where the filtered BCD value will be
placed.
Parameter
Filter Frequency Timer ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ T
Filter Frequency Time (0.01 sec) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K
Raw Data (BCD) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V
Filter Divisor (1-100) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K
Filtered Value (BCD) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
DL205 Range
T0-377
K0-9999
See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
K1-100
See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
FILTER Example
In the following example, the Filter instruction is used to filter a BCD value that is in V2000.
Timer(T0) is set to 0.5 sec, the rate at which the filter calculation will be performed. The filter
constant is set to 2. A larger value will increase the smoothing effect of the filter. A value of 1
results with no filtering. The filtered value will be placed in V2100.
SP1
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-241
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Filter Over Time - Binary (FILTERB) (IB-402)
230
240
250-1
260
DS5 Used
HPP
5-242
N/A
Filter Over Time in Binary (decimal) will perform a first-order filter on the Raw Data on a
defined time interval. The equation is:
New = Old + [(Raw - Old) / FDC] where
New: New Filtered Value
Old: Old Filtered Value
FDC: Filter Divisor Constant
Raw: Raw Data
The Filter Divisor Constant is an integer in the
range K1 to K100, such that if it equaled K1
then no filtering would be done.
The rate at which the calculation is performed is specified by time in hundredths of a second
(0.01 seconds) as the Filter Freq Time parameter. Note that this Timer instruction is embedded
in the IBox and must NOT be used anywhere else in your program. Power flow controls
whether the calculation is enabled. If it is disabled, the Filter Value is not updated. On the
first scan from Program to Run mode, the Filter Value is initialized to 0 to give the calculation
a consistent starting point.
FILTERB Parameters
• Filter Frequency Timer: specifies the Timer (T) number that is used by the Filter instruction.
• Filter Frequency Time (0.01sec): specifies the rate at which the calculation is performed.
• Raw Data (Binary): specifies the V-memory location of the raw unfiltered binary (decimal) value.
• Filter Divisor (1 to 100): this constant is used to control the filtering effect. A larger value will
increase the smoothing effect of the filter. A value of 1 results with no filtering.
• Filtered Value (Binary): specifies the V-memory location where the filtered binary (decimal) value
will be placed.
Parameter
Filter Frequency Timer ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ T
Filter Frequency Time (0.01 sec) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K
Raw Data (Binary) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V
Filter Divisor (1-100) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K
Filtered Value (Binary) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
DL205 Range
T0-377
K0-9999
See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
K1-100
See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
FILTERB Example
In the following example, the FILTERB instruction is used to filter a binary value that is in
V2000. Timer(T1) is set to 0.5 sec, the rate at which the filter calculation will be performed.
The filter constant is set to 3. A larger value will increase the smoothing effect of the filter. A
value of 1 results with no filtering. The filtered value will be placed in V2100
SP1
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-243
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Hi/Low Alarm - BCD (HILOAL) (IB-421)
230
240
250-1
260
DS5 Used
HPP
5-244
N/A
Hi/Low Alarm - BCD monitors a BCD value V-memory location and sets four possible alarm
states, High-High, High, Low, and Low-Low whenever the IBox has power flow. You enter
the alarm thresholds as constant (K) BCD values (K0-K9999) and/or BCD value V-memory
locations.
You must ensure that threshold limits are valid,
that is HH >= H > L >= LL. Note that when the
High-High or Low-Low alarm condition is true,
that the High and Low alarms will also be set,
respectively. This means you may use the same
threshold limit and same alarm bit for the HighHigh and the High alarms in case you only need
one “High” alarm. Also note that the boundary
conditions are inclusive. That is, if the Low
boundary is K50, and the Low-Low boundary
is K10, and if the Monitoring Value equals 10,
then the Low Alarm AND the Low-Low alarm
will both be ON. If there is no power flow to the IBox, then all alarm bits will be turned off
regardless of the value of the Monitoring Value parameter.
HILOAL Parameters
• Monitoring Value (BCD): specifies the V-memory location of the BCD value to be monitored
• High-High Limit: V-memory location or constant specifies the high-high alarm limit
• High-High Alarm: On when the high-high limit is reached
• High Limit: V-memory location or constant specifies the high alarm limit
• High Alarm: On when the high limit is reached
• Low Limit: V-memory location or constant specifies the low alarm limit
• Low Alarm: On when the low limit is reached
• Low-Low Limit: V-memory location or constant specifies the low-low alarm limit
• Low-Low Alarm: On when the low-low limit is reached
Parameter
Monitoring Value (BCD) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V
High-High Limit ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V, K
High-High Alarm ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X, Y, C, GX,GY, B
High Limit ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V, K
High Alarm⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X, Y, C, GX,GY, B
Low Limit ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V, K
Low Alarm ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X, Y, C, GX,GY,B
Low-Low Limit ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V, K
Low-Low Alarm⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠X, Y, C, GX,GY, B
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
DL205 Range
See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
K0-9999; or see DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
See DL205 V-memory map
K0-9999; or see DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
See DL205 V-memory map
K0-9999; or see DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
See DL205 V-memory map
K0-9999; or see DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
See DL205 V-memory map
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
HILOAL Example
In the following example, the HILOAL instruction is used to monitor a BCD value that is in
V2000. If the value in V2000 meets/exceeds the High limit of K900, C101 will turn on. If the
value continues to increase to meet/exceed the High-High limit, C100 will turn on. Both bits
would be on in this case. The High and High-High limits and alarms can be set to the same
value if one “High” limit or alarm is desired to be used.
If the value in V2000 meets or falls below the Low limit of K200, C102 will turn on. If the
value continues to decrease to meet or fall below the Low-Low limit of K100, C103 will turn
on. Both bits would be on in this case. The Low and Low-Low limits and alarms can be set to
the same value if one “Low” limit or alarm is desired to be used.
SP1
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-245
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Hi/Low Alarm - Binary (HILOALB) (IB-401)
230
240
250-1
260
DS5 Used
HPP
5-246
N/A
Hi/Low Alarm - Binary monitors a binary (decimal) V-memory location and sets four
possible alarm states, High-High, High, Low, and Low-Low whenever the IBox has power
flow. You enter the alarm thresholds as constant (K) decimal values (K0-K65535) and/or
binary (decimal) V-memory locations.
You must ensure that threshold limits are valid, that is HH >= H > L >= LL. Note that when
the High-High or Low-Low alarm condition is true, that the High and Low alarms will also
be set, respectively. This means you may use the same threshold limit and same alarm bit for
the High-High and the High alarms in case you only need one “High” alarm. Also note that
the boundary conditions are inclusive. That is, if the Low boundary is K50, and the Low-Low
boundary is K10, and if the Monitoring Value equals 10, then the Low Alarm AND the
Low-Low alarm will both be ON. If there is no power flow to the IBox, then all alarm bits will
be turned off regardless of the value of the Monitoring Value parameter.
HILOALB Parameters
• Monitoring Value (Binary): specifies the
V-memory location of the Binary value to be
monitored
• High-High Limit: V-memory location or
constant specifies the High-High alarm limit
• High-High Alarm: On when the High-High
limit is reached
• High Limit: V-memory location or constant
specifies the High alarm limit
• High Alarm: On when the High limit is
reached
• Low Limit: V-memory location or constant
specifies the Low alarm limit
• Low Alarm: On when the Low limit is reached
• Low-Low Limit: V-memory location or constant specifies the Low-Low alarm limit
• Low-Low Alarm: On when the Low-Low limit is reached
Parameter
Monitoring Value (Binary) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V
High-High Limit ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V, K
High-High Alarm ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X, Y, C, GX,GY, B
High Limit ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V, K
High Alarm⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X, Y, C, GX,GY, B
Low Limit ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V, K
Low Alarm ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X, Y, C, GX,GY,B
Low-Low Limit ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V, K
Low-Low Alarm⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠X, Y, C, GX,GY, B
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
DL205 Range
See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
K0-65535; or see DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
See DL205 V-memory map
K0-65535; or see DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
See DL205 V-memory map
K0-65535; or see DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
See DL205 V-memory map
K0-65535; or see DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
See DL205 V-memory map
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
HILOALB Example
In the following example, the HILOALB instruction is used to monitor a binary value that is
in V2000. If the value in V2000 meets/exceeds the High limit of the binary value in V2011,
C101 will turn on. If the value continues to increase to meet/exceed the High-High limit value
in V2010, C100 will turn on. Both bits would be on in this case. The High and High-High
limits and alarms can be set to the same V-memory location/value if one “High” limit or alarm
is desired to be used.
If the value in V2000 meets or falls below the low limit of the binary value in V2012, C102 will
turn on. If the value continues to decrease to meet or fall below the Low-Low limit in V2013,
C103 will turn on. Both bits would be on in this case. The Low and Low-Low limits and
alarms can be set to the same V-memory location/value if one “Low” limit or alarm is desired
to be used.
SP1
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-247
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Off Delay Timer (OFFDTMR) (IB-302)
230
240
250-1
260
DS5 Used
HPP
5-248
N/A
Off Delay Timer will delay the “turning off” of the Output parameter by the specified Off
Delay Time (up to 99.99 seconds) based on the power flow into the IBox. Once the IBox
receives power, the Output bit will turn on immediately. When the power flow to the IBox
turns off, the Output bit WILL REMAIN ON for the specified amount of time (in hundredths
of a second). Once the Off Delay Time has expired, the output will turn Off. If the power
flow to the IBox comes back on BEFORE the Off Delay Time, then the timer is RESET and
the Output will remain On - so you must continuously have NO power flow to the IBox for
AT LEAST the specified Off Delay Time before the Output will turn Off.
This IBox utilizes a Timer resource (TMRF), which cannot be used anywhere else in your
program.
OFFDTMR Parameters
• Timer Number: specifies the Timer (TMRF)
number which is used by the OFFDTMR
instruction
• Off Delay Time (0.01sec): specifies how long
the Output will remain on once power flow
to the Ibox is removed (up to 99.99 seconds).
• Output: specifies the output that will be
delayed “turning off” by the Off Delay Time.
Parameter
Timer Number ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ T
Off Delay Time ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠K,V
Output⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠X, Y, C, GX,GY, B
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
DL205 Range
T0-377
K0-9999; See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
See DL205 V-memory map
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
OFFDTMR Example
In the following example, the OFFDTMR instruction is used to delay the “turning off”of
output C20. Timer 2 (T2) is set to 5 seconds, the “off-delay” period.
When C100 turns on, C20 turns on and will remain on while C100 is on. When C100 turns
off, C20 will remain on for the specified Off Delay Time (5 secs), and then turn off.
Example timing diagram
C100
5 sec
5 sec
C20
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-249
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
On Delay Timer (ONDTMR) (IB-301)
230
240
250-1
260
DS5
Used
HPP
N/A
5-250
On Delay Timer will delay the “turning on” of the Output parameter by the specified amount
of time (up to 99.99 seconds) based on the power flow into the IBox. Once the IBox loses
power, the Output is turned off immediately. If the power flow turns off BEFORE the On
Delay Time, then the timer is RESET and
the Output is never turned on, so you must
have continuous power flow to the IBox for at
least the specified On Delay Time before the
Output turns On.
This IBox utilizes a Timer resource (TMRF),
which cannot be used anywhere else in your
program.
ONDTMR Parameters
• Timer Number: specifies the Timer (TMRF) number which is used by the ONDTMR instruction
• On Delay Time (0.01sec): specifies how long the Output will remain on once power flow to the
Ibox is removed (up to 99.99 seconds).
• Output: specifies the output that will be delayed “turning on” by the On Delay Time.
Parameter
Timer Number ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ T
On Delay Time ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠K,V
Output⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠X, Y, C, GX,GY, B
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
DL205 Range
T0-377
K0-9999; See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
See DL205 V-memory map
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
ONDTMR Example
In the following example, the ONDTMR instruction is used to delay the “turning on” of
output C21. Timer 1 (T1) is set to 2 seconds, the “on-delay” period.
When C101 turns on, C21 is delayed turning on by 2 seconds. When C101 turns off, C21
turns off immediately.
Example timing diagram
C101
2 sec
2 sec
C21
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-251
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
One Shot (ONESHOT) (IB-303)
230
240
250-1
260
DS5 Used
HPP
5-252
One Shot will turn on the given bit output parameter for one scan on an OFF to ON transition
of the power flow into the IBox. This IBox is simply a different name for the PD Coil (Positive
Differential).
ONESHOT Parameters
• Discrete Output: specifies the output that
will be on for one scan
N/A
Parameter
DL205 Range
Discrete Output⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X, Y, C
See DL205 V-memory map
ONESHOT Example
In the following example, the ONESHOT instruction is used to turn C100 on for one PLC
scan after C0 goes from an off to on transition. The input logic must produce an off to on
transition to execute the One Shot instruction.
Example Timing Diagram
C0
Scan time
C100
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
Push On/Push Off Circuit (PONOFF) (IB-300)
1
2
PONOFF Parameters
3
• Discrete Input: specifies the input that will
toggle the specified output
4
• Discrete Output: specifies the output that will
be “turned on/off” or toggled
• Internal State: specifies a work bit that is used
5
by the instruction
6
7
Parameter
DL205 Range
8
9
PONOFF Example
In the following example, the PONOFF instruction is used to control the on and off states of
the output C20 with a single input C10. When C10 is pressed once, C20 turns on. When 10
C10 is pressed again, C20 turns off. C100 is an internal bit used by the instruction.
11
12
13
14
NOTE: Neither a permissive nor input logic is required with this instruction.
A
B
C
D
240
250-1
260
230
Push On/Push Off Circuit toggles an output state whenever its input power flow transitions
from off to on. Requires an extra bit parameter for scan-to-scan state information. This extra
bit must NOT be used anywhere else in the program. This is also known as a “flip-flop circuit.”
DS5 Used
HPP
N/A
Discrete Input ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,S,T,CT,GX,GY,SP,B,PB
Discrete Output ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B
Internal State⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X, Y, C
See DL205 V-memory map
See DL205 V-memory map
See DL205 V-memory map
No permissive contact or input logic is
used with this instruction
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5-253
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Move Single Word (MOVEW) (IB-200)
230
240
250-1
260
DS5 Used
HPP
5-254
N/A
Move Single Word moves (copies) a word to a memory location directly or indirectly via a
pointer, either as a HEX constant, from a memory location, or indirectly through a pointer.
MOVEW Parameters
• From WORD: specifies the word that will be
moved to another location
• To WORD: specifies the location to which
where the “From WORD” will be moved
Parameter
From WORD ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,P,K
To WORD⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,P
DL205 Range
K0-FFFF; See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
MOVEW Example
In the following example, the MOVEW instruction is used to move 16 bits of data from
V2000 to V3000 when C100 turns on.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
Move Double Word (MOVED) (IB-201)
1
2
MOVED Parameters
3
• From DWORD: specifies the double word
that will be moved to another location
4
• To DWORD: specifies the location to which
where the “From DWORD” will be moved
5
6
Parameter
DL205 Range
7
8
MOVED Example
9
In the following example, the MOVED instruction is used to move 32 bits of data from V2000
and V2001 to V3000 and V3001 when C100 turns on.
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
240
250-1
260
230
Move Double Word moves (copies) a double word to two consecutive memory locations
directly or indirectly via a pointer, either as a double HEX constant, from a double memory
location, or indirectly through a pointer to a double memory location.
DS5 Used
HPP
N/A
From DWORD ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,P,K
To DWORD⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,P
K0-FFFFFFFF; See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5-255
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
BCD to Real with Implied Decimal Point (BCDTOR) (IB-560)
230
240
250-1
260
DS5 Used
HPP
5-256
N/A
BCD to Real with Implied Decimal Point converts the given 4-digit WORD BCD value to a
Real number, with the implied number of decimal points (K0-K4).
For example, BCDTOR K1234 with an implied number of decimal points equal to K1, would
yield R123.4
BCDTOR Parameters
• Value (WORD BCD): specifies the word
or constant that will be converted to a Real
number
• Number of Decimal Points: specifies the
number of implied decimal points in the
Result DWORD
• Result (DWORD REAL): specifies the
location where the Real number will be placed
Parameter
Value (WORD BCD) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,P,K
Number of Decimal Points ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K
Result (DWORD REAL)⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V
DL205 Range
K0-9999; See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
K0-4
See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
BCDTOR Example
In the following example, the BCDTOR instruction is used to convert the 16-bit data in
V2000 from a 4-digit BCD data format to a 32-bit REAL (floating point) data format and store
into V3000 and V3001 when C100 turns on.
K2 in the Number of Decimal Points implies the data will have two digits to the right of the
decimal point.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
Double BCD to Real with Implied Decimal Point (BCDTORD) (IB-562)
1
2
3
BCDTORD Parameters
• Value (DWORD BCD): specifies the Dword
4
or constant that will be converted to a Real
number
5
•
Number of Decimal Points: specifies the
number of implied decimal points in the
Result DWORD
6
•
Result (DWORD REAL): specifies the
location where the Real number will be placed
7
Parameter
DL205 Range
8
9
10
BCDTORD Example
In the following example, the BCDTORD instruction is used to convert the 32-bit data in
V2000 from an 8-digit BCD data format to a 32-bit REAL (floating point) data format and 11
store into V3000 and V3001 when C100 turns on.
K2 in the Number of Decimal Points implies the data will have two digits to the right of the 12
decimal point.
13
14
A
B
C
D
230
240
250-1
Double BCD to Real with Implied Decimal Point converts the given 8-digit DWORD BCD
value to a Real number, given an implied number of decimal points (K0-K8).
For example, BCDTORD K12345678 with an implied number of decimal points equal to K5,
would yield R123.45678
260
DS5 Used
HPP
N/A
Value (DWORD BCD) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,P,K
Number of Decimal Points ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K
Result (DWORD REAL)⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V
K0-99999999; See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
K0-8
See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5-257
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Math - BCD (MATHBCD) (IB-521)
230
240
250-1
260
DS5 Used
HPP
N/A
5-258
Math - BCD Format lets you enter complex
mathematical expressions like you would in
Visual Basic, Excel, or C++ to do complex
calculations, nesting parentheses up to 4 levels
deep. In addition to + - * /, you can do Modulo
(% aka Remainder), Bit-wise And (&) Or (|)
Xor (^), and some BCD functions - Convert to
BCD (BCD), Convert to Binary (BIN), BCD
Complement (BCDCPL), Convert from Gray
Code (GRAY), Invert Bits (INV), and BCD/
HEX to Seven Segment Display (SEG).
Example: ((V2000 + V2001) / (V2003 - K100)) * GRAY(V3000 & K001F)
Every V-memory reference MUST be to a single-word BCD formatted value. Intermediate
results can go up to 32-bit values, but as long as the final result fits in a 16-bit BCD word, the
calculation is valid. Typical example of this is scaling using multiply then divide, (V2000 *
K1000) / K4095. The multiply term most likely will exceed 9999 but fits within 32 bits. The
divide operation will divide 4095 into the 32-bit accumulator, yielding a result that will always
fit in 16 bits.
You can reference binary V-memory values by using the BCD conversion function on a
V-memory location but NOT an expression. That is BCD(V2000) is okay and will convert
V2000 from Binary to BCD, but BCD(V2000 + V3000) will add V2000 as BCD, to V3000
as BCD, then interpret the result as Binary and convert it to BCD - NOT GOOD.
Also, the final result is a 16-bit BCD number and so you could do BIN around the entire
operation to store the result as Binary.
MATHBCD Parameters
• Result (WORD): specifies the location where the BCD result of the mathematical expression will
be placed (result must fit into 16-bit single V-memory location).
• Expression: specifies the mathematical expression to be executed and the result is stored in specified
Result (WORD). Each V-memory location used in the expression must be in BCD format.
Parameter
WORD Result ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V
Expression⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
DL205 Range
See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
Text
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
MATHBCD Example
In the following example, the MATHBCD instruction is used to calculate the math expression
which multiplies the BCD value in V1200 by 1000, then divides by 4095 and loads the
resulting value in V2000 when C100 turns on.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-259
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Math - Binary (MATHBIN) (IB-501)
230
240
250-1
260
DS5 Used
HPP
N/A
5-260
Math - Binary Format lets you enter complex
mathematical expressions like you would in Visual
Basic, Excel, or C++ to do complex calculations,
nesting parentheses up to 4 levels deep. In addition
to + - * /, you can do Modulo (% aka Remainder),
Shift Right (>>) and Shift Left (<<), Bit-wise And
(&) Or (|) Xor (^), and some binary functions Convert to BCD (BCD), Convert to Binary (BIN),
Decode Bits (DECO), Encode Bits (ENCO), Invert
Bits (INV), HEX to Seven Segment Display (SEG),
and Sum Bits (SUM).
Example: ((V2000 + V2001) / (V2003 - K10)) * SUM(V3000 & K001F)
Every V-memory reference MUST be to a single-word binary formatted value. Intermediate
results can go up to 32-bit values, but as long as the final result fits in a 16-bit binary word,
the calculation is valid. Typical example of this is scaling using multiply then divide, (V2000
* K1000) / K4095. The multiply term most likely will exceed 65535 but fits within 32 bits.
The divide operation will divide 4095 into the 32-bit accumulator, yielding a result that will
always fit in 16 bits.
You can reference BCD V-memory values by using the BIN conversion function on a
V-memory location but NOT an expression. That is, BIN(V2000) is okay and will convert
V2000 from BCD to Binary, but BIN(V2000 + V3000) will add V2000 as Binary, to V3000
as Binary, then interpret the result as BCD and convert it to Binary - NOT GOOD.
Also, the final result is a 16-bit binary number and so you could do BCD around the entire
operation to store the result as BCD.
MATHBIN Parameters
• Result (WORD): specifies the location where the binary result of the mathematical expression will
be placed (result must fit into 16-bit single V-memory location).
• Expression: specifies the mathematical expression to be executed and the result is stored in specified
Result (WORD). Each V-memory location used in the expression must be in binary format.
Parameter
WORD Result ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V
Expression⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
DL205 Range
See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
Text
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
MATHBIN Example
In the following example, the MATHBIN instruction is used to calculate the math expression
which multiplies the Binary value in V1200 by 1000 then divides by 4095 and loads the
resulting value in V2000 when C100 turns on.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-261
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Math - Real (MATHR) (IB-541)
230
240
250-1
260
DS5 Used
HPP
N/A
5-262
Math - Real Format lets you enter complex
mathematical expressions like you would in
Visual Basic, Excel, or C++ to do complex
calculations, nesting parentheses up to 4 levels
deep. In addition to + - * /, you can do Bit-wise
And (&) Or (|) and Xor (^). The DL260 also
supports several Real functions - Arc Cosine
(ACOSR), Arc Sine (ASINR), Arc Tangent
(ATANR), Cosine (COSR), Convert Radians
to Degrees (DEGR), Invert Bits (INV), Convert
Degrees to Radians (RADR), HEX to Seven
Segment Display (SEG), Sine (SINR), Square
Root (SQRTR), and Tangent (TANR).
Example: ((V2000 + V2002) / (V2004 - R2.5)) * SINR(RADR(V3000 / R10.0))
Every V-memory reference MUST be able to fit into a double-word Real formatted value.
MATHR Parameters
• Result (DWORD): specifies the location where the Real result of the mathematical expression will
be placed (result must fit into a double-word Real formatted location).
• Expression: specifies the mathematical expression to be executed and the result is stored in specified
Result (DWORD) location. Each V-memory location used in the expression must be in Real
format.
Parameter
DWORD Result ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V
Expression⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠
DL205 Range
See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
Text
MATHR Example
In the following example, the MATHR instruction is used to calculate the math expression
which multiplies the REAL (floating point) value in V1200 by 10.5 then divides by 2.7 and
loads the resulting 32-bit value in V2000 and V2001 when C100 turns on.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
Real to BCD with Implied Decimal Point and Rounding (RTOBCD) (IB-561)
1
2
3
4
RTOBCD Parameters
5
•
Value (DWORD Real): specifies the Real
Dword location or number that will be
converted and rounded to a BCD number
6
with decimal points
•
Number of Decimal Points: specifies the
7
number of implied decimal points in the
Result WORD
• Result (WORD BCD): specifies the location
8
where the rounded/implied decimal points
BCD value will be placed
9
Parameter
DL205 Range
10
11
12
RTOBCD Example
In the following example, the RTOBCD instruction is used to convert the 32-bit REAL
(floating point) data format in V3000 and V3001 to the 4-digit BCD data format and store in 13
V2000 when C100 turns on.
K2 in the Number of Decimal Points implies the data will have two implied decimal points. 14
A
B
C
D
230
240
250-1
260
Real to BCD with Implied Decimal Point and Rounding converts the absolute value of the
given Real number to a 4-digit BCD number, compensating for an implied number of decimal
points (K0-K4) and performs rounding.
For example, RTOBCD R56.74 with an implied number of decimal points equal to K1, would
yield 567 BCD. If the implied number of decimal points was 0, then the function would yield
57 BCD (note that it rounded up).
If the Real number is negative, the Result will equal its positive, absolute value.
DS5 Used
HPP
N/A
Value (DWORD Real) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V,P,R
Number of Decimal Points ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K
Result (WORD BCD)⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V
R ; See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
K0-4
See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5-263
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Real to Double BCD with Implied Decimal Point and Rounding (RTOBCDD)
(IB-563)
230
240
250-1
260
DS5
Used
HPP
N/A
5-264
Real to Double BCD with Implied Decimal Point and Rounding converts the absolute value
of the given Real number to an 8-digit DWORD BCD number, compensating for an implied
number of decimal points (K0-K8) and performs rounding.
For example, RTOBCDD R38156.74 with an implied number of decimal points equal to K1,
would yield 381567 BCD. If the implied number of decimal points was 0, then the function
would yield 38157 BCD (note that it rounded up).
If the Real number is negative, the Result will equal its positive, absolute value.
RTOBCDD Parameters
• Value (DWORD Real): specifies the Dword
Real number that will be converted and
rounded to a BCD number with decimal
points
•
Number of Decimal Points: specifies the
number of implied decimal points in the
Result DWORD
• Result (DWORD BCD): specifies the location
where the rounded/implied decimal points
DWORD BCD value will be placed
Parameter
Value (DWORD Real) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V,P,R
Number of Decimal Points ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K
Result (DWORD BCD)⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V
DL205 Range
R ; See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
K0-8
See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
RTOBCDD Example
In the following example, the RTOBCDD instruction is used to convert the 32-bit REAL
(floating point) data format in V3000 and V3001 to the 8-digit BCD data format and store in
V2000 and V2001 when C100 turns on.
K2 in the Number of Decimal Points implies the data will have two implied decimal points.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
Square BCD (SQUARE) (IB-523)
1
2
SQUARE Parameters
•
Value (WORD BCD): specifies the BCD
3
Word or constant that will be squared
• Result (DWORD BCD): specifies the location
4
where the squared DWORD BCD value will
be placed
5
6
Parameter
DL205 Range
7
8
SQUARE Example
In the following example, the SQUARE instruction is used to square the 4-digit BCD value in 9
V2000 and store the 8-digit double word BCD result in V3000 and V3001 when C100 turns
on.
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
240
250-1
260
230
DS5
HPP
Square BCD squares the given 4-digit WORD BCD number and writes it as an 8-digit
DWORD BCD result.
Used
N/A
Value (WORD BCD) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,P,K
Result (DWORD BCD)⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V
K0-9999 ; See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5-265
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Square Binary (SQUAREB) (IB-503)
230
240
250-1
260
DS5
Used
HPP
N/A
5-266
Square Binary squares the given 16-bit WORD Binary number and writes it as a 32-bit
DWORD Binary result.
SQUAREB Parameters
• Value (WORD Binary): specifies the binary
Word or constant that will be squared
• Result (DWORD Binary): specifies the
location where the squared DWORD
binary value will be placed
Parameter
Value (WORD Binary) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,P,K
Result (DWORD Binary)⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V
DL205 Range
K0-65535; See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
SQUAREB Example
In the following example, the SQUAREB instruction is used to square the single-word Binary
value in V2000 and store the 8-digit double-word Binary result in V3000 and V3001 when
C100 turns on.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
Square Real (SQUARER) (IB-543)
1
2
SQUARER Parameters
• Value (REAL DWORD): specifies the Real
3
DWORD location or number that will be
squared
4
• Result (REAL DWORD): specifies the location
where the squared Real DWORD value will be
placed
5
6
Parameter
DL205 Range
7
8
SQUARER Example
In the following example, the SQUARER instruction is used to square the 32-bit floating point
9
REAL value in V2000 and V2001 and store the REAL value result in V3000 and V3001 when
C100 turns on.
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
230
240
250-1
260
DS5
HPP
Square Real squares the given REAL DWORD number and writes it to a REAL DWORD
result.
Used
N/A
Value (REAL DWORD) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V,P,R
Result (REAL DWORD)⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V
R ; See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5-267
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Sum BCD Numbers (SUMBCD) (IB-522)
230
240
250-1
260
DS5
Used
HPP
N/A
5-268
Sum BCD Numbers sums up a list of consecutive 4-digit WORD BCD numbers into an
8-digit DWORD BCD result.
You specify the group’s starting and ending V-memory addresses (inclusive). When enabled,
this instruction will add all the numbers in the group (so you may want to place a differential
contact driving the enable).
SUMBCD could be used as the first part of calculating an average.
SUMBCD Parameters
• Start Address: specifies the starting address
of a block of V-memory location values to
be added together (BCD)
• End Addr (inclusive): specifies the ending
address of a block of V-memory location
values to be added together (BCD)
• Result (DWORD BCD): specifies the
location where the sum of the block of
V-memory BCD values will be placed
Parameter
Start Address ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V
End Address (inclusive) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V
Result (DWORD BCD)⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V
DL205 Range
See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
SUMBCD Example
In the following example, the SUMBCD instruction is used to total the sum of all BCD values
in words V2000 thru V2007 and store the resulting 8-digit double word BCD value in V3000
and V3001 when C100 turns on.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
Sum Binary Numbers (SUMBIN) (IB-502)
1
2
3
4
SUMBIN Parameters
• Start Address: specifies the starting address
5
of a block of V-memory location values to
be added together (Binary)
• End Addr (inclusive): specifies the ending
6
address of a block of V-memory location
values to be added together (Binary)
7
• Result (DWORD Binary): specifies the
location where the sum of the block of
V-memory binary values will be placed
8
Parameter
DL205 Range
9
10
11
SUMBIN Example
In the following example, the SUMBIN instruction is used to total the sum of all Binary values 12
in words V2000 thru V2007 and store the resulting 8-digit double word Binary value in V3000
and V3001 when C100 turns on.
13
14
A
B
C
D
240
250-1
260
230
DS5
HPP
Sum Binary Numbers sums up a list of consecutive 16-bit WORD Binary numbers into a
32-bit DWORD binary result.
You specify the group’s starting and ending V-memory addresses (inclusive). When enabled,
this instruction will add all the numbers in the group (so you may want to place a differential
contact driving the enable).
SUMBIN could be used as the first part of calculating an average.
Used
N/A
Start Address ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V
End Address (inclusive) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V
Result (DWORD Binary)⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V
See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5-269
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Sum Real Numbers (SUMR) (IB-542)
230
240
250-1
260
DS5
Used
HPP
N/A
5-270
Sum Real Numbers sums up a list of consecutive REAL DWORD numbers into a REAL
DWORD result.
You specify the group’s starting and ending V-memory addresses (inclusive).
Remember that Real numbers are DWORDs and occupy 2 words of V-memory each, so the
number of Real values summed up is equal to half the number of memory locations. Note
that the End Address can be EITHER word of the 2 word ending address, for example, if you
wanted to add the 4 Real numbers stored in V2000 thru V2007 (V2000, V2002, V2004, and
V2006), you can specify V2006 OR V2007 for the ending address and you will get the same
result.
When enabled, this instruction will add all the numbers in the group (so you may want to place
a differential contact driving the enable).
SUMR could be used as the first part of calculating an average.
SUMR Parameters
• Start Address (DWORD): specifies the
starting address of a block of V-memory
location values to be added together (Real)
• End Addr (inclusive) (DWORD):
specifies the ending address of a block of
V-memory location values to be added
together (Real)
• Result (DWORD): specifies the location
where the sum of the block of V-memory
Real values will be placed
Parameter
Start Address (DWORD) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V
End Address (inclusive DWORD) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V
Result (DWORD)⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
DL205 Range
See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
SUMR Example
In the following example, the SUMR instruction is used to total the sum of all floating point
REAL number values in words V2000 thru V2007 and store the resulting 32-bit floating point
REAL number value in V3000 and V3001 when C100 turns on.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-271
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
ECOM100 Configuration (ECOM100) (IB-710)
230
240
250-1
260
DS5
Used
HPP
N/A
5-272
ECOM100 Configuration defines all the common information for one specific ECOM100
module which is used by the other ECOM100 IBoxes; for example, ECRX - ECOM100
Network Read, ECEMAIL - ECOM100 Send EMail, ECIPSUP - ECOM100 IP Setup, etc.
You MUST have the ECOM100 Configuration IBox at the top of your ladder/stage program
with any other configuration IBoxes. The Message Buffer parameter specifies the starting
address of a 65 WORD buffer. This is 101 Octal addresses (e.g., V1400 thru V1500).
If you have more than one ECOM100 in your PLC, you must have a different ECOM100
Configuration IBox for EACH ECOM100 module in your system that utilizes any ECOM
IBox instructions.
The Workspace and Status parameters and the entire Message Buffer are internal, private
registers used by the ECOM100 Configuration IBox and MUST BE UNIQUE in this one
instruction and MUST NOT be used anywhere else in your program.
In order for MOST ECOM100 IBoxes to function, you must turn ON dip switch 7 on the
ECOM100 circuit board. You can keep dip switch 7 off if you are ONLY using ECOM100
Network Read and Write IBoxes (ECRX, ECWX).
ECOM100 Parameters
•
ECOM100#: this is a logical number
associated with this specific ECOM100
module in the specified slot. All other
ECxxxx IBoxes that need to reference this
ECOM100 module must reference this
logical number.
• Slot: specifies which PLC slot is occupied by
the ECOM100 module.
• Status: specifies a V-memory location that
will be used by the instruction.
• Workspace: specifies a V-memory location
that will be used by the instruction.
• Msg Buffer: specifies the starting address of a 65-word buffer that will be used by the module for
configuration.
Parameter
ECOM100# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K
Slot ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K
Status ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V
Workspace ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V
Msg Buffer (65 words used)⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
DL205 Range
K0-255
K0-7
See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
ECOM100 Example
The ECOM100 Config IBox coordinates all of the interaction with other ECOM100-based
IBoxes (ECxxxx). You must have an ECOM100 Config IBox for each ECOM100 module
in your system. Configuration IBoxes must be at the top of your program and must execute
every scan.
This IBox defines ECOM100# K0 to be in slot 3. Any ECOM100 IBoxes that need to
reference this specific module (such as ECEMAIL, ECRX, ...) would enter K0 for their
ECOM100# parameter.
The Status register is for reporting any completion or error information to other ECOM100
IBoxes. This V-memory register must not be used anywhere else in the entire program.
The Workspace register is used to maintain state information about the ECOM100, along
with proper sharing and interlocking with the other ECOM100 IBoxes in the program. This
V-memory register must not be used anywhere else in the entire program.
The Message Buffer of 65 words (130 bytes) is a common pool of memory that is used by
other ECOM100 IBoxes (such as ECEMAIL). This way, you can have a bunch of ECEMAIL
IBoxes, but only need 1 common buffer for generating and sending each EMail. These
V-memory registers must not be used anywhere else in your entire program.
No permissive contact or input logic is
used with this instruction
NOTE: An ECOM100 IBox instruction is used without a permissive contact. The top line will be identified in
BOLD italics, and the instruction name and ID will be in BOLD characters.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-273
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
ECOM100 Disable DHCP (ECDHCPD) (IB-736)
230
240
250-1
260
DS5
Used
HPP
N/A
5-274
ECOM100 Disable DHCP will set up the ECOM100 to use its internal TCP/IP settings on a
leading edge transition to the IBox. To configure the ECOM100’s TCP/IP settings manually,
use the NetEdit3 utility, or you can do it programmatically from your PLC program using
the ECOM100 IP Setup (ECIPSUP), or the individual ECOM100 IBoxes: ECOM Write IP
Address (ECWRIP), ECOM Write Gateway Address (ECWRGWA), and ECOM100 Write
Subnet Mask (ECWRSNM).
The Workspace parameter is an internal, private register used by this IBox and MUST BE
UNIQUE in this one instruction and MUST NOT be used anywhere else in your program.
Either the Success or Error bit parameter will turn on once the command is complete. If there
is an error, the Error Code parameter will report an ECOM100 error code (less than 100), or
a PLC logic error (greater than 1000).
The “Disable DHCP” setting is stored in Flash-ROM in the ECOM100 and the execution
of this IBox will disable the ECOM100 module for at least a half second until it writes the
Flash-ROM. Therefore, it is HIGHLY RECOMMENDED that you only execute this IBox
ONCE, on the second scan. Since it requires a LEADING edge to execute, use a NORMALLY
CLOSED SP0 (STR NOT First Scan) to drive the power flow to the IBox.
In order for this ECOM100 IBox to function, you must turn ON dip switch 7 on the
ECOM100 circuit board.
ECDHCPD Parameters
• ECOM100#: this is a logical number associated with
this specific ECOM100 module in the specified
slot. All other ECxxxx IBoxes that need to reference
this ECOM100 module must reference this logical
number
• Workspace: specifies a V-memory location that will
be used by the instruction
• Success: specifies a bit that will turn on once the
request is completed successfully
• Error: specifies a bit that will turn on if the
instruction is not completed successfully
• Error Code: specifies the location where the Error
Code will be written
Parameter
ECOM100# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K
Workspace ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V
Success ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B
Error ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B
Error Code⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
DL205 Range
K0-255
See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
See DL205 V-memory map
See DL205 V-memory map
See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
ECDHCPD Example
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
NOTE: An ECOM100 IBox instruction is used without a permissive contact. The top line will be identified in
BOLD italics, and the instruction name and ID will be in BOLD characters.
9
Rung 2: On the 2nd scan, disable DHCP in the ECOM100. DHCP is the same protocol used
by PCs for using a DHCP Server to automatically assign the ECOM100’s IP Address, Gateway 10
Address, and Subnet Mask. Typically disabling DHCP is done by assigning a hard-coded IP
Address either in NetEdit or using one of the ECOM100 IP Setup IBoxes, but this IBox allows 11
you to disable DHCP in the ECOM100 using your ladder program. The ECDHCPD is
leading edge triggered, not power-flow driven (similar to a counter input leg). The command
to disable DHCP will be sent to the ECOM100 whenever the power flow into the IBox goes 12
from OFF to ON. If successful, turn on C100. If there is a failure, turn on C101. If it fails,
you can look at V2000 for the specific error code.
13
14
A
B
C
D
Rung 1: The ECOM100 Config IBox is responsible for coordination/interlocking of all
ECOM100 type IBoxes for one specific ECOM100 module. Tag the ECOM100 in slot 1 as
ECOM100# K0. All other ECxxxx IBoxes refer to this module # as K0. If you need to move
the module in the base to a different slot, then you only need to change this one IBox. V400 is
used as a global result status register for the other ECxxxx IBoxes using this specific ECOM100
module. V401 is used to coordinate/interlock the logic in all of the other ECxxxx IBoxes using
this specific ECOM100 module. V402-V502 is a common 130-byte buffer available for use
by the other ECxxxx IBoxes using this specific ECOM100 module.
ECOM100 Config
1
ECOM100
ECOM100#
Slot
Status
Workspace
Msg Buffer (65 WORDs)
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
IB-710
K0
K1
V400
V401
V402-502
5-275
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
ECOM100 Enable DHCP (ECDHCPE) (IB-735)
230
240
250-1
260
DS5
Used
HPP
N/A
5-276
ECOM100 Enable DHCP will tell the ECOM100 to obtain its TCP/IP setup from a DHCP
Server on a leading edge transition to the IBox.
The IBox will be successful once the ECOM100 has received its TCP/IP settings from the
DHCP server. Since it is possible for the DHCP server to be unavailable, a Timeout parameter
is provided so that the IBox can complete, but with an Error (Error Code = 1004 decimal).
See also the ECOM100 IP Setup (ECIPSUP) IBox 717 to directly set up ALL of the TCP/IP
parameters in a single instruction - IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Gateway Address.
The Workspace parameter is an internal, private register used by this IBox and MUST BE
UNIQUE in this one instruction and MUST NOT be used anywhere else in your program.
Either the Success or Error bit parameter will turn on once the command is complete. If there
is an error, the Error Code parameter will report an ECOM100 error code (less than 100), or
a PLC logic error (greater than 1000).
The “Enable DHCP” setting is stored in Flash-ROM in the ECOM100 and the execution
of this IBox will disable the ECOM100 module for at least a half second until it writes the
Flash-ROM. Therefore, it is HIGHLY RECOMMENDED that you only execute this IBox
ONCE, on the second scan. Since it requires a LEADING edge to execute, use a NORMALLY
CLOSED SP0 (STR NOT First Scan) to drive the power flow to the IBox.
In order for this ECOM100 IBox to function, you must turn ON dip switch 7 on the
ECOM100 circuit board.
ECDHCPE Parameters
•
ECOM100#: this is a logical number associated
with this specific ECOM100 module in the specified
slot. All other ECxxxx IBoxes that need to reference
this ECOM100 module must reference this logical
number.
• Timeout(sec): specifies a timeout period so that the
instruction may have time to complete.
• Workspace: specifies a V-memory location that will
be used by the instruction.
• Success: specifies a bit that will turn on once the
request is completed successfully.
• Error: specifies a bit that will turn on if the instruction is not completed successfully.
• Error Code: specifies the location where the Error Code will be written.
Parameter
ECOM100# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K
Timeout (sec) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K
Workspace ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V
Success ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B
Error ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B
Error Code⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
DL205 Range
K0-255
K5-127
See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
See DL205 V-memory map
See DL205 V-memory map
See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
ECDHCPE Example
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
NOTE: An ECOM100 IBox instruction is used without a permissive contact. The top line will be identified in
BOLD italics, and the instruction name and ID will be in BOLD characters.
9
Rung 2: On the second scan, enable DHCP in the ECOM100. DHCP is the same protocol
used by PCs for using a DHCP Server to automatically assign the ECOM100’s IP Address, 10
Gateway Address, and Subnet Mask. Typically this is done using NetEdit, but this IBox
allows you to enable DHCP in the ECOM100 using your ladder program. The ECDHCPE is 11
leading edge triggered, not power-flow driven (similar to a counter input leg). The commands
to enable DHCP will be sent to the ECOM100 whenever the power flow into the IBox goes
from OFF to ON. The ECDHCPE does more than just set the bit to enable DHCP in the 12
ECOM100, it polls the ECOM100 once every second to see if the ECOM100 has found a
DHCP server and has a valid IP Address. Therefore, a timeout parameter is needed in case the 13
ECOM100 cannot find a DHCP server. If a timeout does occur, the Error bit will turn on and
the error code will be 1005 decimal. The Success bit will turn on only if the ECOM100 finds
a DHCP Server and is assigned a valid IP Address. If successful, turn on C100. If there is a 14
failure, turn on C101. If it fails, you can look at V2000 for the specific error code.
A
B
C
D
Rung 1: The ECOM100 Config IBox is responsible for coordination/interlocking of all
ECOM100 type IBoxes for one specific ECOM100 module. Tag the ECOM100 in slot 1 as
ECOM100# K0. All other ECxxxx IBoxes refer to this module # as K0. If you need to move
the module in the base to a different slot, then you only need to change this one IBox. V400 is
used as a global result status register for the other ECxxxx IBoxes using this specific ECOM100
module.V401 is used to coordinate/interlock the logic in all of the other ECxxxx IBoxes using
this specific ECOM100 module. V402-V502 is a common 130-byte buffer available for use
by the other ECxxxx IBoxes using this specific ECOM100 module.
ECOM100 Config
1
ECOM100
ECOM100#
Slot
Status
Workspace
Msg Buffer (65 WORDs)
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
IB-710
K0
K1
V400
V401
V402-502
5-277
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
ECOM100 Query DHCP Setting (ECDHCPQ) (IB-734)
230
240
250-1
260
DS5
Used
HPP
N/A
5-278
ECOM100 Query DHCP Setting will determine if DHCP is enabled in the ECOM100 on a
leading edge transition to the IBox. The DHCP Enabled bit parameter will be ON if DHCP
is enabled, OFF if disabled.
The Workspace parameter is an internal, private register used by this IBox and MUST BE
UNIQUE in this one instruction and MUST NOT be used anywhere else in your program.
Either the Success or Error bit parameter will turn on once the command is complete.
In order for this ECOM100 IBox to function, you must turn ON dip switch 7 on the
ECOM100 circuit board.
ECDHCPQ Parameters
• ECOM100#: this is a logical number associated
with this specific ECOM100 module in the
specified slot. All other ECxxxx IBoxes that
need to reference this ECOM100 module must
reference this logical number.
• Workspace: specifies a V-memory location that
will be used by the instruction.
• Success: specifies a bit that will turn on once the
instruction is completed successfully.
• Error: specifies a bit that will turn on if the
instruction is not completed successfully.
• DHCP Enabled: specifies a bit that will turn on if the ECOM100’s DHCP is enabled or remain
off if disabled - after instruction query, be sure to check the state of the Success/Error bit state along
with DHCP Enabled bit state to confirm a successful module query.
Parameter
ECOM100# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K
Workspace ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V
Success ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B
Error ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B
DHCP Enabled⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
DL205 Range
K0-255
See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
See DL205 V-memory map
See DL205 V-memory map
See DL205 V-memory map
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
ECDHCPQ Example
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
NOTE: An ECOM100 IBox instruction is used without a permissive contact. The top line will be identified in
BOLD italics, and the instruction name and ID will be in BOLD characters.
9
Rung 2: On the second scan, read whether DHCP is enabled or disabled in the ECOM100
and store it in C5. DHCP is the same protocol used by PCs for using a DHCP Server to 10
automatically assign the ECOM100’s IP Address, Gateway Address, and Subnet Mask. The
ECDHCPQ is leading edge triggered, not power-flow driven (similar to a counter input leg). 11
The command to read (Query) whether DHCP is enabled or not will be sent to the ECOM100
whenever the power flow into the IBox goes from OFF to ON. If successful, turn on C100. If
12
there is a failure, turn on C101.
13
14
A
B
C
D
Rung 1: The ECOM100 Config IBox is responsible for coordination/interlocking of all
ECOM100 type IBoxes for one specific ECOM100 module. Tag the ECOM100 in slot 1 as
ECOM100# K0. All other ECxxxx IBoxes refer to this module # as K0. If you need to move
the module in the base to a different slot, then you only need to change this one IBox. V400 is
used as a global result status register for the other ECxxxx IBoxes using this specific ECOM100
module.V401 is used to coordinate/interlock the logic in all of the other ECxxxx IBoxes using
this specific ECOM100 module. V402-V502 is a common 130-byte buffer available for use
by the other ECxxxx IBoxes using this specific ECOM100 module.
ECOM100 Config
1
ECOM100
ECOM100#
Slot
Status
Workspace
Msg Buffer (65 WORDs)
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
IB-710
K0
K1
V400
V401
V402-502
5-279
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
ECOM100 Send E-mail (ECEMAIL) (IB-711)
230
240
250-1
260
DS5
Used
HPP
N/A
5-280
ECOM100 Send EMail, on a leading edge transition, will behave as an EMail client and send
an SMTP request to your SMTP Server to send the EMail message to the EMail addresses
in the To: field and also to those listed in the
Cc: list hard coded in the ECOM100. It will
send the SMTP request based on the specified
ECOM100#, which corresponds to a specific
unique ECOM100 Configuration (ECOM100)
at the top of your program.
The Body: field supports what the PRINT and
VPRINT instructions support for text and
embedded variables, allowing you to embed
real-time data in your EMail (e.g., “V2000 = “
V2000:B).
The Workspace parameter is an internal, private
register used by this IBox and MUST BE
UNIQUE in this one instruction and MUST
NOT be used anywhere else in your program.
Either the Success or Error bit parameter will turn on once the request is complete. If there
is an error, the Error Code parameter will report an ECOM100 error code (less than 100),
an SMPT protocol error (between 100 and 999), or a PLC logic error (greater than 1000).
Since the ECOM100 is only an EMail Client and requires access to an SMTP Server, you
MUST have the SMTP parameters configured properly in the ECOM100 via the ECOM100’s
Home Page and/or the EMail Setup instruction (ECEMSUP). To get to the ECOM100’s
Home Page, use your favorite Internet browser and browse to the ECOM100’s IP Address,
e.g., http://192.168.12.86
You are limited to approximately 100 characters of message data for the entire instruction,
including the To: Subject: and Body: fields. To save space, the ECOM100 supports a hard
coded list of EMail addresses for the Carbon Copy field (cc:) so that you can configure those
IN the ECOM100, and keep the To: field small (or even empty), to leave more room for the
Subject: and Body: fields.
In order for this ECOM100 IBox to function, you must turn ON dip switch 7 on the
ECOM100 circuit board.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
ECEMAIL Parameters
• ECOM100#: this is a logical number associated with this specific ECOM100 module in the
specified slot. All other ECxxxx IBoxes that need to reference this ECOM100 module must
reference this logical number
• Workspace: specifies a V-memory location that will be used by the instruction
• Success: specifies a bit that will turn on once the request is completed successfully
• Error: specifies a bit that will turn on if the instruction is not completed successfully
• Error Code: specifies the location where the Error Code will be written
• To: specifies an E-mail address that the message will be sent to
• Subject: subject of the e-mail message
• Body: supports what the PRINT and VPRINT instructions support for text and embedded
variables, allowing you to embed real-time data in the EMail message
Parameter
DL205 Range
ECOM100# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K
Workspace ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V
Success ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B
Error ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B
Error Code⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V
To:⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠
Subject:⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠
Body:⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠
K0-255
See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
See DL205 V-memory map
See DL205 V-memory map
See DL205 V-memory map
Text
Text
See PRINT and VPRINT instructions
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-281
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
ECEMAIL Decimal Status Codes
This list of status codes is based on the list in the ECOM100 Mock Slave Address 89 Command
Specification.
ECOM100 Status codes can be classified into four different areas based on its decimal value.
0-1
2-99
100-999
1000+
ECOM100 Status Code Areas
Normal Status - no error
Internal ECOM100 errors
Standard TCP/IP protocol errors (SMTP, HTTP, etc)
IBox ladder logic assigned errors (SP Slot Error, etc)
For the ECOM100 Send EMail IBOX, the status codes below are specific to this IBox.
Normal Status 0 - 1
0-1
1
ECOMM100 Send EMAIL IBOX Status Codes
Success - ECEMAIL completed successfully.
Busy - ECEMAIL IBOX logic sets the Error register to this value when the ECEMAIL starts a new request.
Internal ECOM100 Errors (2-99)
10-19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Internal ECOM 100 Errors (2-99)
Timeout Errors - last digit shows where in ECOM100’s SMTP state logic the timeout occurred; regardless of
the last digit, the SMTP conversation with the SMTP Server timed out.
SMTP Internal Errors (20-29)
TCP Write Error
No Sendee
Invalid State
Invalid Data
Invalid SMTP Configuration
Memory Allocation Error
ECEMAIL IBox Ladder Logic Assigned Errors (1000+)
101
5-282
ECEMAIL IBox Ladder Logic Assigned Errors (1000+)
SP Slot Error - the SP error bit for the ECOM100’s slot turned on. Possibly using RX or WX instructions on the
ECOM100 and walking on the ECEMAIL execution. Use should use ECRX and ECX IBoxes,
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
ECEMAIL Decimal Status Codes
SMTP Protocol Errors - SMTP (100-999)
Error
1xx
2xx
200
211
214
220
221
250
251
252
253
3xx
354
355
4xx
421
432
450
451
452
453
454
458
459
5xx
500
501
502
503
504
521
530
SMTP Protocol Errors - SMTP (100-999)
Description
Informational replies
Success replies
(Non-standard success response)
System status or system help reply
Help message
Service ready. Ready to start TLS
Service closing transmission channel
Ok, queuing for node started. Requested mail action okay, completed
Ok, no messages waiting for node . User not local; will forward to
OK, pending messages for node started. Cannot VRFY user (e.g., info is not local),
but will take message for this user and attempt delivery.
OK, messages pending messages for node started
(re) direction replies
Start mail input; end with .
Octet-offset is the transaction offset.
client/request error replies
Service not available, closing transmission channel
A password transition is needed
Requested mail action not taken: mailbox unavailable. ATRN request refused.
Requested action aborted; local error in processing. Unable to process ATRN request now.
Requested action not taken: insufficient system storage
You have no mail
TLS is not available due to temporary reason. Encryption required for requested
authentication mechanism.
Unable to queue messages for node
Node not allowed:
Server/process error replies
Syntax error, command unrecognized. Syntax error.
Syntax error in parameters or arguments
Command not implemented
Bad sequence of commands
Command parameter not implemented
does not accept mail
Access denied. Must issue a STARTTLS command first. Encryption required for requested
authentication mechanism.
Continued next page
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-283
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Error
534
538
550
551
552
553
554
5-284
SMTP Protocol Errors - SMTP (100-999)
Description
Authentication mechanism is too weak.
Encryption required for requested authentication mechanism.
Requested action not taken; mailbox unavailable.
User not local; please try
Requested mail action aborted; exceeded storage allocation
Requested action not taken; mailbox name not allowed.
Transaction failed
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
ECEMAIL Example
Rung 1: The ECOM100 Config IBox is responsible for coordination/interlocking of all
ECOM100 type IBoxes for one specific ECOM100 module. Tag the ECOM100 in slot 1 as
ECOM100# K0. All other ECxxxx IBoxes refer to this module # as K0. If you need to move
the module in the base to a different slot, then you only need to change this one IBox. V400 is
used as a global result status register for the other ECxxxx IBoxes using this specific ECOM100
module.V401 is used to coordinate/interlock the logic in all of the other ECxxxx IBoxes using
this specific ECOM100 module. V402-V502 is a common 130-byte buffer available for use by
the other ECxxxx IBoxes using this specific ECOM100 module.
1
2
3
NOTE: An ECOM100 IBox instruction is used without a permissive contact. The top line will be identified in
4
BOLD italics, and the instruction name and ID will be in BOLD characters.
5
6
7
8
Rung 2: When a machine goes down, send an email to Joe in maintenance and to the VP over 9
production showing what machine is down along with the date/time stamp of when it went
down.
10
The ECEMAIL is leading edge triggered, not power-flow driven (similar to a counter input
leg). An email will be sent whenever the power flow into the IBox goes from OFF to ON. This
11
helps prevent self-inflicted spamming.
If the EMail is sent, turn on C100. If there is a failure, turn on C101. If it fails, you can look
at V2000 for the SMTP error code or other possible error codes.
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
ECOM100 Config
1
ECOM100
ECOM100#
Slot
Status
Workspace
Msg Buffer (65 WORDs)
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
IB-710
K0
K1
V400
V401
V402-502
5-285
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
ECOM100 Restore Default E-mail Setup (ECEMRDS) (IB-713)
230
240
250-1
260
DS5
Used
HPP
N/A
5-286
ECOM100 Restore Default EMail Setup, on a leading edge transition, will restore the original
EMail Setup data stored in the ECOM100 back to the working copy based on the specified
ECOM100#, which corresponds to a
specific unique ECOM100 Configuration
(ECOM100) at the top of your program.
When the ECOM100 is first powered up,
it copies the EMail setup data stored in
ROM to the working copy in RAM. You
can then modify this working copy from
your program using the ECOM100 EMail
Setup (ECEMSUP) IBox. After modifying
the working copy, you can later restore the
original setup data via your program by using
this IBox.
The Workspace parameter is an internal, private register used by this IBox and MUST BE
UNIQUE in this one instruction and MUST NOT be used anywhere else in your program.
Either the Success or Error bit parameter will turn on once the command is complete. If there
is an error, the Error Code parameter will report an ECOM100 error code (less than 100), or
a PLC logic error (greater than 1000).
In order for this ECOM100 IBox to function, you must turn ON dip switch 7 on the
ECOM100 circuit board.
ECEMRDS Parameters
• ECOM100#: this is a logical number associated with this specific ECOM100 module in the
specified slot. All other ECxxxx IBoxes that need to reference this ECOM100 module must
reference this logical number
• Workspace: specifies a V-memory location that will be used by the instruction
• Success: specifies a bit that will turn on once the request is completed successfully
• Error: specifies a bit that will turn on if the instruction is not completed successfully
• Error Code: specifies the location where the Error Code will be written
Parameter
ECOM100# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K
Workspace ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V
Success ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B
Error ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B
Error Code⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
DL205 Range
K0-255
See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
See DL205 V-memory map
See DL205 V-memory map
See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
ECEMRDS Example
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
NOTE: An ECOM100 IBox instruction is used without a permissive contact. The top line will be identified in
BOLD italics, and the instruction name and ID will be in BOLD characters.
9
Rung 2: Whenever an EStop is pushed, ensure that the president of the company gets copies
10
of all Emails being sent.
The ECOM100 EMail Setup IBox allows you to set/change the SMTP Email settings stored
in the ECOM100.
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Rung 1: The ECOM100 Config IBox is responsible for coordination/interlocking of all
ECOM100 type IBoxes for one specific ECOM100 module. Tag the ECOM100 in slot 1 as
ECOM100# K0. All other ECxxxx IBoxes refer to this module # as K0. If you need to move
the module in the base to a different slot, then you only need to change this one IBox. V400 is
used as a global result status register for the other ECxxxx IBoxes using this specific ECOM100
module.V401 is used to coordinate/interlock the logic in all of the other ECxxxx IBoxes using
this specific ECOM100 module. V402-V502 is a common 130-byte buffer available for use
by the other ECxxxx IBoxes using this specific ECOM100 module.
ECOM100 Config
1
ECOM100
ECOM100#
Slot
Status
Workspace
Msg Buffer (65 WORDs)
IB-710
K0
K1
V400
V401
V402-502
(Example continued on next page)
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5-287
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-288
ECEMRDS Example (cont’d)
Rung 3: Once the EStop is pulled out, take the president off the cc: list by restoring the default
EMail setup in the ECOM100.
The ECEMRDS is leading edge triggered, not power-flow driven (similar to a counter input
leg). The ROM-based EMail configuration stored in the ECOM100 will be copied over the
“working copy” whenever the power flow into the IBox goes from OFF to ON (the working
copy can be changed by using the ECEMSUP IBox).
If successful, turn on C102. If there is a failure, turn on C103. If it fails, you can look at
V2001 for the specific error code.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
ECOM100 E-mail Setup (ECEMSUP) (IB-712)
240
250-1
260
230
DS5
Used
HPP
N/A
ECOM100 EMail Setup, on a leading edge transition, will modify the working copy of the
EMail setup currently in the ECOM100 based on the specified ECOM100#, which corresponds
to a specific unique ECOM100 Configuration
(ECOM100) at the top of your program.
You may pick and choose any or all fields to
be modified using this instruction. Note that
these changes are cumulative: if you execute
multiple ECOM100 EMail Setup IBoxes,
then all of the changes are made in the order
they are executed. Also note that you can
restore the original ECOM100 EMail Setup
that is stored in the ECOM100 to the working
copy by using the ECOM100 Restore Default
EMail Setup (ECEMRDS) IBox.
The Workspace parameter is an internal, private register used by this IBox and MUST BE
UNIQUE in this one instruction and MUST NOT be used anywhere else in your program.
Either the Success or Error bit parameter will turn on once the command is complete. If there
is an error, the Error Code parameter will report an ECOM100 error code (less than 100), or
a PLC logic error (greater than 1000).
You are limited to approximately 100 characters/bytes of setup data for the entire instruction.
So if needed, you could divide the entire setup across multiple ECEMSUP IBoxes on a fieldby-field basis, for example do the Carbon Copy (cc:) field in one ECEMSUP IBox and the
remaining setup parameters in another.
In order for this ECOM100 IBox to function, you must turn ON dip switch 7 on the
ECOM100 circuit board.
ECEMSUP Parameters
• ECOM100#: this is a logical number associated with this specific ECOM100 module in the
specified slot. All other ECxxxx IBoxes that need to reference this ECOM100 module must
reference this logical number.
• Workspace: specifies a V-memory location that will be used by the instruction.
• Success: specifies a bit that will turn on once the request is completed successfully.
• Error: specifies a bit that will turn on if the instruction is not completed successfully.
• Error Code: specifies the location where the Error Code will be written.
• SMTP Server IP Addr: optional parameter that specifies the IP Address of the SMTP Server on the
ECOM100’s network.
• Sender Name: optional parameter that specifies the sender name that will appear in the “From:”
field to those who receive the e-mail.
• Sender EMail: optional parameter that specifies the sender EMail address that will appear in the
“From:” field to those who receive the e-mail.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-289
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
ECEMSUP Parameters (cont’d)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-290
• Port Number: optional parameter that specifies the TCP/IP Port Number to send SMTP requests;
usually this does not need to be configured (see your network administrator for information on this
setting).
• Timeout (sec): optional parameter that specifies the number of seconds to wait for the SMTP Server
to send the EMail to all the recipients.
• Cc: optional parameter that specifies a list of “carbon copy” Email addresses to send all EMails to.
Parameter
ECOM100# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K
Workspace ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V
Success ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B
Error ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B
Error Code⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
DL205 Range
K0-255
See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
See DL205 V-memory map
See DL205 V-memory map
See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
ECEMSUP Example
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
NOTE: An ECOM100 IBox instruction is used without a permissive contact. The top line will be identified in 9
BOLD italics, and the instruction name and ID will be in BOLD characters.
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Rung 1: The ECOM100 Config IBox is responsible for coordination/interlocking of all
ECOM100 type IBoxes for one specific ECOM100 module. Tag the ECOM100 in slot 1 as
ECOM100# K0. All other ECxxxx IBoxes refer to this module # as K0. If you need to move
the module in the base to a different slot, then you only need to change this one IBox. V400 is
used as a global result status register for the other ECxxxx IBoxes using this specific ECOM100
module.V401 is used to coordinate/interlock the logic in all of the other ECxxxx IBoxes using
this specific ECOM100 module. V402-V502 is a common 130-byte buffer available for use
by the other ECxxxx IBoxes using this specific ECOM100 module.
ECOM100 Config
1
ECOM100
ECOM100#
Slot
Status
Workspace
Msg Buffer (65 WORDs)
IB-710
K0
K1
V400
V401
V402-502
(Example continued on next page)
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5-291
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-292
ECEMSUP Example (cont’d)
Rung 2: Whenever an EStop is pushed, ensure that president of the company gets copies
of all EMails being sent.The ECOM100 EMail Setup IBox allows you to set/change the
SMTP EMail settings stored in the ECOM100. The ECEMSUP is leading edge triggered,
not power-flow driven (similar to a counter input leg). At power-up, the ROM-based EMail
configuration stored in the ECOM100 is copied to a RAM-based “working copy”. You can
change this working copy by using the ECEMSUP IBox. To restore the original ROM-based
configuration, use the Restore Default EMail Setup ECEMRDS IBox.
If successful, turn on C100. If there is a failure, turn on C101. If it fails, you can look at
V2000 for the specific error code.
Rung 3: Once the EStop is pulled out, take the president off the cc: list by restoring the default
EMail setup in the ECOM100.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
ECOM100 IP Setup (ECIPSUP) (IB-717)
240
250-1
260
230
DS5
Used
HPP
N/A
ECOM100 IP Setup will configure the three TCP/IP parameters in the ECOM100: IP Address,
Subnet Mask, and Gateway Address, on a leading edge transition to the IBox. The ECOM100
is specified by the ECOM100#, which corresponds
to a specific unique ECOM100 Configuration
(ECOM100) IBox at the top of your program.
The Workspace parameter is an internal, private
register used by this IBox and MUST BE UNIQUE
in this one instruction and MUST NOT be used
anywhere else in your program.
Either the Success or Error bit parameter will turn on
once the command is complete. If there is an error,
the Error Code parameter will report an ECOM100
error code (less than 100), or a PLC logic error
(greater than 1000).
This setup data is stored in Flash-ROM in the ECOM100 and will disable the ECOM100
module for at least a half second until it writes the Flash-ROM. Therefore, it is HIGHLY
RECOMMENDED that you only execute this IBox ONCE on the second scan. Since it
requires a LEADING edge to execute, use a NORMALLY CLOSED SP0 (NOT First Scan)
to drive the power flow to the IBox.
In order for this ECOM100 IBox to function, you must turn ON dip switch 7 on the
ECOM100 circuit board.
ECIPSUP Parameters
• ECOM100#: this is a logical number associated with this specific ECOM100 module in the
specified slot. All other ECxxxx IBoxes that need to reference this ECOM100 module must
reference this logical number.
• Workspace: specifies a V-memory location that will be used by the instruction.
• Success: specifies a bit that will turn on once the request is completed successfully.
• Error: specifies a bit that will turn on if the instruction is not completed successfully.
• Error Code: specifies the location where the Error Code will be written.
• IP Address: specifies the module’s IP Address.
• Subnet Mask: specifies the Subnet Mask for the module to use.
• Gateway Address: specifies the Gateway Address for the module to use.
Parameter
DL205 Range
ECOM100# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K
Workspace ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V
Success ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B
Error ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B
Error Code⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V
IP Address⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠IP Address
Subnet Mask Address⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠IP Address Mask
Gateway Address⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠IP Address
K0-255
See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
See DL205 V-memory map
See DL205 V-memory map
See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
0.0.0.1. to 255.255.255.254
0.0.0.1. to 255.255.255.254
0.0.0.1. to 255.255.255.254
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-293
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-294
ECIPSUP Example
Rung 1: The ECOM100 Config IBox is responsible for coordination/interlocking of all
ECOM100 type IBoxes for one specific ECOM100 module. Tag the ECOM100 in slot 1 as
ECOM100# K0. All other ECxxxx IBoxes refer to this module # as K0. If you need to move
the module in the base to a different slot, then you only need to change this one IBox. V400 is
used as a global result status register for the other ECxxxx IBoxes using this specific ECOM100
module. V401 is used to coordinate/interlock the logic in all of the other ECxxxx IBoxes using
this specific ECOM100 module. V402-V502 is a common 130-byte buffer available for use
by the other ECxxxx IBoxes using this specific ECOM100 module.
ECOM100 Config
ECOM100
ECOM100#
Slot
Status
Workspace
Msg Buffer (65 WORDs)
1
IB-710
K0
K1
V400
V401
V402-502
NOTE: An ECOM100 IBox instruction is used without a permissive contact. The top line will be identified in
BOLD italics, and the instruction name and ID will be in BOLD characters.
Rung 2: On the second scan, configure all of the TCP/IP parameters in the ECOM100:
IP Address:
192.168.12.100
Subnet Mask:
255.255.0.0
Gateway Address: 192.168.0.1
The ECIPSUP is leading edge triggered, not power-flow driven (similar to a counter input leg).
The command to write the TCP/IP configuration parameters will be sent to the ECOM100
whenever the power flow into the IBox goes from OFF to ON.
If successful, turn on C100. If there is a failure, turn on C101. If it fails, you can look at
V2000 for the specific error code.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
ECOM100 Read Description (ECRDDES) (IB-726)
230
240
250-1
260
DS5
Used
HPP
N/A
1
2
3
4
5
6
ECRDDES Parameters
• ECOM100#: this is a logical number associated with this specific ECOM100 module in the
7
specified slot. All other ECxxxx IBoxes that need to reference this ECOM100 module must
reference this logical number
8
• Workspace: specifies a V-memory location that will be used by the instruction
• Success: specifies a bit that will turn on once the request is completed successfully
9
• Error: specifies a bit that will turn on if the instruction is not successfully completed
• Description: specifies the starting buffer location where the ECOM100’s Description will be placed
• Num Chars: specifies the number of characters (bytes) to read from the ECOM100’s Description 10
field
11
Parameter
DL205 Range
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
ECOM100 Read Description will read the ECOM100’s Description field up to the number of
specified characters on a leading edge transition to the IBox.
The Workspace parameter is an internal, private
register used by this IBox and MUST BE UNIQUE
in this one instruction and MUST NOT be used
anywhere else in your program.
Either the Success or Error bit parameter will turn
on once the command is complete.
In order for this ECOM100 IBox to function, you
must turn ON dip switch 7 on the ECOM100
circuit board.
ECOM100# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K
Workspace ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V
Success ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B
Error ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B
Description ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V
Num Chars⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K
K0-255
See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
See DL205 V-memory map
See DL205 V-memory map
See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
K1-128
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5-295
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-296
ECRDDES Example
Rung 1: The ECOM100 Config IBox is responsible for coordination/interlocking of all
ECOM100 type IBoxes for one specific ECOM100 module. Tag the ECOM100 in slot 1 as
ECOM100# K0. All other ECxxxx IBoxes refer to this module # as K0. If you need to move
the module in the base to a different slot, then you only need to change this one IBox. V400 is
used as a global result status register for the other ECxxxx IBoxes using this specific ECOM100
module. V401 is used to coordinate/interlock the logic in all of the other ECxxxx IBoxes using
this specific ECOM100 module. V402-V502 is a common 130-byte buffer available for use
by the other ECxxxx IBoxes using this specific ECOM100 module.
ECOM100 Config
ECOM100
ECOM100#
Slot
Status
Workspace
Msg Buffer (65 WORDs)
1
IB-710
K0
K1
V400
V401
V402-502
NOTE: An ECOM100 IBox instruction is used without a permissive contact. The top line will be identified in
BOLD italics, and the instruction name and ID will be in BOLD characters.
Rung 2: On the 2nd scan, read the Module Description of the ECOM100 and store it in
V3000 thru V3007 (16 characters). This text can be displayed by an HMI.
The ECRDDES is leading edge triggered, not power-flow driven (similar to a counter input
leg). The command to read the module description will be sent to the ECOM100 whenever
the power flow into the IBox goes from OFF to ON.
If successful, turn on C100. If there is a failure, turn on C101.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
ECOM100 Read Gateway Address (ECRDGWA) (IB-730)
230
240
250-1
260
DS5
Used
HPP
N/A
ECOM100 Read Gateway Address will read the four parts of the Gateway IP address and store
them in four consecutive V-memory locations in decimal format, on a leading edge transition
to the IBox.
The Workspace parameter is an internal, private register used by this IBox and MUST BE
UNIQUE in this one instruction and MUST NOT be used anywhere else in your program.
Either the Success or Error bit parameter will turn on once the command is complete.
In order for this ECOM100 IBox to function, you must turn ON dip switch 7 on the
ECOM100 circuit board.
ECRDGWA Parameters
• ECOM100#: this is a logical number
associated with this specific ECOM100
module in the specified slot. All other
ECxxxx IBoxes that need to reference this
ECOM100 module must reference this
logical number.
• Workspace: specifies a V-memory location
that will be used by the instruction.
• Success: specifies a bit that will turn on once
the request is completed successfully.
• Error: specifies a bit that will turn on if the instruction is not completed successfully.
• Gateway IP Addr: specifies the starting address where the ECOM100’s Gateway Address will be
placed in 4 consecutive V-memory locations.
Parameter
DL205 Range
ECOM100# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K
Workspace ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V
Success ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B
Error ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B
Gateway IP Address (4 Words)⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V
K0-255
See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
See DL205 V-memory map
See DL205 V-memory map
See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-297
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-298
ECRDGWA Example
Rung 1: The ECOM100 Config IBox is responsible for coordination/interlocking of all
ECOM100 type IBoxes for one specific ECOM100 module. Tag the ECOM100 in slot 1 as
ECOM100# K0. All other ECxxxx IBoxes refer to this module # as K0. If you need to move
the module in the base to a different slot, then you only need to change this one IBox. V400 is
used as a global result status register for the other ECxxxx IBoxes using this specific ECOM100
module. V401 is used to coordinate/interlock the logic in all of the other ECxxxx IBoxes using
this specific ECOM100 module. V402-V502 is a common 130-byte buffer available for use
by the other ECxxxx IBoxes using this specific ECOM100 module.
ECOM100 Config
ECOM100
ECOM100#
Slot
Status
Workspace
Msg Buffer (65 WORDs)
1
IB-710
K0
K1
V400
V401
V402-502
NOTE: An ECOM100 IBox instruction is used without a permissive contact. The top line will be identified in
BOLD italics, and the instruction name and ID will be in BOLD characters.
Rung 2: On the second scan, read the Gateway Address of the ECOM100 and store it in V3000
thru V3003 (4 decimal numbers). The ECOM100’s Gateway Address could be displayed by
an HMI.
The ECRDGWA is leading edge triggered, not power-flow driven (similar to a counter input
leg). The command to read the Gateway Address will be sent to the ECOM100 whenever the
power flow into the IBox goes from OFF to ON.
If successful, turn on C100. If there is a failure, turn on C101.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
ECOM100 Read IP Address (ECRDIP) (IB-722)
230
240
250-1
260
DS5
Used
HPP
N/A
ECOM100 Read IP Address will read the four parts of the IP address and store them in four
consecutive V-memory locations in decimal format, on a leading edge transition to the IBox.
The Workspace parameter is an internal, private register used by this IBox and MUST BE
UNIQUE in this one instruction and MUST NOT be used anywhere else in your program.
Either the Success or Error bit parameter will turn on once the command is complete.
In order for this ECOM100 IBox to function, you must turn ON dip switch 7 on the
ECOM100 circuit board.
ECRDIP Parameters
• ECOM100#: this is a logical number
associated with this specific ECOM100
module in the specified slot. All other
ECxxxx IBoxes that need to reference this
ECOM100 module must reference this
logical number
• Workspace: specifies a V-memory location
that will be used by the instruction
• Success: specifies a bit that will turn on once
the request is completed successfully
• Error: specifies a bit that will turn on if the instruction is not completed successfully
• IP Address: specifies the starting address where the ECOM100’s IP Address will be placed in four
consecutive V-memory locations
Parameter
DL205 Range
ECOM100# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K
Workspace ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V
Success ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B
Error ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B
IP Address (4 Words)⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V
K0-255
See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
See DL205 V-memory map
See DL205 V-memory map
See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-299
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-300
ECRDIP Example
Rung 1: The ECOM100 Config IBox is responsible for coordination/interlocking of all
ECOM100 type IBoxes for one specific ECOM100 module. Tag the ECOM100 in slot 1 as
ECOM100# K0. All other ECxxxx IBoxes refer to this module # as K0. If you need to move
the module in the base to a different slot, then you only need to change this one IBox. V400 is
used as a global result status register for the other ECxxxx IBoxes using this specific ECOM100
module. V401 is used to coordinate/interlock the logic in all of the other ECxxxx IBoxes using
this specific ECOM100 module. V402-V502 is a common 130-byte buffer available for use
by the other ECxxxx IBoxes using this specific ECOM100 module.
ECOM100 Config
ECOM100
ECOM100#
Slot
Status
Workspace
Msg Buffer (65 WORDs)
1
IB-710
K0
K1
V400
V401
V402-502
NOTE: An ECOM100 IBox instruction is used without a permissive contact. The top line will be identified in
BOLD italics, and the instruction name and ID will be in BOLD characters.
Rung 2: On the second scan, read the IP Address of the ECOM100 and store it in V3000 thru
V3003 (four decimal numbers). The ECOM100’s IP Address could be displayed by an HMI.
The ECRDIP is leading edge triggered, not power-flow driven (similar to a counter input leg).
The command to read the IP Address will be sent to the ECOM100 whenever the power flow
into the IBox goes from OFF to ON.
If successful, turn on C100. If there is a failure, turn on C101.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
ECOM100 Read Module ID (ECRDMID) (IB-720)
240
250-1
260
230
DS5
Used
HPP
N/A
ECOM100 Read Module ID will read the binary (decimal) WORD sized Module ID on a
leading edge transition to the IBox.
The Workspace parameter is an internal, private register used by this IBox and MUST BE
UNIQUE in this one instruction and MUST NOT be used anywhere else in your program.
Either the Success or Error bit parameter will turn on once the command is complete.
In order for this ECOM100 IBox to function, you must turn ON dip switch 7 on the
ECOM100 circuit board.
ECRDMID Parameters
• ECOM100#: this is a logical number associated
with this specific ECOM100 module in the
specified slot. All other ECxxxx IBoxes that need
to reference this ECOM100 module must reference
this logical number
• Workspace: specifies a V-memory location that will
be used by the instruction
• Success: specifies a bit that will turn on once the
request is completed successfully
• Error: specifies a bit that will turn on if the
instruction is not completed successfully
• Module ID: specifies the location where the ECOM100’s Module ID (decimal) will be placed
Parameter
DL205 Range
ECOM100# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K
Workspace ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V
Success ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B
Error ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B
Module ID⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V
K0-255
See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
See DL205 V-memory map
See DL205 V-memory map
See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-301
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-302
ECRDMID Example
Rung 1: The ECOM100 Config IBox is responsible for coordination/interlocking of all
ECOM100 type IBoxes for one specific ECOM100 module. Tag the ECOM100 in slot 1 as
ECOM100# K0. All other ECxxxx IBoxes refer to this module # as K0. If you need to move
the module in the base to a different slot, then you only need to change this one IBox. V400 is
used as a global result status register for the other ECxxxx IBoxes using this specific ECOM100
module. V401 is used to coordinate/interlock the logic in all of the other ECxxxx IBoxes using
this specific ECOM100 module. V402-V502 is a common 130-byte buffer available for use
by the other ECxxxx IBoxes using this specific ECOM100 module.
ECOM100 Config
ECOM100
ECOM100#
Slot
Status
Workspace
Msg Buffer (65 WORDs)
1
IB-710
K0
K1
V400
V401
V402-502
NOTE: An ECOM100 IBox instruction is used without a permissive contact. The top line will be identified in
BOLD italics, and the instruction name and ID will be in BOLD characters.
Rung 2: On the second scan, read the Module ID of the ECOM100 and store it in V2000.
The ECRDMID is leading edge triggered, not power-flow driven (similar to a counter input
leg). The command to read the module ID will be sent to the ECOM100 whenever the power
flow into the IBox goes from OFF to ON.
If successful, turn on C100. If there is a failure, turn on C101.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
ECOM100 Read Module Name (ECRDNAM) (IB-724)
230
240
250-1
260
DS5
Used
HPP
N/A
ECOM100 Read Name will read the Module Name up to the number of specified characters
on a leading edge transition to the IBox.
The Workspace parameter is an internal, private register used by this IBox and MUST BE
UNIQUE in this one instruction and MUST NOT be used anywhere else in your program.
Either the Success or Error bit parameter will turn on once the command is complete.
In order for this ECOM100 IBox to function, you must turn ON dip switch 7 on the
ECOM100 circuit board.
ECRDNAM Parameters
• ECOM100#: this is a logical number associated
with this specific ECOM100 module in the specified
slot. All other ECxxxx IBoxes that need to reference
this ECOM100 module must reference this logical
number.
• Workspace: specifies a V-memory location that will
be used by the instruction.
• Success: specifies a bit that will turn on once the
request is completed successfully.
• Error: specifies a bit that will turn on if the instruction
is not completed successfully.
• Module Name: specifies the starting buffer location where the ECOM100’s Module Name will be
placed.
• Num Chars: specifies the number of characters (bytes) to read from the ECOM100’s Name field.
Parameter
DL205 Range
ECOM100# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K
Workspace ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V
Success ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B
Error ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B
Module Name ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V
Num Chars⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K
K0-255
See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
See DL205 V-memory map
See DL205 V-memory map
See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
K1-128
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-303
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-304
ECRDNAM Example
Rung 1: The ECOM100 Config IBox is responsible for coordination/interlocking of all
ECOM100 type IBoxes for one specific ECOM100 module. Tag the ECOM100 in slot 1 as
ECOM100# K0. All other ECxxxx IBoxes refer to this module # as K0. If you need to move
the module in the base to a different slot, then you only need to change this one IBox. V400 is
used as a global result status register for the other ECxxxx IBoxes using this specific ECOM100
module. V401 is used to coordinate/interlock the logic in all of the other ECxxxx IBoxes using
this specific ECOM100 module. V402-V502 is a common 130-byte buffer available for use
by the other ECxxxx IBoxes using this specific ECOM100 module.
ECOM100 Config
ECOM100
ECOM100#
Slot
Status
Workspace
Msg Buffer (65 WORDs)
1
IB-710
K0
K1
V400
V401
V402-502
NOTE: An ECOM100 IBox instruction is used without a permissive contact. The top line will be identified in
BOLD italics, and the instruction name and ID will be in BOLD characters.
Rung 2: On the second scan, read the Module Name of the ECOM100 and store it in V3000
thru V3003 (8 characters). This text can be displayed by an HMI.
The ECRDNAM is leading edge triggered, not power-flow driven (similar to a counter input
leg). The command to read the module name will be sent to the ECOM100 whenever the
power flow into the IBox goes from OFF to ON.
If successful, turn on C100. If there is a failure, turn on C101.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
ECOM100 Read Subnet Mask (ECRDSNM) (IB-732)
230
240
250-1
260
DS5
Used
HPP
N/A
ECOM100 Read Subnet Mask will read the four parts of the Subnet Mask and store them in
4 consecutive V-memory locations in decimal format, on a leading edge transition to the IBox.
The Workspace parameter is an internal, private register used by this IBox and MUST BE
UNIQUE in this one instruction and MUST NOT be used anywhere else in your program.
Either the Success or Error bit parameter will turn on once the command is complete.
In order for this ECOM100 IBox to function, you must turn ON dip switch 7 on the
ECOM100 circuit board.
ECRDSNM Parameters
• ECOM100#: this is a logical number associated
with this specific ECOM100 module in the
specified slot. All other ECxxxx IBoxes that
need to reference this ECOM100 module must
reference this logical number.
• Workspace: specifies a V-memory location that
will be used by the instruction.
• Success: specifies a bit that will turn on once the
request is completed successfully.
• Error: specifies a bit that will turn on if the
instruction is not completed successfully.
• Subnet Mask: specifies the starting address where the ECOM100’s Subnet Mask will be placed in
four consecutive V-memory locations.
Parameter
DL205 Range
ECOM100# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K
Workspace ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V
Success ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B
Error ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B
Subnet Mask (4 Words)⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V
K0-255
See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
See DL205 V-memory map
See DL205 V-memory map
See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-305
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-306
ECRDSNM Example
Rung 1: The ECOM100 Config IBox is responsible for coordination/interlocking of all
ECOM100 type IBoxes for one specific ECOM100 module. Tag the ECOM100 in slot 1 as
ECOM100# K0. All other ECxxxx IBoxes refer to this module # as K0. If you need to move
the module in the base to a different slot, then you only need to change this one IBox. V400 is
used as a global result status register for the other ECxxxx IBoxes using this specific ECOM100
module. V401 is used to coordinate/interlock the logic in all of the other ECxxxx IBoxes using
this specific ECOM100 module. V402-V502 is a common 130-byte buffer available for use
by the other ECxxxx IBoxes using this specific ECOM100 module.
ECOM100 Config
ECOM100
ECOM100#
Slot
Status
Workspace
Msg Buffer (65 WORDs)
1
IB-710
K0
K1
V400
V401
V402-502
NOTE: An ECOM100 IBox instruction is used without a permissive contact. The top line will be identified in
BOLD italics, and the instruction name and ID will be in BOLD characters.
Rung 2: On the second scan, read the Subnet Mask of the ECOM100 and store it in V3000
thru V3003 (4 decimal numbers). The ECOM100’s Subnet Mask could be displayed by an
HMI.
The ECRDSNM is leading edge triggered, not power-flow driven (similar to a counter input
leg). The command to read the Subnet Mask will be sent to the ECOM100 whenever the
power flow into the IBox goes from OFF to ON.
If successful, turn on C100. If there is a failure, turn on C101.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
ECOM100 Write Description (ECWRDES) (IB-727)
230
240
250-1
260
DS5
Used
HPP
N/A
1
2
3
Either the Success or Error bit parameter will turn on once the command is complete. If there
is an error, the Error Code parameter will report an ECOM100 error code (less than 100), or 4
a PLC logic error (greater than 1000).
The Description is stored in Flash-ROM in the ECOM100 and the execution of this IBox 5
will disable the ECOM100 module for at least a half second until it writes the Flash-ROM.
Therefore, it is HIGHLY RECOMMENDED that you only execute this IBox ONCE on the 6
second scan. Since it requires a LEADING edge to execute, use a NORMALLY CLOSED SP0
(STR NOT First Scan) to drive the power flow to the IBox.
7
In order for this ECOM100 IBox to function, you must turn ON dip switch 7 on the
ECOM100 circuit board.
8
ECWRDES Parameters
9
•
ECOM100#: this is a logical number
associated with this specific ECOM100
10
module in the specified slot. All other
ECxxxx IBoxes that need to reference this
ECOM100 module must reference this
11
logical number
• Workspace: specifies a V-memory location
12
that will be used by the instruction
• Success: specifies a bit that will turn on once
the request is completed successfully
13
• Error: specifies a bit that will turn on if the
instruction is not completed successfully
14
• Error Code: specifies the location where the Error Code will be written
• Description: specifies the Description that will be written to the module
A
Parameter
DL205 Range
B
C
D
ECOM100 Write Description will write the given Description to the ECOM100 module on
a leading edge transition to the IBox. If you use a dollar sign ($) or double quote (“), use the
PRINT/VPRINT escape sequence of TWO dollar signs ($$) for a single dollar sign or dollar
sign-double quote ($”) for a double quote character.
The Workspace parameter is an internal, private register used by this IBox and MUST BE
UNIQUE in this one instruction and MUST NOT be used anywhere else in your program.
ECOM100# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K
Workspace ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V
Success ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B
Error ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B
Error Code ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V
Description ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠
K0-255
See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
See DL205 V-memory map
See DL205 V-memory map
See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
Text
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5-307
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-308
ECWRDES Example
Rung 1: The ECOM100 Config IBox is responsible for coordination/interlocking of all
ECOM100 type IBoxes for one specific ECOM100 module. Tag the ECOM100 in slot 1 as
ECOM100# K0. All other ECxxxx IBoxes refer to this module # as K0. If you need to move
the module in the base to a different slot, then you only need to change this one IBox. V400 is
used as a global result status register for the other ECxxxx IBoxes using this specific ECOM100
module. V401 is used to coordinate/interlock the logic in all of the other ECxxxx IBoxes using
this specific ECOM100 module. V402-V502 is a common 130-byte buffer available for use
by the other ECxxxx IBoxes using this specific ECOM100 module.
ECOM100 Config
ECOM100
ECOM100#
Slot
Status
Workspace
Msg Buffer (65 WORDs)
1
IB-710
K0
K1
V400
V401
V402-502
NOTE: An ECOM100 IBox instruction is used without a permissive contact. The top line will be identified in
BOLD italics, and the instruction name and ID will be in BOLD characters.
Rung 2: On the second scan, set the Module Description of the ECOM100. Typically this
is done using NetEdit, but this IBox allows you to configure the module description in the
ECOM100 using your ladder program.
The ECWRDES is leading edge triggered, not power-flow driven (similar to a counter input
leg). The command to write the module description will be sent to the ECOM100 whenever
the power flow into the IBox goes from OFF to ON.
If successful, turn on C100. If there is a failure, turn on C101. If it fails, you can look at
V2000 for the specific error code.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
ECOM100 Write Gateway Address (ECWRGWA) (IB-731)
230
240
250-1
260
DS5
Used
HPP
N/A
ECOM100 Write Gateway Address will write the given Gateway IP Address to the ECOM100
module on a leading edge transition to the IBox. See also ECOM100 IP Setup (ECIPSUP)
IBox 717 to set up ALL of the TCP/IP parameters in a single instruction - IP Address, Subnet
Mask, and Gateway Address.
The Workspace parameter is an internal, private register used by this IBox and MUST BE
UNIQUE in this one instruction and MUST NOT be used anywhere else in your program.
Either the Success or Error bit parameter will turn on once the command is complete. If there
is an error, the Error Code parameter will report an ECOM100 error code (less than 100), or
a PLC logic error (greater than 1000).
The Gateway Address is stored in Flash-ROM in the ECOM100 and the execution of this IBox
will disable the ECOM100 module for at least a half second until it writes the Flash-ROM.
Therefore, it is HIGHLY RECOMMENDED that you only execute this IBox ONCE, on the
second scan. Since it requires a LEADING edge to execute, use a NORMALLY CLOSED SP0
(STR NOT First Scan) to drive the power flow to the IBox.
In order for this ECOM100 IBox to function, you must turn ON dip switch 7 on the
ECOM100 circuit board.
ECWRGWA Parameters
•
ECOM100#: this is a logical number
associated with this specific ECOM100
module in the specified slot. All other
ECxxxx IBoxes that need to reference this
ECOM100 module must reference this
logical number
• Workspace: specifies a V-memory location
that will be used by the instruction
• Success: specifies a bit that will turn on once
the request is completed successfully
• Error: specifies a bit that will turn on if the
instruction is not completed successfully
• Error Code: specifies the location where the Error Code will be written
• Gateway Address: specifies the Gateway IP Address that will be written to the module
Parameter
DL205 Range
ECOM100# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K
Workspace ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V
Success ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B
Error ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B
Error Code ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V
Gateway Address ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠
K0-255
See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
See DL205 V-memory map
See DL205 V-memory map
See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
0.0.0.1. to 255.255.255.254
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-309
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-310
ECWRGWA Example
Rung 1: The ECOM100 Config IBox is responsible for coordination/interlocking of all
ECOM100 type IBoxes for one specific ECOM100 module. Tag the ECOM100 in slot 1 as
ECOM100# K0. All other ECxxxx IBoxes refer to this module # as K0. If you need to move
the module in the base to a different slot, then you only need to change this one IBox. V400 is
used as a global result status register for the other ECxxxx IBoxes using this specific ECOM100
module. V401 is used to coordinate/interlock the logic in all of the other ECxxxx IBoxes using
this specific ECOM100 module. V402-V502 is a common 130-byte buffer available for use
by the other ECxxxx IBoxes using this specific ECOM100 module.
ECOM100 Config
ECOM100
ECOM100#
Slot
Status
Workspace
Msg Buffer (65 WORDs)
1
IB-710
K0
K1
V400
V401
V402-502
NOTE: An ECOM100 IBox instruction is used without a permissive contact. The top line will be identified in
BOLD italics, and the instruction name and ID will be in BOLD characters.
Rung 2: On the second scan, assign the Gateway Address of the ECOM100 to 192.168.0.1
The ECWRGWA is leading edge triggered, not power-flow driven (similar to a counter input
leg). The command to write the Gateway Address will be sent to the ECOM100 whenever the
power flow into the IBox goes from OFF to ON.
If successful, turn on C100. If there is a failure, turn on C101. If it fails, you can look at
V2000 for the specific error code.
To configure all of the ECOM100 TCP/IP parameters in one IBox, see the ECOM100 IP
Setup (ECIPSUP) IBox.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
ECOM100 Write IP Address (ECWRIP) (IB-723)
240
250-1
260
230
DS5
Used
HPP
N/A
1
2
The Workspace parameter is an internal, private register used by this IBox and MUST BE
3
UNIQUE in this one instruction and MUST NOT be used anywhere else in your program.
Either the Success or Error bit parameter will turn on once the command is complete. If there
is an error, the Error Code parameter will report an ECOM100 error code (less than 100), or 4
a PLC logic error (greater than 1000).
5
The IP Address is stored in Flash-ROM in the ECOM100 and the execution of this IBox
will disable the ECOM100 module for at least a half second until it writes the Flash-ROM.
Therefore, it is HIGHLY RECOMMENDED that you only execute this IBox ONCE on the 6
second scan. Since it requires a LEADING edge to execute, use a NORMALLY CLOSED SP0
(STR NOT First Scan) to drive the power flow to the IBox.
7
In order for this ECOM100 IBox to function, you must turn ON dip switch 7 on the
ECOM100 circuit board.
8
9
ECWRIP Parameters
•
ECOM100#: this is a logical number
associated with this specific ECOM100
10
module in the specified slot. All other ECxxxx
IBoxes that need to reference this ECOM100
11
module must reference this logical number
• Workspace: specifies a V-memory location
that will be used by the instruction
12
• Success: specifies a bit that will turn on once
the request is completed successfully
13
• Error: specifies a bit that will turn on if the
instruction is not successfully completed
14
• Error Code: specifies the location where the
Error Code will be written
A
Parameter
DL205 Range
B
C
D
ECOM100 Write IP Address will write the given IP Address to the ECOM100 module on a
leading edge transition to the IBox. See also ECOM100 IP Setup (ECIPSUP) IBox 717 to
setup ALL of the TCP/IP parameters in a single instruction - IP Address, Subnet Mask, and
Gateway Address.
ECOM100# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K
Workspace ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V
Success ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B
Error ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B
Error Code ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V
IP Address ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠
K0-255
See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
See DL205 V-memory map
See DL205 V-memory map
See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
0.0.0.1. to 255.255.255.254
• IP Address: specifies the IP Address that will be written to the module
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5-311
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-312
ECWRIP Example
Rung 1: The ECOM100 Config IBox is responsible for coordination/interlocking of all
ECOM100 type IBoxes for one specific ECOM100 module. Tag the ECOM100 in slot 1 as
ECOM100# K0. All other ECxxxx IBoxes refer to this module # as K0. If you need to move
the module in the base to a different slot, then you only need to change this one IBox. V400 is
used as a global result status register for the other ECxxxx IBoxes using this specific ECOM100
module. V401 is used to coordinate/interlock the logic in all of the other ECxxxx IBoxes using
this specific ECOM100 module. V402-V502 is a common 130-byte buffer available for use
by the other ECxxxx IBoxes using this specific ECOM100 module.
ECOM100 Config
ECOM100
ECOM100#
Slot
Status
Workspace
Msg Buffer (65 WORDs)
1
IB-710
K0
K1
V400
V401
V402-502
NOTE: An ECOM100 IBox instruction is used without a permissive contact. The top line will be identified in
BOLD italics, and the instruction name and ID will be in BOLD characters.
Rung 2: On the second scan, assign the IP Address of the ECOM100 to 192.168.12.100
The ECWRIP is leading edge triggered, not power-flow driven (similar to a counter input leg).
The command to write the IP Address will be sent to the ECOM100 whenever the power flow
into the IBox goes from OFF to ON.
If successful, turn on C100. If there is a failure, turn on C101. If it fails, you can look at
V2000 for the specific error code.
To configure all of the ECOM100 TCP/IP parameters in one IBox, see the ECOM100 IP
Setup (ECIPSUP) IBox.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
ECOM100 Write Module ID (ECWRMID) (IB-721)
230
240
250-1
260
DS5
Used
HPP
N/A
1
2
The Workspace parameter is an internal, private register used by this IBox and MUST BE
3
UNIQUE in this one instruction and MUST NOT be used anywhere else in your program.
Either the Success or Error bit parameter will turn on once the command is complete. If there
is an error, the Error Code parameter will report an ECOM100 error code (less than 100), or 4
a PLC logic error (greater than 1000).
The Module ID is stored in Flash-ROM in the ECOM100 and the execution of this IBox 5
will disable the ECOM100 module for at least a half second until it writes the Flash-ROM.
Therefore, it is HIGHLY RECOMMENDED that you only execute this IBox ONCE on the 6
second scan. Since it requires a LEADING edge to execute, use a NORMALLY CLOSED SP0
(STR NOT First Scan) to drive the power flow to the IBox.
7
In order for this ECOM100 IBox to function, you must turn ON dip switch 7 on the
ECOM100 circuit board.
8
ECWRMID Parameters
9
• ECOM100#: this is a logical number associated
with this specific ECOM100 module in the
10
specified slot. All other ECxxxx IBoxes that
need to reference this ECOM100 module must
reference this logical number
11
• Workspace: specifies a V-memory location that
will be used by the instruction
12
• Success: specifies a bit that will turn on once the
request is completed successfully
13
• Error: specifies a bit that will turn on if the
instruction is not completed successfully
14
• Error Code: specifies the location where the
Error Code will be written
• Module ID: specifies the Module ID that will be written to the module
A
Parameter
DL205 Range
B
C
D
ECOM100 Write Module ID will write the given Module ID on a leading edge transition to
the IBox
If the Module ID is set in the hardware using the dipswitches, this IBox will fail and return
error code 1005 (decimal).
ECOM100# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K
Workspace ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V
Success ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B
Error ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B
Error Code ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V
Module ID ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠
K0-255
See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
See DL205 V-memory map
See DL205 V-memory map
See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
K0-65535
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5-313
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-314
ECWRMID Example
Rung 1: The ECOM100 Config IBox is responsible for coordination/interlocking of all
ECOM100 type IBoxes for one specific ECOM100 module. Tag the ECOM100 in slot 1 as
ECOM100# K0. All other ECxxxx IBoxes refer to this module # as K0. If you need to move
the module in the base to a different slot, then you only need to change this one IBox. V400 is
used as a global result status register for the other ECxxxx IBoxes using this specific ECOM100
module. V401 is used to coordinate/interlock the logic in all of the other ECxxxx IBoxes using
this specific ECOM100 module. V402-V502 is a common 130-byte buffer available for use
by the other ECxxxx IBoxes using this specific ECOM100 module.
ECOM100 Config
ECOM100
ECOM100#
Slot
Status
Workspace
Msg Buffer (65 WORDs)
1
IB-710
K0
K1
V400
V401
V402-502
NOTE: An ECOM100 IBox instruction is used without a permissive contact. The top line will be identified in
BOLD italics, and the instruction name and ID will be in BOLD characters.
Rung 2: On the second scan, set the Module ID of the ECOM100. Typically this is done
using NetEdit, but this IBox allows you to configure the module ID of the ECOM100 using
your ladder program.
The ECWRMID is leading edge triggered, not power-flow driven (similar to a counter input
leg). The command to write the module ID will be sent to the ECOM100 whenever the power
flow into the IBox goes from OFF to ON.
If successful, turn on C100. If there is a failure, turn on C101. If it fails, you can look at
V2000 for the specific error code.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
ECOM100 Write Name (ECWRNAM) (IB-725)
240
250-1
260
230
DS5
Used
HPP
N/A
ECOM100 Write Name will write the given Name to the ECOM100 module on a leading
edge transition to the IBox. If you use a dollar sign ($) or double quote (“), use the PRINT/
VPRINT escape sequence of TWO dollar signs ($$) for a single dollar sign or dollar signdouble quote ($”) for a double quote character.
The Workspace parameter is an internal, private register used by this IBox and MUST BE
UNIQUE in this one instruction and MUST NOT be used anywhere else in your program.
Either the Success or Error bit parameter will turn on once the command is complete. If there
is an error, the Error Code parameter will report an ECOM100 error code (less than 100), or
a PLC logic error (greater than 1000).
The Name is stored in Flash-ROM in the ECOM100 and the execution of this IBox will disable
the ECOM100 module for at least a half second until it writes the Flash-ROM. Therefore, it
is HIGHLY RECOMMENDED that you only execute this IBox ONCE on the second scan.
Since it requires a LEADING edge to execute, use a NORMALLY CLOSED SP0 (STR NOT
First Scan) to drive the power flow to the IBox.
In order for this ECOM100 IBox to function, you must turn ON dip switch 7 on the
ECOM100 circuit board.
ECWRNAM Parameters
•
ECOM100#: this is a logical number
associated with this specific ECOM100
module in the specified slot. All other ECxxxx
IBoxes that need to reference this ECOM100
module must reference this logical number.
• Workspace: specifies a V-memory location
that will be used by the instruction.
• Success: specifies a bit that will turn on once
the request is completed successfully.
• Error: specifies a bit that will turn on if the
instruction is not completed successfully.
• Error Code: specifies the location where the
Error Code will be written.
• Module Name: specifies the Name that will be written to the module.
Parameter
DL205 Range
ECOM100# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K
Workspace ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V
Success ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B
Error ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B
Error Code ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V
Module Name ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠
K0-255
See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
See DL205 V-memory map
See DL205 V-memory map
See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
Text
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-315
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-316
ECWRNAM Example
Rung 1: The ECOM100 Config IBox is responsible for coordination/interlocking of all
ECOM100 type IBoxes for one specific ECOM100 module. Tag the ECOM100 in slot 1 as
ECOM100# K0. All other ECxxxx IBoxes refer to this module # as K0. If you need to move
the module in the base to a different slot, then you only need to change this one IBox. V400 is
used as a global result status register for the other ECxxxx IBoxes using this specific ECOM100
module. V401 is used to coordinate/interlock the logic in all of the other ECxxxx IBoxes using
this specific ECOM100 module. V402-V502 is a common 130-byte buffer available for use
by the other ECxxxx IBoxes using this specific ECOM100 module.
ECOM100 Config
ECOM100
ECOM100#
Slot
Status
Workspace
Msg Buffer (65 WORDs)
1
IB-710
K0
K1
V400
V401
V402-502
NOTE: An ECOM100 IBox instruction is used without a permissive contact. The top line will be identified in
BOLD italics, and the instruction name and ID will be in BOLD characters.
Rung 2: On the second scan, set the Module Name of the ECOM100. Typically this is done
using NetEdit, but this IBox allows you to configure the module name of the ECOM100 using
your ladder program.
The ECWRNAM is leading edge triggered, not power-flow driven (similar to a counter input
leg). The command to write the module name will be sent to the ECOM100 whenever the
power flow into the IBox goes from OFF to ON.
If successful, turn on C100. If there is a failure, turn on C101. If it fails, you can look at
V2000 for the specific error code.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
ECOM100 Write Subnet Mask (ECWRSNM) (IB-733)
230
240
250-1
260
DS5
Used
HPP
N/A
1
2
The Workspace parameter is an internal, private register used by this IBox and MUST BE
3
UNIQUE in this one instruction and MUST NOT be used anywhere else in your program.
Either the Success or Error bit parameter will turn on once the command is complete. If there is
an error, the Error Code parameter will report an ECOM100 error code (less than 100), or a PLC 4
logic error (greater than 1000).
The Subnet Mask is stored in Flash-ROM in the ECOM100 and the execution of this IBox will 5
disable the ECOM100 module for at least a half second until it writes the Flash-ROM. Therefore,
it is HIGHLY RECOMMENDED that you only execute this IBox ONCE on the second scan. 6
Since it requires a LEADING edge to execute, use a NORMALLY CLOSED SP0 (STR NOT
First Scan) to drive the power flow to the IBox.
7
In order for this ECOM100 IBox to function, you must turn ON dip switch 7 on the ECOM100
circuit board.
8
9
ECWRSNM Parameters
• ECOM100#: this is a logical number associated
with this specific ECOM100 module in the
10
specified slot. All other ECxxxx IBoxes that
need to reference this ECOM100 module must
reference this logical number.
11
• Workspace: specifies a V-memory location that
will be used by the instruction.
12
• Success: specifies a bit that will turn on once the
request is completed successfully.
13
• Error: specifies a bit that will turn on if the
instruction is not completed successfully.
14
• Error Code: specifies the location where the
Error Code will be written.
• Subnet Mask: specifies the Subnet Mask that will be written to the module.
A
Parameter
DL205 Range
B
C
D
ECOM100 Write Subnet Mask will write the given Subnet Mask to the ECOM100 module on a
leading edge transition to the IBox. See also ECOM100 IP Setup (ECIPSUP) IBox 717 to set up
ALL of the TCP/IP parameters in a single instruction - IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Gateway
Address.
ECOM100# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K
Workspace ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V
Success ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B
Error ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B
Error Code ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V
Subnet Mask ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠
K0-255
See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
See DL205 V-memory map
See DL205 V-memory map
See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
Masked IP Address
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5-317
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-318
ECWRSNM Example
Rung 1: The ECOM100 Config IBox is responsible for coordination/interlocking of all
ECOM100 type IBoxes for one specific ECOM100 module. Tag the ECOM100 in slot 1 as
ECOM100# K0. All other ECxxxx IBoxes refer to this module # as K0. If you need to move
the module in the base to a different slot, then you only need to change this one IBox. V400 is
used as a global result status register for the other ECxxxx IBoxes using this specific ECOM100
module. V401 is used to coordinate/interlock the logic in all of the other ECxxxx IBoxes using
this specific ECOM100 module. V402-V502 is a common 130-byte buffer available for use
by the other ECxxxx IBoxes using this specific ECOM100 module.
ECOM100 Config
ECOM100
ECOM100#
Slot
Status
Workspace
Msg Buffer (65 WORDs)
1
IB-710
K0
K1
V400
V401
V402-502
NOTE: An ECOM100 IBox instruction is used without a permissive contact. The top line will be identified in
BOLD italics, and the instruction name and ID will be in BOLD characters.
Rung 2: On the second scan, assign the Subnet Mask of the ECOM100 to 255.255.0.0
The ECWRSNM is leading edge triggered, not power-flow driven (similar to a counter input
leg). The command to write the Subnet Mask will be sent to the ECOM100 whenever the
power flow into the IBox goes from OFF to ON.
If successful, turn on C100. If there is a failure, turn on C101. If it fails, you can look at
V2000 for the specific error code.
To configure all of the ECOM100 TCP/IP parameters in one IBox, see the ECOM100 IP
Setup (ECIPSUP) IBox.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
ECOM100 RX Network Read (ECRX) (IB-740)
230
240
250-1
260
DS5
Used
HPP
N/A
1
2
The Workspace parameter is an internal, private register used by this IBox and MUST BE 3
UNIQUE in this one instruction and MUST NOT be used anywhere else in your program.
Whenever this IBox has power, it will read element data from the specified slave into the given 4
destination V-memory buffer, giving other ECOM100 RX and ECOM100 WX IBoxes on that
5
ECOM100# network a chance to execute.
For example, if you wish to read and write data continuously from five different slaves, you can
have all of these ECRX and ECWX instructions in ONE RUNG driven by SP1 (Always On). 6
They will execute round-robin style, automatically!
7
ECRX Parameters
•
ECOM100#: this is a logical number
associated with this specific ECOM100
8
module in the specified slot. All other ECxxxx
IBoxes that need to reference this ECOM100
9
module must reference this logical number
• Workspace: specifies a V-memory location
that will be used by the instruction
10
• Slave ID: specifies the slave ECOM(100) PLC
that will be targeted by the ECRX instruction
11
• From Slave Element (Src): specifies the slave
address of the data to be read
12
• Number of Bytes: specifies the number of
bytes to read from the slave ECOM(100) PLC
• To Master Element (Dest): specifies the location where the slave data will be placed in the master 13
ECOM100 PLC
• Success: specifies a bit that will turn on once the request is completed successfully
14
• Error: specifies a bit that will turn on if the instruction is not completed successfully
A
Parameter
DL205 Range
B
C
D
ECOM100 RX Network Read performs the RX instruction with built-in interlocking with
all other ECOM100 RX (ECRX) and ECOM100 WX (ECWX) IBoxes in your program to
simplify communications networking. It will perform the RX on the specified ECOM100#’s
network, which corresponds to a specific unique ECOM100 Configuration (ECOM100) IBox
at the top of your program.
ECOM100# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K
Workspace ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V
Slave ID ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K
From Slave Element (Src) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠X,Y,C,S,T,CT,GX,GY,V
Number of Bytes ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K
To Master Element (Dest) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V
Success ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B
Error ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B
K0-255
See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
K0-90
See DL205 V-memory map
K1-128
See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
See DL205 V-memory map
See DL205 V-memory map
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5-319
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-320
ECRX Example
Rung 1: The ECOM100 Config IBox is responsible for coordination/interlocking of all
ECOM100 type IBoxes for one specific ECOM100 module. Tag the ECOM100 in slot 1 as
ECOM100# K0. All other ECxxxx IBoxes refer to this module # as K0. If you need to move
the module in the base to a different slot, then you only need to change this one IBox. V400 is
used as a global result status register for the other ECxxxx IBoxes using this specific ECOM100
module. V401 is used to coordinate/interlock the logic in all of the other ECxxxx IBoxes using
this specific ECOM100 module. V402-V502 is a common 130-byte buffer available for use
by the other ECxxxx IBoxes using this specific ECOM100 module.
ECOM100 Config
ECOM100
ECOM100#
Slot
Status
Workspace
Msg Buffer (65 WORDs)
1
IB-710
K0
K1
V400
V401
V402-502
(Example continued on next page)
NOTE: An ECOM100 IBox instruction is used without a permissive contact. The top line will be identified in
BOLD italics, and the instruction name and ID will be in BOLD characters.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
ECRX Example (cont’d)
Rung 2: Using ECOM100# K0, read X0-X7 from Slave K7 and write them to slave K5 as fast
as possible. Store them in this local PLC in C200-C207, and write them to C300-C307 in
slave K5.
Both the ECRX and ECWX work with the ECOM100 Config IBox to simplify all networking
by handling all of the interlocks and proper resource sharing. They also provide very simplified
error reporting. You no longer need to worry about any SP “busy bits” or “error bits,” or what
slot number a module is in, or have any counters or shift registers or any other interlocks for
resource management.
In this example, SP1 (always ON) is driving both the ECRX and ECWX IBoxes in the same
rung. On the scan that the Network Read completes, the Network Write will start that same
scan. As soon as the Network Write completes, any pending operations below it in the program
would get a turn. If there are no pending ECOM100 IBoxes below the ECWX, then the very
next scan the ECRX would start its request again.
Using the ECRX and ECWX for all of your ECOM100 network reads and writes is the fastest
the PLC can do networking. For local Serial Ports, DCM modules, or the original ECOM
modules, use the NETCFG and NETRX/NETWX IBoxes.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-321
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
ECOM100 WX Network Write(ECWX) (IB-741)
230
240
250-1
260
DS5
Used
HPP
N/A
5-322
ECOM100 WX Network Write performs the WX instruction with built-in interlocking with
all other ECOM100 RX (ECRX) and ECOM100 WX (ECWX) IBoxes in your program to
simplify communications networking. It will perform the WX on the specified ECOM100#’s
network, which corresponds to a specific unique ECOM100 Configuration (ECOM100) IBox
at the top of your program.
The Workspace parameter is an internal, private register used by this IBox and MUST BE
UNIQUE in this one instruction and MUST NOT be used anywhere else in your program.
Whenever this IBox has power, it will write data from the master’s V-memory buffer to
the specified slave starting with the given slave element, giving other ECOM100 RX and
ECOM100 WX IBoxes on that ECOM100# network a chance to execute.
For example, if you wish to read and write data continuously from five different slaves, you can
have all of these ECRX and ECWX instructions in ONE RUNG driven by SP1 (Always On).
They will execute round-robin style, automatically!
ECWX Parameters
• ECOM100#: this is a logical number associated
with this specific ECOM100 module in the
specified slot. All other ECxxxx IBoxes that
need to reference this ECOM100 module must
reference this logical number.
• Workspace: specifies a V-memory location that
will be used by the instruction.
• Slave ID: specifies the slave ECOM(100) PLC
that will be targeted by the ECWX instruction.
•
From Master Element (Src): specifies the
location in the master ECOM100 PLC where
the data will be sourced from.
• Number of Bytes: specifies the number of bytes to write to the slave ECOM(100) PLC.
• To Slave Element (Dest): specifies the slave address the data will be written to.
• Success: specifies a bit that will turn on once the request is completed successfully.
• Error: specifies a bit that will turn on if the instruction is not completed successfully.
Parameter
ECOM100# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K
Workspace ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V
Slave ID ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K
From Master Element (Src) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V
Number of Bytes ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K
To Slave Element (Dest) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠X,Y,C,S,T,CT,GX,GY,V
Success ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B
Error ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
DL205 Range
K0-255
See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
K0-90
See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
K1-128
See DL205 V-memory map
See DL205 V-memory map
See DL205 V-memory map
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
ECWX Example
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
NOTE: An ECOM100 IBox instruction is used without a permissive contact. The top line will be identified in 9
BOLD italics, and the instruction name and ID will be in BOLD characters.
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Rung 1: The ECOM100 Config IBox is responsible for coordination/interlocking of all
ECOM100 type IBoxes for one specific ECOM100 module. Tag the ECOM100 in slot 1 as
ECOM100# K0. All other ECxxxx IBoxes refer to this module number as K0. If you need to
move the module in the base to a different slot, then you only need to change this one IBox.
V400 is used as a global result status register for the other ECxxxx IBoxes using this specific
ECOM100 module. V401 is used to coordinate/interlock the logic in all of the other ECxxxx
IBoxes using this specific ECOM100 module. V402-V502 is a common 130-byte buffer
available for use by the other ECxxxx IBoxes using this specific ECOM100 module.
ECOM100 Config
1
ECOM100
ECOM100#
Slot
Status
Workspace
Msg Buffer (65 WORDs)
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
IB-710
K0
K1
V400
V401
V402-502
5-323
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-324
ECWX Example (cont’d)
Rung 2: Using ECOM100# K0, read X0-X7 from Slave K7 and write them to slave K5 as fast
as possible. Store them in this local PLC in C200-C207, and write them to C300-C307 in
slave K5.
Both the ECRX and ECWX work with the ECOM100 Config IBox to simplify all networking
by handling all of the interlocks and proper resource sharing. They also provide very simplified
error reporting. You no longer need to worry about any SP “busy bits” or “error bits,” or what
slot number a module is in, or have any counters or shift registers or any other interlocks for
resource management.
In this example, SP1 (always ON) is driving both the ECRX and ECWX IBoxes in the same
rung. On the scan that the Network Read completes, the Network Write will start that same
scan. As soon as the Network Write completes, any pending operations below it in the program
would get a turn. If there are no pending ECOM100 IBoxes below the ECWX, then the very
next scan the ECRX would start its request again.
Using the ECRX and ECWX for all of your ECOM100 network reads and writes is the fastest
the PLC can do networking. For local Serial Ports, DCM modules, or the original ECOM
modules, use the NETCFG and NETRX/NETWX IBoxes.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
NETCFG Network Configuration (NETCFG) (IB-700)
240
250-1
260
230
DS5
Used
HPP
N/A
1
2
You must have the Network Config instruction at the top of your ladder/stage program with
any other configuration IBoxes.
3
If you use more than one local serial port, DCM or ECOM in your PLC for RX/WX
Networking, you must have a different Network Config instruction and Network number for
EACH RX/WX network in your system that utilizes any NETRX/NETWX IBox instructions. 4
The second parameter “CPU Port or Slot” is the same value as in the high byte of the first
5
LD instruction if you were coding the RX or WX rung yourself. This value is CPU and port
specific. Use KF1 for local CPU serial port 2. Use K3 if a DCM or ECOM is located in slot
6
3 of a local 205 base.
The Workspace parameter is an internal, private register used by the Network Config IBox and
MUST BE UNIQUE in this one instruction and MUST NOT be used anywhere else in your 7
program.
8
NETCFG Parameters
• Network#: specifies a unique number for
each ECOM(100) or DCM network to use
9
•
CPU Port or Slot: specifies the CPU
port number or slot number of DCM/
10
ECOM(100) used
• Workspace: specifies a V-memory location
11
that will be used by the instruction
Parameter
DL205 Range
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Network Config defines all the common information necessary for performing RX/WX
Networking using the NETRX and NETWX IBox instructions via a local CPU serial port,
DCM or ECOM module.
Network# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K
CPU Port or Slot ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K
Workspace ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V
K0-255
K0-FF
See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5-325
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-326
NETCFG Example
The Network Configuration IBox coordinates all of the interaction with other Network
IBoxes (NETRX/NETWX). You must have a Network Configuration IBox for each serial
port network, DCM module network, or original ECOM module network in your system.
Configuration IBoxes must be at the top of your program and must execute every scan.
This IBox defines Network# K0 to be for the local CPU serial port #2 (KF1). For local CPU
serial ports or DCM/ECOM modules, use the same value you would use in the most significant
byte of the first LD instruction in a normal RX/WX rung to reference the port or module. Any
NETRX or NETWX IBoxes that need to reference this specific network would enter K0 for
their Network# parameter.
The Workspace register is used to maintain state information about the port or module, along
with proper sharing and interlocking with the other NETRX and NETWX IBoxes in the
program. This V-memory register must not be used anywhere else in the entire program.
NOTE: The Network Configuration IBox instruction is used without a permissive contact. The top line will be
identified in BOLD italics, and the instruction name and ID will be in BOLD characters.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
Network RX Read (NETRX) (IB-701)
230
240
250-1
260
DS5
Used
HPP
N/A
1
2
The Workspace parameter is an internal, private register used by this IBox and MUST BE 3
UNIQUE in this one instruction and MUST NOT be used anywhere else in your program.
Whenever this IBox has power, it will read element data from the specified slave into the given 4
destination V-memory buffer, giving other Network RX and Network WX IBoxes on that
5
Network number a chance to execute.
For example, if you wish to read and write data continuously from five different slaves, you can
have all of these NETRX and NETWX instructions in ONE RUNG driven by SP1 (Always 6
On). They will execute round-robin style, automatically!
7
NETRX Parameters
8
• Network#: specifies the (CPU ports, DCMs,
ECOMs) Network # defined by the NETCFG
instruction.
9
• Workspace: specifies a V-memory location that
will be used by the instruction.
10
• Slave ID: specifies the slave PLC that will be
targeted by the NETRX instruction.
11
• From Slave Element (Src): specifies the slave
address of the data to be read.
12
• Number of Bytes: specifies the number of bytes
to read from the slave device.
• To Master Element (Dest): specifies the location where the slave data will be placed in the master 13
PLC.
• Success: specifies a bit that will turn on once the request is completed successfully.
14
• Error: specifies a bit that will turn on if the instruction is not completed successfully.
A
Parameter
DL205 Range
B
C
D
Network RX Read performs the RX instruction with built-in interlocking with all other
Network RX (NETRX) and Network WX (NETWX) IBoxes in your program to simplify
communications networking. It will perform the RX on the specified Network number,
which corresponds to a specific unique Network Configuration (NETCFG) at the top of your
program.
Network# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K
Workspace ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V
Slave ID ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠K,V
From Slave Element (Src) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠X,Y,C,S,T,CT,GX,GY,V
Number of Bytes ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K
To Master Element (Dest) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V
Success ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B
Error ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B
K0-255
See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
K0-90
See DL205 V-memory map
K1-128
See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
See DL205 V-memory map
See DL205 V-memory map
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5-327
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-328
NETRX Example
Rung 1: The Network Configuration IBox coordinates all of the interaction with other
Network IBoxes (NETRX/NETWX). You must have a Network Configuration IBox for
each serial port network, DCM module network, or original ECOM module network in your
system. Configuration IBoxes must be at the top of your program and must execute every scan.
This IBox defines Network# K0 to be for the local CPU serial port #2 (KF1). For local CPU
serial ports or DCM/ECOM modules, use the same value you would use in the most significant
byte of the first LD instruction in a normal RX/WX rung to reference the port or module. Any
NETRX or NETWX IBoxes that need to reference this specific network would enter K0 for
their Network# parameter.
The Workspace register is used to maintain state information about the port or module, along
with proper sharing and interlocking with the other NETRX and NETWX IBoxes in the
program. This V-memory register must not be used anywhere else in the entire program.
(Example continued on next page)
NOTE: The Network Configuration IBox instruction is used without a permissive contact. The top line will be
identified in BOLD italics, and the instruction name and ID will be in BOLD characters.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
NETRX Example (cont’d)
Rung 2: Using Network# K0, read X0-X7 from Slave K7 and write them to slave K5 as fast as
possible. Store them in this local PLC in C200-C207, and write them to C300-C307 in slave
K5.
Both the NETRX and NETWX work with the Network Config IBox to simplify all networking
by handling all of the interlocks and proper resource sharing. They also provide very simplified
error reporting. You no longer need to worry about any SP “busy bits” or “error bits,” or what
port number or slot number a module is in, or have any counters or shift registers or any other
interlocks for resource management.
In this example, SP1 (always ON) is driving both the NETRX and NETWX IBoxes in the
same rung. On the scan that the Network Read completes, the Network Write will start that
same scan. As soon as the Network Write completes, any pending operations below it in the
program would get a turn. If there are no pending NETRX or NETWX IBoxes below this
IBox, then the very next scan the NETRX would start its request again.
Using the NETRX and NETWX for all of your serial port, DCM, or original ECOM network
reads and writes is the fastest the PLC can do networking. For ECOM100 modules, use the
ECOM100 and ECRX/ECWX IBoxes.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-329
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Network WX Write (NETWX) (IB-702)
230
240
250-1
260
DS5
Used
HPP
N/A
5-330
Network WX Write performs the WX instruction with built-in interlocking with all other
Network RX (NETRX) and Network WX (NETWX) IBoxes in your program to simplify
communications networking. It will perform the WX on the specified Network number,
which corresponds to a specific unique Network Configuration (NETCFG) at the top of your
program.
The Workspace parameter is an internal, private register used by this IBox and MUST BE
UNIQUE in this one instruction and MUST NOT be used anywhere else in your program.
Whenever this IBox has power, it will write data from the master’s V-memory buffer to the
specified slave starting with the given slave element, giving other Network RX and Network
WX IBoxes on that Network number a chance to execute.
For example, if you wish to read and write data continuously from five different slaves, you can
have all of these NETRX and NETWX instructions in ONE RUNG driven by SP1 (Always
On). They will execute round-robin style, automatically!
NETWX Parameters
• Network#: specifies the (CPU ports, DCMs,
ECOMs) Network # defined by the NETCFG
instruction
• Workspace: specifies a V-memory location that
will be used by the instruction
• Slave ID: specifies the slave PLC that will be
targeted by the NETWX instruction
•
From Master Element (Src): specifies the
location in the master PLC where the data will
be sourced
• Number of Bytes: specifies the number of bytes
to write to the slave PLC
• To Slave Element (Dest): specifies the slave address the data will be written to
• Success: specifies a bit that will turn on once the request is completed successfully
• Error: specifies a bit that will turn on if the instruction is not completed successfully
Parameter
Network# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K
Workspace ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V
Slave ID ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠K,V
From Master Element (Src) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V
Number of Bytes ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K
To Slave Element (Dest) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠X,Y,C,S,T,CT,GX,GY,V
Success ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B
Error ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
DL205 Range
K0-255
See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
K0-90
See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
K1-128
See DL205 V-memory map
See DL205 V-memory map
See DL205 V-memory map
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
NETWX Example
1
2
This IBox defines Network# K0 to be for the local CPU serial port #2 (KF1). For local CPU
serial ports or DCM/ECOM modules, use the same value you would use in the most significant 3
byte of the first LD instruction in a normal RX/WX rung to reference the port or module. Any
NETRX or NETWX IBoxes that need to reference this specific network would enter K0 for 4
their Network# parameter.
The Workspace register is used to maintain state information about the port or module, along 5
with proper sharing and interlocking with the other NETRX and NETWX IBoxes in the
program. This V-memory register must not be used anywhere else in the entire program.
6
7
8
9
10
NOTE: The Network Configuration IBox instruction is used without a permissive contact. The top line will be
identified in BOLD italics, and the instruction name and ID will be in BOLD characters.
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Rung 1: The Network Configuration IBox coordinates all of the interaction with other
Network IBoxes (NETRX/NETWX). You must have a Network Configuration IBox for
each serial port network, DCM module network, or original ECOM module network in your
system. Configuration IBoxes must be at the top of your program and must execute every scan.
(Example continued on next page)
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5-331
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-332
NETWX Example (cont’d)
Rung 2: Using Network# K0, read X0-X7 from Slave K7 and write them to slave K5 as fast as
possible. Store them in this local PLC in C200-C207, and write them to C300-C307 in slave
K5.
Both the NETRX and NETWX work with the Network Config IBox to simplify all networking
by handling all of the interlocks and proper resource sharing. They also provide very simplified
error reporting. You no longer need to worry about any SP “busy bits” or “error bits”, or what
port number or slot number a module is in, or have any counters or shift registers or any other
interlocks for resource management.
In this example, SP1 (always ON) is driving both the NETRX and NETWX IBoxes in the
same rung. On the scan that the Network Read completes, the Network Write will start that
same scan. As soon as the Network Write completes, any pending operations below it in the
program would get a turn. If there are no pending NETRX or NETWX IBoxes below this
IBox, then the very next scan the NETRX would start its request again.
Using the NETRX and NETWX for all of your serial port, DCM, or original ECOM network
reads and writes is the fastest the PLC can do networking. For ECOM100 modules, use the
ECOM100 and ECRX/ECWX IBoxes.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
CTRIO Configuration (CTRIO) (IB-1000)
230
240
250-1
260
DS5
Used
HPP
N/A
1
2
3
The Input/Output parameters for this
instruction can be copied directly from
4
the CTRIO Workbench configuration
for this CTRIO module. Since the
behavior is slightly different when the
5
CTRIO module is in an EBC Base via
an ERM, you must specify whether the
6
CTRIO module is in a local base or in an
EBC base.
7
You must have the CTRIO Config IBox at the top of your ladder/stage program along with
any other configuration IBoxes.
8
If you have more than one CTRIO in your PLC, you must have a different CTRIO Config
IBox for EACH CTRIO module in your system that utilizes any CTRIO IBox instructions.
9
Each CTRIO Config IBox must have a UNIQUE CTRIO# value. This is how the CTRIO
IBoxes differentiate between the different CTRIO modules in your system.
10
The Workspace parameter is an internal, private register used by the CTRIO Config IBox
and MUST BE UNIQUE in this one instruction and MUST NOT be used anywhere else in
11
your program.
CTRIO Parameters
12
• CTRIO#: specifies a specific CTRIO module based on a user defined number
• Slot: (local base): specifies which PLC slot is occupied by the module (always K0 for EBC base)
13
• Workspace: specifies a V-memory location that will be used by the instruction
• CTRIO Location: specifies where the module is located (PLC local base or ERM to EBC base)
14
• Input (local base): This needs to be set to the same V-memory register as is specified in CTRIO
Workbench as ‘Starting V address for inputs’ for this unique CTRIO.
A
• Output (local base): This needs to be set to the same V-memory register as is specified in CTRIO
Workbench as ‘Starting V address for outputs’ for this unique CTRIO.
• Word Input (EBC base): The starting input V-memory address as defined by the I/O configuration B
in the ERM Workbench
• Bit Input (EBC base): The starting input Bit address as defined by the I/O configuration in the
C
ERM Workbench
• Word Output (EBC base): The starting output V-memory address as defined by the I/O
D
configuration in the ERM Workbench
CTRIO Config defines all the common information for one specific CTRIO module which
is used by the other CTRIO IBox instructions (for example, CTRLDPR - CTRIO Load
Profile, CTREDRL - CTRIO Edit and
Reload Preset Table, CTRRTLM CTRIO Run to Limit Mode, ...).
CTRIO in Local Base
CTRIO in EBC Base
• Bit Output (EBC base): The starting output Bit address as defined by the I/O configuration in the
ERM Workbench
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5-333
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-334
Parameter
CTRIO# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K
Slot ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K
Workspace ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V
Input (Word, Bit) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,B
Output (Word, Bit) ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,B
DL205 Range
K0-255
K0-7
See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
CTRIO Example (local base)
Rung 1: This sets up the CTRIO module in slot 2 of the local base. Each CTRIO module in
the system will need a separate CTRIO Config IBox before any CTRxxxx IBoxes can be used.
The CTRIO has been configured to use V2000 through V2025 for its input data, and V2030
through V2061 for its output data.
CTRIO Example (EBC base)
Overview: ERM Workbench must first be used to assign memory addresses to the I/O modules
in the EBC base. Once the CTRIO module memory addresses are established using ERM
Workbench, they are used in CTRIO Workbench and in a CTRIO IBox instruction to
configure and define a specific CTRIO module. For this example, the CTRIO module uses
V2000 - V2017 for its Word Input data and B40416.0 - B40423.15 for its Bit Input data.
The module uses V2100 - V2123 for its Word Output data and B40515.0 - B40522.15 for
its Bit Output data. The starting addresses, V2000 and V40416 (for inputs) and V2100 and
V40515 (for outputs) are entered into CTRIO Workbench I/O Map to configure this specific
CTRIO module. These starting addresses are the memory locations used in the CTRIO IBox
instruction as the Word Input, Bit Input, Word Output and Bit Output addresses as shown
below. For more information on this topic, refer to the CTRIO User Manual “Program
Control” chapter.
NOTE: The CTRIO Configuration IBox instructions do not require a permissive contact. The top line will be
identified in BOLD italics, and the instruction name and ID will be in BOLD characters.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
CTRIO Add Entry to End of Preset Table (CTRADPT) (IB-1005)
230
240
250-1
260
DS5
Used
HPP
N/A
CTRIO Add Entry to End of Preset Table, on a leading edge transition to this IBox, will
append an entry to the end of a memory based Preset Table on a specific CTRIO Output
resource. This IBox will take more than one PLC scan to execute. Either the Success or Error
bit will turn on when the command is complete. If the Error Bit is on, you can use the CTRIO
Read Error Code (CTRRDER) IBox to get extended error information.
Entry Type:
K0: Set
K1: Reset
K2: Pulse On (uses Pulse Time)
K3: Pulse Off (uses Pulse Time)
K4: Toggle
K5: Reset Count
Note that the Pulse Time parameter is ignored by some Entry Types.
The Workspace register is for internal use by this IBox instruction and MUST NOT be used
anywhere else in your program.
CTRADPT Parameters
• CTRIO#: specifies a specific CTRIO module based on
a user-defined number (see CTRIO Config)
• Output#: specifies a CTRIO output to be used by the
instruction
• Entry Type: specifies the Entry Type to be added to
the end of a Preset Table
• Pulse Time: specifies a pulse time in msecs for the
Pulse On and Pulse Off Entry Types
• Preset Count: specifies an initial count value to begin
at after Reset
• Workspace: specifies a V-memory location that will be
used by the instruction
• Success: specifies a bit that will turn on once the instruction has completed successfully
• Error: specifies a bit that will turn on if the instruction does not complete successfully
Parameter
DL205 Range
CTRIO# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K
Output# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K
Entry Type ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,K
Pulse Time ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,K
Preset Count ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,K
Workspace ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V
Success ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B
Error ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B
K0-255
K0-3
K0-5; See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
K0-65535; See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
K0-2147434528; See DL205 V-memory map
See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
See DL205 V-memory map
See DL205 V-memory map
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-335
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
CTRADPT Example
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-336
Rung 1: This sets up the CTRIO module in slot 2 of the local base. Each CTRIO module in
the system will need a separate CTRIO Config IBox before any CTRxxxx IBoxes can be used.
The CTRIO has been configured to use V2000 through V2025 for its input data, and V2030
through V2061 for its output data.
NOTE: The CTRIO Configuration IBox instruction does not require a permissive contact. The top line will be
identified in BOLD italics, and the instruction name and ID will be in BOLD characters.
Rung 2: This rung is a sample method for enabling the CTRADPT command. A C-bit is used
to allow the programmer to control the command from Data View for testing purposes.
Turning on C0 will cause the CTRADPT instruction to add a new preset to the preset table for
output #0 on the CTRIO in slot 2. The new preset will be a command to RESET (entry type
K1=reset), pulse time is left at zero as the reset type does not use this, and the count at which
it will reset will be 20.
Operating procedure for this example code is to load the CTRADPT_ex1.cwb file to your
CTRIO, then enter the code shown here, change to RUN mode, enable output #0 by turning
on C2 in Data View, turn encoder on CTRIO to value above 10 and output #0 light will come
on and stay on for all counts past 10. Now reset the counter with C1, enable C0 to execute
CTRADPT command to add a reset for output #0 at a count of 20, turn on C2 to enable
output #0, then turn encoder to value of 10+ (output #0 should turn on) and then continue on
to count of 20+ (output #0 should turn off).
(Example continued on next page)
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
CTRADPT Example (cont’d)
Rung 3: This rung allows the programmer to reset the counter from the ladder logic.
Rung 4: This rung allows the operator to enable output #0 from the ladder code.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-337
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
CTRIO Clear Preset Table (CTRCLRT) (IB-1007)
230
240
250-1
260
DS5
Used
HPP
N/A
5-338
CTRIO Clear Preset Table will clear the RAM-based Preset Table on a leading edge transition
to this IBox. This IBox will take more than one PLC scan to execute. Either the Success or
Error bit will turn on when the command is complete. If the Error Bit is on, you can use the
CTRIO Read Error Code (CTRRDER) IBox to get extended error information.
The Workspace register is for internal use by this IBox instruction and MUST NOT be used
anywhere else in your program.
CTRCLRT Parameters
• CTRIO#: specifies a specific CTRIO module based
on a user-defined number (see CTRIO Config)
• Output#: specifies a CTRIO output to be used by
the instruction
• Workspace: specifies a V-memory location that will
be used by the instruction
• Success: specifies a bit that will turn on once the
instruction has completed successfully
•
Error: specifies a bit that will turn on if the
instruction does not complete successfully
Parameter
CTRIO# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K
Output# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K
Workspace ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V
Success ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B
Error ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
DL205 Range
K0-255
K0-3
See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
See DL205 V-memory map
See DL205 V-memory map
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
CTRCLRT Example
1
2
3
4
5
6
NOTE: The CTRIO Configuration IBox instruction does not require a permissive contact. The top line will be
identified in BOLD italics, and the instruction name and ID will be in BOLD characters.
7
Rung 2: This rung is a sample method for enabling the CTRCLRT command. A C-bit is used
8
to allow the programmer to control the command from Data View for testing purposes.
Turning on C0 will cause the CTRCLRT instruction to clear the preset table for output #0 on
9
the CTRIO in slot 2.
Operating procedure for this example code is to load the CTRCLRT_ex1.cwb file to your
CTRIO, then enter the code shown here, change to RUN mode, enable output #0 by turning 10
on C2 in Data View, turn encoder on CTRIO to value above 10 and output #0 light will come
on and stay on until a count of 20 is reached, where it will turn off. Now reset the counter with
C1, enable C0 to execute CTRCLRT command to clear the preset table, turn on C2 to enable 11
output #0, then turn encoder to value of 10+ (output #0 should NOT turn on).
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Rung 1: This sets up the CTRIO module in slot 2 of the local base. Each CTRIO module in
the system will need a separate CTRIO Config IBox before any CTRxxxx IBoxes can be used.
The CTRIO has been configured to use V2000 through V2025 for its input data, and V2030
through V2061 for its output data.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5-339
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-340
CTRCLRT Example (cont’d)
Rung 3: This rung allows the programmer to reset the counter from the ladder logic.
Rung 4: This rung allows the operator to enable output #0 from the ladder code.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
CTRIO Edit Preset Table Entry (CTREDPT) (IB-1003)
230
240
250-1
260
DS5
Used
HPP
N/A
1
2
This IBox will take more than one PLC scan to execute. Either the Success or Error bit will
turn on when the command is complete. If the Error Bit is on, you can use the CTRIO Read 3
Error Code (CTRRDER) IBox to get extended error information.
4
Entry Type:
K0: Set
5
K1: Reset
K2: Pulse On (uses Pulse Time)
6
K3: Pulse Off (uses Pulse Time)
K4: Toggle
7
K5: Reset Count
Note that the Pulse Time parameter is ignored by some Entry Types.
8
The Workspace register is for internal use by this IBox instruction and MUST NOT be used
anywhere else in your program.
9
10
CTREDPT Parameters
• CTRIO#: specifies a specific CTRIO module based
on a user defined number (see CTRIO Config
11
Ibox)
• Output#: specifies a CTRIO output to be used by
12
the instruction
• Table#: specifies the Table number of which an
13
Entry is to be edited
• Entry#: specifies the Entry location in the Preset
Table to be edited
14
• Entry Type: specifies the Entry Type to add during
the edit
A
• Pulse Time: specifies a pulse time in msecs for the
Pulse On and Pulse Off Entry Types
B
• Preset Count: specifies an initial count value to
begin at after Reset
C
• Workspace: specifies a V-memory location that will be used by the instruction
• Success: specifies a bit that will turn on once the instruction has successfully completed
D
• Error: specifies a bit that will turn on if the instruction does not complete successfully
CTRIO Edit Preset Table Entry, on a leading edge transition to this IBox, will edit a single
entry in a Preset Table on a specific CTRIO Output resource. This IBox is good if you are
editing more than one entry in a file at a time. If you wish to do just one edit and then reload
the table immediately, see the CTRIO Edit and Reload Preset Table Entry (CTREDRL) IBox.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5-341
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-342
Parameter
CTRIO# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K
Output# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K
Table# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,K
Entry# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,K
Entry Type ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,K
Pulse Time ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,K
Preset Count ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,K
Workspace ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V
Success ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B
Error ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B
DL205 Range
K0-255
K0-3
K0-255; See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
K0-255; See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
K0-5; See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
K0-65535; See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
K0-2147434528; See DL205 V-memory map
See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
See DL205 V-memory map
See DL205 V-memory map
CTREDPT Example
Rung 1: This sets up the CTRIO module in slot 2 of the local base. Each CTRIO module in
the system will need a separate CTRIO Config IBox before any CTRxxxx IBoxes can be used.
The CTRIO has been configured to use V2000 through V2025 for its input data, and V2030
through V2061 for its output data.
(Example continued on next page)
NOTE: The CTRIO Configuration IBox instruction does not require a permissive contact. The top line will be
identified in BOLD italics, and the instruction name and ID will be in BOLD characters.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
CTREDPT Example (cont’d)
Rung 2: This rung is a sample method for enabling the CTREDPT command. A C-bit is used
to allow the programmer to control the command from Data View for testing purposes.
Turning on C0 will cause the CTREDPT instruction to change the second preset from a reset
at a count of 20 to a reset at a count of 30 for output #0 on the CTRIO in slot 2.
Operating procedure for this example code is to load the CTREDPT_ex1.cwb file to your
CTRIO, then enter the code shown here, change to RUN mode, enable output #0 by turning
on C2 in Data View, turn encoder on CTRIO to value above 10 and output #0 light will come
on and stay on until a count of 20 is reached, where it will turn off. Now reset the counter
with C1, enable C0 to execute CTREDPT command to change the second preset, turn on C2
to enable output #0, then turn encoder to value of 10+ (output #0 should turn on) and then
continue past a count of 30 (output #0 should turn off).
Note that we must also reload the profile after changing the preset(s); this is why the CTRLDPR
command follows the CTREDPT command in this example.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-343
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-344
CTREDPT Example (cont’d)
Rung 3: This rung allows the programmer to reset the counter from the ladder logic.
Rung 4: This rung allows the operator to enable output #0 from the ladder code.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
CTRIO Edit Preset Table Entry and Reload (CTREDRL) (IB-1002)
230
240
250-1
260
DS5
HPP
Used
N/A
CTRIO Edit Preset Table Entry and Reload, on a leading edge transition to this IBox, will
perform this dual operation to a CTRIO Output resource in one CTRIO command. This
IBox will take more than one PLC scan to execute. Either the Success or Error bit will turn on
when the command is complete. If the Error Bit is on, you can use the CTRIO Read Error
Code (CTRRDER) IBox to get extended error information.
Entry Type:
K0: Set
K1: Reset
K2: Pulse On (uses Pulse Time)
K3: Pulse Off (uses Pulse Time)
K4: Toggle
K5: Reset Count
Note that the Pulse Time parameter is ignored by some Entry Types.
The Workspace register is for internal use by this IBox instruction and MUST NOT be used
anywhere else in your program.
CTREDRL Parameters
• CTRIO#: specifies a specific CTRIO module based on a
user defined number (see CTRIO Config Ibox)
• Output#: specifies a CTRIO output to be used by the
instruction
• Table#: specifies the Table number of which an Entry is
to be edited
• Entry#: specifies the Entry location in the Preset Table
to be edited
• Entry Type: specifies the Entry Type to add during the
edit
• Pulse Time: specifies a pulse time in msecs for the Pulse
On and Pulse Off Entry Types
• Preset Count: specifies an initial count value to begin at
after Reset
• Workspace: specifies a V-memory location that will be used by the instruction
• Success: specifies a bit that will turn on once the instruction has completed successfully
• Error: specifies a bit that will turn on if the instruction does not complete successfully
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-345
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-346
Parameter
CTRIO# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K
Output# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K
Table# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,K
Entry# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,K
Entry Type ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,K
Pulse Time ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,K
Preset Count ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,K
Workspace ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V
Success ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B
Error ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B
DL205 Range
K0-255
K0-3
K0-255; See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
K0-255; See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
K0-5; See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
K0-65535; See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
K0-2147434528; See DL205 V-memory map
See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
See DL205 V-memory map
See DL205 V-memory map
CTREDRL Example
Rung 1: This sets up the CTRIO module in slot 2 of the local base. Each CTRIO module in
the system will need a separate CTRIO Config IBox before any CTRxxxx IBoxes can be used.
The CTRIO has been configured to use V2000 through V2025 for its input data, and V2030
through V2061 for its output data.
(Example continued on next page)
NOTE: The CTRIO Configuration IBox instruction does not require a permissive contact. The top line will be
identified in BOLD italics, and the instruction name and ID will be in BOLD characters.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
CTREDRL Example (cont’d)
1
Turning on C0 will cause the CTREDRL instruction to change the second preset in file 1 from 2
a reset value of 20 to a reset value of 30.
Operating procedure for this example code is to load the CTREDRL_ex1.cwb file to your 3
CTRIO, then enter the code shown here, change to RUN mode, enable output #0 by turning
on C2 in Data View, turn encoder on CTRIO to value above 10 and output #0 light will come
on, continue to a count above 20 and the output #0 light will turn off. Now reset the counter 4
with C1, enable C0 to execute CTREDRL command to change the second preset count value
to 30, then turn encoder to value of 10+ (output #0 should turn on) and continue on to a value 5
of 30+ and the output #0 light will turn off.
Note that it is not necessary to reload this file separately, however, the command can only 6
change one value at a time.
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Rung 2: This rung is a sample method for enabling the CTREDRL command. A C-bit is used
to allow the programmer to control the command from Data View for testing purposes.
(Example continued on next page)
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5-347
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-348
CTREDRL Example (cont’d)
Rung 3: This rung allows the programmer to reset the counter from the ladder logic.
Rung 4: This rung allows the operator to enable output #0 from the ladder code.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
CTRIO Initialize Preset Table (CTRINPT) (IB-1004)
230
240
250-1
260
DS5
HPP
CTRIO Initialize Preset Table, on a leading edge transition to this IBox, will create a single
entry Preset Table in memory but not as a file, on a specific CTRIO Output resource. This
IBox will take more than one PLC scan to execute. Either the Success or Error bit will turn
on when the command is complete. If the Error Bit is on, you can use the CTRIO Read
Error Code (CTRRDER) IBox to get extended error information.
Entry Type:
K0: Set
Used
N/A
K1: Reset
K2: Pulse On (uses Pulse Time)
K3: Pulse Off (uses Pulse Time)
K4: Toggle
K5: Reset Count
Note that the Pulse Time parameter is ignored by some Entry Types.
The Workspace register is for internal use by this IBox instruction and MUST NOT be used
anywhere else in your program.
CTRINPT Parameters
• CTRIO#: specifies a specific CTRIO module based on
a user defined number (see CTRIO Config Ibox)
• Output#: specifies a CTRIO output to be used by the
instruction
• Entry Type: specifies the Entry Type to add during
the edit
• Pulse Time: specifies a pulse time in msecs for the Pulse
On and Pulse Off Entry Types
• Preset Count: specifies an initial count value to begin
at after Reset
• Workspace: specifies a V-memory location that will be
used by the instruction
• Success: specifies a bit that will turn on once the
instruction has completed successfully
• Error: specifies a bit that will turn on if the instruction does not complete successfully
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-349
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-350
Parameter
CTRIO# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K
Output# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K
Entry Type ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,K
Pulse Time ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,K
Preset Count ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,K
Workspace ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V
Success ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B
Error ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B
DL205 Range
K0-255
K0-3
K0-5; See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
K0-65535; See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
K0-2147434528; See DL205 V-memory map
See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
See DL205 V-memory map
See DL205 V-memory map
CTRINPT Example
Rung 1: This sets up the CTRIO module in slot 2 of the local base. Each CTRIO module in
the system will need a separate CTRIO Config IBox before any CTRxxxx IBoxes can be used.
The CTRIO has been configured to use V2000 through V2025 for its input data, and V2030
through V2061 for its output data.
(Example continued on next page)
NOTE: The CTRIO Configuration IBox instruction does not require a permissive contact. The top line will be
identified in BOLD italics, and the instruction name and ID will be in BOLD characters.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
CTRINPT Example (cont’d)
Rung 2: This rung is a sample method for enabling the CTRINPT command. A C-bit is used
to allow the programmer to control the command from Data View for testing purposes.
Turning on C0 will cause the CTRINPT instruction to create a single entry preset table, but
not as a file, and use it for the output #0. In this case the single preset will be set at a count of
15 for output #0.
Operating procedure for this example code is to load the CTRINPT_ex1.cwb file to your
CTRIO, then enter the code shown here, change to RUN mode, enable output #0 by turning
on C2 in Data View, turn encoder on CTRIO to value above 15 and output #0 light will not
come on. Now reset the counter with C1, enable C0 to execute CTRINPT command to create
a single preset table with a preset to set output#0 at a count of 15, then turn encoder to value
of 15+ (output #0 should turn on).
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-351
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-352
CTRINPT Example (cont’d)
Rung 3: This rung allows the programmer to reset the counter from the ladder logic.
Rung 4: This rung allows the operator to enable output #0 from the ladder code.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
CTRIO Initialize Preset Table on Reset (CTRINTR) (IB-1010)
230
240
250-1
260
DS5
Used
HPP
N/A
CTRIO Initialize Preset Table on Reset, on a leading edge transition to this IBox, will create
a single entry Preset Table in memory but not as a file, on a specific CTRIO Output resource.
This IBox will take more than 1 PLC scan to execute. Either the Success or Error bit will
turn on when the command is complete. If the Error Bit is on, you can use the CTRIO Read
Error Code (CTRRDER) IBox to get extended error information.
Entry Type:
K0: Set
K1: Reset
K2: Pulse On (uses Pulse Time)
K3: Pulse Off (uses Pulse Time)
K4: Toggle
K5: Reset Count
Note that the Pulse Time parameter is ignored by some Entry Types.
The Workspace register is for internal use by this IBox instruction and MUST NOT be used
anywhere else in your program.
CTRINTR Parameters
• CTRIO#: specifies a specific CTRIO module based
on a user defined number (see CTRIO Config Ibox)
• Output#: specifies a CTRIO output to be used by
the instruction
• Entry Type: specifies the Entry Type to add during
the edit
• Pulse Time: specifies a pulse time in msecs for the
Pulse On and Pulse Off Entry Types
• Preset Count: specifies an initial count value to begin
at after Reset
• Workspace: specifies a V-memory location that will
be used by the instruction
• Success: specifies a bit that will turn on once the
instruction has completed successfully
• Error: specifies a bit that will turn on if the instruction does not complete successfully
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-353
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-354
Parameter
CTRIO# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K
Output# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K
Entry Type ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,K
Pulse Time ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,K
Preset Count ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,K
Workspace ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V
Success ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B
Error ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B
DL205 Range
K0-255
K0-3
K0-5; See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
K0-65535; See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
K0-2147434528; See DL205 V-memory map
See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
See DL205 V-memory map
See DL205 V-memory map
CTRINTR Example
Rung 1: This sets up the CTRIO module in slot 2 of the local base. Each CTRIO module in
the system will need a separate CTRIO Config IBox before any CTRxxxx IBoxes can be used.
The CTRIO has been configured to use V2000 through V2025 for its input data, and V2030
through V2061 for its output data.
(Example continued on next page)
NOTE: The CTRIO Configuration IBox instruction does not require a permissive contact. The top line will be
identified in BOLD italics, and the instruction name and ID will be in BOLD characters.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
CTRINTR Example (cont’d)
Rung 2: This rung is a sample method for enabling the CTRINTR command. A C-bit is used
to allow the programmer to control the command from Data View for testing purposes.
Turning on C0 will cause the CTRINTR instruction to create a single entry preset table, but
not as a file, and use it for output #0, the new preset will be loaded when the current count is
reset. In this case the single preset will be a set at a count of 25 for output #0.
Operating procedure for this example code is to load the CTRINTR_ex1.cwb file to your
CTRIO, then enter the code shown here, change to RUN mode, enable output #0 by turning
on C2 in Data View, turn encoder on CTRIO to value above 10 and output #0 light will come
on. Now turn on C0 to execute the CTRINTR command, reset the counter with C1, then
turn encoder to value of 25+ (output #0 should turn on).
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-355
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-356
CTRINTR Example (cont’d)
Rung 3: This rung allows the programmer to reset the counter from the ladder logic.
Rung 4: This rung allows the operator to enable output #0 from the ladder code.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
CTRIO Load Profile (CTRLDPR) (IB-1001)
230
240
250-1
260
DS5
Used
HPP
N/A
CTRIO Load Profile loads a CTRIO Profile File to a CTRIO Output resource on a leading
edge transition to this IBox. This IBox will take more than one PLC scan to execute. Either
the Success or Error bit will turn on when the command is complete. If the Error Bit is on, you
can use the CTRIO Read Error Code (CTRRDER) IBox to get extended error information.
The Workspace register is for internal use by this IBox instruction and MUST NOT be used
anywhere else in your program.
CTRLDPR Parameters
• CTRIO#: specifies a specific CTRIO module
based on a user defined number (see CTRIO
Config)
• Output#: specifies a CTRIO output to be used
by the instruction
• File#: specifies a CTRIO profile File number to
be loaded
• Workspace: specifies a V-memory location that
will be used by the instruction
• Success: specifies a bit that will turn on once the
instruction has completed successfully
• Error: specifies a bit that will turn on if the
instruction does not complete successfully
Parameter
DL205 Range
CTRIO# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K
Output# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K
File# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,K
Workspace ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V
Success ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B
Error ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B
K0-255
K0-3
K0-255; See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
See DL205 V-memory map
See DL205 V-memory map
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-357
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-358
CTRLDPR Example
Rung 1: This sets up the CTRIO module in slot 2 of the local base. Each CTRIO module in
the system will need a separate CTRIO Config IBox before any CTRxxxx IBoxes can be used.
The CTRIO has been configured to use V2000 through V2025 for its input data, and V2030
through V2061 for its output data.
NOTE: The CTRIO Configuration IBox instruction does not require a permissive contact. The top line will be
identified in BOLD italics, and the instruction name and ID will be in BOLD characters.
Rung 2: This CTRIO Load Profile IBox will load File #1 into the working memory of Output
0 in CTRIO #1. This example program requires that you load CTRLDPR_IBox.cwb into
your Hx-CTRIO(2) module.
(Example continued on next page)
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
CTRLDPR Example (cont’d)
Rung 3: If the file is loaded successfully, set Profile_Loaded.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-359
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
CTRIO Read Error (CTRRDER) (IB-1014)
230
240
250-1
260
DS5
Used
HPP
N/A
5-360
CTRIO Read Error Code, on a leading edge transition to this IBox, will read the decimal
error code value (listed below) from the CTRIO module and place it in the specified Error
Code register. This instruction is not supported when the CTRIO is used in an ERM/EBC
configuration.
Since the Error Code in the CTRIO is only
maintained until another CTRIO command is
given, you must use this instruction immediately
after the CTRIO IBox that reports an error via its
Error bit parameter.
The Workspace register is for internal use by
this IBox instruction and MUST NOT be used
anywhere else in your program.
Error Codes:
0: No Error
100: Specified command code is unknown or unsupported
101: File number not found in the file system
102: File type is incorrect for specified output function
103: Profile type is unknown
104: Specified input is not configured as a limit on this output
105: Specified limit input edge is out of range
106: Specified input function is unconfigured or invalid
107: Specified input function number is out of range
108: Specified preset function is invalid
109: Preset table is full
110: Specified Table entry is out of range
111: Specified register number is out of range
112: Specified register is an unconfigured input or output
2001: Error reading Error Code - cannot access CTRIO via ERM
CTRRDER Parameters
• CTRIO#: specifies a specific CTRIO module based on a user-defined number (see CTRIO Config)
• Workspace: specifies a V-memory location that will be used by the instruction
• Error Code: specifies the location where the Error Code will be written
Parameter
CTRIO# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K
Workspace ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V
Error Code ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
DL205 Range
K0-255
See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
CTRRDER Example
1
2
3
4
5
6
NOTE: The CTRIO Configuration IBox instruction does not require a permissive contact. The top line will be 7
identified in BOLD italics, and the instruction name and ID will be in BOLD characters.
Rung 2: This CTRIO Read Error Code IBox will read the Extended Error information from 8
CTRIO #1. This example program requires that you load CTRRDER_IBox.cwb into your
Hx-CTRIO(2) module.
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Rung 1: This sets up the CTRIO module in slot 2 of the local base. Each CTRIO module in
the system will need a separate CTRIO Config IBox before any CTRxxxx IBoxes can be used.
The CTRIO has been configured to use V2000 through V2025 for its input data, and V2030
through V2061 for its output data.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5-361
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
CTRIO Run to Limit Mode (CTRRTLM) (IB-1011)
230
240
250-1
260
DS5
Used
HPP
N/A
CTRIO Run To Limit Mode, on a leading edge transition to this IBox, loads the Run to Limit
command and given parameters on a specific Output resource. The CTRIO’s Input(s) must
be configured as Limit(s) for this function to work.
Valid Hexadecimal Limit Values:
K00 - Rising Edge of Ch1/C
K10 - Falling Edge of Ch1/C
K20 - Both Edges of Ch1/C
K01 - Rising Edge of Ch1/D
K11 - Falling Edge of Ch1/D
K21 - Both Edges of Ch1/D
K02 - Rising Edge of Ch2/C
K12 - Falling Edge of Ch2/C
K22 - Both Edges of Ch2/C
K03 - Rising Edge of Ch2/D
K13 - Falling Edge of Ch2/D
K23 - Both Edges of Ch2/D
This IBox will take more than one PLC scan to execute. Either the Success or Error bit will
turn on when the command is complete. If the Error Bit is on, you can use the CTRIO Read
Error Code (CTRRDER) IBox to get extended error information.
The Workspace register is for internal use by this IBox instruction and MUST NOT be used
anywhere else in your program.
CTRRTLM Parameters
• CTRIO#: specifies a specific CTRIO module based on a
user-defined number (see CTRIO Config Ibox).
• Output#: specifies a CTRIO output to be used by the
instruction.
• Frequency: specifies the output pulse rate (H2-CTRIO:
20Hz - 25KHz / H2-CTRIO2: 20Hz - 250 KHz).
• Limit: the CTRIO’s Input(s) must be configured as
Limit(s) for this function to operate.
• Duty Cycle: specifies the % of on time versus off time.
This is a hex number. Default of 0 is 50%, also entering
50 will yield 50%. 50% duty cycle is defined as on half
the time and off half the time.
• Workspace: specifies a V-memory location that will be
used by the instruction.
• Success: specifies a bit that will turn on once the instruction has completed successfully.
• Error: specifies a bit that will turn on if the instruction does not complete successfully.
5-362
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
Parameter
DL205 Range
1
2
3
4
CTRRTLM Example
Rung 1: This sets up the CTRIO module in slot 2 of the local base. Each CTRIO module in 5
the system will need a separate CTRIO Config IBox before any CTRxxxx IBoxes can be used.
The CTRIO has been configured to use V2000 through V2025 for its input data, and V2030 6
through V2061 for its output data.
7
8
9
10
NOTE: The CTRIO Configuration IBox instruction does not require a permissive contact. The top line will be 11
identified in BOLD italics, and the instruction name and ID will be in BOLD characters.
12
Rung 2: This CTRIO Run To Limit Mode IBox sets up Output #2 in CTRIO #1 to output
pulses at a Frequency of 1000 Hz until Limit #0 comes on. This example program requires
13
that you load CTRRTLM_IBox.cwb into your Hx-CTRIO(2) module.
14
A
B
C
D
CTRIO# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K
Output# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K
Frequency ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,K
Limit ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,K
Duty Cycle ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,K
Workspace ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V
Success ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B
Error ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B
K0-255
K0-3
K20-20000; See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
K0-FF; See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
K0-99; See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
See DL205 V-memory map
See DL205 V-memory map
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5-363
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-364
CTRRTLM Example (cont’d)
Rung 3: If the Run To Limit Mode parameters are OK, set the Direction Bit and Enable the
output.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
CTRIO Run to Position Mode (CTRRTPM) (IB-1012)
230
240
250-1
260
DS5
Used
HPP
N/A
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
This IBox will take more than one PLC scan to execute. Either the Success or Error bit will
turn on when the command is complete. If the Error Bit is on, you can use the CTRIO Read
8
Error Code (CTRRDER) IBox to get extended error information.
The Workspace register is for internal use by this IBox instruction and MUST NOT be used
9
anywhere else in your program.
10
CTRRTPM Parameters
• CTRIO#: specifies a specific CTRIO module based on a
11
user-defined number (see CTRIO Config Ibox).
• Output#: specifies a CTRIO output to be used by the
12
instruction.
• Frequency: specifies the output pulse rate (H2-CTRIO:
20Hz - 25KHz / H2-CTRIO2: 20Hz - 250 KHz).
13
• Duty Cycle: specifies the % of on time versus off time.
This is a hex number. Default of 0 is 50%, also entering
14
50 will yield 50%. 50% duty cycle is defined as on half
the time and off half the time.
A
• Position: specifies the count value, as measured on the
encoder input, at which the output pulse train will be
turned off.
B
• Workspace: specifies a V-memory location that will be used by the instruction.
• Success: specifies a bit that will turn on once the instruction has completed successfully.
C
• Error: specifies a bit that will turn on if the instruction does not complete successfully.
D
CTRIO Run To Position Mode, on a leading edge transition to this IBox, loads the Run to
Position command and given parameters on a specific Output resource.
Valid Function Values are:
00: Less Than Ch1/Fn1
10: Greater Than Ch1/Fn1
01: Less Than Ch1/Fn2
11: Greater Than Ch1/Fn2
02: Less Than Ch2/Fn1
12: Greater Than Ch2/Fn1
03: Less Than Ch2/Fn2
13: Greater Than Ch2/Fn2
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5-365
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-366
Parameter
CTRIO# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K
Output# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K
Frequency ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,K
Duty Cycle ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,K
Position ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,K
Workspace ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V
Success ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B
Error ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B
DL205 Range
K0-255
K0-3
K20-20000; See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
K0-99; See DL205 V-memory map
K0-2147434528; See DL205 V-memory map
See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
See DL205 V-memory map
See DL205 V-memory map
CTRRTPM Example
Rung 1: This sets up the CTRIO module in slot 2 of the local base. Each CTRIO module in
the system will need a separate CTRIO Config IBox before any CTRxxxx IBoxes can be used.
The CTRIO has been configured to use V2000 through V2025 for its input data, and V2030
through V2061 for its output data.
NOTE: The CTRIO Configuration IBox instruction does not require a permissive contact. The top line will be
identified in BOLD italics, and the instruction name and ID will be in BOLD characters.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
CTRRTPM Example (cont’d)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Rung 3: If the Run To Position Mode parameters are OK, set the Direction Bit and Enable
the output.
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Rung 2: This CTRIO Run To Position Mode IBox sets up Output #0 in CTRIO
#1 to output pulses at a Frequency of 1000 Hz, use the ‘Greater than Ch1/Fn1’
comparison operator, until the input position of 1500 is reached. This example program
requires that you load CTRRTPM_IBox.cwb into your Hx-CTRIO(2) module.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5-367
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
CTRIO Velocity Mode (CTRVELO) (IB-1013)
230
240
250-1
260
DS5
Used
HPP
N/A
5-368
CTRIO Velocity Mode loads the Velocity command and given parameters on a specific Output
resource on a leading edge transition to this IBox.
This IBox will take more than one PLC scan to execute. Either the Success or Error bit will
turn on when the command is complete. If the Error Bit is on, you can use the CTRIO Read
Error Code (CTRRDER) IBox to get extended error information.
The Workspace register is for internal use by this IBox instruction and MUST NOT be used
anywhere else in your program.
CTRVELO Parameters
• CTRIO#: specifies a specific CTRIO module based on a
user defined number (see CTRIO Config Ibox)
• Output#: specifies a CTRIO output to be used by the
instruction
• Frequency: specifies the output pulse rate (H2-CTRIO:
20Hz - 25KHz / H2-CTRIO2: 20Hz - 250 KHz)
• Duty Cycle: specifies the % of on time versus off time.
This is a hex number. Default of 0 is 50%, also entering
50 will yield 50%. 50% duty cycle is defined as on half
the time and off half the time
• Step Count: This DWORD value specifies the number
of pulses to output. A Step Count value of -1 (or
0xFFFFFFFF) causes the CTRIO to output pulses continuously. Negative Step Count values must
be V-Memory references.
• Workspace: specifies a V-memory location that will be used by the instruction
• Success: specifies a bit that will turn on once the instruction has successfully completed
• Error: specifies a bit that will turn on if the instruction does not complete successfully
Parameter
CTRIO# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K
Output# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K
Frequency ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,K
Duty Cycle ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,K
Step Count ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠V,K
Workspace ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V
Success ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B
Error ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
DL205 Range
K0-255
K0-3
K20-20000; See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
K0-99; See DL205 V-memory map
K0-2147434528; See DL205 V-memory map
See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
See DL205 V-memory map
See DL205 V-memory map
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
CTRVELO Example
1
2
3
4
5
6
NOTE: The CTRIO Configuration IBox instruction does not require a permissive contact. The top line will be 7
identified in BOLD italics, and the instruction name and ID will be in BOLD characters.
Rung 2: This CTRIO Velocity Mode IBox sets up Output #0 in CTRIO #1 to output 10,000 8
pulses at a Frequency of 1000 Hz. This example program requires that you load CTRVELO_
IBox.cwb into your Hx-CTRIO(2) module.
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Rung 1: This sets up the CTRIO module in slot 2 of the local base. Each CTRIO module in
the system will need a separate CTRIO Config IBox before any CTRxxxx IBoxes can be used.
The CTRIO has been configured to use V2000 through V2025 for its input data, and V2030
through V2061 for its output data.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5-369
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-370
CTRVELO Example (cont’d)
Rung 3: If the Velocity Mode parameters are OK, set the Direction Bit and Enable the output.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
CTRIO Write File to ROM (CTRWFTR) (IB-1006)
230
240
250-1
260
DS5
Used
HPP
N/A
1
2
The Workspace register is for internal use by this IBox instruction and MUST NOT be used 3
anywhere else in your program.
4
CTRWFTR Parameters
5
• CTRIO#: specifies a specific CTRIO module based on
a user defined number (see CTRIO Config Ibox)
6
• Output#: specifies a CTRIO output to be used by the
instruction
7
• Workspace: specifies a V-memory location that will be
used by the instruction
• Success: specifies a bit that will turn on once the
8
instruction has completed successfully
• Error: specifies a bit that will turn on if the instruction
9
does not complete successfully
Parameter
DL205 Range
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
CTRIO Write File to ROM writes the runtime changes made to a loaded CTRIO Preset Table
back to Flash ROM on a leading edge transition to this IBox. This IBox will take more than
one PLC scan to execute. Either the Success or Error bit will turn on when the command is
complete. If the Error Bit is on, you can use the CTRIO Read Error Code (CTRRDER) IBox
to get extended error information.
CTRIO# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K
Output# ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ K
Workspace ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ V
Success ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B
Error ⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠⸠ X,Y,C,GX,GY,B
K0-255
K0-3
See DL205 V-memory map - Data Words
See DL205 V-memory map
See DL205 V-memory map
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
5-371
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-372
CTRWFTR Example
Rung 1: This sets up the CTRIO module in slot 2 of the local base. Each CTRIO module in
the system will need a separate CTRIO Config IBox before any CTRxxxx IBoxes can be used.
The CTRIO has been configured to use V2000 through V2025 for its input data, and V2030
through V2061 for its output data.
NOTE: The CTRIO Configuration IBox instruction does not require a permissive contact. The top line will be
identified in BOLD italics, and the instruction name and ID will be in BOLD characters.
Rung 2: This CTRIO Edit Preset Table Entry IBox will change Entry 0 in Table #2 to be a
RESET at Count 3456. This example program requires that you load CTRWFTR_IBox.cwb
into your Hx-CTRIO(2) module.
(Example continued on next page)
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
CTRWFTR Example (cont’d)
Rung 3: If the file is successfully editted, use a Write File To ROM IBox to save the edited table
back to the CTRIO’s ROM, thereby making the changes retentive.
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
5-373
Chapter 5: Standard RLL Instructions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
A
B
C
D
Notes:
5-374
DL205 User Manual, 4th Edition, Rev. D
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.4 Linearized : Yes Tagged PDF : Yes XMP Toolkit : Adobe XMP Core 5.6-c011 79.156289, 2014/03/31-23:39:12 Create Date : 2017:10:03 11:36:44-04:00 Metadata Date : 2017:10:03 11:41:15-04:00 Modify Date : 2017:10:03 11:41:15-04:00 Creator Tool : Adobe InDesign CC 2014 (Windows) Instance ID : uuid:b96dde8c-43c3-4f60-b111-265e7c90b0dc Original Document ID : xmp.did:4c5b7b81-c53d-e546-ae14-e379f1eb2a59 Document ID : xmp.id:91108d9a-d534-4b48-9951-ea4b08c95a1b Rendition Class : proof:pdf Derived From Instance ID : xmp.iid:6580ed7d-1b19-1e45-a6c6-c707232a0a13 Derived From Document ID : xmp.did:5c392a80-b7c6-5f4d-a2fd-8a3acc76fdb3 Derived From Original Document ID: xmp.did:4c5b7b81-c53d-e546-ae14-e379f1eb2a59 Derived From Rendition Class : default History Action : converted History Parameters : from application/x-indesign to application/pdf History Software Agent : Adobe InDesign CC 2014 (Windows) History Changed : / History When : 2017:10:03 11:36:44-04:00 Format : application/pdf Producer : Adobe PDF Library 11.0 Trapped : False Page Count : 598 Creator : Adobe InDesign CC 2014 (Windows)EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools